( BERKILiY LISRARY UNIVEMifr OF CALIFORNIA »r7CAf TDy mm. Comfoet's Geemais" Seeies. A GERMAN PRIMER. Introductory to the German Series. i2mo, Half Leather, 50 cents. A FIRST BOO^ IN GERMAN. To Precede the German Course. lamo. Half Leather, 60 cents. A FIRST GERMAN READER. To Succeed the First Book in German. i2mo, Cloth, 50 cents. A GERMAN COURSE. Adapted for Use in Colleges, Academies, and High- Schools. i2mo, Half Leather, $x 12. A TEACHER'S COMPANION to the German Course. i2mo, Cloth, 50 cts. A GERMAN READER. _ With Notes and Vocabulary.^ ;r2mo,. Half Leath- er, $1 12. * A MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION. lamo. Half Leather, 90 cents. . . . HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1869, by HARPER & BROTHERS, In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York. Add to Lib. GaFT <^-V>ClAju/ CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. INTRODUCTION iii PART FIRST. f PRACTICAL LESSONS. Leaaon I. Pronunciation U II. Pronunciation (continued) 14 III. Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Verb fctll, to be 17 IV. Present and Imperfect Tenses of Ilegular Verbs. The Definite Article. The Accusative Case 19 V. Present and Imperfect Tenses of l^dtlCIt/ to have. Accusative Case of Personal Pronouns 21 VI. Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Regular Verbs 24 VII. Prepositions with the Accusative Case. Gender of Nouns 26 VIIL The Genitive Case 28 IX. The Dative Case 31 X. Prepositions with the Accusative and Dative Cases 34 XI. Personal Pronouns. Forms of Address. Contractions of Prep- ositions with the Definite Article 36 XII. The Irregular Verb tocrbcn, . Interrogative Pronouns 289 6. Relative Pronouns 2"J0 7. Syntax of the Pronoun 291 6. The Verb 2'Jl 1. Conjugation 293 1. Moods 293 1. The Indicative Mood 293 2. The Subjunctive Mood 294 3. The Conditional Mood 29^ 4. The Imperative Mood 295 5. The Infinitive Mood 295 2. Participles 296 1. The Present Participle 297 2. The Perfect Participle 297 3. Tenses 298 4. The Passive Voice 299 2. Auxiliary Verbs 300 1. Conjugation of f^obtn, to have 301 2. Conjugation of fcin, to be 303 3. Conjugation of tDCtbCIl^^o become 305 3. Regular Verbs 307 Conjugation of the Regular Verb licbCll, to love 307 4. Irregular Verbs 310 1. Classified List of Irregular Verbs 311 2, Alphabetical List of Irregular Verbs 314 3. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb f^IagCtt^ to strike 822 4, Conjugation of the Irregular Verb fomtttcn^ to come 324 6. Compound Verbs 326 1. Separable Compound Verbs 326 Conjugation of the Separable Compound Verb annC^tltCtt^ to accept 328 2. Inseparable Compound Verbs 329 Conjugation of the Inseparable Compound Verb tlCrftC^CQ^ to understand. 332 3. Doubly-compounded Verbs..^ 334 6. Reflexive Verbs (Conjugation of) 835 7. Impersonal Verbs 337 8. The Passive Voice 338 9. The Potential Verbs 340 1. The Verb foUCU 840 2. The Verb ttoKcn 343 3. The Verb fbnncn 345 4. The Verb mOHCn 347 5. The Verb biir fen 349 6. The Verb miiffen 352 VIU CONTENTS OF THE GERMAN COURSE. No. PaK« 10. The Syntax of the Verb 354 1. Verbs governing the Accusative Case 354 2. Verbs governing the Genitive Case 35G 3. Verbs governing the Dative Case 358 7. The Adverb 3G0 1. Classification of Adverbs 360 2. Comparison of Adverbs 368 3. Syntax of Adverbs £69 8. Prepositions 372 1. Construction of Prepositions 373 2. Prepositions governing the Genitive Case 375 3. Prepositions governing the Dative Case 380 4. Prepositions governing the Accusative Case 385 5. Prepositions governing the Dative and Accusative Cases 388 6. Remarks upon Prepositions 392 9. Conjunctions 394 1. List of Conjunctions 395 2. Co-ordinative Conjunctions 396 3. Subordinative Conjunctions 397 4. Remarks upon Conjunctions o 398 10. The Interjection 404 11. Arrangement of Words 405 PART FOURTH. VOCABULARIES. L Personal Proper Names 415 IL Geographical Proper Names 417 III. Abbreviations 420 IV. German Moneys, Weights, and Measures 422 V. Classified List of Words 423 VI. German-English Vocabulary 436 VII. English-German Vocabulary 477 VIIL General Index 495 A GERMAN COURSE INTKODUCTION TO THE GERMAN COURSE. In preparing this German Course, it has been the aim of the author to incorporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as held by the best wri- ters upon philology, and the best practical educators in Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features of approved works for the study of mod- ern languages which, in Europe more especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features have also been introduced, which have been adopted with eminent success by the most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. Care has been taken to give due relative prominence to each of these tried and approved principles, and to mould them into a homogeneous system adapted to the wants of classes in the Colleges, Academies, and other high-schools of learning in America. Farther than this, but little claim is laid to originality, and none is laid to novelty of method. The German Course consists oifour jparta : Part First; containing practical lessons for learning to read, write, and speak the German Language. Part Second; containing familiar conversations in Ger- man and English, models of lettei-s, and forms of business, and selections from German literature. Part Third ; containing a compend of German Grammar, 4 INTKODUCTION. with an introduction upon the history, characteristics, and dialects of the language. Part Fourth; containing tables of German moneys, weights, and measures, abbreviations, personal and geo- graphical proper names, and German-Enghsh and English- German vocabularies. In Paet FmsT, the Lessons are arranged with reference to the rapid and natural learning of the German Language, both for the purpose of understanding and of using the lan- guage. A person thrown suddenly into a foreign country, the language of which he wishes to learn, finds himself embar- rassed at the outset by '^ye chief wants. He needs equally and immediately a "Vocabulary of words ^ a knowledge of grammatical forms ^ of syntactical laws, and of idiomatic construction, and of the laws of pronunciation. It is the aim, in the Lessons, to meet these wants, in such consecutiveness of order as to make the knowledge of the language a natural and symmetrical growth. The points of contact and resemblance of the German with the English language are presented first, more recon- dite, complicated, and divergent principles being reserved till later in the lessons. As far as possible, every word and grammatical princi- ple is presented in a living, natural sentence, before it is defined or explained. The concrete thus precedes the ab- stract. The practice precedes the theory. The principles of the language are presented to the mind of the learner as the result of his deductions from the examples, which are given before the rules. Many expert students will indeed detect the meaning of the new words and the new gram- matical laws without referring to the vocabulary or to the grammatical part of the lesson. The habits of scrutiny, of investigation, of independent analysis and classification, wliich are so strongly developed in translating works of the classic authors, and which are justly esteemed to be among INTRODUCnOI^ 5 the most important results of linguistic study, are by this means called into exercise at the very outset in the study of the language. Experience shows, also, that this method, while of great value to the earnest student, at the same time awakens interest and even enthusiasm in the compar- atively listless scholar. The Lessons are usually composed oiJivepaHs. In the first jpart a few sentences are given, with English transla- tion, and containing the new grammatical principles of the lesson ingrafted wpon words already known. The atten- tion is thus drawn at first solely to the new principle. Secondly^ the same principles are applied to sentences, without translation^ and containing new words. From similarity to corresponding Enghsh 'words, or from tlio connection of the sentence, the meaning of these new words will often be surmised. Thirdly, the Vocabulary contains the new words used in the lesson. These are not arranged alphabetically, but tliey are grouped according to their logical or grammatical similarity or contrast in meaning and use. Fourthly is given an explanation, with appropriate illus- tration, of the new grammatical principles involved in the preceding exercises. Advantage is taken, both in the para- digms in the lessons and in the formal grammar of Part Second, of heavier type and of spaced letters, to attract the eye to the variable jpart of the inflected word. Fifthly, the lesson closes with an exercise of English sentences containing the new words and principles, to be translated into German. The exercises in pronunciation contain short and simple sentences with many proper names. They contain no words the meaning of which is not readily discerned, nor do they involve more difficulties of pronunciation than occur in ordinary discourse. In the exercises of the subsequent lessons two things are avoided : on the one hand, platitudes and unmeaning or INTRODUOnON. unnatural sentences ; on the other hand, proverbs and sen- tences of recondite meaning. As far as possible, the sen- tences are such as would be used in ordinary conversation. Facts in German history, geography, biography, literature, and daily life are frequently introduced, thus assisting the student to feel that he is learning the German language. That the student may not unconsciously acquire the habit of translating every thing from English into German liter- ally, a few simple idiomatic expressions are introduced early into the lessons. But, in order not to bewilder the student, idioms are not given extensively until after the development of the laws of etymology and syntax. As it is desirable to introduce the difficulties to the lan- guage gradually, the use of the German Current Hand is re- served until the eye of the student shall have become famil- iar with the printed German type. The formation of deriv- ative and compound verbs, nouns, and adjectives is illustra' ted with much fullness. In the latter part of the Lessons, after the student has gathered gradually and progressively a partial knowledge of the grammatical principles of the language and has applied these principles to groups of words, he is referred to appropriate portions of the Com- pend of German Grammar in Part Third for the further elucidation of grammatical principles, and to the vocabula- ries in Part Fourth for new words that may occur in the Exercises. In order to familiarize the eye with different kinds of type, various sizes and styles of letters are intro- duced in the exercises of the last few lessons. That the student may also be finally thrown entirely upon his own resources, the English exercises, to be translated into Ger- man, are omitted from several of the last lessons. Part Second can be used by travelers and others, to whom a facility in conversing and in using forms of busi- ness is an immediate necessity. The references to the les- sons and the Grammar will assist in understanding the construction of the sentences. The conversations will also INTEODUCTION. 7 serve to initiate the student, who has passed through the lessons of Part First, more fully into the idiomatic spirit of tlie German language. The reading lessons will suffice to prepare the way for the Gentian Reader. Part Third contains a Compend of German Grammar, which is sufficiently comprehensive to meet all ordinary wants, even in reading classic authors. The Grammar is preceded by an Introduction^ which will serve to show the jiosition tlie German language occupies among its cognate languages, the chief epochs of its history, its most promi- nent characteristics, and, above all, to show that the Ger- man, like all other living languages, has been, and is yet subject to growth, development, and change. In the body of the Grammar itself are also introduced frequent notes upon the history and development of grammatical forms. To the earnest student, this philosophical and historical method of studying the German language will serve as a stepping-stone to higher studies in the broader fields of philology. Part Fourth contains, in addition to the usual vocabu- laries and index, a list of the most important abbreviations, and tables of the moneys, weights, and measures of the lead- ing states of Germany. In conclusion, the author commits the Gemnan Course to tlie American public, with the hope that it may contrib- ute something to the promotion of the study of this noble language, with its rich treasures in every branch of litera- ture, science, history, and criticism, and to the introduction of a more practical, and, at the same time, of a more truly philosophic method of studying the living languages into our Colleges and other schools of learning. Part JTirst; CONTAINING PRACTICAL LESSONS FOB LEARNING TO READ, WRITE, AND SPEAK THR GERMAN LANGUAGE. Xl LESSON I. PROJ E OJNCIATION. xercise I. German Roman English English Letters, Letters. Pronunciation. Translation, tarl, Karl, Karl, Charles. 'mitt, Yater, Fah'-ter, Father. ^car, Paar, Pahr, Pair. ^ctcr, Peter, Pay'-teVy Peter. ©c^cn, Gehen, Gay'-en, Go. S3cffer, Besser, Bes'-ser, Better. m% Elisa, Ay-lee'-zah, Elisa. SBcrlin, Berlin, Ber-leen', Berlin. 3ft, 1st, Ist, Is. 8inb, Sind, Zint, Are. mmt, Marie, Mah-ree\ Mary. ©lU^a, Gotha, Go'-ta\ Gotha. ^^olcn, Polen, Po'-len, Poland. @o^n, Sohn, Zone, Son. SDiorgcn, Morgen, Mor'-gen, Morning. Mubcng, Rubens, Roo'-hens, Rubens. SBrubcr, Bruder, Broo'-der, Brother. Sautter, Mutter, Moot'-ter, Mother. SBraun, Braun, Brown, Brown. 9i^ein, Rhein, Rhine, Rhine. 9)hi, Mai, My, May. (5uroIen^, 53re'==men, Sl'^t^en, 5l^4ri4a, 3n^=^bi.en, 3^ta'4i^en, (Spa^^^ni^en, ^or4anb, Un'^garn, 5>o'4en, Charles Brown is in Berlin Eliza Brown is in Gotha. Mary Ritter is in Vienna. William was in Baden. He is now in Frankfort. We were in Mannheim. My father and my brother are in Halle. Alexander von Humboldt. William von Humboldt. Peter Paul Rubens. Jacob and William Grimm. Mr. A. D. Lindemann. Mrs. von Wolfenstein. Mayence,Coblentz,Bremen. America, Europe. Asia, Africa, India. Italy, Spain. Holland, Hungary, Poland; LESSON II. PBONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). 1. The Um'-lauts i, '6f U, M are pronounced thus : 1* %tf a, called ah! -umlaut^ like t (see Less. L, 2, 2). 2. Dc, b, called oh' -umlaut^ has no equivalent in English. It is like the French eu. Its pro- nunciation may be approximated by producing a sound between that of oo in hoon^ and that of UT in hum : ^orfe, Exchange, f^on, leautiful. 3. Uc, it, called oo^-umlaut, has no equivalent in English. It is like the French u. The pronun- ciation of ©itb {south) may be approximated by PRONUNCIATION (CONTINUED). 15 placing the lips as if to whistle, and then trying to pronounce the word seed: !Duf ^^fcl^torf, 4. ^CU, au, has the same sound as CU (Less. I., 3, 3) i. e.^ that of oi in moist: Wd\x'At, inice. 2. There are two Guttural Sounds in the German that do not exist in the English language : 1. ^^, ^ (and g, when ending a syllable) after a, O, tt, or an, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of h in hope : {)od^ (Jiohh) high ; Xu^ {toohh), cloth; 2^ag {tahh), day ; mac^en {ma'-hhen), to make. 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla- ble d)Cn), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh in. shall : \^ {ih'%1; re^t {rehH\ right; ^int)'4en Qcind'- h'^^en), a child ; 3)Jun^jjd)en (rnmV-h^^en), Munich, Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, ^ sounds like ki (S^or, choir. Rem. 2. Also before ^ in the same radical syllable, like k: 3. The Consonantal Combinations fd^, tl^, ng : 1. (3^, like sh in, shall : ®^aU, sound; gif^, Jish. 2. i^f " t *' tone: Z^on, clay; Xi)o'^ma^, Thomas, 3. U%, '* ng'' sing: [in^'^cn, to sing; %ino^'^cx,^nger, 4. The Compound Consonants, or those joined together in printing, are H} (ch), rf (c/c), ft (st), § (sz), ^ (tz). 1. (f is pronounced like k in hake : ber ^ad'^tx, haker. 2. g " " " s *' less: (^t-.fa^\ a vessel, 3. ^ " " " ts " mits: M^Mic^, useful, 5. Doubled Letters are named separately in spelling : Rem. The vowels i and n are never doubled. aa . . ah-ah. ff, ff . . . . e/f-e/r. ee . ay-ay. ff, S3 . . . . ess-ess. 00 . . oh-oh. tt, tt . . . c tay-tay. 16 PRONTTNCIATION (CONTINUED"), 6. There are no silent letters in German, except : 1. j)f when used to indicate the long sound of a vowel ; 2 p " '' ^' "^ " '^ " '^ I* 3. tJOf after (occuring in a few proper names). 7. The Accent may be understood to be on the Jirst »2/llahle,when not otherwise marked in the vocabularies. 8. Capital Letters are used as initials to aU nouns, and to the pronouns ot^'^bam unb S^ag'^be^urg ftnb in ?)rcu'4en. 15. ''pxm'4^n, 33ai'^ern, ©ad^'^^n, ^a'^ ben, Dl'^ben^burg unb Wlcd'Am-Mxg, ftnb in 2)eutf^'4anb, Vocabulary. ^crrgfJ.,Mr.N. 5d;> I. SBann? when? grou9fi.,Mrs. N. (Sr, he. 3e^t, now. grau'4ctn3fl.,MissN. @ic, she. ^eu'4c, to-day. 2)a8 33uc^, the book. (S§, it. @c'*ftern, yesterday. „ Xu6:^, the cloth. mix, we. 35or'*gc4tern, day before „ 5Bet'4er, the weather. @ic, you. yesterday. I3ir4i3, cheap. @te, they. ^o(^, still, yet. %\)(n''tx, dear.* Sa, yes. @e^r, very. SIBarm, warm. ^etn, no. 2Bo? where? ^cig, hot. md}t, not. §ier, here. Mt, cold. Unb, and. 2)a, there. !JJot«'*bam (^seepage 419). 5luc^, also. 3n, in. 18 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF fcttl, TO BE. Grammatical. 1. The Present and Imperfect Tenses of the Irregulai Verb fcin, to he, are conjugated thus: Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. X&l Un, I am. i^ tear, I was. ©ie ftnb, you are. @ie tt)ar%cn, you were. cr ift, he is. cr loar, he was. tntr filtb, we are. h)tr tt)ar'*cn, we were. ©tc finb, you are. @ie t»ar'*cn, you were. fie (tub, they are. fie U)ar%en, they were. Rem. A single consonant between two vowels is pronounced with the last rowel. The vowels are divided in the paradigms so as to show the termina- tions, not as the words are pronounced. 2. Adverbs of time usually precede those of place: ©r tear gcflcrn l^ter, He was here yesterday. (Sr ift je^t in 33erlin, He is now in Berlin. 3. Wlien the adverb, adverbial expressions, or adjective precedes the verb, the nomm&tiYe follows the verb: ^ier i fi e 8 , Here it is. ^eute i ft e § febr !att, It is very cold to-day. ^att t ft e 8 t?cute, It is cold to-day. 3n S3erlin tt) a r e r nic^t, He was not in Berlin. Rem. This inversion is much more common in German than in English. It is especially appropriate where emphasis is placed on the adverb or adjective. Exercise 6. 1. Where is Mr. Hoffmann to-day ? 2. He is in Magde- biu-g to-day. 3. When was he in Berlin? 4. He was in Berlin day before yesterday. 5. Mrs. Weber and Miss We- ber are now in Franltfort. 6. Yesterday they were in Cologne. 7. The weather is cold to-day. 8. Yesterday it was very warm. 9. Where is the cloth ? 10. There it is. 11. Is the cloth cheap? 12. Yes, it is very cheap. 13. Is Mr, Meyerheim yet in Cologne ? 14. Yes, he is there yet. 15. Is Breslau in Prussia? 16. Yes, Breslau, and also Magdebm-g, Berlin, and Gottingen, are now in Prussia. 17. Mr. Dietz is now in Halle. 18. Mr. Weber is in Frank- fort. 19. Yesterday I was in Leipsic and in Halle. PEE8ENT AND IMPERFECT OF EEGULAB VERBS. 19 LESSO:^ IV. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. SSa^ faufen (5ie? What are you buying? 3c^ faufe $apter^, I am buying paper. Der (Sc^netber fauft Xud^, The tailor is buying cloth. 2Bo tDO^nen <2te je^t? Where do you reside now ? 2Btr wo^nen jc^t in 33erlin^ We reside now in Berlin. ^oren ®ie wa^ er fagt? Doyouhearwhathe is saying! 3c^ f)ore wa^ er fagt, I hear what he is saynig. 2Ba^ fauften ®ie? What were you buying? 3c^ faufte $apter^, I was buying paper. dx njo()nte in 2)^agbeburg, He resided in Magdeburg. „ „ „ „ Hewas residing in Magdeburg. ff „ „ „ He did reside in Magdeburg. ©icbcntc Wufgak, 1. 2Bo ttjo^nt §err ^djnmamxT 2. Qx n?o6nt jc^t in granf- furt. 3. (Sr n)oI)nte friif)er in .g)ette(berg. 4. 5Gol)nen (Sie in §a(Ic ? 5. ^^etn, mx wo^nen nic^t in ^alle, n?ir raol^nen in €eipjtg. 6. fauften (Bit ba^ Xu^? 7. S^^ein, tc^ faufte e^ nic^t; e^ n)ar fe^r t^euer unt> nid^t fc^r gut. 8. ^ort ber (5^it^ ler, voa^ ber Se()rer fagt? 9. 3a, ber (Sc^iiler ^ort tt>a^ ber €ef)rer fagt. 10. 2)er ^aufmann ^orte ma^ ber ^^neiber fagte. 11. Morten Bit n?a^ §einrid^ unb SBtl^elm fagtcn? 12, 3err ^raft befuc^te ^err^n ^lein, Mr. Kraft visited Mr. Klein. 4. The conjunction al§, when (called in English Gram- mar a conjunctive adverb), refers only to past time. It requires the verb following it to be placed at the end of the (subordinate) sentence: ^einrid; !aufte bag S3ud^, aU er in Henry bought the beck when he was §etbclbcrg mar, in Heidelberg. 5. The adverb tllt^t (not) is generally placed after the object of the verb : Sr bejuc^te un8 ni(^t. He did not visit us. Exercise 10. 1. Did the merchant sell the cloth ? 2. Yes, and the tailor bought it. 3. The baker buys flour and sells bi*ead. 4. Where did William Diez study when he was in Ger- many ? 5. He studied in Heidelberg and Berlin. 6. Did you call upon (visit) Mrs. Hoffmann when you were in Magdeburg? 7. Yes, we called upon her. 8. What are Henry and William looking for ? 9. They are looking for the book. 10. There it is. 11. The scholar is very indus- trious to-day. Sometimes he is not very industrious, and he does not study very much. 12. Is the weather very hot in Germany ? 13. No, the weather is rarely very hot iu Germany, but in Italy it is often very hot. 14. Berlin m very large and beautiful. 15. Who has the book and the paper ? 16. The scholar has them. 24 PEEFECT AJ^D PLUPEKFECT OF BEGULAiJ VEBBS. LESSOK YI. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. SBcr \)ai ba^ 53uc^ gefauft"? Who has bought the book? 3^ ^abe e^ gefauft', I have bought it. i>abtn ^k ge^orf , )x>a^ |)err Have you heard what Mr.Wt^ 2Beber gefagt' ^at ? ber said ? (^r ^at Qefagt^ t»af |)err Si^e^er He said that Mr. Meyer has ba^ ^au^ gefaufr ^at, bought the house. dx ^attt ben <3dbuler gelobf, He had praised the scholar. ^^ ^atte lange gereg^net, It had been raining long. 6Ifte Wufgak. 1, ^err ^(umenbacS^ \)attt ba^ $au^ fc^on gefauft. 2. Rax\ fagt, bag er bae 33uc^ in Setp^tg gefauft ^at 3. |)eute ^at e^ fe^r ftarf gebon'nert unb gereg'net 4. d^ ^at geftern fe^r ftarf gereg'net, al^ irir in $ot^bam maren, 5. ^err ^edfer ^atte ba^ ©emdPbe fc^on ijorgeftern iJoUen'tet 6. (Sr malte e^, al^ mir i^n befu^^tem 7. 3©a^ ma^t ba^ ^inb? 8. (S^ fpielt 9. (S^net'et e^ je^t ? 10. 5^etn, e^ ^at ^eute ml gef^nei'et, aber je^t fc^neiet e^ ni^t me^r. 11. $aben ®ie ba^ SD^ufe'um oft befud^t', al^ (5ie in Berlin maren? 12. 3a, n)tr befu^ten e^ fe^r oft. 13. d^ ift mxtiii^ fe^r grog unb fe^r f^on. 14. 1)a^ 9)^ufeum in 2)re^ben ift auc^ fe^r fc^on. 15. Der Siittntermann i)ant ba^ $au^ fc^on gebaut". 16. I)a^ ^au^ ift toirfli^ fe^r grog, abcr fef)r fc^on ift e^ ni^t* S3ait'*cn, to build. 3JJad;'*en, to make, to do. SDZal'^en, to paint. @^icr*eii, to play. SSottenb'^en, to complete. S3{itj'*cn, to lighten. S)on'ner=n, to thunder. ^CiQtUn, to hail. 9Jcg'*nen, to rain. @(^nei'*cn, to sno^r. Vocabulary. 5luc^ (adv.), also, too. 2)a^(r.-o/y'.), that. ?an'^C|e(rtr/i'.), for a long time. 3)?e^r(rtc/y.), more. @C^on (adv.), already. @tar!(ac?y.), hard, severely. 2Girr4trf) (ac?y.), really. ^Cr ^a'4tx, the painter. ^aS ®cmar*be, the picture. „ 2P'Juje'*um, the museum. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF REGULAR VERBS. 25 Grammatical. 1. The Perfect Participle of Regular Verba is formed by prefixing gc=, and adding -A to the stem : X\^' *t% to hve ; ^t4kh4' , loved. havC ^ttl, to build ; ^t»^aU't , built. 2. Verbs with inseparable prefixes (as be, ent, tx, gc, t>cr, Itx), and those ending in ^^iren, do not take gc= : b c ' f u d^ '* en, to visit. b c 4 u d^ * t', visited. |lu*bir%ctt,to study. jlu*bir*f, studied. 3. The Yerb has three principal parts, as in English : Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. 1 1 C b '* cn, to love. Iteb'stc, loved. gC = H e b '== t, loved. ^ a 'g c t * n, to hail. 1^ a 'g e I == tC, hailed. 0C * M 'S S I * t, hailed. bc*fud;'*cn, to visit, b e = f u (^ % tc, visited. b c ^ j u d^ '^ t visited, loer^f auf'^ctt, tosell. i3cr==!auf 'stc,sbld. to cr«!auf'*t,sold. ft u * b i r ':» Ctt, to study, fi u * b i r '* te, studied, jl u * b i r '-- 1, studied. 4. The Perfect and Pluperfect Tenses of Transitive and Impersonal Verbs are formed by the use of the auxiUary Jakn, to have, and the perfect participle. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect Tense. \^ l^obe gelicfit', I have loved, ©te ^ab'*cn „ you have loved. er l^ttt n he has loved, toir ^ab' =Ctt » we have loved, ©ie ^ab'*cn n you have loved. fic ^ab' *Ctt f; they have loved. Pluperfect Tense. \^ l^at'stC fiCliebt', I had loved. @tc ^at'*lcn » you had loved. er (;at'*te rr he had loved. tt>ir ^at'^tCtt It we had loved. @tC i)ot^bam. 4. 3Barum \)at ^crr €c^u(^ ba^ .^aii^ nic^t gefauft ? 5. SBec^en bc^ ?»rcifee. 6. !Da^ ^aue ift fe^r f^bn unb fe[)r bequem, aber bcr $rci^ ijl mel ju f)od^. 7. Da^ $au^ be^ ^errn ?>rofef[or 3}Jc\>erbcim ift au§erhalb ber ®tabt 8. 3)a^ $er^ ber 5D^Jutter ift i^oU Slnc^ft, n>cil ba^ ^inb fo franf x% 9. Da(J 3)ac^ be^ ^aufc^ ij^ fc()r fteiL 10. Die ©efc^ic^te ber ®tabt ift fe^r intcreffant^ 11. 1)tx Xl)urm be^ Dome^ in SD'iagbeburg ift febr \)o6) unb fe^r im^ pofant. 12. jDer Xf)urm be^ Dome^ in 3Bien ift auc^ fc^r l)oc^ unb fef)r f^on. 13. SBeffen ^u^ ^at ©eorg? 14. Sr l)at ^einrid^^ 53uc^. 15. ^at{)arina ^at Tlaxitn^ ^uc^. 16. J)er !eef)rer ^at be^ (Sc^iiler^ ^uc^ (or ba(^ 33u^ be^ (Bd^iilere). Vocabulary. !ter 2)oftor, —6, the Doctor. „ ^rofef for, — S, the Professor. „ 2)om, — e«, the cathedral. „ ^ricg, — c«, the war. „ ^reiS, — c8, the price. „ @turm, — C8, the storm. „ 2^^urm, — eg, the tower, spire. ^ic 2tngft, — , the anxiety. „ greubc, — , the joy. „ ©cfa^r', — , the danger. ,; ®cf(^id^'tc, — , the history. „ @^itjc , — , the point. ^ttS "Dac^, — c«, the roof. »/ ^^^^ — (cn8), the heart. 5lnftatt, instead of. %u^zx{)alh, outside of, without. 3nnerf»alb, inside of, within. SSci^renb, during. SSegcn, on account of. ©eroabr' , aware. SSoU, fuU. SSequem', convenient. 3!ni|)ofant', imposing. 3ntere[fant', interesting. ^ranf, sick. SSarum'? why? SScit, because. 2)o(^, still, however. Grammatical 1. The Genitive Case is used ^vith the prepositions anflatt flufer^db, inner{)alb, njci^renb, roegen, etc. 3ln[tatt beS ^aufmanncS, Instead of the merchant. 2. The Genitive Case is used without a jpreposition : 1. Instead of the English Possessive: 2)a8 53u(!(^ bcS Se^rcrS. The book of the tcachw. MASCULINE. Nom, Gen. NEUTER. iVbm. Gen. 30 THE GENITIVE CASE. 2. After some adjectives, as : getoa^r, tooll, tnitbe, etc. : (Sr tft t)C^ ®d>tDa^enS milbe, He is tired of the chattering. 3. In most cases where the relation is expressed in English by the prep« osition o/, the Genitive is used in Gennan without a preposition, especially where limitation is indicated : 2)te ©efc^ic^te bc^ ^riegeS, The histoiy of the war. 3. As to the form of the Genitive Case : 1. 'With feminine nouns it is the same as that of the nominative. 2. With masculine or neuter nouns, usually C^, ^, til, or n is added to the nominative. 3. TIk Genitive of the definite article (bcr, btc, ba«) is !>C^, tlCr, M* FEMININE. Nom. Gen. S)icgrau, 2)er grau. „ ®tabt, „ err*n, ©olbat'seil. jDat. bcm^ater, |)crr*n, @oIbat'*cn» ^cc. bcnSJatcr, ©crrsn, ©olbat'^Ctt. bc^ 2i5etter.g« bent ihJctter. bo«f isOJetter. i2e;«. 2. Feminine nouns are unchanged in the singular. Rem. 3. The C is often dropped from the termination of many nouns that have C^ and t in the genitive and dative. 3. The English Cases are rendered in German thus : 1. The Nominative by the J^ominative in German. 2. The Possessive by the Genitive in German. 3. The Objective by the Gen,, Dat., and Ace. in Germ. 4. Among the idiomatic uses of the Dative Case, the fol- lowing may be noticed : 1. Adjectives /o//o?f7 the noun they govern in the dative : 2)a'8 33u^ tft bent ®d;ttlcr nii^lit^, The book is useful to the scholar. 2. @e0Cnitbcr may precede, though it usually /o//ows the noun: 2)er ^irc^c gcgenilber, or gegeniibcr ber ^rd^e, Opposite the church. 3. With two personal nouns the accusative precedes the dative case; a personal noun precedes one referring to a thing, whatever the case of either may be : (gr ^at ben ^nttbcn bem Tlakx gefdjicft, He sent the boy to the painter. (gr fc^icfte htm. WlaltX baS S3u^, He sent the book to the painter. 4. 9ltt^ ^flUfC means towards home,- ju ^dUfe means at home. 6. „^err SBeber ift aitd 33erIin'V means that Berlin is or was Mr. We- ber's permanent residence or his native place. 6. 9lat^ indicates motion to a place ; JU, motion to a person, (gr fii^rte un8 noc^ bem 3J2ufeum, He conducted us to the museum. (Sr fil^rte unS ju bem 3Jialer^ He conducted us to the painter. 5. The Dative of tocr (who) is tocm (to whom, etc.). Exercise 18. 1. To whom does the house belong? 2. It belongs to Mr. Schumann. 3. Did the boy hear what the soldier said ? 4. Wliat did the merchant send to tlie tailor ? 5. He sent the cloth to the tailor. 6. The professor gave the boy the pencil. 7. The coat belongs to the soldier. 8. The book is B2 34 PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE Aim DATIVE. very injurious to the child. 9. The child is following hia father to the citj. 10. Mr. Riegel has sent the book to Professor Kraus, 11. The book belongs to Mr. Riegel. 12. The news was very agreeable to the soldier. 13. Mr. Anerbach is from Magdeburg. 14. The church is just opposite to the house of Mr. Dietrich. 15. The painter showed Mr. Krumm the painting. 16. The child is very unlike the father. 17. To-day the newspaper is very inter- esting. 18. The teacher presented the book to the scholar. 19. The boy was playing with the dog. LESSON X PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE AND DATITB CASES. 'I)a^ 33uc^ ift auf tern Xif^c, The book is on the table, ^einric^ legte ee auf ben Xifc^, Henry laid it on the table. 3)er 8tu^( ift »or t>em £)fen, The chair is before the stove. (Ex ftellte i\)n t>or ben Dfen, He put it before the stove. Da^ 33uc^ ift neben bem fa^The book is close by the pux% paper. dr legte e^ neben ba^ papier', He laid it close by the paper. Xtx 58rief ift in bem 53uc^e, The letter is in the book. 3c^ legte i^n in bae 53uc^, I laid it in the book. D^eun^e^nte ^ufgabe. 1, QrX ^dngte ba^ ©emdlce iiber ben Xifc^. 2. 2^ fc^icfte ben 53rief iiber Hamburg nad) %mt'xifa, 3. 2)a^ 2)orf x^ ^wU fd^en bem SBalbe unb bem 33erge. 4. 2)er 53letfttft ift ^mifc^en bem 53u(^e unb bem ^)apter. 5. ^einrid^ legte ben 33leiftift jroi^ fi^en ba^ ^ud^ unb ba^ papier. 6. 2)er ^unb ift in bem (3ax^ ttn. 7. Da^ 55oot if! unter ber Sriicfe. 8. 2)er Sleiftift ifl unter bem ^ud^e. 9. 2Ber ^at i^n unter ba^ ^uc^ gelegt? 10. C>err 5Ke^er ^at bem SD^aler gefagt, bag er ben 53rief uber 33re^ men gefc^icft i)at 11. 2Bir ^aben ba6 (^emdlre an tie Sanb ge^angt. (f^ wax auf bem ^eten, 12. ^err 2}?e5er l)at une »ott PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE. 85 ter ^trd^c na^ ter 33i6liot^e! gefit^rt. 13. 5tar( bat tad 53uc^ lancjc cjefud)!. 14. ^cutc ^J^orgen Ijabc id) ten 53ricf unt) tae 5i3uc^ tern ^crru ?>rofcf[or ^urdfbart gefd)icft. 15. ^o wo^ut er '< 16. (^r «?ol)nt in \icipjicj. 17. Da^ ^oot ijl an tern Ufcn 18. 3c^ f^tit^e ta^ (S5emdlt»c noc^ nid)t an tie Sant» gcjjdngt 19. Die Sampe ifl auf tern 2:if^e. Vocabulary. ^er SSricf, — c8, the letter. „ SBobcn, — 8, the floor. „ ©artcil, — S, the garden. ,, Of en, — 8, the stove. „ ®tul;(, — eOi, the chair. „ jlijd^, — e^, the tahle. ^iC Syrilrfc, — , the bridge. „ SBaiit, — , the wall. „ Jvim^c, — , the lump. 2)a^ 53oot, — ce, the boat. „ Ufer, — «, the shore. « IHd^t, — CS, the caudle. 3ln, on, to, at. ^uf, upon, on. Winter, behind. 3n, in, into. 9icbcn, near, close by. Uebcr, above, by way ofl Untcr, under, below. 3>or, before. 3tvtfcf;en, between, ^ailgcn, to hang {active). Vcgcn, to lay. ©tcUcn, to place, to put. Grammatical. 1. The nine prepositlo7is an, auf, \)\ntcx, in, ncbcn, iibcr, unter, »or, jnnfc^cn, govern the Accusative Case when ^notion towards the object they govern is exj^ressed. They govern the Dative Case when rest or motion within specified limits is expressed: Sr Icf^tc ba6 33ud^ auf ben 2;ifc^, He laid the book on the table. 2)aS 5Bud? i|t auf bent Xift^c, The book is on the table. 2, The correct use of prepositions is one of the most difficult things to bb Required iu learning any foreign language. This is owing largely to the fact that there are so many idiomatic e.rpres.i)nti fruf)er in granffurt an ber Dbcr. Grammatical. 1. The Personal Pronouns are declined thus: -.:^=z^ ^i^ FIRST 1 'ERSON. SECOND PERSON. Singular. Singular. Norn. t(5, I. btt, thou. (@te, you.) Gen. mcincr f of rae, eic* beiner , of thee, etc. (3^rcr, of you, etc.) Dat. mir, to me, etc.* btr, to thee, etc. (3^nen, to you, etc.) Ace. vax^f me. m^ thee. (etc, you.) PI ural. Plural. Norn. »Dir, we. il)r, you. (@ie, you.) Gen. m\tXf of us, e^c* cncr, of you, efc. (3^rcr, ofyou, e/c.) Dat. un^, to us, etc. tVi^f to you, ea<. i^m, to him. i^r, to her. i^im, to it. I^ncn, to them. Ace. i^n, him. fte, her. C«, it. fie, them. * For the use of the cases, see Lessons VII., VIII., and IX. 38 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 2. The forms of address in German differ from those in the English : 1. In ordinary discourse the form of the third per- son plural is used instead of the regular forms of the second person of both numbers. When thus used the pronoun begins with a capital letter. 2. Besides using bit in addressing Deity, the regu- lar forms \^Vi and i!^r are employed in speaking to near relatives or very dear friends, and also in speaking to servants and often to children. Rem. This use of the form of the third person plm^al for the second person of both numbers has been constantly increasing since its first introduction at the beginning of the eighteenth century. 3. In the Pres. and Imperf. Tenses of Regular Verbs : 1. The second pers. sing, adds to the stemsft or 't\U 2. The " " plur. " " " '' -4 or =et Sing, bu 1 1 e b '*ft, thou lovest ; bu 1 1 e B '*tcft, thou didst love. Plur. t^r U e b ' 4, you love ; t^r I i e b '4ei, you did love. Rem. 1. When the stem ends in b, t (or gn), =Cft and sCt must be added: Sing, bu tt) a r t * eft, thou waitest ; bu h) a r t * etCft, thou didst wait. Plur. t^r tr) a r t = ti, you wait ; x^xxoaxi^ titi, you did wait. Rem. 2. The present indicative of fcin has t)U !&ift, and \^X fCtb* The present indicative of IjatlCll has bU ijiaft, and tl)r l^atlt* 4. The following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable and are sometimes necessary: \.WithDat. Sing, bcmt 2.WithDat Sing. 3. With. Ace. Neut. has : am for an bem. Feminine bCJ t anS for an bas. ^cim " Mbem. m for 3U ber. a«f« " aufba«. ^tntetm *' ^tntcr bem. burd)g " burd>bas. im "in bem. fitrg " fiir bag. Jinterui " unter bem. inS " in bag. t)om " i)on bem. um§ " um baS. 5Um " 3U bem. i^ranlfurt am Ttain (an bem 'Main), Frankfort-on-the-Maine. (Sr ift tm ^aufe (in bem §aufe), He is in the house. (Sr fommt Uom 3JJufenm (t)on bem 9Jluf.), He comes from the Museum. S)aS SSuA ift fiirg tinb (fiir bag tinb), The book is for the child. (Sr Qti)t inS §aug (in bag §aug). He goes into the house. THE IKKEGULAR VEEB ttCtbeit, TO BECOME. 39 Exercise 22. 1. Charles, hast thou not had the lead-pencil? 2. 1 put it into the book. 3. What art thou looking for? 4. 1 am look- ing for the pencil. 5. What are you looking for? 6. We are looking for the book. 7. Hast thou been to get (^olen) the bread ? 8. 1 got it this morning. 9. Where wast thou? 10. 1 was in the garden. 11. Did you {(Bk) buy the paint- ing? 12. No, I did not buy it. 13. When did you (©tc) send the letter to Professor Hoffmann ? 14. 1 sent the let- ter to him yesterday. 15. The letter is in the book. 16. The church is not far (n)eit) from the Museum. LESSON XII. THE IRREGULAR VERB tOCtbCIt/ TO BECOME. FUTURE TENSES. Da$ ^Better wirb fait, The weather becomes cold. ©ie n)ert»en reic^, They are becoming rich. & tt)urt>e fe{)r \)t\^, It became very hot. @6 mxt> halt) regnen, It will soon rain. (Sie merben in 53erlin^ wol^nen, They will reside in Berlin. !Der Tlakx it)irb ba^ ^tmaVU The painter will probably wa^rfc^ein^lic^ iibermorgen have finished the paint- »oUen^bet ^aben, ing day after to-morrow. J)rchnb5toan5tgftc ^ufpk* 1. ^eutc rntrb e^ gemig' fe()r f)eig fein. 2. 2)a^ 33ud^ mxt) (angweilig. 3. ©egen ^.benb n^urbe ba^ ^Better fait, nag unb fe^r unangene^m. 4. ^Der ^aufmann ttjurbe fe^r rei^. 5. ©^ anrb f^mitl. 6. d^ tt>irb TOal)rfc^einlt(^ »or ^benb rcc^ncn. 7. 9J^orgen tt)irb ber Makx ba^ (^emdlbe gan^ c^emtf »ollcnbct ba^ ben. 8. Der Xtfc^ler tt)irb btc ^ommo'be morgcn repari'ren. 9. 3)cr S3auer anrb ba^ ^om ijerfau'fen. 10. T)cx SSater wirb ba^ ^inb lobcn, meil e^ fleigig ifl unb well c^ bie 5lufi^abe fo fd)nell ^oUenbet l)at. 11. ^tnk 5lbenb (this evening) n?irb 2©ill)elm 8d)rober ben Dircftor H^ 9)^ufcum^ bcfu^en. 12. 9)^orgen ^^benb (to-morrow evening) n)crben mx ben ^errn 40 THE IRREGULAR VERB toCtbClt, TO BECOME. ^)rofeffor (Siebert m^ SBien befuc&en* 13* 2Ba^renb ber ^a^t xmxU e^ jiemlic^ fait, aber je^t ift ba^ ^Better warm unb ange^ nebm» 14. T)n ^mht mxt) bie Seftion" balb gelernt ^abtn. 15* 2Bir werben ba^ $au^ ni^t faufen. 16* d^ \)ai gebon'nert; e^ tpirb balb regnen. Vocabulary. ^cr Slrjt, — e§, the physician. M 33oucr, — 8, the peasant. „ SSibliot^efar', — §, the librarian. „ 2)tref'tor, —8, the Director. „ 2;i[ct>ter, — 8, the cabinet-maker. „ SBeijen, —8, the wheat. „ §»oggen, — g, the rye. ^te ^ommo'be, — , the bureau. ^00 ^orn, — e8, the grain. S3c6au'cn, to cultivate, to till. Semen, to learn. 2Jiietf?en, to rent, to hire. 2;abein, to blame. ^tpaxi'xzn, to mend. 2lrm, poor. ^d6), rich. greunbltd^, kind, friendly. ^oftbar, costly. Sangtx>etlig, tedious. ^a^, wet. t^', certainly. SSa^rfc^etn'Itc^, probably. Grammatical. 1. The Irregular Verb UJCrbcn, to become, is conjugated thus: INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. 3^ toCrb'^C, I become. 2)U tiJirft, thou becomest. @r tDtrb, he becomes. SKtr ft) e r b '* en, we become. 3br tt) c r b '= ct, you become. ®ie 'VOi.x'O'^tUf they become. Imperfect Tense. ^6) tourb'^C, I became. 2)U tD U r b '* eft, thou becamest. @r ti?urb'*e, he became. 2Btr tr> u r b '* en, we became. 3br tDUrb^et, you became, ®te tDUrb'^en, they became. 2. The Present Tense of tocrbcil, to become, is used in forming the Future Tenses of all verbs : First Future : d^ totrb regnett, It will rain. Second Future : (S^ toirb geregnet ^aben, It will have rained. Re7n. The Future Tenses in German express simple futurity^ and not in- clination or desire, as is often the case in English. FUTURE TENSES. 41 3. The Indicative Mood Prc'^ut Tense. X^ iXth'- 1, I love, bu H e b '* ft, thou lovest. cr Wt^^t', he loves, toir n e 6 ' * en, we love. \^x I i c b '* t, you love. ^c I i c b '* en, they love. Perfect Tense. I have loved, etc. \^ fail's C 0CliCtlt\ bu ^aft gelicbt'. cr ^ot gcliebt'. toit ^ab'^en gcliebt'. i^r jiab'st gcliebt'. ftc ^ab'*en geliebt'. First Future Tense. I shall love, etc. \&i tterb'^c Iteben* bu tijirft lie ben. er toirb liebcn. tDir hJcrb'^cnHeben. i^r ttjcrb'^et Hebcu. fie toerb'^en lie ben. of Hcbcn, to love. Imperfect Tenm. id; lieb'= Xt, I loved. bu I i e b '= tcft, thou loved«t cr H c b '* te, he loved. n?ir H c b '* ten, we loved, i^r I i e b '* tCt, you loved, fie H c b '* ten, they loved. Pluperfect Tense. I had loved, etc. \^ \i^i'it gcliebt'* bu ^at'steft gcliebt'. cr ^at'*te gcliebt'. toir ^at'stcn gcliebt'. il;r ()at'*tct gcliebt'. fie ^at'^ten gcliebt'. Second Future Tense. I shall have loved, etc. \^ ttcrb'=e gelicbt' ^abcn* bu toirft gcliebt' ^aben. er totrb gcliebt' b^ben. tt?ir tt)erb'=en gcliebt' fjaben. i^r tt?crb'*et gcliebt' I) a ben. fie n? crb'<» en gcliebt' ^ a ben. Exercise 24. 1. The physician will visit Mr. Meyer to-day. 2. The carpenter is building the house. 3. The peasant is till- ing the field. 4. The merchant is becoming very rich. 5. The tailor became very poor. 6. The history became very tedious. 7. It is becoming sultry. 8. It will soon rain. 9. It is thundering now (focben). 10. The peasant will sell the wheat and the rye. 11. The director of the Museum was very kind towards (fiCgen) us. 12. He took (fu^ren) us through the Museum. 13. The librarian took us through the Library. 14. The Library is very large and costly. 15. The teacher blamed the child because it did not learn the lesson. 16. We have rent- ed the house. 42 GERMAN CURRENT HAND. LESSON XIII. GERMAN CURRENT HAND. 1. Capital Letters. a-^^aP"^ oT ^ ^ qT A B D E F G S 1 J K L M N V q It S T u y w X Y z 2. Small Letters. a h c d e f g h i j k I m n op q r s 8 t u V w x y z <«- -«'- 3. Umlaut Vowels and Combined Consonants. a o ii au ch sch st sz tz GERMAN CURRENT HAND. 43 Berlin, 4)amburg, !Eire«ben, ililn, !Wund^en, 2Bten, granffurt. iy StugSburg, Sremen. ©eutft^Ianb, amerila, ^Preu^en. $einrid^, ^ol>antt, ©eorg, aibr«c{)t. ^^^ ^L«., ^^1^.^ .^^ ©op^ie, ?Karic, anna, Kuguflc. ^ert Sd^mibt, grau SDietr J^raulein SRu^lbacl^ 44 GERMAN CURRENT HAND. (3.) ,sz^l-y ^^L.^,._ ^-;. ^^^. (5.) '^^^^ ^.;^£._. yfy (6,) ^^£. ^^L^ -^^ a^L^.u' ^ ■*^-r».-^-*-*-^i^'Ui' -t-'y^iC. -^-rt-'^-At^ ■^-tjL--x^ ■*-*^»-*.-*/^ CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 45 LESSON XIV. CONJUGATION OP lEKEQULAR VERBS. 8pred^en <3{e ll)eutfc() ? S'^ein, ic^ fpred)e nur Snglifc^, ^err ^(i)tx fpricl)! X)eutfd), ^crr Rkin fprac^ mit un^, dx f)at mtt un^ gcfproc^'en, Slavic ftngt fef)r fd)on, Do you speak German ? No, I speak only English. Mr. Meyer speaks German. Mr. Klein spoke to us. He has spoken to us. Mary sings very finely. ©icknunbjttJonsiQftc ^tujgak. 1. 3pred^en 8ie 3)eutfd)? 2. 2Bir fprec^en nur ^nc^Ufd^. 3. grau Dietrich fpric^t Deutfc^ unb granjo'jtf^. 4. grdulein ^afenclei^er fpnd)t graujbftfd), 3talid'nifd) unb Spanifd). 5. !Der ^ud)biuf ev i)at ta^ ^ud) c^an^ gut gebunb'en. 6. 2Go ^aben (Bie ben ^rief gefunb'en? 7. 3d) fanb ibn im 33ud)e. 8. grdu*' lein ^ilbebraut) i)at ba^ ?{eb fel)r fd)5n gcfung'en. 9. 3a, (tc fang e^ mxUid) fcl)r fd)cn. 10. Der Dicb ^at ba^ ®clb geftol)'^ (en. ll.Da^^inb()atmitbcm(Stodec;efptelt. 12. 3eah: Imperfect Tense. tc^ [^ra(!^, I spoke, bii i )) r a d; c\i, thou spokest. cr f^ra^, he spoke. hJtr i |) r a d) '^ en, we spoke, t^r I )) r d) '= t, you spoke, fie i i) r a c^ % en, they spoke. Pluperfect Tense. I had spoken, etc. x^ W'it gcf^roc^'em bu ^ a t '* teft g c i ^ r d; ' c n. er ^at%tC gef^ro ci>' en. xoxx ^ a t % ten g e j i) r d; ' e n. t^r ^at'^tet gej^roc^'cn, ^ a t '* ten g e f )) r (^ ' c n. Second Future Tense, I shall have spoken, etc. tocrb'^e gef^rorfi'ctt l^akn. totrft gef^rod/en ^aben, iDirb gefproc^'en ^aben. tuir h)erb'*en gef^rod/en ^aben. i^r t» e r b % et gef^roc^'en b a b e n. fte tuerb^en gef)3voc^'en ^aben, 2. The Indicative Mood Present Tense. t(?^ f^ret^'^e, I speak, bu f^ri(^=ft, thou speakest. er fi)ric^=t, he speaks. XOXX j )) r e d^ '* en, we speak, itjr j:|)re(^'*t, you speak, fie j ^ r e d; '* en, they speak. Perfect Tense. I have spoken, etc. ie^ l^ab'-e gef^rod^'em bu ^aft gcf^jro^'en. er l^at gej^roc^'cn. njtr ^ a b ':* en g e j i) r d; ' e u. i^r ^ a b '* t g e j ^ r o d; ' e n. fie (; a b '^ en g e i i) r c^ ' e u. First Future Tense. I shall speak, etc. tcb toerb'^e f^rcc^'em bu totrft f^rec^'en. er toirb f ^ r e c^ ' e u. h)tr U) e r b % en j :|) r e c^ ' e u. i^r ti) e r b '* et j:|)rec^' en. fte tD e r b '* en f :^ r e d; ' e u. fte i^ bu er 3. The Indicative Mood of ftc^lcn, to steal : Present Tense. \^ fteljl'^e, I steal, bu [ticlllsft, thou stealest. er ftiCl^Ist, he steals, njtr ft e {) r* en, we steal, t^r ftebl'^t, you steal, fie ft e ^ r* en, they steaL Imperfect Tense. \^ M\r I stole, bu ft a ^ I s ft, thou stolest. er ftc^l, he stole. tDtr ft a b t '* en, we stole. i^r ftabl'^t, you stole, fie ftabi'^en, they stole. CONJUGATION OF lUEEGULAR VERBS. 47 Perfect Tense. \^ ^o6e gcftoljl'tn, etc., I have stolen, etc. First Future Tense. tci^ ttjcrbc ftcl)rcn,e binb'sC, I bind. bu binb's eft, thou Wndest. cr binb'=Ct, he binds. tt)ir b i 11 b '= en, we bind, i^r b i n b '* et, you bind, fie b i n b '* en, they bind. Perfect Tense. id) I)ttbe gcbnnb'en, etc., I have bound, etc. First Future Tense. id; njcrbe bittb'en,ecr. PLURAL. Feminine. Neuter. (The women.) (The children.) bic i!rau*cn. bic itinb*cr. bcr grau^en. bcr Sinb^cr. bcngrau^cn. bcn^tnb*crn, bic S'^aU'C"- bic ^tnb*cr. i2em. The Definite Article has the same form in the plural for all genders, 2. The Plurals of Nouns are formed in several ways : 1. With .some nouns the nom. plural is like the nom. singular. 2. Some nouns take merely an umlaut on the radical vowel, when th* vowel is capable of it. 3. Some nouns merely add ct to the singular. 4. Some nouns add sC and also take the umlaut. 5. Some nouns add sCr (with the umlaut, when the vowel is capable of it). 6. Some nouns merely add sll to the singular. 7. Some nouns merely add sCn to the singular. 3. Nouns that add =n or =cn in the plural (and also in the gen., dat., and ace. sing., if the nouns are masculine) are said to be of the New Declension. Those that take ^n or =cn in the plural, and =8 or =C§ in the gen. sing., are said to be of the Mixed Declension. All other nouns are said to be of the Old Declension. Rem. 1. The Old Declension includes by far the greater portion of nouns. Rem. 2. No neuter nouns belong to the Neto Declension. Rem. 3. No feminine nouns belong to the Mixed Declension. 4. Tabular view of the singular and plural of nouns : (Singular .) (Plural.) (Singular.y (Plural.) (Singular. ) (Plurc 1. 2. 2:tf(^, Xifd^c. TlaUx, 2«alcr. SSatcr, SSSter. 4. Scorer, Sel^rcr. ©artcn, ©arten. ^oc^, «8d^e. ©Wer, (Bcijillcr. Dfen, Ocfen. 5tr,^t, Slcrjte. SBacfer, SSarfcr. aj^uttcr, matux. §ut, ^ilte. Sacjer, 3agcr. 3. mod, SeiJcfe. a^efycr, SD^cffer. Slbenb, 3lbenbc. @tu^I, @tai)te. 3immcr, Btuimer. Scrg, SScrgc. 9^ad?t, 9?«d;te. ajJorgen, 3J?orgen. Sleiftift, SBIeiftifte. ©tabt, @tabtc. Oiigel, ^iigel. Sricf, «ricfe. C SaJanb, SSanbe. 50 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. (Singula r.) (Plural.) 6. (Singular ) (P/«m/.) 6. S3auern.* (Singular.) (Plural.) mann, 33auer,* 2)oftor,* S)o!tor'en.* 3BaIb. aScilber. ^nabc, ^nabcn. ^err, §erren. 53u^, SSiic^er. 2lutgafec, Slufgaben. ^rofefjor, ^'^roteffor'cn.* ®ort. 3)orfer, 33rii(fe, SSriicfen. ©olbat', ©olbat'en. ©elb, ©etber. ^reube, greubcn. 2)irertor,* 2)tre!tor'en. §au9, §aufer. ©efd^id^'tc @efd;tc^t'en. SSibliot^er SSibliot^cfen. 3)a*, ©ac^er. ^rc^e, ^irc^cn. grau, grauen. mnb, ^tnber. ^ommob'e , ^ommo'ben. ©efa^r', ©efa^r'en. 2i^t, 2t(^ter. e^i^e, @))i^en. Seftton', 2e!tion'cn* 5. Examples of the Declension of Nouns: 1. Old Declension. SINOULAK. 1. Painter. N. bcr maltx, D. bem makx, A. ben TtaUx, 2. Father. bcr abater, beg ^ater^g, bem 35ater, Den ^ater. 3. Mountain. bcr ^crg, beg S3erg*c^, bem 93erg^c, ben 53erg, 4. City. btc ©tabt, Der @tabt, Der ©tabt, &tc ©tabt. 5. Man, bcr Warn, be§ 9)iann=cg, bem 2JZann*c, ben 2Jiann. iV'. bic maitv, G.ber 2«aler, Z>. ben mxkx^^n. A. bie gjialer. bic S3atcr, ber 3Sater, ben 35ater*n, bie SSater. bic Scrg^c, ber S3erg*c, Den ^erg*cn, bie 53erg*c. bic ©tabt=c, ber @tabt*c, ben @tdbt*cn, Die @tabt*c. bic Wdnn-tx, ber 2Hdnn»cr, ben 2Jiantt*crrt, bie 9Jiann=cr. 2. New Declension. 3. Mixed Declension. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 6. Boy. N. bcr ^nabc, G. bee ^nabe=n, D. bem ^nabe^n, A. ben ^nabe^n, 7. Woman. bic ^rau, ber i^rau, ber gran, bie gran. 8. Peasant. bcr ©aucr, beS 33auer*g, bem 5Bauer, ben 33auer. 9. Doctor. bcr hotter* beS ©oftor^g, bem 2)oftor, ben Softer. PLURAL. N. bic ^mU'tt, G. ber ^nabe^n, D. ben ^nabe^n, A. bie ^nabe^n. bic ^rauscn, ber grau*cn, ben grau^cn, bie i^xau'tn* bic ^autx-Uf ber S3auer*n, ben S3auer*n, bic S3auer*n. bic 2)oftor'sCtt, ber 2)D{tor'*cn, ben 2)o!tor^cn, bie jDottor'* en. Rem 1, The genitive and accusative of the plural number have the same form as the nominative plural. Re7n. 2. An sji is always added in the dative plural if the nominative plural does not already end in that letter. * In the Mixed Declension. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 51 Exercise 30. 1. The scholars have bought the books. 2. The books of the painters are on the tables. 3. The cabinet-makers have mended the tables. 4. The stoves, the chairs, and the tables are in the rooms. 5. Miss Neumann sang the songs very beautifully. 6. The nights are now very cold. 7. The towers of the churches in the city are very high. 8. The news (^l.) in the newspaper is to-day very interesting. 9. The gardens are not very large. 10. The soldiers are in the city. 11. Where did you find the pencils? 12. The pencils were under the books. 13. The tailors have mended the coats. 14. The children are playing with the dogs. 15. We sent the letters by way of Hamburg. LESSON XVI. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Sr \)aar 8c^ul)e gefauft. 3. 2)er ^oc^ f)at ein ^funb 'S>Vidtx, em ^)funb ^affee unb ein $funb X^ee gef)olt. 4. 2Ciinfcben (Sic cine Xaffe taffee ober eine Xaffe 2:f)ee? 5. 3^ n>iinfcbe nur ein ®la^ 5Baffer. 6. Dae ^inb tt)itnfrf)t ein ©la^ 2)?ild) unb ein ©tiicf 53utterbrob (bread and butter). 7. Die Xa|[en 52 THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. ftnb fe^r f^on* 8» 2Bcrben (Sie ein 33u^ papier ober ein Mt^ fapkx faufen? 9. 3(^ tDerbe ein S^ltee papier faufen. 10. 2)a6 Xuc^ {ft etne (Slle brett 11. (S^ foftet einen 3:{)aler bic (SUe. 12. 2)er X^ee foftet einen X^akx ba^ $funb. 13. Die ©ier foften ^e^n (ten) @rcfc^en ba^ 3)u^enb. 14. |)einric^ i)at einen Xbaler unb ^e^n ©rofc^en fiir ba^ 53ud) be^a^lt. 15. 2)a^ S3anb ift einen 3^11 breit; e^ foftet ^tt)ei (two) ©rof^en unb fec^^ (six) Pfennige bie ^lle. 16. 33or einem Sci^re (a year ago) maren mx in 3)eutf^lanb. 17. 3d^ mitnfc^e ein Quart WIM), ein 5^funb Z^ct unb ein 2)ugenb Sier. Vocabulary. 2>Cr ^^atcr, — §, pZ. — , dollar. ©rofc^cn, — ^,pL — , groschen. pfennig, — id, pi. — e, pfennig. 5uf3,— e^;/>^. p^e,foot. 3oII, — e§, ;)Z. — e, inch. ^0(^en, — Q,pL — , sheet. ®ct;u^, — t^,pl. — e, shoe. §anbfd;nb, — c§, joZ. — e, glove. @tiefe(, — g, />/. — , boot. ^antof'fel,— 3,/>/. — n, slipper. ^affec,— §,/j/. — , coffee. S()CC, — §, ijZ. — , tea. 3u(fer, — g, sugar. 9^ei6, —eg, rice. Dber, or. 33eja^ren, to pay. SBiinic^cn, to wish, desire. @rDf3, large, tall. '^it etie, — , pi. — n, yard, ell. „ Saffe, — , p/. — 11, cup, cup and saucer. „ 3«ird), — , milk. l)aS 3a^r, —t^,pl. — c, year. „ S)u^enb, — cS, /?/. — e, dozen. „ ei,— c§,y. — er,egg. „ ^ar , —eg , pi. — c, pair. rf 9?ic§, — c§, ream. r, S3ud;,—e6, quire. „ ^fimb, — e§, ;>Z. — e, pound. t, ©tilcf, — cg,^)/. — e, piece. „ ©lag, —t^,pl. ©(cifer, glass. „ SBaff cr, —^,pl. —, water. „ Ouart, —eg, />/. — e, quart. S3reit, broad, wide. Sang, long. %\z\, deep. Grammatical. 1. The Indefinite Article ctn,<3^ or «^n,is declined thus: MASCULINE. (A man.) Norn, ein SJiann. Gen. ein'se^ 9Jianne8. Dat. etn'^cm SD^anne. Ace. ein'^cn 3)iann. FEMININE. NEUTER. (A woman.) (A child.) Cttt'-C f^rau. cin ^inb. ein'^cr %xau, etn'«e^ ^inbeS. ein'*cr ?^rau. ein'^cm tinbc. ein'^c ^rau. ein ^tnb. Rew.. The Indefinite Article takes the gender and case of the noun with which it is employed. THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 53 2. The following Idioms are used with nouns of weighty measure, quantity, and Jt>/•^6•^ : 1. Nouns of weight, measure, and qitajititj/ are in apposition with the nouns they limit. Those in the feminine gender alone take the pi. form^ the masculine and neuter nouns retaining the singular fonn in the plural. ®r !aufte ein ^^funb 3wder unb ymzx lie bought a pound of sugar and ^Unb Xl^ec, two pounds of tea. ®ic faufte mir cine (SHc Xud^ unb She bought only one yard of clotli, nid^t gmci ©Ucn 2:utf>, and not two yards of cloth. 2. Verbs and adjectives indicating weight, measure, quantity, and price require the noun expressing the weight, etc., to be in the accusative case-. e« tvic^t ein ^^funb, It weighs a pound. ©8 foftet Cincn Xbalcr, It costs a dollar. 2)a8 aBaffer i[t cinCH ^u§ ticf, The water is a foot deep. 3. Nouns expressing the quantity, following nouns expressing price, are preceded by the dejinite article : ©8 toftct einen Zhakx ha^ ^funb, It costs a dollar o pound. (S9 tcftct eincn Z^ahx bit (^Ut, It costs a dollar a yard. 3. Prussian Money is the standard in North and Central Germany. 1 X^akr = 30 ©rofc^en = 360 $fcnmgc=73 cents in gold. 1 @rofcl)en— 12 $fenntge= 2-^ cents in gold. 1 'J^fennig = \ of a cent. Rem. Foreign Exchange to all Germany is usually made in Prussian thlrs. Exercise 32. 1. Have you a pencil? 2. There is a pencil on the table. 3. William bought a pair of shoes and a pair of slippers. 4. The cook will go and get (j)oIcn) a dozen eggs, a pound of sugar, and a quart of milk, and a pound of rice. 5. The book will cost a dollar and twenty (jmanjig) groschens. 6. William wishes a glass of wa- ter. 7. Do you wish a cup of tea or a cup of coffee ? 8. 1 wish a cup of coffee. 9. The cloth is a yard wide. 10. It costs a dollar a yard. 11. 1 paid a dollar and ten (^ebn) groschens for the book. 12. The ribbon is a yard long and an inch wide. 13. It cost ten groschens a yard. 14. The tea cost a dollar a pound. 15. Have you a sheet of paper? 16. He has a ream of paper. 54 CARDINAL NUMBERS. LESSON XVII. CARDINAL NUMBERS. ^te ^trd^e ^at ^wd X^nxmt, The church has two towers. Der 3ager ^at mer $unt)e, The hunter has four dogs. 2)er ^0^ ^at fe^^ ^^funb fRd^ The cook got six pounds of unt> ac^t $funb 3«^^^ 9^=^ J'ice and eight pounds of l^olt, sugar. Raxl ift »ieqe^n ^a^xt alt, Charles is fourteen years old. §err Dietrtc^ ift f)eute merunb^ Mr. Dietrich is to-day sixty- fec^^ig 3a^re att, four years old. 3m 3ci^re a^t^e^nf)unbert mer^ In the year eighteen hun- unbfec^gig war |)err $rofeffor dred and sixty-four Pro- ^ef)r in Deutfd)lanb, fessor Behr was in Ger- many. 2)rciunbbrcipgftc ^ufpk* 1. ^crr Sy^e^er ^at brei ^dufer in @ot^a gefauft 2.T)a(> Xu^ ift erne (5 He brett unb neun ^Uen lang* 3. 2)er ^o^ ^at ^wei Du^enb Sier, fiinf $funb Qudtx unb jteben ^funb 3^et6 ge== ^oh. 4. 3)a0 ^ud) foftet ac^t ^^aler unb fiinfunb^ujan^ig ^rofc^en. 5. 3cl) \)aht fitr bae ^anb fiinfunbjtt)anjtg ©rof^en unb fec^^ ^fennige hqa^t 6. ^einric^ ift mx gup unb elf Soil grop. 7, Die ^riidfe ijl yierunbad^tjtg 5ug lang. 8. Der X^urm be^ Dome^ ^it (at) ^D^agbeburg ijl brei^unbert unb breiptg gup ^o(^. 9. T)tx X^urm be^ 3)ome^ p SGten ijl merl)unbert fe^^unbbreipig gug \)o6^. 10. 3)ie 33tbltot()e! ^u 33erlin ^at fec^^^unbert unb fiinf jtg taufenb 33iic^er. 1 1 . 53erlin ^at iiber jie^ ben^unbert taufenb dinm^ntx (inhahitants). 12. !Dre^ben ^at bunbert unb ijierjtg taufenb Sinwo^ner. 13. S[)?agbeburg ^at neun^ gtgtaufenb (Stnmc^ner. 14. 3m 3a^re a^t^el)n^unbert (or tm 3a^re eintaufenb ac^t^unbert) breiunbfei^^tg m^nttn §err gneb== lanb unb ^err 2Bolf in |)eibelberg. 15. ^err ^raun war geftern ad^tunbfitnfaig 3al)re alt (old). CARDINAL NUMBERS. 55 Grammatical. 1. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows : 1. (gins. 2. 3tt>ct. 3. !J)rci. 4. 25tcr. 5. Sanf, 6. ®cc^8. 7. (Sicbcn. 8. %6)t, 9. g^cun. 10. 3c^n. 11. (Slf. 12. 3»6If. 13. 2)rctjc^n. 14. ^icrje^n. 15. pnfjcbn. 16. ®ed^«je^n. 17. ©icbcnjc^n or ©ieBjc^n. 18. mdnscbn. 19. ^^eunjc^n. 20. B»«njtg. 21. ©inuntsmanjig. 22. 3tt3eiunbjtt)aniitg, etc. 30. 2)rei^tg. 31. (Sinunbbrei^ig, etc. 40. SSierjig. 50. gilnfjig. 60. ©cci^jtg. 70. ®tebcnjtg or ©icbjtg. 80. Slt^tgig. 90. ^^eunjig. 100. §iinbcrt. 101. §unbcrt unb cms. 110. §iiiibert unb gc^n. 120. .t>unbcrt unb jttjanjtg. 121. ^unbert einunb;;tt)an5ig. 125. §unbcrt fuufunbjmanjig. 136. §unbert fed^sunbbrei^ig. 150. §unbert unb filnfjig. 200. 3n3ei{>unbcrt. 225. 3n)eil?unbert filnfunbjwanjtg 500. giinff^unbcrt. 1,000. ©tntaufcnb. 1,005. (Sintaufcnb unb fiinf. 1,025. (Sintaufcnb filnfunbjnjanjig. 1,500. etntaufcnb fiinf bunbert. 2,000. 3roeitaujcnb» 20,000. 3^anjigtaufenb. 200,000. 3^ci^unbcrt taufcnb. 1869. ^^Id^tje^n^unbcrt unb neununbfed?5tg, (or) eintaufenb ac^t^unbert neununbfcc^jig. 2. When used with a noun, and not preceded by a definite article, 6in, one is declined like the indefinite article {see Less. XVI.). Rein. 1. The numeral tin takes a stronger emphasis than is given to the In- definite article. Rem. 2. The indefinite article b in fact only a modification in signification and use of the numeral Cttl, Rem. 3. The form Cill^ is used in counting and in multiplying : StnS, ymd, brei, tier, etc., One, two, three, four, etc. Sinmal SinS ift (SinS, Once one is one. 3. The Cardinal Numbers are usually undeclined. Rem. This is especially the case when they are joined to nouns and art preceded by prepositions. ©r ^at jcbn 53ogen !}3a^ier, He has ten sheets of paper. SKit ge^n ^ogen ^o^ier, With ten sheets of paper. 56 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 4. Single words are usually formed of units and tens^ of midtijples of a Mtndred, and of multi/ples of a thousand up to a hundred thousand. 23ierunbsn3anjtg, Twenty-four. 5ld;t^unbert, Eight hundred, 2[d;tje^n^unbert, Eighteen hundred. Slc^tjicjtaujenb, Eighty thousand. §unberttaufenb, A hundred thousand. SBier^unbert taufenb, Four hundred thousand. Rem, 1. Some writers put no divisions between numbers : (Stntaufenbad}t^unbertunbfe(^§unbjtt)anjig(l826). Rem. 2. @in, one{a) is not used before ](|UnbCrt and tflUfCUb* 2)a« SSuc^ ^at ^unbert (Seiten, The book has a hundred pages. 5. i3ni 3(J5^^C is inserted before the number of the year. 3nt ^aijxt 1868 ii?ar er in tijln, In 1868 he was in Cologne. 6. The ic is short in ticrjel^n and Dierjtg^ Exercise 34. 1. The cook has bought two pounds of sugar and six pounds of rice. 2. Mr. Friedland paid fifteen dollars for the books. S.William is five feet and seven inches high. 4. The tower of the Cathedral at Strasburg is four hundred and thirty-six feet high. 5. The two low- ers of the Cathedral at Munich are three hundred and thirty-six feet high. 6. The bridge on the Elbe, in Dres- den, is one thousand six hundred and fifty feet long and fifty feet wide. 7. The castle ((3d)lof) in Berlin is six hundred and twenty-six feet long, three hundred and seventy-three feet wide, and a hundred and one feet high. 8. It has six hundred rooms. 9. Bremen has sev- enty-eight thousand inhabitants (@intt)ol^ner). 10. Ham- burg has a hundred and ninety-six thousand inhabit- ants. IL The Library at Munich is two hundred and fifty feet long and eighty-five feet high. 12. It has eight hundred and fifteen thousand books. 13. In 1865 (im 3er gebunben. 6. Der Sd^neiter bat ben ^od mit fc^warjem Xuc^e gefuttert. 7. ^atbarina i)at im ©arten jmci tt)eige unb brei rotbe 9^ofen gepfliirft. 8. grdulein $i(bebranbt bat geftern ^2lbenb jmei fc^one beutfd)e ?ieber gefungen. 9. ^er^ lin unb 2Bien jtnb groge unb fd)!Jne 8tdbte. 10. $err^)rofef^ for Sber^arb \)ai beute ^n?et ttaltenif^e unb ttier fpanifc^e 53u(^er gefauft. 11. SBunfc^en Ste graue^ ober griine^ Xuc^? 12. 3^ tt>unfc^e braune^. 13. Sebrreic^e 53iic^cr jtnb gua^eilen fcbr langweilig. 14. 'Dcx Dom p SD'Jun^en bat groci b^b^ Xburme, 15. Berlin f)at breite ®tra§en. 16.^raunfc^n?eig (Brunswick) ^at enge, frumme ^tra§en. 17. 2)ie ^dufer in 33raunfc^n?eig l^aben fteilc Ddd^er. 18. Da^ §au^ iji grog unb bequem, abcr e^ ijl p tbeuer. 19 Der ot^bam, 6. 2)fJein SBetter l^al tjorgeftern feine ^Itern in 3ena befud)t» 7, ^axl, \)afi bu bei^ nen 33Ieiflift gefunben ? 8, ^inber, |)abt i^r eure 5lufgaben t)oIl^ enbet ? 9. Die @d)it(er {)aben if)re ?eftionen fe^r gut gelernt 10« 9i)^arie ^t gefagt,bag fte il^re Xante ^eute tt)a{)rf(|einlic^ be^ fu^en mx'o. 11, |)aben ®ie meinen 53ruber l^eute gefe^en? 12. 3a, ic^ fa^ 3^ren 33ruber f)eute Sl^^orgen im SD^ufeum. 13* (Be^en ®ie nic^t ben X^urm be^ 2)ome^ ? 14. 5ld^ ja, ic^ fel^e i^n! 15. ^aben ^k bie 9lad)nc^ten l^eute S^orgen gelefen? 16. 3a, i(^ M fte in 3^rer Seitung. 17. 5Ba^ lefen (Sie ? 18. 3c^ lefe bie ©ef^ic^te Deutfd)lanb^. 19. Tldn £)^eim i)ai mei^ ner (Sd^mefter ba^ ^u^ gegeben. 20. |)err S^^ieme^er ^at mix geftern 5lbenb gefagt, ba§ er i^orgeftern meinen ®ro5»ater unb meine ©ro^mutter in SD^agbeburg gefe()en ^at. 21» SD'leine ^U tern finb beute in SD^agbebur^. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 61 Vocabulary. ^Cr2J?ann,— cg,;j/.3Wanncr,theinan, 2)iC ^xau, —, pi. —en, the woman, the husband „ SSater, —§,;>/. 33ater, the father. u ®of;n, — i?>,pl. @i5f;nc, the son. „ S3ruber, — §, ;>/. 33rubcr, brother. „ O^etm, — §,/;/. — e, the uncle. „ ^Setter, — ^,pl. — n, the cousin. r 9^effc, — n, pi — n, the nephew. ,t ©ro^Dater, the grandfather. „ Urgro^toater, the great-grandfa- ther. „ 6ntc(, —§,pl. —, the grandson. 3)iC ©(tern, the parents (has no sine/.)- 2)Cr @c^n?iegeri?ater, father-in-law. „ ®c^h)iegerfo^n, son-in-law. „ ®(^tt)ager, —3, pi. @d;tr>agcr, brother-in-law. „ ©ttcftoater, stepfather. „ ®tieffo{)n, stepson. Present Injinitive. gcfi'* en, to give, \t\'' en, to read, wife. aJJuttcr, —,;>/. abutter, mother. %Q6.)izx,—,pl. Xoc^ter, daughter. @d;njefter, —,pl. — n, the sister. 2;antc, — , pi. — n, the aunt. (Soufi'ne, —,pl. — n, the cousin. Silx&iit, —,pl. — n, the niece. ©ro^muttcr, the grandmother. Urgro^muttcr, the great -ijrand' mother. ©ntelin —,pl. — nen, the grand- daughter. ®d;tr>tegermutter, mother-in-law. @c^tt>iegcrtod;ter, daughter-in-law ®d;tx>agerin, — , pi. —nen, sister- in-law. ©tiefmutter, stepmother. @tieftod;ter, stepdaughter. !c^'*en, to see, Imperfect Indicative. gad, gave, fa § , read, fa^,saw, Perfect Participle. ge*0Cb'* en, given. ge^Ief^en, read, ge * j c ^ '* en, seen. Grammatical. 1. The following are the Possessive Pronouns : Masc. mein, bein, fein, i^r, fein. Fein. mcin^c, bein*e, fetn^e, i^r-e, fein*e. Neut. mein, betn, fein, i^r, fein. my. thy. his. her. its. Masc. unfer, cuer, \hx, Fern. unfer*e, eur*e, it;r*c. Neut. unfer, euer, i^r. our. your, their, your.) 2. The Possessive Pronoun mcilt, 'yny, is declined ofis follows : Masculine. (My brother.) Norn, mein Sruber, Gen. mtxvi'ti SBruberS. Dat. mcin^cm 33ruber. Ace. mciUsCU SSruber. SINGULAR. Feminine. (My sister.) mctn^c ©djwefler. mcin^cr ©d^mefter. mcin^cr Sd^trcfier. mcinsC (Sdbnjcficr. Neuter. (My book.) mctn 93u^. mcin=c§ S8uc^e«. tncin=cm S3u(i^e. mein S3uc&. 62 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Norn. mcin=C SSrilber. Gen. nictn=cr ^riiber. Dat. mcin^cn SSriibern. Ace. vxtxW't 33ruber, PLUEAL. mcin=C @d;ti?eftern. mcin=cr SSitc^er tttein=cn 53ilc^em mcitt^c ^iic^er. nictn=cr ®d?n)eftern. ittCin^cn ©c^meftern. mcillsC ®cl;tt)eftern. Rem. The plural is the same for all genders. 3. Possessive Pronouns are declined like mctll* Rem. 1. In declining ViVi\tXf t is sometimes dropped from the terminations cti, '-m, =cn. Rem. 2. In declining CUCt, the t after tU is usually dropped. SINGULAR. PLUEAL. Norn, unfer, unfere, unfer ; unferc. Gen. unferg, unferen, unferg ; unjercr. Bat. unferm, unfercr, unjcrm ; unjern. Ace. unjcrn, unfcre, unjer; unfere. Rein. The same laws that govern the use of bU and tl^t (see Lesson XL) govern the use of their derivatives bcill and tUtX* 4. The Indicative Mode of gcbcn, to give : Imperfect Tense, BINGULAE. PLUEAL. euer, eure, euer; cure, eureg, curer, eureS; eurcr. eurem, curer, curent; curen. eurcn, cure, euer; cure. I gave, thou gavest. he gave, we gave, you gave, they gave. Present Tense. ict> gCtl'sC, I give, bu gibft, thou givest. er %\\sif he gives. h)tr gcfe'»=Ctt, we give, i^r gcb'st, you give, fie g C b '^ en, they give. Perfect Tense. \&i l^ak gegeb'cn^eic, I have given, etc. First Future Tense. \^ tucrbc 9cb'cn,eic., I shall give, etc. 5. The Present Tenses of Icfen, to read, and of fel^CK, to see : bu gob ft er ^^\s, tctr g a b % en, t^r g a b % t, fie gab'* en, Pluperfect Tense. id) ^atte gegcb'en, etc., I had given, e?c. Second Future Tense. tc^ tocrbe ocgeb'en ^aben,el.) from America in your newspaper is very interesting. 10. William Meyer says that his parents are now in Dres- den. 11. Henry Rauh says that his aunt is very sick. 12. John Meyer says that his uncle has sold his house and his garden. 13. My sister has not yet read the book. 14. My father gave me {dat.) the book. 15. The tailor has mended my coat. 16. William is visiting his great-grandfather. 17. Miss Weigand is my cousin. 18. Mr. liichter is my brother-in-law. LESSON XX. NEW DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. !iDcr grogc Xif^ ijl in bent gro^ The large table is in the Jen Bintmer, large room. 1)\t teutfc^e iSprac^e ijl mirllic^ The German language is fe^r fd^roierig, really very difficult. 3^ legte ba^ groge 33uc^ auf I laid the large book on ben grofen Xifd^, the large table. !Die beutfc^en ^u(^er jtnb auf The German books are on ben gropen Xif^en, the large tables. 91cununbbrcigigftc ^ufgal^e* 1. t)\t ^lu^fprac^e ber beutfc^en (Sprac^e ifl fe()r frafti^oU, aber jic ifl ni^t fe()r njeic^. 2. 2Bem 9cf)oren biefe neucn 33u^ Acr? 3. 6ie gc^oren jenem reic^cn ^aufmanne. 4. 9lic^t atlc 64 NEW DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. te^rretc^en 55u^er ftnb intereffaitt. 5. 5^{^t jebee 53u(^ tj^ le^r^ reic^, 6. |)err ©c^auer n)o(;nt in jenem gro§en $aufe gegen^ uber bem ^mtn 2^ufeum, 7* S5or einigen Xagen (some days ago) ^abe tc^ einige beutf^e unb fran^ofifc^e 33u^er in ^eip^ig gefauft 8. |)err ^rofeffor ©c^auer ^at i)iele italtemfcl)e 53ud)er in feiner 33ibUot{)ef. 9. 3ener fc^n)ar3e Ueberrorf ift p grog fur mi^. 10. Diefe amerifanifd^en ©ummifc^u^e fofteten brei Z\)aUx. 11. Die garben ber preufifc^en ga^ne ftnb fc^marj unb tt?eig. 12. 3)ie garben ber amerifanifd^en 5a()ne ftnb rot^, tt)eig unb bku. 13. Die 5lrmee be^ 5^orbbeutfc^en ^unbe^ f)at jte^t ac^t^unbert taufenb ©olbaten. 14. 3n n^elc^en ^taWn Deutfc^lanb^ maren 8ie? 15. 3Bir waren in mebreren grofen ©tabten, befonber^ in S3er(in, Dre^ben, 2Bien, 2}^iinc^en, ^mu gart unb ^oln. 16. ^5(n x^i auf ber linfen (Bdtc unb Diiffel^ borf if^ auf ber rec^ ten er, — e, — c§, many (a). 2Jie^rere (only injil), several. @oIc^er, — e, — e8, such. 93erf(^ie'Dener, — e, — ei^, various. 23ieler, — e, — CS, much, many. SSeldjer, — c, — eS, which ? what ? SSeniger, — e, — e§, little, few. 9fZorbbeutf(^, North-German ^^reu^tfc^, Prussian. S3atrifd;, Bavarian, ©ac^flfc^, Saxon. Vocabulary. 2)er 33unb, —eg, Confederation. „ Ueberrocf, —eg, pi. UeberriJcfc, overcoat. „ @ummtfd)ub, -eg, pi. — e, Indij» rubber over-shoe. 2)iC 5lrmee', —,pl. Slrme'en, army. „ ga^ne, — , pi. — n, flag. „ f^arbe, —,pl. — n, color. n ®eite, — ,pl. — n, side, page. „ (Bpxa6)C, — fpl. — u, language t, 5lugf^rad;e, pronunciation. 3irt, old. 9fJeu, new. ^raftiJoH, full of power, energetic. 2Beid), weak, soft. 9te^t, right (right hand, adj.). Stnt, left (left hand, adj.). befon'berg, especially. Stmertfa'utfd;, American, Gnglijd;, English. NEW DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 65 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined in the New Declension as follows : SINGULAR. Feminine,. (The good woman.) bic pt = C grau. bcr gut* en grau. ber gut* en grau. bic g u t * c grcu. PLURAL. bic g u t * en ^raucn. bcr g u t * en graucn. bcu g u t * en ^raucn. bic gut* en grauen. 2. Adjectives are declined according to the New De* dension when preceded by : 1. The definite article ter,bie, ba^. 2. Any adjective pronoun that is declined accord- ing to the Old Declension, as biefcr, jcber, jcncr, ttianc^er, fold^er, n?eld^er (including all except pos- sessive pronouns) ; see § 89, Rem. 1, Obs, Rem. After thQ plurals altc, aubcrc, cinige, ct(id;c, fcine, manege, folt^c, tt)ct(^e, mel^rcrc, toicic, toenigc, the adjective usually drops sn in the nom. and ace. PLURAL. Masculine. (The good man.) Nom. bcr gut = e 2Jtann. Gen. bc3 gut* en 2Jianne6. Dat. bcm gut*cn aJiannc. Ace. ben gut* en SD^ann. Nom. bic g u t * en 9JZanner. Gen. ber g u t * en 2Jianncr. Uat. ben g u t * en 9)ianncrn. Ace. bic gut sen 3)?anner. Neuter. (The good child.) bag 8nt = e 5einb. be§ gut*en tinbe«. bcm gut* en .tinbe. baS g u t * e itinb. bic gut* en ^inbcr, ber gut* en ilinber. ben g u t * en 5linbcrn. bic gut*en tinber. Nom. oUc gut*c S5ilc^cr. Gen. alter gut*en 33iid;er. Dat. alien gut=en 33ad;ern. Ace. aUc gut=c S3Ud;er. i)icle gut*c S5ii(^cr. toielcr gut*en 33iic^cr. ijideu gut*en S5iid;em. Dicic gut*e 33iic^er. einige gut*e Siic^er. ciniger gut*en S3iid;er. cinigen gut*en 33iid)ern. ciuige gutst S3ilc^cr. 3. If several adjectives succeed the words aller, tcr, biefer, ete.j they all follow the New Declension : €r ^at biefe neu*en beut j(!^sen He has bought these new German books. S3itc^er getauft, 4. The preposition JU is used after gCprCH when this verb signifies to helong to, in the sense oito be apart of: ©ac^fen get^ort jnm ^^iorbbcut* Saxony belongs to (is a part of) the fd)cn S3unb, North German Confederation, (but) 2)a8 S3uc^ QC^ort bcnt Se^rcr, The book belongs to the teacher. 66 MIXED DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. Exercise 40. 1. The pronunciation of the Italian language is soft, but still (t)0^) energetic. 2. To whom does this new hat belong ? 3. It belongs to Mr. Behr. 4. Frankfort belongs now to Prussia. 5. The New Museum in Berlin is very large and imposing. 6. It is 340 feet long. 7. The Old Museum is not so large. 8. It is 276 feet long, 170 feet deep, and 83 feet high. 9. The New Museum is behind the Old Museum. 10. The colors of the Austrian flag are black and yellow. 11. The col- ors of the Italian flag are red, white, and green. 12. On which side of the street do you live (reside)? 13. We live on the right side of the street, just opposite the new house of (the) Mr. Kranzler. 14. What does this cloth cost a yard? 15. The blue cloth costs five dollars a yard. 16. The black cloth costs four dollars and twenty groschens a yard. 17. The Austrian army has eight hundred thousand soldiers. 18. The tower of the new church is a hundred and forty feet high. 19. I bought a few (eintge) German books this morning. 20. I have not many (mele) German books. 21.1 have read many (manege or mele) German books. 22. I have only a few (nur ttJenige) German books. LESSON XXI. '^' MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. ^m neuer 3^ocf tft ^u gro§, My new coat is too large. ^arl \)^i meinen neuen S^locf, Charles has my new coat. 3)a^ ^inb ^at ein neue^ ^uc^, The child has a new book. Berlin tft eine grofe unb eine Berlin is a large and very fe^r fc^one ©tabt, beautiful city. C)aben (Ste unfer neue^ ^/. — cr, dress. (;>/. ^(ciber, dresses, clothes.) ,t ?cfcbu(^, reading-book, reader. „ Safc^cntud^^pocket handkerchief, ^f^ad^, according to, after. SBc^au^'tcn assert. S3cTTtcr'fcn, obser\-e, notice. S?cftCi'(cn, order, engage. SScrlc'gcn, to misplace, ^affcn {tvith dat.), to fit, become. 3crbrc'c^''n {irreg.\ to break in (o. into) pieces. 68 MIXED DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are declined according to the Mixed Declension when preceded hj a, possessive pronoun, hj Cin (one, a, an), or by fctll {no, not any) : SmOULAK. Masculine. (My new coat.) Norn, mein neu=cr 9tocf. Gen. meines neu*cn 9Jorfe8. Dat. meinem neu*en dtodt. Ace. tneinen neu*cn died. Norn, meinc ncu^en 9tbcfc. Gen. tnemer neu^en 9to(fe. Dat. tneinen neu^cn 9Ji3(fen. Ace. metne neu^ctl 9Jo(fe. Feminine. (My new vest.) metne neu*e 2Befte. metner neu^cn 3Be[te. metner nen^cil 2Befte. meine neu=e 2Be[te. PLURAL. tnetnc nen^cn SSeften. metner neu*cn SBeften. meinen neu^cn SBeften. mehte neu=cn SBeften. Neuter. (The new book.) mem neu*c^ S3ud^. meineg neu*cn S3ud)c8. metnem nen=cn S3ud^e. mein neu*c^ 53ud^. meinc neu=^cn 33u(i;er. meincr neu=cn 33ilrf)er. meinen nen^cti S3itd)ern. meinc neu*cn 33ii(^cr. 2. Table of the terminations of the three Declensions cf adjectives : 1. The Old Declension : Adjective alone before the substantive. 2. The New Declension : Adjective preceded by bCt^ btCfCf, etc. 3. The Mixed Declension : Adjective preceded by Ctlt, IttCtll, etc. LOldDeclen- 2. New Declen- S.MixedDeclen- K sion. sion. sion. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. /. — c, baron. 53eru^mt', famous, renowned. „ ©encrat',— §,/>/. Generate, gen- Sieb, dear, cherished. eral. 2)rei^tgja^rtg, thirty years' (war). „ Ober[t, —en, pi. —en, colonel. /.§m[fe, river. mih, mild. „ 2Beg, —t§,pl. — e, way, road. ©tiirmifd;, stormy, tempestuoug S)ic ©c^tac^t, —,pl. —en, battle. Sa^fer, valiant, brave. „ SCelt, —,pl. —en, world. 3Sorfid;ttg, prudent. S)a3 filter, —«,/>/. — , age. ^ung, young. „ ' HJJittelalter, Middle Ages. ^urj, short. 2JJittcI==2)CUtjc^Ianb, Central Germany. S^reu, true, faithful. SSenig (adj. and adv.), little. ®ang(ac//.), entire, whole ?ll§, as, than. !i!e^t, last, latest. SBte, as, than. 5Borig, last, preceding. SSietteid^t', perhaps. 2)ort, there, yonder. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 71 Grammatical. 1. Adjectives are compared by adding to the positive degree -tX for the co77iparative degree, and=ft or ^cft for the superlative degree. Rem. When the positive ends in *b, *t, *§, '^f ^J, *f4l, Ai, A, or *U, the Bupeilative is formed by adding 't\\* Positive. Comparative. fein, rcid;, fc^i5n, milb, laut, \m), fret, treu, fine, rich, beautiful, mild, loud, hot, false, happy, free, true. fein-er, reic^'Cr, fd;bn*cr, mtlb^cr, laut^cr, falfd;.cr, \xqHx, fret*er, treu^Cr, Superlative. finer, richer, more beautiful, milder, louder, hotter, falser, happier, freer, truer. reid;.ft, milb*c[t, Iaut*c|t, finest. richest. most beautiful. mildest. loudest. hottest. faIfd;^Cft, falsest. fro(;*cft, happiest. frei^cft, trcu^cft, freest, truest. 2. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if C, 0, 07' Vif usually takes the umlaut in the com- parative and superlative degrees : alt, old, alt*cr, older, olt^Cft, oldest. tDarm, warm, Warm*Cr, warmer, tDarm^ft, warmest, lani], long, tang^Cr, longer, ISng^t, longest, grob, coarse, grob*Cr, coarser, 9i^'^^A^f coarsest, furg, short, fiirj*cr, shorter, lilq^Cft, shortest, jung, young, jiing'Cr, younger, jttng=ft, youngest. 3. Adjectives ending in t\ or ^CIl reject the C of this syllable in the comparative degree : cbel, noble, ebl'-cr, nobler, ebel^ft, noblest, trocfcn, dry, trocfn*cr, dryer, troden-ft, dryest. 4. The following adjectives are compared irregularly : gut, good, bcffer, better, bcft, best, ^oc^, high, ^bfjcr, higher, ^Uc^ft, highest, na^c, near, ua^cr, nearer, nac^ft, nearest. toict, much, great. mcbr, greyer, more, greater. ntcift, most, greatest. 5. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative de- grees are subject to the same laws of declension as ad jectives in the positive degree. 72 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 6. The regular superlative form (as htX ficftc) is only used attributivelf/, i. e., with a noun expressed or under- stood : 2)iefe§ ift ba§ bejie ^^uc^, This is the best cloth. 2)ieie§ Suc^ ift bag befte (2;ud?), This cloth is the best (cloth). 7. To express the sm^erlsitiYe predicatively, the dative preceded by am (an bem) may be employed : 3)tefeg Xu^ ift am Ibcften, This cloth is the best. S)iefc S3Iume ift am fcdiJIlftClt, This flower is the most beautifuL Rem. This predicative for7n of the superlative is also used adverbially: Wlaxk fmgt am kftcn, Mary sings the best. 8. By way of emphasis, the genitive plural of aflcr is frequently prefixed to the superlative : S)icfe 33Iume ift bie a'tterfcI;onfte, This flower is far the most beautiful 2)ieje Slume ift am atlerfc^onften, of all. „(£r ift eiit attediebfte^ tinb/' " He is a dear little child." 9. The absolute superlative is expressed by prefixing to the positive degree such adverbs as fcl^r, p^ft, dui^crft : S)ie g^tac^ric^t ifl ^i5d;ft intereffant, The news is extremely interesting. „ n „auBerft „ 10. When two qualities are compared together in the comparative degree, the adverb VHtf^X is used instead of the ending ^tX : (£r ift mti^X ta^fer aU tJorfic^tig, He is more brave than prudent. Exercise 44. 1. My oldest brother is twelve years, and my young- est brother is six years old. 2. Do you wish finer cloth? 3. No, this cloth is fine enough. 4. To-day is the long- est day in the year. 5. Charles is five years older than his brother. 6. Mr. Krause sings very well (ganj gut), but Mr. English sings much better, and Mr. Eberhard sings the best of all (i?on alien). 7. The weather is very disagreeable to-day, but it is more stormy than cold. 8. The Colonel was not less prudent than courageous ORDINAL NUMBERS. 73 in the battle. 9. Mary Kranzler sang the German songs extremely beautifully. 10. William Friedliinder is just (gera^be) as (fo) old as {mt or al^) Frederick Schnaase. 11. This paper is not so good as that. 12. That book is larger than this. 13. The Oder is the longest river in North Germany. 14. It is longer than the Elbe. 15. Have you read the last news? 16. Albert Diirer was among (unter) the most distinguished painters of Germany. 17. The shortest road from Berlin to Trieste is by way of Dresden, Prague, and Vienna. LESSON XXIII. ORDINAL NUMBERS. Der erjle Xag, m Tlonat^, The first day of the month. Der gmeite Xag bee SJJonat^, The second day of the month. 2)ie brttte Seitc be^ 53uc^ee, The third page of the book. 2)er merte 3ult 1776, The fourth of July, 1776. 5lm neun^e^nten 5lugufl, On the nineteenth of Au- gust. Dk brciunb^roanjtgfle ^eftion, The twenty-third lesson. 3)ie funfunbinerjii3flc ^lufgabe, The forty-fifth exercise. Sr ftarb am brittcn 2^at, He died on the third of Cor) Sr i^arb ben britten Tlax, May. gUnfunbtJicrsiofte ^ufrjak* 1. 3c^ ^(ih^ ^eute »om ^errn $rofeffor ^tetnme^er ben er^ flen 33anb ber ©ef^id^te ber beutfc^en Stteratur »on ^einrid^ ^urj geborgt. 2. $err ©d^onberc^ n)of)nt xrn gweiten (Btorf bc^ fiinften §aufee auf ber rc(^ten (Bdtt ber grtebrtc^e^6tra§e. 3. 3)ie ^n.^etgen jtnb auf ber ftcbenten unb ad)ten 8eitc ber 3ei^ tung. 4. 3)ie te(ec^rap()tfc^e Dcpe'fcl)e ijon 5lmcrifa ijl ungefci^r in ber SJiitte ber »ierten (5pa(te auf ber britten er Written 3luflage be^ teutfc^en SGorterbud^e^ i)on „@c^mittt)enner", auf ber ^unbert ac^tunb»teqigften ®ette, in ber neununb^wanjtgften 3^tk i)on unten, finben* 6* d^rtftopl^ dolumbu^ ^at ^Imerifa am llten Dftober 1492 entbecft, 7. griebrii^ ber 3«?eite, gett)5{)n1t^ ber ©rope genannt, ftarb am 17ten ^(ugufl 1786. 8. (Sr tear ber britte ^onig »on9)reufem 9. griebri^ 2Bill)elm ber SSierte, ber fec^fle ^omg »on 5)reu^en, flarb am 2ten Scinuar 1861. 10. (^bti)t ftarb in SGeimar am 22ften ^ax^ 1832. 11. ©chiller ftarb in SBeimar am 9ten max 1805. 12. 5llbred}t Diirer mx ber grogte beutf(^e SJJaler be^ 16ten unb I7ten 3al^r^unbert^. 13. 3?lontag n^ar ber erfte Sanuar. 14. Dtenjlag toax ein fe^r ^ei^er Xag. Vocabulary. S>et S3anb, —t^,pl. Sanbe, volume. „ ^ontg, — §,;>/. — e, king. „ ^aifer, — ^,pl. — , emperor. „ ^reu33ug, — e8,p/. ^rcusjilgc, cru- sade. „ @to(f , — e§, story (of a house). f, ^&Uofo:|)^',— en, /»/.—cn, philos- opher. „ Urf^jrung, — g, origin. , S)ie Slnjctge, — ,;»/. — n, advertisement „ Stuftage, — , pi. — n, edition. „ S)e^e'f(^e, — ,/>/. — n, dispatch. „ Siteratur' ,—,pl- —en, literature „ 9}Zttte, —,pl. —n, middle. „ @^o(te, — ,pl — n, column. „ ^txh —, pi — n, line. 2)a8 (5nbe, —%,pl. —n, end. „ Snteref fe, — g, interest. „ SBort, — eS, pi Shorter, word. „ 2Bi5rterbud^, dictionary. 55orgen, to borrow. 2)auern, to last, endure, (gntbed'en, to discover. @terben (irreg.\ to die. ©enonnt', named, called. @ett)0^n'(id^, usual. Ungcfa^r {adv.), about, nearly. 3Son oBen, from above, from the top. 35on nnten, from below, from the hot tom. §eutig {adj.\ of to-day, to-day's, ^tejtg {adj.)^ of this place. Grammatical. 1. The Ordinal Numbers are formed from the Cardirud lumbers : 1. By suffixing 4c, from StDCi to ncunjcl^n* 2. " '' 4tC, " Jtoanjig upward. 'Re.m. In compound numbers onhj the last one takes the suflSx. ORDINAL NUMBERS. 75 Ist 2)er crftc* 40th !2)ei • toicrjig^tC, 2d „ 50th n titnfiifl'ftC* 3d „ 60th II fccl)5ic5=ftC. 4th „ mer-tc. 70th II fiebcnjicj^tC, or fieb* 5th „ faiif'^c. Sifl'ftC. ()th „ jed^S^tC. 80th n ad;tjig.ftc. 7th „ ficbeu*tC» 90th It ncunjig^tC* 8th „ ad;t^C, 100th II ^unbert'ftc. 9th „ neun^tC* 101st II ^unbert iinb crftt. 10th „ je^n^tCv 125th II ^uiibcrttilnfunbjwan* nth „ t\\'M. m-Mt. 12th „ ivo'iMu 200th II jtrct{)unbcrt*ftc» 13th „ breijcl;u4C. 500th II fiiiifljimbcrt^tC. 14th „ Uieqel^u^C* 1,000th II taufcnb^te* 15th „ fiintse^n^tC* 1,001st II taufcnb unb crftc. 16th „ \t&llt\i\\4u 1,026th 11 taufcnb fcc^SunbjU^an* 17th „ fiebenjc^n^tC, or ficbjc^n-tc* aiS'ftC. 18th „ ad;t5C^n*tC» 1,626th II tviufcub fcd;e^iinbcrt 19th „ ncun5c(;u4c» unb fcd;6unb5H?an* 20th „ jioonsig^tc* m-Mt. 21st „ einuub,:ittjau5i3'ftc» 2,000th II jtt?citaufcnb4tC. 25th „ tihituiibsTOausig^tC* 20,000th II jlvanjigtaujcnb'-ftc. 30th „ brcitji^^tc- 100,000th II i^unbcrttaujcnb^tC. 35th „ tiinjuubbrciBta^tC, 500,000th II filnf()uubcvttau]enb;ftc Rem. 1 . The forms brit=tC and a(^ t=t are euphonic variations from the rule for forming ordinal numbers. Rem. 2 . Ordinal numbers are subjec t to all the laws of declension of adjec- tives {see Lessons XX.. , XXI. , and X XII.). 2. Names of the seasons^ oi m.ontlLS, and of the days of the week, are masculine : 1. The Seasons (hit ^a^rcSjcitCll) : S)Cr Sinter, — g, pi. —, winter „ griil^ring, — S, /;/. — c, spring. {Exc. %ai i^ril^iabr, — c8,/>/. 2)Cr Somnicr, — ^,pl. — , summer. „ ^crbjl, — ce, pi. —i, autumn. spring.) 2. The Months (bic 5}lonatc) : 2)er (^a'niiar, — §, January. „ ^c'bruar, — §, February. „ aJJaq, —eg, March. „ Slpril', — e8, April. „ 9)?ai, — e8, May. /, 3unt, —'8, June. 2)er ^iili, —'8, July. „ Siuguft', —eg, August. „ ©c^tem'ber, — g, September, „ Otto'ber,—g, October. „ SSiQ'Gtm'htx, — g, November. „ 2)ejem'ber, —8, December. 76 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 3. The Days of the Week (bic Xa^t ber SBo^c) 2)cr @onntag, — g, pi. — e, Sun- day. If SJJontag, — ?, jo?. — e, Mon- day. „ 2)tenftag,— §,/)Z. — e, Tues- day. 25er 9HittttJoc^, — ,7^^. —e, Wednesday „ 2)onnerftag, — S, ;?/. — c, Thurs- day. „ ?^rettag, — S, ;?/. — e, Friday. „ ©amftag, — g, /./. — e, Saturday. („ ©onnabenb, — g,j9Z. — e, *' .) 3. Present and imperfect tenses of ftcrkn, to die : Present Tense. id? fterb'^C, I die. bu ftirbft, thou diest. er fttrfit, he dies. n)ir fterb'^cn, we die. t^r ft€i*b'*t, you die. fie ft e r b '* en, they die. Imperfect Tense. \^ \iOXbf I died, bu ftarllft, thou diedst. cr ftarti, he died. tDtr ftarb^Ctt, we died, i^r ftarb'*t, you died, fie ft a r b '== CIl, they died. 4. In German the verb is often removed to the end of very long sentences {see sentence 5 in Exercise 45). 5. When the adverbial expression of time is very long, it md^j follow that of place {see Less. III.^ 2). ©critter ftarb in SSeimar am 9ten Wiox Schiller died in Weimar on the ninth 1805. of May, 1805. Exercise 46. 1. I am now reading the third volume of the history of Germany by K. A. Menzel. 2. On what page are you reading? 3. I am reading on the hundred and fifty-third page, seventeen lines {in the seventeenth line) from the top (»on oben). 4. The advertisement of the sale of the house is in the third column of the fourth page of to-day's paper. 5. Francis the Second, em- peror of (5?on) Austria, and the last emperor of Ger- many, died in Vienna on the second of March, 1835. 6. Charlemagne (^arl ber (S5rofe),the first emperor of Ger- many, died in Aix-la-Chapelle January 28th, 814. 7. The Crusades lasted from the end of the eleventh till towards the end of the thirteenth century. 8. Friday will be the first of January. 9. Saturday was the cold- est day of this month. 10. Wednesday will be the raREGULAB VERBS OP THE FIRST CLASS. 77 shortest day of the year. 11. Immanuel Kant, tho greatest philosopher of the eighteenth century, died in Konigsberg on the twelfth of February, 1804. 12. He was eighty years old when (al^) he died. LESSON XXIV. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. Gicbenunbijicrjigftc 5(ufoabc, 1. X)tx (Solbat btnbet fein Xaf^entud) urn fcincn 5lrm. 2. SBerlin unb Hamburg ftnb burd) eine ^ifenba^n i^crbunbcn. 3* 2)er SKunbar^t \)at bie 5Gunben be$ ©olbatcn »erbunben (dressed). 4. IDer 53ud)binber l)ai ba^ ^ud^ t?crbunbcn. 5. 3c^ \)ciht bie ijorle^te, aber ntc^t bie le^te Shiflagc be^ SCorter^ bu^e^ in ber 33uc^f)anblung »on §errn 2)?e^er gcfunben. 6. C^()riflop^ ©ottlieb (Sd^rbter, (an) Drc;ani|l in 9^orbbaufcn, ^ai im 3a^re 1717 ba^ Plainer erfunbcn. 7. Xrinfen ^ic licber (do you prefer) X^ee ober ^affce? 8. 3^ trinfc licbcr X[)cc. 9. X)k 8d)iiler ()aben x\)xt beutfd)en ^lufcjabcn fd)on be,qonncn. 10. $err ^trad \)cit ba^ ^au^ im »origen 3al;re fitr 8500 1()(r« gefauft ; er ^at e^ »orgeftern fiir 9100 Xblr. t?crfauft. 11. Sr \)C[i babei' 600 X()(r. gemonnen. 12. 3)ie 33ducrtn bat ba^ (^arn (^anj (jut cjefponnen. 13. 2)cr S5erbre^er l>at bie ©efc^e bc^ ?anbc^ gebroc^en. 14. 5ld), lieber griebrtd^I !Du ^aft biefc fd)one neue SSafe ganj jcrbrod)cn. 15. ^err 9^icbner fprid)t ju 3f;nen. 16. Die 5lu^gaben ber S^tecjierung waren ml ju grog ; jtc cntfprad^en gar nid^t ber 5lrmut^ bee Sanbe^. 17. 3)cr 53auer brifd)t ben 3Ceijen. 18. Da^ ^inb t)at bae beutfc^c SSbrtcrbud) »on bem Xifd)e genommen. 19. SBir f)aben ^:errn ^ir^t)off ^cute 2)^orgen auf ber (Btrage getroffen. 20. 2Bir treffen ibn fe()r oft im 2)?ufeum. 21. Der 3ager (>at ben ^afen ni^t getroffen. 22. T)a^ ^inb ^at ben 53aU iiber ba(J .?)aug ge^ tt>orten. 23. :Der ^aumeiftcr ^at einen fc^r fd^bnen ?»Ian fiit ba0 neue 3'lat^l)aue enttrorfen. 24. (£o? ^abm ^. mtte,baU. „ 33aumeifter, — ^,pl —, architect „ Organift', —en, pi —en, organ- ist. „ Pan, — eg,jo/. ^tSnc, plan. t, Siclcgra^^', — en, pi. —en, tele- graph. n SSerbre'c^er, — 8, pi — , criminal. M SBetjen, — §, wheat. „ 3Bunbarjt, — e8, surgeon. 2)te ?trmut^, — , poverty. ,1 3ln§gabe, — ,pl — n, expense. ,/ ^ciuerin, — , pL — nen, peasant woman, peasant's wife. „ 9Jegte'rung, — , pi. — en, govern- ment. Vocabulary. 2)ie (SifenBa^n, —,pl. —en, railroad, " SSafe, — ,pl. — n, vase. „ SBunbe, — ,pl. — n, wound. 2)a8 @in!ommen, —8, income. „ ®arn, — t^,pl. — e, yarn. „ @eje^', —i^fpl. — e, law. „ torn, —t^,pl. tijrner, grain. „ 2anb, —t^,pl. Scinber, land, coun- try. „ 9Jat^^au9, — eS, pi. 9iat^^aufer, city hall, ©abet', thereby. Oar (adv.), at all. ©Ictd), immediately. SteBer, rather. (Slef'trifc^, electric. SSorlet^t, next to the last. Rem. It will have been noticed that most masculine and neuter nouns be- long to the Old Declension, and that most feminine nouns belong to the New Declension. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs are divided into seven classes, ac- cording to the changes which the radical vowel under- goes in forming the jprincijpal ^arts : 2. In the irregular verbs of the^/'<§^ class each princi- pal part has a different rad- ical vowel. Thus : 3. Irregular verbs of ihQ first class : Present Indicative, Pres. Inf. Imp. Ind. Perf.Part. {or)t, a, a, 0* Present Infinitive. Stnb^cn, to bind, toerbinb'^en, to unite, to tie up, finb^en, to find, [to bind wrong, erftnb'^cn, to invent, [ing-en, to sing. trin!<=en, to drink. ibcginn'=en, to begin. gctT3tnn'=en, to gain. ft)inn*citf to spin. 2d and Sd Persons. (formed regularly.) (formed regularly.) Imperf. Indicat. ^anb, berbanb, tanb, erfanb, fving, tranf , geir>ann, f^ann, Perfect Participle, gcbunbcn* berbunben. gefunben. erfunben. gefnngen. getrunlen. getx>onnen. gcf))onnen. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CLASS. 79 tirC^'Cn, to break. • jcrbred;'*cn, to break to pieces, fprccb^en, to speak. tnt\pxcd)''tn, to correspond to, or with (governs the dative^. V)crf^rec^'*en, to promise. brcjc^^cn, to thresh, iic^m^en, to take, flcrb^cn, to die. treff*cn, to meet, hi*, shoot. tDcrf»en, to throw, cntrcerf =en, to project. bu brit^ft, er Bridit, „ jerbrid^jl, „ *lHid)t, „ f^rid?fl,„ f^nd;t, „cntj^r^|l,„*fpric^t, Scrbvad;, cntf^}rac^, gclirodicn* jcrbroc^cn. gcjpro^en. entf^rod?cn< „i)erj^rid^fl, M*f^ri(^t, tocrf^rad^, bcrf^rod^cn brifc^fl,,, brifc^t, brajd^, gcbrofc^en. nimmj^ „ nimmt na^m, gcnommcn. ftirfcjl, „ fiirbt, j^arb, gefiorben. triffft, „ trifft, traf, getroffcn. h?trfjl, „ tvirft, xoax\, gctDorfcn. „ cnttt?irfjl, „*h)irtt, enttuarf, cntworfcn. Rem. 1. The first class contains jTorfy-^^ye verbs. Rem. 2. The inseparable prefixes !bC/ QC^ VXif 'QtXf %ttf etc^ give modifica- tions to the significations of verbs analogous to those given in English by the ■yllables be and /or : To have^ holdj speak, come, give, get. To behave, behold, bespeak, becovie, forgive, forget. Exercise 48. 1. The child is tying the ribbon on (um) his hat. 2. The surgeon has been dressing the wounds of the sol- diers. 3. The bookbinder has bound this German Dic- tionary wrong. 4. Professor Morse invented the Elec- tric Telegraph in 1838. 5. Do you prefer tea or coffee ? 6. 1 prefer (trinfe lieber) coffee. 7. The peasant's wife is spinning the yarn. 8. That old criminal has often broken the laws of his land. 9. His expenses did not at all correspond to his income. 10. The peasant is threshing the grain. H. Have you taken my umbrel- la? 12. Willidm says that .Henry took it. 13. I met your uncle, Mr. Rahn, yesterday in Leipsic. 14. The hunter has shot the hare. 15. The child has thrown his ball into the water. 16. The architect has designed (enttverfen) a very fine plan for the new church. 17. Karl Friedrich Schinkel, the most distinguished architect of the nineteenth century, drew (entmerfen) the plan for the Old Museum in Berlin* 18. Potsdam and Berlin are connected by (»crbunt>en burc^) a railroad. 80 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). LESSON XXV. IREGULAR VERBS OP THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH CLABSEB. 1. $akn ®te bte l^euttge B^ttung gelefen? 2, ^^Zein, ic^ ^aU ftc nci^ nic^t gefe^en, 3* 3)er ^aufmann l^at ba^ Zn^ gemef^ fen. 4* Der 3}^effer mtft ba^ gelb* 5. ©ffen (5ie gem (do you like) Dbjl ? 6. D^, ic^ effe e^ fe^r germ 7. Da^ ^inb ift einen 5lpfeL 8. (S^ |)at ba$ ^utterbrob gegeffen unb bte 2)^{l^ getrunfen, 9. Da^ 9)ferb frtft ba^ $eu. 10. ^arl ^at fein 33u($ mgeffem 11. 51^, gri^, bu trittft auf bie fi^onen 5ReI!en unb Xulpen. 12. ®raf »on ^ern^borf ^at ben ^cnig »on $reupen im (Suropciif^en ^ongreg' p faxi^' yertreten. 13. !Der 53auer grdbt einen neuen 53runnen. 14. Der Sciger fc^ldgt fetnen $unb, tt)eil er ben Si^iann gebiffen (bitten) b^t. 15. 2}^ein Diener mirb bie 5lepfel unb bie 53irnen na^ |)aufe tra^ gen. 16. grdulein granj b^it gejlern 5lbenb ein fd)waqe^ feibe^ ne^ ^leib getragen. 17. ^ine |)anb m\6^i bie anbere (one good turn deserves another). 18. §eute 2)^orgen ^ben mx breije^n gorellen gefangen. 19. ^txx ©teinbac^er l^at un^ febr freunblic^ empfangen. 20. 3c^ ^tte x^n fiir (I consider him) einen c^rlic^en ^am. 21. Der £ommi^' i)at fein (3t^ \)alV er^alten. 22. 3)ie 33ibliot^e! p 2)re^ben ent|)a(t 300,000 «Bdnbe unb 2800 ^anbfc^riften. 23. 2Bo ijl |)einri^? 24. (Sr f^laft noc^. 25. (Sr ^at f^on au lange gef^lafcn. 26. S©o iji ^il^elm? 27. (Sr ijl im (Garten; ic^ tt)erbe i^n rufen, Vocabulary. S)er Wc'^f —Q,pl. Sle^fel, apple. „ 53runnen, — §, />/. — , Avell. n 2)tencr, — 8,jo/. — , servant. „ ^omtntS', — , pi. — , clerk. „ ^ongre^', — e8, Congress. „ SD^effer, — §,pl. —, surveyor, ^ie S3irne, — , />/. — n, pear. „ goret'te, —,pl. —n, trout. „ 9^elfe, —,pl. — n, pink. „ Xulpt, — ,pl. — n, tulip. „ ^anb,— ,p/. ^Snbe, hand. 2)ie ©d^rtft, — ,j»/. — en, writing. „ §anbf(^rtft, manuscript. 2)a§ §elb, —t^,pl. — er, field. „ ©efjalt', — e§, /jL — e, salary. „ §eu, — e§, hay. „ ^ferb, — eS, 7?/. — e, horse. ®ern (adv.), gladly, willingly. Slnber (aflf/*.), other. (S^rlid; (adj.), honest, honorable. @etben, silken, silk. @uro^)a'tfd;, European. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 81 Grammatical. 1. In irregular verbs of the second^ third, diXidi fourth classes, the radical vowel of the imperfect only variei from that of the present : Pres. Inf. Imp. Ind. Perf.Part. No. of Verbs. Second Class, Third Class, Fourth Class, a (n, 0), ic(i), a, a(u,o), U. 10. 14. 2. Irregular verbs of the second class Present Indicative^ Present Infinitive. 2d and M Persons. ^th'-tn, to give. bu gibft, cr gibt, tocrgeb'^en, to forgive. V »crgib[t, M ==g^t>t, fe^^cn, to see. . fie^ft, „ fie^t, Icf^en, to read. „ liefeft, „ Hcj't, tne[f*en, to measure. n ntiffeft, It ntiBt, e[[*cn, to eat. [inals). . i[feft, u ifjt, freff^Cll, to eat {said ofani- r. friffcjl, f/ tnf3t, i>ergc[f'*en, to forget. „ toergiffcft, u *g^i3t, trct^en, to tread, step. trittft, „ trttt, tertret'^cn, to represent. „ tocrtrittfl, „ 4ritt, jertret'^cn, to tread. V sertrittft, „ -tritt, Imperfect Indicat. gab, toergab, las, mag, tocrgag, trat, t»ertrat, jcrtrat, Perfect Participle. gcgcbcn. ttergebcn. flcfc^cn. gclcfcn. gemcffen. gcgeffcii. gcfvefi'cn. vjcrgcffen. gctrctcn. tocrtrctcn. jcrtrctcn. 3. Nearly all irregular verbs with a, 0, or au, as the radical vowel, take the umlaut in the second and third persons singular of the present indicative. Present Tense. Imperfect Tensi J. t^ f(^(ag'=C, I strike. \^ WWC^f I struck. bu f(^ldg=ftf thou strikest. bu f(ftlun=ft, thou struckest. cr ft^Iiigst, he strikes. cr fd)IU(|, he struck. Xm tc^lag%cit, we strike. h>ir f c^ I u g '* en, we struck. i^r jd?lag%ct, you strike. ibr fd)(ug'*et, you stnick. fie f d) t a g % en, they strike. fie f ^ ( u g '* en, they struck. 4. Irregular verbs of the third class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative^ 2d and Sd Persons. Imperfect Indicat. Perfect Participle j^raftscn, to dig. bu nrcibft, er grobt, grub, flcprabcn. |c^lag*cu, to strike. „ fd^Iagft, „ fdUcigt, fcbhig, gcfc^Iagcu. trag-en, to carry, wear. „ tragft, „ tragt, trug, gctragcn. teajd^*cn, to wash. , tt?5fd)fl, „ n)a[(^t, ttjufc^, gewafrf^en. D 2 82 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 5. Irregular verbs oi the fourth class : fang-en, to catch. bu fiiiigft, er fiingt, ftng, gcfangciu em^fanf\en, to receive. „ em^faugft, „etn)}fangt, em^fing, em^fangeiu ^alt*en, to hold. {?dtt[t, „ mt, mtr ge^alten. Cnt^alt*en, to contain. „ cnt^dltft, ,, 4alt, entt)ielt, eut^alteu* er£)alt=en, to receive. „ ert>alt[t, „ ^alt, ert;tett, er{;alten. bc^alten, to retain, keep. „ be^dltft, „ mt, bc^ielt, fee^aiten. fd;Iaf*eu, to sleep. fd^Idfjl, „ fd;Idft, fd;Iief, gefc^laten. ruf^en, to call. (fonned regularly. ) rief, gerufen. jio^*en, to hit, bump. „ PMi, II mt, m, geftogcn. 6. Many foreign words retain their original pronunci- ation. Thus the final § is silent in ^ommi^^ Exercise 50. 1. Have you read the history of the German litera< ture by Heinrich Kurz ? 2. I bought it a few months ago ('OCX eintgen 3)Zonaten), but I have not yet read it. 3. Have you measured the cloth? 4. Yes, it is thirty yards long. 5. What are the boys eating? 6. John is eating an apple, and William is eating a pear. 7. The horse has eaten the hay. 8. The scholars have forgot- ten their lessons. 9. You have stepped on the tulip. 10. The peasant has dug a deep well. 11. The boy has struck the dog. 12. The servant has carried the apples and the pears home. 13. William wore yesterday even- ing a black coat and a white vest. 14. I caught five tro'^.t yesterday. 15. Professor Bauer received (empfan^ gen) them very kindly. 16. The library at Vienna con- tains over 300,000 volumes and 16,000 manuscripts. 17. Have you received (er{)a{ten) your to-day's paper? 18. Mr. Kraus received a letter this morning from his brother-in-law, Mr. Blumenthal. 19. Mr. Friedlander says that he will sell his new house. 20. Why will he not keep the new house? 21. The old house is more convenient, and warmer than the new house. 22. Is the child sick? 23. Yes, but the doctor says that it has slept long enough. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 83 LESSON XXVI. IBBEOULAR VERBS OF THE FIFTH AND SIXTH CLASSES. (ginunbfiinfjigftc ^ufgabc. 1. Dc0 3ager^ |)unt) \)at bte ^u^ be^ 53auer^ gebtffen. 2. (Einc ^Iappcrfd)lan3e \)at ben (5o()n be^ 33auer^ tjorgepcrn gc* biiTen, al^ er auf bem 33erge ^eibelbeeren pfliidte. 3. Xa$ ^iub greift nac^ fctncm ^tlbe m epiec^el 4. 3)er foliiti'tk^ ner ^at ben Xafc^enbieb ergriffen, glei^ nad)bem er bae ®elb gc^ fto^len ^atte. 5. 3^ begreife ni^t, n^arum gdebri^ noc^ ntc^t an une gefc^rieben bau 6. Ser bat gcpftffen? 7. 3Ber ^at in ba^ ^ud^ gefc^nitten? 8. Der ©c^neiber fc^neibet bae 2:ud^. 9. $err ^arfunfel ^at bent ^aufmann 800 Xblr. gelieben. 10. ^err $)?aumcr bat in feinem 53riefe fetne 9kife nac^ bem 3fiiefen^ gcbirgc gan^ lebbaft befc^rieben. 11. 1)cv ^auer treibt ba^ 35ie^ auf (to) bie SBeibe. 12. Sie gie^en Del in^ Seucr (" you add fuel to the flame"). 13. 3Der ^eUncr bat ben SSein in bie ©Icifer gcgoffen. 14. ®ie l^aben ba^ 3ict ni^t getroffen, ®ic l^aben p bo^ gef^offen. 15. $eute ift ba^ SJ^ufeum gefd)lofiJ fen. 16. ^err 53urdbarbt bat geftern fein ^ortemonnaie i^erlo^ ten. 17. 35ier $ferbe jieben ben SBagen. 18. $err ^raun f)at beute eincn SBccbfcl »on 600 Xf)Ir. auf ^errn 2)ietri^ gc^ogen. 19. Die Solfen jieben (move) na^ (Siiben. 20. Die (Solbai? ten baben febr tapfer gefo^ten. 21. Der ^orbmad)er flid)t tu nen ^orb. 22. Wlaxk bat einen febr fd)onen ^ranj gefloc^ten. 23. dx bob ben ^orb auf feine (^^ulter. 24. dx er^ob bie (Etimme unb f^rie urn (for) ^iilfe. 25. Der Dieb ()at gelogcn unb ben ^aufmann betrogen. Vocabulary. S)cr ^crb, —t^,pl. ^i5rBe, basket. ,, Sorbmad^cr, — 6, basket-maker. ,t ^ran5, — §, />/. ^ranjc, crown, garland, wreath. n ^olijci'biener, — 9>, pi — , police- man. II ©pieQCl, — 9i,pl. — , mirror. Xer 2:afd;enbtcb, — c§, pickpocket. „ ©ilbcn, — §, south. „ gfJorbcn, —8, north. „ SBagcn, —8, pi —, wagon. „ SBcc^fcI, — «, pi. — biU of ex- change, draft. „ 5Bcin, — 0, i)/. — e, wine. 84 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). S)ic 93ccre,;)/. — n, berry. " ^etbelbeere, — , whortleberry. „ ©(flange, —,pl. — n, snake. r, ^k^^erf^Iange, rattlesnake. „ ^u^, — , pi. ^uf)e, cow. f, 9^eife, — ,pl. — en, journey, trip. n @d>lt{ter, — ,pl. — n, shoulder. Tt @timme, — ,pl. — n, voice, [ure. f, SSeibe, — ,pl. — n, meadow, past- *j SSolf e, — , pi. — n, cloud. 2)aS S5ilb, —t^,pl. — cr, image. „ geucr, — g, pi. — , fire. „ £)el, — e8,7>/. — e, oil. „ ^ortemonnate', —^,pl. —8 {pro* nounced port-mo-nay'), purse, pocket-book. ,; SStei>, —t^,pl. —t, cattle. tt S^^h — ^^f P^- — ^r mark. Seb^aft {adj. and adv.), lively, spirited. 9^ad^bem (conj.\ after. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the fifth and sixth classes have the same vowel in the hnperfect tense as in the j>er- fect jparticiple. 2. The radical vowel in verbs of the fifth class is al- ways Ct ; in those of the sixth class it is usually ic or C. 3. The following table shows the vowel changes : Present Infinitive. Imperfect Indicative. Perfect Participle. No. of Verbs. Fifth Class. ie, h it, 40. Sixth Class. ic, %etc. 52. 4. Irregular Verbs in the fifth class : Present Indicative, Imperf. Perfect Present Infinitive. 2d and Sd Persons. Indicat. Participle tcif ^cn, to bite. (formed regularly.) mr gcbiffcn* greifsen, to grasp, seize (after). U (( grtff, gegriffcit. begreif sen, to comprehend. (( (C begriff, begrtffcn. crgretten, to seize^lay hold of. (( il ergriff, ergriffen. ^feif^cn, to whistle. (( a m. ge^flffcn. fd;netb*en, to cut. (( t( fd;mtt, gef(^nitten« j^Iei^^cn, to split. (( (( m% gef|3ttffen. Icif)icn, to lend, loan. (formed regularly.) im, gcHei^Ctt* fd^reib^en, to write. (( (( fc^rieb, gef^riebeii. befc^reib'=en, to describe. 11 (( bef^rieb, befc^rieben. fd)ret«=en, to cry (out). li (( f^rie, gefd^rieen. treib»en, to drive. (( it trieb, gctrieben. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED^. B5 5. Irregular verbs of the sixth class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative^ 2d and M Persons. Imperfect Indicat. Perfect Participle. giC^=en, to pour. (formed regularly.) 0Of?. Ocooffcn. fc^ie^*cn, to shoot. u n fd^og, gefd)o[|en. fc^Iie^^eii, to close, shut. (( {( W^% gcfd^Iojfcn. »erlier'*en, to lose. (( (C ijcrlor, bcrlorcn. jic^^en, to draw. (( (( m. gcjogcn. \t^Uv[, to fight. bufiOT, crftt^t, mt, gCfOt^tCtt* ftec^t^en, to braid. „ fltc^tft, „ flic^t, fTod^t, gcflod;tcii. ^eb*en, to lift, raise. (formed regularly.) ^ob, gc^obcn. lilg^en, to lie. (( (( M, gelogen. fectriig^en, to deceive. (t (( betrog, bctrogcn. 6. The definite article is omitted Jjefore names of the points of the compass {see § 55,2, 2) : S)ic SSoIfcn gie^cn gegen 9^orbcn, The clouds are moving towards the north. 7. Some foreign words retain much or all of their original declension : Singular. jDaS ^ortemonnaic. S)e8 ^ortemonnatc*g» 2)cm ^ortemonnaic. S)a8 ^ortemonnaie. Plural. 2)ie ^ortcmonnaie*^* 2)cr ^ortcmonnaic*^* 2)cn ^ortcmonnate*^» 2)ic ^ortemonnaic*^* Exercise 52. 1. The dog has bitten the child. 2. A rattlesnake bit the peasant-woman this morning. 3. The policeman seized (ergreifen) the pickpocket immediately after he had stolen the pocket-book from Mr.Wieland. 4. There goes the whistle I (e^ pfetft !) 5. The cook is cutting the bread. 6. Professor Hiiusser, in his History of Germany, has described the battle of Leipsic in a very spirited manner (leb^aft). 7. The peasant has driven the cattle to the pasture. 8. " He has only added fuel to the flame." 9. The hunter has shot four hares this morning. 10. The Library and the Museum are closed to-day. 11. John lost his German Grammar yesterday. 12. Yes, but he found it this morning on his brother's table. 13. 86 IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). Only one horse is drawing the wagon. 14. I shall make a draft (eineu 2Ged)fe( iki)tn) on Mr. Niedner to-day for five hundred and seventy-five dollars. 15. The bas- ket-maker has made (flec^ten) two baskets this morning. 16. Mary has made (flec^ten) a beautiful garland. 17. They are crying for help ! 18. The pickpocket has sto- len three thousand and five hundred dollars from the merchant. 19. The German soldiers have fought very bravely in the battle. LESSON XXVII. IRKEGULAR VERBS OF SEVENTH CLASS. RECAPITULATION OF IRREG. VERBS. Srciunbfiinfsigftc ^ufgak* 1. SBiffen (Bte, tt)o $err 33rin!ett^ofer ttjo^nt? 2. 9^ein, ic^ tt)ei§ nxdjt, tt?o er mo^nt 3. 3c| wu^te nic^t, bag $err ©c^one^ berg in 53erlm ift. 4. ^ennen (Sie §errn ^rofeffor Xrautmann ? 6. 5^^ ja, mx fannten ii)n f^on, al^ tt)ir in !I)eutfc^lant) tt)aren, 6» 3Bte nennen <£te btefe ^lumen ? 7. 3)tefe ift eine ^^actnt^e,* unb jene ift dn 35ergigmeinmd)t»* 8. 2Bu^ brennt? 9. !Da^ $au^ gegenitber un^ brenitt (is on fire). 10* 2)er ^o^ ^at ben ^affce gebramtt (roasted). 11. |)err 2Beigmanbel ^at 3^nen einen S3nef »on ^errn Cramer in ^kn gebrai^t. 12, $err |)eibel brac^te 9lad^rtc^t »on unferm D^eim in SiRagbeburg, 13, tarl, tt)e{§t bu, n)0 mein ^leiftift ift ? 14. 9^ein, i^ ^abe i^n ^eute ni^t gefe!)en, 15. ^aben (5ie bie 5^ac^rid)t »on ^merifa in ber ^entigen ^ieftgen 3eitung gelefen ? 16. ^dn, ii^ ^aU bie i^eutige 3^itung noc^ ni^t gefe^en. Grammatical. 1. Irregular verbs of the seventh class follow, in con- jugation, partly the laws of regular, and partly those of irregular verbs. 2. Present and imperfect tenses of totffcil, to know : * See page 436. IRREGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 87 Present Tense. Id^ iDCif, I know, bu VitX^tf thou knowest. cr toei^, he knows. t»ir n> i j f * Cn, we know, i^r tD i i f * Ct, you know. flC teifi^Cn, they know. Imperfect Tense. id; lUU^=tC, 1 knew. bu tt?u^*tC|'t, thouknewest cr tt)Ut3*tC, he knew. n?ir t» u ^ ' ten, we knew, i^r ID u {3 * tCt, you knew, fie tt) U ^ * ten, they knew. 3. Irregular verbs of the seventh class : Present Infinitive. Present Indicative, Imperfect Perfect 2d and Sd Persons. Indicative. Participle, bring-cn, to bring. (formed regularly.) hta^'At, qt'hta6^''t ben!*cu, to think. U (( bad;4e, ge*ba(^4. brenn*cn, to burn. <( (( Brann4c, gc*bronn*t. !cnn*cn, to know. (( (( !ann4e, ge-fann*t. nenn*cn, to name. (( n nann4c, ge*nann*t. n)iff*en, to know. bu njetgt, cr tceifj. n}u^4e, ge^lDufj't. 4. To know, meaning to he acquainted with, is rendered by Icnncn. 5. General view of the changes the irregular verbs in all seven classes undergo in forming the principal parts : Class. Present. Imperf. Partic. Examples. No. Ist i (or C), a, U (or O). btnb=»cn, banb, gc^bunb^en. 45. 2d 3d 4th c, a, c. 0, It, a. a, tc (or i), 0. gcb^cn, gab, gc*gcb*cn. fd;(ag*en, fc^tug, gcfd^tag^cn. l)alt»cn, ^ielt, ge^alt^en. 14. 10. 14. 6th 6th ci, i (or it), i or (it). it(t,etc.),0, 0. bci§=cn, bi^, ge*bi[f=cn. gicg^en, gofi, gc*goff*cn. 40. 52. 7th anomalous. bring*en, brat^*te, gc*bra(!^*t. 16. Total number of i rrftgiilar verbs ... 191. 6. Examples of the seven classes of irregular verbs : 1. First Class. ]6rc^*cn, itttt^, gc^bro(!^*cn. Binb^en, 5anb, ge^Blinb^cn. f^rcd^-cn, f^rad;, gc^^ro^^cn. ftub^cn, fcinb, ge*fitnb*cn. brefc^^cn, brafcft, gc^brcfci^-en. fmgscn, fang, gc*fung*cn. net)m»en, na^m, gc*nomm*cn. bc*Qtnn*cn, be^jiann, bc*gonn*cn. fterb^cn, flarb, gc*fiorb*en. gc*n>inn*en, gc*tt>ann, gc*tt)onn=en. trcff^en, traf, ge4roff«en. lpinn»en, ij>ann, gc*f))onn*cn. tt)erforf*en. 88 IREEGULAR VERBS (CONTINUED). 2. Second Class. e[f*en, frei>en, meff sen Derge[f==cn, tret=en, ga0, kg, mag, tergag, trat. ge^gc6-eu. ge4ef*en. ge^fed^en. geg-eff^en. ge^freff-en. ge*me[f*en. »erge[f^en» gctret*en. jrai^en, fd;Iag:=en, trag*en, tt)af(^^en, fant|fc^o[[.en. ge=5og*en. ge*foc^t*en. ge^ob^en. 7. Seventh Class. bad;4e, ge*ba^*t. brann^te, ge^brann^. faunae, ge^fann4. nann4e, ge=nann*t n)ug4c, ge*iT)uj3t. bent^en, brenn*cn, fcnn*en, itcuiven, tDiff^en, With most irregular verbs, the original length of the radical vowel is preserved in all the principal parts : 1 . Vowel long. Iej*en, trag*en, lag, trug. gc-ftolOI^^n. ge4ef*en. gc4rag*en. 2. Vowel short. f^tnn-en, f^jann, ge-f^onn'cn. freff^en, frag, ge^reff^en. brenn^en, brann4c, ge*brann4. Rem. 2. With some verbs the length of the radical vowel is changed in one j)r more of the derived principal parts. The change is more frequently from iong to shorty than it is from short to long : htxpm, Uf^, ge*Mff-en. I nC^ttt^en, nal^nt, gc^notttnt^en. fd;neib*en, fc^nitt, ge^c^mtt^cn. | trcff-en, traf, gc4roff=en. Rem. 3. In the sixteenth century the participle of cffClt was formed regu- larly gccfftn* This was then contracted into (JCffCll* In the seventeenth cen- tury another gc= was added, by false analogy, and hence the double prefix ill geocffen. Exercise 54. 1. Are you acquainted with General von Lichten- stein? 2. No, I do not know him. 3. What do you call {mt nennen 'Bit) this fish? 4. That fish is a trout. 5. The fire does not burn. 6. The cook has not yet roasted (kennen) the coffee. 7. The house of Mr. Kraft VERBS WITH fcill; TO BE, AS AUXILIARS". 89 is on fire (brfnnen). 8. Do you know where Mr. Ruprecht is? 9. He is now in Munich. 10. Charles, dost thou know when Alexander von Humboldt died ? 11. Alex- ander von Humboldt died in Berlin on the sixth of May, 1859. 12. Children, do you know how old Schil- ler was when he died ? 13. He was forty-five years and six months old. 14. When did you meet Mr. Rosen- berg? 15. We met him this morning in (auf) the street. 16. Where didst thou find the German grammar? 17. I found it on my brother's table. LESSON XXVIII. VERBS WITH fcin, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. Sr ifl fe^r retc^ gewefen, He has been very rich. @r {ft arm gen^orten, He has become poor. dx ift md) ^aufe gegangen, He has gone home. Sr ttJar nac^ ^aufe gcgangen, He had gone home. ©r tt)irb n)a^rfd)einli^ md) fcer He will probably have gone ©tabt gegangen fein, to the city. giinfunbfiinfjigftc ^(ufgak* 1. Sr ijl ju ^aufe. 2. dx wax ^u ^aufe. 3. dx ift p ^aufe gewefen. 4. dx wax ^u §aufe getrefen. 5. dx mirb ^u ^aufe getrefen fein. 6. Da^ ^Better ij^ je^t fcfjr ()etg gctrortcu. 7. ^err ^altfd^mtbt ijl ^aufmann gca^orben. 8. Da^ 2Bct^ ter wax \d)on fe^r f)eig gcn?orben, al^ wix nad^ 3talien gingen. 9. 2Bie jtnb 8ie »on ber (Stabt gefommen? 10. 2Bir fmb gc= fa^ren. 11. griebrt^ i|l ^u gug (on foot) na^ bcr (5tabt gc^ gangen, aber 2Bi(^elm ifl gcritten. 12. Da^ ^>fcrb ift iibcr ben ©raben (ditch) gefprungen. 13. 3)er 33leiftift lag auf bent ^if^. 14. X)k 33u^cr tiegen auf ben Xifd)en. 15. 3)a^ ^int» wax f^on geftorben, d^ ber 33ater nac^ ^aufe fam. 16. Dent 3dger ijl fein .?)unb nac^ bem 2i5albe gefolgt. 17. 3c^ werbc nac^ bem SJiufeum ge^en, aber §err ^ranjler wirb waljrf^ein;* li^ f^on na^ $aufe gegangen fein. 90 VERBS WITH fCtn, TO BE. Grammatical. 1. Most 'intransitive verbs take {ciu, to he, instead of l^aben, to have, as their auxiliary. Rem. 1. The greater part of intransitive verbs are primitive or derivative irregular verbs. Rem. 2. Nearly all regular verbs and many irregular verbs are transitivf^ and, as such, take !(iaben for their auxiliary. Rem. 3. All impersonal verbs take l^atJCll as their auxiliary. Rem. 4. It will be indicated in the vocabularies hereafter when the verbs take fcill as their auxiliary. 2. Indicative mood of fciH, to he: Imperfect Tense. i^ toar, I was. bu matsft, thou wast, cr toar, he was. tt>tr tD a r * en, we were, t^r XoaX'^i, you were, fte marten, they were. Pluperfect Tense. I had been, etc. \^ toar gcttjcfcn. bu toarft gctDcjen. cr toar gctuefen. \x>\x xoaX'tVL g e n? e i e n, \{)X Xoax*i getr^ejen. fic ti) a r * cil g c tt) c i c n. Second Future Tense. I shall have been, etc. \^ tocrbe gctocfeit fein* bu totrft getocfcu fcin* cr totrb gemcfeu [cm* ttJtr tr> c r b * en g c tu c j c u jctn^ i^riDcrb^et gchjcfen \tvx* fie tt> e r b * en g e UJ e j e u f ein* 3. Indicative mood of tterbcil, 2^o hecome: Present Tense. i^ IVX, I am. bu (lift, thou art. er tft, he is. XQXX finb, we are. i^r fcit), you are. fic finb, they are. Perfect Tense. I have been, etc. ic^ bin ncttJCfcn^ bu (lift gctDcfeu. cr tft g e n? e j e u. ir»ir ftnb gciDcfeu, i^r fctb gcujcjcu. fie fmb gciDcfcu. First Future Tense. I shall be, etc. ^ tocrbe fctn* bu loirft fcin* cr ttirb fcin* vcir ti3crb*en fcin* i^r n)erb==et fctn. fic h>crb*en fein* Present Tense. \6} toerbsC, I become, bu tUttft, thou becomest. cr tDttb, he becomes. Wir h) c r b * en, we " become, t^r n) c r b = et, you become. u r b * e, he became. tt>ir iD u r b * en, we became, i^r tDurb^et, you became, jic tt>urb*en, they became. VEJIBS WITH (Cin, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. 91 Perfect Tense. I have become, etc, tt^ bin gettjorbcn* bu t)tft gctijorben. er ift gctDorben. totr ftnb gctDorbcn. ifjr f cib g c tt> r b e n. fte finb gctt)orben. First Future Tense. I shall become, etc. i^ tocrb=c ujcrbcn* bu toirft tDcrben. cr iDirb tcerben. tDtr t» c r b ^ en tocrbcn* i^r h)crb = ct tt)erben. fie tDcrb^cn n?crbcn. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. id? tear ficttorbcn* bu toarft gctDorbcn. er tear gemorben. toir n?ar==cn gen? or ben. i^r h)ar*ct gehjorben. fte n) at* en geh) or ben. Second Future Tense. I shall have become, etc. \^ mxh't gcttjorbcn fefn. bu ttirft getDorben feim cr toirb g e tD r b e u fcin. n?ir tt> e r b * en g c n? o r b e n fctn. i^r werb*ct geh)orben jcin» fie tt) e r b * en g e ti) o r b e n jcin* 4. The indicative mood of lottllticn, to come Present Tense, id) fomnt=C, I come, bu f m m * ft, thou comest. er fomm = t, he comes, ttir fomm = cn, we come, ibr f oiiim*t, you come. fie 1 OT m == en, they come. Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. {6} bin oefommem bu bift get mm en. cr ift getommeu. trir finb gefommeu. i^r fcib gefommeu. fie finb gefommeu. First Future Tense. I shall come, etc. id; toerbse fommen. bu toirft fommen. er toirb f c m m e u. iTjtr ii^ e I b * en fommen. i&r n? e r b * ct fommen. fie tt)crb*en fommen. Imperfect Tense, id; fant, I came, bu fam*ft, thou camest. er fant, he came. n?ir f a 411 * en, we came, ibr fam*t, you came, fie fam^en, they came. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. \6} tear gefomnten* bu n)ar*ft gefommen. er ttar gefommen. trir tt? a r * en gefommen. \[)x xoax't gefommeu. fie tt)ar*cn gefommen. Second Future Tense. I shall have come, etc. id) tocrb-c oc^ow^^f" bn toirft gefommen er toirb gefommen tinr ujcrb^en gefommen ibr n3crb*et gefommen fie tuerb* en gefommen fctn. fein, fein. fetn* fein. fciiu 92 VERBS WITH fcln, TO BE, AS AUXILIARY. Imperf. Indie. Per/. Part. ttJar, getoefen. tDurbc, gett)orben. fid, gefaflen. fu^r, gefa^rcn. m^, gegangen. tarn, getommcn. log. getegen. t^rang, gef^rungen ftarb, geftorben. folgte, gcfolgt. 5. Some intransitive verbs (having f ellt as auxiliary) : Class. Present Infinitive. 2. fetit, to be. I. toerb^^en, to become. 4. faH-en, to fall. 3. fa(;r^en, to ride. 4. ge()=en, to go. 1. !onim*en, to come. 2. lieg^etT, to lie, 1. ||3rttTg*en, to leap, spring. 1. fterB^en, to die. Heg. folg^en, to follow. Rem. 1. fatten and fa^rCU take the umlaut in the 2d and 3d persons of the present singular. Bern. 2. ^a^ttll means to ride in a carriage or other means of conveyance. QliCttCn means to ride on a horse. Exercise 56. 1. Has Mr. Franz been here ? 2. No, he has not been here. 3. The weather has become very cold. 4. Where is Mr. Stromberg? 5. He has gone to Magdeburg to^ day. 6. Did Mr. Meyerheim go to Potsdam in his car. riage (fa^ren) ? 7. No, he went on horseback (retten). 8. We went to Charlottenburg on foot this morning. 9. Mr. Wiedner has not come home yet. 10. Cologne lies on the left bank of the Rhine. 11. Your German newspaper is lying on the table. 12. The daughter of Mr. Friedlander had already died before (e()e) he came home. 13. Whom do you wish? 14. 1 am looking for Mr. Wiegand. 15. He has gone to Dresden to-day j he will be here to-morrow. LESSON XXIX. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 2)cr 53rtef tft f^wer p (efen, SBaeiftpt^un? 2)a^ ^au0 ift au t)erfaufen, The letter is hard to read. He wishes to see the book. What is to be done? The house is for sale. THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 93 3t^ V^xtt jte (tncjcn, I heard them sing. @ie mac^en mid) lac^en, You make me laugh. 2Bir iie()cn fpa^ie'rcn, We are going to take a walk, ^r ift fpa^ieren gefal)ren, He has gone to take a ride. ©icknunbfiinfsigftc ^ufpk« 1. Der 6c^neit)er ^at i)erfpro^en, mtr ten ^od \)cntc Tlox^ gen ju fc^icfen. 2, d^ ift mcine 5lbftd)t, iibcrmorgcn nac^ (Sr^ langen ^u ge{)en. 3. 3^ ttJiinfc^e mit ^errn (2d)norr ^u fpre^ c^en. 4. (Sr ift augenblidlid) md)t gu §aufe» 5. S^ mxt fpdt ; e^ ift bie (;od)fte 3ctt (high time), na^ $aufe ju get)en. 6, 2)icfe^ §au^ ift fogleid^ ju »er!aufcn. 7. ^ier jtnb mcr mo^ blirte Binimcr ^u »ermictl)en. 8. Sine ^errf^aftlic^e 2Bo()nung nebft ©a^ unb SBafferleitung ifl in ber Seip^iger /. — c, gas. 5(ngenbn(flid), for the moment. 3)orticj, of that phice. [noblemen). ^crrfAaftlid?, fine and spacious (fit for ^KobUrt', furnished. (Sclig, blessed. e(^Ied;t, bad. ©oglcic^ (adv.), immediately, [with. ^fJebfi (prep, with dat.), with, together 9?and)cn (rer/.), to smoke. (S^ajic'ren (see 6, 2, p. 9r>). 25ermie't^en (reg.X to rent, let. i^4 THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 5. SSIeiben (fein aux.), to remain. blicB, getlietjen, 2. ®i^en (fein aux.), to sit. faB, gcfe[fen. 6.» 2;^un, to do. t^at, get^an. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the Infinitive Mood has two tenses, the Present and the Perfect : Present Tense. Wtl'trX, to love. bau=en, to build, finb^en, to find, ge^^en, to go. njerb^en, to become, fein, to be. Perfect Tense. gcKcit \i^tXif to have loved, gebaut ^aben, to have built, gefunben ^aben, to have found, gcgangen fctlt, to have gone, genjorben fein, to have become, gettjefen fein, to have been. 2. The Infinitwe is usually preceded by JU, to : 3^ tDilnfcE)e nttt t^m y\ f:^rec^en, I wish to speak with him. S)er 33rief ift fc^tuer yx tefen. The letter is hard to read. SBir fatten genug ju t^un, We had enough to do. 3. While in English both the present participle and the infinitive mood are used as verbal nouns, in German only the Infinitive is thus used : 2>a^ 9lCtlCtt tjl etne angene^me Riding is an agreeable exercise. SSetDegung, ®C5Ctt ift feliger at§ nel)men, It is more blessed to give than to re- ceive. Rem. The Infinitive, used as a noun, takes the neuter gender : S)(I§ dtcttCtt* 4. The Infinitive (with JU) may be preceded by the prepositions auftatt, of)nc, Utti: Slnftatt gU ge^en, bleibt er, Instead oi going, he remains. (Er lobt baS Su(^, o^ne eg gelefen He praises the book, without having P ^aben, read it. Rem. The preposition Uttt is used before the Infinitive : (1), to express purpose or desire ; (2), after adjectives which are preceded by JU {too), or which are followed by gCltUg {enough) : @r ift nac^ ber @tabt gegangen, Ultt ein S3ud; ju faiifen, S)a§ tinb ift ju jung, UJtt allein in ben 2SaIb ju geben, ©r ift ni^t alt OCttUfj, UVX atlein in ben 2Balb p geljen, He has gone to the city to buy a book. The child is too young to go into the woods alone. Pie is not old enough to go into the woods alone. . THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 95 5. The Infinitive is sometimes used in a passive sense: 2Ba8 ip ju t^un? What is fo 6e done? 2)a6 S3u(^ ift nic^t ju ^aben, The book is not to be had. 6. ^n is omitted when the Infinitive is preceded: 1. By the verbs ma(^cn, ^clfcn, prcn, fii^Icn, fc^cn, ^cigcn, ncnncn, Ic^rcn, Icrncn : ©if ~>id;en mid? lac^en, You make me laugh. 2Bir {;Drtcn i^n fmgcn, We heard him sing. (Sr lebrte mic^ baS 0at)ier f^icten, He taught me to play the piano. @ic Icrncu ba3 ^Iat>icr f^ielcn, They are learning to play the piano. 2. By the verbs bkibcH, QC^cn, ftc^en, Ucgcn, rcitcn, faljrcn, l^aien, fcin, in certain idiomatic expres- sions : (Sr Bteibt ft^Cn, He keeps his seat. er ge^t f^JOjicrCn, He is taking a walk. (5r fa^rt j^ajiercn, He is taking a ride (in a carriage). (5r rcitet f^ajieren, He is taking a ride (on horseback). Rem. 1 . 3u is also omitted after other verbs, as will be hereafter explained. Bern. 2. /. —er, picture. S3ear'beiten, to revise, work over. 9?eijen, to charm. 53ebeu'ten, to signify. ©Icinjen, to shine. SBraud^en, to use. 5t(t, old, ancient. 3Jiobern', modern, ^nbufiriett', industrial ^Ib^Iid^, sudden. SBoUig, full, complete. S3crii^mt', famous, distinguishbd. @i>ren, to honor, respect, ©riinbcn, to found, ©tiften, to endow, found. SSerein'igen, to unite. 9$erme^'rcn, to increase, enlarge. 9tcijenb (adj.\ charming. SScbcu'tenb {adj.), important. ©ISnjenb {adj.), brilliant. Oebraud^t' {adj.), second-hand. Grammatical. 1. In German, as in English, the verb has two Parti- ciples : the Present and the Perfect. 1. The Present Participle is formed by adding sCllb to the stem of the verb. 2. The Perfect Participle is formed, by (1) adding A to the stem of regular, and =cn to the stem of irreg- ular verbs ; and (2) prefixing sQC to tlie stem of all verbs, except those having an inseparable prefix (k=, ent=, cm^)=, ^^c.),and those with sircn (4eren) in the infinitive. Rem. The radical vowel of many irregular verbs is changed. Present Infinitive. Ixthtn, to love. bttU'en, to build, finb^en, to find. crfinb'*en, to invent. Present Participle. U e b * Cnb, loving, b a u * cnb, building, f t n b * Cnb, finding, e r f i n b '# cub, inventing. Perfect Participle. QC * H e b * t, loved, ge * b a u * t, built. gC'funb* en, found. erfunb'^CU, invented. 2. Participles are often used adjectively. They are then subject to all the laws of declension and compar- ison that apply to adjectives : 8lm folgcnben Sage, On the following day. 2)tc SJercinigten ©taatcn. The United States. E 90 PARTICIPLES. Rem. The participle often takes a purely adjective signification : 2)a8 retjenbe 33ilb, The charming picture. ©ebrau^tC S3ilc^er, Second-hand books. 2)er beril^mtefte 2JiaIcr, The most famous painter. 3. The j)resent participle is used much less in German than in English. It is rarely used after fciH, to he, ex. cept when it has an adjective signification. 2)a§ S3Hb tft reijenb, The picture is channing. 4. The perfect participle, on the other hand, is used much more than in English. 5. Participles are frequently translated into English by the verb, with a relative pronoun for its subject: 2)ic im 3abre 1809 gegriiubetC The University of Berlin, which was UniJjerfitat ju 35erltn, founded in 1809. Exercise 60. 1. On the following day they went by way of Frank- fort to Cologne. 2. (The in 1520 completed cathedral in Magdeburg is among the most beautiful churches in Germany.) 3. From the tower of the cathedral we have a most (gctn^) charming prospect. 4. Breslau, the largest and the most important city in Silesia C^c^le^ jten), has 160,000 inhabitants. 5. The university in Prague, founded in 1348, was the first university in Ger- many. 6. The university in Leipsic, which was (en- dowed) in 1409, was the second university in Germany. 7. (The twenty-second enlarged and fully revised edi- tion of the German Grammar of Mr. Dr. Heyse is now to have.) 8. Second-hand books in all languages are for sale here cheap. 9. (The on the twenty-fourth March on the consumption suddenly died Mr. Prof, Behr was the oldest professor on the here [^cftge] univer- sity.) 10. The treaty between the United States and Austria is not yet concluded. 11. Peter von Cornelius, who died in the year 1867, was the most distinguished painter of the nineteenth century. THE POTENTIAL VERBS fOIHlCn AND muffCn* 99 LESSON XXXL THE POTENTIAL VERBS fOnnCtt AND IttiiffCtt* 3^ fann e^ nic^t lefcn, I can not read it. 5tannfl t)U e^ lefen ? Canst thou read it? dx fann e^ lefen, He can read it. 2Bir fonnen e^ ni^t lefen, We can not read it. (Bk fonnen e^ lefen, They can read it. (Sie fonnten e^ lefen. They could read it. dx ^at e^ lefen fonnen, He has been able to read it. dx mxt) e^ lefen fonnen, He will be able to read it. ^r ^at e^ ni^t gefonnt. He has not been able to do it. $err 53raun fann X)eutf^, Mr. Braun knows German. ginunbfct^jioftc ^lufgalbc* 1. 3^ fann feinen ^rief c^ar ni^t lefen. 2. ^arl fagt,bag cr feine teutfc^e ©rammatif ni^t ftnben fann. 3. fonnen (Sie mit un^ fpajieren c^el^en? 4. 9]ein, ^eute fijnnen wix nic^t fpa? jieren c^e^en. 5. ^err Cramer fagt, bag er ben ^rief nid)t lefen fonnte (or bag er ben ^rief nic|t \)ai lefen fonnen). 6. $err ^arl |)artmann fann 2)entf^ unb (Spanif^. 7. Sffiarum l)at Wlax'it bae beutf^e ?ieb nid)t gefungcn? 8. (Sie l)at e^ nic^t c^efonnt (or jie l)at e^ nic^t ftncjen fonnen). 9. dx nnrb ben 58rief nic^t lefen fonnen. 10. 3^ inug ^eute einen ^rief an ^errn 2)^agmann fc^reiben. II. ^err JDietnd) l)at.mir iiefac^t, ba§ er ^eute nac^ ^amburc^ c^eljcn mug, urn einic^e J^reunbc au^ 3(merifa p treffen. 12. 2Bir fonnten md)t lanc^er bletben; mix mugten na^ $aufe 9el)en. 13. §eute SJ^orc^en \)aU ic^ fo inelc ^viefe f^reiben mitffen, bag ic^ nid)t nad) bent 5>?ufcum babe c^e^ ben fonnen. 14. Wlox^tn werben mx nac^ 3)re^ben unb libera morc^en nac^ $rag 9cf)en. 15. $err(5c^norr n>unfd)t einen Web- ref fiir feine ^wei ^inber ; ber ?ebrer mug Snglifc^, X)cutfcb unb gran^ofifc^ Selciu'ftg (fluently) fpred)en fonnen. 16. 3d) habt bie britte ^lu^gabc ber @efd)id)te »on Deutfc^lanb in ber gan^en ©tabt nic^t finben fijnncn. 100 THE POTENTIAL VERBS UmtVL AND mUffCH. Grammatical. 1. The German verb has no potential mood. The po- tential mood of the English verb is in most cases trans- lated into German by the use of the verbs fiinucn, can ; ltiVi\\t\if 7nust ; etc. 2. The Potential Verbs (liinncn, ttliiffcn, etc.) have a com- plete conjugation. They take l^abctt as their auxiliary. They belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs : Present Infinitive. !ijnn*en , to be able. mil If * en , to be obliged. Imperfect Indicative, Perfect Participle. tomtit e, gc^fonn^t. Rem. The use of the Potential Verbs is much more extensive than that of the auxiliaries of the potential mood in English {may, can, must, etc.). They are often translated by circumlocutory phrases, as tiJuntlt^ to he able ; lUiifs fen, to be compelled, to be obliged (to have to). 8. The Potential Verbs (called in German the aux- iliaries of 'mode) are never used as independent verbs. They are only used to limit or qualify the infinitives of other verbs (though the limited verb is frequently understood) : 3c^ !flnn e§ nic^t, I "an not (do) it. Sd; :^ak eg nic^t ijcfonttt, J was not abje (to do) it. (5r \^(d e§ gcmu^t, Be was compelled (to do) it. 4. Siinncn {to he able, can) indicates : 1. Moral or physicial possibility : @r fann lefen unb fd;reiBen, H(» ^san read and write. 2. A possibility or contingency : fOttn=tC, I could. bu !ann=[t, thou canst. \SVL !oitn = tC^^ thoucouldat. er !ann, he can. er fonn^tc, he could. tcir t c u n * cn^ we can. tr)tr ! u n := ten, we could. tt)r ViiMW^if you can. i^r foun^tCt, you could. tic f 5 n n » en, they can. fie fonu^tcn, they could. THE POTENTIAL VERBS fonnCH AND milffCU. 101 Perfect Tense. I have been able, etc. i6f f^ah't gcfonttt bu iaft gefount. cr iat gcfonnt. n)it ^ab^Ctt setonut. i^r i)ah^t gctonnt. ^ab*cn gctonnt. First Future Tense. I shall be able, etc. tocrbsc fiinncn* toirft f u n c n, toirb f5nnen. toir tt)erb*cn f5nnen. i^r n)erb*ct fonnen. fic tcerb^cn !onnen. Rem. ^bnncn^ to he ablcj is derived can is from the same root. flc bu er Pluperfect Tense. I had been able, etc x^ Wt't gefonut bu ^at^tcft gctonnt cr i)at»tt gctonnt. tt)ir ^at'tcn gctonnt. i^r ^at*tct gctonnt. fie ifat^ttn gctonnt Second Future Tense. I shall have been able, etc. i6f tocrb=c gcfonttt f^aiittu bu toirft gctonnt i^ahtn* cr ttjirb gctonnt i^ahttt^ n)ir tocrb^cn gctonnt f^ahttt* i^r tr>crb*ct gctonnt ^abcn* fic tDcrb* en gctonnt i)a^tn* from tcnnCIl, to know. The English 6. 531uffcn (mtcst) is frequently rendered into English by such expressions as to be obliged, to be corripelled. 7. Indicative mood of mitffcn^ to be obliged, must : Present Tense, id} mn^f I must, bu mu^t, thou must, er mu^, he must. n)ir milf j*cn, we must, i^r milff'tf you must, fie m il n ' en, they must. Perfect Tense. ^ ^ttbe gemu^t, etc, 1 have been obliged, etc. First Future Tense. ie^ toerbcmuffcn^cfc, I shall be obliged, etc. Imperfect Tense, i^ mu^ste, I was obliged, bu m u 5 * tCft, thou wast obliged, cr mu^^tC, he was obliged, loir m u § * ten, we were obliged, t^r tn u * ttt, you were obliged, fic m u ^ * ten, they were obliged. Pluperfect Tense. t^ ^otte gemu^t, etc., I had been obliged, etc. Second Future Tense. td^ ttjerbe gemu^t ^aben, etc., I shall have been obliged, etc. 8. The participial form is only used when the principal verb is understood. The infinitive form is used for the participle when the principal verb is expressed: 3d> ^bc nid^t bcren tbnnen, I could not hear. 3c^ ^attc gc^cn miiffcn, I had been obliged to go. (but) 3^ ^iibc c8 md)t gctonnt, I could not (do) it. (Sr ^vit C3 gcmu^t, lie has been compelled (to do) it 102 THE POTENTIAL VERBS mUtU AND mOgCH* 9. The Potential Verbs follow the same laws of posi- tion in the present and imperfect tenses as the auxilia- ries ^abtn, fcin, and UJCrbcn* In the compound tenses the infinitive form of the potential verb is placed after the infinitive of the modified verb : (Sr toirb eg (efcn fiinilCll, He will be able to read it. @r f^at eg lefen fiiltttett/ He has been able to read it. Exercise 62. 1. I can not find my pencil. 2. Freddy, canst thou bring me my German Dictionary? 3. The teacher can not hear what we are saying. 4. We could not hear what he said. 5. They will not be able to read this letter. 6. (Charles, thy father says that thou imme- diately [glet(^] home go must.) 7. We must send this letter to America by way of Liverpool. 8. I could not go to walk with them; I had to remain at home and write my German exercise. 9. Mr. Kraft will have (miiffen) to sell his new house. 10. We will not be able to go to Augsburg to-morrow ; we will go to Nuremberg to-morrow, and day after to-morrow we must {1st Fut.) go to Augsburg. 11. Mr. Krahn wishes a clerk; he must be able to write and speak German with fluency (gelauftg). 12. Why did you not read the letter? 13. We could not (it). LESSON XXXII. THE POTENTIAL TERES ^DOUttt AND Ittli^Ctt^ 3d^ mU gletc^ ge^en, I will go immediately. 3c^ werbe gtei^ ge^en, I shall go immediately. 2BoUen @ie mit m^ ge^en ? Do you wish to go with us ? 2Bir tt)olIten ba^ ^uc^ faufen, We wished to buy the book. 2Bir ^aben ba^ 53u^ f aufen n)olIen, ^u magft mit un^ ge()en, Thou mayst go with us. 3c^ mao, biefe^ Xuc^ ni^t, I do not like this cloth. dx mag fagen toa^ er n?iU, He may say what he will. THE POTENTIAL VERBS tOOUCIt AND mOgeil* 103 1. SBoUcn ©ie mit un^ nac^ ber ©tabt fa^ren? 2. $eutc SD^orgen \)ciht id) feine B^tt, nad) ter ^tat)t ^u fa^ren, i^ mu§ einen 53ricf an (to) meine dUcxn fc^retben. 3» 3^ n)iU ^ier in geipjicj nid)t langer bleiben, t>a^ ^Setter ift je^t fo fait, nag unt> unangcnel^m ; id) n?ert)C iibermorgen nac^ ^eitelberg ge^en. 4. 2Gir rooUten geftern nac^ ?>otet)am get)en, urn tie gro^e 5^ara'te gu fe()en, aber e^ ^at ben gangen Xag geregnet, unt) n>ir finb t)cn gangen 2:ag ju ^aufe gebliebcn. 5. SBarum ^abcn (Sie geftern *^bent) ba^ ?iet) nic^t fmgen n^oUen ? 6* 3c^ f)ir n^erben ju §aufe bleiben. 12. SBiinfc^en ®ie biefe^ ^ud)? 13. 5lcin, ic^ mill jene^ ne^men. 14. 3c^ ttjerbe e^ 3f)nen fc^iden, roenn (Bk tt)ollen. 15, 5Bo tt)ol)nen (Bie? 16. 2Bir njo^nen in ber 3immer>®tra§e, gegeniiber bem neuen ^aufe be^ |)errn dikf^ ftabl. 17. ®ie fonnen t^un wa^ ®ie woUen (you may do what you like). Grammatical. 1. The Potential Verb toollcn usually indicates wiUing- neS8, mclinationj desire, intention, or determination : 3rf) toitt S^cid; gebert, I will go immediately. SBoUcn ©ie ben53rief lejen ? Do you wish to read the letter? 2. The indicative mood of tooflen^^o he willing, to wish: Imperfect Tense, \^ ttJOKstC, I was willing bu h) 1 1 * tCft, thou wast willing, er to oil' it f he was willing. n)ir tD 1 1 * ten, we were willing, i^r tt) H * tCt, you were willing, fie tt> H * ten, they were willing. Present Tense. t^ tDttt, I am willing, bu lDiU*ft/ thou art willing. CT toifl, he is willing, tuir tt) 1 1 * cn, we are willing. \\)X h) n * t, you are willing, fie toon*ett, they are willing. 104 THE POTENTIAL VERBS UJOttetl AND ItlligCn, Perfect Tense. id) i^alie gettJoUt, etc., I have been willing, etc. First Future Tense. \^ tocrbc tooflcn, etc., I shall be willing, etc. Pluperfect Tense. tc^ l^attC gCttJOttt, etc., I had been willing, etc. Second Future Tense. i^ tocrbe gcttoKt l^akn, eermi8* sion, concession, and sometimes desire or liking : (Sr Utttg gf^cn, He may go. [soldier. @r mag ein ta^jferer @oIbat jetn, (I concede that) he may be a brave 3fc^ mog biefeg %,yx^ nid^t, I do not like this cloth. 4. Indicative mood of ItlSgCtl, may, to he jpermitted : Imperfect Tense. \^ VM^^Atf I might, bu m d^ = tCft, thou mightst. cr nto^^tC, he might. tt)tr ntod;^tcn, we might, il^r moc^^tCt, you might, [ic m d^ * ten, they might. Present Tense. X^ wag, I may. bu lttag==ft, thou mayst. cr mag, he may. ttJir mi5g = cn, we may. i^r tltog^f^ you may. fie m g * en, they may. Perfect Tense. I have been permitted, etc. First Future Tense. \^ toerbc mijgc«,efc., I shall be permitted, etc. 5. Time how long is put in the accusative case: (Sr blieb bcn ganjCn ^ag. He remained the whole day. Pluperfect Tense. td> l^attc gcmoc^t, e^c, I had been permitted, etc. Second Future Tense. id^ loerbc gcmoc^t fjabcn, e^c, I shall have been permitted, et: Exercise 64. 1. Shall you go to Potsdam to-day? 2. Do you wish to go to Potsdam to-day? 3. Would you like (tDoUen (5te) to read this letter? 4. From whom is it? 5. It is from our friend Mr. Diez ; he is now in Kome. 6. Why will (ttJoUen) you not go with us to the Museum? 7. I must stay at home and write a letter to my brother. 8. Can you not write it this evening? 9. No, this evening I must call upon (befuc^en) Mr. Behr. 10. Did you go to the Museum this morning ? 11. Yes, THE POTENTIAL VERBS foUCtl AND biirfCt!. 105 but we could not see the paintings (because [trctl] the museum closed was). 12. What paintings did you wish (woUen) to see? 13. I wished to see the famous paint- ing by (yon) Holbein. 14. 1 have often wished to see it, but I have never been able to see it yet. 15. Charles, thou mayst go with us to walk, if thou wishest. 16. I do not like this book ; it is not at all interesting. 17. Mr. Beyerlein says that from his house he can see the spire of the Cathedral of Freiburg. LESSON XXXIII. THE POTENTIAL VERB fottCtt AND tlUtfeQ* SBcr foil gc^en ? Who shall go (is to go) ? 2)u foUft @ott, bctncn ^errn Thou shalt love the Lord IkUn con ganjem §ergen, thy God with all thy heart. 2Btr foUten nac^ ^aufe ge^en, We ought to go home, ©r foil fe[)r franf fein, They say he is very sick, ^err ^ul)u foil im 3ir f D n = ten, we should, t^r fon=^tCt, you should. flC j n =< ten, they should. Pluperfect Tense. tc^i^atte gcfoHt, e^c, I had been obliged, etc. Second Future Tense. \^ ttjcrbe gcfottt i^akn, etc. I shall hav« been obliged, etc. THE POTENTIAL VERBS foflCH AND bUrfCH. 107 2. With a negative, bilrfCO is usually translated by " mu$t not." ^icr biirfcn ^ic nicl;t raud;en, You must not smoke here. 3. It sometimes has the signification of " cg'3une^men, au^'gugc^en, mit'jugeben, iDcg'jugcbcn, an'gufommcn, tuie'bcrjutommcn, aug'jujprcc^cn, ftatt'juftnben, frci'suf^rec^en, Imp. Ind. auS'fu^rte, aus'ftellte, ab'fc^ricb, an'fing, an'na^m, mit'im^m, tt)eg'na(;ni, aus'ging, mit'ging, ttjeg'ging, an'tam, ttjie'berfam au^'fprad^, ftatt'fanb, Per/. Participle. auS'gcfii^rt. au^'geftcttt. ab' gefc^riebcn. an'gefangcn. an'gcnommcn. mit'genommcn. tr»eg'gcnonimen. au8'gcgangen. mit'gegangen. tucg'gegangcn. an'gctommen. tDiebergetommcn au«J'gef^roc^en. ftatt'gcfunbcn. frei'j)3roc^, ifrei'gcf^rod^cn. the pvfjix of separable compound verbs takes no COMPOUND VERBS. Rem. 2. When JU is used with the infinitive mood, it adheres to the simple verb: aursufjjvtdjcu, tteo'sugc^cu* Rem. 3. In the perfect participle the syllable QCs is retained, and is placed between theprejix and the verb: aU^'gcf^rOt^en, tOCg'gCgaiigen* Rem. 4. It will be noticed that many verbs, which are compound in German, are translated into English hy simple verbs: atl'ft^tCitJCn, to copy. 3. Indicative Mood of aniicl^men, to accept : Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. i(^ na^nt— an/ i accepted. bu na^mft — an^ thou acceptedst. er na^m — ail/ he accepted, ttjtr na^men— an, we accepted, t^r na^mt — atl, you accepted, fic na^men— aU/ they accepted. Pluperfect Tense. I had accepted, etc. \^ ))(iiit an'gcttommen* bu ^atteft ott'genommem er Wte an'genommen. xoxx fatten an'g e :t o m m c m t^r ^attct an'g e n m m c n, fie fatten an' g c n o m m e n. Second Future Tense. I shall have accepted, etc. x^ toerbc an'gcnontmcn l^aBem bu njtrft cn'geuommen ^aben. er tDtrb an'genommeu l^abeu, ttjtr ttjcrbcn an'g e n o m m e n \)abtn. t^r tDerbct an'genommeu ^Beu. fie ttjerbeu an'g e u o m m e u ^abcu. \^ Vit%VXt—m,' I accept, bu nimmft— an, thou acceptest. er utmmt— an, he accepts, tcir ue^meu — an, we accept, t^r ne^mt— an, you accept. fie ne^meu— an, they accept. Perfect Tense. I have accepted, etc. \^ l^atie an'gcnontmcn. bu ^a[t an'genommeu. er ^at an'geuommeu. voir ^aBeu an'g e u o m m e u. t^r I;abt an'genommeu. fie ^abeu an'geuommeu. First Future Tense. I shall accept, etc, t(^ ttjcrbc an'nc^mcn* bu tt)irft an'uebmeu. er totrb an'ne^meu. UJir tcerben an'u e ^ m e u. i^r tcerbet an'ne^meu. fie U)erbeu an'u e ^ m e u. Rem. The prefix adheres to the verb except in the simple tenses when used in direct or leading sentences. In such cases it is separated from the verb and placed after it (and also after the object of the verb, if the verb is transi- tive) : 9^a^m er eS an ? Did he accept it ? -3?a, er ua^m eS an, Yes, he accepted it. tcber^ol'te ^eute, tt)a^ cr He repeated to-day what he i)orgeftern fagte, said day before yester- day. 112 INSEPARABLE COMPOUND VERBS. 1. SStr ^alm gar nic^t »erfte^'en fonnen, tt)a$ er fagtc. , 2, 3^ ^abe ba^ ^u^ ni^t gelefen, i^ ^abe e^ nur fef)r flit^ttg burc^'gefe^en, 3* 2)ret (Solbaten fmb ^um geinbe itbergegangen. 4. 3)ie Sonne mirb balb un^terge^en ; mx muf fen glet^ m6) $aufe (ge^en), 5» (Sie ift fc^on un'tergegangen. 6* Sic ^aben bte 9tec|nungen be^ ^aufmanne^ gan^ genau unterfuc^t', aber ftc fjaben gar feinen Seller gefunben. 1. Der SBunbarjt l)at btc SS5unbe be^ Solbaten unterfuc^f (probed). 8. $err ^rau^ l^at feinen (Garten mit einem fe^r f^onen Bctune umgeb'en. 9. ^err ©enerd »on 53ernftein ^at ben 53efe^l tt)iberru^fen. 10. ©r 1)ai alle feine 5lufgaben burc^gefef)en. 11. Sie woUen ntor^? gen tt)ie'ber!ommen. 12. (Sr n)ieber^olt' ma^ er un6 geftcrn ge^^ fagt ^al 13. Sinb Sie iiber ^anno'cer unb Sraunfd^weig gefom^men? 14. 3a, aber ic^ bin nur bireft' burc^'gereift, n^eil ic^ meinen SSater ntorgen in |)eibelberg treffen muf. 15. 2Bir l^aben 2)eutfc^lanb buri^reift". 16. 3)er gifd^er Ixit un^ ii'bergcjs fe^t. 17. ^err 3)ietri^ bat bie ©efc^id^te »on 2)eutfd)lanb itber^ fe^t.' 18. ^err $rofeffor Diefenbac^ \)at un^ ben gan^en 5lbenb ntit einer ^oc^ft intereffanien ^efc^reibung feiner legten 9?eife in Spanien unterl^arten. 19. 3^ ntuf ba^ ^ud^ mie'ber^olen. 20. 2Bie gefdllf 3^nen bie neue ^ird^e? 21. Sie ^at mix ganj gut gefallen. 22. ©ie jtnb fe^r um^gegangen. 23. 2Bir ttJoU^ ten ben ^erg umgel^'en. 24. 3c^ ^XOi^', jcrbroc^'cn. burc^retf'tc, burd^reift'. itbertraf, ilbertroff'en. untging', utngang'cn. h)tberf^ra(^', tutberfprod^'en. tt)ieber^ortc, ttjiber^olt'. Present Infinitive. Be * f U ct) ' C n , to visit. cut * b e cf ' e n , to discover. Cm^ * t a It g ' c u , to receive. Cr * f t n b ' e n , to invent. gc * f a U ' e It , to please. iJCt * ft C ^ ' e It , to understand. jCt * b r e c^ ' e It , to shatter. burt!^ * r C t f e It , to traverse. Ukr 'txt\\' tVl,io surpass. lira * g C V C " » to avoid. ttibcr sy:|)re(^'cit,to contradict. tijiCbCr * ^ 1 ' e It , to repeat. 5. Some verbs, as rcttcH, rcifen, laufcn, f^jringcn^ etc. (§ 135, 2, Rem. 1), take fctll as the auxiliary, when indi- cating a motion towards a particular ^lace ^ otherwise they have l^a^CH for the auxiliary: @r tft itad) ^Berlin gcrcift', He has gone to Berlin, (but) er \f^i biel OCrCift', He has traveled much. 6. Verbs that are intransitive when simple often form transitive compounds : @r tft na(^ bcr @tabt gcpng'eit, He has gone to the city. ®ic l^akn ben geinb urapng'Cn, They have outflanked the enemy. 7. The inseparable particles k, tViif tX, %t, t>tt, ^tX, burd), ixbtX^ etc., are unaccented. Rem. The dissyllables it^r, UUtCr, tO'ltHXf tOlhtVf however, take a light or secondary accent. 8. The verb gefaflcil governs the dative case : SKtC gCf attt' eg ^l^lteil ? How does it please you ? Exercise 70. 1. I have only glanced through (burd^fe'^en) the letter very hastily. 2. The soldiers are deserting to the en- emy. 3. Has the moon gone down ? 4. The sun had already set when they arrived. 5. The merchant has examined the accounts of the tailor. 6. Mr. Kranz and Mr. Meyerheim have traveled through (burc^reif en) many COMPOUND NOUNS. 115 lands. 7. The fisherman took us over. 8. Mr. Konig has translated the history of the German literature. 9. Mrs. Friedliinder entertained us with a description of her trip from Hamburg to Heidelberg. 10. How do you like (^. e. how pleases you) the new cathedral ? 11. The garden is surrounded with a beautiful hedge. 12. Why did you go so much (fef)r) out of your way (um^gc^ IS)cn) ? 13. We wished to avoid the high mountain be- tween Schcinfeld and Liebeneck. 14. He attempted to translate the book, but he was not able to do it (e^ nid^t fiiriinen). LESSON XXXVI. COMPOUND NOUNS. ^'m ftnt S^rc ^anbf^u^e, Here are your gloves ^aben <3ic ein getermeffer ? Have you a penknife? !Da^ !l)ampffc^tff ifl ancjcfom^ The steamer has arrived. men, [mu()(e, §crr $Rot^ \)ai eine Dampf^ Mr. Roth has a steam-mill. 2)a^ ^ferb ift ein ?aftt^ier, The horse is a beast of bur- 3c^ 'S>abe ta^ ga^rgclt) be^a^lt, I have paid the toll. [den. 1. $aben 8ie ba^ neue (Sc^ulljau^ gefe^en? 2. SKd^rcnb ber Ic^ten jtranjig 3a^re ^at ba^ ?anb au§erorbentltc^e (extraordi- nary) gortf^ritte gcmacfct. 3. ^m ifl bcr 5lu^(^ang (way out). 4. 3d^ fann fcinen 5litc^enbHcf Icinger bleiben ; i^ mug glei^ m6) §aufe. 5. Dcr merte 55anb bcr ®cfd)t^te ber 53aufutifl »on Dr. gran^ ^uc^ler ift jcftt in aUcn 53ud)banbhingen ju ^a^ ben. 6. ^aben (Sic btc berii^mte SBinbrnitble in 5)ot^bam f;e^ fcbcn ? 7. 3)^arte, ()afl bu meinen gingerbut gefe^en ? 8. ^err Dr. (Sc^mibt ift ^rofeffor ber beutfc^en ©pra^e an (in) einer ^bd)tcrfc^ule in i>ttt^burg. 9. Da^ Dampffd)iff „®ermanta" ift c^cflern 5lbenb anc^efommen. 10. Da^ Earned ift ein ?a|l^ tbter, unb ber Xiger ift ein 3^aubt^ier. 11. Da^ 3Kort „®ram^ 116 COMPOUND NOUNS. matif" ijl em Srembwort. 12. 3fi ba^ grii^iluc! ferttg (ready)? 13- 3a, ba^ grit^ftiicf ift fc^on fertig. 14. 3)ie golbene $o^^ ^eit mxt) ^eute ^orgen ftattfiinben. 15. Der ©^nell^ug »on Seip^ig ift foeben angefommen. 16. ^onnen @te mix tint Otecfnabel geben? 17. |)eute SO^orgen f)aben tt)tr etnen fe^r fc^onen ^pa^ter'gang gemac^t 18. :^er ©ciulengang be^ ^n\t^ \m^ in 33erlin ift tin ^auptwerf ber mobernen ^aufunft. 19. 2)ie ^auptfeber meiner ^^afc^enu^r ift gebroc^en. 20. Berlin ift bie §auptftabt »on preufen. 21. Tltin @ro^»ater vcio\)ntt frii^er in 3?lagbeburg ; er wo^nt je^t in ^oln. 22. 34 ^abe mein gebermeffer geftern SD^orgen »erloren» 23. „3tt>an^tg" ift ein 3a{)ln)ort. Grammatical. 1. While compound verbs are mostly formed by pre- fixing prepositions to simple verbs, Compound Nouns are mostly formed by prefixing to nouns other nouns. Re7n. 1 . The prefix noun has an adjective signification, as it modifies oi limits the signification of the noun to which it is prefixed. Rem. 2. Adjectives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, and conjunctions (including thus all parts of speech except the article and inter-> jection) may also serve as prefixes of compound nouns. 2)aS @£^ur*^au§, school-house (bic @rf)ulc, school ; ba§ §au6, house). 2)a6 i^rcmb'-tDort, foreign word (fremb, foreign ; bag 5ffiort, word). S)er 3!oct'-'!am^f, duel (^ttjet, two ; ber ^am^jf, battle). 2)er ©cltift'-morb, suicide (felfeft, self ; ber 9}?orb, murder). SDaS ^ttl^t'=gelb, toU (fa^ren, to ride ; ba§ ®elb, money). 2)er ^ort'*jd;ntt, progress (fort, forward ; ber @c^rttt, step). SDer 3lu^'^gang, exit (au8, out; ber @ang, passage). 2)er 3l't)Cr*gIauBe, superstition (aBer, but ; ber ©laitfec, belief. 2. The primary accent falls upon the prefix. 3. With but very few exceptions, Compound Nouns take the gender of the last noun (§ 67). 2)Cr 3lu'genl6It(f , moment (ba§ 3luge, eye ; ber SSIicf, glance), ff S3au'metfter, architect (ber 33au, building ; ber 9JJet[ter, master). „ S3Iu'men!o^I, cauliflower (bie SSIume, flower ; bcr ^O^I, cabbage). rr S3iir'gertrteg, civil war (bie 33ilrger, citizens ; ber ^rteg, war). V ©am^f'fcffel, boiler (ber SDam^jf, steam ; ber ^effct, kettle). COMPOUND NOUNS. 117 Scr 5)ic (baS Si«, ice ; (bcr ginger, finger ; (bic §anb, hand; (ber 9Jcgen, rain ; (bie ®onuc,sun; (bic 2;af(^e, pocket ; (bcr 33au, building ; (bcr S3aum, tree ; GiS'bar, polar bear gin'gcr^ut, thimble ^anb'fc^u^, glove Ste'genfc^irm, umbrella @ou'ncnfd;irm, parasol 2:a'fc^enbicb, pickpocket Sau'tunft, architecture „ SSaum'woUc, cotton „ SBerg'fette, mountain range (ber Serg, mountain ; „ 2)ampf miible, steam mill (ber 2)am^f , steam ; „ @i'fcnba^n, railroad (ba6 (Sifen, iron ; „ gtil'gcltbilr, folding door (ber i^lilgcl, wing ; „ 2;od/terfc^uIe, girls' school (bic SiJC^tcr, daugh- „ ^olt^'\6}uk, common school (baS 5>oIf, people; [ters „ Xa'jc^cuut^r, watch (bie 2:;afd;e, pocket ; „ SBanb'ubr, clock (bic 2Banb, wall ; „ Sffiinb'mublc, windmill (bcr 5i!Sinb, wind ; 2)a^ 33utter6rob,bread and butter (bic Sutter, butter tJCr 535r, bear), bcr §Ut, hat). bcr @d;u^, shoe). bcr ©c^irm, screen), bcr 2)ieb, thief). bic ^un[t, art). bic 2i5oUe, wooU bic ^Ctte, chain). bic TmU, mill). bic 53af)n, road). bic Xl)ilr, door). bic @d;uic, school). ; " " ) bic U^r, clock). " ) bic Tt^U, mill). btt^Srob, bread). ia^ 53oot, boat). bag ©c^iff, ship). bag aj?e[f cr, knife). ba0^eifd;,meat). (( " ^ (( (( \ bog X^ier, animal). U ) bag §au9, house). bag 33ud;, book). bag SSort, word). 4. Examples of Compound Nouns with adjectives as prefixes : !J)cr 6'bclflein, jewel (cbet, noble; bet ©tcin, stone). !J)er j^rci'maurer, freemason (frei, free; bcr SJiaurer, mason). 3)a8 j^remb'TOort, foreign word (frcmb, foreign ; baS 5Bort, word). 2)aS ^rU^'ftticf , breakfast (frii^, early ; ba8 @til(f, piece). 2)er @lcid)'mut(), equanimity (glctc^, like ; bcr 9JJutb, mood). 3)er ®rot?'t»ater, grandfather (gro^, great; bcr 3Sater, father). 3)ie ©ro^'mutter, grandmother ( " " bic 3Jhttter, mother) 3)cr ^od^'mutb, haughtiness (^0(!^, high-; bcr 3Jhltb, mood). 2)ie ^cd)',^cit, wedding ( *' " bic "^^X, time). 2)cr ©d^ncir^ug, express train (fd^nctf, fast; bcr ^uflf train). 2>er ^oU'monb, full moon (tjoU, full ; bcr aJJonb, moon). !J)ampf'boot, steam-boat 2)ampn^?iftr steamer ge'bermeffer, penknife ^am'melficijc^, mutton ^alb'f(cifcf>, veal 9tinb'fleifd), beef ©cbnjei'neflcifc^, pork Saft't^ier, beast of burden SRaub'tbier, beast of prey 3ug'ti)ier, draught animal @d;urbau§, school-house SBiJr'terbuc^, dictionary 3abrtt)ort, numeral (bcr 2)ompf , steam ; (bic geber, pen ; (ber §ammel, sheep ; (ba6Mb, calf; (baS $Rinb, cattle, (bag ©rf^tDcin, hog ; (bic Saft, burden; (bcr $Raub, prey ; (ber 3ll9f draught ; (bic @d?ule, school ; (bie SSorter, words ; (bic 3^^^f number ; 118 COMPOUND NOUNS. 5. Examples of Compound Nouns with verbal prefixes 3)ag S3renn'f)otj, firewood (brennen, to burn ; 2)a§ ^abr'gelb, toll (fa^ren, to ride ; 2)a§ ^ef)rjat)r,year with bad crops (fe^ten, to mistake; 2)a§ Se'febud;, reader (tefcn, to read ; 3)a§ Se'festninier, reading-room ( " " 2)ie 9Mt/mafd;ine, sewing-ma- (nci^en, to sew; chine 2)tc 9^a^'nabet, needje (na^cn, to sew ; S)te ©tedf'nabei, pin (ftecfcn, to stick ; 2)ic ©tricE'nabct, knitting-needle (ftricfen, to knit ; S)a§ ® d)reib':|)a^tcr , writing paper (f d^reiben, to write ; 2)er 3^i'9^fi^S^^/ index finger (jetgen, to point ; bag §0(5, wood). ba§ ®elb, money). bag 3at;r, yearj. bag S3u^, book), bag 3^ttt^ei^r room), bie 2}Jafd;tne, ma- chine), bic 9^abel, pin). " ) bag ^a^ter, paper), ber finger, finger). 6. Examples of Compound Nouns with pre^positions as prefixes : (aB, away ; (out, up; (aug, out ; (burd^, through ; (fiir.for; (gegen, against ; (tn, in ; (mtt, with ; (nac^, after; (ilber, over ; (i3or, before ; (3U, to ; 2)er 3»f«ni'men^ang, connection (jufammen, together; ber §ang, hanging). 2)er B^^i'f^cu^oum, interstice (jtutfc^en, between ; ber diaum, space). 7. Compound Nouns are formed much more exten- sively in German than in English, as is shown by the following examples : 1. Compound Nouns formed by adding prefixes to ber ®ang, a noun derived from gC^Ctt {to go), and meaning a going, a passage. Stb'gang, departure (ab, away). Sluf'gang, rising (auf, up). ?Xug'gang, exit (aug, out). JBaum'gang, shady avenue (S3aum, tree). 2)te 216' reifc, departure 2)er 2lufgang, rising, ascent S)te 2lug'gat>e, edition 2)er S)urd/fd;nttt, average 3)ag ^ilr'lDort, pronoun 2)ag ©e'gengift, antidote S)er 3n'^citt, contents jDer aJiit'bilrger, fellow-citizen 2)te 9}Ztt' gift, dowry S)tc 5^ac^'frage, demand 2)er Ue'berrocf, overcoat 2)er Ue'berbau, superstructure 2)te 3>or'flabt, suburb S)er Bu't^tt, accident btc Sletfe, journey), ber @ang, passage), bic ®abe, gift), ber ©c^nttt, cutting), bag SBort, word), bag ®ift, poison), ber ^a(t, holding), ber ^iirger, citizen), bic ®tft,gift). bie ^rage, question), ber dtod,coat). ber S3au, building), bie @tabt, city), ber gall, falHng). COMPOUND NOUNS. 119 53o'gengang, arcade 2)ur^'gang, thoroughfare ©tngang, entrance ©rj'gang, veinof ore gort'gang, progression ^cr'gang, event ^ingang, death 2JJiB'gang, failure SKor'gengang, morning walk JRitcf'gang, retreat ©du'Iengang, colonnade ©^ajier' gang, walk for pleasure ©d^at'tcngang, shady walk Ue'bcrgang, transition Um'gang, intercourse Un'tergang, destruction 33or'gang, precedence (33ogcn, arch). (Durd;, through). (ein, in). ((Srj, ore). (fort, forth). (^er, hither). (^in, thither). (mi[fen, to miss). (morgeu, morning). (riid , back). (@aulc, column). (f^ajtc'reu, to walk for pleasure;. (®d;attcn, shadow). (iibcr, over). (urn, around). (unter, under). (toor, before). 2. Compound Nouns with ta^ ^ClU^Jt, t/te head, as prefix : S)er ^aupt' attar, high altar 2)er §au^t'an!er, sheet anchor 2)ie §au^t'armec, main army 2)er §aupt'artifel, leading editorial S)er ^aupt'balten, architrave 2)cr ^aupt'ba^, thorough-base 2)er |)aupt'begrtff, leading idea S)ic §au^t'fefcer, main-spring 3)er §aupt'ic{)lcr, chief fault SJ)ie ^au^t'fragc, main question 2)ie ^au^t'!ird)c, cathedral 2)cr §aupt'mann, captain 2)er §aiipt'maft, mainmast jDtC ^au^Jt'roUc, principal part !Die §au^t'fad;e, principal thing 2)te ^aupt'fangerin, i)rima donna 2)aS §au)3t'fegel, mainsail S)ic §aupt'ftabt, capital 2)te §au^t'[tra^e, main street 2)er ^au^t'ton, key note 2)ie ^au^t'tugenb, cardinal virtue 2)a8 §au^t'n?crf, masterpiece 2)a8 ipau^t'ttJort, noun 2)tc ^aiipt'jeile, head-line (of a page) 2)er ^au^t'jeuge, principal witness (bcr mtax', altar), (ber 5liiter, anchor), (bie 2lrnicc',anTiy). (bcr ?lrti'tel, article), (bcr 33atfen, beam), (ber ©a^, base), (bcr S3egriff', idea), (bie gebcr, feather), (ber ?^el}ler, fault), (bie ^rage, question), (bie ^xd^t, church), (bcr 2}kun, man), (bcr 2)ia[t, mast), (bie 9iotte, part), (bie @ad;c, thing), (bie -Scingeriu, singer) (baS eine ^reite i)on 800 gu§. 13. Da ©utc liebt ba^ ©ute, ber SBeife fu^t ba^ SBa^re, ber ^iinftler Mt ba^ (Sc^bne, unb ber n)a()re 5>^i(ofopt) fuc^t ba^ ©ute, ba6 2Ba()rc unb ba^ Sc^one. 14. 3Bd^renb fetner langen ^ranft)eit ^at S®il()e(m gar nic^t aue bem $aufe ge^en fonnen. 15. Die en, the small city SD^abd^en, the girl ^routetn, the young miss S3r6bc^en, the small loaf of bread §au8c^en, the small house „ Siebdjen, the sonnet „ ^ferbd^en the little horse Rem. 2. These diminutive nouns all take the neuter gender, whatever may be the gender of the nouns from which they are derived. Rem. 2. These diminutive terminations often express affectionate feeling or regard : 2)ag ^Sciterd^en, "father dear" (from ber 93ater, father). „ 9}itttterd(^en, " mother dear" ( " bte SDJutter, mother). from ber 53aum, tree). f, ^nabe, boy). bie S3lume, flower). „ ®tabt, city). „ 9Kagb, maid). ,t '^xau, woman), ba^^rob, bread). „ ^ait&, house). „ Sieb, song). „ ^ferb, horse). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 123 4. The suffixes =e, =5cit (or =!cit), m^, =ft^ait, 'A^nm, sUiig form mostly abstract nouns. 1. The suffix =C (with umlaut to the radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives: ^iC ©ilte, goodness (from gut, good). „ ^O^C, height ( " \)o6}, high). „ Scingc, length ( " lang, long). „ Siefc, depth ( " tief, deep). „ SBreitC, breadth ( " breit, broad). Rem. Noans thus formed are not to be confounded with adjectives used Bubstantively, and referring to persons, as : ^Cr @ute, the good man ; bic @utc, the good woman. „ SBeifc, the wise man ; „ 5l8eife, the wise woman. „ 2)eutfc!^C, the German (man) ; „ 2)eutf(^e, the German (woman). Nor with the neuter of adjectives when used to indicate the quality of the adjective regarded as a concrete thing, as : 2)0^ @utc, the good (from gut, good). „ 2Bat)re, the true ( " \vai)V, true). „ @d;i3nc, the beautiful ( '* jd^iju, beautiful). „ gr^a'beuc, the sublime ( " erl^a'bcn, sublime). 2. The suffix =5cit or {4tit) forms both abstract and concrete nouns from adjectives: 2)iC ^rantl?eit, sickness (from Iran!, sick). „ ©c^en^cit, beauty ( " fd;i3n, beautiful). „ SSa^r^cit, truth ( " tva^r, true). „ aJeinbcit, purity ( " rciu, pure). „ 2)untel(?eit, darkness ( " buntet, dark). „ 3lebnlic^feit, similarity ( " dbulid;, similar). „ I'^rcuubUd^tcit, friendliness ( " frcunblid;, friendly). „ 33iaigfcit, cheai)ness ( " biUig, cheap). „ ^oftbarfeit, de.imess ( " f oft bar, dear). „ ^urd;tfaniteit, fearfulness ( " furd;tfam, fearful). „ Xa^fcrfcit, bravery ( " ta^fer, brave). „ (Sitelteit, vanity ( " citcl, vain). Rem. 1. The suffix sfctt is added to adjectives ending in ={g, 4i(!^, -lam, ftX, and stL Rern. 2. The suffix cf^tit is also added to some personal nouns, as : 2)iC tinb^cit, childhood (from ba« ttnb, child). tt 2JJcnfd)bett, humanity ( " bcr 3J?cnfd;, human being). n S^riftcu^eit, Christendom ( " bcr C^rifl, Christian). 124 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 3. Derivatives ending in =ni§ are usually formed from verbs, but they are sometimes from nouns and adjectives, as: ^ie ^enntni^, knowledge (from !enncn, to know). S)a^ ^inbcrni^, impediment ( " ^inbern, to hinder). 2)a§ ^erftcinb'ni^, understanding ( " ber 35erftanb', reason). 2)iC ^infierni^, darkness ( *' finfter, dark). 4. Derivatives ending in '\6)(i\t are formed from nouns and adjectives, as: 2)iC g^reuiibfd;aft, friendship (from ber greunb, friend). „ Saiibfc^.ift, hmdscape ( " bag Sanb, land). „ 58auernfd;aft, peasantry ( " btc S3auern (jo/.), peasants^. „ Ortfd^.ift, neighborhood ( " ber Ort, place). „ 53ereit'fc^aft, readiness ( " berett, ready). 5. Derivatives ending in ^t^nm are formed from nouns, adjectives, and verbs, as: 2)a^ ^eiligt^um, sanctuary (from ^eilig, toly). „ ^aifert^um, empire ( " ber ^aifcr, emperor). „ "iprieftert^um, priesthood ( " bte ^riefter (/>/.), priests). 2)Cr 9teic^t(?um, richness ( " retc!^, rich). 6. Nouns formed from verbs, by adding the suffix sUUg, usually denote a condition, what produces a condition, or a thing put into a certain condition: S)ie ?ld;tiing, respect (f> -om ad;ten, to respect). „ S3ilbung, formation, culture ( 11 bilbeit, to form). „ 53ebiug'ung, condition u bebiu'gen, to stipulate). „ (Sntfaftung, unfolding (( entfd'ten, to unfold). „ (Srfa^'rung, experience 11 erfa^'ren, to experience). „ @ro'6erung, conquest CI cro'bern, to conquer). „ gorfd;ung, investigation li forfc^cn, to investigate). „ ^anbluitg, trading-house 11 l^anbeln, to handle). „ Sanbung, landing (( tanben, to land). „ 2JJeinung, opinion 11 tneincit, to think). ff ^viifung, examination li ^riifen, to examine). „ 9tic^tung, direction 11 rtc^ten, to direct). „ (Sammlung, collection u fammein, to collect). „ (Strung, session (( fifecn, to sit). „ SSerfamm'tung, assembly {( ijerfam'tneln , to collect). „ SBert^et'biguno \, defense (( bert^ei'bigen. , to defend). „ SSarnung, warning (( warnen, to warn). „ 3etd;iuing, drawing a 5etd)ncn, to draw). M 3«fto'runfl, destruction (< gerfto'ren, to destroy). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 125 Rem. 1 . Nouns ending in cUntJ naay be formed from nearly all verbs, both simple and compound. Rem. 2. A few collective nouns in sUng are formed from nouns : 2>ie §oIjung, forest (from baS ^olj, wood). „ ^leibung, clothing ( " ba§ ^Icib, garment). „ ©tatlung, stabling ( " bcr ©tail, stable). „ SSJalbung, woodland ( " bcr ilSalb, forest). 5. (1), Personal nouns ending in =cr are masculine. (2), Nouns ending in =in, -tX (=ret), =^eit (:\txi)f =ff^)nft, =ung are feminine. (3), Nouns ending in s(!^ens (Icin), A^WVX are neuter. ^rc. The nouns bcr ^frrt^um (€rror)and bcr 9Jetd;t^um (richnessj riches) are masculine. Rem. Some of the nouns ending in sni^ are feminine and some are neuier. 6. The most important jprefixes in forming derivative nouns are 9C=, mi§=, un^ ur=, Cr5=* 1. The prefix gc^ to nouns formed from verbs or from other nouns, denotes coUectiveness, union, completion, or repetition: Sser ©efa^r'tc, companion (from btc '^^\)X\., journey). „ ©eljiU'fe, assistant ( „ ©efpie'Ie, play-mate ( ^iC ©ebrii'bcr (;>/.), brothers, brethren ( bie §iUfc, help). ba8 (S^ict, play), ber 33rubcr, brother). » ©ejd^wi'ftcr " brothers and sisters ( " btc ©^njcftc r, sister). tt ©cbulb', patience ( " die dult. patience). n ©cfa^r', danger ( '• diefahr, fear). tt ©cfc^ic^'tc, history ( " gcfd?e^en, to happen). )ai ? Ocbciu'bc, edifice ( " baucn, to build). It @cbid?t', poem C" btd^tcn, to write poetry). It ®t\m', fate ( " fd)icfcn, to send). 11 (Scrid^f, court of law ( " rtd;ten, to direct). It ®erid)t', dish, plate ( " li to order). It ©cfct?', law ( " Wn, to establish). It ©efidn', sight, face (" fe^cn, to see). It ©ebir'gc, mountain range (" bcr S3crg, mountain). II ©cfic'bcr, plumage ( " bie f^cber, feather). n (^etrciu!', potation ( " bcr Sranf, drink). It ©cmit'ter, thunder-storm ( " bag ^Better, weather). Rem. Most nouns with the prefix gCs are of the neuter gender. Nearly all nouns with the prefix gc* also take the umlaut. 126 DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 2. The prefix nii§= denotes negation, perversion or incompleteness, or negation of quality : ^cr iDZtBbegrift, „ 3Jit^brauci^, u 3«iOgeftatt, n TlxU^n% „ 2Jii|3t)anbIung, misconception misuse, abuse discord bad harvest deformity disfavor ill treatment (fromber S3egnff', bcr S3rauc^, ber jTon, bie (Srntc, bie ©eftalt', bie @unft, conception). use). sound). harvest). form). favor). bie §anblung, treatment). bag 35er^alt'm§, proportion). 2)(l^ 3)Zi^ter^altni^, disproportion 3. The prefix Ult= denotes negation or perversion of quality : ^Cr Unban!, ingratitude ,; Unfatt, misfortune, disaster (fromber 2)an!, ( „ UngeI;orjani, disobedience „ Unmenfc^, inhuman being „ Unfinn, nonsense 2)iC Unef;rltd^feit, dishonesty „ Unenb'lid;feit, infinity „ Unfaijtgfett, incapacity „ Ungebulb, „ Unorbnung, „ Unrut^e, „ Untreue, 2)a«Ungmcf, „ Unfraut, thankfulness), ber %aU, chance, fall), ber @el;orfam, obedience), ber 9JJenf^, human being), ber @inn, sense), bie (Sf)rli^tett, honesty), bie ©nblic^feit, finiteness). bie ga^igfeit, capacity). bie ©ebulb', bie Orbnung, bie 9tn(;e, bie 2:reue, bag ©liicf , bag ^raut, patience). order). rest). faithfulness). fortune). herb). impatience disorder disquietude faithlessness misfortune, calamity ( noxious weeds ( Rem. The prefix Urt' can be used especially to the nouns in sl^Cit and sfcit 4. The prefix UX- denotes source, origin or cause, or a thing in its original condition: tJ)Cr UrbetDO^ner, aboriginal inhabitant (from ber SSetno^'ner, inhabitant). „ Itrquetl, primary source ( " ber duett, source). „ Urf^rung, origin, source ( " ber (Sprung, spring). „ Urn^arb, primeval forest ( " ber SBalb, forest). 1J)te Urfunbe, document, record ( " bie ^unbe, knowledge). „ Urfac^e, origin, cause ( ** bie @ac^e, thing). „ Urj)3rad;e, primitive language ( " bie ©^ra(^e, language). Sa^Urbilb, prototype ( " bag S3itb, form). „ Uri)oIf, aboriginal people ( " bag 35oI!, people). 5. The prefix crj^ denotes the first or greatest: 2)Cr @rjbijd>of, archbishop (from ber 33ifd;of, bishop). ©rjbieb, arrant thief „ (SrjmarfdjaU, lord high-marshal 2>iC (Srjtugenb, cardinal virtue ( " ber 2)ieb, thief). ( " ber max\6)aU\ marshal). ( " bie Slugenb, virtue). DERIVATIVE NOUNS. 127 6. Many words in the German, as in the English lan- guage, have undergone great changes in form during the known history of the language. Some derivatives have also been formed from words that are no longer used. Thus: the word @ e b u It) (from an old word die r is from an old word t/ie/aAr=:fear. Exercise 74. 1. The first session of the Assembly will take place to-morrow, at ten o'clock. 2. Have you seen the new drawings of the artist? 3. The collection of antiquities from Egypt in the Museum of Berlin is very large. 4. Mr. Breitkopf has just bought the first five volumes of the German dictionary of the brothers Grimm. 5. How many brothers and sisters have you? 6. I have two brothers (53riit)er), and one sister. 7. It is very sultry, we will probably have a thunder-storm before night. 8. This book contains the best poems of Goethe, Schiller, and Heine. 9. Did you notice the disproportion between the height and the breadth of the building? 10. 1 have never heard such nonsense. 11. The papers on this table are lying in the greatest disorder. 12. His dishonesty was a much greater misfortune than his incapacity for the work. 13. The aborigines of America were the In- dians. 14. Have you ever seen a primeval forest? 15. Do you know the origin of the word „ Unenbltd^f eit" ? 16. Do you know the cause of his disquietude ? 1 7. The arch- bishop of Mayence has gone to Cologne to-day. 18. The beauty of these drawings is very extraordinary. 1 9 . Miss Kreutzer is from Germany, but Miss Robelli is an Italian. SO.Mr.Flander is a Swiss, but his wife is a German. 21. The teacher (y^m.) has in her school twenty-two scholars (fern.). 22. Maria Theresa, Empress of Austria, died on the thirteenth of April, 1807. 23. Louise Auguste, Queen of Prussia, died on the nineteenth of July, 1810. 128 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. LESSON XXXVIII. ©ERIVATIVE AND COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. giinjunbftcBatgftc Wufpk* !♦ 3n biefer |){njtc^t tft er gegen feine SSorgcinger nic^t banf^ hax. 2. 3)er ^oben urn 53erUn ift fanbtg imb ntcfct fe^r fru(|t^ bar. 3. 3c| weig nic^t ob bie 53rudEe f^on gangbar ifl. 4. Der $lan ifl gan^ unau^fii^rbar. 5. Sir b^iben ben gan^en Xag !ein trinfbare^ Staffer gefunben. 6. |)err 3)orn leibet an einer un{)eilbaren ^ranfbcit. 7. §erv ^tefen^etter ^at feine neue gol^ bene Ul)r l^eute Tlox^m »er(or«i. 8. ^^^ur in bem geenlanbc ber Sieber lebt no^ beine fabel^afte (Spur." 9. Der ^^^aler bat eine au^erorbentUc^ leb^afte ^inbilbung^fraft. 10. ^Diefe felftge ©egenb ift i)olI ijon ^lapperfc^langen. 11. |)eute b<^ben njir fe^r fd)5ne6, fonnige^ ^Better. 12. 2Barum (tnb ^ie fo traurig? 13. |)aben (Sie bie malerifc^e ^anbfc^aft in ber fdc^ftfc^en ©c^weij, jmifc^en 2)re^ben unb ^rag gefe()en? 14. 2)ie fldbtif^en ^el)orben ^aben befd)loffen, eine neue 5lnlei^c i?on 600,000 Z^lx. ^u madden, urn eine neue ^tra^e yom griebric^^:? flai^ bi^ pm (^abonjar^pia^ buri^^ufiibren. 15. S5on bem ©rimm'fc^en 5G5rterbuc^ ftnb U^ je^t erft fec^^ ^dnbe erf^ic^* nen. 16. Die „5(ug^burger 5lUgemeine Beitung" ift bie gropte unb befte poUtifd^e 3eitung in 6iibbeutfc^lanb. Grammatical. 1. De7'wative Adjectives are formed from nouns, adjec- tives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, and preposi- tions, by adding the suffixes =tiar, =cr (=crn), =§aft, =ig, 4f ^ {^tX)fA\^f and ''\m\f according to the following rules : 1. The suffix =tJar, added to a noun or to a verbal stem, indicates ability or possibility of a quality or of an action : ©anfbar, thankful (from ber 2)anf, thank), bicnftbar, semceable ( " ber S)teufl, service), trud^tbar, fruitful ( " bie grud^t, fruit). FORMATION OP ADJECTIVES. 129 furc^tbar, fearful (from bic gurd^t, fear). gangbar, passable bcr @ang, passage). foftbor, costly bie Soften (p/.)j expenses). fd;einbar, apparent ber Serein, appearance). ftreitbar, contestable ber ©treit, contest). tcunberbar , wonderful bag 2i^unbcr, miracle). brcunbar, combustible brcnncn, to burn). bcntbar, conceivable benfen, to think). c^ar, edible, fit to eat cffen, to eat). ausfii^rbar, practicable auSfii^ren, to execute). ^altbar, tenable ^altcn, to hold). ^eilbar, curable ^cilen, to heal). ^iJrbar, audible ^oren, to hear). ertlar'bar, explainable ( " crtla'rcn, to explain). lesbar, legible ( " lefcn, to read). toertneib'bar, avoidable ( '* ijerinet ben, to avoid). nennbar, that may be named ( " ncnnen, to name). flcnie^'bar, enjoyable ( " gcnic^en, to enjoy). crreic^'bar, attainable (" erreic^en, to attain)i trennbar, diWsible ( " trennen, to divide). trtntbar, fit to drink (" trinfen, to drink). 2. The suffix ^cn (=crn) is added only to nouns de- noting material : ®oIbcn, golden, gold (from ba« ©olb, gold). fttbern, of silver ( " bag ©ilbcr, silver). fu^fern, of copper ( " baS ^u^fcr, copper> Blcicrn, leaden ( " bag 23lci, lead). Icbern, of leather ( " bag Sebcr, leather). ^oljcrn, wooden ( " bag ^clj, wood). Qlajern, of glass ( " bag ©lag, glass). Hem. When the noun (as S U ^ f e r) ends in sr, only sH is added. 3. The suffix ^aft denotes possession of or inclina- tion toward the quality of the noun to which it is suffixed: 2)auer^aft, durable (from bie jDauer, duration). crnftbaft, earnest ( " bcr (graft, earnestness). fabclbaft, fabulous ( " bic gabcl. fable). fc^lcr^att, faulty (" bcr getter. fault). Icbbaft, lively ( " bag !i!ebcn, life). mangel^att, defective C" ber 2JJaiiger, lack). riefcn^ft, gigantic ( " bcr aeicfc, giant). jtt?cifelbaft, dubious ( " bcr Broctfel, doubt). id;mct(^cll?aft, flattering ( " bic ©d^ntctd^clei' ', flattery). F2 130 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 4. The suffix =tg denotes the possession of the qual- ity or relation that is expressed by the noun, adjective, numeral pronoun, verb, preposition, or adverb, to which it is suffixed : 5rrttg, polite, well-behaved (frc )m bte Slrt, way). bcirtig, bearded ( ' ' ber 93art, beard). bergtg, mountainous ( ' ' ber 53erg, mountain). blutig, bloody ( ' ' ba§S3Iut, blood). eifrtg, zealous ( * ' ber (gifer, zeal). eiftg, icy ( ' ' bas@i8, ice). Mig, rocky ( ' ' ber gelg, rock). ftet§tg, industrious ( ' ' ber gleti industry). Pc^tig, fleeting ( ' ' bte etuc^t, flight). Seifttg, referring to the spirit ( ' ' ber @et[t, spirit). mm, avaricious ( ' ' ber ©etj, avarice). gtfttg, poisonous ( ' ' bag®tft, poison). gilnftig, favorable ( ' ' bie @mt[t, favor). ^orjig, woody ( ' ' ha^mh wood). frciftig, powerful ( ' ' bie Sraft, power). madjttg, mighty ( ' * bte 9}iad)t, might). inSBig, moderate, temperate ( ' ' baggjla^, measure). nm'^f necessary ( ' ' bte g^ot^, want). ru^tg, quiet ( ' ' bte mni)t, rest). ric[tg, gigantic ( ' ' ber 9?iefe, giant). Wq, salty ( * ' bag@al5, salt). fanbtg, sandy ( ' ' ber @anb, sand). {c^ulbtg, guilty ( ' ' bie @d)utb, guilt). fonnig, sunny ( ' ' bte ©onite, sun). traurig, sad, sorrowful ( ' ' bte 2:rauer, sorrow). berbcic^ttg, suspicious ( ' ' ber S3erbad;t' suspicion). tciirbtg, worthy ( ' ' bte SBitrbe, worth). bum^fig, damp ( ' ' bum^f, damp). Icben'big, lively, active ( ' ' leBenb, living). Qtitig, good ( ' ' gut, good). i)i3mg, fully ( ' ' Dolt, full). einig, crnstg, sole, single ( ' ' etit, one). bei^ig, biting ( ' ' beifeen, to bite). crgiebtg, productive ( ' ' erge'ben, to yield). borttg, of that place ( ' ' bort, there). ^ieftg, of this place ( ' ' ^ter, here). ^eutig, of to-day ( ' ' ^eute, to-day). ntcbrtg, low ( ' ' titeber, down). bortg, former ( ' ' toor, before). iibrtg, remaining ( ' ' iiber. over). FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 131 5. The suffix =ifc|l, attached to personal common nouns (and to a few verbs), denotes similarity or inclination to a quality ; and often conveys also the idea of contempt or unworthiness : 53aurif(^, referring to the peasantry (from bev 33auer, peasant). bid)terifd;, poetical bcr 2)ic^ter, poet). biebifd;, thievish ber 2)icb, thief). ^immlifd^, heavenly ber §immel, heaven). irbifd;, earthly bie (Srbc, earth). fanfmcinnifd;, mercantile ber taufmani , merchant). finbifd;, childish ba« mnh, child). malerifd^, picturesque ber TtaUx, painter). ftSbtifd,, civil bic @tabt, city). ncibifc^, suspicious neiben, to envy). Rem. 1 . The umlaut is usually added when the vowel is capable of it. Re?n. 2. In many adjectives derived from the Latin and Greek languag '«, the ending sift^ in German corresponds to the English ending -ic or -ical. ^(ji(ofo>bijc^, philosophic (al). brama'tifd;, dramatic (al). t^eolo'gifd^, theological. c^ifd^, epic (al). ^fpc^olo'gtjc^, psychological itfxm, lyric (al). Qto{o'o^\\oe'tifd>, poetic (al). ^^i)fifrf?/ physical. tritijd;, critical. ^eniifd^, chemical. ^ifto'rij^, historic (al). Rem. 3. The suffix sift^ (=*f(!^) is added to personal proper names : 2)ie ?utbe'rtfd;e ,^rd;c, The Lutheran church. S)te 9ien)to'nijd;e X^corie, The Newtonian theory. 25a6 @rimm'fd;e SSiJrtcrbuc^, Grimm's dictionary. 2)ie ^ant'ft^e ^bi^ojo^^ie, Kant's philosophy. Rem. 4. National and civic adjectives usually take the ending sff ^ : STmerifa'nijd?, American. Scrli'nifd^, of Berlin, afrifa'nifd;, African. ^cimburgifc^, of Hamburg, italia'mjc!^, Italian. ^chiifd?, of Cologne, ^ortugie'fijd;, Portuguese. SD^agbeburgtfd^, of Magdeburg, ruffifcb, Russian. ^allifdb, of Halle, bairifc^, Bavarian. ©c^Icfij(!(^, Silesian. Ohs. Many adjectives are formed from names of cities by adding the suffix •tt *i this ending has the remarkable quality of not being capable of inflexion : The Magdeburg Cathedral. Nom.y ber 2J?agbcburger 2)om. Gen.^ beS 9J?agbeburgcr S)Dme8. Bat.^ bcm aJJagbeburgcr !I)om. Ace, ben aJiagbeburger 2)om. The Augsburg Journal. Norn., bie Sluggburger Seitung. Gen., ber 3lug8burger B^itw^fl* Dat., bcr ?lug«burger 3eitung. Acc.^ bie 2lug«burger Bfitwna* 132 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 6. Adjectives with the suffix 4i$ are formed from nouns, other adjectives, and verbs: 5lfeenbU^, evening (fromber Slbenb, evening). morgenlic^, morning ber aJiorgen, morning). taglid;, daily ber XaQ, day). tDod;ent(ic^, weekly- bie SBoc^e, week). ntonatlid^, monthly ber SJZonat, month). jafjrli^, yearly ba§ 3a^r, year). uitm, figurative bag S3tlb, figure). bnefli(^, by letter ber ^riei letter). brilberUc^, brotherly ber 33ruber, brother). biirgertic^, pertaining to a citizen ( " ber 33iirger, citizen). c^rltd^, honest ( " bie @E;re, honor). cnbii(^, final ( " bag (gnbe, end). freunbiic^, friendly ( " ber greunb, friend). ' Q\Mm, fortunate, happy ( " bag mM, fortune). j^au^lic^, domestic ( " bag §aug, house). v^m, courteous ( " ber §of, court). taiferltc^, imperial ( " ber Saifer, emperor). finblid^, childlike ( " bag ^inb, child). fonigltc^, royal (" ber ^onig, king). inenfd;Iid^, human ( " ber 2«enfd;, man). fc^merjU^, painful ( " ber @d;iner3, , pain). fdjrecflid?, terrible ( " ber ©c^recfen, terror). ttjunberlic^, wonderful ( " bag 2Bunber, wonder). m\^l\6^, whitish ( " tt>ei^, white). rot^Ud;, reddish < " rot^, red). filttic^, oldish (" att, old). fro^Uc^, happy, cheerful C " tro^, happy). franfltc^, sickly ( " franf, sick). offcntltd^, public ( " often, open). mc^Uc^, rich ( " reic^, rich). treulid), true ( " treu, true). au§fil{)r'(td?, comprehensive ( " augtii^ren, to execute). begretfUd;, comprehensible ( " begrei'fen, to comprehend). betceg'Iid), movable ( " beitje'gen, to move). etn^finb'lic^ , sensitive ( '' em^fin'ben, to feel). crflar'lid^, explicable ( " ertlci'rcn, to explain). fterbli^, mortal (" fterbett, to die). toermctb'Ud^ , avoidable (" ijermet'ben, to avoid). gerbrec^'Iic^, , fragile ( " Serbre'c^en, to break in pieces). jRem. Some adjectives ending in 4it^ are closely allied in signification, and are almost interchangeable in use with adjectives derived from the same word and ending in star : compare erf Ifirbar and er!Iartic^,tjermcibbar and b e r m e i b H d?. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. 133 7. Adjectives with the suffix -^aiXt (formed from verbs or verbal nouns) indicate the possession of or inclination to the quality : Slufmcrffam, attentive btegfam, bulDfam, geniig'fam, tt)ir!fam, arBcitfatn, Bcbac^t'jam, bctrteb'fam, furd;tfam, genjalt'i'am, graufam, ^cilfam, mii^fam, forgfam, tounberfam, Rem. 1. Two adjectives ending ©emein'fam, mutual langfam, slow pliable patient sufficient efficient laborious mindful diligent fearful violent ferocious wholesome toilsome solicitous wonderful from aufmerfen, " btegen, " bulben, " geniig'cn, " tt)tr!en, " bie Arbeit, to pay attention), to bend), to tolerate), enough), to have effect), work), bcr 33ebac^t', considerateness). ber 58etrteb', driving), bic gurc^t, fear), btc ©en^alt', violence). baSOrauen, horror), bag §eil, healing), bie 2)^u^e, toil, pains), bie (gorge, care). ba§ SSunber, wonder), in sf ant are formed from other adjectives : " gemein', common). " lang, long). JRem. 2. The adjective f e 1 1 f a m (rare) was formerly spelled seltsan. Rem. 3. The adjectives ending in sfaw are few in number compared to those ending in sig, stfc^, and A\^* A few are similar in signification to those of the same derivation ending in sftat, as: tDUnberfam, ttJUttberbar. The adjectives ending in s^Ittt have usually a passive, those in sfflju usually an active signification : (Sine ^eilbare ^anf^eit, A disease that can be cured. @ine ^eilfame Slrjnei', A healing remedy. 2. Nearly all derivative adjectives can receive the negative prefix sUlt, as : Unbanfbar, ungratefuL unneibtf^, unenvious. unleSfcar, illegible. unenbli(i>, infinite. unfef)ter^aft, faultless. unmenjd(>Itd^, inhuman, unjc^ulbtg, innocent. unaufmerffam, inattentive. 3. Compound Adjectives are formed by prefixing to an adjective a noun, a preposition, or another adjective, as : 53ettetann, beggarly poor (ber 33ettel, begging ; arm, poor), fingerbitf , thick as one's finger (ber finger, finger ; bid, thick), feuerfefi, fireproof (bag ^^euer, fire ; fcft, fast). ^immei^O(i(^, high as heaven (ber ^immel, heaven ; ^od^, high). 134 FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. ticfengro§, gigantic [teinijart, hard as rock ei^talt, cold as ice baumleer, destitute of trees bartloS, beardless (ber 3?tcfc, giant ; (ber ©teiit, stone ; (bag (Sis, ice ; (ber S3aum, tree ; (ber Sart, beard ; c^arafterloS, without character (ber (Sfjarafter, character; regelmd^ig, regular (tit dtza,d, rule; gwecfmci^ig, practical (ber ^^zd, purpose ; te^rrei^, instructive (bie Se^re, learning ; ja^Ireid), numerous (bie Ba^I, number; bli^fc^nett, quick as lightning (ber 33Iit5, lightning ; tcunberfd;i)u,extremely beautiful(ba8 SSunber, wonder ; ItebeiJoII, affectionate :^rac^ti)ott, magnificent metlentt)ett, miles distant Ite'benSlDiirbig, amiable aKgemein, general atlmac^ttg, almighty bunfelblau, dark blue ^ellMau, light blue gelbtotf;, orange taubftumm, deaf and dumb (bie Siebc,love; (bie ^ra^t, splendor ; (bie alette, mile ; (baS Sieben, loving ; (aa[erJ,aU; ( " " (bun!et, dark ; (^ell, light; (gelb, yellow ; gro^, large). ^art, hard). talt, cold), leer, empty). Io8, destitute of). " [to;, mci^ig, confoiming retdt>, rich). fc^nell, quick). fc^i)n, beautiful), ijott, full). njett, distant), toiirbig, worthy), gemeiu', common), inac^tig, mighty), blau, blue). rot^, red), fiumm, dumb). jd^ulbig, guilty). (taub, deaf; mitfc^ulbig, accessory to a crime (mit, with ; 4. It is becoming customary in Germany to print books and journals of a high scientific and critical character in the Roman instead of in the German type. It is greatly to be desired that this custom may become general, and that thus an unnecessary ban*ier to the beginning of the study of the German language may be removed. We give below a German exercise in Roman type. Sechsundsiebzi^ste Aufgabe. l.Das Litera^rische Centrarblatt, die beste kritische Zeitung in Deutschland, erscheint wochentlich. 2. Die Leipziger Illustrir^te Zeitung erscheint auch wochent- lich. 3. Herr Hagemeyer ist ein ehrlicher Mann. 4. Ich wiinsche Ihnen eine gliickliche Eeisel 5. Bei dem schrecklichen Unfall in den Bergwerken zu Freiberg sind vierzig Menschen urn's Leben gekommen (have lost their lives). 6. Das Grimm'sche Worterbuch wird das ausfiihrlichste undvollkommenste Worterbuch der deut- schen Sprache sein. 7. Alle ofFentlichen Schulen sind wahrend der Ferien geschlossen. 8. Die konigliche CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 135 Bibliothek in Berlin ist in einem Theile des konig- lichen Palastes. 9. Die Lehrerin sagt, dass die Schiiler sehr aufmerksam sind. 10. Dieser Brief von Herrn Tiedemann ist fast unlesbar. 11. Das Museum ist ein feuerfestes Gebaude. 12. Ich finde diese neue Ma- schine sebr zweckmassig. 13. Der prachtvolle Kolner Dom ist das Meisterstuck der deutschen Baukunst. 14. Frau Bernsdorf ist eine sehr liebenswiirdige Dame. 15. Ich werde drei Ellen von diesem dunkelblauen Bande und sechs Ellen von jenem breiten, gelbrothen Band nehmen. LESSON XXXIX. CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. ©icbcnunbficbjigftc 5(ufgak* 1. ^^ ifl unbefc^reibli^, irelc^e ^c^nfu^t x^ empfanb, nur eine^ SD^enfc^en anfid)tig ju merben (^^.)* 2. ®raf Sulenfel^ n?ar reic^ an ®ut, bod^ arm an Seben^freuben, 3. (5te ftnb allc i^re^ 35erfprec^en0 cingebenf gewefen (X.)» 4. (Sr ift jeber 5luf^ opferung fd^tg (or er ift ^u jeter ^ufcpferung fdt)ig), 5. Sr tjl fci^on besi ©iege^ gett)i§. 6. 8ie finb aller (Borgen frei (or jtc jtnb frei »on alien (Sorgen). 7. §err X^ompfon ift ni^t ber beutf^en 8prac^e funbii3. 8, Di^nt ^erj ift bie 3BeIt ber greu^ ben leer. 9, Die ^dume ftnb je^t »on grii^ten leer. 10. 2)a^ ©ebi^t ift »oU boc^trabenber $^rafen, aber leer an tiefen ©ebanfen. 11. Diefe^ 2Birtl)^^au0 ift nie leer i?on ©dften. 12. §err SBilliam^ l;at ben 33rief gan^ gelduftg gelefen ; er ift ber beutfc^en ©pra^e ijoUfommen mdi^tig. 13. 3^ bin be^ (S^ma^en^ mitbe. 14. 3d) bin miibe t)on fo »ielen uergeblid^en Slnfirengungen. 15. dx ift fatt ber SBelt unb i^re^ Dergdnglic^cn 3^ut)mee. 16. dx ift feine^ Sibe^ quitt. 17. 5luc^ bu bdltft mic^ ber fc^weren (Sitnbe fc^ulbtg (6c^.)? 18. 2)ort ftnb fte ibrc^ ?ebene nid)t ftd)er. 19. Die (Srbe ift i)olI ber ®iite bc^ ^crrn O^falm 33, 5). 20. Da^ 53uc^lein ift »olI allerliebfter ^cmerfungen (©.). 2L 2)a ift tin ^orb »oU reifer ^^epfcl. 13^ CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. Grammatical. l.Many adjectives govern substantives in the oblique cases (i. e., the genitive, dative, and accusative cases) without the use of a preposition between the adjective and the substantive. 2. The following adjectives govern the genitive case '. 3ln[ic^tig(trerben), to get a view (of), arm (antiquated with gen.'), poor, bar, bare, destitute (of), bebiirfttg, destitute, in need (of). Begte'rtg, desirous, anxious (for), beno't^igt, in need (of). BeiDU^t', conscious (of), blo^, free (from), ctn'geben!, mindful (of), eintg, agreed (concerning). ctn8, " cril'brigt, dispensing (with), crfa^'ren, experienced (in), fa^ig, capable (of), fret, free (from), fro^, happy (about), gebenf, conscious (of). geftau'Dtg, confessing (to). gettJa^r', conscious (of). gctDcir'tig, awaiting. gettJi^', certain (of). geiDO^nt', accustomed (to). ^ab^aft, in possession (of) . funb (or funbtg), acquainted (with). lebig, free (from). leer, empty (of). log, free (from). tnac^ttg, in command (of). miibe, tired (of). miljjig, free (from). quitt, free (from). fatt, satiated (with). jc^urbtg, guilty (of). fidt^er, sure (of). t^eill;aft' (or 4g), participating (in). iiberbriif fig, weary (of). t»erba(f>'tig, suspected (of). terlu'fttg, deprived (of). DoU, full (of). icert^, worth. tuilrbig, worthy (of). jufrie'ben, contented (with) Rein. 1. Some of these adjectives can take the negative prefix sjlltf ^s: Unbegte'rtg, undesirous (of), unbenjujjt, unconscious (of), unerfa^ren, inexperienced (in). unfc^utbig, innocent (of), unfi^er, not sure (of). unttJttrbtg, unworthy (of). Rem. 2. Of the above adjectives, the following are frequently employ «d, in ordinary discourse, with the accusative case, viz : Slnjtd^ttg, betDU^t, fa^tg, ge* ftanbtg, getca^r, gemo^nt, ^ab^aft, Io8, milbe, fatt, j(^ulbig, ilberbrilffig, toix^, jufiiebeii : ^&l bin t^m cincn ^^alcr fc^utbtg, I owe him a thaler, eg t[t fctncn pfennig rnert^, it is not worth a penny. Rem. 3. Many of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions^ Khich prepositions govern their own cases (§ 81, § 82, § 83), as : (1) 33egterig, by m^ or auf* (2)berett,Wg,bygm (3) arm, genjobnt, leer, by m* (4) fro^, getoi^, eintg, by Ukr» (5) fret, (ebig, Io8, leer, Jjott, etc., by (6) eintg, erfa^ren, fro^, by in* (7) 5uf rieben, by mit,or tJDn,or iiJer. CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. 137 O65. Only afew(asBcnot^igt, gett)arttg, t^ctt^aft, ilbctbriif* fig, » e r I U ft i g) rnust be used as governing the genitive case. 3. Many of the adjectives that govern the genitive Q9>de frequently can not be translated into English by adjectives, but must be rendered in the English idiom by verbs or nouns, as : (Siuet ®ac^c an[id;tig ju tocrbcn, (Siner Sac^e eingebenf ju fein, (5r ift ber beutfc^en @^raci;e mac^^ tig, eincr @ad)c gcftanbig ju fcin, er ift be« 3Sege8 tunbig, er ift fciues (SibcS quitt, SBir toaren biefcg 5lu8gangeS ber ^a fc^merjlid;, painful (to). fd;ulbig, in debt (to). fc^roer, difficult (for), filfj, sweet (for), tbeuer, dear (to), trcu, true (to), libel, offensive (to), ilberle'gen, superior (u>\ untert^an, subject (to). 138 CASES GOVERNED BY ADJECTIVES. ijcrberB'Itd^, destructive (to). tertoanbt', related (to). i)ort^etI^aft, advantageous (to). h)e^, painful (to), tuert^, worth (to). txJtcfjttg, important (to). tDtberiic^, offensive (to). tt)ilItom'men, welcome (to). tt)of)I, fortunate (to). 3tX)citel^aft, doubtful (to.) 5. The idiomatic spirit of the English language often requires that a verb or a noun shall take the place of &n adjective which in German governs the dative case : (Stner ^artei' abtriinmg tuerben, To desert a party. @r ift feinem 3Sater jetjr ci^nlic^, He resembles his father very much, ^ann id) 3(;tien be^iilfltd^ jein? Can I be of any service to you? (g§ ift mir nid;t erinnerlic^, It has escaped my memory. SBie biel bift 3)u tfjm jd;ulbtg ? How much do you owe him ? 6. Adjectives expressive of value, weight, measure, or age govern the accusative case : @g tDar f Cincn pfennig tt? e r t ^, It was not worth a penny. (Sg ift nur CinCn 3^^ b r e i t, It is only an inch wide. (S§ ift Cin ^fnnb f^tr>er, It weighs a pound, er ift JC^n ^aI)rC alt, He is ten years old. Achtundsiebzigste Aufgabe. 1. Herr Eitelberg ist seiner Partei^ abtriinnig gewor- den. 2. Diese Kinder sind ihren Eltern sehr ahnlich. 8. Es ist mir unbegreiflich, wie er solchen Unsinn ver- tragen kann. 4. Kann ich Ihnen auf irgend eine Weise behiilflich sein ? 5. Der Zustand des Kranken ist dem Arzte heute sehr bedenklich. 6. Die Umstande des Verlustes des Dampfers sind uns bis jetzt noch nicht bekannt. 7. An welchem Tage die Schlacht bei Jena stattgefunden hat, ist mir augenblicklich nicht erinner- lich. 8. Unter solchen Umstanden war seine Gegen- wart natiirlich der Gesellschaft sehr unwillkommen. 9. Der Kaufmann ist dem Banquier 800 Thlr. schuldig. 10. Seine Mitwirkung war ihnen mehr hinderlich als forderlich. 11. Er ist seinem Eide treu geblieben. 12. Die deutsche Sprache richtig auszusprechen ist den Amerikanern im Anfang sehr schwer. 13. Wir fahren sehr langsam, weil der Wind und die Fluth uns widrig USE OF THE ARTICLE. 139 sind. 14. Dieser Rock ist mir zu gross. 15. Mir ist es sehr kalt hier. 16. Das Tuch ist eine Elle breit und dreissig Ellen lang. 17. Diese Kugel ist nur 68 Pfund scliwer, aber jene Kugeln sind 120 Pfund schwer. 18. Er ist fast einen Kopf grosser als ich. 19. Wilhelm ist zwolf Jahre, einen Monat und einen Tag alt. LESSON XL. USE OF THE ARTICLE. SWcununbricbjigftc ^lufgak* 1. :Der 2)?enf^ ift fterbli^. 2. Da^ Seben ift fur^ 3. Da0 ®olb ift t)a^ foftbarfte detail. 4. 3)a^ geuer unb ba^ SBaffer ftnt) gate Diener, akr bofe 2J?etfter. 5. §err ^raumiiller ijat ten ^mittn 53ant) 5?on ^uc^lcr'^ ®efc^id)te ber 2)^ilcrct, uno ten merten 53anb i^on Duncfer'^ ©efc^id^te be^ 3tltert()um^ l)eute ge^ fauft. 6. Dcr ©ebrauc^ ift ber ©efefec^cber ber ©prqd^en. 7, grietvid) dla^w ftubirt ^Pbilologie, unb 3BiI^elm 2Ceibmann ftu^* birt SJiebicin. 8. ?>rofeJTor gricbrid)^ ift ^rofeffor ber flafft> fd)en ^^vc^dologie an ber Um»erfttdt ju 33erlin. 9. ^err ^raun mirb i)tn\t %btn^ eine 3Sor(efung itber ben Urfprung ber gott)i^ fd)en 53aufunft balten. 10. 2)er griebe ber (Beele gilt me^r al^ 3flei(^t()um. 11. Da^ Sriibftiid ift no^ nid)t fertig. 12. ^a6^ bem ^Ibenbejfen tuerDen mir in^ Concert ge^en. 13. X)a^ fefte 3}iagbeburg ()at Xill^ am lOten '^ai 1631 mit ©turm genome men ; auger ^wei ^irc^en unb 130 ^dufern t)at er bie ganje (Stabt niebergebrannt unb 30,000 »on ben ^inwo^nern ermor^ bet ; biefe ©rduel ^at er bie „?D^agbeburc;er ^o^jeit" genannt* 14. Der »orige Slpril wax \d)x fait unb unangene^m, 15. §err (S5ie^ler unb feine gamilie fmb je^t in ber ©^wei^ ; mx wtxUn aud^ in ac^t Xagen nac^ ber (3d)n?eig ge{)en. 16. ^onftanti^ nopel ift bie ^auptftabt ber Xiirfei. 17. Diefe^ Xud) foftet ^m\ Xbaler bie (SUe. 18. Sr ftanb mit bem $ut auf bem ^opf, 19. Qx roar bee ©efitbl^ nid)t mdc^tig. 20. Die dlM)^m\amm^ lung ^u 5!>rag errod<e griebri^ ben giinften jum ^onige, 21. 140 USE OP THE ARTICLE. SBtr fcgelten gegcn ©iiben, itnb bann gegcn 2Bej^en. 22. |)err Wlanxtx l^at einen 5lrtt!el uber bte ffit^^tt ber grauen gefc^rieben. 23* Der SSater unb bie (So^ne ftnb fpa^ieren gegangen* Grammatical. 1. One of the most marked differences between the English and the German languages is in the use of the Article. This difference arises in many cases from the fact that the German idiom often requires the noun to be conceived as concrete, where the English idiom re- quires it to be conceived in a general or abstract sense. Thus, in the sentence S)cr WJenfc^ tft fterblic^ (Man is mortal), if we translate ber SD^enfc^ by " the human heing^ we will have the spirit of the German idiom. 2. The most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article are given on page 254. Rem. The variations to the rules there given (especially those to the first rule, § 55, 1, 1), must be learned by practice. Their exposition here vi^ould only cause confusion. Exercise 80. 1. Platinum is the heaviest metal, and lead is the softest metal. 2. William Pressnitz is studying philos- ophy, and John Pressnitz is studying astronomy. 3. What are you reading ? 4. 1 am reading Jahn's History of Astronomy. 5. Mr. Preu is studying theology at (an) the University of Halle. 6. Prof. Hoffmann is professor of chemistry in the University of Berlin. 7. The good fear not (the) death. 8. (The) virtue leads to (the) hap- piness. 9. (The) pride is contemptible. 10. (The) last summer was very hot. 11. (In the) next winter we will probably go to Italy. 12. After breakfast we will go to (auf) the market. 13.Dinneris not yet ready. 14. The ruins of old Greece are among the most interesting in the world. 15. Switzerland lies between Germany and Italy. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 141 16. Smyrna is the largest city in Turkey in Asia (in the Asiatic Turkey). 17. Bucharest is the capital of Wal- lachia. 18. We take lessons (^aben ©tunten) in music four times a week {§ 105). 19. He stands there with his hat in his hand. 20. They elected him president unan- imously. 21. The defendant admits that he was an ac- complice in the crime. 22. The ship will sail toward the North, and then it will sail toward the East. LESSON XLI. PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. ginunbatJ^tjigftc 5lufgak* 1. Qx ^at e$ meinet^alben gct()an. 2. (S^ warm unfer ^wan^ gig in ter ©efellfc^aft ; mer »on un^ jtnb um 3c()n U^r nac^ ^aufe gegangen ; bie iibrtgen biteben bi^ 2??ttterna(^t. 3. d^ tt)ar einmal eine gro^e ^unger^notl) im ?anbe. 4. 2Ber ift ba ? 5.3c^ bin ba. 6. 2Ber mar mtt 3f)nen? 7. d^ wax mein 33 ruber unb meine ©^raejler. 8. 3c^ lobe mid) (or ic^ lobe mic^ fe(bft), 9. 3Barum lobft bu bid^ felbfl? 10. ^aben mx un^ gelobt? IL 3a,tl)r ()abt eud) gelobt. 12. (Sr lobt ft^ felbjl. 13. ®te lobt ftd) ni^t. 14. Ste loben ftd). 15. ^r felbfl ^at e^ get^an. 16. 3^ felber fann c^ tf)un. 17. ©elbjl feine geinbe ad)ten i^n. 18. 2Btr scrfte^en etnanber (or un^ einanber) ganj gut. 19. dx ^at ba^ ^au^ fiir 2,000 X^aler »erfauft ; er l)atte bafiir' 1,500 X^aler gegcben. 20. d^ mren 125 Ticht man auch von Ge~ spenstern / aber in der Reg el Jidben nur " die Leut^'' und das seTJber unsichtbare und sj>uJchafte " man^^ sie gesehen. 3. Was sagt man in der Stadt uber die neue Anleihef 4 Man ist daruber sehr unzufrieden^ 5. Man lacht ge- wbhnlich, wenn einem etwas Ldcherliches hegegnet. 6. Man ist froh^ wenn man eine Arbeit geendet hat. 7. Jemand hlojpft. 8. Es ist Herr Wedel. 9. Kennen Sie Jemand {or Jemanden) aus der Gesellschaft? 10. leh kenne Niemand {or Niemanden) ausser Ilerrn Ruprecht und seiner Frau. 11. Hat Jemand es Ihnen gesagt f 12. Nein, Niemand hat es mir gesagt^ ich habe es selbst heute Morgen in der Zeitung gelesen. 13. Seine Hand wird DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - 147 wider Jederman, uiid Jedermanns Hand wird wider ikn sein (1. Mo8. 12, 16). 14. Man soil se-ln Ilerz nicht Jeder- mann offenbaren. 15. Ilahen Sie etwas von dem neuen UnfaU in den Bergwerken gehbrt? 16. Nein^ ich habe Niclits davon geJtort. 17. Wimsehen Sie nock etwas f 18. Ich werde noch etwas Butter nehmen. 19. Dieses Tuck ist etwas gam Neues. 20. Er hat etwas gam Arideres ge- meint, {^\,IIier ist gam was Neues). 22. Ilahen Sie noch Gold? 23. Ja^ ich habe noch welches. 24. Ilahen Sie heute Morgen Aejofel auf (in) dem Markt gesehen ? 25. ar fe^r theuer. 2. 2)a^ (jene^) ^ud^ l)abe ic^ fc^on gclefen. 3. X)iefen ^errn fenne id) fef)r gut, aber jeuen ^errn bort \)Ci,ht i^ nie sorter 9efe()en. 4. jDie Diuinen yon ^ompeji ftnt) grower unt) interejfanter al^ t>ie »on ^ercula^ neum. 5. 2)er ift ein fet)r 9elc()rter 2)?ann. 6. SBann xoix^ ^crr 3^ot^ imet^crfommen ? 7. 2)a^ tt)eig ic^ nic^t. 8, Da^^ ift tc^ ^aifer^ ^anb unb (Siegel (ec^.). 9. Dae fmb SlUce nciie ^dufer in fciefer (Btra^e. 10. Sr malte feinen 5>ettcr unt bcffcn (2o()n. 11. Der 3^u^m beffen, ber liigt, bauert nid)t lange. 12. Sr ift nid)t »on benen, bie mit 3Borten tapfer ftnb. 13, 2)ic0(^ee) (tnb reife 5(epfel. 14. Da^jenige 58ud), melc^e^ bu tt)itnfd^efi, ^at ber 53uc^binbcr noc^ nid^t ^uriicfgebracbt. 15. Derjenige ^txx, ben (or n^eld)cn) mx geftern im SDiufeum faf)en, 148 RELATIVE PRONOaNS. {ft ber ^ruber be^ ^errn ^xtbxt^l 16. ^a ift berfelBe §err, ben (or welc^en) mx geftern ^^benb bet |)errn ^ritnott) trafen. 17. ®er md)t f)5ren will, muf fii^len (or ber muf fii^len). 18. 3Ba^ bu !)eute t()un fannfi, fotlft bu ni^t auf morgen ^erf^ieben (or ba^ follft ). 19. Mt^, m^ mx l)mtc in 9>ot^bam gefc^en b^ben, i)at une \t^x gefallen. 20. ^ier i)aht id) etrna^ in biefem 53uc^e gefunben, ma^ ic^ gar ni^t t^erfle^en fann. 21. 3)ie ©efc^i^te ift im ®an^en rid)tig, boc^ ^abt ic^ ^iJian^e^ gefuuDen, wa^ i^ ni(^t biUtgen fann. 22. SBeffen 33rob bu iffeft, beffen Sob bu ftngeft (<5prid)it)ort). 23. @^ n)ar eine fold5e |)t^e in ber a^ mx faft alle franf bat^on n)urben» 24. 53ei fol^ einer |)it3e (or einer fold)en |)i^e) fann man letc^t fran! werben. 25. (Sold^ einen S^ienfc^en (or einen fold^en 9J^enfd)en) ^attc i^ nie gefeben. 26. „2)a^ miffen voix, bic tt)tr bte ©emfen jagen" (^d).). 27. Da^ mi^ ic^, ber i^ felbfl e^ gefeben ^abz. 28. Da^ ftnb bie |)dufer, n)o»on i^ gefpro^en l)aht. 29. ^ier ifl bie geber, tt)omit id) ben ^rief gefdjrieben Grammatical. 1. The chief rules governing the use of Demonstrative and Relative pronouns are given in § 111, and § 114. 2. The demonstrative pronoun bcrjcnige ifhaf) is de- clined thus : SINGULAR. PLURAL. Masculivu Feminine. Neuter. Nom. S)crjenige, btejcmge, baSjemge, Gen. be^ieuigen, berjenigen, bemjentgen, Dat. bemjeittgen, berjenigen, bemjenigen. Ace. benjcnigen. biejcntgc. bagjenigc. All Genders. biejentgen, berjenigen, benjenigen, biejenigcn. Rem. 1. 2)CriCni9C is employed only when a relative follows the demon- strative pronoun. 3)erjcnige §err, ben iDir ja^en, The gentleman, whom we saw. Rem. 2. XctiCllifit has usually a more indefinite signification than jCllCr/ DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 149 3. The pronoun bcrfelbc (^/^ same) is declined thus SINGULAR. PLURAT, Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Norn. SDcrfcIbc, biefelbe, ba«felbc, Gen. bcsfelben, bcrfelben, besfelben, Dat. bcmfelben, bcrfelben, bemfelbcn, Ace. benfclben. bicfclbc. basfclbe. All Genders. biefelbcn, berfelben, benfclben, biefelben. 4. The singular of the neuter gender of the demon- strative pronoun 2)a§, S)icfcg (2)ic§), 3cnc«, Mt^, etc., is used in an indefinite way, without distinction of gen der or number, like the neuter of the third person of the personal pronoun C^; thus used, these pronouns do not control number and person of the verb : ^a^ ftnb 31UC§ neuc §aufer. Those are all new houses. ^\t§ fmb reifc (Srbbceren, Those are ripe strawberries. 5. Instead of relative pronouns (not referring toper- sons) preceded by prepositions, compound adverbs are usually employed (see also § 188, Ide7n. 3) : - ^ter tfl ba« S3uc^ ttJODon (or bon Here is the book of which I spoke. Wctd^cm) id; gef^roc^en ^aU, ^tcr ift ber 33lci[ttft (or bic gcber) Here is the pencil (or the pen) with toomit ic^ ben S3rtef gefd^rieben which I wrote the letter. Exercise 86. 1. This cloth which you bought to-day was much too dear. 2. The cloth, from which the tailor made these coats, was very good, but it Was very dear. 3. Here is the book of which I spoke. 4. There are the books of which I spoke. 5. The Cathedral of Cologne is much larger than the one (bte) at Ulm. 6. These books are new, but those (jene) books are not new. 7. These are all new books. 8. How much did this house cost? 9. (That) I do not know. 10. (That) I can not say. 11. There is the same carriage that we saw this morning. 12. Did you find any thing that you do not understand? 150 REFLEXIVE VERBS. 13. No, I have so far (W jegt) found nothing that is not very easy to understand. 14. What he said about the battle is indeed (tt)ol)l) possible, but it is not probable. 15. I can not write with such a pen as (tt)ie) this. 16. There is the man in whose (be[fen) house we reside. 17. There is the physician with whom I made the trip through the Riesengebirge (mit njel^em or mit bem i^ etne did\t bur^ ba^ Dtiefengebirge gema^t ^ak). 18. That man is the one whom we saw at the (im) concert yesterday evening. LESSON XLIV. REFLEXIVE VERBS. Sicknunba^tjtgftc 5(ufga6c* 1. 2Ste lan^e \)ahtn ©ie ftc^ in 2)lun(^en aufge|)a(ten? 2, 3m »ortgen 3a^re ^aben mx un^ nur bret SBoc^en in S^itnc^en aufge^alten ; aber »or mx ^a^xtn ftnb mx iiber mer Tlomtt in Tlixmi^tn gebltekn* 3. 2Sie beftnben ^te jt^ (how do you do)? 4. 3c^ beftnbe mic^ ganj tt)o|)l, i^ banfe, 5, ^err 2)ie^ fenbac^ unb fetne gan^e gamilie ^aben ftc^ nac^ ^clgolanb bege^? ben, urn bort ©eebciber ju ne^men, 6. 353arum beliimmern ®te ft^ fo febr urn feine ^Ingelegen^etten ? 7, 3^ ^(^^^ mid) enblic^ entfd^loffen, na^ 3talien ^n ge^en. 8, ^u^ bem (Bamtn tnU n)ic!elt jtc^ bie $flanje, 9* 35on ber 3ett an enttt)ic!elte ftc^ bte (Smporuttg fe^r raf^, 10. %m 1. 9^o»ember 1755 ereignete ftd^ ba^ Srbbeben in igifTabon. 11. dx i)at ftc^ iiber feine ^nt^ becfung fe^r gcfreut. 12. 9la$ etner (angen ^elagerung ^at bie geftung ftc^ auf (15nabe unb Ungnabe ergeben miiffen. 13. (Sr l^at ftd^ burc^ (Stunbengeben ernd^ren miiffen. 14. Tlan tx^ funbigte ftc| unter ber ^anb fe^r fc^atf, m jte jt(^ tt)d^renb ber 2)^orbt^at befanben. 15. 3^ fur^te mi^ »or feiner dia6^t nic^t (or {(^ fitrd^te feine 9fla^e ni^t). 16. (S^ ift fe^r fc^mer, ftc^ an eine gan;^ neue Seben^art ju gemobnen. 17. 3rren ®tc it4 ni^t, mein ^err, ^aben @ie ni^t mdnen $ut genommen? BEFLEXIVE VERBS. 151 Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules that govern the use oS. Reflexive Verbs, and for the paradigm of these verbs, see § 158, and §159. 2. Most reflexive verbs are intransitive. Those that have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case govern an object in the accusative case. Some govern an in- direct object in the dative case. Some are followed by a substantive in the genitive case. Some are fol- lowed by a preposition. 3. The following are among the most commonly em- ployed of the reflexive verbs. Rem. 1 . See also those verbs below which require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case. @id^ argern (ilber), to be offended (at). fi(^ anfd;tcfen (ju), to prepare (for). fic^ aiif(;atten, to remain, stay. fic^ aiiffd;n?ingcn, to mount, to soar. fic^ au^ern, to express one's self. \\&} bcbantcn (fUr), to give thanks (for). fic^ befinbcn, to find one's self (to be, to do). fi(^ bebenfen {gen.), to deliberate about, to devise. fic^ befteigcu > ' . ,,,.,. fic^ beflei^igenl ^^""-^^ ^^ ^PP^^ °°® * ^^^^ (^°)' ftd^ begcbcn, to resort to, to repair to, to betake one's self to. fic^ befjelfcn (mit), to resort to, to help one's self by means of. fid^ beflagen (ilbcr), to complain (of). fic^ befttmnicrn (um), to trouble one's self (about) ; (ttbcr), to grieve for. fic^ bcmdc^tigcit) fic^ bemciftern \ C^^^-)' *<* ^^^^ possession (of), to seize. fid^ bcftnncn {gen., or auf or fiber), to recollect, to try to remember. fic^ cntaugcrn {gen.\ to dispose of, to part with. fic^ entijaltcn {gen.), to restrain one's self (from). \\&l cntfd;Iic^en, to resolve, to determine, to decide. fic^ entfmncn (gen.), to recollect. fic^ entwicfeln, to expand, develop. fic^ crbarmeu {gen., an or iiber), to have mercy (upon). fic^ ereignen, to happen, to take place. jl(t> crfreuen {gen. or iibcr), to rejoice, to be glad (at). fl4> crgebcn (jdat.), to surren,der, to addict one's self (to). 152 EEPLEXIVE VERBS. V f!d^ erna^rcn, to gain one's livelihood. fic(> erinnern {gen. or an), to remember. fi(^ er!alten, to take a cold. ft^ eriunbtgen {gen., nad^ or an or iiber), to make inquiries, to inform ft(^ freuen (iiber), to rejoice (at). [one's self. fic^ jiird^ten (»or), to be in dread (of). ftc^ getrSften {gen.), to hope (for). fi(^ get»oi)nen (an), to accustom one's self (to). \\6^ gramen (iibcr or uni), to grieve (over or at). iic(> irren, to make a mistake. fic^ Itci^ern {dat.), to approach. ftc^ rii^men {gen.), to boast (of). \\6) fc^amen {gen., iiber or tcegen), to be ashamed (of). ft(^ in bte Umftanbe fd;t(fen, to adapt one's self to circumstances. ftc^ j^euen (t)or), to stand in fear (of). ftc^ jetjnen (nac^), to long for. ftc^ je^en, to take a seat. jic^ troften {gen. or mit), to console one's self with. fic^ nntcrfjatten, to converse, to amuse one's self. ftc^ i)erge{)en, to go astray, to lose one's way. fi^ i)enrren, " " " " fid^ i>erlaffen (auf), to rely (upon). fit^ i3Crj:j)ve(^en, to misspeak. \\&l ijerfeiicu {yen.), to expect: (an), to be frightened at. fiA terfic^ern {gen. or tor), to make sure (of). fid^ ijerf|)aten, to come too late. \\&f ijerftellen, to disguise one's self \\^ ijorbereiten (auf or p), to prepare one's self. jtc^ n?etgern, to object, to refuse. ftcj) tciberfe^en {dat.), to oppose, to withstand. fi(^ tcunbern (iiber), to wonder (at). Rem. 2. Many other transitive verbs besides those that are included in the above list are often used reflexively, as : ^&} i)erftef)e ba§ ntc^t, I do not understand that. ^(^ i)er[te^e m\6), I understand myself. 2)aS ijerfte^t ji^, That is a matter of course. Rem. 3. Eeflexive verbs take l^aBttt for the auxiliary. 4. The following reflexive verbs require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative case : @ic^ anma^en, to presume, to arrogate to one's self. ftc^ au§bebtngen, to reserve to one's self. jtd^ au^bttten, to ask for. ft(^ benfen, to imagine. jlc^ einbitbcn, to imagine, to fancy. REFLEXIVE VEEB8. 153 fi6f gctroucn, to dare, to venture, ftc^ eriauben, to indulge one's self (in). fic^ fc^meic^eln, to flatter one's self. f\d) Dcrfc^affen, to provide, fid^i ijernebmcn, to propose to one's self, fic^ t)or[tcUen, to imagine, to place before one's selfl Jtem. 1. These verbs govern an object in the accusative case: 25a8 ^aft bu bir eingcbilbet, Thou hast imagined that. Rein. 2. Reflexive verbs that have the reflexive pronoun in the dative case fire conjugated thus : Infinitive : ©i^ ttnbtlbCtt/ to imagine. Present Indicative. X6f HIbe C8 mir ein, I imagine it. bu bilbejl C8 bir ein, thou imaginest it. et bilbct e8 fi^ ein, he imagines it. »ir bilben e8 un^ ein, we imagine it. t^r bilbet eS CU(^ein, you imagine it. fte bilben c8 fi(^ ein, they imagine it. (®ie bilben c« ft(^ ein, you imagine it). Imperfect Indie. : \6) bilbcte CS mir ein, etc., I imagined it, ere. Perfect Indie. : \6} ^abe C8 mir eingcbitbet, etc., I have imagined it, etc. Pluperfect Indie. : \6} ^atte e8 mir Ctngcbtlbct etc. , I had imagined it, etc. First Fut. Indie. : i6) toetbe eS mir einbilben, etc., I shall imagine it, etc. Sec. Fut. Indie. : \6) ttJCrbc C8 mir etngebilbet ^aben, I shall have imagined it. 5. For the use of reflexive verbs governing the geni- tive and dative cases, see Lessons XL VI., and XLVII. Exercise 88. 1. How long shall you remain in Berlin ? 2. We will probably remain there two months. 3. Good morning I How do you do? 4. I am very well, I thank (you). 5. During the hot weather we usually betake ourselves to Stettin or Danzig, for the purpose of taking sea-baths, and of escaping the bad air of this large city. 6. We have concluded to return to Berlin in October. 7. The conspiracy developed itself with astonishing rapidity. 8. A great freshet (overflowing) of the Rhine took place last spring. 9. He rejoiced over the arrival of his broth- er. 10. The entire army was forced to surrender at discretion. 11. He had to earn his livelihood by work- a2 154 AGREEMENT OF VEBB. ing with his hands (^anbarkit) until he could get a better situation. 12. It is not easy to accustom one's self to the usages and customs of other lands. 13. We are mistaken {or we have made a mistake) ; that is Mr. Rahn's house. 14. We can not rely upon his help. 15. 1 long to see my native land (35aterlant)) once more. 16. May I rely upon your standing by me in this affair? 17. Of course you can. 18. It is often necessary for ua to adapt ourselves to circumstances. LESSON XLV. AGREBMENT OP VERB WITH NOMINATIVE. VERBS GOVERNING THE ACCU* SATIVE CASE. APPOSITION. 9lcununba^t3tgftc ^ufgaSc* 1, 3o^ann ge^t na(^ ter ^tabt. 2» 3o()ann unb 2B{l()e(m ge^en nac^ ber (Stabt. 3. (i^ ftnb mele fc^one ©ta^lftic^e in biefem 53u^. 4» 5Bir roaren e^ ntc^t, bte auf bte ^lumen gc^ treten ^aben. 5, Die^ )tnb 5ltle6 neue ^itc^er auf biefem ^if^e, aber ba^ jtnb 'Mt^ 33ui^er au^ ber jmeiten |)anb. 6. ®eine SD^ajeftdt 3Bil()elm ber SSterte, ^onig »on ^reu^en, l^aben aller? gndbtgfl gerui)t, au befe^len, bag, etc. 7. ©te, 3{)r 33ruber, mein SSater unb ic^ fonnen (b. ^. tt)tr fonnen) in biefem ^oup^ fa^ren. 8» 2)u, 3)ein 53rubcr unb Detne (S^wefter merbet (b» ^. i^r ttjerbet) $la§ in bem nd^ften SBagen ftnben. 9, 2)u unb 2)ein 33ruber ftnb »on $errn ^obel eingelaben, mtt i^m unb fei^ ner grau nad^ Xegel p fafjren, urn ba^ ®rab ber @ebru^ ber ^umbolbt unb bte ^unftfc^dge tm f alaft ju fe^en, 10. Da^ faltc 5Better, welc^e^ xoxx je^t ^aben, ^at f^on Idnger al^ einen 5Dlonat gebauert. 11* 2Bie »iel tt)iegen ®tc (or xoa^ tfl 3^r ©ewi^t)? 12.3^ mege ^unbert unb breigig ^)funb; mein 53ruber 3of»ann tt)iegt ^unbert merunbmer^tg $funb. 13. I)iefe^ Xuc^ foftet einen unb einen ^alben 3:baler (or anbertl^alb Stealer) bte SUe. 14. |)amburg liegt ungefd^r breigtg beutfd^e (b. 6* ^unbert unb jwan^tg engUf^e) Wltxlm norbmellli^ "om AGREEMENT OK VERB. 155 ©erltn. 15. $crr $Rot^ trtrb mit fciner ^amxlk wal^rfd^ctnlic^ ticfcn ^^beut) (or f)eute ^2lbent)) »on Diiffeltorf aufommeu. 16, ^err 3)ictri^ fam frii^cr urn 10 U^r SSormittag^, urn un^ beut^ fd)en Untcrrid)! ju ert()eilen ; je^t fommt er urn brct Uljx 'iHlcid^^ mimc^^, 17. 2Bir [1111? nur gegen Slbenb ben SScfuD l)inauf gc? Qangen, mil voir ben l)errli^en (Botinenuntevgang »on ber @pt^c be^ 33ulfan^ fef)en nJoUten. 18. ^db nad)bcm bic Sonne unter^ ging, fam ber SBoUmonb l)erauf : aber ber §immel l)at jtc^ gleid^ barauf mit 2Bolfen bebedt, fo bag e^ fe{)r bunfel a^ar, al^ mx ben 53erg l)erunterfamen. 19. ginben Sie e^ fait l)ier? 20. ^a, mic^ friert e^. 21. (S^ freut mid^,p pren, ba§ 3&re ©efunb^ ^eit ttJieberljergefleUt ifl. 22. S^ cje^t x\)n gar md)t^ an, ob mx ba^ ^au^ faufen oter ni^t. 23. S^ giebt mele ungebilbetc €eute in 3)eut|*d^lanb, befonber^ auf bem ?anbe, bie an (Spufen unb ©cfpenfter glauben. 24. D^ne SBeitere^ ju fagen, ging er feinen 2Beg. 25. ^err S3ern|lein leljrt mic^ bie Tln^xf unb ba^ Beic^nen. 26. SBifTcn 'Bk mann $err 53ei)r »on SBeimar mt^ berfommen mirb? 27. 9iein, id^ i)ahc i^n ^n?ar barnac^ gefragt, aber er fonnte e^ mir ni^t genau fagen. 28. (Sr nennt i()n feinen greunb, unb bod^ l)at er i^n in biefer unfreunblic^en 2Beifc be^anbelt. 29. 2)ie Sinraol^ner^af)! be^ ^onigreid^e^ $rcu§cn be^ Iciuft ftc^ auf etttja 24,000,000. 30. ^^iac^ ber SSerbannung be^ ^aifere S'^apoleon \)at ^Jreufen eincn me()r al^ fiinf^ig ^a\)Xt bauernben grieben genoffen. 31. Dur^ ben grieben^t?ertrag ^u 9)ari^, tm 3af)re 1815, l)at ^reufen bie 3^^ein^5)ro»injen bcfcm^ men. 32. S3om 5Infang be^ 2Jionate 5lugufl U^ i^um Snbe be^ 2)?onat^ September (or »on 5lnfang 5lugu|l bi^ Snbe Septem< ber) ^aben wir fe^r trodene^ SBetter ge()abt. 33. Der (B6^nf)^ mac^ergefetl i|l mit ^mi 5>aar S^u^en unb brei ^aar Stiefein nad^ ber Stabt gegangen. 34. SJiit bem beflen SBiUen fonnten bie Stiller fo lange ?eftionen ni^t lernen. 35. Der 97ame ber Stabt $otebam ifl flatsifc^en Urfprung^ unb bebeutct „unter ben Si6en." 36. 3)ie 3Berra unb gulba er()alten nac^ i^xtx SSereini^ gung ben S^^amen Scfer. 156 ^ AGREEMENT OP VERB. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the agree, liient of the subject with the verb in number and per- son, see § 115 and § 175. Rem. ] . The use of a plural verb with courtly titles in the singular numbef ig customary in official documents and in direct address ; but in speaking of the persons having these titles, it is common to put the verb in the singular number : 3ft (Seine (S^cettenj ju ^aufe ? Is his Excellency at home? 2. The third person singular of the verb geben {to give) is frequently employed impersonally in the signification of there is, there was, etc. : (S8 gtebt Scute, bic an ©ef^enjler There are people that believe in glanben, ghosts. 3. For the use oi Dimidiative I^umeralsy see § 103, 2. 4. For the chief rules of Ajpjposition^ see § 85. B.em. 1 . If one of two nouns in apposition is a proper name, the proper name is not inflected : 2)ie ©renjen beS ^5ntgret(^8 The boundaries of the kingdom of ^rcu^en, Prussia. S)te 35erbannnng be8 ^aifcrS 9Ja^ The banishment of the Emperor Na- ))okon, poleon. (but)gia(^ bem Xobe Sarl§ be§ ®ro^en, After the death of Charlemagne. " 9^a(^ 2BiI^ctm bem 25terten, After William the Fourth. Rem. 2. The name of the month is not inflected when the word 9)70U0l (month) precedes the name of the month : %m ^nfang be§ 2JZonat8 2l)5rit At the beginning of the month of (or am 3lnfang Sl^ril^), April (or at the beginning ofApril). Rem. 3. The non-inflection of nouns indicating weight, measure, and num- ber (see Lesson X VI. , 2), when they are of the masculine or neuter gender is explained by some German grammarians by considering them as cardinal numbers ; the case is sometimes indicated by the limited noun : WxX (jtDct S5u^enb) (Stern, With two dozen eggs. SDJit (brei ^aar) ®^u^en, With three pairs of shoes. Ohs. The limited noun is itself, however, also more usually not inflected : 9Ktt jtuet 2)ut3enb (Sier, With two dozen eggs. Wxi stDci ^aar ©tiefet, With two pairs of boots. 3tuger etnem Sru.q SBajf er toiinf^t He wishes nothing except a pitcher et ni^tg, ot water. AGREEMENT OP VERB. 157 f). The article is usually used before names of moun* tains (see § 61, 7) : 2)cr ^arj ; ber 25cfu\5 ; bcr SQtda, The Hartz ; Vesuvius ; Hecla. 6. The following nouns formerly ended in -tn ; the *n of the nominative is now usually dropped : $cr grtebe, peace. bcr §aufe, heap, ber ©ante, seed. „ guntc, spark. „ tor^fc, carp. „ @d}abe, damage. „ Oebante, thought. „ 'iflaxnt, name. „ SBille, will. ,t @Iaube, belief, faith. SBci^renb beS gvicbeii^, During the peace. - Exercise 90. 1. William and his father will soon go to Stuttgart 2. There are in this album many beautiful photographs of the most important cathedrals and other public buildings in Germany. 3. Those are all photographs of paintings in the museums (§ 77) of Berlin and Dresden 4. My brother and I went to Potsdam yesterday. 5. You and youi: brother are invited by (»on) Mr. Niemeyer to go with him to-morrow to (um — ^u) see the collection of German and Scandinavian antiquities which Count von Eitelberg has just brought from Pomerania to Ber- lin. 6. The hot weather which we had last year lasted almost a month. 7. Weber's History of the World (SBeltgefcbt^te) costs two thalers and a half a volume, unbound ; such binding as this will cost a thaler and a half a volume ; that binding is very strong and good ; it costs only half a thaler a volume. 8. The express- train from Frankfort -on -the -Oder arrives at eight o'clock in the morning ; the freight-train 1 eaves at four in the afternoon. 9. The concert will take place at eight o'clock this evening (§ 2S4:,I^emA). 10. We went up the mountain very slowly, but we came down the mountain very fast. 11. We are very glad (§ 177, 3) to hear that his health has almost entirely been restored (that his health itself almost entirely restored has). 12. It surprises me to hear that he has not yet arrived 158 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 13. There are many beautiful houses in the neighbor- hood of the Thiergarten. 14. It is none of his business (it does not concern him at all) whether we sell the house or not. 15. Mr. Kuhn taught my sister music, when we were in Berlin. 16. Soon after the death of Alexander the Great, the Greek empire fell into pieces (^U (S5runbe o^t^m). 17. We will remain in Munich from the beginning of the month of November till toward the end of the month of March (or from the beginning of November till toward the end of March). 18. The name of the city of Cologne is of Latin origin ; it sig- nified originally " Colony." 19. Do you know the name of that river (miffen ©ie ten ^amtn jene^ gluffe^, or tt)iffen ®ie mt iener gluf ^d^i) ? 20. That is the Havel. LESSON XL VI. VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. ©nunbneunjigfte ^ufgabc* 1. 3)a6 SSeiB Beborf in ^riegeSniJt^en beg 33efc^ii^er§ (®(^.). 2. ®r Be* burfte je^t me^r al« jemats beS guten SStEenS ber ©taaten (@c^.). 3. (gin (£{;arlatan bebarf nur 9Ju^m ju ^aben. 4. 2Ber ber ©efa^r f^ottet, gebenft t^rer ; ber tDa\)xt §elb aber bentt gar nic^t an bie ©efa^r. 5. Qi)Xix S)ienjic !ann id} entrat^en (®cl;.). 6. 2lu^ bag gtiicflid;fte Xalent fann ber @inn)ir* !ung einer guten ©c^ule nid;t entrat^en (©.)♦ 7. 5llg t»ir auf baS ©d^iff famen, fanben trir, bag bie ®(^iffgleute auc^ ber ni5t^ig[ten Sebengmittel erman* gelten. 8. S^ f^otte feiner S)ro^ung ; fie fc^recft mic^ gar nid^t, tceil id; mid^ tm 9fJot^fatl gu ijcrt^eibigen xod^. 9. @ie f^otten meiner, ^rinj (®c!^.). 10. eg finb nic^t atte frei, bie itjrer ^etten f^otten. 11. @in f(i>ti?an!enbeg ©ebciube braud^t beg (Srbbebcng ni^t, urn itber ben ^aufen ju fatten (®(^.). 12. @ie !5nnen bag ^ud} mitne^men ; ic^ brau^e eg jetjt nic^t. 13. S)er §abfii(^tige a6)td iebeg SBort^eitg (b. ^., ber ^abfiic^tige ^at Std^t auf jeben SSort^eit). 14. (Sinen iiJiigner !ann man nid^t ac^ten (b. ^., nic^t e^ren). 15. ^err @d)norr ifl fo grogmiit^ig, bag er biefcr SBeleibigung bergeffen h)irb (b. ^., bog er biefc S3e* leibigung mit 5lbfid;t aug bem ©ebcic^tnig entfernen n)irb). 16. ^6) ^abt bie Sa^rcgga^I gang bergeffen (b. ^., o^ne 2lbfi(^t aug bem ©ebSc^tnig toertoren). 17. Sltte la^en ilber feine Sl^orbeit. 18. S)eg @uten, tt)ag man ^at, fottte man flcnicgen ; unb man fottte beffen cntbe^ren lernen, ttjcffen man ntc^t bebarf VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. 159 (more usually with accusative cases, thus : 2)aS @utc, tnaS man ^at, follte man gcnie^en ; hod} man foUte baS cntbe^ren lenien, tt)aS man nic^t bebarf). 19. 3c^ bin ber aJlcinung, ba§ trir tor jc^n U\)x bcS ?lbenbs nicf^t antommcn tDcrbcn (or mciner 2J?einung nac^ n^erben tt^ir not jc^n U^r bc6 ?lbenb6 nid;t anfommcn). 20. 33ci alien bicjcn Unfdtten ift cr ganj guteS 3JJut^c« (or gutcn aJiutM, see § 89, Rem. 1). 21. ^c^ War SSittenS (or trf^ ^atte ebcn bie Slbfid^t) einen 33rief an i^n ju fd;rciben, alg er ganj uncrtoartet in mein 3tmmcr ^ercin^ fam. 22. ©elig, bie rcineS ^erjenS (§ 78, Rem. 1) finb, benn fie ttjcrben @ott fd;aaen (Matt. 5, 8). 23. ^rau SSiebemann ift eines ^U>^lid;cn 2;obeS geftor' ben. 24. 3ft fie cineS natilrlid^en !i;obeS geftorben ? 25. yidn, fic ijl am ge* brod^enen ^eqcn gcjlorben, tt>eil i^rc jn^ei ^ Hem. 2. The preposition that is to follow the verb (see § 178, 3, Rem.) will oftba depend upon the shade of meaning given to the verb : 3d; frcue mid; auf feinen 33cfud), I am glad of his visit. 6r frcut fic^ iibct ben @d;abcn He rejoices over the misfortune of SInberer, others. 2. Many compound nouns, having ^mantt for the last component, have two forms in the plural (^manner and ^leutc) : 2)er ^aufmann, merchant ; pi btc ^aufm^nner, or bie ^anflente. $Rcic^c ftauf* unb ^anbelSmanner Rich merchants and traders. (see § 50, 2). 3»ei ^iiirnbcrger ^anfleute, Two Nuremberg merchants. Rem. 1 . Sometimes the plural ending 4CUte refers to a class of persons, the prefix ha^-ing an adjective signification (see Lesson XXX VI., 1 , Rem. 1) : 2)er (S^cmann, husband, married man ; pi. bie S^cmanner, married men. S)ie e^cfrau, wife, married woman ; pL bie e^efraucn, married women, 2)ie S^eleute ipL), married people. 160 VERBS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE CASE. Rem. 2. With some nouns the ending sJtt5nntt is rarely or never used, but the ending slCUtt is the usual plural termination, as : 2)Cr (Sbelmann, nobleman ; pi. bic (Sbelleute, the nobility. „ ^au))tmann, captain ; " tie §au|)tleute, captains. M ^aufniann, merchant ; " bte ^aufleute, merchants. r; Sanbmann, countryman, farmer ; *' bie Sanbleute, country people. ,; SanbSmann, (fellow) countryman; ** bteSanbSlcute, (fellow) countrj'men „ 3ittlJ^2l^ttt^l^"r carpenter ; " bie 3iinin^l^'^Sllte, carpenters. Zweiundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Man hat den General von Fischel des Hochverraths angeklagt. 2. In der letzten Nacht ist ein Dieb durch das Fenster in Herm Roths Zimmer ge- drungen und hat ihn seiner goldenen Uhr und seines Portemonnaies (mit 460 Thalern und werthvollen Papieren darin) beraubt. 3. Herr Klein hat seinen Kutscher des Diebstahls beschuldigt. 4. Man hat den Polizeidiener wegen oft wiederholter Betrunkenheit seines Amtes entlassen. 5. Nichts kann ihn seines Eides entbinden {or nichts kann ihn von seinem Eide ent- binden). 6. Ich versichere Sie meiner Hochachtung und Freundschaft (or ich versichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung und Freundschaft). 7. Ich bin sei- ner Unschuld iiberzeugt (riiore usual at present — ich bin von seiner Unschuld iiberzeugt). 8. Man hat den Angeklagten der Theilnahme am Morde frei- gesprochen (or von der Theilnahme, etc.). 9. Welcher Siinde zeiht dich dein Gewissen? (Sch.) 10. Die Richter haben den Verbrecher des Landes ver- wiesen. 11. Der Bischof hat den Priester seines Amtes entsetzt, 12. Der Gerechte erbarmt sich seines Viehes. 13. Wir konnten uns kaum des La- chens enthalten. 14. Was ist der Mensch, dass Du sein gedenkest und das Menschenkind, dass Du Dich sein (§ 107, Rem. 1) so annimmst {Psalm viii, 4). 15. Ich bediente mich der Gelegenheit, die zwei neuen Gemalde von Kaulbach zu sehen. 16. Deiner heiligen Zeichen, o Wahrheit, hat der Betrug sich an- gemasst (Sch.). 17. Wahrend der letzten zwei Jahre hat Wilhelm Zahn sich der Rechtswissenschaft beflissen (d. h. das Recht studirt). 18. Ich bin nicht der Archaologie beflissen (d. h. ich studire sie nicht). 19, Die Armee hat sich nach einem langen blutigen Kampfe der Festung bemachtigt. 20. Ein tiefer Schmerz bemachtigte sich meines Herzens. 21. Ich kann mich seines Namens nicht entsinnen (or ich kann mich nicht auf seinen Namen besinnen). 22. Ihre Majestat besinnen sich vielleicht noch des Vorfalls (Sch.). 23. Ich hoffe mich lange seiner Bekanntschaft zu erfreuen. 24. Wir erinnern uns seiner recht gut {or wir erinnern uns an ihn recht gut). 25. Jetzt erinnere ich mich ganz genau der Umstande. 26. Ich erinnere mich, dass ich ihn dort gesehen babe (or ihn dort gesehen zu haben). 27. Du darfst dich deiner Wahl (or iiber deine Wahl) nicht schamen. 28. Er trostet sich des Verluetew VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 161 seiner Mutter (or uber den Verlust seiner Matter). 29. Wie kann ein Mensch sich einer solchen Schandthat riihmen (or iiber eine solche Schandthat riih- men) ? 30. Ich riihine mich, ihn meinen Freund nennen zu diirfen. 31. Ich freue mich auf seinen Besuch. 32. Man soil sich nicht Uber den Schaden Anderer freuen. 33. Ich schame mich wegen meiner Nachlassigkeit (oi' dsma ich so nachliissig gewesen bin, or so nachlassig gewesen zu sein). LESSON XLVII. TEBBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Dreiundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Ich danke Ihnen herzlichst fiir das Buch, welc!ies Sie mir vorgestem geschickt haben. 2. Man kann nicht zweien (§ 101, ^evi. 1) Herren dienen. 3. Ich habe der hispanischen Monarchie gedient, und der Republik Venedig, und dem Konigreich Napoli (Sch.), 4. Diese Zeitworter folgen in ihrer An- wendung dem Paradigma. 5. Diese Medizin hat ihm in seiner Krankheit nicht viel geholfen. 6. Der Knabe hat mir iiber den Strom geholfen. 7. Es mangelte ihm nicht an Ausdauer, sondern es mangelte ihm an Gesimdheit nnd Kraft. 8. Als wir der Stadt naheten (or als wir uns der Stadt naherten), fing es plotzlich an zu regnen. 9. Dieser Kock passt Ihnen sehr gut. 10. Wie schmeckt Ihnen dieser Schweizer Kiise? 1 1. Die Su])pe schmeckt nach Kauch. 12. Seine Art und Weise den Gegenstand zu behandeln scheint mir ganz meisterhaft. 13. Man kann ihm tranen ; er ist treuherzig. 14. Man Sicht vergebens diesem Uebelstande abzuhelfen, so lange die Quelle des Uebels /licht verstopft ist. 15. Seme Aehnlichkeit mit seinem Briader fiel mir sehr auf. 16. Das ist ein sehr auffallendes Gleichniss. 17. Ich bin Ihrem Brudet heute Morgen auf der Strasse begegnet. 1 8. Wir stimmten ihnen bei. 19. Der Dieb ist dem Polizeidiener entflohen, ehe man ihn ins Gef angniss brin- gen konnte. 20. Dem Tode kann man nicht entgehen. 21. Diese Insekten Bind so klein, dass sie dem blossen Auge entgehen. 22. Die Unsrigen gingen dem Feinde muthig entgegen. 23. Oesterreich schien seinem Zerfall entge- genzugehen. 24. Er wird Ihnen auf dem halben Wege entgegenkommen. 25. Falsch ist der Inhalt, wenn er der Wirklichkeit widerspricht ; wahr, wenn er ihr entspricht. 26. Das erste Haus hat uns sehr gefallen, aber das zweite Haus gefallt uns gar nicht. 27. Man soli Gott mehr als dem Men- schen gehorchen. 28. Es ist ihm endlich gelungen, seinen vortrefflichen Plan durchzufuhren. 29. Es gelang ihnen nur einen kleinen Theil der Hauser in dieser Strasse vor den Flammen zu retten. 30. Der Affe ahmt dem Men- schen nach. 31. Der Landschaftsmaler ahmt die Natur nach. 32. Dieser Maler eifert vergebens den grossen Kiinstlem des Mittelalters nach ; aber er steht wirklich auch den Kunstlern zweiten Ilanges unseres Zeitalters bei weitem nach. 33. Dieses Wort kommt schon in der gothischen Sprache vor. 34. Das ist dir gewiss im Traume vorgekommen. 35. Das kommt mir sehr komisch vor (d. h. das scheint mir sehr komisch). 162 VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the govern- ment of the Dative Case by verbs, see § 179. Rem. In some cases, verbs that are transitive in English are rendered into German by intransitive verbs ; by reason of this, the direct object of some En- glish verbs is made the indirect object of corresponding German verbs, as : ' 3c^ banfe 3^nen, I thank you (or I am thankful to you). ^ann id; ^f^nen btenen? Can I serve you (or he serviceable to you) ? (Sr folgt feincm 33ruber, He follows (or is a follower to) his brother. (Sr j)alf mir, He helped me (or was of help to me). (S^ fc^abet i^m, It injures him (or is injurious to him). 2. Some personal verbs in English are rendered into German by impersonal verbs : @8 tt)trb i^m ntd^t geltngcn, He will not succeed in it. (g^ mangeit i^m an 9^td;t8, He lacks for nothing, ©c^mecft eg 3^nen? Do you like (the taste of) ii? 3. Upon a more intimate knowledge of the German language, it will be found that some verbs are used in several constructions, according to the different shades of meaning that may be given to the same verb. Rem. 1. Various constructions with the same verb from the different dia- lects of Germany (§ 23) have from time to time risen up into the language of literature (§ 86). Many constructions, that were formerly in common use, have now become antiquated (§11 and § 14). Rem. 2. The various constructions of some verbs may be illustrated by the examples of the use of the verb lO^nCll, to reward^ that are given in senten- ces 7, 8, 9, and 10, in Exercise 94. 4. There are several examples in the German lan- guage of two nouns of analogous significations being followed by a verb in the singular number, as: 2)er ^anbcl unb SSerlC^r Jt»tf c^en The traffic between Berlin and Ham- S3erlin unb Hamburg ift je^r burg is very active. ©eine %xi linb S95ctf C ben @cgen* His manner of treating the subject ftanb \u ^e^anbeln, ift %u lofecn, is to be praised. (3;(!^ \yx%t e§ an jOtt Unb ©tCttC I have seen it in the place itself.) Sefe&en, VERBS GOVERNING THE DATIVE CASE. 163 Vierundneunzigste Aufgabe. 1. Wilhelm hat mir den Brief gebracht. 2. Frau Reichenbach hat ihrer Nichte Schillers Gedichte als Weihnachts-Geschenk gegehen. 3. Unser lan- (jer Aufenthalt in der Schweiz hat uns keine Zeit gelassen^ um nach Italien zu gehen. 4. Die Ilandwerker iiefern selten die Arbeit zur versprochenen Zeit. 5. ZH'e russische Armee hat dem Feinde cine Schlacht geliefert. 6. Das Werk erscheint in monatlichen Lieferungen von je zehn Bogen. 7. Der Acker lohnt dem iMndmann seinen Fleiss init reichem Segen. 8. In Amerika lohnt (bezahlt) man die Arbeit besser als in Deutschland. 9. Das lohnt sich nivMfur meine Miihe. 10. £s lohnt sich der Muhe nicht, dass man davon redet. 11. Mein Freund meldet mir in seinem Brief die Ankunft meines Bruders in Wien. 1 2. Dieser Unfall hat ihm alle Hoffnung genommen. 13. Der Ta- schendieb hat mir das Portemonnaie genommen. 14. Der Arzt nahm ihm die Binde von den Augen. 15. Der Hausknecht hat Herrn Lippard eine goldene Uhr und 300 Thaler gestohlen. 16. Herr Siegel hat sein letztes Werk iiber die Geschichte der Inset Beroland seinem Grossvater gewidmet. 17. Der Brief irdger hat mir den Brief um 10 Uhr abgegeben. 18. Die Schrift lehrt unsy dem, der uns auf die rechte Wange einen Streich giebt, auch die andere darzubieten ; wahrend wir gewohnlich ihm Gegenschlage anbieten, und, wenn ufir stark genug dazu sind, auch verabreichen. 19. Man hat ihm den Dolch entrissen. 20. Ich Juhle mich sehr krank ; mir schwindelt. 21. Fs ahnt mir, dass wir uns nie wieder sehen werden. 22. Es ist mir heute nicht wohl; ich habe ein heftiges Kopfweh. 23. Wie geht es Ihnen hier in Berlin ? 24. Wie sitzt mir dieser Rock ? 25. Es thut mir sehr leid, dass sie nicht longer in Berlin bleiben konnen. 26. Ilei'r Prell hat seinen Bruder in der Gemiania Lebens-Versicherungs-Gesellschaft (§ 50, Rein. 3) versichert, 27. Ich ver- sichere Ihnen meine Hochachtung. LESSON XL VIII. THE PASSIVE VOICE. tJiinfunbncunjtgftc ^ufgak* L Da^ SBetter mirt) fe^r I)cig. 2. 3)aiJ Setter wurbe fc^r ^eif. 3. Da^ SBctter ift fe()r ^ct§ geroorben. 4. I)a^ Setter trirt) ()eig werben. 5. Da^ §au^ anrb je^t gebaut. 6. X){e 53uc^ev werben gebrudft. 7. Die 53uc^er murben gebrudft, M tt)ir in ber 58ud^brucferei n?aren. 8. 3e^t finb bie 33iid^er alle gcbrudft. 9. §ier mirb beutfd^ gefproc^en. 10. Sine prac^t^ »oUe neue ^ir^e tt?irb je^t in ©(mer^borf gebaut, IL 2)a^ 57cue 5)?ufeum in 33erlin murbe im 3^^re 1853 »olIcnbet. 12» 164 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 3)ie Unbcrfttat in 53crlin wurbe im 3a^re 1809 gegriinbet. 13. X>k ^u^brudferfunft ttJurbe im 14ten 3a!)r^unt)ert erfunben, 14. 5llle faiferlt^en (Solbaten, tt)eld)e bem pommerfc^en Sanb»olf in bie ^dnbe ftelen, tt)urben o!)ne ^armf)eqtgfeit ermorbet 15. Untev biefem S5ortt)anb wurbe Mt^ »er^eert unb gepliinbert. 16. 2)te geftung ift mit ©turm genommen tt)orben. 17. 3)er ©e? neral 5)on 3^iegel ift be^ ^o6^uxxat^^ angeflagt, aber er ift »on ber 5In!iage freigefproc^en worben. 18. 3)ie S^ac^ric^t 5)on bem Xobe be^ $errn 53inbemann ift feiner grau no^ nic^t mitge^^ t^eilt worben. 19. SBann n)irb ba^ Serf »oUenbet ttjerben? 20. Da$ 2Ber! mirb erft nac^ brei 3a^ren »ollenbet ttJerben. 21. So^ann SBolfgang »on ®5t^e wurbe am 28. 5luguft 1749 gebo^ ten. 22. 3oi (I^riftop^ Srieb. ». ©chiller ttJurbe am 10. 9loijem^ ber 1759 geboren. 23. (So wirb jejt fe^r mel gerebet »on einem neuen |)anr)e(^s3ertrage ^n:)ifd^en bem 5f^orbbeutfd)en 53unb unb ben S5ereintgten ^Btaatm. 24. $ier n)irb ni(^t geraud^t. 25. 2)a^ Sf^auc^en ift ()ier nic^t geftattet. 26. & tt)irb jegt im ©aale gC:? fungen. 27. d^ wtrb fc^on gegeffen. 28. d^ wurbe i^m »om Slrjte nic^t erlaubt, in^ Bi^^^i^/ ^^ f^iu 33ater am Xppbw^ '^^^^ nieberlag, ^inein ^u geben. 29. ^an erlaubte i^m nic^t, in^ 3tmmer ^inein p ge^en. 30. Dtefe^ 9ldt^fel loft ft^ fel)r lei^t (or ift fe^r leici)t ^u lofen). 31. Da^ mfte^t fi^. 32. 2Ba^ ift p t{)un? 33. 2)ae ifi nic^t leic^t ^u fagen. 34. §err fxt^^ ler fagt, bag biefe^ ^pital im ijorigen 3a^r^unbert gegriinbct tt)urbe. 35. 3)a^ ^au^ war gan^ unb gar abgebrannt. Grammatical. 1. For the chief rules concerning the use of the Pas- sive Voice, see § 134 ; for the paradigm of the Passive Voice, see § 161. Rem. As is indicated by the auxiliary tDCrbCtt (to become), the action is considered as becoming accomplished, that is, as taking place at the time al- luded to : Sa? §au6 WirS S*™t, ^J^'^r' '' ^'"""^^ l^^';'/ % '' ^7 *•""*• ((or) The house becomes built (or) is built. t r (Thehouse was becoming built, i.e. was being built. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 165 2. The passive voice is much less employed in Ger- man than it is in English : Rem. 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice of the verb (with in (111 as the nominative) is frequently employed : 3Jian jagt ; man gtaubt, It is said ; it is believed. Rem. 2. When the active agent is not specified, the reflexive form of tho verb is frequently employed instead of the passive voice : !Da8 erflart fid; fc(;r Icid^t, That is very easily explained. 3)a8 t)erftebt fid;, That is a matter of course. Rem. 3, The infinitive of the passive voice in English is often translated into German by the infinitive of the active voice (§ J 28, 3, Rem. 2): SSag ift \}X t^uu ? What is to be done ? 2)a6 i[t Iciest ^u Dcrfte^en, That is easy to be understood. 3. The verbs that govern the dative case (§ 179, 1), though intransitive in their nature, may still be used impersonally in the passive voice : ©S tcurbe i^m criaubt, He was permitted (it was permitted @S ttJirb il^m ni^t geglaubt, He is not believed. [to him). Exercise 96. 1. The book is now being printed. 2. The houses of which he spoke are not yet finished ; they are now being built. 3. The books which I bought are not bound ; they are now being bound. 4. The University of Prague was founded in 1348. 6. The corner stone of the Cathedral of Cologne was laid in the year 1248. 6. These poems have never been translated into (tn^) English. 7. French and German are spoken here. 8. The fortification will probably be taken by storm. 9. America was discovered by Columbus in the year 1492. 10. Mr. Eberhard's design of the new bridge will prob- ably be accepted by the city authorities. 11. There is no smoking here (or smoking is not allowed here). 12. They are singing in the church. 13. We will not be permitted to see the engravings without permission from the Director of the Museum. 14. This question is very easy to solve. 15. The key has been found {reflex.). 166 CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. LESSON XLIX. CONSTEUCTION OP PREPOSITION^. Stcknunbneuuaigftc ^ufgaSe* 1. Duffelborf liegt bie^feit unb ^oln jenfett be^ fH^tin^. % .&err ©totlberg ift ©efunb^eit^ ^dber nac^ ©aftein gegangen. 3. 9^urnberg |)at inner^alb unb aufer^alb ber 2)^auern mele ftatt^ It^e ®ebdube. 4. SBorm^ Itegt ober^alb unb ^ingen liegt unter^ ^alb ber 33unbe^feftung 2)iain^* 5, €dng^ be^ S??ttte(r{)em^ fte^en mele alte ^urgen* 6. 3Bir fatten ben gan^en Xag gejagt cntlang be^ 3Balbgebtrge^ (®^-)- '^^ ^<^ut friiberer 35ertrdgc mac^te griebric^ ber ®ro§e feine ^Infpritd^e auf (Sd^lejten geltenb. 8. Dampff^iffe werben je^t mtttel^ (or »ermittelft) etner ©c^raubc bewegt, 9. SInftatt ber ©dnfeftele bebienen mx un^ gegenwdrttg meift ber (Sta!)lfebern. 10. %x^% be^ feinblic^en ©ef^it^e^ ttjugten ft^ bie ^roijiantf^iffe ^a^n ^u ber ©tabt ^u mad)en. 11. Urn be^ grteben^ 2BilIen ^at er ee ni^t get^an. 12. 2)a0 (Sternbilb ber ?eier fte^t unfern (or unweit) ber 9)^tldt)ftra§e. 13. 5llle ^orper ftreben ijermoge ibrer ©c^mere nac^ bem 3}^itte(^ punft ber (Srbe. 14. 2)urd^ ba^ ©c^erbengerii^t fonntc 3emanb au^ 5ltben »erbannt n^erben, unbefc^abet feine^ SSermcgen^ unb feiner Sf)re. 15. S^d^renb meiner ^ranlbeit l)at ^err ^un0 mid^ bfter^ befuc^t. 16. 3)ie gepan^erten (S^iffe ftnb, t^rer (Bc^were tt)egen, nic^t rec^t feetii^tig. 17. 3ufoIge gemagter 0pefulationen ift fd)on 2)^anc^er (xv. ben 35ettelftab gefommen. 18. 3)en neueften 5^ac|ri^ten pfolge i(t ber Dampfer no^ nic^t angefommen. 19. ^Ingeft^t^ ber @efabr ttJoUte ber ^apttdn bet bem beftigen ©turm nic^t abfegeln. 20. 2)a^ weig i^ felbjl au^ (Srfabrung. 21. ©r war au§er ftc^ »or greube (he was besides himself for joy). 22. ^innen im\ 3a^ren wirb ba^ neue SfJatbb^u^ »ollenbet n^erben. 23. 2Bir fubren fe^r langfam, ttJeil ber 2Binb un^ entgegen war. 24. 3Bir ftanben mtt Xage^^ anbrud^ auf. 25. S^ ge^t nicbt immer na^ unferen SBiinf^en. 26. Der ^ronprin^ ritt bem ^onige pnd^ft. 27. ^te ®tabt fab ben hunger nebft feinem gan^en ©efolge jtd^ nd^ern (©^.)* CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 1G7 28. 3)a^ 6cftiff fammt feiner gan^en SD^annfc^aft unb Sabung ttjurt'e ein dlauh t)er Snellen. 29. Sffiie lange ftnt (§ 132, 2) ©ic in 2)eutf^lant) ? 30. 2Bir fmt) feit bem crften ^^pril in Deutfc^lanb. 31. 2Bill)eIm dlotl) ijl flein »on (S5eftalt. 32. $eutc ^abe id^ ba^ 2?^ufeum gum erften 3i)^al befuc^t. 33. 3Ba^ er fagt ift ber gefunben 35ernunft guwiber. Grammatical. 1. The chief rules governing the use of Prepositions are given in § 197-§ 258. ^(^tunbncunjigftc ^ufgak* 1. Von Ostern bis Pfingsten sind sieben Wochen. 2. Wir werden heute bis Prag reisen. 3. Ich halte Herrn Roth fur einen Mann von Ehre. 4. Es waren gegen fdnfhundert Personen in der Versammlung. 5. Es wa- ren sechszig Personen an Bord, ohne die Kinder. 6. Die Sonne geht jetzt um sechs Uhr auf. 7. Hier ist ein Gedicht an den Mond. 8. Herr Gellert arbeitet jetzt an einer Geschichte seiner Vaterstadt. 9. Es waren an fiinfhundert Menschen versammelt. 10. Ich erkannte ihn an der Stimme. 11. Ist Herr Cohn zu Hause? 12. Nein, er ist heute auf die Jagd gegangen. 13. Marie sitzt neben ihrer Schwester. 14. Hedwig hatte sich neben ihre Cousine gesetzt. 15. Heute iiber vierzehn Tage werden wir nach Dresden abreisen. 16. Der Brief ist iiber Triest und Wien gekommen. 17. Unter solchen Bedingungen kann ich natiirlich das Amt nicht annehmen. 18. Sie weinte vor Freude. 19. Das Darapf- schifF wird wahrscheinlich heute Abend zwischen acht und neun Uhr ankommen. (Here may be translated the verses of poetry found under § 197, i?^m. 2 ; § 199, J^em.; § 2m, Rem,; § 235, Ohs.; § 243, Obs,; and § 253, Ohs.) 168 ADVERBS. — CONJUNCTIONS. LESSON L. ADVERBS. — CONJUNCTIONS. — OKDEE OP WOED8. Wcutt»nbneiin3tgftc ^ufgak* 1. SDie ?crc^c ftngt fd^on (§ 181, i). 2. 2)er 3$crfa[fer jcneS SBer!eS ^at ben ©egenftanb fet>r tciffenjc^aftlic^ Be^anbelt 3. 2)er ^anarienijoget fingt tiel fd^ouer (§ 190) al8 bte Serene. 4. 3ii biefem SBorterBud^ ift bie et^motogtc n)t[feuf(^aftlt(l;er be^anbelt alg in ienem. 5. Unter (§ 257, Rem. 3) alien ®ing* togein ftngt bie 9flad,;tigatt am fc^onften. 6. „W\i §oc^ac^tnng bin x&i ergc* benft (or ge^orfamft) ber S^rige.... SBil^elm 9tot^." 7. S)iefe8 SSUrterbud^ ifl torn 3Serfa[fer toottig unb aufg getciffen^aftefte umgearbeitet. 8. 5d^ n^eig nic^t, ob ttJir ^eute inS 2Knfeum ge^en fonnen, aber n?ir t»erben tuenigftenS ben SSerfuc^ madden. 9. 2)ie @tabt ^at je^^t minbefteng 60,000 (Sintco^ner. 10, 28ann ift ^err Sinbemann jn j^re(^en ? li. @eine ®t)red;ftunbe ift ton neun bi§ ge^n U^r be8 2JJorgeng. 12. 2Bir n?oEtcn ^eute SBormittag (§ 177, Rem. 2) abreifen, aber ungliicflic^erioeife giebt cS !einen ©c^nettjug nad; ©tuttgart tor brei U^r be§ ^flac^mittagg. 13. 3Sor jtootf ^a^ren tuaren toir in 33erlin ; ba* ttial§ ttjar bie 9iingmauer urn bie ®tabt nod; nic^t niebergeriffen. 14. @ic tt)urbe erft im 3ci^re 1867 niebergeriffen. 15. SDie ^atmen ^aben geringelte, bi^weilen (or jntueilen) jtod^elid^te ©d^afte (§ 188, 5). 16. Sir toerben bei* j^iet§tt)eije (or gum SSeif^iel) ben Urf^rung beg 3^ittt)orte8 „fein" nad^fe^en (§ 137). 17. (Sg fangt bereitg (or jc^on) an gu regnen. 18. ^^ §err tlein prucfgefommen? 19. 3ci, er ift fd;on ijorgeftern guritrfgefommen (§ 155, 5). 20. Soift SBil^elm? 21. (Sr ift oben (§ 187, 1) in feinem Bimmer, 22. (ir ftilrgte t^au^tlingg bie 2;re^^e ^immter (§ 188, 8). 23. 3* glaube fd;toerIic^, ba^ xoxc bie Beit baju ^aben tcerben. 24. 2)er S3oben er^ebt fi(^ ^ier ftufen* tceife (§ 188), big ba§ er eine §o^e i)on 2500 gu^ iiber ber 2JJeeregfIac^e er* reid;t. 25. 2)ieg finb griJ^tent^eilg beutf^e 33il(^er. 26. §err 3. g. @c^mibt, bierfelbft njo^n^aft, i)on etoangetijd^er (or fatf)otij^er, ot jiibifc^er) tonfeffion, ift tcegen eineg am 20. 5fuU i^eriibten S)iebfia^Ig ftedbrieflic^ berfolgt tcorben. 27. (Sr ift bur^aug (§ 188, 9) bafiir (§ 189, 3, Rem. 1), ba^ h?ir bor Sagegan* bruc^ abreijen fotten. 28. Sngtiinftige (or ing ^itnftige, or toon nun an) n^erben bie 2«ufeen toier 2:agc ber SSo^e unentgeltlid^ geoffnet fein. 29. 3Son ba an ging bie 5Re^ubli! SBenebig na^ unb nac^ bem SSerfatt entgegen. 30. SortoortS (§ 189, 2) mu^t bu (ge^en), benn riidfmartg faimft bu nic^t (@d^.). 31. SSer ^at 3^nen gefagt, ba^ eg toorgeftern in $^ei^)jig jo ftarf geregnet ^at? (§ 154, 2). 82. 2)ag 2)am^tf(^iff toon Hamburg ift erft ^eute 2«orgen (§ 195, 2) angefom* xmi, 33. @ic ttoerben \a mit ung ing (Soncert ge^en. 34. ®ei er nod) fo ge* le^rt, boc^ ttoei^ er nid^t Meg. 35. ®ie ^abcn ttJo^l bie 2)e^ef^en toon Slmerifa in ber ^eutigen B^iti^i^fl gelefen? ORDER OF WORDS. 169 Orammatical. 1. For the chief rules with reference to the use of Adverbs, see § 181-195. For the rules governing the use of Conjunctions, see § 259-274. For the order of words in sentences, see § 276-284. Hundertste Aufgabe. 1. Da (§ 260) er gestern nicht zu Hause war, habe ich es ihm erst heute Morgen sagen konnen. 2. Wahrend Sie den Brief schreiben, werde ich ein- packen {or die Sachen in die Keisekoffer einpacken). 8. Da nooh alles lag in weiter Feme, • Da hattest Du Entschluss und Muth ; Und jetzt, da der Erfolg gesichert ist, Da (§ 195, 1, Hem.) fangst Du an zu zagen (Soh.). 4. Wie kann Herr Flint nach Italien gehen, ohne seine Frau mitzunehmen ? (§ 264, Rem.) o. Der Strauss hat Flugel, er kann aber nicht fliegen (§ 263, 1, Rem.). 6. Von zwei bis sieben Uhr wurde der Stunn immer heftiger (§ 263, Rem.). 7. Wir hofften, dass mit Sonnenuntergang die See ruhiger warden wUrde (§ 263, 2), allein wir fanden uns getauscht (§ 263, 2). 8. Da- gegen um 10 Uhr wurde die Gefahr so gross, dass der Hauptmann die Ret- tungsboote mit Nahrungsmitteln versehen Uess. 9. Er ist zu klug, als dass er an Gespenster glauben sollte (§ 266). 10. Wer sonst ist Schuld, als Ihr in Wien? (Sch.) 11. Sei klug wie die Schlangen und ohne Falsch wie die Tauben. 12. Wir fahren zu Berg, Wir kommon wieder, Wenn der Kukuk rufl, Wenn erwachen die Lieder (Soh.). 13. Du Bollst deinen Vater und deine Mutter ehren, auf dass du lange auf Erden lebest. 14. Er ist zu edelraiithig, um sich zu rachen. 15. Obgleich der Lehrer mit den Aufgaben der Schiiler im Ganzen sehr zufrieden war, so war doch in einigen Aufgaben Manches zu tadeln. 1 6. Wenn Herr Stolberg auch sehr alt ist, so hat sein Geis^ dennoch die Frische der Jugend. 17. Der Schnee auf dem Gebirge fangt an zu schmelzen, daher werden die Fliisse im Thale wahrscheinlich bald anschwellen. 18. Es gefiel ihm nicht mehr unter den Menschen, daher (or deshalb, or deswegen) hat er sich in die Ein- samkeit zuriickgezogen. 19, Er hat es selbst gethan, daher kann er Nie- mand als sich selbst tadeln. 20. Wilhelm ist wirklich fur sein Alter sehr king, Ubrigens ist er alter als man glauben sollte. 21. Ich besuche ihn jetzt mehr als Freund, denn als Arzt. H 170 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. LESSON LI. IMPERATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE, AND CONDITIONAL MOODS. ^unbertunbcrftc ^ufgabc. 1. ^ellner, brmgen ^ie mir, ic^ him, no(^ eine Za^t ^affec* 2. 3emanb flopft. 3, (^ommen @ie) f)ereml 4, (3^) bittc, ne^men 6ie $la^I 5* ®u^en (Sie etn 33u^ au^, ba^ 3^nen gefdllt. 6. ©c^wetge (bu) [till! 7. (^xth) (S^re, bem @^rc ge-^ bit^rt 8. ^ater Unfer I ber bu Mfi im ^immeU 9. ©e^eiliget werbe ;Detn 9^ame! 10* 'Dm didd) fommel 11* Unfer t% lic^e^ 53rob gieb un^ ^eute! 12. Unb fit^re un^ ntc^t in 35er^ fu^ung! 13. ©onbern erlofe un^ son bem Uebel! 14. ^arl, bletbe bu ^ier, bi^ ic^ mieberfomme. 15. greue 1)i6^ ni^t iiber ^nberer 6c^aben. 16. SD^ad^e bie X^iire auf. 17. ^inber, fc|tt)etgt (i^r) [till. 18. 3e6t ge^e 3eber fetne^ 2Bege^ (@^.) I 19. ^letben mx ^ter, bi^ |)etnnc^ bie ^iUet^ ^olt. 20. Du iibernimmft bie fpanifc^en S^egtmenter, mai^ft immer Slnftalt unb bift niemal^ fertig, unb tnihtn fte bid^, gegen mi^ ^u ^iebn, fo fagft bu 3ci, unb Wih\t gefeffett fie^n (®^.). 21. Die Xrommel gerii^rt! 22. (5ie^ in^^uc^ ^inein ; nur nic^t lefen, immer ftngen (©.). 23. §err Siibemann fagt, bag bie 5lrmec fd^on in ^Bewegung fei. 24. 3t^ f^^agte $errn (Sberlein, wann er nac^ 3)^iinc^en abreifen tt)erbe ; er fagte mir, bag er S^orgen frii^ abreifen tt)irb. 25. 3d^ bepeife%, bag fte fd^on in 2Bten angefommen fei. 26. Du fotlft 2)einen 33ater unb Deine WnU ter e^ren, auf bag (§ 267,i?6m.*4) bu lange (ebefl auf ^rben. 27. 3c^ rat^e bir, bag bu fleigiger n^erbeft 28. 51^1 n^are mein 53ruber bo^ mtUx gefunb! 29. Wod^k er balb genefeni 30. 2Ba^ bie ^eulenbe Xiefe ba unten ^erl^e^le, ba^ er^d^lt feinf lebenbe, menf^lic^e (5eele (^S^*)* 31. 2)er 2)?enfd) crfd^rt, er fei a\i6^, mx er mag, tin le^te^ ®IM unb einen legten Xag (@.). Grammatical. 1. For the general rules governing the use of the Imperative, the Conditional, and the Subjunctive Moods, aee pages 294 and 295. CONDITIONAL MOODS. 171 2. One of the greatest difficulties which the English- speaking student encounters in learning the German language is in the use of the Moods of the verb. Rem. 1. The chief difficulty is in the use of the Subjunctive Mood. To the general principles laid down in § 124 there are many modifications and ex- ceptions that can not be introduced into an elementary grammar, as they would require too much space, and they would also only cause confusion in the mind of the student. Rem. 2. It will be noticed that the SubjunctiveMood is often used when the Indicative Mood would be employed in English. Rem. 3. It will be seen that the Potential Mood of the English verb is ren- dered into German partly by the Potential Verbs (§ 162), partly by the Con- ditional Mood (§ 125), and in some cases by the Subjunctive Mood (§ 124, 3, and Rem.). 3. The chief rules governing the position of words in sentences are given in § 276-284, § 194, and § 255. Rem. 1. In poetry and other dignified styles of composition, some varia» tions from these rules are allowable. Rem. 2. As the syntax of the High-German Language (§ 6) has only been established during the last one or two centuries, many variations from the laws at present prevailing in the arrangement of words are to be met with in Lu« ther's translation of the Bible and other works that date from the earlier pe- riods of the language. Hundertzweite Aufgabe. 1. Melde ihm die Nachricht, ehe er sie durch Andere erfahre. 2. Thut, als wenn Ihr zu Hause waret. 3. Darum eben leiht er keinem, damit (§ 267) er stetazu geben habe (Less.). 4. Ziele gut, dass du den Apfel treffest (Sch.). f). Bleibt nicht in England, dass der Britte nicht sein stolzes Herz an Eurem Ungliick weide (Sch,). 6. Nimm dich in Acht, dass dich die Rache nicht verderbe (Sch.). 7. Willst du, dass alle Chefs zugegen seien ? (Sch.) 8. So willst du, dass es gleich voUzogen werde? (Sch.) 9. Ich gebe nicht mein Ja dass es geschehe (G.). 10. Befiehl, dass man von Neuem untersuche. 11. Es war nicht zu erwarten, dass er so bald nach Hause kommen werde. 1 2, Darauf schrie er in die Gassen hinab, er sei der Bosewicht, der Maria falsch- lich angeklagt habe, er sei ein falscher Zeuge (Sch.). 13. Auf die Versiche. rung der Kegentin, dass die Provinzen einer voUkommenen Ruhe genossen, und von keiner Seite Widersetzung zu fiirchten sei, liess der Herzog einige deutsche Regimenter auseinander gehen ^3ch.). 14. Der Prinz von Oranien hatte die Vorsicht gebraucht, die BriicKe abbrechen zu lassen, damit, wie ei 172 CONDITIONAL MOODS. vorgab, die Calvinisten der Stadt nicht versucht werden mochten, sich zu dem Heere des Toulouse zu schlagen ; wahrscheinlich aber, damit die Katholikea den Niederlandern nicht in den Riicken fielen, oder auch Lannoy, wenn er siegen wiirde, nicht in die Stadt eindrange (Sch.). 15. Herr Weber sieht aus, als ob er gar nicht wohl sei (§ 274, Rem. 5). 16. Ich kann dir den Apfel nicht geben, indem ich ihn deinera Bruder versprochen habe(§ 274, Rem. 8). 17. AUe Nachrichten von der Sprache der Chinesen sagen, dass sie zur Ge- staltung dieses Volkes viel beigetragen babe. 18. Der Habsiichtige wird nie sagen, er habe genug. 19. Zu spat wird er einsehen, er habe Unrecht gethan. 20. Manche Menschen handeip^ so, als ob sie nie sterben miissten. 21. Bel solchen Umstanden wiirde ich es nicht thun (or thate ich es nicht). 22. Das wiirde ich nicht gethan haben {or das hatte ich nicht gethan). 23. Wenn du fleissig warest, wiirdest du Etwas lernen {or lerntest du Etwas). 24. Wenu du fleissiger gewesen warest, wiirdest du mehr gelernt haben (or hattest du mehr gelernt). 25. Wenn mancher Mann wiisste, wer mancher Mann war', that' mancher Mann manchem Mann manchmal mehr Ehr' ! 26. Hattest du von Menschen stets besser gedacht, du hattest auch besser gehandelt (or wenn du stets besser von Menschen gedacht hattest, so wiirdest du auch besser ge- handelt haben). 27. In seiner Lage hatte ich das Haus nicht gekauft. 28. Wenn mein Grossvater noch am Leben ware, so wiirde er jetzt 90 Jahre alt sem. 29. Ich habe Herrn Gerold um Rath gefragt (§ 279, Rem. 1). 30. Ich irug*Herrn Gerold um Rath. 31. Man hat den Kaufmann des Diebstahls angeklagt (§ 279, Rem. 2). 32. Um zehn Uhr des Abends kommt der Schnellzug von Miinchen (§ 280, 3). 33. Ich war zu sehr gewohnt, mich mit mir selbst zu beschaftigen, als dass ich mit Aufmerksamkeit hatte ein Kunst- ft^erk betrachten konnen (282, Rem. 1). * Antiquated and provincial for f ragte. Part Scconb; CONTAINING FAMILIAR CONVERSATIONS IN GERMAN AND ENGLISH, IDIOMS AND SYNONYMS; LETTERS AND FORMS OF BUSINESS; AND SELECTIONS FROM GERMAN LITERATURE. I. CONVERSATIONS. ((Scf^radicO Rem. These Conversations are arranged for the purpose of presenting the most familiar expressions and idioms of ordinary discourse. This neces- sitates, of course, frequent and abrupt interruptions in the connection of tlio sentences with each other. 1. Salutation, a visit. (Dad (iJrupen, etn ©e[u(^.) ®utcn aJJorgen, §err Sf?. I ^if trilnfc^e 3^ncn' einen^gutcn^ 2Jior« gcii, %o.%, ^bcnb, eine gute 3^ac^t, 2Bie befiubcn ®ic ftd^ ?* 3c^ befiube mic^ fe^r njo^I, tci^ ban!c* SSie ftet)t« c8 mit^^^rcr ©efunbbeit? @c^r gut ; fo jiemlic^ ; nic^t jc^r gut, ®ie fcfaen ttjo^l auS," SSic flc^t c8 3^rer grau ©cma^Iiu? ©eit^ eiuigeu iageu ift fie nic^t rcd^t tt>obI, 2)a8 t{>ut mir* fe^r leib, 2Ba§fe^Ui^r? @ie !?at fid;* ftarf erfaltet, 3lc^ boffe, ba^ fie balb tcicber ^ergc« ftcttt fein mirb,^ 3c^ banfe 3^nen ret^t fe^r, mt befiubet fid; 3bre grau 3Jhittcr? SBic gemo^ulic^ ; fie mu§'° immer baS 3immcr ^ilteu, (58 (or inau") tlingelt, flo^ft, @cbe uiib fie^, njcr e8 iji, Oeffneu ®ie bie Xbilr, ©uteu ajiorgcn, §err, ^xau, f^rSuIcin SBIautcu^off, ^ommen* ®ie ^crcin (tretcn ^Sic nS^cr), S3ittc, ue^mcn ®ie ^tatj, ©etjcn ®ic fic^* gefattigft auf ba« ' 5112,8. 13L.XXIX. 176 CONVERSATIONS. ^6} bin geftcrn f)icr gcVDcfcn,' urn 3^* lien cineii 53efu(I; abguftatten,^ or (urn meine ^^lufmartung ju mad;en), ^a, e8ti)ut mtr ki'o, bafj id; eben aug* gcgangeu ttjar,^' ^onnen @te* nid;t ^eute bet un§ gu 9}Zittag j^eifen? ^c^ banfe -S^nen tjerj^ltd;, (S8 ift mtr* ^eute unntoglic^, 2JJeinc Xante au§ S3re8lau ijl jc^t bet ung jum 33efu(^, ^ontmen @ie balb tDteber, Slbieu I Seben @te tno^I ! ^omttten ®te gliicflid^ na^ §aufe,* 2luf 3Bieber|e^eu I I was here yesterday to call upon you. Yes, I am sorry that I had just gone out. Can you not stay and dine with us to-day ? I thank you very much. It is impossible for me to do so to-day. My aunt from Breslau is visiting us now. Come again soon. Good-by! {May you live well! May you get home safely. Au revoir !) 2. At Breakfast in a Hotel. (Scim gru"^|^u(f in einem ®ajl|of.) ®uten Sl^orgen, ^txx Wrangler I §aben @ie fdjon gefrii^ftiidt?^ 9?Dd; md;t f id; f ontmc, urn mit ^(;nen i^u triif)[tiicfen, ^abeii ®ie gut gef d;Iafen ? ©anj gut, ic^ ban!e, 3)er ^eltner !ommt gteid;, (5r ^olt mtr eine Xa\\t ^affce, 2Sotteu®ie^affee,2:^eeoberSf)ocotabc, SSitte, bringen @ie mir ^affee, 2Bag tt)iinfd)en ®ie uoc^ I^ S3ringen ®ie mir },'mt\ ti^eic^' ' gefod^te (Sier uub ein Mbg^Sotelctte, SKie fc^mecft 3^uen ber ^affee? @r^^ ift ijortrefflidt), ^ellner, bringen @ie mir einen (Sier* fud;en, ^ier ift bie Wlild) (ber Bi^^^i^/ ^^c @em* mel^ber 3^^^^^^^ ^^^ SBei^brob, bie SSutter uub ber tafe), SBitnjd;en @ie nod) etft>a§? [taffee, 93riugen @ie mir nod^ eine S^affe'^ Good morning, Mr. Kranzler! Have you had breakfast ? Not yet; I am coming to breakfast with you. Did you sleep well last night ? Very well, I thank you. The waiter will come soon. He has gone to bring me a cup of coffee. Do you wish coffee, tea, or chocolate. Bring me some coffee, if you please. What do you wish besides ? You may bring me two soft-boiled eggs and a veal cutlet. How do you find the coffee? It is excellent. Waiter, bring me an omelet. Here is the milk, sugar, rolls, biscuit, wheat bread, butter, and cheese. Do you wish any thing else ? Bring me another cup of coffee. ' § 15T, 2, Bern. 3. 8 § 194, 2, Hem. » 5 195, 4. • L. III., 5 137. 2 { 150, 3. 3L.VL.6, iZew. 4L. XXXI. 5L.IX.,1. 6 L. IX., 4, 4. 10 5 184, 1. "L.Vni.,3. " 5 80. 1. CONVERSATIONS. 177 3. Dinner. (!Dad 5Ritta0effcn.) ©tc toerben' ^offcntlic^ mit un8 ju 2}?tttag f^^eifcnV Um wie mcl U^r f^eifen ®ic? 3n ciner !(cincn fjatben ®tunbc, 25a§ aJJittagcffen ift fcrtig, ^er %\\d} ift gcbccft, 2)aS effeu ift aufgctragen, ©e^eii WW in' ben ®^eife*@aal, ©ejjen ®ie fic^ gefciUigft ba^in, 3ft 3^ncn' cttDa§ 9iei§fu^^c gefallig, obcr sie^en evbe filr ba§ ©e^cicf jorgen, 2BaS foftet eiu S3iEet toon 3Bten itac^ ^rag? (Srfte.^ aaffc. . . X^Ir. 10 10 ®gr. Bweite tlaffe. , . „ 7 25 „ '2)ntte Ilaffe. . . „ 5 20 „ Saffen tt>ir gefd^ttoinb unjere Coffer etnfc^retben, ^ier finb bie ©e^adffc^etnc, @s tuirb* jum smeiten 3JJat gctautct, 2lIIe8 etngeftiegeu ? ' S)tefer SSaggon t)at fiinf (Souses, 3n btefem Sou^e tt)trb=^ nt^t geraud;t, (g^ tDirb=^ jur Slbfa^rt ge^fiffen I SBtr fa'^ren* fel;r fd;nelt, 2Bir ^ben f(^on brei TldUn gurild* gelcgt, Um tDie totel U(;r l^alt man an, um* gn frii^ftiicfeu? §ter i[t bie grii^ftiicfftation, 2Bie lange bait ber 3^9 ? ^tDanjig 2Jiinuten ; benn trir n^arten ^ier auf einen 3ug ton ber B^^^S* babn, 3c^ ^ore bie Sofomotibe i^feifen,^ SDie Sotomotitoe fte^t auf einer 2Beid;e, (gg finb ferf)g ©eteije, S)ie @d;ienen finb mit @ta^I belegt, ©e^ort biefe (gifenba^n bcm @taate ? SfJein, fie ge^5rt ciner 2l!tien*@efelt* fc^aft, <^err 33raun tfl SlftionSr' bicfcr ©cs Ieltfd;att, Here we are at the station. Get the tickets, I will look out fof the baggage. What is the price of a ticket from Vienna to Prague? First Class. . . . Thlr. 10 lOSgr. Second Class. ..." 7 25 " Third Class. ... " 5 20 " Let us hurry and get our trunks reg- istered. Here are tickets for your baggage. The second bell is ringing. All aboard! This car has five coupds. This is not a smoking coupe. There is the whistle for starting ! We are going very fast. We have already gone twelve (En- glish) miles. At what hour do we stop for break- fast? Here we stop for breakfast. How long does the train stop ? Twenty minutes ; for we wait here for a train on the branch road. [coming. I hear the whistle of the train that is The locomotive is standing on a side There are six tracks. [track. The rails are covered with steel. Does this railroad belong to the state? No, it belongs to a stock company. Mr. Brown is a shareholder in this company. 7. The Steamer. (!Dft« ^am^jffc^tff.) 3i3ann ge^t bag !5)am^ffd;tff toon ^zto^ When does the steamer leave New 9)or! nad; ^ambnrg ah ?^ York for Hamburg ? Seben ©onnabenb um 12 U^r ge^t ein A steamer leaves every Saturday at 2)am^ff(^iff db,^ noon. 1 L. XXIII. 2 L. XLVIII. 3 § 150, 3. * L. xxvin. 5 L. XXIX. 6 L. XXIX. 7§55,8 8 L. XXXIV. CONVERSATIONS. 181 SSic tancjc baucrt bic UeBerfa^rt ? 3n ber kegel fed;3e^n Sage, 2)ie ^rcife finb : pr bie erfte ^ajiite. . . 2:^tr. 150 pr bic jtDcitc ^ajiitc. . X\)h, 90 3ti?ifcl;enbecf Stblr. 40 2Bte bid ©e^acf taun mon frei ntit* nc^mcn?' 2)rci ,tcffcr, 2)ic Sefoftigiinc} ift integriffen,* Jpabcn ®ie tide- ^affagierc? ein X^eil ber grad;t ift nod(> nici^t gdaben, SBanu fabren irb fie 3&neii bal= The policeman will deliver them to bigft nac^ 3^i^em @aPof bringeit, you very soon at your hotel. 9. The Post-offlce. 3ft bo3 ^oflamt »ett ton ^ier ? e§ tft ganj in ber^ '>ilai}t, @inb S3rtefe filr mtcb angetomnten ? ^ic ift 3^r ttjert^er 9^ame?« Sd^ ern^arte^" einigc 23rtefe*^ poste restante,* Od> tT3ilnfd;e etnige S3riefmar!en, aSann ge^t bte ^oft nac^ 33re6tau ab ? 2)er SBrief ift noc^ nt(^t gefiegelt, SBoiftber ©iegcEacf? §ter ift ba8 ^etfc^aft, ^6) ^abe bte Slbreffe gefc^riebcn,*' 2)er SSrief mu§ franttrt tucrben, 2)te ^oft tft angetomnten, aber bie 33nefe fmb no(^ nt(^t tert^eilt, oftamt.) Is the Post-office far from here? It is right near by. Have any letters come for me ? What name, if you please. I am expecting some letters "postt» restante. " I wish some postage-stamps. When does the mail leave for Bres- lau? The letter is not sealed yet. .Where is the sealing-wax? Here is the seal. I have addressed the letter. The letter must be prepaid. The maU has arrived, but the letters are not yet distributed. * Letters addressed ^^ poste restante" are to remain in the post-office till called for. 1 § 112, Rem. 1. 2 § 89, Rtm. 10. s i 111. * L. XVIIL, 1. 6 Lit., not true? e 5 103, 3. ^ § 188, 10, Rmi. 1. lo § 155, 3. 8L.X.,1. 11574,3,4. » § 49, 3. la L, XX. CONVERSATIONS. 183 10. At a (23 ei eincm SSo^nt l^icr §err iyjcumann, bet 53au* quicr ? @te tcerbcn i^n tm* Som^totr finben, 2)art ic^ fragcn, mit teem' id; bic S^re ^abc ju f^rec^en ?^ 3J2cin S^iamc ift ^ilbebranbt, 3^ bin* au8 SSien, ^6) i)aH ctnen (Sm^fef)IungSbrief an (Sie con ^errn^ ^ranjter, ^6} freue mid; fefir, 3^re ^efannifd^aft JU maci^en, ^err ^ransler \)at mir eincn SSed^jel auf 3^r §auS gegeben.* 25er !iC3ed;feI ift ja^Ibar naci? @ic^t,' 3t^ tDerbe if)n 3^nen jofort in S3anf* noten augja^len, t»enn eS 3Jl;ncn^ red;t ift, Si3nnten @ie mir einen X^eil bai)on' in ®o(b geben ? ©ie fijnntcn ba« 5lgio bisfontircn, 3)aS ijl ntir einerlei,'** 3ft bag 3nboffement barauf ? ^a, er ift auf meine Orbre inboffirt, ©c^on, ^ier fmb jh)ei S3anfnoten, jcbe'* toon fiinf^unbert*' X^alern, :preu^i* fc!^c« Sourant, eine ton taufenb/' ein^unbert" griebric^gb'or, unb ber JReft in ©ilber unb ^up\tx, Banker's. Sianquter.) Does Mr. Neumann, the banker, re- side here ? [room. You will find him in the counting- May I ask with whom I have the hon- or to speak ? My name is Hildebrandt. I am from Vienna. I have a letter of introduction to you from Mr. Kranzler. I am very glad to make your ac- quaintance. Mr. Kranzler gave me a letter of credit on your house. The bill is payable at sight. I will pay it to you immediately in paper money, if you desire it. Could you give me a part of it in gold? You could discount the premium (on the gold). It is all the same to me. Is it indorsed ? Yes, it is indorsed to my order. Very well ; here are two bank-notes, each of five hundred Prussian tha- lers, one of a thousand, a hundred Friedrichs d'ors, and the odd mon- ey in silver and copper. 11. In a Bookstore. (3n einer Sui^^anblung.) §abcn @ie ein SScrjei(^ni§ toon ^^xtn S3il(^crn? §icr ift cinS, n^etd^eS crfi toor cinigen jtagcn crfd^iencn ift, @ie n?erben barin mcinc 35ertag8njer!c unb cine ?!lu8tt)a^I in* unb auSldn* bifd^cr SKerte finben, »L.XI.,4. » 5 113,1. 'fil3& Have yon a catalogue of your books ? Here is one thiat was published only a few days ago. You will find in it the books I pub- lish, and a selection of German and foreign books. *§137. 6 5 76, Rem. 1. 6 L. XXV., 2. T 5 66, 2. 8 5107. »5188,10,iJcm.l. JO 5 108, 8. " 5 111. 184 CONVERSATIONS. SBoIIcit @te mix gefaHtgft btc neucften beutfc^en 2Ber!e jetgen ? .^ier i[t a)Zommfen'§ 9Jomifc^e ®e^ jd^ic^te, bie jii?eite^ Sluflage ber tmtftgefd)td;te* toon ®d;naafe, bie te^te %n^ahe ber ©d^itter'jc^en* ©ebiAte, ^al6en@te feine :|3:^iIofo:|jI)tf(^en 2Ber!e? ©te [te^en am (Snbe be§ Catalogs/ 3^ ^abe ^ier auf biefem Xx\^z etntge fe^r feitene 33iid^er au§ giueiter §anb (or geBrauc^te SSiid^er), 2Bag!oftetbtefegS3u(^? 2)ag ift fet;r t^euer, SDie 5lufiage ift langft ijergrtffen, ^aben @ie ein 5lntiquar == (g jem:|)tar beS ©rimm'fc^en* 2Bi3rterbuc^e§ V^ 9^ein, a6er ie^ ^abe ©aiiber'g beutjc^eS SSorterBuc^, Suca§'* beutfc^^engli* f(^e§ unb engtijc^*beutjd?eg SBbrter* buc^ in tier 33anben, 8vo, unb 9JJo* 3in'§ beutf(^=fransi)ftjd;eg SBcrter:= bu^, an6) in i^ier ^anben,^ ^aben @ie eine Sifenba^n^^arte ijon Suro^a? $ier ift §enbfc^eG'8 (SourS^SSuc^ ; e§ entf)alt eine siteifefarte i)on (Suro^a, unb ^^otijen iiber^ aEe (Sifenba^n* unb 2)am:|)fjc^tff*Sinien, ^aben @ie 9^eife^anbbuc^er ? Sffiir ^aben S3abefer'S f^ii^rcr burd^ SDentfd^Ianb, granfrei^, ^tatieuuub (Snglanb ; fie [tub tt>o^t bie beften,^ Will you please show me the latest German books ? Here is Mommsen's Roman History, the second edition of Schnaase's History of Art, the last edition of Schiller's poems. Have you no philosophical works ? They are at the end of the catalogue. I have here on this table some very rare second-hand books. What is the price of this book ? That is very dear. It has been out of print a long time. Have you a second-hand copy of Grimm's Dictionary ? No, but I have Sanders's German Die- tionary, Lucas's German - English and English - German Dictionary, in four volumes 8vo, and Mozin's German-French Dictionary, also in four volumes. Have you a railroad map of Europe ? Here is Hendschell's Railroad Guide ; it contains a traveling Map of Eu- rope, and information about all the lines of railroads and steam-boats. Have you guide-books ? We have Badeker's Guide for Ger- many, France, Italy, and England ; they are the best. 12. At a Tailor's. (S3et einem ©c^neiber.) SQ3a§'ifl 3^ncn ge^atftg, utein ^err? ^c^ njiinfc^e einen^" ^od, einen ^racf, eine^' feibene SBefte, ^'mzx^^ ^aar S3einfleiber, unb einen @omnier= Ueberro(f, What can I serve you with, sir ? I wish a coat, a dress-coat, one silk vest, two pair of pantaloons, and a summer overcoat. 1 L. XVIII. 4 L. XXXVIL, 5. 7 § 83, 1. a L. XXXVI. 6 § 74, 3, 3. 8 §92. 3 L. XXXVI. 6 § 69, 5 80, 2. 9 § 113. " § 54. 11 § 98, 12 { 101. CONVERSATIONS. 18T5 t)on' biefem ^tu^'f 2)iefe8 fc^warjc Znd} frf^eint furs 9^* fc^oren unb feiu ju jein, (gg ift an6) fe^r bauer^att,' ^J^ebmen @te mir baS 2Jia§ ju ^od, §ofc, SSeftc Miib Ueberrocf, SSilnfc^en @ic* fie nad^ ber neucjten 3Kobe? SD^an* mad)t bie ZaxUt giemli^ lang, bic ®c^i3^e reicf^en faft big an bie ^nice, bie Slermel finb jiemtic^ tT?eit, ©ammet'tragen fiub je^t ganj au«« ber 2Jtobe, ^rofeiren @ie ben 3Jocf an, Sr ift ju eng unter^ ben airmen, S)a8 Ici^t^ fid; Ieid;t anbern, 3c^ tperbe ben Uefcerrocf aud^ anjie^en, Sann er sugetno^ft werben? 3ie^en ®ie fa9onirte ober glatte Wlu^tx fttrbieSSeftetor? 2)ie feibene SBefte foil fa^ontrt, bie @ammct^2Sefte foU' einfac^ fein, 23erbleid}t biefc gvirbe nid;t fel)r fd^ncll? ^df tann fie al6 cid^t garantiren, SSann tritnfd)cn @ie bie tteiber? ajiitttrod?'" gjJorgcu um jc^n U^r, benn id; reife um jwblf U^r^' nai) 2Bien ©ie fSnnen fid^ barauf tocrlaffen, ba§ SlUeS fertig fein'' tcirb, Do you wish a complete suit from this piece of cloth? This black cloth seems to be fine and of a short nap. It is very durable also. Take my measure for a coat, panta- loons, vest, and overcoat. Do you wish them in the latest fash- ion? The waist is made rather long, the skirts reach almost to the knees, the sleeves are made rather wide. Velvet collars are now all out of fashion. Try the coat on. It is too tight under the arms. That can be easily changed. I will try on the overcoat also. Can it be buttoned ? Do you prefer figured or plain pat- terns for the vest? The silk vest may be figured, the velvet vest may be plain. Does not this color fade very easily? I can warrant it not to fade. When do you wish the clothes? Wednesday forenoon at ten o'clock, for I leave for Vienna at noon. You may rely upon their all being ready. 13. In a Dry Goods Store. (3n cinem 3;ud^Iabcn.) 2Sa9 filr ©etbcujcuge ^aben @ie ? SSir ^abcn ®eibe in alien ©(^ottirun* flen, 5Braud;eu ®ie @eibe gu einem Sleibe ober JU cinem SDZautel ? 2)ie^e garben fmb jet?t 2J?obe, 2)a8 2JJuftcr gefdllt mir uid;t, e6 ifl ju bunt, What kind of silks have you ? We have silks of all colors. Do you wish silk for a dress or for % cloak ? These colors are now in fashion. I do not like that pattern : it is too gaudy. •• L. XXXII. a L. IX., 1. M 86, 2, 3. * § 107, Rem. 6. 5 § 112, 6. • 5 82, 2. 7 5 82, 1. 8 144, 4. » L. xxxin. JO L. xxm., 3. " Twelve o'clock. 12 L. XXVIII. 186 CONVERSATIONS. SSic ftnbcn* eftige8 ^o^fwe^, aJiir ift ganj fc^tDinblid^, S^ fann mid^ faum auf* ben giifeen ^alten, gilfjlen @ie ©d^merjen tm' SRitdcn? ilaff en ®te mic^ bie 3it"3c je^en— fie iji ctwaS betegt, ?affcn ®ie micij ben ^ul8 fil^Icn, (Sr ift jiemtic^ ftar! unb gefc^winb— gc^t fetir unru^ig— @ie ^aben gie* ber, fatten erf(f>reibcn, S3Ieibcn ®ie ru^ig im S3ett bi§ ic^ tciebertomme,' SBie ^aben @ie bie SRa6)t jugebrad^t? 3d? ^abc ettt?a8 gefc^Iafen— (ic!^ ^abe fein ?luge gcft^toffen),* $aben ®ie einen bitteren ©efd^marf im aWunbe? 36) \)abt fiets einen bitteren ©efd^madf im 3Jiunbe, njenn ic^ aufwad^c, 2)a8 gieber {jat flart na(^gelaffcn— ^at faft aufgebiJrt, 3c^ \)a^t mid^jiarterfaitet, Have you sent for the doctor ? He will come immediately. What is the matter with you ? I have a great headache. I am very dizzy. I can hardly stand up. Do you feel pain in your back ? Let me see your tongue — it is some- what coated. Let me feel your pulse — it is quite strong and rapid — is very flurried — you have a fever. Do you consider my sickness danger- ous? No ; but be very careful, lest it become so. I will write out a prescription for you. Keep quietly in bed till I come again. How have you passed the night? I have slept some — (I did not close my eyes). Have you a bitter taste in your mouth ? My mouth is always bitter when I wake up. The fever has subsided a good deal- has almost ceased. I have taken a bad cold. »5 237. « 5 66, 1, Rem. 1. > 5 188, 10, Rem.Z. «§24& 5 L. XI., 4. 6 5138. ^ L. XXXIV., 8. 8L.XXVL 188 CONVERSATIONS. fc^mcrsen— ict) ^abe Slugenleiben, @g U)dre gut etn gupab ju ne^men/ @r teibef^ an 9^^eumati8mu8— an bcr §err IR, ift an ber ©d^hJtnbfud^t gc* [torBen,^— am Z\}pi)U^ geftorBen, $err 3Jl. ift i)om ®d(>lag geril^rt tx>or= ben. I have a cold — I have a sore throat — my eyes pain me. It would do you good to take a foot- bath. He has the rheumatism — the gout. Mr. N. died of consumption — of ty- phus-fever. Mr. M. has had a stroke of plexy. apo- 16. At a Watchmaker's. (Set etnem U'^rmac^er.) §tcr ift bc8 U^rtnac^crS Saben— ge^en Here is the watchmaker's shop — let tr>tr f)inetu,* Q6) mod;te^ etue gute U^r faufen, SBotlen Sie eine chor watch, a cylinder watch, with a compensation balance ? I wish a repeating watch. Here is one from one of the best GCf- neva manufactories. It is too small. Excuse me, it is now the fashion to wear very small watches. I do not care for that ; I wish a larger one. I will take this one under the con- dition that you will warrant it for two years. My watch does not go right — gains half an hour every day — loses half an hour. I will look at it — something is broken — the chain is broken — the main- spring is broken. It must be repaired — be cleaned. When can you have the watch rea dy ? By nine o'clock to-morrow forenoon. 1 L. XXIV. 8 144, 5. 3 L. XXVI. *U57, 1. 5 L. XXXII. 6 Adverb. . 7 §92. 8 5 139. 3. 11. GERMAN AND ENGLISH IDIOMS. Rem. For the purpose of showing the difference between the idiomatic structure of the German and English languages more at length than was i>08- sible in theles«oiis:f Part Fi' st, there are given below a few classified lists of such idioms as are in most common use in both languages. To correctly apprehend the idiomatic spirit of a language, it is necessary, in the first place, to have an accurate idea of the primary and fundamental signification of the words of the language ; secondly, to know the modifications of meaning to which the words have been subjected, and the figurative signi- fications in which they are employed ; and, thirdly, to know how far expres- sions, phrases, and sentences (especially set phrases and proverbs) are ellip- tical. 1. Idioms with ^aben and to hxive. 3(^ ^abe bic 5lbfic^t, morgen nad; I intend to start for Munich to-mor- aJiiliid^en abjureifen,' row. ^aben Sie %&)i ! or ^abc (bu) %6^\. I 2)a§ tjat unfern 33cifaII, SSir t^aben g^iAtS* bagegen,' m ^at gro^e (Silc, e« ^at teine* Stic, 2Bir ^aben ibii febr gcrn, @ie ^aben gut lad^en, 3d; ^abc 2)urft ; tc^ ^abc §ungcr, ^aben ®ie Sangetceile ? er ^at feinc Suft e8 ju* t^un, ^^ ^atte"^ Suft c8 i^m ju jagen, 2)^orgcnftunbc ^at ®olb im 2Jiunbe (®prid?tt>ort), (gr ^at ®clb jebr niJt^tg, 3d) a^erbe c8 t^un, obtoot^r i^ c8 ntd^t not^ig \:iabt, (Sr ^at feinen ^^^u^en ba\3on, ©ic ^aben Sicc^t, er ^at Unred^t, S)a8 ^at ^titd^tS ju jagcn, 2Bcr ben @d?aben bat, brauc^t fiir ben @pott nic^t %\\ forgen (@pr.), SSJer ^t ©c^ulb bar an, bag bcr S3ricf nic^t nac^ ber ^ojl gefc^tcft tourbc?* (Sr ^at fcine @c^ulb baran, Take care I look out I That meets our approval. We have no objection to that. It admits of no delay. There is no haste about it. We like him very much. You may well laugh. I am thirsty ; I am hungry. Have you ennuie ? He has no desire to do that. I should like to tell it to him. Early to bed and early to rise, makes a man healthy, wealthy, and wise. He is hard pushed for money. I will do it, although I am in no way obliged to. He derives no advantage from it. You are right ; he is wrong. That is of no consequence. He who loses may be sure of being laughed at in the bargain. Whose fault is it that the letter waa not sent to the post-oflSce ? It is not his fault. 1 5 160, 3. 2 5112,9. »§188,item.L * J 112. 3. 5 5 127, Exc. 4. •5126. '5268 61184. IDO IDIOMS. SSir ^aben fetncn Umgang' mtt i^nen, @ie t;abcii t)ie 2Ba^t, SSir ^abeu ntc^t toeit nac^ ^aufe, 3c^ mu^ ^eute btele 33efuc^e mac^en, ^d; tt)erbe9}Jorgen nad;2)resben ge^en nuiffen,* ^d; (;abe fiinf sBriefc fc^rcibcn miiffen, betoor i^ gcfjen fonnte, ^(^ er^ielt toon mciuem 33ruber einen 33net ^eute 9JJorgen, 2Bir trerben i)or Slbenb ein ©emitter befommen, ^6) ^abc eg toon i^m fetbft^ gebort, ^c^ benfe* baran, mir einen ^ocf mac^en ju laffen, ©laube mir, ba§ bein 2Bo^l beinem 3Sater am ^ergen liegt, (Sr tt)ei§ feine Slufgabe au§ltoenbig, 2ln gveunben fe^lt e8 i^m nid^t, We do not associate with them. You may take your choice. We have not far to go home. I have many visits to make to day. I have to go to Dresden to morrow. I had to write five letters before I could go. I had a letter from my brother this morning. We shall have a thunder-storm before evening. I have this from his own mouth. I am thinking of having a coat made. Believe me, your father has yom* wel- fare at heart. He has his lesson by heart. He has friends enough. 2. Idioms with fcitl and to he. @o toiel an mir ifl, S)er 9}ionb war noc^ nic^t auf,» S)ag genfter ift auf, ajJir ift fait ; mir ift warm, mix' ift nic^t ttoo^I, S)a§ §aug ift mir nid^t feil (or 3Wein §au8 ift nic^t ju toerfaufen), ^6) bin i^m berjtic^ gut, ^^ bin ber SD^einung/ @eien ®ie (or @ei) gute§ 2J?ut^c3 I« Sin ©ebulbiger ift beffer benn ein @tarfer; unb ber feineg 9Jiut^eg §err ift, benn ber ©tabte gettoinnet (®^riid?e 16, 32), Ttix xcax babei nic^t too^I ju 9Kut^e, SSeriftec^uIbbaran? (Sr ift nic^t ®d)ulb baran, 2Bie toiet finb @ie ibm fc^utbig? 3c^ bin i^m 500 Scaler fc^ulbig, @inb @ie im @tanbe e8 i^m ju beja^ten? SSorlaufig bin ic^ eg nic^t im @tanbe, (Sr ift mUixiQ etltoaS gu geben, As far as is in my power. The moon had not yet risen. The window is open. I am cold ; I am warm. I do not feel well. My house is not for sale. I love (or like) him very much. I am of the opinion (or I think). Be of good courage (or cheer) ! He that is slow to anger is better than the mighty ; and he that ruleth his spirit, than he that taketh a city (Proverbs XVL, 32). My feelings upon that occasion were Whose fault is it ? [not agreeable. It is not his fault. How much do you owe him ? I owe him five hundred thalers. Are you able to pay him? At present I am not able to do it. He intends giving something. ' § 68, 1. ^i 162, Rem. 2. 3 5 108, Rem. 3. * i 139. 5 § ISl, 1. 6 § 179, 2, Rem.i. ' $ 178, 1, Rem. f 8 § 89, Ren\ 1. IDIOMS. 191 Qx ip* jd;on angcfommen, (Sr n)ar fc^on angetommen, aiJenn cr nur liinger geblieben' tt)arc, I was at the meeting, but I did not see you, He is beside himself. He is in love with her, He is engaged to (be married to) her, He is of a robust constitution, I am out of that book at present, ) I have not that book at present, > He is not yet of age, To be sure. Let that be ! He has already arrived. He had already arrived. If he only hud remained longor. 3(^ tDo^nte ber ^crjammlung bei,' (gr tft i>erril(ft.* @r ifi mit i^r tcrlicbt.* (Sr ift mit i^r bcrlobt. (5r ifi Don [tarfcm ^i5r^crbau. 3d? ^ciU bag Suc^ augcublicflic^ nid)t toorrcit^ig. (Sr ift nod} nic^t milnbtg. 2)ag toerftet^t fic^. diii^xt baS nic^t an I« 3. Idioms with ttJCrbcn and to hecome. SGBil^cIm ^n^n ift %xii gctoorbcn, @ie njurbc ^iiJ^Uc^ fet>r bla^, (S8 n)irb balb ^ricbc tDcrbcn, 2)a8 ®ebrange^ wurbe ju grog, 2)urc^ @c^aben mirb man Hug, 2)ie Xagc werben longer, 2)te 3cit tt)irb mir lang, ®ott f^rac^ : e8 tocrbc Sid^t ! unb c8 njarb Sid^t ! @te TOurbe rot^ (or crriJt^etc), 2)er aiabc »irb fc^r alt, Sllfo njarb ber Mtn\&i cine tebenbigc ®cele (bag (Srfte SSucb 2«ofe, 2, 7), 3c^ werbe fc^trinblic^ (ic^ fd;n?inble, c8 fc^roinbcit mir, mir fd^winbelt), 3fc^ bin feineS @d;nja^cn8 ilberbriiffig, 25aS ift bet unS jum S^ric^tDort gc* n>orben, 35er 33aum ift ju ©tein gcworben, 3)a8 foil 2)ir jur @trafe ttjcrbcn, 2)er ^anfc tt)irb njiebcr gefunb, 2Ba8 foil bamit merben ? SaJir acrben morgen abreifcn, 2)cr ©runbftcin ber ^rc^c tt)irb ilber* morgen gelegt trerben," ©inc neuc 33rilcfe toirb je^t gebaut. William Kuhn has become a physi- She suddenly turned very pale, [eiaii. We shall soon have peace. The crowd (press) became too great. By experiencing evil one becomes wise. The days are becoming longer. Time hangs heavy on my hands. God said, Let there be light, and there was light. She bluslied. The raven lives to a great age. And man became a living soul (Gen. 11., 7). I am getting dizzy (I am dizzy). I am tired of his chattering. That has become a proverb with us. The tree has become petrified. That shall be your punishment. The patient is recovering. What shall be done with it ? We shall leave to-morrow. The corner-stone of the church will be laid day after to-morrow. A new bridge is now being built. » U35, 2. » % 125, 2, Rtm. 2. 3 $ 160, 2. 5 134, Bern. 1. 5 5156. e { 150, 2. 7 § 66, 3. 8 5134. VJ2 IDIOMS. 4. The Potential Mood and Future Indicative of the English verb. We can go to-day, We can not go to-day, We can go to-morrow. We could not go yesterday, We could have gone yesterday, He may say what he will. He may go, if he likes, He says that he can go to-day. He might go, if he would, (It) may be it will rain. We must go early, that we may get a good place {or so as to get a good As fast as may be, [place), If I may ask, We must go to-day. We would have been obliged to go yesterday. We shall leave to-morrow, Shall you leave to-morrow ? Yes. Shall you be able to visit us to- morrow ? I hope I shall, Shall I bring the book? Shall he be rewarded ? He should go immediately. Should he go immediately (or if he should go immediately), I should like to know, I should not have done that, I will bring the book, I will try it, I would go with you, if I had time. I would not have given it to him, I would rather not go, Would that I had not done it! SBtr fijnnen ^eutc gc^cn. §eutc fiJnnen xoxx nid^t ge^cn. 2Btr toerben morgen ge^en fonneu.* ©eftern !onnten xoix nic^t ge^cn. SBir fatten' geftern ge^en f5nncn. @r mag fagen, tuaS er toill.^ @r taitn gc^cn, t»enn cr tt)itt. @r fagt, ba^ er ^eute ge^en fann. ©r tonnte ge^en, trenn er ge^en tuoUtc. ©8 fonnte regnen (ijtelleic^t voixh e8 regnen). SSir miiffen fril^ ^tnge^en, bamtt xoxx einen guten ^la^ betommen.* (So gefc^n^tnb (or fc^nett) aU mSgtid^. 2Benn i^ fragen barf. SGBir ntiiffen ^eute ge^en. 2Btr fatten geftern ge^en miiffen. SStr hjerben morgen abretfen. 2Serben ®ie morgen abreifen? ^a. SSirb es 3^nen mogU(^ fetn, un8 mor^ gen ju befuc^en ? ^d? ^offe eg, ja. ®oEMd^ba§^uc^^oIcn? (Soil er belo^nt njerben? (Sr follte glei(^ ge^en. (goltte er gleid^ ge^en (or tuenn er gleid^ ge^en follte). S^d; mijc^te^ gem tviffen. 3f(^ tDilrbe ba§ nic^t get{;an ^abcn (or tc^ ^atte bag nic^t get^an). ^ bem ®en)id;t berfauft, SfJac^ meiner U^r ift e« je^t brei 3Siertet* auf ®ec^8, • 2)ag 2)am^ffd?iff ift nac^ Hamburg beftimmt, 2)er 3Jlaler ^at biefe'* Sanbfd;aft nad^ ber SfJatnr gejeid^net, lie did it designedly. He read it in a low, soft voice, [about. Time and patience bring every thing The note was returned under protest. The inscription is written in golden letters. We are going to the Museum ; will you go along ? Will you take the book with you ? (§228). Sleep is sound when the work is done. It shall be done exactly as you desire. It has now been raining six days in succession. In the year of our Lord 1820. The dress is not to my taste. In Germany the fruit is sold by weight. By my watch it is now a quarter ro six. The steamer is bound for Hamburg. The painter drew this landscape from nature. §err Slein ift ein 2)eutfc^er° toon @e= burt, SBag toerlangen @ie toon nnS ? ^err 9^ot^ ift ein 5lrjt toon ^rofeffion, Sr ift 'ein 2Jiann toon etnja fiinfjig SSon ^ergenS ©runbe, (£r h)urbe toon c^rlid^en ©ttern ge* borcn, dx njurbe toon Men getiebt, ©r lebt toon feinen (gin!itnften, S)a§ ttoar fe^r freunblic^^ toon ifjm, e§ voax fe^rllnred^t toon ibm ba^,e^r., SBtr njo^nen je^n Wltikn toon ^ier,* 5. ason (§ 234). Mr. Klein is a German by birth. What do you ask (wish) of us ? Mr. Roth is a physician by professioh He is a man about fifty years old. From the bottom of my heart. He was born of honest parents. He was beloved by all. He lives upon his income. That was very kind in him. It was very wrong in him that, etc. We reside ten miles from here. '5134; 5161. *5 118,3; §166. 3599. * 5 104. 2. 55111,1. « 5 89, Rem. 10. ■'5 86,2,6. 8 §266. IDIOMS. 197 6. 3tt (§ 235). Sir toerben, jum 93cif^iel'— §cutc tuirb in bcr ^rd;e einc 8amm* lung- sum 33eficn bet 2lnncn in ber @tabt ge^altcn,^' S8 irirb i^m nid^t jur Sbrc gcrcic^cn, 2)er ^icg wirb balb ju Snbe fein, 3nm crften, i^um anbcrn,* jum brit* ten (aHal) ! (5r \a\) sum ^^ufter ^inau8, 3c^ babe bas Xn^ ju brei Scaler bie (Stte getauft, 2)a8 9ieid^ ift ju ©runbc gcgangcn, §ier ifi ciu aJiufttftilcf gu tier §dnbcn (or filr tier ^anbe), 2)cr 33aumei[ter bat bicfcS ^au8 jum 3J?obctt genommen, 3ur* felbcn 3eit, (Sr ift jum ^au^tmann ernannt toorben," 3u trelc^cm 3^ccf e bat er baS get^an ? We will, for example — A collection will be taken in the church to-day for the benefit of the poor in the city. It will not redound to his honor. The war will soon be at an end. Going, going, gone ! (at an auction). He was looking out of the window. I paid three thalers a yard for the cloth. [to ruins). The empire has fallen to pieces (gone Here is a piece of music arranged for four hands. The architect has taken this house for his model. At the same time, lie has been appointed captain. For what purpose has he done that ? ». nn (§ 245). SScnn idb an ^ijx^x ©telle ttjSrc, 3ln rocm ift c8 ju lejen ? 2)ie 9ietbe ift an mir, ju lefen, S« ift an ^viebridb, 2)er aJiann gcbt an triidcn, dx fi^t am genfter,^ (Ss ift nic^tS an ber @a^c, (Sine 9Jebe an ben ^i5nig, ?(n unb filr fid^, [njcfenb. S8 warcn an tilnfbunbert ^erfonen an* ^6f babe micb an ibn gewcnbet, If I were in your place. Whose turn is it to read ? It is my turn to read. It is Frederick's turn. The man goes on crutches. He is sitting at the window. There is nothing true in it. An address to the king. In and of itself (per se). [sons present. There were toward five hundred per- I applied to him. 8. 9luf (§246). aWein 53rubcr ifl auf ber 3agb, (Sine 2lnttt?ort auf einen SBrief, @ic n?ar bcfe* auf ibn^ (Sr bat biel ®elb auf Sild^er gewanbt, SBilbelm gcbt auf ben 3)?artt, i©i« auf tteiteren ^Bcfcbt, [ten, Sluf bie (Sefunbbeit ciner ^erfon trin* 2Bir babcn lange auf ibn gewartct, My brother has gone hunting. An answer to a letter. She was angry at him. He has spent much money in books. William is going to market. Until further orders. To drink to a person's health. We have waited for him a long time. '5 58. »457.2.& 35104. * 5 102, iJem. 5. * 5 M, Reni. 2. 6 5 131, Jiem. 3. " J 08, Exc «»5288. in. KXAMTLKS OF SYNONYMS. |ol4t»bttmit ^IViffet KKHft ftwt*, unb cbnc ^)iJUffut)t auf fetiicn unvtbjAaft- IMIm Siu^cn ((VvllUub, (.»\\Mv;ilanb, ^umvfUuib, ^I icjlaub). ^- c 1 b ift ^^anb, H Wig g^t ^lUgtad^tc* tva.Ku obcv nid^t O-i^v^^cl^tcIb, ^ilMntcvfclb, ^i\>ci3cn. frfbX Htftt }^ nut mrflut? jjcbautcx^ ^-clb (.^atcvacfcr, iilccarfcr, i^alfU 9ii ItftTf ttiAttn ijl bcrieuuK, bcjlcii ^aiipt^Mcbaft bcv '^IJcvbau \% n Wtg tlvigort itt bet ^tdbt o«(Y auf bcm V^anbc ivcbnciu ^ a ii b tv i r t b unb S ft net fil^lelni' w^ tei SRectmal ein,' bag cin folder nicbt in ber «8tabt, fN^bcoi wf blM ^Mte IM|«t«* Uutcv ft(b ftnb V?aubtvtrtbc uub Waiter barin lRt |<| tou^ Wt» »l^ bm it^tgo^ O^cbraucb, bav^ Ic^tcrc ^llnnt nicbt blct^ ba^ 9(|^ fMltni «w| b«i eisuib C« bet bflrcjcrltd^ni (S^c jcU jcbaft), bav^ crfterc Kt| b«l 9^^^ oaieigt mib btn etanb gar ni*t anbcutet. &n I fttirt DHtttr^itt bcfitjt, auf bcmfcttMUi' Icbt unb e8 felbfi be* 1(1 da Saxboiit^ ; abcr a ifl fcin ;^^cr, bcnn cr gcbcrt nid^ |Mi«MKnfMbc. C^aa^.) S. Viffltlci, erpt^cn, aufcr^c^cn* S^ SiclEt |a^ c^nlftd^ : ast bcc aegenbcn cber ft^enben in He f^^ €Mteg Hgy laL ^gii^ tbec^a^ : fOf rdfebta. (pon tuiem ennben* frik «iik|oi» eMow tifafk|ai> S)ie C dPc amug in He ^fft n>irb in «Kf{le|ca b«4 bit 9«f bcfteKt nibmQiDc&catig bqet^ grin *¥flclta bdMfc bfeftftc i—r «rtb wt», dte aail enKrarttil uMuite i i ^Beife, tcn^TlHHiflBibllat lilcHlBi(eT»abUK^d|^ tn«n>ablen). ^er« « Gi)9l btx QoB*^ »««» an |K t X t cb ea, todibcd He froberc w^iiaf t i Ml " ^ > i . m bk gwdbcrtigteit^ ja >auiei b c a , unb auf Hefe SBkifc aaferflelesfibflt. Deftfi^ali g^CT^yfcwaib bcjtinnnte baan He* |eb SaMni^ miMljliil imK cr baxdb bit gi9§ui %Uk lac^ %aBtSdftS \a Mmi fiwa^ laf ilnliil pr bt mafcrflc|ca cat bcai Onibe, mib umI^ «i|r bai ^ai^pfeMat Safetflclaas^bcii^ei^ ia bie|er ^pDna »on tx* tc|eam%aBlbaaamafflebaa§9iraid|t§etaB4tiBab. (GrifliMa pK ai^ aaf jcflaabea [or exf «abea3. @eiae iaikrttibcaab|nntbaSafeT|lebaag.*) (SRooe.) 'fS^Jkii.t. UBi.1. *f=Ci. -^isi^^s. mxAMnokc^ wtwnma. vn iPmlM^ fWffrJbpri atm 'jer Am^Unmf 4m Watmwth Star Amtt > .frfwt, tt^rMm inn |M<» «fei Ar iCiiiifirL,iir iu ber neuercn ^txt burd; bie ©nglanber betannt gett)orben fhib, ti?erben @ e e unb ni^t 2Ji e e r genannt (tcie bie @ ii b j e e, bie tcir am beften bur(^ (£oofS" unb gorfterg @eereifen fennen). SSenn ber ganje Ocean beibeg, © ee unb 9}iecr gcnannt h)irb, fo gefc^ie^t ba§ uac^ toerfc^iebenen Slnfid^ten. @ e e tctrb e8 nac^ feiner 2)Merie, 3JJccr nad^ feiner gorm genannt 2)ie @ee ift ber Ocean, ober ber 2:^eil ber OBerflad^e ber @rbe, ber^ nid;t ^efteS 2anb ift ; bag 9)1 e e r, fo fern eg ijon biefem feften Sanbe eingefc^Ioffen ift. (9Jian fagt : f ee== tcartg,entgegengefet5t bon lanbtcartg ; ©eeminb, entgegengefeljt bem i^anbnnnb ; @ecmad;t, ©eefolbaten, ©eereifen, ®eerauber, jc, entgegengefe^t ber Sanbmac^t, !i!anbfoIbaten, Sanbreifen, 9Jauber auf bent feften Sanbe, :c, @fcen fo fagt man ® c e njaffer, @ e e baber, jc. ; ^ingegen fagt man 2Ji e e r bnfeu, aJieerenge), ((gber^arb.) 6. Naseweis, neugierig, vorwitzig. Der Naseweise verlangtEtwas zu wissen, und fragt, um zu zeigen, dass er Verstand und Erfahrung geniig* besitzt, von einer 8ache, die noch iiber seiner Sphare ist, mitzusprechen, Man nennt Personen naseweis^ und besonders kleine Knaben und Madchen, weijn sie iiber viele Dinge urtheilen, die sie nicht verstehen, um ihren Witz und Verstand zu zeigen, insonderheit* wenn sie durch ihre voreiligen Urtheile Personen, denen sie Achtung schuldig^ sind, beleidigen, oder sie durch ihre unbescheidenen Fragen in Verlegenheit setzen. Die Neugierde ist die leidenschaftliche Begierde eines Menschen, das Neue zu wissen, bloss weil es ihm neu ist ; der Vorwitz ist die Begierde, das zu wissen und zu erfahren, was"' er nicht wissen kann, und niclit zu erfahren suchen soil. Zu dem, was uns zu wissen vorenthalten ist, gehort besonders die entfernte und ungewisse Zukunft. Diese ist es gerade am meisten, welche den Vorwitz unwissender und schwacher Menschen reizt. (Eberhard.) 7. Mogen, woUen. Was wir thun, das miissen wir wollen, selbst alsdann, wenn wir es ungem thun. Sollen wir es so wollen, dass wir es gern thun, so muss es entweder gar nicht missfallen, oder doch in betrachtlichem Grade mehr wohlgefiillen, als missfallen. So fern nun das, was wir wollen gefallt, so fern es uns Lust und Vergniigen macht, mogen wir es. So wie wir Manches wollen, was wir nicht rnochten, wenn wir miissten,^ so mogen wir auch Manches, was wir nicht wollen. (Eberhard.) 1 L. XVIII, 3, Mem. 3 § 114, 2. 5§ ng, 12. 7 § 114, 4, /jem. 2JT7. 4§ii2,5, iZcm. 1. 6 § 96, 1 85124. IV. LETTERS AND BUSINESS FORMS. 1. Ein Neffe meldet seinem Onkel den Todesfall seiner Schwester. Berlin, den 9. April 18G9. Lieber Onkel. Eine ausserordentlich schmerzliche Begebenheit zwingt mich heute Dir zu schreiben.* Nuch neuntagigem schweren Leiden ist gestern meine liebe Schwester Adelheid am Typhus gestorben.' Wie gross der Schmerz im Hause und die Theilnahme aller Bekannten ist, kannst Du Dir denken, da Du ja wohl weisst,' wie sehr sie der Liebling aller derer war, mit denen sio in Beriihrung kam. Wenn ich mich auf diese kurze traurige Mittheilung beschranke, ohne irgQ;id welche Nebenumstande zu erwahnen, so schreibe* das dem tiefen Schmerze zu, der mich bewegt. Alles Andere, so mittheilenswerth es auch son St sein mag, erscheint mir diesem Ereignisse gegeniiber bedeutungslos und unwesentlich. Mit herzlichem Gruss Dein treuer NefFe Gottfried Forster. Hamburg, ben 7. 3uni 1869. 2JZcin Itcber 3Satcr. SBie gcrue trarc ic^ {jcutc in ber 2J?ittc unferer ^amiftc, urn 2)ir ^erfUnttd^ meincn @(ilcfn?unfd; barbringcn ju fbnnen. 3""^ crftcn 9)?alc tjl c8 mir t?cr=> fagt, bcii ^cfttag mit (Sud;* ju fcicrn, unb c§ trirb mir ganj ttjcl? s" 3J2utl;e, tDcnn ic^ baran benfc. 9Jioc^tc bcr f(^onc %ac^ noc^ rec^t oft tricbcrtcbrcn unb un3 5lUe um 2)id; tjereinigt jc^en. !S)amtt id; abcr nid^t ganj in bem l;cimiid)cn ^rcifc nm ben gefd;miic!tcn gi^ilbftild^tifc^ mit ber grogcn @eburt8tag«tcvtc feble,* fo fd^icfe it^ 2;ir mcin 33i(b, bcnn id; tt?ciO ja bod;, ba§ 3)u mid; fclbft — tt)enn c8 auc^ nur mctn 58ilb ift— licbcr nimmft, al8 ?lllc«, tuaS id; 3)ir fonft fd;icfen tcnnte. 2?ictlcid;t fcUtc id; ba« md;t fo grabe ^erauSfagen/ aber roavum bcnn am (Snbe nic^t cbrlid; augfprcrf;cn, njaS man bcnft unb fii(;U. 2)cr Sag ift nod) faum angcbroc^cn. 5lUein id; hJoUtc nic^t fc^on gcficrn fd;rcibcn, tocil ic^ bann gar nic^t fo rcc^t in ^eftftimmung gettjcfen toarc.* 3ctc beutfdjc ^^xa6)U 2)te beutfd^e (Suro^a toanbcrte, unb befonberS beffen norblic^en unb uiittleren 2;^eit beijotferte. 3)er 9^ame „bcutfc^'' ftammt nic^t ton bent angeMi(^en ®otte unb ©tammDater biefeg 5BoIfe§, Z^ui^to, ab/ fonbern toon bem got^ifd>en SSorte thiudu—aithzui\6) Sot, diet—ha^ ^ei^t Sol!, unb bebeutet eigenttid; : „3um3SoHe ge^orenb", „bem3[^ol!e eigen". Unter bem Sf^amcn ©crmanen tt)nrben' bie 3)entfd;en juerft ben ^omern Befannt. ©ro^en (Sinflu^ auf bie 2)eutj(^en unb i^re B)f)xadi)t ^atte bie SSi5Ifertr>an=» berung (375—^00) unb bie Slugbreitung ber d;ri[tlid;en ^leligion. 2)er S3ifd;of Utfifa§ (360—380) toax ber (Srfinber ober boc^ ber SSertoItfommner einer beutfdjen S3nc^ftaBenfc^rift, unb Ueberfe^er^ ber S3ibel in§ ®otf)ifd;e. ^arl ber @ro§e (768—814) n?ar ein t^atiger 33eforberer ber beutfc^en @^rad^» bilbung. Unter ben §o(;en[taufen er^ob fic^ bie Memanifc^e ober @(i>n?abifd;e 9}Junbart (9J?itte(f)Dd;beutfc^e @^ra(^e), beren=* fic^ bie 2Jlinnefanger bebienten. S)ie :^rofaifd^e Bpxadjt getrann an ^2lu&bel)nung, ^Jeic^t^um unb 9JegeI^ mafjigfeit burc^ ben ^ergro^erten SBo^Iftanb ber @tabte unb bie er^i5^te aflge* meine S3ilbung, auf n)eld;e ijor^iiglici) folgenbe Uniftcinbe bort^eilfjaft eintoirften: bie Srric^tnng ber Unitoerfitcit gu ^'rag (1348), 2Bien, ^eibelbcrg, ^i3In, 2C.; bie (Srfinbung beg 2um^en^a^ier§ unb ber S3nd;bru(ferfunft (1446) ; bie Sr* obernng ^on[tantino)3eI§(i453); bie @ntftebung ber 3eitungen ; bie (gntbedung i)on ^merifa (1492) ; ijorjiiglic^ aber bie 9leformation (1500). Sutler (1483—1546) begriinbete burc^ feine SSibeliiberfet^ung unb bnrd; feine iibrigen @d;ri[ten, befonberS ^rebigten unb Sieber, bie ^eutige angemcine @c^viftf))rad;e unter bem ^fZamen bes §D(^beutf(^en (genaner '^tuf^odj' beutfd; genannt). @g finb in bem langen SebenSlaufe unfercr ieber an mid;* tommen." (3ul. SSilb. 3in!grcf, 1591—1635.) 2)c« S>cutfd)cn Satcrlanb* SKa« ifl be« 2)eutfd;cn* SBatcrtanb ? 3fi'« ^reu^enlanb, ift'e ®d;tt)abentanb? Sft'8 tDo am" 9?f?ein bie SRebe blil^t? 3ft'S tDo am 58clt bie 3RoDe jie^t?' O nein ! nein ! ncin I ©cin SBaterlanb mufj grower jctn. 2Ba6 ifi bc6 2)cutf(^en S5atcrtanb? Sft'S SBaicrlanb, ift'« @tcierlanb ? 3ft'S tDO ber 2Rarfen 5Rinb fic^ ftrccft? 3ft'e tro ber aWarfcr gifen rccft? O nein I ncin ! neiul *Scin SSatcrlanb mu^ gri3^er' fcin. SBaS iftbeS 2)eutfd;en 2?atcrlanb? 3ft'§ ^^cmmcrnlanb, ^eftfalcnlanb ? 3ft'8 wo ber ®anb ber 2)ilnen we^t? Sft'S tro bie !J)onau braufenb ge^t ? O nein ! nein I nein I @ein 33aterlanb mu§ Qx'6^tx jein. *{134:161. 35125. » 5 89, /2«m. 10. '5144,6. « 6 113.1, /tern. 2, 2. ♦6107. « 5 64, t, /tern. 2, 1. 8{91. 206 READING LESSONS. SSo8 tji beg ©eutfe^en 23atcrranb? @o nemte mir bag gro^e 8anb, 5f[t'g 8anb ber @ct)tt)et3er, ift'g 2:i?roI? S)ag 8anb unb 33oIf gefiel^ tnir iuo^l ; O nein I netn 1 netn I ©ein SSaterlanb tnu^ grB^cr fein. 2Ba§ i[t beg S)eutf djeu 25aterlanb? @o nenne'^ mir bag gro^e lOanb 1 ®ctt)iB ift eg bag Oefterretc^, 2ln^ @^ren unb an ®iegen rei(^? O netn I nein I nein I @ein 3>aterlanb mu^ griJ^cr jetn. SOSag ift beg 2)eutfd)en SSaterlanb ? ©0 nenne enbli(^ mir bag 2anb I @o h)eit bie beutfc^e Bunge !lingt, Unb @ott* im §immel Sieber fingt, S)ag foa^ eg jein I S)ag, tuacfrer S)eutfc^er, nenne bcinl S)ag ift beg S)entjc^en SSaterknb : SSo @ibe fd;n)ort ber 3)ru(f ber §anb, SSo Serene ^ett t»om ^uge Uxi^t, Unb !i!iebe tuarm im ^erjen fit^t, S)ag foil eg fein 1 S)ag, tuacfrer 2)eutfc£)er, nenne bcin I S)ag gan^c ©eutfc^tanb foE eg fein 1 O @ott I ijom §immel fie^^ barein I Unb gieb ung rec^ten beutjc^en 2}?ut^, 2)a^ toir eg UeBen treu unb gut 1 2)ag foU eg fein I S)ag ganjc ©eutfd^Ianb foil eg fein. (@rnft movii^ 5lrnbt, 1769—1860.) Scr jungc ^wfifcn (Sine ©efeUfc^aft toon ®^ottern tuoUte fi^ ilber einen jungen 9Wuft!cr, bet t^nen' borf^ielte, tuftig mad;en unb rief : „(Sr \puU fo liebfid; wte Dr^fjeug !" f,3a'\anttt)ortete ber tiinjiler, „barum* §abe ic^ aud; einen §aufen S3aren unb ^ant^er urn mtd^ ^er.^' O. 2B, Binlgref.) »«144,4. 3§245. 6§163, '§107. '5144.7. *574,2,4. 6§144,2. e 5 188, 10, /Jem. L READING LESSONS. 207 S)cr S3cttlcr unb Saifcr grtebridi* 2118 etncs XageS' ju ^fZiirnberg cin 33ettler ju ^aijcr griebrid^ tarn unb ibn um ein 5tlmofcn aiifprac^, mit bem 3"f«fef ^^ n>are' tatjerlid;er 9Kaicftat^ 33ru« bcr, trcil atte 3Jienfci^en ijon etnctn 25ater — bem 2lbain — abftammten, dfo uii- ter eiuanber SBrilber h?aren, Iie§ i^m ber ^atfcr nid;t nte^r al8 cincn ^cujcr gcben. 2)er SBettlcr trottte* fid? befd^treren, ba^ eS fiir cineu ^aifer ju irenig Vccirc. ^Ittcin'* ^^^cbric^ ttJteS tl;n mit ben 2Bortcn ah :« ,3enn bir cin iebcr ©ruber fo tici gibt, tt>ir|l bu rcic^er fcin als ic^ jelbft." (3. 2B. Sinfgrcf.) r,93effer gtoa8" @))ra(^ bcr ^olf, „benn g^Jic^tS," 51IS er nad^ einem (gc^afc fd;na^^te, Unb bafilr eine WIM' txta^ptt. Tlan6)ix fount' bic ^a^^c fparen : Wlan erfcnnt i^n |o fc^on filr einen S^arren. (Sin 5(kntcucr« SGJtr berogcrten, i(^ ttjci^ nid;t me^r, ti^elc^c ®tabt, 2)cm gcIbmarfd^aU trat ganj erjiaunlic^ i)icl on genauer ^unbfd^aft getcgcn, tok bie ©ac^cn in ber ^cftung ftiinbcn. (56 jc^ien au^crft fc^tuer, ja fa[t unmbglic^, bur(^ atte SSor* :>)o[ten, SSad;en unb ge[tuugSn?erfe ^inein ju' gclangen. 3Sor SDZutt) unb 2)ienfteifer faft ein t»enig attju rafc^, ftette \6) mic^ nebcn eine ber gro^ten ^anonen, bie foeben na6) ber ^^eftung afegefeuert tr>arb,® unb f^rang im §nt auf bie 5fugel, in ber ?lbfid;t, mid; in bie ^eftung ^ineintragen ju laffen.' 3II6 \^ aber ^dbroegS burc^ bie Suft geritten tt?ar, fticgen mir aUerlei nid>t uner^eb* Iid)e SBebentlid^feiten ju ^o))fe. ^m I bad^te id;, ^inein!ommcn tannft bu nun Hjo^l, attein mt ^ernad; fogleic^ n)ieber ^eraus ? Unb tt?ie fann bir'« in ber geftung erge^en? a«an toirb bid; fogleic^ al8 @^ion crtennen unb an ben nad;ften ©algen bangen I ein fetches S3ette bcr d^xt ttjotttc x6) mir bemt bodb njo^l loerbittcn. '?flad^ biefen unb ci^nlic^cn SBctradjtungcn entfdjlo^ xd/m^) fur3,nabm bie gtilctiic^c ©elcgcn^eit n>a^r, aU cine ^anonenfugel au8 ber 5^1^""^ einigc ©djritt t?on mir ijorilber nad; unferem Sagcr flog/" f^rang" toon ber SD^ieinigen auf biefe biniiber, unb fam'^ itoax uutocrrid;tetcr ®ac^e, jebotb troblbc^altcn bci ben lie* ben Unfrigen tcieber an. (Saron toon 2Jittuc^^aufcn, 1720—97.) ' L. III., 4 137. L. XXXI. '512T,£«c.4 »o L. XXX. ' «}1W. 6L.IX.,1. 8 5138. 11 5 167,1. *L.\L, 5, Rem. 6L.IX.,4,4. » 5 144, 4. "5 80.1. 208 READING LESSONS. Die Hunnen. Der Geschichtschreiber Ammianus Marcellinus ^A.D. 410) macht vou den Hunnen folgende Beschreibung : "Sie sind bartlos und hasslich von An- gesicht, scheusslich von Gestalt und krummbeinig. ^ Sie bediirfen keine* Feuers noch schmackhafter Speisen ; ihre Nahrung besteht aus Wurzeln von Kiautern des Feldes und halbrohem Fleische von jedwedem Vieh. Hauser haben sie nicht und meiden sie wie die Graber, selbst Hutten von Kohr findet man bei ihnen nicht. Unstat durch Gebirg und Wald umherstreifend, lernen sie von Kindheit an, Hunger und Durst und den Wechsel der Wit- terung ertragen. Ihre Kleider sind von Leinwand, oder aus Fellen von kleinem Wild zusammengenahet. ^ Mit gebogenen MUtzen decken sie den Kopf, mit Bocksfellen den Korper, ihre unformlichen Schuhe hindern sie an freiera Gang, desshalb sind sie zu Fussmarschen untUehtig. Aber auf ihren Pferden, die zwar hasslich, jedoch dauerhaft sind, hangen^ sie wie angewach- sen und verrichten auf denselben ihre gewohnlichen Geschafte. Bei Tag und Nacht ist jeder zu Pferde, kauft und verkauft, isst und trinkt und schlaft auf den Nacken des Thieres gelehnt. Zu Pferde halten* sie die Versamm- lungen und Berathungen. Kein strenges Herrscherthum fesselt sie; sie folgen ihren Hauptlingen ohne festes Band. In den Kampf gehen sie keil- fiirmig geordnet und mit grasslich lautem Gaschrei. Gewandt und behende wie sie sind, sprengen sie dann absichtlich mit einem Male auseinander und zerstreuen sich zu wiistem Morden. Aus der Feme kampfen sie mit Wurfspeeren, deren Spitzen kiinstUch aus scharfen Knochen gefertigt sind, in der Nahe mit dem Schwert. Pfluge haben sie nicht. Ohne Hof und Herd, ohne festen Sitz und Gesetz schwei- fen* sie unstat gleich Fluchthngen mit ihren Wagen umlier ; dies sind ihre Wohnungen, wo sich ihre Weiber und Kinder befinden, bis sie erwachsen «nd. Anderswo geboren,®in femen Landen aufgezogen, weiss keiner anzu- geben, woher er stammt. Treulos, wankelmiithig, jeder neuen HofFnung' hingegeben, folgen sie ganz dem Drang des Triebes. Wie das unverniinftige Vieh kennen sie keinen Unterschied zwischen Tugend und Laster. Von Glauben und Religion haben sie keinen Begriff. Nach Geld sind sie so aus- nehmend liistern und so leicht gereizt, dass sie wohl mehrmals an demselben Tage sich^ entzweien und wieder versohnen. (Weber's Weltgeschichte.) SBenn'S ntc^t ge^t, Vok man ix»itt, 3JJu^ man tf)un n)tc man !ann. 1L.XTI. 3L.xXXin. «>5 15T,1. ' l. XXXIV. 2 L. VII., § 83. 4 L. XXXII. « § 112, 8. ' § 158. READING LESSONS. 209 gintritt in bic bcutf^e ®$toct5, greier* at^mct jd^on bie 58ruft, ^o^tv^ jd/Iagt cinfame !i!u[t, griebc ifi c8, tt)a8 l;ier tt?e(;t, ©anft 5U inncrm ^crjcn gc^t, 2)a^ tein ©corners ba nimmcr jKlrmt SBtc fid; SBcrg auf Scrg antprnit, ^o^eS @d;wcigen iinS ergrcift,^ SSilbeS Strebcn nid;t mcbr jd^metft. ^ier aiif [tiller mptni)^\* SSo bcr ferncn ®i))fel ®c^ncc, @o bic Solten golben malt, @rn[t ju iin8 ^crniebcr ftra^tt. @clig,^ trer ba .^iltten baut, (Sinjam ber ^fJatur i)crtraut, S)cr (Srinnerung luir lebt, ©aug fic^ felbft in fie toergrSbt, (Siujig auf ba8 2ieb nur bentt, S)as ibm ®ott inS ^erg gefenft; 2)er ben 2)id;tcr auSertor, 2)ag cr brid;t an'S 2id;t ^erijor* Sirten §elbengei[te«^ einft jo gtildlid; fein, @old;en griebenS mic^ gu treu'n ; 2)iefer fd^onen 33crge §i3^'n 9fiod; al8 §eimat^ n^ieberfefin. (gricbric^ toon ©d^Iegel, 1772—1829.) Johann Wolfgang von Goethe. Job. Wolf, von Gothe wurde geboren den 28. August 1 749 zu Frankfurt am Main, woselbst sein Vater kaiserlicher Rath war. Im Jahre ' 705 ging er nnch Leipzig, wo er die Rechte studiren sollte, sich aber am mei«ten mit Dichtkunst beschaftigte, und auch Versuche im Kupferstechen macbte. Von 1768 lebte er wieder in Frankfurt und studirte chemische Werke. Im Tj 184, 1. 3 5 155, 3. 5 L. XVm. '68,1. 3 592. ♦{57,2,1. 6 157,1. 8124,8. 210 READING LESSONS. Jahre 1770 bezog er die Universitat Strassburg, dort lernte er Herder ken- nen' und ward Doktor der Rechte. In das vaterliche Haus zuriickgekehrt, waren Shakspeare's — des grossen englischen Dramatikers — Werke Gegen- stand seiner eifrigsten Studien. Im Jahre 1773 schrieb er das Schauspiel "Gotz von Berlichingen," und 1774 den Roman: "Leiden des jungen Werther." Beide Werke begriindeten des Dichters'* Ruf. Im Jahre 1776 ernannte ihn der Herzog Karl August von Weimar, mit dem er personlieh bekannt geworden, zum Legations-Rath. Der Aufenthalt in Weimar, dem Mittelpunkt der deutschen Dichtkunst, hatte auf sein Leben und dichterisches Wirken den entschiedensten Einfluss. Im Jahre 1786 reiste er nach Italien, wo er zwei Jahre verweilte und sich meistens in Rom aufhielt. Wahrend dieser Zeit^ schrieb er seine vollendetsten dramatischen Werke: "Iphigenie in Tauris" — "Egmont" — "Torquato Tasso." Im Jahre 1792 machte er mit dem Herzoge von Weimar im preussischen Heere den Feldzug gegen die Franzosen mit. Um* sich ganz der Poesie und Wissenschaft widmen zu konnen, liess er sich seines Staatsdienstes entheben,^ doch wurde er spater zum ersten Minister (Minister-Frasident) in Weimar ernannt. Nach dem Tode des Herzogs im Jahre 1 826 zog er sich zuriick. Gothe gilt als Haupt-Representant unserer zweiten classischen Periode. Er ist einer der grossten deutschen Dichter, wenn nicht der grosste. In fast alien Zweigen der Dichtkunst hat er das ausgezeichnetste geleistet. Er ist gross in jeder Gattung, am grossten^ aber in Drama und Roman. Seine Tragodien: "Gotz von Berlichingen," "Egmont," "Iphigenie in Tauris," "Tasso," e. SSie baS gefci;e(;en tear, (eitcten fie bag iBaff cr mieber in8 alte 58ette guriicf , unb tijbteten, bamit bie ©tcitte i3on niemanb t)erratl;en iriirbe, aUe bie, welc^e ba« @rab gegraben fatten. (ntcr f^rang t^m uac^, unb ciu 9lacfter ftedt ttjn in bic Stafc^e ; tt)ag ift baS ? 10. g Selc^er ift ber f^tperfte @tab? 1 § 144, 1. 3 §258. 55157,1. 7 §91. a 5161. . *L.XLV,2. 6 § 144, 5. 85149. READING LESSONS. 213 51 n t to r t c n» 1. !J?cn Itnfcn ^anbf(^u^ auf bie recite ^anb jie^en. 2. Der i!f&tc nimmt einc(3 fammt ber ®c^u[fel. 3. ©etrubniffe unb ®efan^ni[fe. 4. Ttan mup jwei ®dcfe' iibcr einanberjtc^cn unb ben innerflen fuHeu. 5. 2Beil man c^ grower iadU 6. 2)Q^ SBortlcin „unb." 7. SBenn bie ^unbc it)n bet§en. 8. Die MQti^ in ben ©ticfcln ^aben. • 9. (Sine Siige. 10. 25er 2)ettelflab. Zk\t etitte t)errfd;t im 2Baf[er, O^ne $Regung rubt baS 9Jieer, Unb betilmmert fie^t ber ®(^if|ct ©lattc glad;c rings um^er. ^eine Suft, »on feincr ®eitc 1 StobeSftitte, filrd;terlic^ I 3!n ber unge^euren 2Beite SJcgct teine SBctte fid;.^ (®8t^e.) Der Cirknitzer See. An den julischen Alpen liegt in Krain der berUhmte Cirknitzer* See, von jeher das Wunder und Rathsel der Gegend. Oestlich von Adelsberg, da wo die Geheiranisse der Unterwelt^ in hundert Gewolben und Kalkfelsen ver- schlossen sind, breitet sich der wunderschone See von Cirknitz aus, wie ein Spiegel von drei Quadratmeilen. Aus ihm ragen hei'vOr' f iinf Inseln und sine derselben tragt selbst das Dorfchen Ottok. Mehrere Fliissehen' fallen hinein. Er ist sehr reich an Fischen und Wasser>'ogeln, und die ganze Thalgegend umher ist romantisch schon. Niirdlich erhebt sich das Silvi- nitza-Gebirge, westlich und sudlich der grosse Javornik. Neun Dorfer, zwanzig Kirchen und zwei Schlosser reiheh sich um den See. Bei vielem Kegen gewinnt er an Umfang, aber bei sehr trockenera Wetter verschwindet sein Gewasser und zieht in den geheimen Schooss der Unterwelt, begleitet vom Wassergefliigel und alien Fischen. Tritt diese wunderbare Erscheinung ein, dann lauten die Dorfglocken umher, um noch zu fischen so viel als mcig- lich. Von Stunde zu Stunde sinkt tiefer der Spiegel, denn eine Menge von Lochem im Grunde des Sees verschluckt sein Gewasser. Unterirdische Hohlen von unermesslichem Umfang, die nie ein menschliches^Auge geschaut, nehmen es auf. Jetzt schaut der Grund des Sees zum heiteren Himmel 1 5 74, Vficnu 3 5168. »5 68, L ^7, 1, 1. «ST4.1,1,1. ♦586,2,6,ite»n.2. 6§167,1. 8586,2,4. 214 READING LESSONS. hinauf, er trocknet ab; und der riihrige Mensch erntet Gras, wo er sonst fischte, er wagt zu saen und erndtet Hirse und Buchweizen, er nimrat statt des Netzes das Feuerrohr und erlegt Wildpret. So ist der wunderbare See mit Recht in dem Rufe, dass man in ihm fischen, jagen und emdten kann ; bis die Zeit sich wendet, haufige Regengiisse und starke Gewitter sich ein- stellen. Dann tritt das Gewasser aus den Grundlochern gewaltsam herauf. Es speiet die Unterwelt Gewasser und Fische und Seevogel herauf, so dass binnen vierundzwanzig Stuftden der See gleichsam wieder neu geschafFen ist. Der Zusammenhang dieses Sees mit unterirdischen Wasserhohlen, die theils unter ihm, theils hoher als er liegen, giebt die Erklarung des Wunders. Man hat selbst Modelle erfunden, welche den Vorgang versinnlichen. (J. C. F. Guts Muths.) 3n bem ©tabtc^en 2Btt(t§l6ad; im (Santon S3ern voax einmal ein grembcv itBer '^a^t, unb aU er tn§ 33ett get;en WoUU, jog er iioc^ ein ^'aar ^antoffetn au8 bem ^ilnbet, legte fte an, Banb fie mit ben @trum^f6anbern an ben gii^en feft, unb legte fic^ alio tn8 33ett. 2)a fagte ju i^m ein anberer 2Banbergmann, ber in ber ncimlid^en hammer ilBernad;tet luar : „®uter greunb, n?arum t^ut t^r bag ?" 2)arauf ermiberte ber (Srftc : „2Begen ber SSorfic^t. 2)enn ic^ bin ein* mat im Xraum in eine ©tagfc^erfee getreten. @o ^aBe id) im @c^laf foId;e ©c^merjen batoon em^funben, ba§ x6) um feinen ^rei8 me^r barfu^ fc^lafen mijc^te." (3, % $ebet, 1760-1826.) 28a§ ber 9Jlonb tx^'d^t §i5re, traS ber SJJbnb mir ergcif^It I ^d) tjabe ben ^abettenofftjier tocrben nnb fid; jum erften 2JiaIe in feine ^rad;tige Uniform Heiben fe^en ; x6) ^abe ba§ junge aJlcibdjen in i^rem 33rautftaat gefet^en unb beg gilrften junge SBraut gliicflic^ in i(;rem ^rac^tanjuge ; aber nie \)abz ic^ eine @elig!eit erbtirft, ci^n* lic^ ber eineg fleinen Dierjci^rigen 9Jlabd^eng, tr>eld)eg id; {jente Slbenb beob* ad;tete. @te ^atte ein neueS btaueg ^leib erbalten unb etnen neuen 9iofa*§nt; ber @taat ttjar eben angelegt unb Wit riefen nac^ Sic^t, benn be8 3Jfonbe8 ©tra^Ien, bie burc^ bag genfter brangen, tuaren ntc^t ^ell genug, ganj anbere Sic^ter mu^ten angebrannt tt)erben. S)a ftanb bag !Ieine SJJab^en, ftetf trie eine ^u^^e, bie ?lrme angftlic^ ton bem ^letbe ah augftrecfenb, bie ginger treit augeinanber gef^reijt. £) ttetc^e ©eligfeit ftra^Ite aug i^ren Slugen, aug i^rem ganjen ®efid;t ! „3JJorgen foEft 2)u in bem tieibe augge^en I'' jagte bie 3J?ut* ter, unb bie ^(eine blicfte auf ju i^rem §ut unb toieber nieber ju i^rem ^leibe unD Iad;elte feltg. „2J?utter I" rief fte, „tt?ag n?erbeu tooi)\ bie fletnen ^iinb* t^en benfcn, wcnn fie mic^ in biefem ©taatc erblid en ?" (^an^ e^r. 3lnberfen.) IP art ®l)irb: A COMPEND OP GERMAN GRAMMAR; WITH AN OTTRODUCTION UPON THE HISTORY, CHARACTERISTICS. EXTENT OF USE, AND DIALECTS OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. INTRODUCTION. 1. History of the German Language, § 1. Indo-European Historians are united in the opin- Languages. ion that the greater portion of the present inhabitants of Europe and Ilindostan are descend- ed from one common stock, which had its early home in the western part of the Himalaya Mountains. From this mountain region, one portion of this original stock moved down to the rich plains of India, and developed the San- scrit language and literature, and the Buddhist religion. Anotlier part went to Persia, and there developed the Bac- trian language and the Parsee religion. Successive migra- tions passed also to the west or northwest, and settled in the different parts of Europe. From these western migrations have sprung the chief groups of European nationalities and languages. The most important of these are the Gre- cian^ Italic^ Keltic^ Teutonic^ and Slavic. Wlien classed together, the inhabitants of Europe and India are called the Tndo-Eurojpean branch of the human family. Their languages, termed the Indo-European lan- guages, are more perfectly developed, and are richer in lit- erary treasures, than any other languages in the world. Upon the study of them has been based essentially the very important modem science of Philology. § 2. Teutonic The Teutonic was one of the largest of Languages, these migrations. Moving through cen- tral Europe, it divided into three branches. One portion K 218 mTEODUCTION. [§ 2. passed over to the Scandinavian peninsulas of iNTorway and Sweden, and of Denmark. Another part moved westerly and settled in Germany. The third division, composed of the Gothic tribes, passed through Poland and Kussia down to the Black Sea, and then moved up the Danube. Urged by their restless spirit of conquest, the Goths pushed for- ward into Western and Southern Europe, and estabhshed two brilliant, but short-lived kingdoms upon the ruins of the Roman empire. That of the East Goths covered Italy, Switzerland, and parts of Bavaria, Austria, and European Turkey. That of the West Goths covered most of France and Spain. In the eighth century the Goths disappeared completely and finally from history. Of their language and literature, the only monuments extant are parts of the translation of the Bible, made by Bishop Ulfilas in the fourth century, a fragment of an almanac, and two short bills of sale. These meagre remains of the Gothic lan- guage furnished the starting-point for the comparative study of the Teutonic languages. The same principles of linguistic science that were ap- plied by the brothers Grimm and others to the Teutonic languages, were applied by Bopp and his colaborers to the wilder field of the Indo-European languages. And thus has arisen, within the last fifty years, the new and interesting science of Comparative Language. By the ninth century after Christ, the great majority of tlie Scandinavian and German tribes had settled down within their present dominions, and they have there devel- oped their separate nationalities, languages, and literatures. The Germans pressed back to the west of the River Rhine the Kelts, whom they found extending their dominion as far east as the present cities of Berlin and Vienna. The Germans were in turn pushed forward to the west by the Slavic tribes as far as to the River Elbe and the city of Coburg. A reflex movement afterward set in. The Ger- man language, which lias already spread to the eastward § 3.] niSTOKY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 219 as far as the Baltic provinces of Russia, to tlie city of Bree* lau in the Prussian province of Silesia, and to Vienna in Austria, is still gaining ground over the Slavic dialects in the Prussian provinces of East and West Prussia, Posen, and Silesia, and in the Austrian provinces of Bohemia, Mo- ravia, and Galicia. On the other hand, the French lan- guage is gaining on the Gennan in the regions bordering on the Rhine, and especially in the French provinces of Alsace and Flanders, and in Belgium. The Teutonic languages have thus three chief divisions : 1. The GOTHIC, which in the ninth century entirely disappeared from history. 2. The SCANDINAVIAN, covering Sweden, Norway, Denmark, Iceland, and Greenland. 3. The GERMANIC, covering Germany, Holland, parts of Switzerland and Belgium, England, tJie United States, British America, aTid Australia. § 3. Germanic Differences in the dialects of the Ger- Languages. man tribes are noticeable as early as when the Romans first came in contact with them. Ab these tribes, still in the rudeness and ignorance of barbar- ism, became permanently settled in their present localities, and thus ceased to have much intercommunication, the dia- lectic differences in language were rapidly increased. And now almost every pro\^nce, city,, village, valley, and moun- tain district has its distinctive dialect. The difference be- tween the dialects has become so great, that a peasant from Bavaria or Wirtemberg, in passing through Hamburg oi Bremen on his way to America, can only with the greatest difficulty converse with his fellow-emigrant from Bremen, Hamburg, Holstein, Mecklenburg, or Pomerania. From this multitude of dialects have arisen several of the most cultivated languages of modem times, as the Ger- man, Dutch^ and English languages. The German dialects 220 INTRODUCTION. [§ 4r-6. are divided, by a line running from Aix-la-Chapelle to Berlin, into JJpj)er- German 2^x1^ Lower- German dialects. § 4. Lower-German The Lower - German dialects (and Dialects. the languages that have sprung from them) occupy, or originally occupied, the low sandy plain which lies between the German Ocean, Denmark, and the Baltic Sea on the north, and the line above indicated on the south. They extend also from the French province of Flanders on the west, to the Russian confines on the Baltic on the east. From Lower -German dialects have sprung the Dutch and the English languages. Dm-ing the early Middle Ages the Friesan language, spo- ken on the coasts and in the islands off the shores of Hol- land and Hanover, rose to a perfection nearly equal to that of any contemporaneous Teutonic language. But it has long since sunk back into mere local dialects. § 5- Upper-German The Upper-German dialects occupy Dialects. the high mountainous region ex- tending from the line above indicated on the north, to the Alps on the south, and from the French province of Al- sace on the west, to Hungary and Poland on the east. § 6. The High-German In the fifteenth century com- Language. menced a chain of circumstances beginning with the translation of the Bible by Luther, which has resulted in the formation of a national German Lan- guage. This High - German Language^ more commonly called in English simply the German Language^ was based primarily on one of the dialects of Saxony, in Central Germany, which was intermediate both in character and in geographical position between the Upper and the Lower German dialects. Both the Upper and the Lower German dialects have contributed to the grammatical features as well as to the vocabulary of the national language. § 7-9.] HISTORY OF TIIE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 221 § T. History of the German The history of the German Language. language is divided into four chief periods ; the Pre- Historic^ the Old- German, the Mid- dle- Ger7nan, and the Nefw-GevTrian, § 8. Pre-Historic Period, The Pre-IIistoric period is so till 7tli Century. named because no remains of the German literature, and but a few proper names in the language of that time, have been preserved. From this period, which ends with the seventh century after Christ, there are extant Uterary works in several of the other Teu- tonic languages, as, the translation of the Bible into the Gothic language, made by Bishop Uliilas (A.D. 360-388) ; tlie Anglo-Saxon poem, Beovulf^ the earliest Teutonic epic, evidently of heathen origin and composed at a very early date, though the earliest manuscript of it extant is from the eighth century ; and the Scandinavian Edda^^ also of very early and unknown date, and of heathen origin. § 9. Old-German Period, The earliest literary remains in 7th to 11th Centuries. the German language that are extant consist almost entirely of translations of ecclesiasti- cal documents from the Latin and the Greek. The oldest of these date from the seventh century. They are of but little literary ment, but they are of great im}X)rtance in studying the literary development of the German lan- guage. The oldest preserved German poem is the Song of Rildebrandt (^iltebranbt^^^ieb), dating from about the eighth century. It is written in a Lower-German dialect, but it contains many Upper-German words. Tlie next im- portant poem is the ^elianb, a religious poem of about the ninth century, written in the Old-Saxon dialect. The SBclt^ 53cfc^rcibun9, composed in the eleventh century, is the old- est preserved German poem that does not treat of a relig- ious subject. Like all new languages, the German dialects were orig- 222 INTBODUCTION. [§ 10 inally very poor in words. They were, however, much richer than the modern German in grammatical forms. During the Old-German period, the dialects were enriched from the Latin and Greek by many words, whose use was made necessary by the introduction of Christianity and of a higher civihzation. From this period date many such words, as ^ngel (Gr. ayyeXog), ^irc^e (Gr. KvpiaKti), ^i)xdhtn (Lat. scrihere), bitten (Low-Lat. dictare), ^lofttx (Lat. claus- trum), ^riefter {7rpea(5vTiQog). § 10. Middle-German Period, Before the Middle-Ger- 12tli to 16tli Centuries. man period, no dialect had acquired any great predominance over the others. In the twelfth century, German commerce, manufactures, chival- ry, and poetry flourished most luxuriantly on tlie Lower Rhine, and especially in and around Flanders. At this time the Lower-German dialect of Flanders became the most cultivated in Germany. Soon, however, the Flemish poetry was eclipsed by the songs of the Minnesingers (S^innefdnfier) of Allemania and Suabia, on the Upper Ehine (A.D. 1150-1250). These were sung so widely through the courts of Germany that they almost made a national language from the dialects of Allemania and Suabia. With the last of the Crusades (A.D. 1250) the spirit of chivalry died out of Europe, and with it perished the poetry it had nourished. During this period of the Minnesingers arose the ^tolanb^^^ieb : the great German epic — the S^ieklungen^ €teb : and many other popular legends and romances. In the latter part of the thirteenth century, clubs of lyr- ic poets, called Master -singers (9)^eifterfanger), were organ- ized in many parts of Germany. These had their terms and rules of membership, like the many trades-unions of the Middle Ages. The spirit of their poetry spread to the people. From this period date the great mass of the beau- tiful popular songs (35ol!^>^tefcer) of Germany. Under the influence of tliese Master-singers, the vocabularies of many § 11,12.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 223 dialects were greatly enriched, but still no one dialect gain- ed any great supremacy over the others. The universities that were established in Germany, on the model of those in Italy (the first in Prague, A.D. 1348) ; the commercial prosperity of the free cities, and the conse- quent flourishing condition of the fine and useful arts ; the conquest of Constantinople by the Turks (A.D. 1453), and the consequent dispersion of Greek scholars over all Eu- rope ; the invention of printing (A.D. 1450) ; the estab- lishing of newspapers (A.D. 1488) ; and, finally, the Refor- mation in the sixteenth centur}^, were all additional influ- ences that greatly enriched the more cultivated dialects during the latter part of the Middle-Gennan period, and prepared the way for the last, the New-German period. § 11. Changes in the Language During the fifteenth cen- during the 15th Century. tury the poetic side of the language lost much in purity, beauty, pathos, and power. On the other hand, the dialects were greatly enriched by the addition of technical, scientific, metaphysical, and theo- logical terms, as was required by the advance of science, invention, commerce, and pulpit eloquence, of prose in pre- dominance over poetic literature, and by the increase in the general intelligence of the people. § 12. New-German Period, The extensive circulation 16th Century till present time, throughout Germany of the translation of the Bible made by Luther (1522), and of the sermons and hymns published by Luther, Jonas, Speng- ler, and others, soon made the new High-German Lan- guage (§ 6) in which they were written very widely known in all the German states. Additional impetus was given to the High-German language by the publication in it of humorous and satirical poems and fables, collections of proverbs, works of history and of natural history, transla tions of works of classical writers, and other books that 224 INTRODUCTION. [§ 13. were read largely by the people. Above all, a foundation was laid, by the publication of grammars and dictionaries, for a critical and scientific knowledge of the language. The High-German has added to its vocabulary from the local dialects (§ 6) and from ancient and modem foreign languages, and has become the sole language of literature, of official intercourse, and of polite society throughout all Germany. It has not, however, displaced any of the local dialects. These retain their vitality with great tenacity, especially among the peasantry. § 13. Foreign The use of Latin in scientific writings, in Influences. lectures at the universities, and as the lan- guage of intercourse among literary men of different na- tions during the Middle Ages, greatly retarded the develop- ment of the German as a cultivated language. The polit- ical predominance of France during the reign of Louis XIY., the spread of the French as the language of tlie court throughout all Europe, and the immigration from France of the banished Huguenots after the revocation of the Edict of Nantes, 1685, caused the introduction of many French words and idioms into the German language. At the beginning of the eighteenth century, some bold German scholars, as Gessner and Leibnitz, ventured upon the great innovation of lecturing in the universities, and publishing their scientific writings in the German language. A general movement soon set in to rescue the language from the corruptions that had crept in during the preceding century. This movement, so ably begun by Gessner, Leib- nitz, Opitz, and others, and afterwards so greatly strength- ened by the pure style in German prose and poetry of such writers as Klopstock, Wieland, and Lessing, received a great check by the second invasion into Germany of French man- ners, morals, literature, and philosophy, which was led on by Frederick the Great during the latter part of the eight- eenth century. § 14.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 225 The brilliant and numerous constellation of writers in every branch of literature, science, philosophy, and criti- cism, which arose in Germany during the first half of the present century, including such names as Goethe, Schiller, Schlegel, Humboldt, Fichte, Hegel, Kanke, Heyne, Grimm, etc., have made this tlie second classic period of the Ger- man language and literature. The present purity, richness, and elegance of the language are also owing in no small de- gree to the fact that the German has displaced the French as the language of court, and tlie Latin as the language of scientific and pliilosophical literature. § 14. Grammatical Changes in the During its develop- Language during its History. ment from the sev- enth century after Christ till the present time, the German language has undergone many and very radical changes. In the Old-German there was a much more complete and complex system of grammatical forms in the inflection of the verb, noun, pronoun, and adjective than there is in the New-German. The Old-German had twenty-five, and the Gothic forty endings in the inflection of the noun, while the New-Ger- man has but seven (e, e^, $, en, n, er, em). There was an in- strumental case ; three forms for the three gendei-s of the plui-al of the pronoun jte, they (in. sie,^ sio, n. siu) ; and tlu-ee forms for the plural of the adjective (as, for blinte, Hind; in. plinte,y! plinto, n. plintu). The very extended conjugation of the verb gave tlie Old-German more musical beauty and more adaptation to poetry, while on the other hand the Old-German is infe- rior to the New-German in its capacity to express thought and scientific truth. Wliile some radical words disap- peared during the Old and Middle - German periods, the vocabulary of the New-German has been enriched by many new derivatives and compounds of native words, and by the addition of many foreign words. K2 INTRODTJCTION. [§ 16, § 15. History of the No critical work on the German Critical Study of the language appeared until several German Language. centuries after grammars had been written upon some of the other languages of Europe, as the Itahan, Spanish, French, and Anglo-Saxon. The lirst Ger- man grammar was written (1540) hj Ickelsamer^ a contem- porary of Luther. The first treatise on German prosody was by Oj>itz (1624) ; the first German dictionary was by Ge- nisch (1616) ; and the first work on German synonyms was by Gottschedd (1758). The wrong principles of grammatical analysis, which had crept into the German grammars during the seven- teenth and eighteenth centmnes, were checked and correct- ed hj Adelung,v^\io^e great German grammar and diction- ary (1793-1801) marked an epoch in the critical study of the German language. It was reserved to the present cen- tury, however, to develop the true principles of compara- tive and historic study of language. And within the last fifty years have appeared the great comparative and histor- ical grammars of Grimm, Ileyse, Becker, Kehrein, Kelle, and others ; and the dictionaries oiHeyse, Weigand, Meyer, Sanders, Schmitthenner, and Grimm. That of the broth- ers Grimm, when complete, will fill about twenty octavo volumes, and will be the most complete dictionary ever yet produced of any language. Many noted philologists in Ger- many and many learned societies are constantly adding, by their researches, to the knowledge of the German language and its dialects. Dm-ing the history of the language, letters have been ex- changed, added, and dropped ; nouns have passed from one gender to another, and from one declension to another. Within the last fifty years uniformity has been introduced into the spelling, and the complicated construction of sen- tences, which formerly prevailed, has to a degree been re placed by the original simplicity of German syntax. § 16.] HISTORY OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 227 § 16. Resume. We thus find the history of the German language to be di\d(led into four chief periods, with subdi- visions as follows : 1. The FEE-HISTORIC FERlOJ),e7iding with the Sev- enth Century / with no remains of the language extant except a few proper names. 2. The OLD-GERMAN PERIOD,//'^?/i the Seventh to the Eleventh Century ; translations from Latin of legal and ecclesiastical documents, ^tltebrantt^? ?iet), Reliant); 2Belt^53efc^reibun9. 3. The MIDDLE -GERMAN PERIOD, //"^m tJie Twelfth to the Sixteenth Century : 1. Flemish poetry, in the Twelfth Century. 2. Minnesingers, SRoIant)^ ^ ?iet), ^iiebelungen ^ ?ieb, legends and romances ; the First Classical Pe- riod oi the German language (1150-1250). 3. Master -singers, popular songs; decadence of poetry and prose (1250-1500). 4. The NEW -GERMAN VEVAOJ), from Luther's transition oftheBible (1522) to thejpresent time : 1. Sixteenth Century ; religious hymns, sermons, universities, public schools, printing ; introduc- tion of many technical terms in science, art, and philosophy. 2. Seventeenth Century ; decadence of the lan- guage through French influence. 3. Eighteenth Century; purifying of the lan- guage from foreign elements, and foundation of the language as it now exists ; German dis- places Latin in the imiversities. 4. Middle of the Eighteenth Century ; second de- cadence of the langu^Lge under French influ- ence. 5. Nineteenth Century: Adelung, Lessing, Goethe, Schiller, Grimm, Bopp, Humboldt, etc. ; Second Classical Period of the German language. rNTKODUCTION. [§17-19. 2. Characteristics of the Germam, Language. § 17. First Impression. To most foreigners who go to Germany without an acquaintance with the language, and especially to those speaking English, French, Italian, or Spanish, the German language has an energetic but harsh sound. This is owing mostly to the great predominance of consonants over vowels, and to the frequent recurrence of the sharp diphthong CI, of the \^^ of gutturals, and of double consonants. The energy of the language is greatly increased by the accent falling so frequently upon the first syllable, as is the case even in very long words. The ca- dence and intonation of the sentences in the German are very different from the same in the English language. § 18. Fullness of A nearer acquaintance shows that the the Vocabulary. German language is extremely rich in words ; that, though full of energy and force, the language has also an abundance of words expressive of the most del- icate sentiments and emotions ; that it successfully express- es the deep feeling, the warm friendship and hospitality, the humor, wit, and pathos, and the brilliant and highly poetic imagination of the German people ; and that its vocabula- ry is sufiiciently extensive to meet all the requirements of modem civilization. There is in the language an unlimited power of multi- plying words, by forming compounds from simple words. Indeed, the very great majority of German words can be traced back to a very small number of primitive roots, na- tive to the language itself. § 19. Purity from In. the German language there are Foreign Elements, about forty thousand words of foreign origin, which are not so fully naturalized but that their for- eignness is still felt. Many of these are but rarely used, and most of them may be replaced by words of German origin. § 20.] CnABACTERISTICB OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE. 229 Some thousands of words, however, which have been intro- duced since the seventh century (as fd)re{ben, Pfert), (SUi^el, ^irc^e), are so completely incorporated into the language that their foreign origin is now " no longer felt." Still there are but few languages in which foreign words are so httle used as in the German. The rigidness witli reference to the exclusion of foreign words, wliich tlie so-called "pur- ists" introduced into the language in the early part of the present century, has of late very greatly relaxed. § 20. Comparison of The German grammar is far more German and English complicated than the English. The Grammar. definite article, and every adjecti\e, or adjective pronoun, have six forms, while in English each has but one form. In the declension of the noun, seven terminations may be used (besides the umlaut on the radi- cal vowel), while in English there are but two terminations, and no modification of the radical vowel. Adjectives and adjective pronouns may be declined in three ways, or may be used without declension, while in English they, are al- ways without declension. The gender of nouns is arbi- trary and not natural, many nouns that are neuter in En- glish being masculine, and others being feminine in Ger- man. In the conjugation of the verb, the radical vowel oft- en takes the umlaut. The past participle generally adds a prefix syllable, and always has a participial termination. In compound verbs, the prefix to the verb, which in En- glish can not be removed farther than to immediately after the object of the verb, in German may be placed at the close of even a long sentence. One or more long quali- f}dng clauses may intervene between the article and its noun. The order of sequence of auxiliary verbs is entire- ly reversed in conjunctive sentences. Prepositions and verbs govern three cases of the substantive instead of a single one, as in English. The object precedes the verb more frequently than in English. 230 INTRODUCTION. [§ 21. The German has the advantage over the English lan- guage in several respects. The infinitive of verbs is always indicated by a termination (-en). The past participle is marked by a termination (-t or -en), and generally also by a prefix syllable (ge-). The termination of the article, ad- jective, or adjective pronoun often indicates the gender, case, or number of the qualified noun. The additional cases (the Genitive and Dative) diminish the use of prepo- sitions. Somewhat more inversion in the position of words is allowed, giving rather more freedom of style in express- ing emphasis or shades of meaning. The freedom with which compound words are formed gives great terseness of expression. Owing to the method of forming compound words and the comparatively rare use of foreign words, there are but few, even of the longest words, that can not be immediately understood by, persons of comparatively limited education. 3. Extent of Use of the German Language. § 21. Extent of Use. The German language is the ver- nacular of the entire population of the smaller German states ; of all the inhabitants of Prussia, except the small Slavic-speaking population of Prussian Poland ; of about one fourth the inhabitants of Austria (being spoken mostly in the western part of that empire) ; of tw^o thirds the inhab- itants of Switzerland ; of the province of Alsace in France ; of the German colonists of Courland, and other provinces and cities in Russia ; and of the German immigrants in the United States, Brazil, and some other countries of the Old and New World. It is thus spoken by about seventy mil- lions of people. This is nearly equal to the English-speak- ing population of the entire world, and is greater than the number that speak any other language of European origin. These two, the German-speaking and the English-speaking branches of the Teutonic division of the Indo-European § 22, 23.] GERMAN DIALECTS. 231 portion of the human race, represent to-day more of the active, intellectual, political, religious, artistic, commercial, and industrial forces of the world than any other family of the nations of Europe or of the world. § 22. Literary Treasures. The number and value of the works in every branch of human learning in the German exceed by far those in any other language. The German beUes-lettres Hterature rivals that of any other nation. Ger- many is the home of modem music and art-criticism. The German language is therefore studied, both as a means of education, of culture, and of enjoyment by the scholars, art- ists, educators, and travelers from all civilized lands. A knowledge of the language is also essential to success in many branches of domestic and foreign industiy and com- merce. 4. Germcm Dialects, § 23. Formation of Dialects. When the tribes of the Ger- man branch of the Teutonic family first settled in Ger- many, there were probably but few difPerences in their lan- guage. As these ignorant and almost barbarous tribes became permanently settled, intercommunication between them soon almost entirely ceased. In every province, city, secluded valley, or mountainous region, dialectic changes immediately began to be developed. Words rapidly be- came modified in pronimciation and in meaning. Kew words grew out of old roots. With some tribes words passed out of use. Different vowel and consonant sounds gained a predominance in certain regions. Grammatical forms were dropj^ed, modified, or added. New words from foreign sources were added to one dialect without being adopted by its neighbors. Thus within a short time were formed a great number of dialects in all parts of Germany. Otlier influences, on the other hand, soon set in to retard the growth of dialects and to permanently fix their fonns,. 232 INTRODUCTION. [§ 24. There has, indeed, been less change in the character of the local dialects of Germany since the seventh century, than there has been in that of the cultivated High-German lan- guage since the sixteenth century. As we have seen above (§ 12), one of the Upper-German dialects in Saxony became the grammatical basis of the present German language (§ 6), which is spoken by the edu- cated classes in all parts of Germany. But the great mass of the people, and more especially of the peasantry, still speak their own local and provincial dialects. Even the educated classes are but rarely entirely free from provincial- isms, both in pronunciation, in the intonation of sentences, and in the use of words. The dialectic differences between the languages of the tribes of North and those of South Germany (which were indistinctly marked in the proper names handed down to us by Roman wiiters) have, in the course of time, been suf- ficiently developed to give a basis for a classification of the dialects of Germany. They are divided by a line running nearly from Aix-la- Chapelle to Berlin (§ 3) into two chief groups, the Ujpjper- German and the Lower- German dialects. § 24. Upper-Grerman The dialects of Upper or South Dialects. Germany, extending south as far as the Alps, are, like all languages of mountainous districts, full of terse and short words and expressions. The words are apparently clipped off or contracted, and are strength- ened by doubling the consonants. The Upper-German dia- lects are fuller of consonants and of harsh guttural sounds than is the cultivated national language, and much more so than are the dialects of North Germany, or than ai-e any other of the Teutonic languages. They are thus both harsh to the ear and difi3cult of pronunciation. They are subdivided into four groups: the Bavaro- Austrian, the Sudbian, the Allemanian, and the Franhish § 25-27.] GERMAN DIALECTS. 233 § 25. Lower-German The Lower- German or North- Ger- Dialects. man (called also the Flatt-Deutsdi) dialects, like all languages in low and plain countries, are softer to the ear, freer from consonants and guttui-als, and fuller of vowels and liquids, than those of South Germany. The Lower-German dialects are in many respects inter- mediate in character, as they are in geographical position, between those of South Germany and those of Scandinavia. They are also subdivided into four chief groups: the Lower-Saxon^ the Westphalian, those of the Lower-Rhine, and the Friesan (§ 4). § 26. Characteristic In a large number of words where Differences. the Upper-German dialects have f, f, ^ or g, fd), b, ci or c, the same words in the Lower- German dialects have t, ^J, f, f, tl, and o* From the fre- quent rccun-ence of the t for the f , some writers call the Lower-German the ,,bat" dialects, and the Upper-German the ff\sii^** dialects. § 27. Tables in For the purpose of presenting to Comparative Language, the eye at a glance a few of the verbal analogies upon which the theory of the relation- sliip, and of the history of the development of languages ifi to a large degree based, we give the three following tables, presenting : 1. Comparison of words in the Indo-European languages. 2. " " " Teutonic " 3. Illustrations of the liistoric development of words in the German language. Tlie intricate and subtle laws of vocal changes, a knowl- edge of which is necessary for the complete understand- ing of these tables, must be resen-ed for explanation in more advanced works. In these tables the vowels are pro- nounced as in German. 234 INTRODUCTION. English. Father, Mother, Son, Daughter, brother. Sister, Sun, Star, Day, Yesterday, Night, Month, Eye, Knee, Salt, Name, Bed, To hear, Am, Art, Is, r, Me, Thou, Thee, One, Two, Three, Six, Ten, Over^ Sanscrit. pitar, matar, sunis, duhitar, bhratar. swasar, Byona, stri, hyas, nakta, mas, akshi, jano, naman, rohita, bhri, asmi, asi, asti, aham, mam, tvam, tvam, dwi, tri, shash, da9an, upari, § 28. Comparison of Words in Bactrian. {New-Persian.^ Greek. padar, waTrip, mata, mader, fimvp, datar, bratar. ahmi, as-si, acta, azem, mam, tum, thwam, doktarah, Ovyarrip, brader, (l>paTrip, hhaher, sitarah. di-ruz. am, nam, surkh, em, h est, man, mara, tu, tara, yak, du, sih, shesh, dah, bala, riXiog, vv^{vvkt6c;), OKog, yovv, u\q, ovofjia, ipvOpog, tlfXl, icrri (v), eyoj, TV, vwip, COMPARATIVE TABLE. 235 the Indo-European Languages. Latin. Keltic. Slavic. (Lithuanian.) Gothic pater. aithar. patr, fadar. mater. matliair. matka, sin, decra, mota. modar. dear, DlLLLUo, dukt^. D Ull Ub. dauhtar. frater. brathair. bratr, brolis, brothar. cf\-t^r\Ti* piuthar. sestra. s\dstar. burur, sol, Stella, slun, hwezda, sauil. stiarno. dies. dia, den, dags. liestenius. wcera. (gestren). nox (noctis),nochd. noc. nahts. mensis. mios. m^sje. aids. menoths. oculus, oko, koleno, soly, gmeno, augo. kniu. salt, nomo. sal salann, flinm Deli, iiomPTi JiUXXlCll, tllLllllj (rutilus). ruadh. cerwenij, rauds. ■fprrp beir. (brati). bairan. XCl 1 tJ. sum. is, gsem. esmi. im. es. is, gsi, esi. is. est, is, gest. esti. it ego, mi, azu. az*, ik. me, mi. me. mane. mik. tu, thu. ty, tu. thu. te, thu. ti. tave, thuk. unus, un, gedno. venas. ains. duo. do. dwa, dwi. tvai. tres. tri, tri. Ir^s, threis. GOV shestj. szessi. saihs. Dt>A, decern. deich. deset. deszimt, tailiun. super, 08, pres, ufar. '^'dtl INTEODUCnON, § 29. Compa] rison of Words (1.) Gothic, (2.) Scandinavian. English. Gothic. Icelandic. Swedish. Danish. Father^ fadar. fadir, fader. fader. MotJier, modar. modhir, moder, moder. Son, sunus. sonr, son. son. Daughter, dauhtar. dattir, datter. dotter. Brother, brothar. brodliir. broder. broder. Sister, svistar. systir. syster, soster. Man, man. madlir. man, mana. Sun, sauil. sol. sol. soel. Moon, mena. mani, mane. moane. Star, stairno. stima, stjerna. stierne. Day, dags. dag, dag. dag. Night, nahts. nott. natt. nat. Good, gods. godr. god. god. Better, batiza. betra. battra. bedre. High, hauhs. ha, liog. hoi. Bitter, baitrs. bitr. bitter. bitter. Sweet, sntis. sotr. sot. sod. One, ains. einn. en. een. Two, tvai. tvein, tva, to. Three, threis. thrir. tre, tre. Ten, taihun. tin, tio, ti. To have. haban. hafa, hafva, have. To come. quiman. koma. • komma, konmie. Togo, gahan. sia, ga, goa. In, in. i, h i. Out, ut. lit, nt. ud. Over, nfar. yfir. ofver. over, m, n^. nei. nej, nei. Yes, ja. ja, js ja. COMPARATIVE TABLE. 237 in the Teutonic Languages. (3.) Germanic, German. Lower-German . Friesan. Dutch. Anglo-Saxoa. SBatcr, fadder, fader. vader. fader. Wluiitx, mudder, moder. moder. moder. ©p()n, san, son. zoon. sunn. Xoc^ter, dochter, dochter. dochter. dohter. 53rut'er, broder, broder, broeder, brodner. (Bc^wcfter, Bwester, swester. zuster. swyster. aJ^vinn, man, man. man, man. 6onnc, sunne, sunne. zoen, sunna. SJ^onb, moand, mond. maan, mona. (Stern, steern, stera. ster. steorra. ^ag, dag, dei. dag. daeg. 5^a^t, nacht, nacht, nacht, • niht. 9«t, god, god,. good. god. beffcr, bater, beter. beteren. beterian. ^0^, hoch, hag. hoog, heah. bitter, bitter, bitter. bitter. biter. fue, sot, swet. zoet, swete. tin, een. an. een. ain. mh twee, tw^ne. twee. twa. trei. dree, thre. drie. thi-i. ^cf)n. tein, tian, . tien. t6n. ^)aben. hebben, hebba, hebben. habban. fommen, koainen. kuma, komen, cuman. gcben, goaen. gan. gaan. gangan. in, in. in. in. in. au^, nut, lit, utt, iit. liber, over, over, over. over. nein, ne. na. ne. na. ia. joa, ie. ja, gese. 238 IKTRODUCTION. § 30. Illustration of the Words in the English. {Gothic,) Old-German. Middle- German . New- German. Father, fadar, fatar, vater. SSater. Mother, modar, muotar, muoter. SJluttcr. Son, sunus, sunu, sun. ®o^n. Daughter, dauhtar, tohter. tobter. Slo^ter. Brother, brothar, bruodar, bruoder, S3ruber. Sister, svistar, suestar, swester. (^^wefter. Man, man, man. man, 3)iann. Friend, frijonds, friunt. vrimit, greunb* House, hus. bus. bus. ^m^. Sun, snnno, sunna. smme. ©onne. Moon, menoths. manoth. manot. S^onb. Star, stairno. stemo, stem. (Stern. Day, dags, tac, tach. 3:ag. Night, nahts, nabt. nabt. '^<[6^\. Good, gods. guot, guot. gut. Better, batiza. beziro. bezzer. kffer^ Best, batists, bezist. bezzist, lt% High, hauhs. hob. hoch. ^od^. Bitter, baiti-s, bittar. bitter. bitter. Sweet, sutis. suazi. suze. m^ To hear. hausjan. horan, hdren. ^oren* To come. quiman. cbuman, komen. fommen. Togo, feaban). gen, gen, ge^en. To see. saihvan, sehan. sehen. fe^en. To eat, itan, ezzan, ezzen. effen. /, ik. ih, ich. ic^. Me, mik. mib, mich, mtc^» Thou, thu. du, du. bu. Thee, tbiik. dih. dich, bi*. HISTORICAL TABLE. 239 Historical Development of German Language. Enylish. (Gothic.) Old- German. Middle-German. New- German^ Jle, is, ir, er. cr. She, si, siu, siu (sie). ftc. It, it, iz. Bi, ee- We, veis, wir. wir. wir. You, jus, ^, ir, x% They, eis, eis. sie. fte. MTio, livas, hvo, hwer. wer. tt)cr. Which, hvelciks, liwiolililier, welher. weld^ct. One, aiiis. eines, eines. ein^. Two, tvai. zwene. zw^ne, iml Three, threis. dri^, dri^. tret Four, fidvoreis. fiori, viere, »tcr. Five, fimf. fimfi. viinve, fiinf. Seven, sibiin, sibun, siben. (tebcn. Fight, ahtau. ahto. aht. a^t Nine, niun, niun, niun. neutt. Ten, tailiiin. zehan, zehen, yt^n. No, ne. ne-ein. nein, nein. Yes, ja, js, ja, ia. To write, (L. 9cribere), scripan. scliriben, fc^reiben. Boundari /, (Fol.ffranigc 0,gremtz, grenitz, ©renje. Cabbage, (Ital. cacoZo), cholo, kol. Nation, (L. natio, Fr. Tiatim), nation, S^iation. Excepted, uzgenommen, au^genommen. Muscle, {L.musculu8), Tlu^kL Museum, {L. museum), SJ^ufeum. Coke, (English), (EoaU, Coffee, CA.rab. ioAwoA, Fr.ca/e), ^affec. GERMAN GRAMMAR. (2)cutf(^c ^xammatit) § 31. GEEMA:N" grammar, like that of aU cultivar ted languages, is divided into four parts : Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. Rem. In this work prosody is omitted entirely. Syntax is not treated sep- arately, but the etymology and syntax of each part of speech are given in the same chapter. Many portions of the German grammar are omitted where the same laws prevail as in the English language. ORTHOGRAPHY. § 32. The German Alphabet has twenty-six letters 51, a at. Bay. , Tsay. Day, Ay. . Gay. ,JIah. ,Ee. 3,i Tote. ^,f Kah. %\ Ell. SD^, m Emm. 5^^,11 Enn. £), Oh. 9>,P Pay- D, q Koo. 9^, r Err. '^,\{^)..Ess. Z,X Tay. U,u Oo. 35, i) Fow. 2B,tt) Yay. '&,x Ihs. g),9 Ijpseelon, 3,a Tset. (See Lesson I., 1.) Rem. The German Alphabet, like those of all, other European nations, was developed from the Latin. Under the influence of the artistic spirit of the times, during the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, when in architecture the pointed arch took the place of the round arch, pointed letters took the place in manuscripts of the round Latin letters. The pointed letters were adopted also in the first books that were printed both in English, French, and Lat- in, as well as in the German language. With the revival of classical tasto there was a return to the use of the Latin alphabet, first in Italy, then in France, England, Holland, Poland, and other European countries. The Latin letters are now also used in many German books and periodicals. § 33-37.] VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. ^ 241 l.YOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. OQolak unb 2)i^^t^ongc0 § 33. 1. There are seven simple Vowel Sounds: 2. And three Diphthongal Sounds : ci, an, en. Rem. 1 . All the seven vowels have both /on^ and short sounds. Rem. 2. The three umlaut vowels a, ij, ii (also written at, OC, UC) represent distinct vowel sounds, not modifications of the vowels a, 0, U* Rej/i. 3. The d and ii first appeared in the eleventh and twelfth centuries ; the j) and ou (also CU) first appeared during the Middle-German period. §34. The Vowel is long: 1. Wlien doubled in the same syllable: $aar, ©pree. 2. With silent 1^ in the same syllable : 1. The long sound, like e^ in meet : Wlm, t^m. 2. The short sownd, like ^ in hit : bitter, mibe, in, ift. Rem. ^ is never doubled ; when followed by silent tf it has a long sound : tie, 2)iener, tier. But \t is short in DtcrjC^n, ^icrStg, llicrtcl. 4. D, 0* 1. The long sound, like o in note : Sf^otl), 33oot. 2. The short sound is intermediate between that of o in zone and that of t^ in sun : (Sonne, SSolf, boppelt. 5. Vif !!♦ 1. The long sound, like oo in moot : ^\x\\), t^un. 2. The ^Ao/*^ sound is intermediate between that of oo in pool, and that of u in pull : 5)ult, ^unb, fur^. 6. ?), l|, sounds likeii(§ 38, 9) : 5leg5)pten, (Syntax, ®^ftem. ^em. In all words of Geraian origin, where ^ was formerly used, as well as in foreign words that are fully naturalized, it is now replaced by i (§ 38, 10). 7. ^e, if sounds like C (§ 38, 2). Rem. Strictly speaking, a somewhat more open sound than that of a in mate, one intermediate between that of a in vary and that of e in very, is given to a, and also to e in some words (as ftlCr, bet, (£rbC ; \tUVi, gCtlCU, ItttVif gcgcn, ©(!^ncc, etc.). 8. Dc, i) [ph-umlaut), has no equivalent in English. iJem. It is like the French eu. Its sound may be approximated by pro' ducing a sound intermediate between that of a in hane and that of ar in hum: SBiJrfe, S3i5^men, @c^5n, Sbffet, getojc^t. 9. Uc^ ii {oo-umlaut), has no equivalent in English. Rem. It is like the French u. Thus @ilb may be approximately pro- nounced by placing the lips as if about to whistle, and then trying to sa^ seed: ©lib, milbc, 2Jiiltter, @d;lu[fel. §38-40.] CONSONANTS. 243 10. Wl, ai (or &, ci), like i in ynuj/it : mein, W^txw, 3cit. Rem. Of the four forms at, ttt), Ci, C^, which have contested for supremacy in the German language since the fourteenth century, the form Ci has come otr the victor. At present a^ is dropped entirely ; CI) is used only in some pro])er names (^c^nc, lUiei)er, etc.); antl fli is used in but few words (as msixwh iUiailanb, ^aifer, 2)kt). 11. 5(u, m, like ou in mound : 3)?auer, laut, $au^, 12. (gu, cu (or Wcu, iiu), like oi in 7/iTANTS. (tonfonantcn.) § 40. The Consonants are sounded as follows : 1. S3, b. 1. Beginning a syllable, like h : 53i(b, 53rett. 2. Ending a syllable, nearly like p : T)kh, ()alb, i^ .• fetn, ^reuubf^aft ; mcr, baoon ; pbilofopbte. Rem. 1. In foreign words b sounds like v in ever: @t(abe, ^i^ctcl, brat>. i?c7/i. 2. For a long time f and U were used interchangeably. Their use ha.s finally become settled, but in a purely arbitrary way ; the f largely jne- domiriates. Rem. 3. The ^!^ only occurs in words of Greek origin, as in ^^i(ofo^(;ic, and in a few German proper names, as : 5lboIp^ (or ?lbolf), 9JuboI)>^ (f), ^cft^^a* Icn. 5. %f g» 1. Before a vowel, like g in gay : gcben, ©ritnb. 2. After a vowel (and not before n), see § 40,17. 244 ORTHOGRAPHY. [§ 40. 6. §, Ij, Like h in house : ^au^, l^od^, er^eben, 3o^ann. Exc, The letter || is silent : (1) in the combination t!^, as in %^i)y\, 9^ot^ ; (2) after a vowel, as in @o^n, So^n ; (3) after r in 9i^ebe, 9i^cin, Sftfjabarbcr ; (4) after X in some proper names, as 33o(f^. 7. 3r i* I^ike 2/ in yoke: So^ann, 3uU, 3aBr, 3anuar. 8. ^, !♦ Like 7c in ^m^ / ^ontg, fommen, $>unft, ^otn. Rem. In those foreign words that have become fully naturalized, { has al- most entirely displaced C : ^un!t, Songre^, ^ollt. 9. ^f \f 9Jl, VXf ^Xf Mf '^f )^f £l, (\f have the same sound as Z, m, n,p, q in English : ^amm, ^eimpinfel, QuaL i2em. Before !, It takes the sound of ng (§ 40, 10) ; S)an!, bcnten, Itn!§. 10. 9J, r* 1. At the beginning of a syllable, X has a sound somewhat rougher and deeper in the throat than in English: SfJot^, runb, 3fi^etn* 2. In other positions it is trilled : 53rob, 33art, ber, XOtx. 11. @, g (ff or g). 1. Like s in Z^^^ ; ba^ 3[^c(Ter, ift, ba^, 2. But a single f before a vowel sounds like s in zone : (Sot)n, fte, (Slifa, gelefen* 3. When before ^J or t and at the beginning of a radi- cal syllable, f sounds like sh in shall : ^pree, @tein, tjerfte^en, au^gefpro^en. Rem. 1. In former periods of the language, f^ ff, and ^ were very largely interchanged. Even yet authorities vary in the use of ff and ^. Rem. 2. The short g is used at the end of syllables : 2)re8ben, ^otSbaitl, laS, auSetnanber, S)onner§tag. 12. %f t (or %^f i\)). 1. Like t in tone : ^on, %\)m, 3}?ilt(). 2. Like ts in mits, in final Ax^n, ^tial, AxiXii, not pre- ceded by { ; ^eftion, Quotient* Rem. 1. The sound of t is preserved when the accent is on the tt, as in S)emotratte, ^artte, 9JJiUiabeg. Rem.. 2. Also when i\ is preceded by f : Oueftion', 33aftton'. Rem. 3, In the history of the language there have been many interchanges between t, b, and tl^. Some modern writers, called " purists,'' reject the ti^ entirely, and write tCil (2:^ei0, tUlt (S^un). 13. S, to* Like v in vine : 2Bein, 2Bien, jn?et, n?arum. iJem. 2SJ, after 0^ occurring in a few proper names, is silent : ^au!ott). § 40-43.] CONSONANTS. 246 14. 3^, j» Like x in lox: 53orar, (^rempct, 'S.txxt^, §ere, fir. Rem. The letter f is used mostly in words of foreign origin. 15. 3f 5 (^ and 33)» Like ts in fits: 3eit, pu^en, (5%c. Rem. The use of J, ^, JJ has varied greatly in the different periods of the language. 16. ^%f ng» Like ng in sing : ftngctt, ginger, brdngen. Rem. A slight k sound is given after n(J when it follows a vowel : ^WX% Crane/'), Slnfift (ang^sO. 17. ^^, d), and (J liave ^i(?6) guttural sounds: 1. (T^, (^ (and g^ when ending a syllable), after a, 0, U, or au, have a rough aspirate sound, formed deeper in the throat and much stronger than that of A in hope : ^od) (hohh) high ; %\x6:) {toohh), cloth; Xag {tahh), day ; mac^en {ma^-hhen\ to make, 2. After other letters (and in the diminutive sylla- ble t^cn), they have a softer sound, made higher in the palate, and inclining to that of sh in shall: td^ {ih'%1; rec^t (reh'H), right ; ^inb'^en (kind'- h^^en), a child ; Tlnn'^6)tn (mwi'-h^^en), Munich ; WAxg, {hil'lih'% Beug {tsoyh% 33er9 {berh'^). Rem. 1. In words of Greek origin, ^ sounds like k: Sbor, choir. Rem. 2. Also before § in the same radical syllable, like k: SSac^S, wax. § 41. Many foreign words retain their original pro- nunciation, as : 53ureau, $alai^, 5^9on, Tlajox, @ou»erneur, Qticu, 5lt)»erb, from the French ; ^Jloaftbeef, dlub, from the English ; ^olo, Xrto, from the Italian. Rem. In a few words the foreign pronunciation is retained in only a part of the word : ^enfion {pon^^-si-dne). § 42. The pronunciation of the educated classes and in polite circles in the city of Berlin is at present the standard of good pronunciation throughout Germany. The above rules are given in accordance with the usages now prevailing in Berlin. 3. DIYISIOK OF SYLLABLES. (StjIbcntrcnnungO § 43. In Pronouncing, the following laws prevail : 246 oRTiioGRAPirY. [§ 43-45. 1. In simple words : (1.) A single consonant, between two vowels, is pronounced with the last vowel, as in : SSa^^ter, ^ru'^fcer, le'==ben, ^a'^ben, mei'^ner, gu'4en» (2.) Of two or more consonants, the first is pronounced with the preceding, and the remainder with the following vowel : "MxVAt, fc^im'^pfen, Deuf 4^^* 2. In derivative words, prefixes, and suffixes not begin- ning with a vowel, are pronounced in separate sylla bles: ©e^talf , cingftMic^, t)ult)'^fam ; ©tant^'^^aft^g^eit, but giirf 4tn, ^lei'^^bung, gdrbe^vei^ ©ii'^te. 3. The parts of convpound words are pronounced sepsr. rately : au^^ein^^an'ber, ;Don'ner^4ag, ^m'^\)6itn, l^er^um^ Rem. Some writers mark the division of syllables according to the pro- nunciation, others according to the roots of words. The latter method is more convenient in paradigms : Kieb'^en, mcin'^cr, gut'^cr, gut'*e, breit'^eft. 4. ACCEl^T. (5lcccntO § 44. The Primary Accent is on the radical syllable of simple words, w^hether primitive or derivative ; inflectional endings, and most prefixes and suffixes (§ 45, 3, Rem.), are unaccented: lieb'^en, mein^^en, (iebMid^eren, S5a'4er, ©e^talt^ ge4tebt':^eften, ge^a^r^^ic^ften* Exc. The accent is not on the radical syllable in Icben'^btg. § 45. In Compound Words, the radical syllable of the most emphatic component takes the primary accent : 1. The first or modifying word of compound nouns and adjectives, and of separable compound verbs, takes the primary accent : ^auf ^manu, SSor'^f^rift, gelb^^rot^, avi^'^ ge^en, ein'^fii^ren, um^er^^ge!)en, mi^^^^trauen* Exc. 1. The nouns 3a^r^un'*bert, 3a^rtau'*fenb, 9^orbh)eft', ©iiboff, etc Exc. 2. The adjectives ijottfom'^men^ttotbrnen'^big, tr>a^r^af 4tg, teibbaf^ig, barmber'^jtg, gtii(ffe'4tg, teibet'^gen ; allwei'^fe, aUmac^'4tg, gro^mad^''tig, ^oc^ab'-clig (and some otlier titular ei)ithets). § 45-48.] ACCENTS. 247 2. Tlie accent is on the last syllable of adverbs com- pounded with prepositions, and of those compounded with ^in, ^cr, all, and tiicl: wo^on^ womtt', ba»on'; ^er? ein', ^eraue', i^ollauf , njo^lan", allein^ mellei^t', melmet)r'. 3. Insej>arable prefixes are not accented : bewei^^^^/ ^^f ^ jle^'^^en, mi^fal'^en, Unterl)al'4ung. Exc. 1. 3lut'4i^, and 2lnt'=tDort (and its compounds). Exc. 2. All words compounded with Ct J= and Uls, and many of those com- pounded with mt^= and un^: (Sr5'*bijd;of, Ur'^jac^e, mi^'^anbcln, un'^glcid; (but mi|3far4en, uncnt>'4id;, etc.). Rem. 1. Some long words, however, have several subordinate accents: (5rcunb'fd;aftad)teit'en, i5cu'cr*toerfic^'erung«*ge|cE'fd;att, ©tQat^'*|rf?urbcn4irgung«"faj'fen*buc^'baIter (§ :A,Rem. 1). Rem. 2. Such very long words as the last are only tolerated in oflScial lan- guage, and even there they had better be avoided. § 46. Most Foreign Words retain their original accent. This is generally on the last syllable in words from 1. The French: Dffeier^ douijerr, SJiufir, Smajefidr. 2. The Latin and Greek: S'^atur", (Stubent", ^()eologie'. Rem. 1. The foreign terminations sCt, =tCr, sift, AxtVi (tCrCH), =Ur, ^aft, e/c, take the primary accent, whether in words of German or in those of for- eign origin ; garberei', S3arbter', ^Bhimift', :>?olt'rcn, ©lafur', aJJoraft'. Rem. 2. The accent is changed in the inflection, and in the derivatives of some foreign words: !J)ot'4or (2)otto'*rcn), (S^araf'^ter (S^aratte'^re), 3Jiufif' mufitaMifd;), @ramma'*tit (grainmatita'4ifd;). Obs. Differences in the position of the accent upon words, and in the position of emphatic words in sentences, are among the chief causes of the great difference existing be- tween the intonation and the cadence of the English and of the German languages. 5. CAPITAL LETTERS. (@ro§e ^nfang^liuf^ftatiea.) § 47. Capital Letters are used as initials to: 1. All Nouns, other parts of speech used as nouns, and nouns used adverbially : tcr !D?ann, tie (Statt, ba^ ^aue ; ter @ute, t»a^ Sefen ; 2>^orc;eu«J, ^2lbeut^, SBormittag^. 248 OETHOGBAPHY. [§48-49. 2. The Indefinite Pronouns : Semanb, S^ltemanb, 3eter^ mann ; also ^\Xii^i(ofop^ie, ber tolner Dom. Rem. Other proper adjectives do not begin with capital letters : bie beutfc^C ©^rac^e, ber beutfc|e S3unb, eine amerifamfc^e Beitung. 6. COMPARISON OF GERMAK A^D ENGLISH WORDS. § 48. Great changes have taken place in the words of the German and English languages during the fourteen centuries especially that have passed since their separa- tion. 1. A few words only have the same radical form, or, with different spelling, are pronounced alike, as : SJ^ann, man. §anb, hand. ®ra§, grass. ®(a§, glass. $Ring, ring, ginger, finger, hunger, hunger, ^uf, hoof. §au6, house. 2)?au§, mouse. Braun, brown, fauer, sour, trarm, warm, bitter, bitter, blinb, blind, mtlb, mild. tnilb, wild, feiu, fine, metn, mine, in, in. bet, by. dfo, also. :()ier, here. f(^ter, sheer. faE^en, to fall, ^ang^^eu, to hang, binb^^en, to bind, ftnb^en, to find. bring=en, to bring. fing*en, to sing. fin!*en, to sink, j^tnn^en, to spin. 2. The following examples illustrate the most striking variations in the development of letters and of sounds : alt, old. galte, fold, ^alt, hold. (1.) tt. (5rab, grave. 'Stoi^t, raven. ©flabe, slave, ^nabe (knave), ^la^, place, ^ra^n, crane. tCtox, was. §aor, hair. ^aar, pair. odf)t, eight, grad^t, freight, ^al, eel. moiji, meal. @tabt, steel. ®aat, seed. @c^aof, sheep. @ci)Iaf, sleep. 9^abel, needle. Wax, clear. §anf, hemp. ©aft, guest, ttjaren, were, .^amm, comb. !att,cold. ^atfe, hoe. S^afc, nose. §a!en, hook. ®an8, goose. CXDMPARISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. 249 (2.)e.a. SRcc^en, rake. brect;cu, break. Scij, way. 2tni, lance. Tlcxt, mark, ^cr,, heart, ©d^mcrj ' smart), fterbcii (starve), fd^mecfen (smack), feft, fast, fett, fat. febcn, see. ftc(;Icn, steal, cffeit, eat. nteffen, mete. gclb, field, gebn, ten. @pbcu, ivy, gcbcn, give, lebcn, live, bcnten, think, fcjifeii, sink, ^ed;, pitch, fcc^^, six. tttclfcn, milk. Iccfen, lick, gcben, go. (nc), no. ©d^ncc, snow, ©ccic, soul. ^IDcrt, sword, frf^cltcn, scold. ^Icc, clover. SBertb, worth. 2Ber, who. dlc%d, rule, ii^rabc, crow, mci^cn, mow. faben, sow. fp'abcn, spy. Wdxt, were. Ici^t, lets. SScitcr, fathers. fSy^cn, saw. 2Sdffer, waters. (3.) tie. S3ienc, bee. n?tr, we. Pj, felt. @innc, sense. i?irfd;e, cherry, ^infct, pencil, fteben, seven, irren, err. licgen, lie. licben, love, fc^ieben, shove, fteben, sift, fc^ie^cn, to shoot, f^rie^en, sprout, fpielen, play, ^irc^e, church, ^iffcn, cushion. (4.) 5, 0. ^ocfc, flake. groJ3, great, rof^, raw. ®tro^, straw. %0(i}ttx, daughter. O^r, ear. 53o^ne, bean. 9^ot^, need, rot^, red. S8rob, bread, ^oc^, high. 9Joj]gcn, rye. @onimcr, summer. 2)onucr, thunder. ©onne, sun. Sobn, son. tooU, full. ®^orn, spur, bl^ren, hear. fci^TOeren, swear. jn)i5(f, twelve. khuo,, king. 9Wi)rtcI, mortar. Del, oil. aJJiJrber, murderer. I (5.)tt,u. unb, and. §ut, hat. ^uc^e, beech, fucbcn, seek. ^u^, kiss, ^ruft, breast, ©coulter, shoulder gitd;4<, fox. ^u^fcr, copper. ®turm, storm, ^nirm, worm. 33Iume, bloom, t^un, do. 33uc^, book. S3rubcr, brother. aWutter, mother, ^ub, cow. U^r, hour. Orunb, ground. ajJuitb, mouth, ■ill^tiinb, pound, runb, round. @unb, sound. SSunbe, wound, genug, enough. fii^Ien, to feel, griln, green. fii§, sweet, ^ilgc, feet, libel, evil, ^ttlfe, help, filnf, five. Jitgcn, lie. §il^icl, hill. mibk, miU. ®iinbe, sin. glilben, glow. Mfte, coast. l^ilrft (first), briltcn, brood, bil^fen, hop. 33ad;fe, box. ®ilb, south, ^ilbc, cows, ©ril^c, broth. 2 (6.)flu. grau, gray, lllaub, leaf, taub, deaf, ^aufe, heap. @aiim, seam. i!aiid^, leek. §aupt, head, ^iluge, eye. ^raut, bride. jc^Iau, sly. gauft, fist. Sau, tow. jlaube, dove. • 9iaum, room. blau, blue. %\)an, dew. ^aucn, hew. (7.)ei. 2J2cifter, master, bcil ! hail ! i^reifcu, praise, brei, three, frci, free. bleid;cn, bleach, tr>eic^, weak. ^ei{eii, heal. SSBeijen, wheat. Sirctg, twig, ein, one. attcin, alone, bcibc, both, cigcn, own. (Sid^c, oak. @^>ci(be, spoke, ^leiber, clothes. ®cift, ghost. „ (ghastly). ft (gas), leiben, loan, mcift, most. SReibc, row. @cife, soap, reibcn, rub. jtt>ci, two. 250 CO]VIPAEISON OF GERMAN AND ENGLISH WORDS. (8.) cu, m, ^m, hay, §euer, fire, lieun, nine, ^reunb, friend, neu, new. ftreuen, strew, treu, true, ^reufjeu, Prussia, ^reug, cross. (Sule, owl. ^eulen, howl. SJiaufe, mice. (9.)&. &aben, to have. f^hm, to heave, leben, to live, cben, even. dlaht, raven. Xauht, dove. SBlber, beaver, flieben, cleave, fieben, seven. @teb, sieve, oben, over, ©rab, grave. S)ieb, thief. Seben, life, [ieben, sift. SBeib (wife), ©rfjnjalbe, swallow SSirnc, pear, tli^pe, cliff. mppt, rib. ®to))|)eI, stubble. $au))t, head. (10.) b. ber, bie, ba§, the. biefe, these, bu, thou, betn, thine, bann, then, betin, than. iBruber, brother. ^ebcr, feather. i!eber, leather, fieben, seethe. 2)aumen, thumb, benten, think. 2)ing, thing. 3)oru, thorn. brefd;en, thresh, bret, three, bur^, through, betbe, both. ©lib, south. (Srbe, earth, ^ilrbe, worth. ®(^aaf, sheep. @c^Iaf, sleep. @(^tff, ship, ^anf, hemp, reif, ripe, ^etfen, help. @aft, sap. fd;arf, sharp, aitf , up. offen, open, filnf , five. Ofen, oven. t>ier, four. bet»or, before, ijergeffen, forget, (g^tjeu, ivy. (12.) 8. Stag, day. tnag, may. lag, lay. fagen, say. 31[uge, eye. Qfloggen, rye. gitege, fly. §cntg, honey, ^^fcnnig (penny), ®aru, yarn, gcfb, yellow, geftern, yesterday. fci^Iagen (slay), ^agel, hail. •Jiagel, nail. @egel, sail, glegel, flail, ^egen, rain. ©iegel, seal. 9tege(, rule. §ugel, hill, fagen, to saw. gleic^, like, genug, enough. gen?af)r, aware. Seig, dough. ^4)pug, plough. 33ogen, bow. borgen, borrow, morgen, morrow, forgen, sorrow, folgen, follow. 33alg, bellows, ©algen, gallows. @(o(f e, clock, nagen, gnaw. (13.) «. toann, when. VOtX, who. tuetc^e, which. Vok, how. h)0, where. tt)ei( (while). tt>et^, white. SSetjen, wheat, tccber (whether). (14.) i. ja, yes. Qai^x, year. 3od;, yoke. 3a!ob, Jacob, jung, young. 3a(fe, jacket. 3Dt)ann, John. 3ubc, Jew. 3unt, June. 3^uno, Juno. 3ua, July. 3uft>el, jewel. Tiapx, major. (15.)tif,qc fauen, chew. ^afe, cheese, ^inn, chin. ^inb, chUd. ^ifte, chest, ^irc^e, church. ^irf(^e, cherry. @tarfe, starch. ©tlatoe, slave. Tlaxl, marrow. (Scfe (edge). §e(fe, hedge, ^riidfe, bridge. Buder, sugar. OueEe (well). (16.) I. dg, as. fold;, such. tt)eld), which. 9}?i5rtel, mortar. (^effcl, fetter. @abel, sabre. Bii^illtng, twin. @td;er, acorn. fd;Ieic^en, sneak. (17.) m. ^atnm, lamb, flimmen, climb, ^tatnm, comb. 2)aumen, thumb er, who. \t>artcn, wait. tt)ar, was. *»rcd)en, speak, ^cifer, hoarse. (20.)f,ff,§. OUS, out, effcn, eat. meffcn, mete. Ijaffcn, hate, laffcn, let. gro§, great. ?coe, lot. %n^, foot. 9iu6, nut. fli§, sweet. Sifen, iron, ^afc, hare, niefen, sneeze, fra^jen, scratch. (21.)tt§. XaQ, day. 2;raum, dream. 2:od;tcr, daughter, tobt, dead. jll;aler, dollar. %l)aii, dew. t^un, do. %i)nxc, door, t^cuer, dear. 58ett, bed. 33Iut, blood. 33art, beard. Tlnti), mood. ^hit\), flood. @d;u Iter, shoulder leitcn, lead, reitcn, ride, fllcitcii, glide. 3?ater, father. aJJutter, mother, taucn, thaw, taufenb, thousand SlntttJort, answer. (22.) to. ©CttJinn, gain. I 'Sc^ttJcftcr, sister. (23.) J, ^. ga^m, tame. 3a^n, tooth, ge^n, ten. Binn, tin. SoU, toll ju, to, too. gmei, two. jlt)aii3tg, twenty. gtlj, felt. §erj, heart. 'Ball, salt. ^a^c, cat. ^i^, kid. 5)u^enb, dozen. ^teu^, cross, ^'la^, place. 3u(fer, sugar. (24.) (^. 9Jad;t, niglit. 9Jiad;t, might. Ieid;t, light. !l'id;t, light. fcd;tcn, fight. tncd}t (knight). grad;t, freight, madden, make. brcd;cn, brake, fud^cn, seek. 53uc^, book, glcid;, like, ^uc^cn, cake. ?crd(>c, lark. fed;«, six. ?5ud;«, fox. Oc^S, ox. d^a^^, flax. 3Bad;«, wax. jteid;, ditcli. burd^, through, lad^cn, laugh, mand^, many. (25.) f* ©d^micb, smith, fd^mal, small. ®tein, stone. ®d;mert, sword, grofd;, frog. flatfd;en, clap. (26.)|if. 3t))fcl, apple, ^il^fen, hop. ^u^fcv, copper. O^fcr, offering, ^^feffer, pepper, ^fctfc, pipe, •il^firfid;, peach, ^flange, plant, ^flaume, plum, ^flaflcr, plaster. Vflitdfen, pluck, ^flug, plow. 3. In a few cases, foreign words retain their original forms, or have developed, in both languages, into the same modification of form : Heb. saraph, @e'ra^b, seraph. Lat. natio, Or. fifTtujpov, 2Ketcor', meteor. LowL. parens, Lat studens, @tubent', student. Ital. solo, 4. More usually the forms vary : Gr. dyyiWoQ, Lat. Johannes, " Colonia, LcwJ.. missa. engcl, 3obann, angel. John. Cologne, mass. Arab, masjid, '* laimun, Fers. mdmija, Ind. tabaco, ^fiatton', aJiofd^cc', ?imo'nc, SD^u'mie, 2:a'baf, nation. park. solo. mosque, lemon, mummy, tobacco. ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX, (©t^mologic unb S^ntaj.) § 49. Etjrmology treats, (1.) Of the origin, development, changes, decay, and death of words and grammatical forms. (2.) Of the classification of words into jparts of speech, and of tlie changes w^ords undergo hy inflection. (3 .) As to their origin, words are primitive or derivative. As to composition, words are sirryple or convpound. \. Primitive or radical words are either: 1. Original root-words, as: id;, bu, ettl^ tit, gut, gro§, ^otj, SBud^e. 2. Or they have added the verbal ending tU I ^ab^eu, binb'*en, fel?'*cn. Rem. By far the greater number of primitive Avords are verbs. 2. Derivative words are formed from primitive words: 1. By modifying the original root : (Mtttlsen), S3anb, 33unb. 2. By adding prefixes and suffixes : ( „ „ ), S3tnbcr, S3tnbc, 33iinbel, ©ebinbe, 58anbe, Sanbd;en, bcinbig, bSnbigen, SScinbiger, S3anbigung, biinbeln, biinbig, SBilnbtgfeit, S3iinbnt§. Hein. Many derivative words, the derivation of which is " no longer felt," are usually called primitive words, as : 3)lann, from Old-Germari menan (or Gothic minan), to think; rot^, from Sanscrit rudhira, blood; Oel, from Latin oleum, oil; ^otjl, from Italian cavolo, cabbage. § 50. Compound words are formed by joining two or more simple (or single) words into one word. i^ebcrtneffer, Penknife. 33aunttr>oUe, Cotton. %\^^^^m, To go oat. ©tattftnbett, To take place. ^immelblatt, Blue as the sky. ©elbrot^, Orange-colored. SBomtt? Wherewith? 35tet[etd^t, Perhaps. Rem. 1. Sometimes very long compound words are formed : @taat€[(^utbcntUgung§!a[[enbuc^^a(ter, The keeper of account of the fdo* devoted to the payment of the national debt (§ 45, 3, Rem. 2). Rem. 2. Two or more compound words of the same kind may be united bj a hyphen : 5elb==, ©arten* unb Hdferbau, Drainage, horticulture, and agriculture. Rem. 3. Parts of long words are often united by hyphens : ^euer^35erfi(^erungg*@efellfc^aft, Fire Insurance Company. Rem. 4. Compound words are much more largely used in German than in EngUsh. New combinations may be formed indefinitely. § 51-54.] THE ARTICLE. 258 § 51. There are ten parts of speech in German : 1. Flexible : the Article, Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Yerb. 2 Inflexihle : the Abverb, Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. § 52 Syntax treats of the power certain words or parts of speech have in determining the forms and position of other words, or parts of speech. THE ARTICLE, (^er «rtircl.) § 53. In all languages where the Article exists, the Def inite Article is derived from a Demonstrative Pronoun ; tlie Indefinite Article is derived from the Numeral One. In German there is no difference between the forms : 1. Of the Def. Article bcr, and the Dem. Pron. bcr. 2. Or of the Indef. Article ctlt, and the Numeral cln^ Rem. The Article is distinguished from the Pronoun or Numeral : (1.) By never receiving a strong emphasis. (2.) By never being used without a noua. § 54. Declension of the Article: 1. Definite, bcr, the 2. Indefinite, Clll, a, an, 8INGULAB. PLURAL. SINGULAR. Masc. Fern. Neut. All Gen. Masc. Fern. Neut. Norn, bcr, hit, ha^* bic* Ci«, ein=c, cin. Gen. m, bcr, bc«« bcr. etn=c«, efn-cr, cin'C^* Dat. bcm, bcr, bent. bcm ctn=cm, cinder, cin=cm Ace. ben, bic, bofil. bic. cin=cn. cin=c. cin* Rem. 1. The vowel is short in baS, bc8, and long in bcr, bcm, bcn. Rem. 2. When no obscurity of meaning or harshness of sounds is thereby produced, the following contractions of prepositions with the definite article are allowable (Lesson X., 2) : 1. With Dat. sing.(7n. and «.) bCHt : ant, Bctm, ^intcrm, im, i?om, jum, iinterm (an bcm, bet bem, t^intcr bcm, in bcm, ijon bcm, gu bem, untcr bem). 2. With Dat. sing, (/em.) httl lUX (^U bcr). Z. With Ace. " (netit.) ba^ X an8, aufs, burets, filrS, tnS, um« (an ba9 auf ba«, burd? ba«, fUr bas, in bas, urn ba8). 254 SXNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [§ 55. § 55. Syntax of the Article. The following are some of the most important points in which the German varies from the English in the use of the Article. 1. The Definite Article is employed : 1. Before nouns used in a general or abstract sense: %tX SJJenfc^ \\i fterblid), Man is mortal. 3)ic ©efcfjic^te bcr ^unft, The history of art. S)a^ ®olb \\i foftbar, Gold is costly. 2. Before some individual concrete nouns : 2)a^ ^rii^ftitcf ift fertig, Breakfast is ready. ^^^ bCItt 5lbcnbe[fen, After supper. 3. When a proper name, or the name of a division of time, is preceded by an adjective : 2)a^ fe[te 2)Jagbeburg, Strong Magdeburg. 2)Cr toorige 3Jiat tt>ar fatt, Last May was cold. 4. Before feminine geographical names : %\t @d;weis ift fe^r fc^on, Switzerland is very beautiful. Saren @ie in bcr Siirfet? Have you been in Tm-key ? 6. Before nouns of number, weight, and measure (while in English the Indefinite Article would be used) : 3tt)et X^aler \s^^ ^t""^/ Two dollars a pound. SSiermat bie ©O^e, Four times a week. Rem. 1 . The Definite Article is often used where in English the Personal Pronoun would be employed : aJiit bcm §ut in bcr §anb, With his hat in his hand. Rem. 2. The dative of the definite article, contracted with the preposition \Xif is used to express promotion or election to office or rank : @r iuar juitt ^rafibenten getua^It, He was elected President. 2. The Definite Article is omitted : 1. Before many legal terms and some words in ordinary life: Stp^ellant, 33eflagter fagt— The plaintiff", the defendant says— Ueberbringer biefeS, The bearer of this. 2. Before names of the points of the compass : ©ie fegelten gegen S^Jorben, They sailed towards the north. 3. The Article must be added if the case of the noun cannot be deter, mined withput it : £)ie 9iec^te bcr graiien, The rights of women. 4. With two or more nouns of diff'erent genders or numbers, the Article must be repeated : 2)er S3ruber unb \At ©c^tuefter, The brother and sister. § 56, 57.] THE NOUN. 255 THE NOUN. § 56. Nearly all Nouns may be traced back to verbal roots (§ 49,1, Rem.). With the exception of the very small number that are radical words, German nouns are formed : 1 . By the modification of a verbal root (§ 48, 2, 1). 2. By adding prefixes or suffixes to other words (§ 57, 58). 3. By compounding noims with other words (§ 58). Rein. The formation, inflection, and syntax of the German are far more complicated than those of the English noun. On the other hand, as the German nouns are mostly formed from native roots, they are more easily understood than English nouns, which are so largely imported from foreign languages. § 57. In forming Derivative Nouns, the chief suffixes are .• 1. Those that form concrete nouns, d^Clt, cl, cr, in, ling : 1. 5(^Cn and sicin — with umlaut to the radical vowel, where possible — form diminutive nouns : §auSd;cn, a little house. SBad^Icin, a small brook. ajJUtter^en, dear mother. ©c^Weftcrc^en, dear sister. 2. sCl usually denotes material instruments : ^tM, a lever (from ^cbcn, to heave, lift). 2).ccfcl, a cover (from bccfen, to cover). 3. str denotes (1) male persons: Scorer, a teacher, ©Snger, a singer, SSittnjer, a widower, @cf>tt>ctjcr, a Swiss. (2) animals : ptxhtX, a sparrow-hawk, ©djriJtcr, a beetle. (3) instruments : SSo^rcr, an auger, Scrfer, an alarm clock. 4. sin (or sinn) forms feminine from masculine nouns : ^i5ntg, a king. ^onigin, a queen. Scl?rcr, a male teacher. Sebrcrin, a female teacher. ©c^tDcijer, a Swiss. ®(^tt)Ctjcrin, a Swiss lady. 6. sifnn modifies the meaning of nouns, often indicating dependence^ contempt, or low valuation : 3ilngling, a youngster. iD^iet^Iing, a hireling. Sc^rling, an apprentice. 2)id;terling, a poetaster. 256 THE NOUN. [§ 57. 2. Suffixes forming mostly abstract nouns, C, ci (rct), l^ett (felt), nig, fal, f(^aft, t^um, ung : 1. sC (with umlaut to radical vowel) forms nouns from adjectives : ©lite, goodness, §i3^e, height, ^cinge, length, %\i\t, depth. 2. sCi (or iltX), in nouns formed from verbs, denotes a repeated or con- tinued action, often with the idea of contempt : ©d^meic^elei, flattery, @:|)teleret, foolish sport. 3. c^tii (or sfCit) forms (1) abstract nouns, from adjectives or participles : @(^on^ett, beauty, ©etuanb^eit, dexterity, 2)antbar!eit, thankfulness; (2') concrete nouns, from adjectives : ^letnigfctt, trifle ; (3) nouns, from personal nouns : @ottt)eit, Godhead, ^inb^ett, childhood. 4. sHt^ denotes (1) condition or completion of a quality or action: ^^tn* fternt^, darkness, ^enntm^, knowledge, 35ert)altnt^, relation ; (2) in concrete nouns, the accomplishing agent or the accomplished object : ©efangni^, prison, SSerjet^nt^, catalogue. 6. cfal denotes (1 ) a condition : S^rilbjal, sadness, @c^t(f fat, fate ; (2) the cause of a condition : ©c^eufat, a monster (causing horror). 6. sf^aft denotes (1) relationship or condition of persons : ^reunbfd;aft, friendship, S3erettfd)aft, readiness ; (2) a collection of persons of a certain grade or calling: 9?ttterfd)aft, knighthood, S3auernfd^aft, peasantiy; (3) a collection of things of the same kind: ®eratf;fd;aft, tools ; (4) collective appellations of places : Ortfd;aft, neighborhood. 7. =tl^unt, (1) to adjective or verbal roots, denotes quality or condition, or that to which this quality adheres : 9tetd;t^um, richness or riches, SBad;gt^Utn, growth, ^cittgtbum, sanctuary ; (2) to personal nouns, it denotes condition, office, or dominion : ^atfert^um, empire. 8. =Ung, (1) denotes condition, what produces a condition, or a thing put into a certain condition: S^rcnnung, division, 9}2ifd)Ung, mixt- ure ; (2) forms collective nouns : Salbung, forest, tteibung, clothing. 3. The most im^ortMit prefixes are gc, VXX^f lltl, Ur, crj: 1. gCs denotes collectiveness, union, completion, or repetition: ©ettrgc, mountain range, ©efa^rtc, companion, ©eBaubc, edifice, @erauf(^, a continued noise (as of rivers, arms, machinery, etc."). 2. ttlifs denotes negation, incompletness, or negation of quality : 9JJt^* ton, discord, SJJt^Begrtff, misconception, SJJi^gunfl, disfavor. 3. nils denotes negation or perversion of quality : Ungtiidf , misfortune, Untncnfd), inhuman person, Unjdjulb, innocency. 4. ttt* denotes source, origin, or cause, or a thing in its original con- dition: Urf^rung, origin, Urfac^C, cause, UrtDalb, primeval forest. 5. tX%' (arch) denotes the first or greatest : (SrjBtf^of, archbishop, (Srjbicb, arrant thief. @r3tnar jc^att, lord high marshal. § 58, 59.] ATTRIBUTES OP THE NOUN. 257 § 58. Compound Nouns (L. XXXVI.) are formed: 1. By prefixing to nouns inodifying words, which may be of any part of speech, except an article or interjec- tion: '^a^ ©d^uI^auS, schoolhouse. 2)er ^aufmann, merchant. „ grembroort, foreign word. S)ic ^ertunft, origin. 2)er 3i^^eitam^f, duel. 2)er Singang, entrance. „ ©clbftmorb, suicide. 2)er ^berglaubc, superstition. 2. By uniting the words of some familiar expressions : 2)aS SBcrgi^meinnic^t, the forget-me-not. 2)cr STaugenic^tS, the good for nothing fellow. S)a8 ^elangerjeltebcr, the honeysuckle. !Der ®^ringin8felD, the romp. • Rem, 1. In a few cases the first word is in the gen. sing, or the gen. pi. : 2)a« !£ageglid;t, the daylight. 2)aS SSbrtcrbud;, the dictionary. Rem. 2. By a false analogy, some nouns take on the gen. ending^ g (t^) J 2)cr 9te(igion8frteg, war having its origin in reUgions feuds. 2)ic 5cuer52>crfi(^crungS*@ejcEjd;aft, Tire Insurance Company. Rem. 3. In a few compound nouns the adjective also is declined: Nom.9ing.,\)tx §o()c^riefter. Nom.pl.,'ok §o^en^ricfter. Gen. " beS ^p^cn^rieftcrS. Gen. " bcr ^o^enpriefter. Bat. " bem §D{;en^ricjter. .Dat. " ben |>c(;en)>neftern. Ace. " ben §o^cn^rtcftcr. Ace. " bic |)o^en^)ncftcr. 1. ACCIDENTS OF TIIE NOUlSr. Wtxitntt m ^ammxtti,) § 59. The Attributes of the Noun, as well as of all other flexible parts of speech (§ 50), except the verb, are : 1. Two Numhers: Singular and Plural. 2. Three Genders : Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter. Z. Four Cases: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, and Accusative. Rem. Substantives, whether nouns or pronouns, control the gender, number, person, and case of all other flexible parts of speech. Hence a knowledge of the attributes of the noun, while one of the most difficult, is at the same time one of the most important things in the study of the German language. 258 GENDER OF NOUNS. [§60,61. 2. GENDER OF NOUNS. (2)a^ ^tWt(^t htv |)auj)tttiiirterO § 60. 1. Only in nouns referring to persons, and in the names of some animals, is the natural gender observed : %tl 3J2ann, the man. %\t %x, 2)an!, ^att, ^a^, CucU, the breach, thanks, fall, hatred, source. 2. All nouns endiny in \^, \^, ing, lino, HI : bct @tid), §cnic\, faring, Jc^rling, ^elni, the sting, honey, herring, apprentice, helmet. Exc. ba^ SJZcffing, brass, hni 2)ing, the thing. § 65. Nouns feminine by form are: 1. All dissyllabic nouns ending in C^ and not denoting male beings: bit ^irc^c, Sirfd^c, ®onne, (Srbc, the church, cherry, sun, earth. Exc. 1 . bfl^ ^wgc, (Snbc, ©rbc, the eye, end, inheritance. Exc. 2. bcr yiamz, SGLMUc, the name, will. 2. Most nouns ending in ^ilji, U(^t, Ulb, MHft: btC 3^ac^t, ^UC^t, ®C* bulb, 25ernunft, night, flight, patience, reason. 3. All derivatives ending in l)Cit, fcit, fdiaft, Ci, tn (inn), Ung, Otl), Mi%X hit ^rci^eit, !J)anfbarfcit, ^i^cunbjd^att, 33acfcrei, ^Iniiginn, ^offnung, ^cimat^, ^Irmutb, freedom, thankfulness, friendship, bakery, queen, hope, home, poverty. Exc. bcr (or btt^) Bierrat^, the ornament, ba^ ^etfc^aft, ©cfd^rct, the seal, the cry. § 66. Nouns neuter by form are : 1. Diminutives (in ^Ctt, Icitt, see § o7, 1,1), whatever may be the natural gender : hti^ t^fcrbc^cn, 33ild;kin, the little horse, little book,- h^^ ^raulcin, SJicibc^cn, ^inblcin, the young lady, girl, child. 260 THE NOUNS. [§ 67-69. 2. Derivatives ending in f al, f Cl, t^ltnt t H^ id;te, ©eftalt, the duty, birth, patience, danger, community, satisfaction, history, form. § 67. Compound Nouns take the gender of the last noun : bcr B^uUdjXtv, the school-teacher (bte ®^ule, bcr Se^rer). btC §offirc^e, the court church (ber §of, hit tirrf;e). ha^ ®d;u(^aiig, the school-house (bte @c^ute, ha^ §aug). Uxc. 1. 2)cr 5lbjd^eu (bte @^eu), bcr SJlittoo^ (bte 2Sod?e). £xc. 2. 2)ic ?lnmut^, 2)emiit(), ©ro^mut^, Sangtnut^, ©anftmut^, @cf)tT)ermut^, 3Se^mutt) (htt 3JJut^, §od;mut^, e^c); Mc 5lnt- ttjort (bag 2Bort). -EJxc. 3. 2)ag @egentt)eU, bag (or ber) 33orbert^ei(, etc. (htt Z^tW), Exc. 4. Names of cities are neuter, whatever the compound may be : ^ag fefte aJiagbeburg (bie 33uvg), strong Magdeburg. § 68. Foreign Nouns usually retain their original gender: 2)iC 2;f;eoIogie, theology (from Gr. t} BeoXoyia, theology). £xc. But some foreign words have been drawn out of their original gender : htt ^or^er, hit 9^ummer, ha^ ^enfter ; Jroyji Lat. (neut.) corpus, (masc.) numerus, (/em.) fenestra. § 69. A number of nouns have two genders, with dif* ferent signification for each gender, as : 2)er 53anb, the volume. S)a8 S3anb, the ribbon. „ SBauer, the peasant. „ S3auer, the cage. „ SSunb, the alliance. n SSunb, the bundle. „ dhox, the chorus. r; (S^or, the choir. „ @rBe, the heir. „ @rbe, the inheritance. S)te (Sr!enntni^, knowledge. r, ©rfenntni^, the sentence. S)er ^axi, the Harz Mountains. „ ^arj, the resin. „ ^eibe, the heathen. 2)ie §eibe, the heath. „ ^efer, the jaw. „ liefer, the pine. „ ^unbe, the costumer. n ^unbe, the knowledge „ Setter, the leader. „ Setter, the ladder. I, TtanQd, the want. „ WlaxiQii, the mangles. § 70-72.] DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 261 Xk 9J?arf, the markgraviate. 2)a8 Tlaxi, the marrow. XtX 3)2cf|'cr, the measurer. „ SDicffcr, the knife. „ @d;ilb, the shield. „ ©c^ilb, the sign. „ (Sd;wulft, the bombast. ©ic ®d^n?ulft, the swelling. „ S./^j3 5^ -S 42 5 2 :« :nJ :« :« TJ oa S3 « « tt ^ ^®®® (S®®S ^ «-> <^ O Ci «.* o _J ■JS~.S>^^ sCS- >.S> •.S3~ ^ ^ J=i j:i J=> J=» j=t J^ J=> J^ N QQQQ QQQQ r ^^ '2<«>S'2 <^:-»««u ^ as» tS a C cs .♦- o ^ .2i ^ «^ c> O c> o d iC»jC)jO.O vOjOjQjQ N «->&«■ "6- «^>e>e>& o O « « « :«:«:«:« '«> S?^^^ SP^^^ s (A o tJ S § g .Si ^ g .$i O) g « « « <^5> ^ «j ««> o fS JQJOJQJQ .iS^jQjO p ^ :^ }j s.: "i* C V V ^ *> Y ^ «> *J S «J >> « « « « « « « o ii >*(gS«^c*w«^ s s i g .^ tj g .£i CO vOjQjQjQ ^uajQjQ o js j=t j^ j:» ,/SjQjaja g ^"^ "2 § »jajajQ ?! « « « ... ^ Y V V -rj ^ ^ fcj « .Si U b .2i .Si tJ g .Si s ^•~y «5» f* J^ V» M ^ «k> ^> ^ j :q :o Ki to X5 •"? . B .1 S->tS>H$:i ^>:->g^ ^* ji»aoBc S S 13 O eu eu «> S> .^ n « « « g « « « ««> »«.>«>«>> Si ^¥ g g" 5 §"«"§" ^ «t> a> S .Si S S § g .Si a g -Si j^ j=» .a j=» j=i xi j=) j=» 1-^ S 8 •<-■ o S si -t-* o i f^ « H 1 H IS ,"* O i« S o .O t, §anb, ^raft 2«a^t, maen, Ungarn, aJlenjd^enC " §errn); ber 9tebc, grau. N. Plur., bic SbtDcn. Ungarn. 3JJenjd()en ( " ^erren); bic 9lcbcn, grauen. i2em. 2. Relics of the former declension of feminine nouns in the singula* are retained in some familiar expressions, and in some compound words : aiif (Srbcn, ju ©unftcn, ton @ottc8 ©nabcn, bag @onncnltd;t. Re7n. 3. The monosyllabic masculine nouns of this declension (§ 75, 2). are contracted from longer original forms, as : Old German: der bero, cristani, fiiristo, gra,vee, (helid), herro, hirti, Mid. German : der ber, kristen, viirste, grave, helt, herre, hirte, New German: bCt SScir. (Shrift. Prft. @raf. §elb. $err. §irt. § 7G-78.J DECLENSION OP NOUNS. 265 § 76. The Mixed Declension contains a few masculine and neuter nouns which follow the old declension in tJie Angular ^ and the new declension in the plural, as : 1. Masculine : ^tt 5l^n, SSaucr, 2)orn, gor[t, (iJauI, OeDatter, ^alm, Sorbcer, aj^aft, 9^ac^bar, ^falm, ©c^mcrj, @cc, ©porn, @taat, @ta* c^cl, 8tra^t, %\)xon, SScttcr, Untcrt^an, Bici^rofe||or, ^aftor. 3. Neuter: 2)a^ 2tuge, 33ett, enbe, §emb, §erj, 2eib, O^r, 3nfeft. i2cm. 1. S)a8 ^erj is) S. ba8 ^erj, bc8 §erjcn^, bcm §crjcn, ba8 ^erj ; irregular. > P. bie §erjcn, ber §erjen, ben ^erjcn, bic ^crjen. Rem. 2. 2)cr 9lac^bar, ber Untert^an, usually follow the new declension in the singular, as sometimes does ber (SeiJattcr. § 77. Some Foreign Nouns which have not yet been fully naturalized are irregular. Some of them retain very much of their original modes of declension, as: Nom. Sing., ajhifeum, ©t^mnafium, $R^t^t(;mu6, eponbcuS, gcffil, Gen. Sing., SD^ufcumS, ®t?mnafmm8, 9e^i^t^mu«, ®ponbeu8, goffilS, Nom. Plur.j SD^ujeen, ©t^mnafien, 9e^i^t^men, @ponbeen, goffilien, iJat. Plur., 2)?u{een. ©t^mnafien. dti)tfi\)mm. @lponbeen. gofiuicn. Nom. Sing., Sorb, ?abi^, @enie, 5lfteur, ^ajc^a, @oIo, ^afmo, Gen. Sing., 2orb8, ?abi^, ©enieS, ?ltteur«, ^afcbaS, (2oIo8, ^afmoS, Nom. Plur., 2orb8, 2abte8, @enie§, ^IfteurS, ^ajc^aS, ®oIo8, ^a[mo9, Bat. Plur., Sorbs. 2abie«. ©enieS. 5lfteur8. ^ajdjaS. @oIo8. ^afinoS. Nom. Sing., 5lbicctit), Capital, SBcrbum, SD^ufihie, X^cma, Gen. Sing., 2lbiccti»«, Capitals, SBerbumS, aJiufihig, %\)ma9, Nom. Plur.,) %t)itctx>oa, ^apitcile, 53erba, 2Jtufici, %i)tmata, *' I Slbjectitjen. ^apitalien. SSerbcn. SKufifer. X^cmen. § 78. The Declension of Proper Nouns differs greatly from that of common nouns (§ 72). 1. With names oj^ persons : 1. The genitive is usually formed by adding sg, 2. But masc. names in ft, ^, f(^, f, J, and fern, names in C^ take itH9* 3. The plural of all names is formed according to the old declensioq except feminine names in C, which follow the new declension : Nom. Sing., ^cmxx6), Subwifl, ©emitter, ©iJtlje, ^^ranj, Gen. Sing., |)ctiirt(^3, SubmigS, SdjittcrS, (MotbcS, ^xanitn9, Nam. Plur., ^cinrid^e, SubttJtge, ©critter, @ot^e, 5^anjc, Ikit. Plur., ^einric^en. Subiuigen. @d;ittern. @'6ti)in. granjen. M 266 THE NOUN. [§ 79, 80, Norn. Sing., SBert^a, (Smma, 2lbet^etb, §cbtDtg, SD^arie', ^en. Sing., 53ert^a§, ®mma§, Slbel^etbg, §ebn)tg3, 3}?art*en8, Norn. Plur., ^ertl;a§. (gmma§. 5lbel^eib§. ^ebtt)igg, 2}ian*en. Rem. Proper nouns are not inflected when preceded by the article or an adjective pronoun : bte 53tlbjaulc bes ?)orf ; bte SSerfe beg ^o^ann ©ebaftian SBac^ (or ^o^ann @ebaftian 33a^g SlSerfe). 2. Names of cities or countries, not ending in ♦ i N. mein gutter, mcine gut*e, mcin gut*efl!. meinc gut*en. ^1 G. meineS gut*en, meincr gut*en, meiucs gut*en. meincr gut*en. D. mcincm gut*en. mcincr gut*en, mciucm gut*en. mcincn gut*en. A. mctncn gut*en, meinc gut*e, mcin gut*eg. meinc gut*cn. Rem. 1. The former termination sCg of the genitive singular in the mascu line and neuter genders of the Old Declension is now generally rejected hy most writers, but it is yet retained in many^arec? expressions: ®cicn vgic gutcS 2Jiut^c8, Be of good courage. ScincSrocgS, By no means. Ohs. The tei-mination *c9 is also retained in the masculine and neuter sin- gular of all pronouns, whether used atljectively or suhstimtively, which are declined according to the Old Declension {see § 1()!>~1 K') : 2)a8 2)ac^ bicfeS ^aujeS, The roof of this house. Rem. 2. Adjectives take the Old Declension when preceded by the following undeclined words: etttttg, ni(^tg, tJtCl, ttiemg ; fOl(^, ttclt^, raan(^ ; car- dinal numbers; britt^ttlb, einerlet, bergteit^en, etc. .- 2)rct cbic Orafen folgcn (U^.), Three noble counts follow. Declension : 3)U, guteS tinb I Thou, good child ! 3^r, armen Scute I You, poor people ! Rem. 7. In poetic language the termination may be dropped from the nam. and ace. sing, neuter of adjectives of the Old and Mixed Declensions : ^alt 3Ba[f er ; alt (Sijen, Cold water ; old iron. (Sin gut siBort, A good word. Rem. 8. When, in poetic composition, two or more adjectives are joined to the same noun, only the last one is declined : 25crtalj^,t>errat^ertfc^e9Jat^, The false, treasonable counsel. Rem. 9. An attributive adjective, following the noun, is not declined : ein 9liefe, grog unb n>ilb, A giant, large and fierce. Rem. 10. Adjectives used substantively retain their adjective terminations r (Sin S)CUtfc^er, bie S)eutf(^en, A German, the Germans. Rem. 11. Participles used adjectively are declined like adjectives : ^m folgenbcn Sage, On the following day. Rem. 12. Adjectives ending in sCl/ -tVif or ctx, when declined, usually drop an t either before or after I, n, 1 1 (Sr tfl ein ebler SJJcnf^, He is a noble man. SBir ^aben trotfllCS JBetter, We are ha^-ing dry weather. Rem. 13. The adjective !^0C^ drops C when it is declined: (Sin fe^r J^OJ^cr S3erg, A very high mountain. Rem. 14. If two adjectives stand in equal logical relation to the noun, thoy both follow the Old Declension : if the second adjective stands in more inti-* mate relation to the noun than the first, it follows the Mixed Declension : ^a6) guter (unb) alter @itte, According to good old custom. 25on aitem [blauen ^a^ier], From old [blue paper]. 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. (©tcigcrung bcr ©tgcnftl^aft^toiirtcrO § 90. In the German, as in all Teutonic languages, the comparative degree is formed by adding =cr, and the superlative by adding =ft (or =cft) to the positive degree. Rem. 1. When the positive degree ends in sb, st, s^, -^f =5^ =f(|l^ -^f Af or ^, the superlative usually takes =e[t J otherwise it takes sft* §91.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 273 Rem. 2. The few adjectives ending in *tf take only sf in the comparative. Positive. Compar. Superl. Positive. Compar. Superl. fcin, fine. fcin*er, fCtn::ft ^ei^, hot, ^ciB^er, ^eiii'Cft faul, lazy, faul*cr, faul.ft falfd;, false, fatfd;=cr, fai^.cft rcid^, rich. reic^-cr, reid;4t frob, happy, frol^^cr, frob'Cft. fci;en, fine, Wincti, Ww'At frei, free, frciscr, frcinft. milb, mild, milbscr, milb^Cft treu, true, trcu^cr, treu^cft laut, loud. laut*er, Iaut=cft milbc, weary, iniibc*r, miibc»ft. Rem. 3. Adjectives ending in sti, stUf or sW, reject the t of this syllable in the comparative degree : Sbel, noble, Cbl-cr, nobler, ebcl'1^, noblest. § 91. When the positive is a monosyllable, the radical vowel, if a, 0, or U, usually takes the umlaut in the com- parative and superlative degrees: Positive. Compar. Superl. Positive. Compar. Superl. alt, old, alUx, Oltscjl. toaxm, warm, ttorm^cr, ttormscft. lang, long, loitg'Cr, Io«8*jl. grob, coarse, griJli=er, groi^jl. furj, short, fiirs^cr, !i!rj=cfl. iung, young, jUng-cr, iilng^ji. i2em. 1. The umlaut is not used in the comparison of: 1 . Adjectives with the diphthong an in the radical syllable : taut, loud, lout^cr, Iaut:=cft. 2. Derivative adjectives (ending in -hat, ^tl, '^aft, sfant, etc.): banfbar, thankful, bantbar»cr, bantbar^t 8. Adjectives having the participial prefix Qf I gcwaiibt, dexterous, gctt)anbt*cr, gctvanbtsCft 4. Some adjectives of foreign origin : brat), falfd?, matt, )?Iatt, gart, nobct, flolj, etc. 5. The following monosyllabic adjectives of German origin : 1. With a : barjc^, blant, faM, falb, flarf), farg, tnaipp, (abm, ta^, nacft, raf(^, jac^t, fanft, ftatt, fd;Iaff, fd^Iant, jlarr, flat!, ttja^r. 2. With : fro^, ^0^1, ^olb, to8, morfc^, ro^, fc^roff, tott, boll. 3. With u : bunt, bum^f, ^lum^ runb, jtumm, ftum^)f, ttjunb. Rem. 2. The use of the umlaut continues to extend more and more, both in the language of the common people and in the works of good writers. Thus, Goethe uses flot^cr, flarcr; Klopstock uses jartCt; Kinkel uses glijt* tCftCn* The use also varies with fiann, Mtt^, frOUtm, HO^, OCfUUb, etc. M2 274 THE ADJECTIVE. [92, 93. § 92. A few adjectives are irregular and a few are defective in comparison: Positive. Coviparative. Superlative. gut, good. beffer, better. beft, best. 'mi, much. tnef)r, more, tncift, most. 1 {)0(^, high, ^i5^er, higher. bcd;ft, highest. natje, near. nrep.], before), t»orber, anterior. toorberft, foremost. (^inten \_adv.\ behind). Winter, hinder. f)interft, hindmost. (oBen \adv.\ above), ober, upper, oberft, uppermost. (unten {adv.\ below, unter, lower. iinterft, lowermost. (min \_adj.\ adv.\ little), mtnber, less. miubeft, least. (er '[Old German for the (erer [Old Ger. for adverb ei)e], early). the adv. e()er], earlier). erfte, first. (laz {Old Ger.\ lazy). le^te, last. (erft, first), (le^t, last), erfter, tester, former latter, § 93. Adjectives, especially if they are polysyllables, are sometimes compared by placing before the positive the adverbs mcl^r, more, and am mciftcn, most : @ett)anbt, dexterous, meftr gewanbt, am mciftCtt getcanbt. Rem. 1. In comparing two adjectives with each other, ntcl)t must be used: @r i[t mcl)r ta^fer al^ i?orfid^tig, He is more brave than prudent. Rem. 2. To express the superlative predicatively, the dative, preceded by am (an bcm), may be employed: 3)tefe 58Iume i[t am fd/Onftcn, This flower is most beautiful. Rem. 3. By way of emphasis, the genitive plm-al of attCt is frequently pre- fixed to the superlative : 2)teje SStume tft bte attcrfci^onfte, This flower is far the most beautiful. Rem. 4. The absolute superlative is expressed by prefixing to the positive such adverbs as fe^jt, \}'6^^t, aU^Ctft, etc. : 2)tC 9^a(^rtd>ttft^i3(^ftintereffant, The news is extremely interesting. Rem. 5. Adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees are subject to the same laws of declension (§ 90) as though in the positive degree : 3)er befte ^reunb, The best friend. SJiein befter greuub, My best (in Engl, my good) friend. § 04-9O.J SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 275 3. SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. § 94. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, when used att?'ibutively, take the gender, number, and case of the substantive which they qualify (L. XVIII). § 95. The following adjectives govern the genitive case without the use of a preposition (§ 81, 2, 2) : 1. ^Infid^tig, arm, bar, bebiirfttg, bcgierig, beni3tt)igt, betou^t, blc^, ctn- gcbent, einig, ein§, crilbrigt, erfa^rcn, fa^tg, fret, frob, gebent, gcftau* big, gettja^r, geirartig, gen?t|, genjo^nt, ^ab^aft, tune, funb, fiiubtg, lebig, leer, Io«, mad^tig, miibe, nntjfig, quitt, fatt, jd;ulbtg, fied;en, t^cil^aft (*ig), ilberbriifftg, i>erbad?tig, toerluftig, tjott, tucrttj, toilrbig. 2. Such of these adjectives as take the negative prefix un=/ as : Uiibcgierig, uucrfatiren, immad;tig, unfd;ulbig, uufid;er, untDiirbig. @r ift atlcr ®orgen ftet, He is free from all cares. Sr ift bC^ 2Bcge8 tunbig, He is acquainted with the road. @S ift nid;t bcr 2Jiul)e wert^, It is not worth the trouble. (gr ift bcr ^d;tung unttJilrbig, He is unworthy of respect. Rem. 1 . Some of these adjectives may be followed by certain prepositions ''which govern their own cases), as : (1) begierig, by ntttft or auf (5) frei, Icbtg, tccr, lo8, bofl, efc, (2) bercit, fabig, by gu. by Uon, (3) arm, gcmo^nt, leer, by an. (6) einig, erfabrcn, Jro^, by iiu (4) fro^, gcmi^, einig, by iibcr, (7) jufncbeu, by mit er ift frei tjon atleu ®orgcn, He is free from all cares. @r lit arm an @elb, He is poor in money. Rem. 2. Some of these adjectives are used, though rarely, as governing the uccusative case, as : anfid^tig, betDu^t, fabig, gcftanbig, gema^r, gctDol;nt, ^ab* ^aft, Io8, miibc, fatt, fc^ulbig, ilberbriifftg, trert^, jufriebcn. (gg ifi nid;t bic 3)Zil^e trcrt^, It is not worth the trouble. § 96. Many adjectives govern tlie dative case without the use of a preposition (§ 82,3,1), as: ^ 1. 5tbtrilnnig, o^ulic^, angeboren, angctegcn, angcnebm, anfto^ig, be* faniit, bangc, bequcm, betru^t, bi^fc, bantbar, bienlid;, bienftbar, cigen, cigent^iimlid?, ergebcn, feil, fcinb, fern, folgfam, fremb, ge^orfam, gc» mein, gemeinfam, geneigt, gctrif?, gctrogen, gleicb, gnSbig, gram, gut, nabe, ncu, ni5tbig, offcn, offeubar, ^affcnb, ^cinlid), red;t, fd^citlid), fdjmeic^el^aft, fd)merjlid;, fdjulbig, fc^trer, fiif?, ttjeuer, treu. ilbd, ilberlcgcn, untertban, »erbad>tig, i^erberbli^, ftermanbt, toortl)eiJb..fl tt)c^, t»ert^, toidptig, tuibertic^, tinUtommen, wo^l, itceifel^aft. 276 NUMERALS. [§ 97, 98. 2. The negatives of these, formed by adding the prefix itn* or ah-X 1. With un: una^ulid;, unangene^m, unbefannt, uitnot^tg, unfd^ul* 2. With ati : abgeneigt. [big, unsn^eifcl^aft, etc. Sd} bin 3^nen je^r banfbar. I am very grateful to you. (S§ i[t i^m jcfjciblid^, It is injurious to him. @r ift mir unbetannt, He is a stranger to me. Bern. 1. It is usually a personal noun that takes the dative after these ad- iectives, and which maybe treated as the ^'indirect object" of the adjective: C2§ wax il^m ntc^t ber Wi^^ irert^, It was not worth to him the trouble. (Sr ift mir je^n Xijakx fd;utbtg, He is ten dollars in debt to me. Rem. 2. Many of these adjectives may be followed by prepositions : ^d) bin mit t^ra toermanbt, I am related to him. 2)er tbnig tear ii:)m (or gegCtt t^n) The king was not merciful to him nic^t gnabig, (or towards him). § 97. The AcGiisative IB govemedh J Sidjectiyes ex^res^" ing value, weight, measure, or age {see § 94, liem. 2) : (S8 toax Itintn pfennig n^ert^, It was not worth a penny. (SS ift nur Cincn 3"^^ hxdt, It is only an inch wide. @r ijl JCl^n ^a^xt alt, He is ten years old. NUMERALS. (Ba^ItoiJrtcr.) § 98. The primitive Numerals are cin, Jtoet, brci, tJtcr, fiinf, \t^^f fickn, m^if ncim, JC^n* All other numerals are derivatives or compounds of these primitive words. Rem. 1. The apparently primitive numbers Clf/ Stoiolf^ l^UllbCtt, and tfltt* f Cnb have been thus developed : Gothic. Old- German. Mid.-Ger. N.-Ger. 11, ainlif, one over (ten), einlif, eilf, elf. erf. 12, tvalif, two over (ten), zwelif, zwelef, zwelf, jttjBIf. 100, taihuntaihund) ten times or hunt > ten, huntarot ) or hunt,) hundert, ^unbert. 1000, thusundi, ten hundred, dfisunt, tfisent, taufcnb*. Rem. 2.. The high numbers 2JJtEton, SStUton, etc., are fi*om the French. Rem. 3. Numerals are either adjectives, nouns, or adverbs. It is more con^ venient, however, to treat them as forming a separate part of speech. Rem. 4. There are three classes of Numeral Adjectives: (1), Cardinal Nunsr berg; (2), Ordinal Humbors; (3), Compound Numeral Adjectives. § 99.] CARDINAL NUMBERS. 277 § 99. The Cardinal Numbers are formed as follows; L Sins. 60. ©ed^gtg. 2. 3wci 70. ©tcbcnjig or ©iebjig. 8. S)reu 80. ^d^tjig. 4. 3Sicr. 90. Sf^eunsig. 6. gttnf. 100. §unbcrt. 6. ©cd^S. 101. §unbcrt unb ctn«. 7. ©icbcn. 110. ^unbcrt unb jc^n. 8. ac^t. 120. ^unbcrt unb jtranjig. 9. 5Reun. 121. §unbcrt cinunbjtpanjig. 10. 3ct?n. 125. ^unbcrt filnfunbjtt?anjtg. 11. eif. 136. §unbcrt fec^«unbbreij3ig. 12. 3n?elf. 150. ^unbert unb fiinfjig. 13. ©reije^n. 151. §unbert einunbfilnfjig. 14. Isieqe^n. 200. Bujeibunbert. 15. gunfje^n. 225. Btt?eit;unbertfiinfunbjn)an3\ft IG. 8cd;je^n. 500. giint()unbert. 17. ©icbenjc^n or ©iefcje^n. 1,000. Sintaufcnb or S^aufcnb. 18. 3lc^t5cl;n. 1,005. (Sintaujenb unb filnf* 19. ^Jeunse^n, 1,025. (Sintaufenb fiinfunbjwanjig. 20. B^^ansivj. 1,500. eintaufcnb filnf^unbert. 21. (Siuuntstuansig. 2,000. B^eitaujcnb. 22. 3tt)ctunb5n?an3ig, etc. 10,000. 3et;ntaujenb. 30. Srci^iij. 20,000. 3n?ansigtaufcnb. 31. (Sinunbbrcigig, etc. 100,000. ^unbcrt taufcnb. 40. SSierjig. 200,000. B^ci^unbert taufenb. 60. ganf^ig. 1,000,000. (Sine miUxon. 65. ^Untunbfttnf^ig. 2,000,000. B">ct SmiUioncn. 1869. ^tc^tje^n^unbert unb ncununbfec^jig, or Sintaujcub ac^t^unbcrt ncunuubjcd^jig. Rem. 1 . Single words are usually formed of units and tens, of multiples of a hundred, and of multiples of a thousand up to a hundred thousand. Bat writers vary greatly as to the method of dividing compound numbers. Rem. 2. All the other numerals, whether numeral nouns, adjectives, or ad- verbs, are formed from cardinal numbers. Rem. 3. From their constant and universal use, cardinal numbers retain a fixedness of form not surpassed by that of any other words in a language. They are therefore of great value in tracing the relationship of allied lan- guages {see § 28-30, and § 106, Rem. 3). Rem. 4. When used as abstract nouns, cardinal numbers take the feminine gender, being in apposition with bit ^(i\ii understood : %\t (gicbcn ift bei ben 3uben einc Seven is a sacred number with the ^eiltge Ba^I, Jews. 278 NUMERALS. [§ 100-102. § 100. The numeral tin usually receives a strong emphasis in pronunciation (see § b2>^Iiem.). 1. Used with a noun, tVX is declined like the indefinite article (§ 54). 2. In the expression Ctlt UUb bCtfCldC, t\\\ may be undeclined. 3. When used joithout a noun, it begins with a capital letter (^tllCt, etc.). 1. Not preceded by htt^ it follows the old declension of the adjective. 2. Preceded by t)Ct, it follows the new declension of the adjective, and is used both in the singular and plural numbers (ber ©illC, bie Sine, bag (gtnc; bte @incn)* Rem. It is thus used (as the one, the ones) in opposition to htt ^lltbCtC, hit Slnbcrn (the other, the others). 4. The form ^m§ is used : (1), in counting, Ctn§, Jtoet, bret, Uter, eet, bret, toter=c, yed^g.c, ge^n^e, Gen. gtt)et^Cr, bretscr, bier^cr, fe4)§^er, ge^n^cr, Bat. stDet^cn, bret^cn, bter^etl, ted;g.cn, i^W'tn, Ace. . jttjet. bret. i5ter=e* fe(^§:=C» ge^n^^C* § 102.] ORDINAL NUMBERS. 279 1st 2)er crftc* ' 50th: S)er fflnf jtg-jle. 2d „ 5U)Ct=tC» 55th 11 tiiutunbtilufjig^ftC. 3d „ Drit=tc* 60th It feci?5^g4tC. 4th „ mx'M* 70th n fiebeujigsftC or fieb* 5th „ filnf^C. jifl'-ftC. 6th „ fcd^c^tC. 80th 11 ad}t5ig4te» 7th „ fieben^tC. 90th II ueuiijig4tC» 8th „ a(^t*C» 100th II ^unbcrt'-ftc. 9th „ ncun*tC^ lOlst II ^unbcrt unb erftc. 10th „ IzhMt. 125th II ^unbertjiiiifmibjmar* nth „ zMt. Si94tC. 12th „ lxo'i\Ht* 200th 11 jtT)ct^unbert"ftC^ 13th „ brci3e(;n4e» 500th 11 fttuff?unbert4tC» 14th „ tiersc^n-tC* 1,000th 11 taujenb^ftC* 15th „ funfsel;n4C* l,00l8t II toujenb unb erftc. 16th „ \z&llt\)n4t* 1,025th II taufenbfiinfuubsiDan* 1 7th „ fiebenjc^n*tC, or fictJjc^n^C* m4t* 18th „ ac^t5e(;n*tC. 1,626th 11 taujenb jec^S^unbert 19th „ ncunje{;n*tC» unb fcd;gunb* 20th „ Stt)anjig4tC* jtt)an3ig4tC, 2l8t „ einunbjTOanjtg^ftC* 2,000th II jtreitaufcnb^ftC* 25th „ filufunbsmansig^ftC. 20,000th 11 3n?an5igtaufcnb*ftC» 80th „ brei^ig^ftc. 100,000th II i^unberttaufcnb*ftc* 35th „ filntunbbrcigtg*ftC» 500,000th II tilnff)unbcrttaujcnbftC 40th „ ticqig^tC. 1,000,000th 11 miUion^ftC, 45th „ filntunb»icrjtg*fte» 2,000,000th II jtt)eimittion*ftC, Rem. 1 . The forms trtt^tC and ati^Ut are euphonic variations from the rule for forming ordinal numbers. Rem. 2. Ordinal numbers are subject to all the laws of declension of ad- jectives. Rem. 3. ^tftc is the superlative of the obsolete adverb tX (§ 92). Rem. 4. All the ordinals were probably originally super latives^ formed after the analogj' of tt\tt* Rem. 5, ^ttCttC was first used in the sixteenth century. Before that time bcr dttbCCC meant the second of any number, as it now means the second o^ iut two. Rem. 6. Since the Old-German period, the termination stC or sjtC is added only to the last one of compound numbers. Rem. 7. Examples of the historic development of ordinal numbers : Gnthic: , anthar, thridja. saihsta, taihnnda, tvalfta. < >/(l- German : eristo, andar. dritto, sebsto, zehanto. zweliftc^ Mid.-German: erste. ander. dritte, sehste. zehende. zwelfte. New-German: tX^t. onber. brittc. fcc^Ste. jc^ute. gwblfte. 280 NUMERALS. [§ 103, 104. Gothic : Old- German: Middle-German , New- German: tTaig3*6sta, zweinzicosto, zweinzegoste, drizegeste, drizugosto, brei^igfle. fijorzugosto, vierzegeste, xnerjigftc. thusundgosta, dfisuntosto, tiisentste, t-.xufenbftc. § 103. There are three classes of Compound Numeral Adjectives: 1. Distributives ^mdiic^tm^ how many at a time: 3tDet unb StDCi, je iXOtX, JU %\om\\, Two at a time, by twos. 3e^n unb ge^n, je yt^n, ju ge^nen, Ten at a time, by tens. 2. Dimidiatives, indicating the whole of all up to the number mentioned, with a half of that number : Slnbert^alb, S)ritte^alb, SBierte^alb, Pntte^alb, Rem. 1. The t is often dropped One and a half Two and a half Three and a half Four and a half (one and a half of the second). (two and a half of the third). (three and a half of the fourth). (fom* and a half of the fifth). Rem. 2. Dimidiatives higher than btittl(|fllb are rarely used. Rem. 3. The fuller forms Ctll unb Ctll W^, etc., are also used. 2)ag Suc^ !oftet CtnCll unb etnen The cloth costs a dollar and a half l^alktt skater bic @IIe, a yard. 3. Variatives^ indicating of how many kinds : (Stner4et, iXomX'lti, Of one kind, of two kinds. Rem. 1. Since the Mid.- Germ, period the syllable let has been attached to the numeral. It is from Lat. lex, Provengal ley. Middle- German leige, leie. Thus, SnncrlCt was in the Middle- German einer leige, einer leie. Rem. 2. Distributives^ Dimidiatives, and Variatives are indeclinable. Rem. 3. Many compound adjectives have cardinal or ordinal numbers for the first or modifying component, as : (Sinfad^ or einfcitttg, simple. 3^^i^^Utig, of double meaning. 3tt)etfac^ or stceifattig, twofold. ©rei^filnbig, weighing three pounds, ©tnfttmmtg, unanimous. (Singeboren, only begotten, ©injci^rtg, one year old. ©rftgeboren, first bora. § 104. Numeral Nouns are of two kinds : 1. Those with the suffix ^tX or Ain^ {masculine nouns): Sin ® ret|3tgcr , , A man from thirty to forty years old. Sin Ureter, A three-pfennig coin (worth about a Pnfunbyed)jtger, Wine made in 1865. [cent). (Sin 3^ittil^3; Ctll 2)riIiKna^ A twin, a triplet. § 105, 106.] THE PRONOUN. 281 2. Those with the suffix ^tcl {neuter nouns), as : (Sin 2)1^1161 "ipfimb, A third of a pound. (Sin 2ld;tel 2:^aler, An eighth of a dollar. 2)rci 3ld;tel ^^^, Three eighths of an inch. Rem. 1. The syllable s(cl is an abbreviation of ^^eil, a />ar<. Thus 25nt« tcl is abbreviated from 2)nttl)cil (for 2^ritttl)eil), Middle- Germ an dritteil. Rem. 2. "A half' is rendered by the noun biC ^iilftC, usually followed by Uon; or by the adjective Ijalb (citt ^ttltjcr, ctuc I)alt)c, cin I)aliic^): 2)ic ^alftc l?on ber ®tabt, A half of the city. @S fcftct cincn ^albcn X^alcr, It costs half a dollar. Ohs. When before neuter names of cities and countries, and not preceded by an article or a pronoun, \)^\h (and gflnj) are undeclined : §alb 33crUn, ^alb (ganj) !2)eutjd;Ianb, Half Berlin, half (all) Germany, (but) bae tjalbe 2)eutjc^(anb, Half Germany. § 105. Numeral Adverbs are of two kinds : 1. Reiteratives, formed by compounding Cardinal Num- hers with 55lal, a time : (Sinmal, once. 3^^"^^^ twice. ^t^ivmOiX, ten times. 2. Ordinal Adverbs, indicating in what place or order: (Srj^cnS, crftlid;, or Jiicrjl, In the first place, firstly. 3^citen§, brittcnS, etc. In the second, third place, etc. Rem. The form erjl==cn^ (Middle- German ersten), etc., has been devel- oped in the New- German period by adding *§ to the genitive singular, after the analogy of such nouns as ^IdtttCtt^, by name of. THE PRONOUN. (Xa« PrtDort) § 106. Pronouns are divided into six classes: Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Indefinite, Interrogative, and Pelatiwe. Rem. 1. All the Personal Pronouns, the Demonstratives bCt, bicfcr, jCllCr, the Indefinite Pronouns attCt, Uicl, and the Intcrrogatives tSStX, ttJa^, are primitive words. All other pronouns are derivatives or compounds. Rem. 2. The pronouns are much simpler in declension as well as fewer in number in the New-German than they were in the Old and Middle- German. Rem. 3. Pronouns, from their constant and universal use, have great fixed- ness of form, and therefore they are of great value in tracing the relationship of alliefl languages (§ 28-30, and § 99, Rem. 3). 282 THE PRONOUN. [§ 107. 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. § 107. The Personal Pronouns are declined as follows FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. [ Singular. Singular. Norn, i^, I. bu, thou. (@ie, you.) Gen. rnciuer, ofme, eic* bcincr , of thee, etc. (3^nen, of you, etc.) Dat. mx, tome, eic* bir, to thee, etc. (S^nen, to you, etc.) Ace. m\^, me. mr thee. (@te, you.) Plural. Plural. Nom. toir, we. i^r, you. (®ic, you.) Gen. Unfcr, of us, etc.* cuer, of you, e^c. (3^i^cr, ofyou, ei)If toon un§ gincjen), (Twelve of us went). Rem. 4. Besides using bu in addressing Deity, the Germans employ bU and t^r in speaking to near relatives or very dear friends, and also to servants or children. Rem. 5. The use of the form of the third person plural, ©ic (beginning with a capital letter), for the second person of both numbers, was introduced into the German language in the eighteenth century. The use of this, as the form of address, has been constantly increasing since that time, * For the use of the cases, see § 8 1 -83. §108,109.] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 283 Rem. G. The nominative neuter t§ is used for the expletives t7, there^ and for w. Thus used, t^ does not control the number or person of the verb (S9 War ein 3Jiann, There was a man. SS ftnb oielc I'cutc, bic — There are many people who — 2Ber ift c« ? 3d; bin's, Who is it ? It is I. ®cib aujrid;tig I 2Sir futb C3, Be honest ! We are (so). Rem. 7. To prevent unpleasantness of sound or ambiguity of meaning, tXf flC, C^ are often replaced by bCrfClDc, bicfclbc, boffclbc: (gobalb bic SJJuttcr iljrc 2:od;tcr As soon as the mother saw her fa^>, fragte fie btcfttbt, daughter, she asked her. § 108. When the personal pronouns are used reflex- ively or recij)rocally.) the regular forms are employed in t\\e first and second persons. But in the third person fid) is employed in the dative and accusative of all gen- ders and in both numbers : 3d; erinncrc mid; baran, 2)a8 »crftc^t fic^, ©ie tocrflc^eu fid;, ©rinncrn (Sie fic^ ? I remember it. That is a matter of course. (They understand themselves, or (They understand each other. Do you remember ? Ran. 1. To avoid ambiguity, tittanbtt may be used in reciprocal expres- sions, either with or without the reflexive pronoun : SSir tcrftet;en cinanber, or > iir i . i i £„,. ^ I / o • w r We understand ourselves. SSir tcrfte^cn unS einanbcr, S Rein. 2. When mijself., himself., etc., are only emphatic repetitions of the nominative, they are translated by fclbft or fcIDct I Sr tbat C8 fclbjl, He did it himself. Qx jclbcr fann c§ ttjun. He can do it himself. Rem. 3. Sclbft (or fclbct) is often translated by the adverb even : ©clbft jeine gcinbc ad;tcn i^n, Even his enemies respect 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. (©cfi^anscigcnbc prtoiirtcrO § 109. The following are the Possessive Pronouns : Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. mcin, mcin*c, mcin. mv. unfcr. unfcr*c. iinfcr, our. bein, bein«c. bcin, thy. cucr, eur*c. cucr. your. fcin, fcin»c. fcin. his. ibr, i^r*c. i^r. their. ibr. ibt-e. ibr. her. (3^r, 3^r-e, 3^r, your) fcin. fcin^c. fcin. its. 284 THE PRONOUN. [§110,111. The Possessive Pronouns are declined in the singular like the indefinite article cttl (§ 54), and in the plural like adjectives of the Old Declension (§ 88. 8ee also Lesson XIX.,2). Rem. 1. In declining ItUfCt/ C is sometimes dropped from the terminations sc^, 'tm, =cn* In declining tVitXf the t after CU is usually dropped {see Less. XIX. ^ 3). Rem. 2. As they are used only adjectively, possessive pronouns agree, like all other adjectives, with the noun to which they belong (i. e. , the noun pos- sessed), in gender, case, and number. Rem. 3. In the German, as well as in all other Teutonic (and also in the Latin and Greek) languages, the Possessive Pronouns are formed from the genitive case of Personal Pronouns. § 110. There are three ways of rendering into Ger- man the Absolute Possessive Pronouns (as mine, thine, ours, yours, etc.) : tnetner, meinc, metneS, ber, bte, bag 9JJetmgc, ber aJletnc, mine. beiner, bcinc, beine6, „ „ „ 2)etmge, „ S)einc, thine. feiuer, jeine, jetneg, „ „ „ ©etntge, „ ©eine, his. i^rer, i^re, i^reS, n n n ^WWt n S^rc, hers. feiner, jetne, fcineg, „ „ „ ©etntge, „ @etnc, its. unferer, unfere, unjereS, „ „ „ Uttfrtgc, „ Unfere, ours. curer eiire, eureS, „ „ „ eurige, „ (Sure, yours. SWx, 3(;re, 3^reg, f/ 11 n 3^rige, „ -S^re, yours. il;rer, t^re, t^reS, n n It -S^nge, ,f Sfjre, theirs. Re7n. 1. Tltinttf Seiner, e^c. (in the first form), are declined like adjectives of the Old Declension. Rem. 2. 2)er SDletntge, ber Wtxnt, etc. (of the second and third forms), are declined like adjectives of the New Declension (see Less. XLL). Rem. 3. ^tX SJletlttge, Settltge, etc. (of the second form), are frequently used, not as referring to nouns already spoken of, but having certain conven- tional meanings : 2)ie aJieinigen laff en ftc^ 3^nen unb My family send their compliments ben 3^rtgen etn^fe^Ien, to yourself and your family. (Sr ^at bag ©etnige get^an, He has done his part. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. (|)titU)etfenbe ^iirtoorter*) § 111. There are nine Demonstrative Pronouns. They may all be used either substantively or adjectively. §111J DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 285 SINGULAR. PLURAf,. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. All Genders. biefcr, bicfc, bicfcS, this. bicfc, these. jcncr, jcnc, jcncS, that. jenc, those. bcr, bic, baS, that. bic, those. bcrjcnigc, biejcnigc, baSjcnigc, that. bicjenigcn, those. bcrfclbc, bicfclbe, baffelbc. the same. biefelbeu, the same. fammttic^cr, fdmmtlid;c, fammtlic^cS, entire. fdmratlic^c, all. jcbcr, jebc, jebcS, every. jo(d;er, \o\6.}t, fotd;e6, such. fold^e, such. allcr, allc, atteS, all. atte, aU. 1. Siefer, jcncr, fiimmtlit^cr, jcbcr, folc^cr, and aUcr fol- low the old declension of adjectives (see page 149). 2. ^cr is usually translated by that, though it some^ times is rendered by this : Rem. 1. The relative bcr and the definite article bCt are but the demon- Btrative pronoun bCr, with modified meanings : ^tl ift'« bcm W^ terfpod;en ^abc, It is this one to whom I have prom- unb bcr it>iU c8 ^abcn, ised it, and that one wishes to have it. Rem. 2. Used as a demonstrative pronoun, bcr receives a /«//, strong em- phasis ; as a relative, a medium emphasis ; as a definite article, no emphasis. Rem. 3, 3cr, used adjectively, is declined like the definite article (§ 54); used substantively, it is declined as follows ; BENGUT.AR. PLURAL. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. Nom. bcr, bic, bo^. Gen. bcffcn, bCtCH, bcffctl, Uat. bent, bcr, bcm, Ace. bctt. bic. ha^. All Genders. bic, bcrcr, bcncn, bic. 3. Both parts of bcrjctttgc (compounded from bcr and jcncr) are declined, the latter part following the new declension of adjectives see Less. XLIIL). 4. Both parts also of bcrfclbc (bcr and fclbc) are de- clined (see Less. XLIII.). Rfm. '^tT 9{antItt^C (the same) is more emphatic than bcrfcltc, and dlCnberfcUlC 0"*^ <^<^ same) is still more emphatic than either. 28G THE PRONOUN. [§ 112. 5. For 3cbcr, the forms jeglt^Ct and jcbtocbct are sometimes used. All three are employed in the sin* gular only. 6. a« .... he-who, the one-who, that-which. every (one) who (or which). whoever (or who), whatever (or what). Re7n. The following neuter indefinite pronouns and demonstratives used indefinitely, CtttO^, ni(^t^, UtClC^, UJCnigC^, IWan^t^, tJa«(, baifjCniflC, are followed by the relative tDH^ I 5tUc« tta^ ic^ t?abc, All that I have. 3)a8 i[t ctWaS, toa^ i^ n\6ft bcr* That is something that I do not un^ jic^e, derstand. 7. SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. (Stjntaj bc^ pmottc^.) §115. 1. Personal pronouns take the person, the number, and the grammatical gender of the nouns for which they stand. 2. Adjective pronouns follow the laws of syntax that govern adjectives (§ 94). 3. Relative pronouns take the gender and number of the antecedent. Tlein. 1. The relative pronoun can never be omitted: 3)cr ^Kann, bcn ic^ flcftcrn fa^, The man I saw yesterday. Ram. 2. (5S used expletively, and \^a^ and btC^ used in a collective sense -ee Less. XLIII., 4), do not control the number or person of the verb: (SS finb *it\\\z, tic — There are people that — 2)06 fmb 3)inge, bic — Those are things that — Rem. 3. The personal pronoun, if in the first or second person, is usually repeated after the relative : S)a§ njiffcn trir, btC tttr bie ®cm« That know we, who the chamois fen jagcn (Sd».), hunt. 3t>r, bic i!)r ^ricv^ fil^ret gegcn You, who make war against mj meincn '2o()ii C®d?.)» »on. 292 THE VERB. [§ 116-118. THE VERB. (2)a^ Bcittoort) § 116. VerUs may be classified in several ways: 1. By derivation into prhnitive, derivative, and compound. 2. By use " independent, auxiliary, and potential. 3. By meaning ' ' transitive and intransitive. 4. By inflection ' ' regular, irregular, and defective. § 117. Classification of Verbs by their derivation: 1. Primitive or radical Verbs are such as can be traced for their origin to no other radical words : |)a^*en, to have. ^rinf^en, to drink. Sat^^en, to laugh Rem. The constancy of their use gives many primitive verbs a fixedness of form that is of great value in tracing the relationship of languages (§ 28-30). 2. Derivative Verbs are formed from verbs, nouns, or adjectives, the radical vowel usually taking the i^m- lautf when capable of it : Sa^el=n, to smile (from \a^itn,to laugh). SBcittttsen, to warm (fiom toaritl, warm). ^^fliigsen, to plow (from ^<)5flu8, plow). 3. Comjpound Verhs are formed by prefixing to a verb a preposition (separable or inseparable), a noun, an ad- jective, or an adverb: 5lu^5ge6en, to go out. I ^w^^c^oS^tn, to l^ndle. I ^^ortsge^en, to ©rsfinben, to invent. | %n\A''pXt^iX[, to acquit. | go forth. § 118. Classification of Verbs as to their use i 1. Independent Verbs can be used without other verbs : er la^ bag S3urf?, He read the book. 2. Auxiliary Verbs include the three (fctll, ^C^Ctl, tiJCt- bcn) that are employed in forming the compound tenses of all verbs: ®r liat ba§ 5Bud^ getefen, He has read the book. Sffiir tocrbcn baS ^iic!^ lefen, W^e will read the book. Rem. They may also be used as independent verbs. Sr %^X bag S3uc^, He has the book. §119-123.] CLASSIFICATION OP VERBS. 293 3. Potential Verbs (fottcn, tooflcH, fbnncH, mbgcH, biirfcH, miiffcn) are employed to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs : Sr mu^ bag 33u(^ lefen, He must read the book. Rem. SajfCtt is also often used as apotentiai verb. § 119. Classification of Verbs by their meaning: 1. Verbs which govern an object in the accusative case are called Transitive by German grammarians : @r Ucft baS Su(^, He is reading the book. 2. Other verbs are called Intransitive : 1. Some intransitive verbs govern no object : (5r fc^laft, Iviuft, gcfjt, He sleeps, nms, goes. 2. Others govern an object in the genitive or dative case : ©ie f^cttcn ntCtncr, ^ring ! You deride me, prince ! (gr folijt fcincm ^rutJcr, He follows his brother. § 120, When the subject and object of the verb denote the same person of thing, the verb is termed reflexive : ^i^ bcftcifetge VOX^— I apply myself— Rem. When the action is mutual between the individuals that form the subject of the verb, the verb is termed reciprocal : ©lit fd^meid^eln Cinanbcrf They flatter each other. 1. CONJUGATION. (^onjuQotion.) § 121. The Accidents of the Verb are (as in EngMsh) Moods, Tenses, Persons, Numhers, Particij^les, and Voices. 1. Moods (3Wobi). § 122. The German Verb has five Moods; the Indicor t'lve, Subjunctive, Conditional, Imperative, and Infinitive. Rem. The Potential Mood in EngUsh is translated into German partly by the potential verbs, and partly by the subjunctive and conditional moods. § 123. The Indicative Mood is used in expressing or de- nying that which is conceived by the speaJcer to be certain : 6r \^tii bae ^au8 bertauft, He has sold the house. Rem. The indicative may be used in some conditional sentences where in I "iiglish the subjunctive would be employed : 3ift cr reid^, fo fann cr ttct gcbcn, If he be rich, be can give much. 294 CONJUGATION. [§124,125. Rem. 2. The present indicative may be used ybr the imperative m express^ ing a command which is conceived as ah'eady carried into execution : 2)u ilbernimmft bte f^anif^en 9ie* Take charge of the Spanish reg> gimenter (@c^.)^ ments. § 124. The Subjunctive Mood is employed: 1. In repeating statements of other ^persons, without vouching for their accuracy, or about which there may be some doubt in the mind of the speaker : (gr fagte, ba^ bie Slrmec fc^on in He said that the army is already SSettjegung fct, in motion. 2J2an fagt, er fci geftorben, It is said that he is dead. 2. In indirect questions, treated as quotations: 3d; fragte tfjn ttjann er nac^ 33er* I asked him when he will go to lin ge^en tocrbc, Berlin. 3. In expressing what is problematical, hypothetical, desired, or what is conceived of as possible, without having really transpired: ^iirc er bod^ gefunb I Oh ! that he were well! SJlb^tC er genefen I Oh! that he might recover! ^&j tDiinfc^te, ba^ er fame, I wished that he might come. Revi. The subjunctive mood is thus often used in subordinate sentences, especially after verbs expressing doubt, uncertainty, fear, hope, purpose, sup- position, exhortation, advice, etc. : 3d)bestr»eifclte, ba^er f^onin33er* I doubted that he had already ar- Itn angefommen fci, rived in Berlin. 2)U ^oflft 2)eiucn 3?ater unb S)eine Thou shalt honor thy father and thv abutter e^reu, aiif ba^ bu lange mother, that thou mayest live av\ (Srben Ickft, [ttlCrbeft, long in the land. 3d> rat^e 2)tr ba^ !5)u flei^iger I advise you to be more diligent. Obs. The imperf, and pluperf tenses of the subj. mood are often used in- stead of the present and perfect tenses of the conditional mood (see § 125). § 125. The Conditional Mood is used to express a result dependent upon certain conditions. It corresponds in general to the Potential Mood in English, when used with the auxiliary would or should : SBenn ba« SSetter j(^5ner*n?areA ^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^^ g^^,^ I ^^^^ ttiirbc t^ auggefjen (cotic?.), (or) "> ^^ ^^^ ginjie id? au8 (««6;.), ) S)ag ttjttrbc id) ni^t tbun {cond.\\ j ^^^j^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ (or) bag tptC id? ind;t {snhj.\ S § 126-128.] IMPERATIVE MOOD. 295 § 126. The Imperative Mood is used as in English. But with an imperative signification may also be used : 1. The present indicative (§ 123, Rem, 2). 2. The perfect particvple, the action being regarded as already completed : 2)ie 2:romracI gcrii^rt ! Beat the drums ! 3. The infinitive present^ in expressions of childish or of highly excited passion : (Sief> iu8 S3ud; t^inein : itur nid;t Keep looking into the book : only Icfcn, immer ftngCn (©.), do not read, keep singing. ^\^i janfcn, 2JZutter 1 Do not scold, mother! § 127. The Infinitive Mood is always dependent upon another verb (except in the cases given below) : (guc^e JU fcin, toaS bu yx ftljCiltCn Seek to be what thou wishest to ap- toUnfci^ej't, pear. Exc. 1 . When there is a manifest ellipsis, as : (®oU) 3^ mcineS S3ruberS ^in* (Should) I not recognize my broth- bcr nit^t erfcnncn I er's children ! Exc. 2. When used for the imperative (1 26, 3). Exc. 3. When used as a verbal noun : jDaS ©c^Iafen crquicft, Sleep is refreshing. Rem. The infinitive of any verb may be used as a (neuter) verbal noun when there is no corresponding substantive already existing. The infinitive is often used substantively even when it does not take the article : ©Ctnen ^etnben tlCtSei^tn ijl cbcl, To forgive one's enemies is noble. Exc. 4. The infinitive is used after certain nouns and adjectives : S8 ift ^txi JU ge^cn, It is time to go. (5r ^ot 3Wutft JU tSm^jfen, He has courage to fight. 2)er 33ricf ift ft^tiJCr Ju Icfcn, The letter is hard to read. 3c^ bin tcgictig Ju toiffcn, I am curious to know. § 128. The use of JU as a sign of the Infinitive Mood has been constantly increasing since the sixteenth century. It is now omitted only in the following cases : 1. After the potential verbs foUcn, tooflcn, fonnCH, mO' gen, biirfcn, miiffcn (and loffcn): 3ci? fann C8 nic^t Icfcn, I can not read it. 296 THE VERB. [§ 129. 2. After the verbs fii^ICH, l^Ct^CH, ^Clfcn, ^orcn, Ic^rCH, lernen,madjen,fe^en: ®a6 mac^t mx6^ jittevn, That makes me tremble. 2Btr prten fie fingen, We heard them sing. 3. After the verbs MciBcH, fasten, gc^cn^ licgen, rcitcn, fteljen, and ^afien and \tiUf in certain expressions: (Sr bletfet fi^Cn, He keeps his seat. 2Btr gcl^en f^ajtcren, We are going to take a walk. Rem. 1 . The infinitive with JU is used after the prepositions dttftdtt^ of)nt, uni : Slnftatt JU gcl^en, Hteb cr, Instead of going, he remained. £)t}nt bag 3U hJtffen— Without knowing that— Rem. 2. The infinitive of the active voice is often translated into English by the infinitive of the passive voice : SBoe ift pt t%n ? What is to be done? Rem. 3. In iae German only the infinitive can be used as a verbal noua (and not, as in English, the present participle also) : ©r ift bCS @(!^toa^Cll§ ntiibe, He is tired of the chattering. 2. Participles (^artisi^jtcn). § 129. There are two Participles, the Present and the Perfect. Rem. 1. Participles are used attributively in German to a far greater ex- tent than in English. When thus used they are subject to all the laws of declension of attributive adjectives : 2)er am 5. ©e^tember UerftoriCllC The mayor of Kronfeld, who died ^ilrgermeifter i)on ^ronfelb, on the fifth of September. Rem. 2. Participles are frequently preceded by the case they govern, by 6 modifying adverb, or a limiting clause : 2)ie ^onig fOtntttClnbC SStene, The honey-gathering bee. ®a§ un8 DCrfOlgcntJC ®efd;t(f, The fate that is pursuing us. S)er foeben i3on Sei^jig cngcfOttls The express train that has just ar- JltCnC ©^nettjug, rived fi-om Leipsic. jDer ©c^neWsug i)on Sei^jig ift fo* The express train has just arrived eben anOCfOntmcn, from Leipsic. Rem. 3. The adverb and the direct object (if a noun) is often joined to the participle into a compound Avord : 2)ic gcfc^gebcnbe SerfatnmTimg, The legislative assembly. 2)ic nCUgeBitnbetten S3iid)er, The newly-bound books. Rem. 4. Participles, like adjectives, may be used as nouns or aiS adverbs • (S§ giebt toiete ©ClC^rtCn, bie — There are many learned men, «^ho— SKit ftebenb ^ei^em staffer. With boiling-hot water. § 130, 131.] PABTICIPLES. 291 § 130. The Present Participle is formed by adding =b to the present infinitive : ^a^=Cn, to have ; f^ah-tub, having. ®C^*Cn, to go ; gC^=Cnb, going. Rem. 1. If preceded by gu, the present participle takes a passive significa- tion (compare the Latin passive participle in andm, or endus). (Sin JU UCrmcibCnbcr ge^Ier, A fault that should be avoided. Rem. 2. The particii)le thus used was not declined before the last century. Rem. 3. The present participles of many verbs are used mostly, and in some cases only, with adjective significations : SlbfHmmcnb, discordant. 5tbmejenb, absent. 5lini)cicnb, present. S3ebeutenb, important. 2)rtn0enb, urgent. 9teijenb, charming. § 131. The Perfect Participle is formed (1) by adding 4 to the root of all regular verbs, and =cn to the root of all irregular verbs ; and (2) by prefixing =gc to the root of all verbs, except the inseparable compounds (§ 154), and those with =ircn (=iercn) in the infinitive : Infinitive. Perfect Participle. Itebscn, to love, 9C=Iieb*t, loved. gcb=cn, to give, OC*geb;Cn, given. tJCrocb=en, to forgive, tercjebscn, forgiven. bcbcrf'Cn, to cover, bebc(f«t, covered. ftUbirsen, to study, ftubtrst, studied. Hem. 1 . In separable compounds gC^ adheres to the root of the verb : flU^sf pxt6f stn, to pronounce, au§=gCsfprod^*cn, pronounced. Rem. 2. When the verbs foflCH, tDOMCH, fonnCH, mbgCH, biitfCH, lUiiffcn, lajlcn, bCi^Cn, fCbcn, biircn, bdfCn are preceded by the infinitive of another verb, they take the form oi t\\Q present iujinitive for that of the past participle. The participial form of the potential vei'bs is only used when they are era- ployed as though independent verbs (the independent verb which they modify being understood): 3* ^abc c§ ni^t Icfcn fbnncn, I could not read it. 3in \)abz i^n fmcjen bbrctt^ I have heard him sing. ^6) \)abt C8 nic gcfotint, I have never been able (to do) it. Rem. 3. In forming the passive voice., tOCtbCtt drops QCs; (Sr ift beftraft toorbcn, He was fined, (but) @r ijl xt\&i ({CtOOtbtn^ He has become rich. Rem. 4. Many perfect participles have almost lost their verbal signification, and are used as adjectives : N 2 298 THE VERB. [§ 132,133. 1. From active verbs: 16 elannt, well-known ; gcle^rt, learned. 2. From reflexive verbs : Bejc^etben, modest ; betrunletl, drunken ; bCs triibt, sad; gefd^tcft, skillful ; gebraitd)t, second-hand. 3. From o6so/e^e verbs : aitgefeffeit, resident ; berjc^tebeit, different. 4. Participles from nouns, with no corresponding verbs: gefttefelt, "in boots;" gefttrnt, starry; beja^rt, full of years. Rem. 5. The perfect participle of some verbs, as laufCll, fa^tCH, tCitCIl, etc., is used after tomntett (the present participle being used in English): (Sr tarn gcIaufCll, He came running. 3. Tenses (Bcttformcn). § 132. The Present Tense is used in German more fre- quently than in English instead of other tenses. 1. Instead of they^^i^^^ tense: 3^ fontntC balb tuieber, I shall come back soon. Rem. Until as late as the fourteenth century future time was always ex- pressed by the present tense. 2. Instead of the perfect tense in speaking of the length of a period of time not yet completed : 2Bie lange finb ®ie m S3erltn? How long have you been in Berlin ? 3c^ bin jc^on ac^t ^a^re ^ier, I have been here eight years. 3. For the imjperfect tense, in lively narration: ■3(^9t^C geftern tnit metnem ^tnbe I went yesterday with my child to um bie ^arabe ju fetjen, lietUcrC see the parade ; I lost sight of eg au6 tneinen 5lugen— it— § 133. The Imperfect and Perfect Tenses are employed as in English, under the following limitations : 1. The perfect \^ often employed, when in English the imperfect would be used : ■Sd; ]^ak t^n ge[tent gCfC^Cn, I saw him yesterday. 2. The progressive form of the imperfect in English must be rendered by the imperfect in German. 3d) Ia§ bie B^^^^^S ^^^ ^^ herein* I was reading the newspaper when fam, he came in. Rem. The imperfect is always employed after the adverb al^» .^ 134.J PASSIVE VOICE. 299 3. The imperfect is frequently used in general ex- pressions, in which the jjerfect would be employed in English : 2BorCn @ic fd^on in SBien ? Have you been in Vienna? 4. When the speaker wishes to convey the idea that he was personally cognizant of an event, the imperfect is usually employed: ^orgeftcrn ftarl) tei mir unfer ge* Day before yesterday our dear friend ticttcr (^reunb, ^err 91. — Mr, N. died at my house. Rem. With the perfect (and also \vith the pluperfect) the auxiliary may be omitted in subordinate sentences : 2)a8 §au8, trelc^eS ic^ bcutc gC* The house which I saw to-day is fe^en, ift fe^r bcqucm, aber e6 very convenient, but it is too ift gU t^cuer, dear. 4. The Passive Voice (^tc ^^afftUform). § 134. The Passive Voice is formed by joining the auxil- iary tPCrbcn, to become, to t\iQ perfect participle (seeparor digm,%U\): ^icr toirb 2)cutfd^ 0Cf^rO(!^en, German is spoken here. 2)er geinb tiJUrbC gcft^IttOCn, The enemy was defeated. Rem. 1. The action is considered as becoming accomplished^ that is, as talcing place at the time alluded to. When the action is considered as completed the verb fcin is used, and the participle is usually treated as a predicative ad- jective. 'j^a^f ^au3 xoax fd^cn abgcbrannt, The house was already burnt down alS bic ^^cuertccbr anfam, when the fire-company arrived. Rem. 2. In the Gothic fcill was always employed. In the Old-Ger., tOtt' ben was frequently used for the futttre tenses. In the Mid.-Ger., tOtXhtU was frequently used in the past tenses. In the New-Ger.^ fctn was some- times used as auxiliary ; in the imperative mood it is always employed. 2)tc ®d>Iac^t toax bcrtorcn, The battle is lost. ®ott fci gclobt I God be praised! 1. When the active agent is indefinitely alluded to, the active voice, with man as nominative, is employed: M§eut' nimmt man ntd;t gcfangen," " Xo prisoners will be taken to-day. " 2. When an intransitive idea is expressed by a transi tive verb, the reflexive form is employed: ^a? UCrftC^t ft(^, That is a matter of course. 300 THE VERB. [§ 135. 3. When the object of the action is made the subject of the verb, and the agent is not alluded to, the reflex- ive form is usually employed: (Sine neuc Orbnnng ber S)inge A new order of things is established, fiiljrt (i^ ein, 2, AUXILIARY VERBS. § 135. There are three Auxiliary Verbs, ^ohtn, \tin, and tOCrbtn* They are employed as follows: 1. Transitive, Heflexive, Im/personal, and Potential Verbs take l^aBctl as the auxiliary: ■Set; f^abt i^n geje^en, I have seen him. ©r l^at fic^ gefreut, He has rejoiced. ©8 i)at ^eute geregnet, It has rained to-day, (Sr f}at eS gemu^t, He has been compelled (to do) it. 2. Intransitive Verbs denoting a dmnge of condition^ or a motion from one particular place to another, take fcin as the auxiliary : @r {(t angefommen, He has arrived. (gr ift tia^ §8erlin gereifl, He has gone to Berlin. (but) (Sr l^at iJiel rereift, He has traveled much. Rem. 1. The verbs cilcii, fa^tCH, fltcfcn, i^infeit, jogcH, !(ettcrn,frtc(^cit, lanbcn, laufcn, quetten, reifcn, rcitcn, rtnncn, fcQCln, fc^tffcn, ft^totmmcn, f^rtngCn, ftO^Cn, trcibcn, toanbCrn, when not indicating a motion to or from a particular place, have l^atlCll as the auxiliary : (Sr l^at i)iel gercift, He has traveled much. Rem. 2. (Scin, tiJCrbcn, and Hci^Cll take fctlt as the auxiliary: ©r ift in S3erlin gCtoCfCll^ He has been in Berlin, (Sr ift Saufmann getoorbctt^ He has become a merchant. 3. 6^iJA(gr Intransitive Verbs take l^aBcn as auxiliary: 1. Those governing an indirect object in the geni- tive or dative case : 2Btr l^attcn i^m gef)otfen, We had helped him. Me l^attcn fetner (gitelfeit geta(^t, All had laughed at his vanity. 2. Those expressing absolute rest: €v Tjat jetjr lange gefianbcn, He has been standing very long. § 136.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 301 Rem. 3. Some verbs, with two or more significations, take ^aBCtl or fcin^ according to the signification with which they may be used : ©r mar toon bcr >8tabt fortgefa^ren, He had driven out of the city. (Sr IjattC fortgcfa^rcn im Scfen, He had continued to read. 3. SScrbcn is used in forming the future tenses of the active voice, and in forming the passive voice. § 136. The verb ^abcil, to have, is conjugated thus: Principal Parts: ^ab'=cn, ]^at'=tC, gc^^abt^ INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.* Present Tense. l^ ftab=C, I have. id; ^ab=e, I have. bu ^ttft, thou hast. bu ^ab^eft, thou hast. cr I)Ot, he has. cr ^ab^e, he has. toir ^ ab *cn, we have. toir i^ah'- en, we have. i^r ^ab*(c)t,you have. i^r ^ab^et, you have. fie ^ab*en, they have. fie ^ab*en, they have. Imperfect Tense. Ic^ W'itf I had. ic^ muitr I had. bu iiat'- teft, thou hadst bu ^at^teft, thou hadst. er ^at*te, he had. cr t>dt'^te, he had. wir ^ at* ten, we had. toir ^ at* ten, we had. i^r ^at^tct, you had. i^r ^cit* tet, you had. fic ^ a t * ten, they had. flc ^dt*ten, they had. Perfect Tense. I have had, etc. I have had, etc. t(^ ftab=c flc^iabt \ii !^ab=e gc^abt bu Iiaft ge^abt. bu ^ab^eft gcM-^t* cr i^^t gebabt. ^ cr ita^'t 5 c ^ a b t. toir ^ a b * en g c ^ a b t. toir ^ab*en gc^abt. i^r ^ab««t gc^abt. tbr ^ab*et g c ^ a b t. fte ^ab*en gebabt. fie ^ab^cn gc^bt. Plvpetfei zt Tense. I had had, etc. I had had, etc. \^ Hi'it ge^aftt t(^ W'-it getiaat bu bat»teft gel^abt. bu ^at^tcft gebabt. cr ^at = te ge(>abt. cr Mt*te gebabt. toir Mt*ten gebabt. toir ^5t*ten gebabt. i^r ^at-tet gebabt. i^r Ht*tet gebabt. fie bat*ten gebabt. fie Ht^'ten gebabt. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 302 THE VERB. [§ 136. I shall have, etc. t^ tocrb=c l^akn* bu toirft ^aben. er iDtri) I; a ben. h)tr tt>erb*en ^aben. t^r iverb^ct ^aben. fie tt)erb = en ^aben. FtVs^ Future Tense. I shall have, eerb*cn ge^abt ^aktt« id; toiirb=c bu iDiirb^cft ^aben, er toitrb^c ^aben, njir tt) il r b = en ^ a b e n , i^r tuiirb^ct ^abeu, fie Voiirb^eu ^abeu, i^ toiirb=c bu tD it r b ^ eft g e ^ a b t l^akn, er iriirb^e gel;abt l^aticn, n?ir tt)ilrb^en ge^abt iaben, i^r njurb==et ge^abt I)abeu, ftc njilrb^en gel;abt ^aticn, CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should have, etc. leaden, or ic^ :^at=te (Imperf. Subjunc.) " bu ^dt=teft " er ^at-te " h)ir Ht^ten *'i^r ^at-tCt " fie ^cit^teil Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have had, etc. OcI)afit t}aUn, or id? Ijot^te gci^afit (Piup.Suhj.) ' bu ^(it^teft ge^abt ' er ^cit^te ge^abt ' tDir ^cit^tcn ge^abt ' i^r ^cit^tct ge^abt ' fic iat^ttn ge^abt IMPERATIVE MOOD. f^aht (bu), have thou. i^ah't (er), let him have. I^afi^en h)ir, let us go. i^ahtt X^X, have (you). ]^atl=en fie, let them have. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. 5afi=en, to have. i Per/, ge^ttfit ](iakn, to have had. Participles. Pres. l^atl^Cnb, having. | Per/, gcl^ttbt, had. JRein. ^a6cn, Gothic hahan, is allied to the Latin habere (to have), from which are derived the Spanish haber. Port, haver, Ital. avere, French avoir. § 137.J AUXILIARY VERBS. 303 §137. The verb feilt, to Jefen *' fte tucir^en gcttjefen IMPEEATIVE fei (bu), be thou. fet er, let him be. MOOD. fet=en h)ir, let us be. fei=et i6r, be you. fet=en fic, let them be. Pres. fein, to be. Pre9. fei=enb, being. mFINlTlVE MOOD. I Perf getoefen fetn, to have been, PARTICIPLES. I Perf getoefen, been. p^m. The different parts of fetn are to be traced to three roots: 1. S5tn; llift (and Engl, be, been), are probably related to banen, to build. 2. @ein, fet, feib, ftnb, and tft (with Engl, are, art, is) are from a verb- al root that is now only found in Sanscrit as and Latin esse (to be). 3. ©etiiefen, ttJUt, tO'iXt (and Engl. was, were), are from an obsolete vei-b, in Sanscrit was (to reside), in Gothic vivian (to remain, to be), Old-Ger. wesan, Mid.-Ger. wesen. The former present participle wesend is now only used in the adjectives dnttJefenb/ (I^tOefenb« § 138.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 305 § 138. Conjugation of tDtxhtrtfto become: Principal Parts: tocrb'=cn, tourb'=c (toarb), gc=toorb'=cn* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. \6f tDtthstf I become. bu loitft, thou becomest. cr toitb^ he becomes, tpir tDcrb^cn, we become, i^r tt)erb*et, you become. fte trcrb^cn^ they become. ic^ tOtth'tf I become, bu tt> e r b * eft, thou becomest. cr n>crb*C, he becomes, hjir tt> e r b * cn, we become, tbr tt)crb*Ct, you become, fie t»crb*cn, they become. Impeifect Tense. tc^ tOlirb=C/ I became, bu to u r b =^ eft, thou becamest. cr W u r b = C, he became. tt)ir tr>urb = cn, we became, i^r t»urb*Ct, you became, fie tD u r b = en, they became. Perfect Tense. I have become, etc. i(^ bin gettiorbcn or njorbcn, bu bift getrorben " n?orbcn, cr ift geworbcu " ttjorben. toir ftnb getDorbeu "ttjorben. t^r fcib gett)orbeu"tt)orbcn. fic ftnb gettjorben " tDorbeu. id; iDUrb-e, I became, bu tDlirb^eft, thou becamest. cr tDlirb^e/ he became. tt>ir triirb^eit, we became, i^r tt)ilrb>et, you became, jte toiirb*en, they became. I have become, etc. tdd fei o^^i^i^^^it ortoorbeui bu fciscft gctt)orbcn " ttjorben. er fei getvorbcn " tDorben. tDtr jciscn gc\Dorbcn " tt)orben. i^r fei*et getuorben " h)orben. fte fei^ctt gctDorbcn" ttjorben. Pluperfect Tense. I had become, etc. \^ tear 8Cioorbenorti)orben» bu toarft genjorben " morbcn. cr ttjar gen?orbcn " trorben. »ir toax'tVL genjorben " trorben. ibr tt)ar = t gcroorbeu " tuorben. fie tt)ar«en getDorben " tDorben. I shall become, etc. i^ tDcrb=e tterben. bu ttjirft tr^erben. er toirb njcrben. XQxx tt)erb*eiltucrben. ibr toerb*et tnerbcn. fte tt) c r b * en tp e r b e n. I had become, etc. \6) ttar=e getoorbcn or toorbcn* bu ft) d r * eft getDorbeu " trorben. er tudr^e gctt?orben " toorbeu. hjirti) d r * en getporben " ttjorben. ibr n) d r * et gcnjorbeu " tuorbcn. fie xoAx'tn geworben *' toorbcn. First Future Tense. I shall become, etc. it^ toerb^e toerben* bu njerb^eft h?erben. cr tDcrb^e tt>erbeu. tcir n? c r b * en to e r b e n. i^r tt)crb*et tDcrbcu. fie tt)erb*en tt>erben. * In the singular of the Imperfect Indicative the forms i(^ ttiarb, \SXi tDCrbft, er tontb are sometimes employed. 306 THE VERB. [§ 138. Second Future Tense. I shall have become, etc x^ toert)=e gcttorbcn fein. bu iDirft g e tx) r b e n \tm* er ttirb g e n? o r b e n f cin* tt)ir toerb^Ctt gemorben fcin* t^r to tvh^tt getcorben f citi* fie ttjerb^cn getuorben fcin* I shall have become, etc. i^ mth't Qtmxhtn fcin» bu ttjerb^cft g etc or ben fctn* er tt)erb*c getuorben \t\n* tt)irtt)erb^C« getDorben f ciii, t^rtr)erb==ct getDorben \tm* fie t»erb = cn getoorben feitt. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should become, etc. x6) ti)itrb=e mttitn bu tt?ilrb*cft t»erbeu er miirb^c werben tDirtx)ilrb^cn merben i^r tt)iirb = ct tuerben fie toiirb^Ctt tcerbcn tOiitbsC (Imperf. Subjunctive^ ft) it r b = eft I would. or tc^ " bu " er tDitrb^c " U3ir tDiirb^cn " if)r iDiirb^ct "fie tt)ilrb = cn Perfect Tense. or I should have had, etc. x6) toiirb=e gcttorbcn fcin bu tDiirb^cft gemorbeu fcin cr iDitrb^c gett^orbeu fcin toir n)itrb*cn gemorbcu fcin i()r wilrb^ct gem orb eu fcin fie njitrb^cn gett>orbeu fcin IMPERATIVE MOOD. i^ ti)ar=c gcttjcrbcn (Pi. Sub.) bu toar«=eft gemorben " " er njcir^c gemorbeu " " tt)tr tocir^cn g eh) orb en " *' i^r hjcir^ct gett)orbeu " " fie njcir^cn gehjorben " " tOCrbsC (bu), become thou, to e r b = C (er), let him become. lOCrbsCn hJtr, let us become. t» e r b = Ct i^r, become you. to e r b == cn fie, let them become. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. ti)Crb?Cn, to become. [ Per/. gCttJOtbCn fCin,to have become. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ttJCrbsCnb, becoming. ] Per/. gC=tt)Orb'Cn, become. Rem. 2BctbCn (Middle-German werden, to take a direction) is allied to the Latin vertere (to turn). §iiiy, 14U.] REGULAR VERBS. 307 3. REGULAR VERBS. (Bcitiodrtcr htt fdimadjcn tonjugationO § 139. Under Regular Verbs (termed by German gram- marians verbs of the Weak Oo?iJugation) are included: 1. All derivative verbs^ as: tt>drmen, {)dmmern, pfliigen, Icgcn, fe^en, flellen, trdnfen. 2. A few primitive verbs, as : fagen, retten, fud)en. 3. Foreign verls (except pfeifen, preifen, fd)reikn)* Rem. 1 . Most regular verbs are transitive. Rem. 2. Regular verbs never take the umlaut, nor do they change the radi- cal vowel in inflection. irarm'en, to warm ( from tcarm). ftctt*en, ^ammer*n, to hammer ( " §ammcr). tran^cn, bab^cn, to bathe ( " 93ab). fag^en, ^>ftilg*cn, to plough ( " ^flug). rctt^cn, ICiV-en, to lay ( " licgen). ftubir'^en, fe^cn, to set ( ♦' fifecn). taftei'*en, to place (from jle^en). to water ( *' trinfen). to say (primitive), to save ( " ). to study (from Latin), to chastise ( " " ). § 140. Conjugation of the Regular Verb Ikhcn, to love Principal Parts: lic^^cn, Ucb =tc, gC^licbt^ INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. i6) Uc6=C, I love, bu I i c b * ft, thou lovest. er Iieb*t, he loves, teir Iieb*cn, we love. i^>c Iicb = t, you love, fie Iicb*cn, they love. id^ lith't, I love, bu 1 1 C b * eft, thou lovest. cr ttcb*C, he loves. tDtr Iteb^cn, we love, i^r Hcb^ct, you love, fie U c b * CH, they love. Imperfect Tense. id? Ixthtt^ I loved, bu I i e b = tcft, thou lovedst. et Iteb*te, he loved, trit licb^tcn, we loved, i^r Iteb=»tCt, you loved. flc I i C b * ten, they loved. id? Iieb=te, I loved. bu H e b * tCft, thou lovedst. er lieb'te, he loved. "mix I i e b * ten, we loved, i^r lie b^tet, you loved, fie tieb^tCn, they loved. 308 THE VERB. [§ 140. I have loved, etc. bu ^aft geticbt. er i^at geHcbt. t»tr M'&^cn gcItcBt. t^r ^abst gelicbt. fie ^ab^cn gelicbt I had loved, etc. bu ^at==tcft geliebt. tx i)ot'tt geliebt n)tr i^aX'ttn geliebt i^r i)at'ttt geliebt fie i)at'itn gelicbt I shall love, etc. id) mxh't IteiCtt* bu toirft liebcn. er totrb liebcn. tt)ir tDcrb^^cn liebcn. i^r tDcrb^ct liebcn. ftc tocrb^cn liebcn. Perfect Tense. I have loved, etc. ic^ \}aht QClicfit bu ^ab^cft geliebt er i}ah't gelicbt tt»ir ^ab* en geliebt i^r ^absct gelicbt fte ^ab^cn geliebt Pluperfect Tense. I had loved, etc. x^ W'tt gclicfit bu ^at^tcft gelicbt er i) at 'it geliebt tcir ^at'itn geliebt i^r i^at'tti gelicbt. fie ^cit^tcn gelicbt First Future Tense. I shall love, etc. i^ tticrb=e Utbtn* bu njcrb^eft liebcn. er tDcrb^e liebcn. irir ttjcrb^ctt liebcn. i^r Ujcrb^ct lieben. fie totxh'tn liebcn. Second Future Tense. I shall have loved, etc. ic^ mth=t (itlitht f^abtn* bu ttjirft geliebt l^aben. er tuirb geliebt i^aUn^ h)ir ttjcrb^cn gelicbt iabtu* i^r tBcrb^et gelicbt i}aUn* fie tt)crb*cn geliebt l^abcn. I shall have loved, etc. ic^ mtht gelicbt i^aieiu bu tt)erb==eft geliebt ^aben. er tDcrb^e geliebt l^oben. hjir ivcrb^en gelicbt iabtn*^ i^r iucrb^et geliebt l^abeit. fie t» c r b ^ en g c I i e b t l^abett. tc^ toilrb=e bu ti?ilrb==eft lieben er tx)ilrb^e liebcn, t»ir tx)itrb*en lieben, i^r toiixh^tt liebcn, fie n>ilrb*en lieben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would, or I should love, etc. lieben, or ic^ lieb-te {Imperf Suhjunc.') bu lieb = teft er licb^te tuir lieb = ten i^r lieb'^tet fie lieb«=ten § 141.] REGULAR VERBS. 309 Perfect Tense. I would, or I should have loved, etc. OCIicH ^abcn, or id; \)iiAt oclicftt " bu Ht^tcft geliebt " cr ^at*tc geltcbt " njir ^at = tcn gcHcbt " i^r I;at*tCt gelicbt " fic ^dt^tcn gcHcbt bu trUrb^cft geliebt Iiabcn, er TOilrb^c gelicbt Ijabcn, roir tvilrb^cn gctiebt ^aben, i^r trilrb*ct geliebt babcn, fie wiirb^cn geliebt babcn, (^Pl.Subj.) IM1»ERATIVE MOOD. licbsC (bu), love thou. lith't er, let him love. licbsCn tt>ir, let us love. lith'tt i^x, love you. licbsCn fie, let them love. mFLNTTIVE MOOD. Pres, Iicb=Cn, to love. | Per/, gclicbt f^ahtU, to have loved, PARTICIPLES. Pres. licb'Cnb, loving. | Per/, gclicbt, loved. § 141. Table of endings of Regular Verbs: Present Tense. | Imperfect Tense. 1 Indie. Subj. Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. .en, .et, «en. 4e, *ete, At\i, .cteft, 4e, ^ete, 4en, ^eten, 4ct, ^etet, *tcn. *cten. At, -etc, '^efi, .etcfl, At, <% Atn, scten, *tet, *etet, *ten. *cten. 2 Pers. Sing. 3 Pers. Sing. 1 Pers. Plur. 2 Pers. Plur. 3 Pers. Plur. <% 'ft, -et, 4, *cn. *cn. .=en, .en, .et, A, «en.*en. In/init. *en, *n. || Pres. Part. *cnb, *nb. || Per/. Part, gc— Ct, gc— t. For the sake of euphony, or of the metre in poetry, the first C of terminations is frequently dropped. Rem. 1. It can never be dropped, however, when the stem of the verb ends in sb, iif or sgn (contracted from sQCll)* Rem. 2. The contraction always takes place in ctXi, 'tllb, when the stem ends in scl or sCt* (In the 1st Pers. Sing, of the Pres. Ind., and in the 2d Pers. Sing, of the Imperative, the C of the stem is dropped.) Rem. 3. When the stem ends with a vowel, sC from sCH is frequently dropped. Rem. 4. In sCft, the C is not dropped when the stem ends b, i, ^, ^, j, f(^» Rem. 5. The contraction rarely takes place in the subjunctive mood. 10 THE VERB. [§ 14ii, 14 lieb^eu, to love, tieb'-e, 'fl, ''t, 4e, geaeb4. fuc^^eu, to seek, ju(^*e, 4t, -t, 4c, geju(^4. reif^en, to travel, reif-e, .eft, 4, 4c, geret*ft. fifd;*en, to fish. »^e, .ejl, 4, 4c, gefijd;4. bab*en, to bathe. bab^e, .e[t, .et, .etc, gebab==et. leit^en, to lead. leit^c, -eft, =^et, .etc, geleit^et. fegn^en, to bless, fegn:=e, *eft, .et, .ete. gcfegu^ct. tabel.n, to blame, ta(bl).e, -fi, 't, 4c, getabeI4. tuonbcr^n , to wander, t»an(br) =e, 4t, 4, 4e, gen)anbcr4. 4. IRREGULAR VERBS. (Bcittobrtcr ber ftarfcn toniugattonO § 142 The Irregular Verbs (called by German gram- marians verbs of the Strong or Old Conjugation) are all native German verbs (except the verbs ^ifcifcil, !|Jrcifcn, and fl^ireibcn, which are derived from the Latin; 5^ geidpen.) 6. Irregular verbs < 3f the sixth class : «tc#cn, 90ftf gcgoffen. liigen. log, gelogett. 0cnte§en, gcnof. genoffen. trugen. trog, getrogen. flte§en, flo§, gefloffett. ^ftegen. ^flog. gepflogen. f*te§cn, f(*o^. gef(^offen. '^eben. ^ob, ge^obcn. f*ltc§en, f*lo§. gef^loffen. weben. tt)ob, gctt)oben. fprtc§en, iproi, gefproffen. fdboren, fdbor, gefcboren. serbrie^en, t»erbro§, perbroffen. gfi^ren, go^r, gegobren. flieben, flob, gefloben. ((^njfirett, fcbtDor, gefcboren. fdjieben, f*ob. gefc^oben. wdigen, toog, gcTOogctu §144.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 31 f*ntcbcn. fc^nob, gffdinoben. bewegcn, betoog. bcJDogen. flicbcn, flob, Qcflobcn. fcc^ten. fo*t, gefoc^tcn. btelen. hot, geboten. Pcc^tcn, fIod)t, gcfloc^ten. i!cbcn, fott, gefotten. mclfen. molf, gcmolfen. itcgcn, bog, gcbogen. fc^meljcn. fd)moIj, gefc^moljoi. flicflcn, flog, ficflogen. fc^weaen fc^woU, gcfc^teoflen. ttjicgcn, »og. gettjogcn. queUen, quoll' gequoUen. friccbcn, fro(^. gefroc^cn. f(^aUen, fc^on. gcfcfcoHcn. riccbcn, roc^. gcroc^en. faufen. foff, gefoffen. flic^cn, M, geflo^en. faugcn, fog, gefogcn. Jie^cn, iH' gejogen. {(^rauben, fd^rob, gcfc^roben. fricren, fror, gefroren. fc^ttoren. fc^ttor, gcfd)tt5oren. ttcrliercn, sjcrlor, Sjerloren. crlofc^cit. erIof(^, crlofc^cn. tricfen, troff. gctroffcn. (btngen. bung, gebungcn.) flimmen, flomm, geflommen. (fc^mben. fc^unb, gcfc^unbcn.) glimmcn, glomm, gcglommen. (i^e^en, jlanb, gcftanbcn.) kllcmmen, beflomm. bcflommen. (t^un, t^ot, fiction.) 7. Irregular verbs of the seventh class ,' habm, ffattt, gcl^abt* bringen^ bracl)te, 9cbra*t. foUcn, foflte. gefoOt. bcnfcn, bac^tc, gcbac^t. iDoflen, tooUtc, gcttollt. brcnncn, bronntc, gcbrannt. fonncn, fonntc. gefonnt. fenncn, fanntc, gcfannt mofltn, moc^te. gemoc^t nenncn, nanntc, gcnannt. burfcn, burftc, geburft. rcnncti. ranntc, gerannt. muff en, mu§tc, gemugt. fenbcn. fanbtc, gcfanbt. ©iff en, wuite. gettju^t. ttenbcn. tranbte, gettanbt. Rem. 1 . To avoid the necessity of multiplying the classes, the verbs font* men, bitten, Uegen, fitjcn, fein, ge^en, ^ei^en, blngcn, fd^inbcn, ge&cn, t^un, are placed under those of the above seven classes, where, by the analogy of vo- cal changes in forming the principal parts, they seem most appropriately to belong. Rem. 2. The simple verbs from which the compound verbs given in the above list (be^ginnen, be^fleigen, Bc*ncmmen, bc^tuegen, tmp'-\t{}k\\, er4LM;d)en, ge4ingen, gc^tDinnen, gc*baren, gc^nefcn, gc*fd;e^cn, ge*bei^en, gc^nie^en, \?er=» berben, bcr=gcffen,ber*brie^cn, "otxStxtn) are derived, are now either antiqua- ted, or provincial (as tDtnttCn), or are entirely obsolete (as O.-G. nesan). Rem. 3. Some of the irregular verbs are also used as regular in the whole conjugation (as labCH, brotCll) or in part of the conjugation (as brtttCH, gii^s ttn). Rem. 4. Many of the German verbs are allied to words in other branches of the Indo-European languages, as the Latin, Greek, and Sanscrit. Rem. T). For these and other features of the individual verbs, see the notes •o the following alphabetical list of irregular verbs: o 814 THE VERB. [§ 145. §145. Alphabetical List No.of\ Class. I Present Infinitive. 2d anddd Pers. Sing. of Present Indicat. Iriiperfect Indicative. 25acfen,^ to bake. 23efeBlen,^ to command. ^efleiien, to apply. 53e3iunen,^ to begin. 33ci§en, to bite. * 23enemmen, to press. * 53ergen,* to conceal. * 23eri1en, to burst. * Setuegen,* to induce. Stegen,'^ to bend, ^teten, to bid. ^inben, to bind. 33itten, to beg. Slafen,Uo blow, ©letben,^ to remain. 33Ietc^en,^ to fade. 33raten, to roast. 23rei^en,'° to break, ©rennen, to burn. Sringcn, to bring. * 2)cnfcn, to think. 3)ingen, to hire. 2)refc^en,^^ to thrash. X)rin3cn, to press. X)urfen, to be permitted. ©mpfcfjicn, to recommend ^ffen,^^ to eat. Sa^rcn, to ride. gaUcn, to fall. ^^angen,^*to catch, gec^ten, to fight, ^inben, to find. §Iec^ten,iUo braid. ^Ucgen, to fly. §liei)en, to flee. §Ue|en/« to flow. ^re[fen/Uo devour, t^neren/^ to freeze. ^dtjrctt/ to ferment, ©ebdrcn, to bear. ®eben, to give. ®ebei^en, to thrive. ®et)en, to go. ©elingen,^^ to succeed, ©elten, to be worth. ®enefen, to recover, ©enief en, to enjoy. ®efc()el)en,^^ tc happen, ©enjinncn,*" to win. ©icpcn,^^ to pour. . ®leid)cn,^^ to resemble. ®leiten," to glide. bdcffl, bdcft, .fie^Ill, =fte|It, \iwt giveii when formed regularly. '\ birgjl, btrgt' bldfejl, bldf(e)t *brdt|l, brcit, h-td)fl, bnd)t, brifd)ejl, brif^t (t(^ barf), barf jl, barf, ;ficf!ift, sftel)lt, fdljrfl, fdljrt, fduft, fdat, fdngiX fdngt, fic^t(e)il ftd)t, flic^t(e;fl,fli(^t(et), friffefl, fript. =Herejl, =btcrt, fiiebj^, Qtebt, m% Qtlt, gefc^ic^t. buJ, befall, beflip, be^ann, bt$, beflomm, barg, ba(o)rfl, betoog, bog, bot, banb, bat, bliea, blteb, blic^, * brtet, brac^, brannte, brac^te, bung, bra(o)fc^, brang, burfte, cmpfafjl, a^, ftel, ftng, foi^t, fanb, flod)t. gog, flob, floi frag, fror, * goftt, gebar, gab, gebte^, Sing, gelang, gait, gena^, 0eno§, 9efd)a^, gettjann, gitd), 8«tt, Imperfect Hubjunctive. befoile, bcfliffe, begd(or o)nnfc biffc, bctlcmmete, bdrgc, bd(b)rjle, bej»bge, bogc, bote, -bdnbe, bdte, blicfe, bliebe, bltc^e, briete, brdd)e, brennete, brddyte, tdci)tc, bitnge, brdcojfc^e, brdlitjnge, biirftc, cmpfdl)lc, d§e, fuljrc, ftcle, ft'nge, fodUe, fdnbe, fIod)te, floge, flo^e, flofl'e. frdpc, frore, goitre, gebdre, gdbe, gebie^e, atnge, gcldnge, gdlte, gendfe, genoffe, gef*d|)c. gewdnne. lioffe, gUd)e, glitte. * The asterisk indicates that the whole verb (or the § 145.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 315 of the Irregular Verbs. 1^ Imperative. Mood. I bacfe, bcvjtnnc, bctp, bctlemme, birij, biril, bctvc^c, bii'vj ih bietc), bin be, bittc, blaf(c). bleibvc), Hi'ii^c, jrat^e), ircnne, i»riiKj c), ttnU, bina, britta'c), {voantiivi), etin>fcljie^ i§' faf)r(c), faa c), fi*t, ftnb(c), fli*t,. flicq flii'b' c), trip, jricrre), gcbicr, flicb- 8ebci^(e;), flcbc, (irayiting), gilt, flcncfc, gcnicpie), {tpantiiiij), iU'.vi'.iuc, flleite. Perfect Participle. Remarks. f^ebarfcn. befo^len. bfflin'en. bev^Diincn. ijebiffen. bcflommen. geboriien. gcborjlcn. bejvoijcn. dcbovjen. ijcbotcn. gebunben. gebcten. gcblafcn. gcbliebcn. ijcbliibm. flebraten. gebroc^en. ijebrannt. vjebrvid)t. gebungen. 0ebrof(^cn. gebrungcn. geburft. empfoljlen. gcfat)ren. vjcfaflcn. ijefanijcn. flcfoittcn. gcfunbcn. vjcflodnen. vjcflov^n. geflobcn. gcfloi'i'cn. gefrei'fen. gefroren. gcqobrcn. geborcn. gegebcn. flcbicben. gcgangen. gelungen. flCijoltcn. gcncfcn. gcnoffcn. gefdjcbcn. gcrconncn. ijciipficn. gcglid)en. gelttten. Rem. 1. The following verbs in the sixth class, bicvjen, bictcn, fltcgcn, fliel)en, flicpcn, gcnicpcn, t^icpen, fricdjcn, liiiivA, f4)ltepcn, fpricpcn, tricfen, serbricpcn, ((ict)cn, formerly had parallel forms in cu in the 2d and 3d pers. sing, of the pres. ind., and in the imperative (as tu bcutfl, cr bcut; bcutj ; these forms are now only used in poetry. Rem. 2. Final c of the imperative of some verbs, as bics flrn, bictcn, blafcn, is dropped by some writers. Rem. 3. Some verbs (as bcrflcn, tircfd)cn, etc.) have two or more forms in the imperfect indicative or subjunctive. Remarks on the Individual Verba. * 23acfcn is also regular except in participle; it is allied to Gr. (pdyyEiVjio roast, and ha,tiu focus {a Jii'qjluce). ' First appeared in the 15th century; from Gothic lilhan, 3 From O.-G. kiuan, to yawn, open. [O.-G. felahan. * From bergcn are derived fccr ^crg, bic ^urg. ' Regular when meaning " to move from a place." * Allied to Sans, hhug, Gr. bow; ^u^t, bight (and the French bouger, English budge). ' Compare English blast, blaze. * Related to Gr. XEi-n-tiu, Lat. liiiqucre ; comp. Eng. leave. ' The derivative blcic^cn, to bleach, is regular. ° Allied to hat. frayigere, Gr. p/jyvvfu. ^ Sometimes used as regular, except in the participle. ^' M.-(}.ezzen,0.-(i.Uan, Ang.-Sax.ealten,* to hold, ^angcn, to hang. *-^aucn,^ to hew. ^ebeh,® to heave, lift. •|)eiRcn, to command. Iitlfcn,^ to help. * ilcifcn, to chide. ^"enncn,^ to know. * ^licben, ' to cleave. 5tlimmcn, to climb. JftUn^cn/" to sound. ^ommen, to come. Jlonncn,^^ to be able (can). 5lrtC£^en, to creep. :SaJ?cn/3 to load. :^affcn, to let. \!aufen/* to run. !Sicit>en, to suffer. Scil)en, to loan, l^cfen, to read. 2ieii|en/^to lie. *!Cofc^en,^* to extinguish. Sii^icn, to lie. * aJloI)Icn,^^ to grind. 9J?ciben, to avoid. *9;?elfen,^no milk. 5)?c[fen,'^ to measure, ^jioi^cn,^*" to be permitted, 2}?u[fen, to be obliged. SJJcIjmcrt,^' to take. 5fcnnen,^^ to name. 'i^JfcJfcu,^^ to whistle. * ''J^flegen, to cherish. 9)rcifcn,^^ to praise. i3ucUcn,'* to spring forth 9?atl)cn, to advise. D^eiben, to rub. 9tei§en,^^ to tear. 9teiten,'''^ to ride. 0tennen, to run. ^fiiec^cn,^'^ to smell. 9thigen,^^ to wrestle. Oiinncn,'''^ to run. Diufen, to call. ^nufcn,^" to sonk. * ©augen,^^ to suck. * ©d^affen,^^ to create. * ©c^ailen," to resound. 2d and 3d Pers. ISimj. Ivuperfect of Present Indicat. Indicative. Imperfect Subjtinctive. groibll groibt, m]X pit, ^dngfl, ^oingt, m% W% (t(^ fann), fannjl, fantt Idufjl, Iduft, Itefeft, Ue|l, Itfc^efl, lifc^t, tniHcft, miliii, miffeji, mi^t, (i(^ mag), magj^, mag, (ic^ muB>, mu§t, mu^, ntmmfl, nimmt, quiUfl, quiOt, tdtiyftf tdtl), fauffl, faiift, glomm, grub, Jjattc, l)tclt, Mng, l)ieb, m, fanntc, flob, flomm, Hang, fnift, fntpp, fam, !onnte, frod), lub,* HcB, lief, Iitt, Ite^, la^, log, mieb, molf, ma^, mod)te, mu§te, nahm, nanntc, Pflog, priest, quott^ tictf), riebf rt§, rttt, rannte, roc^, rang, rann, rtef, foff, fog, r*uf, f(^oU, glommc, gritbe, gegrtffen, i)dtte, l)iclte, ^tnge, ^icbe, ^obe, ^dlfc, fennete, flobe, flommc, flange, fniffe, fntppe, fame, fonntc, frod^e, liibe, Itc§e, liefc, litte, lie^e, Idfe, Idge, lofc^e, Ibge, ma()tcti^ mtebe, molfe, md§e, mbd)te, mu§te, naljmer nenneter pfloge, priefe, rictlje, riebe, rtffe, ritte, renncte, roc^e, range, rd(o)ttnP rtefe, foffe, fbge, fitiifc, fc^oUc, § 145.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 317 Irregular Ver bs (continued ). iinp^'ratii Mood. Firfect Participle. Jiemarks. flUmme, firabe, ftabe, ^aiivj e ', i)ci\i c », beb c), fennc, fliebvO, flimme, nin^e, Inciter fneipc, fomm(c), {wanting), !rte(^(.c), lat{t), lauf(c), umt)> m, luge, mcib(e), milf, mt§, (u/anting) nimm, nrnner prciUc), quia, tatht, rcib e), rctBvO, reit c^, rrnne, xitd^.e), xinit), tinn(c), ruf(c), faufiO, faua c), fd)aUc, gc^lommcn. ^cvjrabcn. vjcvjrin'en. gcf^abt. gc^altcn. kjeljaucn. ^ebobcn. ^ebolfen. flcfitfcn. ^efomit. flcflobcn. ^eflommen. lU'flun^cn. vjefniffcn. ijefnippen. ^cfommen. gefonnt ^efroc^ctt. gelaben. flelaffcn. gelaufen. dcUtten. gclic^en. gelcfcn. flelcacn. gcbfc^en. gelogcn. gemal)len. gemieben. gemolfen. flcmcn'en. gemo^t. gcmu§t. Ofnonttnctt flcnannt. flfpflo^en. gepricicn. gcquoUrn. qttattftn, gcricbcn. geriffcn. gcritten. * geronnt. gcroc^cn. gcrungcn. geronncn. gerufcn. gcfoffen. gcfogcn. gcfd^affen. gcfc^oUen. glish (/lad {smooth^ brig/U) and glade, opening in th6 woods. ' The provincial glum, gluntig, Eng. gloom, gloomy, glum (and Anglo-Saxon gl6m, twilight), a.Te from the same root as glimmen, to glimmer. 'Allied to Gr. yf)d(pttv, to vurite ; from graben are de- rived ^aiiSxab, grave; tev&raben, ditch; iiei!9rubc,pit. ' llenco bie ^abe, posseasion ; bet ^aUnt haven ; l)anbljabcn * From ^alteu is the interjection ^alt! halt! stop! [is reg. * Hence bie ^ade, hoe ; bai ^cii, hay ; bet ^icb, blow. * Hence btx ^cbcl, lever ; fcer ^MbtX, plan^. '' Hence ^lifcrdJjclfcr ; bic^ilfc, l)ilf[o&, befiolfen, etc. 8 Allied to hai. garni; Gr. yiwav. 9 Mostly provincial. From fUeben are derived bet $t\o* bm, pulley; bic ^Xuit, cUft ; bit ^\wv^t,in7icers. '" Allied to, if not der. from Lat. clamjere (Gr. KXuyy^iv). '• ^neifen has come into the High-German from the Up* per-German, Cncipcit from the Lower-German dialects. 1' Allied to fcimeu. From the same root are funb, bie ^unfi, fcoS ^inb, bcr Siom^, »' £aben, to itivite, is regular, is from a different root, and '♦ Compare English leap, lope. [is allied to Gr. KaXiiv. »* Hence Ugcn, to lay ; bie it age, site ; bad i'ager, the camp. '* Now used mostly in compounds. 1^ SRatilen is regular except in the participle. The im- perf. is reg. in the N.-G. The irreg. form mu()l (from M.-G. muol) is now only provincial. *" Now generally regular. From the same root are bie IBtildf, milk, and tie SRoKe, whey. '' Hence baft Vtaft, measure. !l}?effen is allied to Sans. md ; Gr. fitTpov ; Lat. metrum (meter), from metire (to measure) ; also to Lat. modus. Compare English mete. «« From moaen are mo^MA^, possible ; bie ^SUdd^t, mig/d. '^ 92cbnten and nennen are from the same ultimate root as btt 9iame, 7iame (allied to Lat. nomen ; Gr. ovofia ; Slav, imja ; Sans, ndman). " Not found before Mid.-Ger. j derived from Latin pi- pare {to peep [said of birds], in Low Latin to whistle). " From Low Latin, prcciare (from It&im pretium, price). '* ©inquctten is regular. " Hence btv Wcii, charm; ber 9?if|, rent; bit Wxi^e, rift. '* Sereiten, to ride ovei; is regular (not to be confounded with bcreitcit, to prepare — from bereit, ready). »^ From ried)cn come ter iSctudf, odor; ber ^aud), mioke. •* From ber Wing; it signifies also to wring (clothes). *' As of fluids. Hence rennen, to run; bie 9Iinne, gutter. '" Hence bie (Suppe, soup; compare English sop. '^ Allied to Latin sugere {to f:urk) and succrn (juice). " With other significations, fitaffcn is regular. From it is derived fd)bpfcti, to create ; compare English shape. " Hence bie 5Ue, c^tt)(tntni/ c^tt>dmme, d)tt)aub, fd)tt)dnbc. d)iDang, f*U-»dnge. d)n?0(,u)r, fd)n)o(u'irif tai \m toar, todre, fanbte, fenbt'te. fctt, fotte, fang, ange, anF, ann, jdnfc, dnne, aP, fci^e, mt, foUte, pie, ptee, pann, pdnnc, mr pKff^, \m^> prdc^e, fprof, fprbffe, fprang, fprdnge, ^a6:i, jldc^e, jlaf, n«fe, flanb f!dnbc, m^> fiddle, ilteg, fliege, jlarb, f^urbe, jlob, flobe, ftan!, |!dnfe, W% flte^e, flrid), fh-t(^c, 5. 5. 1. 6. 6. 6. 6. 4. 3. 5. 5. 5. 1. 5. 6. 5. 6. 6. 1. 5. 5. 5. 6. 5. 6. 1. 1. 1. 6. 2. 2. 7. 6. 1. 1. 1. 2. 7. 5. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 1. 1. 6. 1. 5. 1. 6. 1. 4. ©c^etben/ to separate. ©d^etnen, to appear. ©d)elten, to scold, ©c^cren,^ to shear. ©d>itbcn,^ to shove. (Sd)ie§eu, to shoot, ©c^luben,* to flay. ©d)Iafen, to sleep. <3d)(a3en,^ to strike. eit>c, jd)dne, fcbilt, fd)icr, i*tcb e), d)icp(e)- cbinl) e), *laf(e), fcblai^ t), fit>li-id»(c), j*ldp c), fdJlu•i^(c), |*mcb,e) f*raub e), fcbreib,c), {d)rci, |*rcit c V * fdJirare, fdJivill, fcbirimme, jcbtvint'vC fcbiiMiujc, fcnbc, fieb(e), ilnn c), {wanting), fpeie, finnnc, (pri*, tpricp e), m*, ftccff, rtcbf, mcbl, ftcrbcie), llicbi c ', fimf c), \\m c I, ^cfc^icben. c|cf*icnen. gt'l'cborcn. gefcbobcn. 3cid)o[[en. ^cfdmnt»cn. ijcfcblafcn. ^efcbla^cn. !lJcfd^lid)en. j ^cid>lin en. ;^cfd)ltncn. !9cid>liin0en. ^cfd>mi[]en. I^eidniioljen. ijcfd)nittcn. i^efdjnobcn. vjeidn-oben. i^cid)rocfen. Igcfdwben. U3cfd)rifcn. IgcfArittcn. ijff*n?orcn. I^cid)irit\jcn. i^cfd>tvomracn ;3cfd>n?uni3cn. ;9iid)n)oren. igcfctjcn. gcrocicn. gcfanbt. gcfotten. ^efun^cn. ijefunfen. flefonncn. gcfcfi'en. tjefoUt. jacfpicen. I^ciponncn. iflilpliffcn. ijciprc*cn. gefproffen. ^efprun^cn. ^e|1o*en. flcilocfcn. geflanben. ^cfloblcn. giMliccien. ^cflorbcn. geflobcn. gcilunfcn. i^cflppcn. |de|lrid)cn. * Regular as an active verb; allied to Latin 8ci{n)do, Gr. o-xt^ttf. From fcbeiben is derived bet <2ittfeiUl, top of the head (where the hair is parted). ' From fd)Crcn are bie <2idjaav, division^ troop; bic in(^c, winnow. '^ Hence bcr (Zdjtour, oath. »' Hence bic (Zidft, sight ; bad ©cf!(^t, /ace. '» See§138ifc/n. *^ Hence I'ci^cn, to set; bcr ®cffcl, chair; bet ®ilj, seat; bcr « Regular when transitive; regular or irregular when intransitive. '^ Hence bcr ©tanb, condition; bie ©tunbc, hour ; bie Statt, stead; bic ©tabt, city; bcr (gtabcl (StaU , stable; bcr (StoUcn, supjxn't ; bcr (£tuhl, c//air; ftiii^cn, to mpport ; flcUcn, to place; flat, .sfearf//; flctd, con«/fcn,» to grow. 2Baaen, to weigh. 2Baf^en,^ to wash. * SBeben, to weave. 2Betd)en,^Ho yield. 2Beifen," to show. *2Benben,^^ to turn. 2Berben, to sue for. ^erten,'^ to become. 2Berfen, to throw. SBiegen, to weigh. SBinben, to wind. 2Btffen,^* to know. ^oUen, to be willing. 3cif)cn, to accuse. 3te^en,'Ho draw. Swtngen,^* to force. 2d and M Pers. Sing. Imperfect Imperfect of Present Indicat. Indicative. Subjunctive. trdgfl, trcigt, trirff^, trtfft, trittjl tritt, sbitbfl, sMrbt, todf^efl, todf(|t, luirbjl, Wirbt, tt)ir|l, h)irb, toirfll, toirft, (t(^ wei§), wei^t, tt)ci§ (ic^ wiU), h)iU)l will, ftritt, tijot, trua, traf, trieb, tr at, troff, tranf, trog, oer&orb, e^ »crbro^ »erga§, ijerlor, tt>og, tooht toid), wanbte, iDavb, tt)urbe (or n>arb), tt)arf, tt)og, tranb, tt)u^te, woUte, m> Strang, [h-itte, ti)att, triiae, trdfe, triebc, trdte, troffc, trdnfe, troge, ocrburbe^ ed ijerbroffc, sergd^c, seriore, KDoge, toijbe, t»ic^e, wiefe, wenbetc, toiirbe, tt)iirbe, toiirfe, woge, JDditbe, iDottte, ioge, jhjdnge, § 146. Table of endings of Irregular Verbs. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. '^" Indie. Subj. Imperat. Indicative. Subjunctive. 1 Pers. Sing. 2 Pers. Sing. 3 Pers. Sing. 1 Pers. Plur. 2 Pers. Plur. 3 Pers. Plur. .et, 4, ^ct, 4, .cfi, =»cn, *cn, =cn, *cn, *cn, *cn. - -tc, - -tc, ^cn, 4cn, 4, 4ct, *cn, *tcn, ^e, 4c, .fl, 4cjl, ^ct, 4c, ?cn, 4cn, .et, 4ct, *cn, 4cn. Tnfinit. *cn, *n. Pres. Part. =cnb,*nb. || Perf. Part. QC— cn, gc— t. i^em. 1. The C is dropped from the terminations sCft, and sCt of the second and third person singular of the present indicative, when the radical vowel is changed (e to i or \t; or a to a) : t(fi f^te^C, titt f^JtiC^ft, tX \^tx6iU § 146.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 821 Irregular Verbs (continued). Imperative Perfect Mood. Participle. flTCit(Cj, ^fllrittcn. tt)U(« gctljan. trance), trifT» getra^cn. getroTtcn. trcib.e), flctricben. tritt, getreten. Vinf e), getroffen. getrunfen. tru^e, getrogen. oetbirb, Dcrborben. (obmlete), * serbroff en »erai§, ©CTiierc, ftergeffen. ^erlorcn. »a*fr, gewac^fen. gcwc^en. gewQId^cn. tDcbe, * gewoben. wei£^(c), gett)ict)en. toeife, getDicjen. tt>cnbc, gewanbt. toirb, geworben. tocrbe, geworben. ttlrf, gelDorfcn. toieac, totnbe, gcwogcn. gewunben. »»if[c, ge»u§t. »oUe, gewoUt. jeilie. gejicljcn. iwtngc, gcjogcn. gejtDungcn. Remarks. ^ Hence bie Ztfat, deed; bet liyaUv, doer; tffixtie, active; tl)unUdf, feasible. In many dialects t^un is used as auxilia- ry, as in English : &x tfjat nid)t f omtncn, ?i€ did not come. ' Hence bic Ztadyt, costume, and ta^ ©cttcibc, grain. The derivative verbs bcantragcn, and bcauftvagcn (from bcr 3lntrag and bcr 5luftrag; are regular. 3 Hence bi< Zroufc, trough ; bcr Xro^fcn^ drop, \drunken. * Hence bcr Srant, drink ; crtrinCcn, to drown ; bctruntctw * The simple verb bcrbcti is yet used in theBavar. dialect. * Compare the English verb get. ' The original S of »erlicren ( Goth. /raZiwsan; O.-G./ar- liosan; M.-G. veiiiesen ; N.-G. verliei-en) appears in the adjective loi, loose; and the noun bcr 3$erlufl, loss. ^ Compare the English verb to wax (and wane). ' Hence bic SBdfc^c, washing. '° Hence toctd), weak (whence tocic^cn [reg.], to soften), '* From the adjective toctfc^ wise. ' ' Hence bic SBanb, wall ; bad @cn>anb, raiment ; qttoanbtf dezteroits; bic £cinn>anb, linen; bic 9Binbc, windlass; iDcnben, to turn ; toatittvn, to wander; bic SBunbc, wound. " Allied to Latin i;« Hence bcr 3toang, violence; bcr 3n)tngcr, cage (for ani- (Endings of Irregular Verbs — continued). Exc. The C is usually retained in it\i, when the radical syllable ends in sg, 4f «ff/ A^, =5 : as t(^ Ic[c, bu licfcft, cr licft Rem. 2. The full forms sCft and =Ct must be used in the indicative when tha Item ends in b orU With other verbs also the full forms are often used. Rem. 3. The t is dropped from the imperative of all verbs that in that mood change the radical vowel C to i or Ci : inf. ttCl^ntCn ; imp. ntOtin* Rem. 4. Some of the best German grammarians prefer that the final st should always be dropped from the imperative of many verbs that do not change the radical vowel. But the general usage is in favor of its retention, though it is often dropped in poetry. Rem. 5. The C of =cn and =cnb can only be dropped when these endings follow a vowel or a silent ^ : UCtftC^n, gCfe^n* 02 822 THE VERB. [§ 147. § 147. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb fil^Iagcn, to strike (having l^aficit for its auxiliary) : Principal Parts: f (^Iag=cn, f ^lug, gc=ft^Iag=cn» INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. \6) fC^Iagse, I strike, bu ((^liigsft, thou strikest. er f^Iiigst, he strikes. XOXX f (^ I a g ^ en, we strike, il^r fc^tag^t, you strike, fie j (^ I a g * en, they strike. id) W^ptf I strike.* bu i (^ I a g * eft, thou strikest. cr id;Iag*c, he strikes. XOXX fd^tag^cn, we strike, i^r fc^tag^ct, you strike, fie fc^tag^en, they strike. Imperfect Tense. X^ f^Iug, I struck, bu ft^Iugsft/ thou struckest. er fC^Iug, he struck. XO\x j d) I u g = Cll, we struck. tf)V fc^Iug^t, you struck. fie f dj) I U g =< en, they struck. I have struck, etc. ic^ ^ob^e gefi^Iagen* bu l^aft gefc^tagen. cr ]^at gefdjUgeu. njtr ^ab^en gefc^Iageu. i^r ^ab^t gefd;(ageu. fic ^ab==en gefc^tagen. \6) fi^Iiigse, i struck. bu j d; I ii g ^ eft, thou struckest. er fcj)Iiig*e, he struck. Xoxx j (^ t it g = en, we struck, i^r jc^Iiig = et, you struck, fie j d^ I it g =^ en, they struck. Perfect Tense. I have struck, etc. x^ ^at)=e nefcilagcn* bu t) a b == eft g e f c^ t a g e u. cr ]^aB = e gefc^Iageu. XOXX ^ a b * en g e f c^ I a g e u. i^r i^id^^ti geid)lageu. fie ^ a b ^ en g e i (^ 1 g e n. Pluperfect Tense. I had struck, etc. \^ l^at^te gcfdjiatjen* bu ^at^tcft gefd;lagcn. er ^ a t * te g e f c^ I a g e u. ttJtr ^ at* ten gefd;tagen. t^r ^at*tet gefc()Iageu. fic ^at^ten gefd^Iagen. I shall strike, etc. \^ tijerb^e fi^Iagen* bu ttirft j^Ugeu. er ti)iri> f c^ I a g e u. tctr ti3 e r b * en f d? I a g e n. t^r iD e r b * et f c^ t a g e u. jtc tDcrb^enjc^Iagen. I had struck, etc. td^ W4t 9ef(^Iagen» bu ^cit^teft gefc^Iagen. er ^ a t * te g e f d; t a g e u. XOXX {)at*ten gefd;lageu. ibr ^cit^tet gefd^iagen. fie ^at=^ten gefd^Iagen. First Future Tense. I shall strike, etc. tc^ toerb^e f^Iagen* bu tr> e r b * eft f d; t a g e n. er trerb^e jd^Iagen. ir»tr n) e r b := en j c^ I a g e n. ibr tt>erb*ct jd^Ugcn. fie tuerb^en fc(>Iagetu * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 147.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 328 I shall have struck, etc. bu tuirft gefd^Iagen ^abcn, cr ©irb gefd;Iagen ^at)ClU Xoxx m e r b - en gefd;Iagcn ^akn. tbr 'a^crb-ct gejd?tagen ^ttbciu ftc tDcrb-cn gcfc^Iogcn ^abcm Second Future Tense. I shall have struck, etc. \^ tocrbsc flcfc^lagcn tiabcn. bu tD e r b ^ eft {jcfd^Iageii ^aben, er tuerb^e gefd;Iagcii ijabttt^ xoix ti) c r b * en gcfc^Iagcn ^aDcn* il;r tr)crb*ct gcfd^tageu l^aben* fie n)crb*cn gefc^Iagen ^abcn. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should strike, etc. i^ toiirb^e ftftlagcn, or bu tt)iirb*eft'fd;Iagen, " er tt>iirb*e fc^Iagen, " ttjir trilrb«en fd)Iageu, " ibr U)ilrb*et fd^Iageu, " fic n3ilrb*Ctt fci^lagen, " (Itnper/. Subj.). i^ ft^liig^e bu fd^Iiig.eft er fd;Iiig*e h)ir fc^Iitg^en ibr fd;tilg-et fie f^Iilg^Ctt Perfect Tense. I would or should have struck, etc. idf toiirb-e geft^Iagen baben, or id; I)at4e ocft^lofjcn (Pi. Sub bu wilrb^eft gefd;(agen ^aben, " bu b ci t * teft gcfc^Iageu cr tt)iirb*e gcfdjiagen bflben, *' er b^t^te gef^tagcu tDtr njiirb^en gefc^Iagen bnben, " trir ^ ci t * ten gcfc^Iagcn i^r njilrbset gefc^Iagen b^ben, " ibr ^dt*tet gefc^tageu fie tviirb^en gefc^Iagcn bflben, " fie ^ S t = ten gcfc^Iageu IMPERATIVE MOOD. ((blOQse (bu), strike thou. jc^lag-e er, let him strike. ftblflg^Cn ton, let us strike. f(bl08=et (i^r), strike you. ftftlagsen fte, let them strike. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. \^laptn, to strike. ^er/. gef^Iagen ^abcn, to havt struck. PAKTICIPLES. Pres. ft^IagsCnb, striking. | Per/, gefj^lttgen, struck. 324 THE VERB. [§ 148. § 148. Conjugation of the Irregular Verb fomiticn, te eome (having f ein for its auxiliary) : Principal Parts: lommcn, !am, gefommcn* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. t(^ fomm=C, I come, bu ! m m = ft, thou comest. er fomm = t, he comes. Xovc !otnm==cn, we come, i^r fomnt^t, you come, ^e ! m m ^ en, they come. x6) !0ttlTtt=C, I come.* bu f m m = eft, thou comest. er fonim = et, he comes. XOVC fomnt^en, we come, t^r !otntn==et, you come, fie fomm^en, they come. Imperfect Tense. ic^ !ttin, I came, bu fam^ft, thou camest. er fdttt, he came, totr ! a tn * en, we came. \i)X fam^t, you came, [ie fam*en, they came. I have come, etc. \^ Bin gefommen* bu t)tft i5e!ommen. cr ift gcfoutmeu. ^tr finb gefontmeu. i^r feib gefommen. fie finb gefommen. I had come, etc. \^ tear gefommen. bu njar=ft gefommen. cr tear gefommen. tt)tr toar=' en gefommen. i^r tr>ar^t gefommen. fie n?ar*en gefommen. ic^ !am=e, I came, bu f a m ^ eft, thou camesfc er fam==e, he came. XOVC fcim^en, we came, i^r fam = et, you came, fie f ci m = en, they came. Perfect Tense. I have come, etc. ic^ fei gefommen* bu fei^eft gefommen. er fei gefommen. ti?ir jet^en gefommen. i^r fei^et gefommen. fie fei^en gefommen. Pluperfect Tense. I had come, etc. i^ niar:=e gefommen. bu tuar^eft gefommen. er tr>ar^e gefommen. XOVC tr>Sr=»en gefommen. i^r Xo'dx^ti gefommen fte xoax^tvi gefommen First Future Tense. I shall come, etc. id^ mxt't fommen. bu totrft fommen. er toirb fommen. taxx to e r b * en fommen. tl^r toerb^et fommen. fie h) e r b * en f m m e n. I shall come, etc. \^ toerb^e fommen. bu iuerb^eft fommen. er tt>erb = e fommen. Xoxx tDerb^en fommen. i^r tx)erb = et fommen. fie n)erb==en fommen* * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 148.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 325 Second Future Tense. I ghall have come, etc. id} tocrb-c offommcn fcin* bu ttirft getcmmeu fcin, cr toirb gefommcn fcin, iDtr tvcrb^cn getommeu fcm» i^r tt>erb*ct gctommeu fcin* fic tDerb*cn getonimcn fcin» I shall have come, etc. tc^ mtt't (\ttomnmi Uin* bu tt)erb=^cft gefonmicu feiiu cr tt)erb*c getommeii fetn* ttJir h)crb*cn gctommeu feiit* il;r tverb^ct gcfcmmcn fcin, fie ttjerb*Ctt gctommeu fciiu bu tt)iirb*cft tommeu, er ttjilrb^c tommcu, toir ttJilrb*cu tommcu, t^r ttjiirb*ct tommcu, flc tcilrb^eil fommen. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should come, etc. fommen, or \6) i'dnUt {Imperf. Suhj.). bu tom^cft cr tcim^c h?xr tam^cn itjr tam*ct fic lam = Ctt Perfect Tense. I would or should have come, etc. t(^ toifrb^c gctommcn fctn, or bu tt?ilrb*cft gctommeu fctn, " cr tt)iirb*c gctommeu fcin, " totr tt>ilrb='Cn gctommeu fcin, " t^r tt)itrb*ct gctommeu fcin, *' fic tt>ilrb*cn gctommeu fcin, " id) to'dV't gefommcn (P/./S'ttft.) bu U3 a r * eft gctommeu " er h) S r # c gctommeu " toir tD S r s en gctommeu " t^r tt)ar*ct getommeu *' fic tt) a r ^ en gctommeu •* IMPERATIVE MOOD. fomm=e (bu), come thou. lomm^^e cr, let him come. f OmmsCn trir, let us come, f Omm^t (i^r), come you. f omm^Cn fie, let them come. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. f omm^en, to come. I Per/, gcf OmmCn fcin, to have ccma TAETICIPLES. Pres, loramsCnb, coming. | Per/. gefommCn, come. 326 THE VERB. [§149-151, 5. COMPOUND VERBS. (Bufammcngcfc^tc BtitttbrtcrO § 149. Compound Verbs are formed by iprefixmg prep- ositions, adverbs, nouns, or adjectives to simple verbs. They are either Separable or Inseparable. § 150. With Separable Compound Verbs: 1. The prefix takes the primary accent: ^ug'^ge^en, to go out. Sluf =gcben, to give up. 2. The prefix is separated from the verb, and is placed after the verb, and often at the end of the sentence, when the verb occurs in main sentences, and is in the present or imperfect tense of the indicative or subjunc- tive mood, or in the imperative mood : ©r nimmt bag S3u(^ att, He accepts the book. Sr noI)m bag 33uc^ an, He accepted the book. 9limm bag ^uc^ an! Accept the book ! 9la:^nt er to.% S3ud; an ? Did he accept the book? Rem. In the compound tenses, and in the simple tenses when occurring in subordinate sentences, the prefix is not separated from the verb : @r toirb bag 33ud; an'ncfimcn, He will accept the book. @()e er bag 33ud^ an'na^m, Before he accepted the book. 3. The p of the infinitive, and the prefix ge= of the perfect participle, adhere to the verb : Slnftatt bag 33ud; an'^nnc^mcn— Instead of accepting the book— (gr ^t bag 33uc^ an'QCnommcn, He has accepted the book. § 151. The Separable Prefixes are: 1. The particles aB, an, auf, kt, H (bar), m, cnHior, fort, gegen (entgcgen), ^cim, ^cr, ^in, mtt, na^, totcbcr, ob, JJOn, tocg, p, priid, pfammcn (together with the com- pound separable prefixes l^cretn, ]^erau0,oU/ full : flic^cn, to pour ; t>oU'gic{3en, to pour full. burd^'rcif en, to travel througl- il'berfe^en, to place over, um'geben, to go around, un'terbalten, to keep under. tr>ie'berbo(en, to get again. 328 THE VEKB. [§ 153. § 153. The Separable Comp. Verb att'nc^tticn, to accept Principal Parts: an'nel)men, anna^tti, arGcnommcn^ INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. I accept (it), etc. — accepted (it), e«c. id; nc^mc (eg) an*— ita^m (e§) an* bu nimmft „ cr nimmt ,, tt3irne(;men „ t^r ne^mt „ fie ne^men „ an*— nal;m[t an*— na^m an*— na^men an*— na^mt an*— na^men an* an* an* an* an* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Imperfect Tense. I accept (it), etc. — accepted (it), e^c. ic^ nc^ntc (e§) an*— naf)mc (e§) an* bu net;me[t er ne^me xoxx ne^men i{;r ne^met fie nc^men an*- an*- an*- an*- an*- -nci^meft -na^me -nci^men -na^tnet -nci^imen an. an* an* an* an« I have accepted (it), etc, \^ ^abc (cv^) angcnommcn* Perfect Tense. bu ^aft „ augeiiommen. bu ^abeft „ augenommen. er ^at „ angenommeu. er ^abe „ angenommeu tt)tr iiaben „ angenommeu Xoxx ^abeu „ angenommeu* i^r ^abt „ angenommeu. t^r l^abet „ angenommeu. flc ^aben „ angenommeu. fie ^abeu „ angenommeu* Pluperfect Tense. I had accepted (it), etc. \^ Wtt (eg) angcnommcn. I have accepted (it), etc. id) i^abc (eg) anrjenommcn^ I had accepted (it), etc. \^ Ijattc (eg) angcnommcn* bu ^atteft cr ^atte tt)ir fatten i^r ^attet fie fatten I shall accept (it), etc. \6) tijcrbc (eg) annci^ntctt* angenommeu. bu ^dtteft „ angenommeu, angenommeu. er l^citte „ angenommeu. angenommeu. hjir ()atteu „ augenommen. angenommeu. i^r ^attet „ angenommeu. angenommeu. fie fatten „ augenommen. First Future Tense. I shall accept (it), etc, \^ ttcrbe (eg) anncf)nicn> bu ttjerbeft „ anuef)meu. er ttjerbe „ auneWeu* loir toerben „ annebmeu. i^r ujerbet „ anne^meu. fte tuerben „ anne^meu* bu totrft „ anue^meu. er tt)irb „ anue^meu. toir tcerben „ anne^meu. i^r toerbet „ anne^meu. fie toerbeu „ anne^meu. Second Future Tense. I shall have accepted (it), etc. A^n toerbc (eg) angcnommcn i^aficn bu tt)trft „ angenommeu ^aben. cr toirb „ angenommeu ^abeu. Xoxx tcerbeu „ angenommeu i:fOibixi, tl^r tr^erbet „ augenommen ^abeu. fie toerbeu „ angenommeu i:jabtu. I shall have accepted (it), etc. x^ mxU (eg) angcnommen ^abcm bu ttjerbeft „ augenommen ^ahiix, cr trcrbe „ augenommen babeu. Xoxx UJcrbcu „ augenommen \:)Oihtn, i^r hjerbet „ angenommeu i^dltn. fie toerben „ augenommen ^aben. § 153, 154.] COMPOUND VERBS. 329 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should accept (it), etc. \^ loilrbc (es) annc^men, or id; iial)mc (e6) an {Imperfect Svbj.\ bu na(;meft „ an cr nci^mc „ an tuir na^mcn „ an i^r ncibmet „ an fte iici^mcu „ an Perfect Tense. I would or should have accepted (it), etc. \^ toiirbc (c^) angcnommcn ^aticn, or id; ^iittc (c«) anocnommcn(P/.-S'o bu n?iirbe[t „ amjeuommeu i;aben, " bu t;atteft „ angcuommen " " cr miirbe „ angenommen ^aben, " cr ^citte ,, angeuommeu " " toir trarben „ augeuommen ^abcn, " n)tr fatten „ angenommeu " " i^r tt)iirbct ,, angenommen ^abcn, " i^rt^cittet „ angenommen " " ftc TOiirbcn „ angenommen ^abcn, " fie i>dtten „ angenommen " " bu ttjilrbefl » annebmen, cr wilrbe II anne^men, toir ttjiirbcn II anne^men, i^r tt>ilrbet II anne^men, fic ttjilrben II anne(>men, mmm (bu) (c«) an, accept (it). BCl)mC er „ an, let him accept (it). IMPERATIVE MOOD. ncOmcn tinr (c«) an, let us accept (it). ncl)met H)r „ an, accept (it), [(it). ncl)mcn ftc „ an, let them accept INFINITR^E MOOD. Pres. (e6) anjnnc^mcn, to accept I Perf. (e8) anocnommcn ju ^aben, to (it). I have accepted (it). PARTICIPLES. Pres. (cS) annc^mcnb, accepting I Peif. (e§) an(JCnommCn, accepted (it). I (it). § 154. With Inseparable Compound Verbs: 1. The prima?^ accent falls upon the verb: 35cr4te^'*cn, to understand. Ueber*fc^'*en, to translate. Exc. With some verbs the prefix nti^ (§ 155, 7) is accented, as are all prefix nouns and adjectives except UoU« 2. The prefix is neoer separated from the verb. 3. The participial prefix gc= (§131) is not added. Exc. Compounds of nouns and adjectives (except tJOK) take QC^. 4. With the infinitive, JU precedes the verb, and is written separately. 330 THE VERB. [§ 154, 155. 5. The Inseparable Prefixes are : 1. The particles Jje=, ttlU (Cttl^J^), Cr^ QC^, m--, itX' (and rai^=), which are always inseparable. 2. The particles burt^, IttlCr, «m, UtttCt, and tolthttf when the primary accent falls upon the verb (§ 151, 3). 3. Some nouns and adjectives used as prefixes are inseparable (§ 151, 3). § 155. The Inseparable Particles be, ent (emp), er, ge, »er, jer, are obsolete prepositions. They are used as follows : 1. S3c= expresses a more intimate relation to the ob- ject than the preposition bet, from which it is derived: 53ei'*fil5*en, to sit near. S3e4i^'*en, to possess. 1. SCs forms transitive from many intransitive verbs: S3e*[i^'*en, to possess (from ft^ert, to sit). 2. Prefixed to transitive verbs, it changes the relation of the verb to its object : * S3aumC ^flanjen : eine ®tcGe To plant trees: to plant a place with mit 33aumen tJC^flanjcn, trees. 3. It is prefixed to some nouns and adjectives in forming verbs : S3e*gab'*en, to endow. S3e*frei'^en, to set free. 2. ©nt= (originally signifying against) usually denotes negation, contradiction, deprivation, or sejparation : ©nt^bccfen, to discover. (Sntsge^en, to escape, (gntstab'en, to unload. (Sltt-rei^'en, to snatch away. Bjem. 1. It forms verbs by being attached to some nouns and adjectives : (Snt^^aU^Jt'-en, to behead. (gnt=f(^urbi9==en, to excuse. Rem. 2. (^uU sometimes denotes origin : (gtttsfte^'en, to arise from. (&nt'\\>xm(\''tn, to spring from. Rem. 3. It sometimes has the meaning of lit (cilt) : 6nt=^alt'*en (tnfjatten, etn^alten), to contain. Rem. 4. Before f, Cltt is changed, for euphony, to tlll^ in the three verbs cm:|3fangcn, em:^tef;Ien, em))finben. 3. ©r= usually denotes a motion outward or upward: ^rsgie^'en, to pour out. ^X'^th'm, to lift up. 1. It sometimes denotes the passing to, or returning to a condition, in compounds formed from adjectives and verbs : @r*ri)tl)'en, to bhish. @r*fc^'cu, to replace. § 155.] COMPOUND VERBS. 331 2. It frequently denotes acquisition by the subject : (Sr^ilCtt'eln, to gain by begging. (Sr*rci(^'cn, to attain to. 4. ®C= gives a modification of the meaning of most verbs to which it is prefixed ; it frequently indicates the duration or consequence of an action : ©Cbraiid^'en, to npply (braut^cn, to need, use). (9c*fte(/en, to .Jmit (ftel^en, to stand). 5. SBcr= indicates primarily motion away : S3cr*treib'en, to drive away, S3cr*f(icJ3'en, to flow away. 1 . It frequently denotes loss, error ^ spoiling^ destruction, end: SJcr*fcI;JDcnt)'cu, to waste, S5cr*b(il(/en, to lose blossoms. S8er*icit'en, to mislead. 93cr*sef;r'en, to consume. 2. It sometimes denotes passing to, or being placed in a condition, espe- cially when prefixed to verbs from nouns and adjectives : SJct'A'-'tt'ern, to idolize, deify. S3cr*anb'er*n, to change. SJcr-waij'en, to make orphan. S3tr*bef jcr-n, to improve. 6. 3cr= denotes separation, dissolution, or destruction : ^tX''\ixz\\'zx[, to disperse. ^Cf'^^tt'en, to fall into ruins. 3cr'tci§'cn, to tear in pieces. !^tx\^Mo^'^\\, to break in pieces Rtvi. The Inseparable Particles have been developed as follows : Gothic ; bi-, and-, us-, ga-, fair-, dis-, Old-Ger. ; bi-, int-, ur-, gi-, far-, zir-, Mid.-Ger. ; be-, ent-, er-, ge-, ver-, zer-, New-Ger.; be*. cnt=. er*. ge*. t>er*. jer*. Obs. 1. lor examples of compound verbs with bUtt^, l^ttttCt^ iibCt, UtttCt^ Uni, and toicbcr as separable and as inseparable prefixes, see Less. XXXV., 2. The two forms U)iCbCt (again) and tUtbCC (against) are employed to dis- tinguish the adverb from the preposition. Obs. 2. Inseparable compound verbs wfth nouns or adjectives as prefixes have the accent on the prefix and take Qt- in the perfect participle: 9{cd)t'sfcrtigen, to justify ; ijnp., red^t'fcrtigte ; per/.part., gercd;t'fcrtigt. 9Kut^'=ma^cu, to conjecture ; " mut^'ma^te; " " gemutl;mofjt. Exc. Some compounds with Uolls as prefix: tooUjie^'en, to execute; part., ttoUjogcn. Obs. 3. The prefix mifs (related to mi[fcn = erftauben, we understood, t^r terftciubet, you understood, fie toerftanbeu, they understood. Perfect Tense. I have understood, etc. x^ ]^ak uerftanbcn* bu ^abeft i)erftanben. er \:)a^t toerftanbeu. tt)tr \)aktxx berftanbeu. t^r ^bet terjitauben. fie \:)ahtx\. berftaubeu. Pluperfect Tense. I had understood, etc. tc^ pttc ucrftanbcn* bu ^cittcft berftanbcn. cr batte toerftaubeu. Xoxx fatten i)erftanbcn. i^r '^attet berftauben. fie fatten berftanben. First Future Tense. I shall understand, etc. I shall understand, etc. id^ toctbc Dcrftc^cm tc^ iDcrbc Dcrftc^en* bu tt)irft tocrfte^eu. bu hjerbeft berftebeu. er tt)trb tocrftc^eu. er U)erbe terfte^eu. tuir tverben toerfte^eu. xoxx tDerbeu ijerfte^eu. t^r tuerbet ijcrftefjeu. i^r tDcrbet i?erftcbeu. fie tDcrbeu i^erftel^eu. fie n^erben berftel;cu. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 15G.] COMPOUND VERBS. 333 Second Future Tense. I shall have understood, etc. x6} mvht bcrftanbcn f^ahtiu bu irirft t>cr[taubcn ^abcn. cr tt)irb terjitanben (labcn. xo'xx tDcrben »er|'tanbeu ^abcn. i^r toerbet tocrftaiiben ^aben. fic werbcn ijcrftanbeu ^abcn. I shall have understood, etc. ic^ ujcrbc ucrftaubcn ^abcn. bu tDcrbeft berftanbeii ^aben. er tv^erbe terftanbcn ^aben. n)ir ttjerbcn Derftaiibcu i)dbtn. xljx werbet tjcrftanben ^aben. [ie iDcrbcn tocrftanben ^abcn. CONDITIONAJL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should understand, etc. \er[tanbeu " i^r ^attet ijerftanbeu " fie fatten i)er[tanbcu bu n?ilrbe[t »erflc(;cn, cr triirbe tjerftcben, tt>ir tDuvbcu l^crftcl;cn, i^r roilrbet t»erftcben, fie wiirbcn loerfte^en, bu anirbcft t>cr[tant>cu ^aben cr tt>ilrbe berftaubeu ^aben, irir tfiirbeu t>crftauben ^aben, i^r triirbet berftanben l>aben, fie toiirben berftanben ^aben, IMPERATIVE MOOD. tJCrftC^C (bu), understand. tlCCftC^C er, let him understand. UCr[tcl)cn Unr, let us understand. UCrftcM i(;r, understand you. UCrfte^Cn fie, let them understand. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. UCrfte^Cn, to understand. 1 Per/. UCtftonbCU f^ahtn, to hava uu- I derstood. TARTICIPLES. Pres. UcrftC^Cnb/ understanding. | Per/. m\ianhtn, understood. 334 THE VERB. [§ 157. § 157. There are two classesof Doubly-compounded Verbs: 1. Those having as prefixes Separahle Compoimd Par- ticles (mostly compounded with btt, l^Cr, l^ilt, and tJOr) : Mcidcn, to remain; bttki'llletlien, to persist in (it), fasten, to drive ; bat)er'ta()ren, to drive along brtngen, to bring ; ba{;in'l)vingen, to bring ihe e. tuerfeu, to throw ; bame'beriuerfen, to prostrate. fel^en, to place ; baran'fe^en, to hazard. jef)en, to see ; bareiu'fefjcn, to look into. laff Cn, to let ; l^Crab'laffCU, to let down. fommen, to come; ^eran'fommeu, to advance. Blicfen, to look ; fecrauf bitden, to look upwards. ;^te^en, to draw ; berau8'sie{)en, to draw out. rufen, to call; berbei'rufen, to call near. tafjen, to let ; bereiu'Iaffen, to admit. !ommen, to come ; ^eru'berfommen, to come over, gcben, to go ; ^erutn'ge^en, to go around, iie^men, to take ; fjerun'temeljmcn, to take down. {;eben, to lift ; J)erbor'l;eben, to make prominent treiben, to thrive ; umber' treiben, to roam idly about fa^ren, to drive ; l)ina(l'fal)rcn, to travel down, fommeit, to come ; ^inan'fommen, to get near to. gel^en, to go ; btnaiif geben, to go up. fe^en, to see; binau^'fefjen, to look out. ge^en, to go; ^tnein'geben, to enter. faf)ren, to drive; ^inu'bcifal;ren, to cross over. jd;retten, to stride ; ^iutDeg'fc^reitett, to stride away, fiigen, to join ; ^tnsu'filgen, to add to. fC^ideil, to send ; Doran'ft^irfCll, to send ahead, tioraug'fagen, to predict, ijorbei'fa^ren, to drive past, border' je^en, to foresee, borii'bereiten, to hasten past. Hht'l' (tliere-by); baf^er' (there-hither); bafietm' (there-thither) ; banie'ber (there-down) ; barati' (there-on) ; bareiu' (therein) ; l^Cmb' (hither-down) ; l^eran' (hither-to) ; ^erauf (hither-up) ; ^erail§' (hither-out) ; l^erbei' (hither-near) ; I;erein' (hither-in) ; ^erii'ber (hither-over); tjerum' (hither-around) ; l^erun'tev (hither-under) : ^ert>or' erab'fd;eiieu, to detest, abhor (from bev ^2lb'fd;cii, the horror). S3cur't^eilen, to judge, form an opinion of (from baS Ur't^cil, judgment). 6. REFLEXIVE VERBS. (^unicfjiclcnbc ^citioiirtcrO § 158. The number of verbs that are used only reflex- ively is much larger in German than in English, as : 3ci) befinnC mit^, I remember. ^^) fc()nC mid), I long. Rem. 1. The reflexive use of tnmsitive verbs also is much more extensive than in English ; many verbs take a modification of their meaning when thus used reflexively, as : 3d; UcrlaffC mi(ft auf i(;n, I rely upon him (Derlttffcn, to leave, abandon). 3rf? CrinnerC mid) barauf, I remember it (erinUCm, to remind). 3(^ frCUC mitft barauf, I rejoice at it (frcueil, to make glad). Rem. 2. Some transitive verbs used reflexively require the reflexive pronoun to be in the dative instead of the accusative case, as: flt^ Onma))cn, to assume. ,f Cinbilbcn, to imagine. fi(^ fd)mcit^Cln, to flatter one's self. n Dorftcllcn, to imagine. Rem. 3. Son.e intransitive verbs also are used reflexively, without change of meaning : 3d) eile (or cilC mid)), I hasten. 3cl) na^C (or na^C mi(^), I approach. Rem. 4. Transitive verbs often take a reflexive instead of a passive form: 2)cr ^immcl bcbctft ftj!^ mit 2Sotfcn, The sky is covered with clouds. § 159. The Reflexive Verb fictj frcuen, to rejoice: INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id) frCUC mi(5, I rejoice, bu treuft bid), thou rcjoicest. cr frcut fi(^, he rejoices, trir freiien un^, we rejoice. \hx frcut cnc^, you rejoice, ftc freucn fi(^, they rejoice. id) frCUC mi^fl rejoice.* bu frcueft bid), thou rejoicest. er frcuct fid), he rejoices. mx frcueu un{^, we rejoice. it)r frcuct CU(^, you rejoice, fie freucn fic^i, they rejoice. Subjunctive Mood. 336 THE VERB. [§i5a Imperfect Tense. \^ frCUte m\^, I rejoiced, bu freuteft bid), thou lejoicedst. er freute fi^, he rejoiced, tuir freuten un^, we rejoiced, i^r freutet cutft, you rejoiced. fie freuten fl^, they rejoiced. ic^ frCUete mi(^, I rejoiced, bu freueteft bic^, thou rejoicedgt er freuete fi(^, he rejoiced. njtr freueten un^, we rejoiced. i^r freuctet CU(^, you rejoiced, fie freueten fi(^, they rejoiced. Perfect Tense. I have rejoiced, etc. x^ l^ade mir^ gcfrcut bu ^aft Mc^ gefreut. er bat fi(^ gefreut. xo\x l;aben itn^ gefreut. i^r ^abt cu^l gefreut. fie ^aben ft(^ gefreut. I have rejoiced, etc. id; l)otic mx^ gefreut bu ^abeft "^x^ gefreut. er i)abe fic^ gefreut. tuir b^ben mt^ gefreut. ibr ^oSid euc^ gefreut. fie ^abeu fi^ gefreut. Pluperfect Tense. I had rejoiced, etc. x^ l^attc mic^ gefreut bu b^ttcft bic^ gefreut. er bir twerben uu^ gefreut b^ben. ibr werbet eu(^ gefreut b^^^i^* fie toerben \x^ gefreut b'lben. § 159, 160.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 337 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should rejoice, etc. \^ tOiirbC mit^ frCUCn, or ic^ frCUCtC m\^ {imperfect Subj.y bu toilrbcft btl^ frcuen, cr toUrbe fic^ fvcueii, H)ir tt)iirben un«f fveucn, i^r toiirbet CU(^ freuen, fie toilrbcn ftd^ freuen, bu freueteji \^\^ er freuetc fi^ h)ir freucteu un^ i^r frcueten CU(^ fie ti^cucten ftt^ Perject Tense. I would or should have rejoiced, etc. \&i toilrbc m\^ gcfrcut Ijafien, or id; ^iittc mid) gcfrcut {PI Sub.), bu ii)ilrbc[t bid) gcfreut ^abcn, " bu ^vitteft hid:^ gcfreut er toiirbe fic^ gcfrcut I^abeu, *' er ^citte fid) gefreut toir tt?ilrbcu uui^ gcfveut ^abcn, " tt?ir fatten iin§ gcfrcut t^r wtirbct cud) gcfrcut ^abcn, " t^r^attet cud) gcfrcut fic tDttrbcn fi(^ gcfrcut ^abcu, " fie l;dttcu fi(^ gcfrcut IMPERATIVE MOOD. frCUe (bu) bi(^, rejoice thou. frene er fi(^, let him rejoice. frCUCn n^ir un^, let us rejoice. frCUCt (ibr) cud), rejoice ye. freuca fie fl(^, let them rejoice. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. frCUCn Mf to rejoice. I Per/. fi(^ [JCfrCUt ^ttkn, to have I rejoiced. PARTICIPLEa Pret, ft(^ frCUCnb, rejoicing. | Per/. ft(^ gCfrCUt, rejoiced. 7. IMPERSONAL VERBS. (Un^crf(JnIid)c Stitioiirtcr.) § 160. Verbs which express natural phenomena are impersonal, having the pronoun C^ {it) for their nomi- native : SS bonnert, it thunders. (ge fc^nctct, it snows. Hem. 1. Some intransitive verbs are used impersonally, the logical subject of the verb being put in the accusative or dative case ; in such cases C^ is often dropped if another word opens the sentence : (?vl fricrt mic^ or mic^ fricrt, I feel cold, (but \6f friers, I am freez- es^ mongclt i^m QU Sfiid^tS, or i^m He lacks nothing. [ing). manncK nid^ts, (but) i^x UiaUQCU baaren ®elbe«, He is in need of ready money. P 338 THE VERB. [§ 161. Rem. 2. The passive and reflexive form of many active verbs are frequently used impersonally : @§ mxh »tel babon gerebet, Much is said about it, §ier t»irb nic^t geraud^t, "Smoking is not allowed here." @3 fragt fic^, ob— It is questionable whether — Rem. 3. ©^ is often used expletively (like the English expletive there): (S8 brennt etn §au^, there burns a house (for ein ^au^ brennt, a house is burning). Rem. 4. ©g gicllt, etc., is frequently used for C5 i[t, ftllb, etc. (§ 107, 5). (S§ gtebt ttele Seute, bte — There are many people, who — 8. THE PASSIVE VOICE. (^ie ^affttjform ijcr S^itttiirterO § 161. Conjugation of the Passive Voice of the tran- sitive verb lickn, to love (§ 134) : INDICATIVE MOOD. I am loved, etc. id; tocrb^e oelictit bu tiJtrft geltebt. er ttJtri) geliebt. xoxx tuerb^cn geltebt. i^r tuerb^et geltebt. fie tt>erb*cn getiebt. I was loved, etc. td^ ttjurb=c gcltcfit bu trurb*c[t getiebt. cr ttjurb^c geltebt. h)ir n)urb = en geliebt. i^r n?urb*ct geliebt. fie tt>urb*cn geliebt. I have been loved, etc. \^ 5iii gcUebt loorbcn* bu tjtft geliebt toorbcn* cr ift geliebt toorbcn* ttjir ftnb geliebt toorbcn* i^r fcib geliebt toorbcn* fie finb geliebt toorbcn* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. I am loved, etc.* x^ tocrb=c gcltctit bu h?erb^cft geliebt. er toerb^c geliebt. xoxx tt)erb = cn geliebt. t^r ttjerb^ct geliebt. fie toerb^cn geliebt. Imperfect Tense. I was loved, etc. x&) ttiirbsc gcIicH, bu U) ii r b * eft geliebt. er tr> it r b ^ e geliebt. toir t» il r b * en geliebt. ibr tuiirb^et geliebt. fie to it r b ^ en geliebt. Perfect Tense. I have been loved, etc. \^ fei gclietit morben* bu fei* eft geliebt toorben* er fei geliebt morbcn* xoxx fei* en geliebt ttjorben* t^r fei^et geliebt toorben* fic fet^en geliebt loorben* * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 161.] PASSIVE VOICE. 339 Pluperfect Tense. I had been loved, etc. id; toar ^tWthX tuorbcn. bu tijarft geiiebt ttiorbcn* cr xaax cjdiebt loorbcu. tvir war* en gelicbt UJOrbClU i^r tDar*t geliebt toorbcm fie tt) a r * en geliebt toorben* I had been loved, etc id; todr-e n^Hcbt morben* fcu tt) a r * eft ^clicbt ujorben, er trai>*c gclicbt toorben* tt)ir ir> a r := en gclicbt toorben* i^r xo'dx'ti gclicbt teorben* fie w a r ^ en gclicbt tiJOrbcn. First Future Tense. I shall be loved, etc. id; tt)erb=c gcUebt tocrbcn. bu iDirft gcUcbt toerben, er tiJirb gctiebt toerben. irir n?crb*en gclicbt ttierben. ibr TOerb>et gclicbt loerben* fie werb^cn geliebt ttierben. I shall be loved, etc. id; tterb^e jjeliebt ttjcrben, bu n)crb:=eft gclicbt tticrbcu* cr tt)erb*c gclicbt tticrbcn. XQxx trerb^en gclicbt mcibciu it;r tt)crb*et gclicbt mcrbcu* fie tt?erb*eu gclicbt lyerbcn. Second Future Tense. I shall have been loved, etc. tc^ ttjerbe gcUeDt U)orben fctn. bu trirft gclicbt trcrbcn fein. er mirb geliebt trorbcu fein. xo'xx irerben geliebt trorben fein. i^r trerbet gclicbt trorben fein. fie ttjcrben gcUebt trorben fein. I shall have been loved, etc. id; toerbe nc^cbt ttiorben fein. bu u?erbcft geliebt ivorbcn fein. er tDcrbe gclicbt trorbcu fein. trir trcrbeu gclicbt irorbcn fein. i^r trcrbet gclicbt. trorbcn fein. fie trerben gclicbt n^orbcn join. Perfect Tense. I would 'or should be loved, etc. td> ttiiirbe geliebt ttierben. bu iDiirbeft geliebt ttierben. cr Mrbe geliebt ttierben. u?ir iriirbeu geliebt ttierben. il;r iDiirbet gclicbt ttierben. fic tt)ilrbeu geliebt ttierben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should have been loved, etc ic^ ttiiirbe geliebt ttiorben fein. bu n?ilrbe[t geliebt trorbeu fein. er triirbe geliebt u?orbcu fein. trir trilrben geliebt trorbeu fein. i^r tuiirbet geliebt trorbeu fein. fie tcilrben geliebt ujorben fein. IMPERATIVE MOOD. fei (bu) geliebt, be (thou loved). fei er geliebt; let him be loved. feien n?ir geliebt, let us be loved. feib (ibr) geliebt, be (you; loved. feien fie geliebt, let them be loved. INFINITrVE MOOD. Pre*, geliebt ttierben, to be loved, i Perf. geliebt ttiorben fein, to have been loved. Prcs. PAKTICirLES. I Pc-rf geliebt, loved. 340 THE VERB. [§ 162, 163. 9. POTENTIAL VERBS. § 162. The Potential Verbs (called by German gram- marians the Auxiliaries of Mode) are foUcu, tDOitcil, !ons ucn, mogcn, biirfcn, miiffen* They are used only to limit or qualify the meaning of the infinitive of independent verbs (§120,3): (Sr ttlll^ bag 3Sud; tejen, He must read the book. Rem. 1. The Umited or quaUfied independent verb is often understood? Sr ^at eg gemujjt, He was compelled to do it. Rem. 2, The Potential Verbs are inflected in all the moods and tenses like independent verbs, with the exception that ttiollctt alone is used in the im* perative mood. Rem. 3. In the compound tenses the participial form is employed only when the independent verb is omitted; when it is not omitted, the infinitive form of the potential verb is used instead of the participial form : Sr ^at bag 33uc^ lefen miiffCll, He was compelled to read the book, (but) (gr {)qX eg gemU^t, He was compelled (to do) it. Rem. 4. They all belong to the seventh class of irregular verbs (§ 143-145). Rem. 5. All Potential Verbs but foIlCU and lOOlIen take the umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive. Rem. 6. The Potential Verbs have been developed thus : Gothic; skulan, viljan, kunnan, magan, thuarban, motan, Old-Ger.; scolan, wellan, chunnan, mugan, durfan, muozan, Mid.-Ger. ; suln, wellen, kiinnen, mugen, diirfen, muezen, New-Ger.; fotten, tDotteit, !i5nnen, mogeit, biirfen, niilffen, {English); (shall), will. can. may. (dare). must. § 163. The verb fofieit indicates : 1. Moral ohligation or duty : (Sr fotttC eg t^un, He ought to do it. SKir fatten eg t^un foUcn, We ought to have done it. 2. Obligation, duty, or necessity (usually dependent upon the will of another) : 2)u foUft ®ott betnen §errn lieben Thou shalt love the Lord thy God ton ganjem ^erjen, with all thy heart. 2)iefe ^^urd^t foil enbigen (®c^.) I This fear shall end ! %n tnetner S^ufmerffamfeit fott eg There shall be no lack of attention titd}t \t^tn, on my part. § 164.1 POTENTIAL VERBS. 341 3. A report, rumor, or general impression : Sr foU fcbr frant fein, They say he is very sick. Sr foU tm ijortijen 3al;re na6) He is supposed to have gone to ^Imerifa ^ei^ancjeii fein, America last year. Rem. 1. @0UCtt is used in many hypothetical and conditional sentences: @ie foUcn ciud; nod; fo rcid; feiu — Should they be ever so rich — SScnii cr morgeu fterben foUte— If he should die to-morrow— Rem. 2. ©ottttt is sometimes employed to express iu past time an action that was beginning when another action took place : 3)ae! "i^iiferb foMtC cbcn ijerfviuft The horse was just to be sold when trcifcii, ba ftarb e8, it died. Rem. The independent verb (as tbun, ge^en, bebeuten) is often understood : SBaS foU id; tjier ? What shaU I (do) here ? ©OU bie X^ilr au\ ober JU? Shall tiie door stay open or shut? SSoju foil bag ? What is the use of that ? 2)aS \)at cr gcfolft, He ought to have done it. § 164. Conjugation of the verb fottcn* Rem. The Translation to be given to the Potential Verbs varies greatly- according to circumstances, as is seen in the remarks on foIICIl* The defini- tions given in the paradigms are therefore to be understood simply as being among the more usual ones. Principal Parts: fottcn, folltc, gcfottt* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. ^ foil, I ought. t^ fo«=c, I ought.* bu foU=ft, thou oughtest. bu foH^cft, thou oughtest. cr foil, he ought. cr foH*e, he ought. tt)ir foil- en, we ought. toix foil* en, we ought. i^r foH.(c)t, you ought. i^r foU^ct, you ought. fic folI^'CII, they ought. flc foil* en, they ought. x6) foliate, I should, bu foil* tCft, thou shouldest. cr foU*te, he should. tt?ir foil* ten, we should, i^r foll*tet, you should, fie foil* ten, they should. Imperfect Tense. id) fottste, I should- bu foil* teft, thou shouldest. cr foll*te, he should, trir foil* ten, we should, ifjr foll*tet, you should. flC foil* ten, they should. ♦See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 342 THE VERB. [§164. Perfect Tense. I have been obligee I, etc. \^ ^obe gcfoUt (or fotten)* tu (>a|i cjefoUt (' ' folten). er {;at gefoUt (' ' foUenJ. tDtr ^aben gejoUt (' ' foEeii). i^v ^abt gefoUt ("fatten). fie ^aben gefottt (' ' foUen). I have been obliged, etc. \^ ^at)C gefoUt (or joltcn)* bu l;akft gefoUt ("joUcii). er ^ak gefoUt (" foUeii). tt)ir (;aben gefottt ( " foUeu). t^r tjabet gefoUt ("foUen). fie l;akn gefoUt C'foUeu). Pluperfect Tense. I had been obliged, etc. \^ ^attc gcfoUt ( or follenX bu l;atteft gefoUt ( " fotten). er- ^atte gefoUt (" foUen). h)ir fatten gefoUt (" foUen). i^r ()attet gefoUt ( " foUen) fie fatten gefoUt ( " fotten) I had been obliged, etc. \^ I)ottc gefoUt (or foUcnX bu I;atteft gefoUt ('' foUen). er i)atte gefoUt (" fotten). \CAX fatten gefottt (" fotten). i^r ^attet gefottt (" fotten). fte batten gefottt (" fotten). First Future Tense. I shall be obliged, etc. \^ ttjei'bc fotten* bu hJtrft fotten. er ttjirb fotten. tDtr irerben fotten. i^r trerbet fotten. fie tt?erben fotten. I shall be obliged, etc, \^ ttjcibc fotten* bu tuerbeft fotten. er tt)erbe fotten. tctr n^erben fotten. i^r tcerbet fotten. fie trerben fotten. Second Future Tense. I shall have been obliged, etc. i^ tocrbc gefottt Ijahtn* bu tt)irft gefottt ^aben. er n?irb gefottt baben. totr h)erben gefottt ^aben. t^r tDerbet gefottt ^aben. fte njerbcn gefottt ^aben. I shall have been obliged, etc^ \6) toerbe gefottt Iiaben. bu n?crbeft gefottt ^abcn. cr njerbe gefottt ^aben. h)ir n^erben gefottt ^aben. t^r njerbet gefottt ^aben. jte tuerben gefottt ^aben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be obliged, etc. x6) ttJiirbe fotten, or id; fottte (Imjyerfect Subjunctive). bu tDitrbeft fotten, " bu fottteft cr ttjiirbe fotten, " er fottte " n>ir n)ilrben fotten, " tuir fottten " t^r iDiirbet fotten, " i^r fottteit " fte tDiirben fotten, " fie fottten § 1G4-1G6.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 343 Perfect Tense,. I would or should have been obliged, etc. id^ toiirbC OCfoUt I)ttben, or id^ I)attC ^tWi {Pluperfect Subj.), bu murbeft gefoUt ^abeii, " bu ^dtteft gefoUt cr miirbe gefoUt ^aben, " cr ^attc gcjoUt tpir tt?ilrben gefoUt ^abcn, " n)ir fatten gejottt i^r wilrbct gcjoUt ^viben, " it^r ^iittct gcjottt fie tpUrbcn gejoUt ^aben, " fie t^dttcn gejottt INFESriTIVE MOOD. Pres. foUcn, to be obUged. I Perf. OCfoflt ^allCH, to have been 1 obliged. PABTICIPLE8. Pres. foUcnb, being obliged. | Perf (JcfoMt, been obUged. § 165. The Potential Verb toottcit usually signifies wil- lingness, i7iclination, desire, intention, or determination: ©r UJiU nit^t mit un« gc^cn, He is not willing {or does not wish) to go with us. 3^ toill gieic^ gc^cn, I will go immediately, ©ie ti5nnen t{;mi n?ae oie tOOQCtt^ You may do what you like. Rem. 1. SSBottcn frequently denotes that an action is about to take place: 2)te U^r toottte eben jd;Iagen, The clock was about to strike. Rem. 2. It may be used to indicate that an assertion has been made by another person : (Sr lOiU ben ^ometcn, tvcld^cr er« He asserts that he has already seen trartct \r>irb, fd^ou gcfebcn ^ben, the comet that is expected. Rem. 3. The independent verb is often omitted : SSaS tooUcn @ic (babcn)? What do you wish? ^a8 ^at er gCtOOUt (or l^aben tool* What did he wish ? len)? § 166. Conjugation of the verb tooltcn {see % 1^4:, Bern), Principal Parts: ttJOttCH, UloUtC, gctoollt* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. id; ttiU, I am willing. id; ttJoUsC, I am willing. bu ttitlft, thou art willing. bu roott^cft, thou art willing. er ttitt, he is willing. cr rooU-c, he is willing. trir n)oil*cn, we are willing. roir roott^cn, we are willing. ibr xoo\\*{t){, you are willing. ibr roott^ct you are willing. fie root I* en, they are willing. fie roott^cn, they are willing. See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. 344 THE VERB. [§166 Imperfect Tense. \^ ttlOttstC, I was willing, bu tt)olt^tCft, thou wast willing, er tDott^tt, he was willing. tOXX toott^tCU, we were willing, t^r ttJott*tCt, you were willing. flC tooE^tcn, they were willing. bu njoE-tcft, er xoQii'ttf to\x iDoU^cn, fie iDott^cn, I was willing, thou wast willing, he was willing, we were willing, you were willing, they were willing. Perfect Tense. I have been willing, etc. ^atie getoottt (or njollcu)* bu ^aft getDoUt cr ^at i5en)oEt Xovc ^aBen cjetDoUt il)r ^fet gemottt fie ^aben gewoEt (" iuoUen). (" tt)oIIen). (" tDoHen). (" tcotten). (" XQoUtn). I have been willing, etc. \^ ^atic gcttJoUt (or ttJoHcn), bu f)abeft getDoIlt (" tootten). er babe gehjollt tt)tr l^abeu getrottt i^r bcibet geiDotIt fie ^aben getDoUt C' ttJoUen). (" tt)otten). (" iroEen). (" tooEen), Pluperfect Tense. I had been willing, etc. t(^ ^attc o^tooEt (or tooKcttX bu ^atteft gett)oEt (" it>oEen). er l;atte gewoEt (" tuoEen). Xoxx fatten gemoEt ('' tvoEen). i^r ^attet geiDoEt (" tDoEen). fie l^atten getuoEt C' »oEen). I had been willing, etc. \^ Wit gctuoEt (or tooEcn). bu ^atteft genjoEt (" h)oEen). er ^atte getuoEt (" n^oEen). n^tr fatten gemoEt (" tt)oEen> t^r !)attet getuoEt (" h)oEeu> fie tiatten genjoEt (" tDoEcu). First Future Tense. I shall be willing, etc. \^ tocrbc toottcn* bu trtrft troEen. er tDtrb ti^oEcu. Xoix hjerben tcoEeu. t^r U)erbet u?oEeu. fie tcerben UJoEeu. I shall be willing, etc. tc^ tocrbe mUvx* bu n^erbeft iroEeu. cr ttjerbe h)oEeu. h)tr toerben ttsoEcu. t^r U)erbet tt)oEen. fie toerben U)oEen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been willing, etc. \^ tijcrbc octtjottt l^abcn. bu ttjtrft getcoEt fjaben. er tt)trb getroEt ^aben. n)tr toerbeu getr»oEt iiabtxx, i^r njerbet getcoEt iiabtn, fie toerben getooEt ^aben. I shall have been willing, etc, x^ lucrbc gctooHt l^aficiu bu ujerbeft getooEt baben. er iuerbe geh?oEt ^abeu. UJtr tcerbeu geiuoEt i:i(Ata, x^x U)erbet getuoEt ^aben. Tie h)erben gettJoEt ^abcn. § 166, 167.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 345 CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be willing, etc. i^ tollrbC tOOtlCn, or ic^ tOOlItC (imperfect Subjunctive'). bu troUteft cr tocUU tt)tr hjotttcn " " i^r tDoUtet fie tDoUten Perfect Tense. I would or should have been willing, etc. i6f totirbe qtmUt f}abtn, or id; pttc gcujottt (Piup. Subj.) " bu ^citteft getroUt *' er ^citte getrollt " tt)ir fjatten gewoUt " ibr ^attet gcn?oIIt " fie fatten gctuoEt bu tDilrbeft woUen, er tDiirbe n?oUcn, n)ir trilrben njottcn, i^r miirbet tt»oUen, fie tDilrben tcollen, bu toUrbcft gcwottt ^aben er tr>iirbe getDoIlt ^abcn, toil trilrbcn gctDoUt ^aben, ibr tDiirbct gemoUt ^aben, fie tpiirben gctoottt ^aben, IMPERATIVE MOOD. toOttC (bu), be willing. toOKc cr, let him be willing. tOOKcn tDir, let us be willing. tOOUtt (ibr), be willing. tOOttcn flC, let them be wilUng. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. toOttCn, to be willing. 1 Perf gCttJOttt ^obCB, to have been I willing. PAETICIPLES. Pres. tOOKcnb, being willing. | Perf. gCtOOttt, been willing. § 167. The Potential Verb liinnctt indicates: 1. Moral or physical possibility : Sr fonn lefeu unb fc^reibeu, He can read and write. 2. A concession or contingency : @te !i)nntn mit^ crtrarten, You may expect me. 3<^ !ann uii^ getrrt bciben, I may have been mistaken. 3. The independent verb (as t^un, fagen, lefen, fpre^en, t)erflet)en, etc.) is frequently omitted : 2Ba« fonn icb bafilr (tbun) ? How can I help it ? 3(^ fflnn nicbt treiter, I can do nothing more. Sr bat c§ gctDoIIt, aber er ^at c3 lie wished (to do) it, but he was not nid^t gCfonnt, able (to do) it. P2 346 THE VERB. [§ 168. § 168. Conjugation of fiinncn (see § 164, Bern.): Principal Parts: fiinncn, lonnte, gefonnt* SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. INDICATIVE MOOD. \^ fCttn, I can. bu fann=ft, thou canst, cr fann, he can. tojir tonn^cn, we can. i^r fi)nnirb fbnuen. t^r trerben fijnnen. fie tuerbet fonnen. tr>ir hjerben fbnnen. I have been able, etc. id; \faU gefount (or fijnnctt)* bu fjabeft gefonnt (" fonnen). er ^abe gefonnt (" fonnen). U?ir ^aben gefonnt (" fonnen;. i^r ^abet gefonnt ('' fonnen). fie ^aben gefonnt (" fonnen). Pluperfect Tense. I had been able, etc. i^ pttc gefonnt (or fijnnctt). bu ^citteft gefonnt (" fijnnen). er {;atte gefonnt (" fi5nnen). XQ\x fatten gefonnt (" fonnen). i^r ^attet gefonnt (" fonnen). fie l^citten gefonnt (" fonnen). First Future Tense. . I shall be able, etc. xd) mxH Imntn* bu tt»erbeft fonnen. er h^erbe fonnen. n^ir h)erben fiJnncn. i^r trerbet fonnen. fie iuerben f9nnen. * See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. § 168, 1G9.J POTENTIAL VERBS. 347 I shall have been able, etc. id; uicrDc Qctonnt f^ahtn* bu wirft getonnt ^aben. er TOirb gefonnt ^aben. tT?ir tt>€rben gcfonnt ^abcn. i^r tverbct gcfonnt ^aben. fte tcerbcn getonnt ^aben. Second Future Tense. I shall have been able, etc. \6) ttjcrbc gcfount i^ahtvu bu tt)erbcft getonut ^aben. er tTJcrbe gcfonnt ^aben. tt)ir trcrbcn gcfonnt ^aben. i^r n^erbet gcfonnt ^aben. fic JDcrbcn gcfonnt ^aben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be able, etc. \6) toilrbC fiinncn, or ic^ fbnntC (imperfect Subjunctive). bu tt)ilrbc[t fonncn, " bu fi5nnteft " " cr tuUrbe tonnen, " cr fSnntc *' " tt)ir tt?ilrbcn fiJnncn, " toit fBnnten *' " i^r tDttrbct fiJnnen, *' i^t fiJnntet " ** fic tt)ttrbcn tonnen, " flc tbnntcn *' ** Perfect Tense. I would or should have been able, etc. ttilrbc gcfonnt ^abcn, or ic^ ^dttc gcfonnt (PL Subj.). bu trilrbcft gcfonnt ^abcn, er tt)ilrbc gcfonnt ^aben, loir wilrbcn gcfonnt ^aben, i^r tDilrbct gcfonnt ^aben, fie njiirben gefonnt ^abcn, bu ^ttcft gcfonnt er ijatte gcfonnt ton fatten gefonnt i^r ^dttet gcfonnt fte fatten gcfonnt INFINITIVE MOOD. />.«. UmtUf to be able. | Per/, gctonnt f^ahtn, to have been Pres. fiinnCttb, being able. able. PABTICIPLE8. I i'erf. gcfonnt, been able. § 169. The Potential Verb miigcn indicates: 1. Permission or concession (like way in English): 2)U magft gcfjen, Thou mayst go. Sr mog cin tapfcrer ir fatten gemo^t *' " t^r ^attet gemot^t *' " fic ^tteu gcmod^t " " INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. miigcn, to be permitted. I Perf. gcmot^t ^tt^Cll, to have been I permitted. PARTICIPLES. Pres. miiocnb, being permitted. | Perf. gcillOtl^t, permitted. § 171. The Potential Verb biirfcn indicates: 1. Permission (by law, or by the will of another) : Oebcrmanu barf 2s5affen tragcn, Every body can Gegally) bear arms, aber nic^t jcber barf baS SSilb but not every body is permitted to fc^ic^en, shoot wild game. 3et5t biirft i^r f^iclcn, You may play now. Rem. With a negative biitfCtt is usually translated by ^^must {not):" ^'itx biirfcn ®ic nic^t raud;cn, You must not smoke here. 2. !Durfen sometimes has the signification of " to take the liberty',' " to dare .•" Sr borf nid^t fommcu o^nc bic (Sr* lie dares not come without the per- Iaubni§ fcineS ^ater*, mission of his father. 350 THE VERB. [§ 171, 172 3. It sometimes has the signification of may or can: 2Btr biirf en auf unferen 33ruber We may be proud of our brother. ftols fein, 2)arf ic^ tttic^ barauf berlaffeu ? Can I rely upon that ? 4. The imperfect subjunctive often signifies: 1. A logical possibility : (S8 biirfte je^t ju f^at jetn, It may now be too late. 2. It may be used as a polite manner of making a statement under the form of a hypothesis : SS bitrftC ntd;t jc^tuer jetn, bag It might not be hard to prove that. nac^jutDcifen, 5. The independent verb is often omitted: @r ^at nic^t auSge^en biirf Cn, He did not dare go out. (but) @r ^at e8 nic^t gcburft, He did not dare (do; it. § 172. Conjugation of biirfcn (see § 164, ^^m.): INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. \^ bfltf, I am permitted, bu borfsft, thou art permitted, cr barf, he is permitted. \X>\X biirf'Clt, we are permitted, t^r biirfaben. i^r n?crbct geburft ^aben. fie njerben geburft ^aben. I shall have been permitted, etc» id; toerbe geburft ^aben« bu njerbefi geburft ^aben. er icerbe geburft ^aben. n)ir merben geburft ijaben. iE>r werbet geburft ^aben. fie ttjerben geburft ^aben. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be permitted, etc. X^ toiirbe biirfen, or ic^ biirfte {imperfect Subjunctive'). bu n^iirbeft biirfen, cr tuiirbe biirfen, ttjir toiirben biirfen, i^r tt)ilrbet biirfen, fie »ilrben biirfen, bu bilrftefl er biirfte tt)ir biirftcn i^r bilrftet fie biirften Perfect Tense. I would or should have been permitted, etc. ic^ ttiiirbe geburft ^aben, o bu tt)iirbefl geburft babcn, er tt»iirbe geburft ^aben, ton »ilrben geburft ^aben, ibr tt»ilrbct geburft ijaben, fic wilrben geburft baben, ic^ DdttC geburft (Pluperfect Subj.] bu ^attcft geburft cr ^atte geburft n)ir batten geburft i^r ^cittet geburft fie fatten geburft 352 THE VERB. [§ 173, 174. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. bitrftn^ to be permitted. Perf. gebUrft fallen, to have been obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres. Mirf enb, being pennitted. | Perf. ge&Urft, p«»nnitted. § 173. The Potential Verb miiffcil corresponds in signi, fication with the English verb must. Rem. It indicates physical^ moral., or logical necessity., and in other tenses than the present indicative it must be rendered by such circumlocutions as to he obliged to, to he forced to, to have to. § 174. Conjugation of the verb milffcit {see % 164, Ee7n.)\ Principal Parts: miiffcri, mupe^ Otmugt* INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. cr ntu0, I must, thou must, he must. XOXt miljf^cn, we must, i^r milff*(c)t, you must, fie m ii i f = cil, they must. tc^ mitff=e, I must." bu m il { f - eft, thou must, er miifj^^C, he must. Xovc m it i i * en, we must, i^r tniijf^et, you must, fie m il j f * en, they must. Imperfect Tense. X^ ntnfte, I was obliged, bu mu^teft, thou wast obliged, cr ntu^te, he was obliged. XOXX tuu^ten, we were obliged, t^r mu^tet, you were obliged, fie mu^ten, they were obliged. t(^ ntit^te, I was obliged, bu tnii^teft, thou wast obliged, er ntit^tc, he was obliged. lt>tr tnit^ten, we were obUged. t^r mii^tet, you were obliged, fie mii^ten, they were obliged. Perfect Tense. I have been obliged, etc. tc^ l&aie gemu^t (or miiffenX bu ^aft gemuj^t (" mitffen). er i)at gemu^t (" ntiiffen). UJtr ^abeugemu^t (" ntiiffen). i^r i)aU gcmn^t (" ntiiffen). fie babcn gentu^t (" mitffen). I have been obliged, etc. idf j^afie gemu^t (or miiffcn), bu ^abeft gemu^t (" miiffen). cr i}abt gentugt (" ntiiffen). ton i}abzn gentn^t (" tnitffen). i^r ^aBet gentu^t (" ntiiffen). fie ^aben gemu^t (" ntiiffen). See Subjunctive Mood, § 124. §174.] POTENTIAL VERBS. 353 Pluperfect I had been obliged, etc. \6^ ^ittttc gcmu^t (or mlijfcn)* bu ^atteft gcmuf^t (" miiffen). cr ^attc gemugt (" mu(fen). tt>ir fatten gemu^t (" miiffen). it)r ^attet gemufit (" miiffen). fie fatten gcmufjt (" miiffen). Teme. I had been obliged, etc. \^ \^UXt QCttiu^t (or millTcn). bu ^citteft gemufit ('' miiffen). er bcitte gemufet (" mUffen). h)ir flatten gemufet (" miiffen), i()r Ijcittet gemufjt ('' miiffen). fie l;atten gemu^t (" miiffen). First Future Tense. I shall be obliged, etc. ic^ ttjcrbe miiffen. bu ivirft miiffen. er tr>trb miiffen. tt)ir werben miiffen. ibr trerbet miiffen. fie toerben miiffen. I shall be obliged, etc. ic^ tocrbc miijlcn. bu t»erbeft miiffen. er n?erbe miiffen. n?ir n^erbcn miiffen. i^r n^crbet miiffen. fic ttjerben miiffen. Second Future Tense. I shall have been obliged, etc. ic^ kocrbe gemu^t l^abcn. bu irirft gemufjt ^aben, cr trtrb gemn^t i;abcn. xovc tt?crbcn gcmufet ^abcn. t^r trcrbet gcmu^t ^aben. fie toerben gcmu^t i:iOi^t\\. I shall have been obliged, ecrbeft gemn^t t)aben. er trterbe gcmn^t baben. n?tr tterben gemn^t ^aben. iOr n^erbet gemu^t ^aben. fie trerben genui^t ^abcn. CONDITIONAL MOOD. Present Tense. I would or should be obliged, etc. t^ iOilrbC ntUffcn, or ic^ mii^tC {imperfect Subjunctive). bu n^iirbeft miiffen, " bu mii^tefl er tDiirbc miiffen, " er mii^te toir n)iirbcn miiffen, " h)ir mii^ten i^r tt?iirbet miiffen, *' i^r mii^tet fie toilrben miiffen, '* fic mii^ten Perfect Tense. I would or should have been obliged, etc. \^ tDiirbe gcmit^t Dabcn, or id? ^iittc gcmit^t {PI Sub.). bu tcilrbcj't gemu^t ^aben, er tt)ilrbe gemuf^t baben, ton tciirben gemu^t ^abcn, i^r tciirbct gcmu^t ^aben, fie iDiirben gemu^t ^aben, bu bvitteft gemu^t er ^vitte gemnf^t trir fatten gcmugt ibr ^cittet gemu^t fic fatten gemufjt 354 THE VERB. [§ 175-177. INFINITIVE MOOD. Pres. mujfen, to be obliged, etc. I Perf. OCmu|^t ftttku, to have been I obliged. PARTICIPLES. Pres, mitffenb, being obliged. | Perf. gtlttUp, obliged. 10. SYNTAX OF THE VERB. § 175. The verb agrees with its subject in person and number : (£r gcl^t nad^ bcr @tabt, He is going to the city. Exc. \ . The pronouns e^, H^f btC^ (bicfc^)^ iua§, ttllC^, when used indef- initely as the subject of the verb, do not control the number or person of the verb : :3^ Mn eg, (Sic finb e§, It is I, it is they. S)a6 finb metne 9ffic^ter (@(^.), Those are my judges. 2BefentItd;e gef)Ier bicfe^ (^effOf Important mistakes these. Exc. 2. Courtly and official titles, though in the singular (as SJZajefiat, ^o^eit, SjccettensX have a plui-al verb : (Slier 3)Zaieftat gerukn, Your Majesty is graciously pleased. Rem. 1 . When, of two or more subjects in different persons, one of them is in the first person, the verb should be in the first person plural: 2)U, bein S3ruber unb ic^ iDolIcn Thou, thy brother and I, will (i. e.j (n)ir iDotten) f))a3ieren gebeu, we will) take a walk. Bern. 2. When one subject is in the second and the others are in the third person, the verb should be in the second person plural: ®U, bein SSruber unb betne @^tr)C* Thou, thy brother and thy sister, fter feib (i^r jeib) eingetabcn, are (i. e., you are) invited. § 176. Some verbs, that are transitive in English, and, as such, govern the objective case, are rendered by in- transitive or reflexive verbs in German, and govern the genitive or dative case (§178, 179). § 177. The following verbs govern the Accusative Case: 1. All transitive verbs (§ 118, 1 ; § 83, 1) : @r licft baS S3ud^, He reads the book. § 177.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 355 2. Verbs used in expressing weighty measure^ cost, time when, and time how long : 68 bauertc etnCll Xag, It lasted a day. eg triegt tin ^j^fuub, It weighs a pound. ^ot«bam liegt Uicr 3JlCtIcn toon Potsdam lies four (German) miles 53crlin from Berlin. eg !oftet etncn X^alCr, it costs a thaler. Sr fommt bicfcn 2it)Cnb, He comes this evening. Rem. 1. When the time of the occurrence of an event is particularly speci- fied, it is put in the accusative case; when it is indicated in a general way, it is put in the genitive case : (Sr fommt biCfCIl 5(bcnb, He comes this evening. Gr fommt oft bC^ SJJorgcn^, He often comes in the morning. Rem. 2. The accusative case is used (mostly in connection with such ad- verbs as tntlattHf ^inflUf, l^Crab) to express the direction given to the action indicated by the verb : er gc^t ben ©erg l^tuauf, He goes up the mountain. 3. Many impersonal verbs, as : 2)iirftcn, to make thirsty. ongefien, to concern, bungcrii, to make hungry. jammern, to grieve, fricrcn, to make cold. toerbrte{3en, to vex. fd;Icifern, to put to sleep. fc^merjen, to pain, frcuen, to make happy. hMinbern, to surprise. (5^ fricrt mid;, I am cold. ©g ttunbcrt mid;, it surprises me. 4. The reflexive pronouns of most reflexive verbs is put in the accusative case : ^6) freue mic^, I rejoice. @ic frcucn fi(^, you rejoice. Rem. 1. Some intransitive and impersonal verbs are sometimes used with a transitive signification, taking an object Jn the accusative case: Sr ging fcincn 9Bcg, He went his way. eg regnet ©tcinc, It rains stones, er ttjcinte bittcrc ^^^rancn, He wept bitter tears. Rem. 2. The verbs Ic^rCIt and frcgCIl may govern two accusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing: er le^rte mid; bic 2J?ufif, He taught me music. 2)ag fragc ic^ bi^, I ask you that. Rem. 3. The verbs ncnnCH, ^ICi^CH, ft^CltCH, [(^in^jfcn, taufCH, govern two accusatives, both referring to the same person or thing : er nanntc mid) fcincn ^reunb, He called me his friend. 2)ag ncnnft bu arbcitcn ? Do you call that working ? 356 THE VERB. [§ 178. Rem. 4. For verbs governing the accusative and genitive cases see § 178, 2: for those governing the accusative and dative see § 179, 2. § 178. The following verbs govern the Genitive Case: 1. The following intransitive verbs: 5l(^ten, to regard. entratben, to do without, ^^ftegcn, to foster. bebilrfen, to need. cjeme^en, to enjoy. fc^onen, to spare. bege^ren, to desire. gefc^toeigen, to pass by j:|3otten, to mock. brauc^en, to want. in silence. tierfe^Ien, to fail. gcbraud^en, to use. getca^ren, to observe. ijergeffen, to forget. gebenfen, to think. barren, to wait upon. tca^ren, to guard. tenfen, to think. lad^en, to laugh. tr)al^rne^men,toobser\'e. €ntbet;ren, to do without, (o^nen, to reward.' XooXXtn, to nile. /vmangeln, to fail. tnangetn, to fail. luarten, to attend. 2)a§ 2Betb bebarf tn SrtegegnotI;en In the horrors of war woman needs bC^ ^eft^ii^Cr^ (®c^Of a protector. (^te f^otten mcincr, ^rinj I You deride me, prince! Rem. 1. Of these verbs only ertttan0Cltt and JJCfC^tOCtgCll are used exclu- sively with the genitive case. The others were also formerly used only with the genitive case, and are yet used with it in poetry and other dignified styles of composition. They are at present, however, generally used as follows : 1 . Transitively, and followed by the accusative case (the verb generally receiving a different signification when used transitively from that which it has when used intransitively) : filter S3clctbtgung tergeffcn, To forget (intentionally) an injury. (Sine S^a^rC^Sa^I DCrgCffCn, To forget the number of a year. 2. Or they are used intransitively and are followed by certain prepositions, which govern their appropriate cases, as: benfen (geben!en), by aHJ ad^ten, barren, tralten,by auf ; lac^en, j:|)otten, toalten, by iidcr: SSer bcr ®Cfal^r l^ottet, gebenft Who scoffs at danger is mindful of il^rcr ; ber tocAixt §elb aber bcnft it ; but the true hero does not gar nidjt an biC ®tf 0|ir, think at all of danger. 2lEe lac^en itbcr fcine %\]^x\)t\if All laugh at his folly. Rem. 2. The verbs fcttt, ttCrbCll, ICbCH, ftcrbcn, UxbltX^tXl, are followed by the genitive in some expressions, as : 3c^ bin bcr SJlCtnung, ba^— I am of the opinion that- @r ftarb cineS ^ti5^It^en ^XobC§, He died a sudden death. 2. The following transitive verbs require, in addition to the accusative of the person, the genitive of the thing : 5ln!tagcn, to accuse. befc^etben, to inform, crtaffeit, to discharge, bele^ren, to inform. bejd;ulbtgcn, to accuse. crlebigen, to release, berauben, to rob. bcjei^en, to accuse. entlaffen, to free from berk^tcn, to inform. entbtnben, to free from, enttebigen, to free from. § 178.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 357 (oSf^rcd^cn, to acquit, niai^nen, to remind. ilberful;ren, to convict, ilber^cbeu, to exempt, iibermeifeu, to convict, iiberjcu^en, to convince, terjagen, to drive out. ijevflagen, to accuse. Nothing can free him from his oath. bcrftd^crn, to assure, ijcrtrbften, to delude. toern?eifcn, to banish, tuiirbigeu, to deem worthy. lt\i)tn, to accuse. (^and others.) cntblc^cii, to strip. ciitbeben,to exonerate, cntflciteu, to disrobe, cntlaben, to disburden, cntfe^en, to displace. entanM^ncn, to wean, frcijpred^cn, to acquit, gcmal^licn, to remind. gad^ts tanu i^n feinc^ 6(^»)Ur^ entbinbcn, Tlan ^at i^n bC^ §0(^l)Crrat5S They have charged him with high angc!(agt, treason. Rem. 1 , Some of these verbs may be followed by the dative of the person and the accusative of the thing (§ 1 79, 2) : 2)0^ tocrfid;ere irf^ 3I)ttCn, I assure you of that. Rein. 2. The genitive is often replaced by a preposition (as UOIl, ilttt^ auf, Qlt), which is followed by its appropriate case : 'D'cidUS faum i^n jeineS ®d)tDur8 Nothing can release him from his (or toon fcincm orgefommen toorge^en, to outstrip. ijortommen, to occur. t»iberf;|)red;en, to contra- gu^bren, to listen to. [diet. (and others.) It pleased me very much. It has just occurred to me. 2. Many (simple and compound) transitive verbs gov- ern, in addition to a direct object in the accusative case, an indirect object in the dative case : 33orgen, to borrow. Iciffett, to leave. tnetben, to announce, bringen, to bring. lei^en, to loan. ne^men, to take, gebcn, to give. Uefern, to dehver. rauben, to rob. flagen, to complain. lol^nen, to reward. f^Sen, to sav. § 179, 180.] SYNTAX OP THE VERB. 359 fd;cnfen, to present. fie^tcn, to steal. i^Wn, to pay. ft^icfcn, to send. trcigern, to refuse. jcigcn, to show, fc^reibeil, to write. tt)ibmen, to dedicate. (and many others.') (5r brad;te mir ben 53ricf, He brought me the letter. 3c^ fc^icfte il)m baa 33uc^, I sent him the book. ^J)ian raubtc i^m ba6 ®clb, They robbed him of his money. :io.v]eben, to deliver. eiflaren, to explain. uutevfageii, to forbid, aubietcn, to offer. cr^ablcn, to relate. toertrerfeii, to reproach. aiijcigen, to announce. (je]'tc(;cn, to confess. Dorjcigcu, to show, barbicten, to proffer. mitt^cilen, to impart, jufagcu, to promise, cntrei^en, to wrest. nac^fagcu, to repeat, jufdjreiben, to ascribe. cnipfcl;Icn, to recommend, nac^fe^en, to indulge. (and many others.) 3c^ erja^Ite i^m bic ®ef(^i(^te, I related the story to him. (Sr ^attc un^ bie 9^ad;rid;tcn mit* He had communicated the news gct^cilt, to us. Rem. 1. If the verb is placed in the passive voice, the indirect object still remains in the dative case : 2)ic ^'Jad^rid^teu tuurbeu un^ utit* The news was communicated to us. gct^eilt, Rem. 2. Some reflexive verbs (§ 158, Rejn. 2) have the reflexive pronoun (:i.s the indirect object) in the dative case(§ 174, 4): ^df bilbete e§ mir ein, I imagined it (to myself). Rem. 3. Some impersonal verbs are followed by the dative case : (53 a[;iict mir, I have misgivings. 3JJir fd;annbeU, I am dizzy. Rem. 4, The dative of the person is used after many verbs (as jeilt, tucrbeit, gc^en, crge^en, ftebcn, fi^eii) and after many verbal expressions (as letb t^un, wci} tbun, iBovt ^vilten, ju §illfe tommcii), thus: SS iff mir nid;t n?o^(, I am not well. @S get^t i^m ganj gut, It goes very well with him. 9Bie fi^t mir baS S?Ieib ? How does the dress fit me ? 2)a8 tbut mir fc^r leib, I am very sorry for that. § 180. Some verbs are followed by the dative or the accusative case, according to the signification with which they are used: ( 3c^ toerfic^crte itjit, I insured him. (3c^ i)erfid;crte i^m, I assured him. ( Xxaut m6)t bcm du^crcn ©d^ctn, Do not tmst outward appearances. ( Dcr '^rcbigcr traut ha^ ^raut^aar^ The preacher marries the couple. Rem. A few verbs may be used mth the dative or accusative without differ- ence of signification : (5r le^rtc mi(^ bie 9Jiufif, He taught me music. Sr Ic^rte mir bie aKufi!, " " '* " 360 THE ADVERB. [§ 181-183. THE ADVERB. (Sag %hmhmnu) § 181. There are but few primitive adverbs. The chief of these are : 1. The following particles (all of which, however, except ah and till, are used also as prepositions) : %f)f down, downward, htl, about, nearly. um, about, past, at an end. an, on, up, forward, burc^, through, thoroughly. Dor, forward, formerly, auf, up, upward. tU (tin) in. JU, too, also in the direc- au^f out, at an end. m^f after, afterward. tion of. 2Bir toerben ah unb ju ge^en, We will go to and fro (up and down). 3Son mm an, From this time forward. Sa^X au^f Qai)X Cin, From one year to another. 3c^ fenne i^n tJUrd) unb burt!^, I know him most thoroughly, [merly. S'ia^ tt)ie \iOVf (Afterward as before) now as for- 2. The adverbs ja, C^e, oft, tiun, ^^c./ ^df jc Cl^Cr, je Ueber, Yes, the sooner the better. 2)a§ tft oft gefd;e^en, That has often happened. 35on nun an, From this time forward. § 182. Most Adverbs are formed (by inflection, deriva- tion, and composition) from nouns, adjectives, numerals, pronouns, verbs, prepositions, and adverbs. Mem. Of some adverbs the derivation is " no longer felt" (§ 49, 2, Rem. 1 ), as : 6 alb, soon (from the Goth, and O.-G. adj. hald=hold ; M.-G. hald=rapid). tannt^ scarcely : M.-G., kume ; O.-G., ehumo (from the adj . kum = sick, weak). fCl^r, very: M.-G., ser; O.-G., sero (from the adj. ser=painful, which is from the Old-German noun das ser = the sore, the pain). § 183. Adverbs are formed from Nouns: 1. The genitive case of some nouns is used adverbi- ally (§ 81, 2,4), as: SWorgcn^ (beS 2JJorgeng), in the morning (gen. of bcr 2Rorgcn, morning). 5((JCnb^ (be§ 5lBenb§), in the evening (gen. of ber 5lbenb, evening. anf ang§, in the beginning, at first (gen. of ber Slnfang, beginning). tljCil^, partly, in part (gen. of ber ^(;eil, part). § 183.] FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 361 Rem. 1. Sometimes the genitive of an adjective or an adjective pronoun and the genitive of a noun are joined together into one word (§ 89, Rem. 1) : !cinc«er, bic, bag = this, thatj. Rem. 3. ^a, bdntt^ and bOtt are formed from the demonstrative pro- noun htXf bic, bflif {Gothic sa, so, thata; accusative thana, tho, thata). Rem. 4. SBfllin and tOO are formed from ttCf, who. Rem. f). The indefinite pronouns UiCl^ tOCntg, O^^Ug^ and CtlOd^ are often used adverbially (§ 112) : (Sr ift UiCi gri5^cr alg t(^, He is much taller than I am. :^ie ®cfd;id;te bcr @tabt ijt nur The history of the city is only a little ttCnijJ befauut, known. 2)a8 Xud; ift md;t breit gCnitO^ The cloth is not wide enough. @r tear Cttoa^ aufgerecjt, He was somewhat excited. § 187. Derivative Adverbs are found by means of the terminations =cn, =ling§, =U(^» 1. The termination =cn is employed in forming adverbs from a few other adverbs: 3lu§cn, without, outward (from auS). oBcn, above, aloft (from ob). inncn, within, inward (from in). l^intcu, behind (from (;in^. untcn, under, below (from unter). born, before (from bor). 2. A few adverbs are formed by adding =Itng§ to ad jectives, nouns, or verbs: SBIinblingS, blindly, rashly, at random (from bitnb, blind). ^au^tlincjS, head foremost, head over heels (ba6 ^au^t, head), rittlingg (reitliiugS), astride, astraddle (veiten, to ride). [back). ril(fling§, backward, from behind (ber Slilcf, ohs. from §iu(fen, meud^Iingg, insidiously, like an assassin (nieiic^eln, to assassinate). 3. Many words with the termination Ax^ are used only adverbially (§ 86, 2, 6), as : grcilic^, certainly, indeed. fd^trerlid^, scarcely, hardly, cnblic^, finally, at last. jfld^crlic^, certainly, surely, filrjlic^, shortly, recently. tt)a^rlic^, truly, really. § 188. Of the many ways in which Compound Adverbs may be formed, the following are most important : 1. By uniting two nouns (especially with SBcifc, a way or manner, for the last noun) : ©c^er^trcife, jocosely, in fun, in jest (bcr ©d^crj, joke, bte SSeifc, way). f^Otttrcifc, mockingly, derisively (ber ©pott, derision, bic SBcifc, way) tro^>feuttjeijc, in drops, by drops (ber Slro^jfen, drop, bic SSeifc, way). 364 THE ADVERB. [§ 188. 2. By uniting an adjective and a noun: ©lei^taUS, likewise, also (§ 183, 1) (gleid;, like ; ber ^aU, case). grb^tent^eil§, for the most part (gri3|3ten, greatest ; ber X^cil, part;. gerabeStregS, straightway (gerabe, straight; ber SBeg, way). 3. A numeral and a noun (especially 9Jlal, see § 105) : @inmal, once, once on a time. breimat, three times. 4. By uniting an adjective pronoun and a noun: Menfallg (§ 1 83, 1, Hem. 6), at all metnerfeitS (§ 183, 1 ), for my part. jebenfattS, in any case, [events, jeberjeit (§ 183, 1 ^Rem.), at all times. 5. By uniting a preposition and a noun : ^IbfeitS (§ 183, 1), apart, to one side. beijetten(§ 183, 1, 2), betimes, in good time, earh', soon. bi^toeilen, at times, at intervals, occasionally, now and then. l)interriicfg, from behind, behind one's back, underhandedly. iiberijau^t, in general, on all occasions, in the main, at all. ilbermorgeu, day after to-morrow. gUiDeileil, at times, sometimes, occasionally. 6. By uniting a preposition and a pronoun: 3nbef[en, in the mean time. iiberbieg, besides, moreover. 7. By uniting a noun and an adverb (or preposition) : SSergauf, up the mountain. jabreiu, ) year in, year out. bergab, down the mountain. ja^rauS, ) from one year to anothsr. ftromauf, up stream. !o:|3fitber, head foremost, ftromab, down stream. fo^funter, headlong. 8. By uniting two adverbs: Sllgbalb, immediately. ebenfojust so. t>ter[elbft, exactly here. jogteid;, immediately. bafelbft, exactly there. fobalb, as soon (as), bennoc^, however. i)tet(ei(t)t, perhaps, ^ier^er, hither. bort^tn, thither, herein, in (hither). ^inein, in (thither). l^erauS, out (hither). ^tnau«, out (thither). 9. By uniting two prepositions : 2)urc^aug, entirely. t>orbet, past, over (finished). tnjtDtfc^en, in the mean time. toriiber, " *' " 10. By uniting an adverb and a preposition : ^terburd;, by this means. baburdb, thereby, bieruad;, according to this. tDoburd;, whereby. § 188.] FORMATION OP ADVERBS. 365 Rem. 1. Compound adverbs, formed by xmiting the adverb b (I and a prepo- sition, are usually employed instead of the dative and accusative of the de- monstrative pronoun bCf, biC, bfli? (§ ll-» 2, -^ew. 3), when used absolutely, and not referring to a person ; if the preposition begins with a vowel, the original X (bflt, see § 18G, Rem. 1) is retained: 2)abci, thereby, by that, by it, by them (Jor bet bem, bei ben). baburd^, thereby, by this or those means ( " burd; bag, biird; tie), bafilr, for that, for this, instead of that ( " fUr ba«, fiir bic). bagcgcn, against this, against that ( " gegen ba«, gegcii bie). bamit, therewith, with that, with them ( " mit bem, mit ben), baton, thereon, thereby, by it, by them (^ " an betn, an bie). barauf, thereupon, thence, from that ( " auf bcm, auf ben). barau3, therefrom, thence, out of this ( " aug bem, au§ ben), barin, therein, within, in it, in that ( " in bem, iii ben). bariiber, thereover, thereupon, over that ( " iiber ba§, ilber bic). barum, for that reason, therefore, for that ( " um bag, um bie). barunter, thereunder, among it, among them ( " unterbem,unterben), bai)cn, therefrom, thence, from it, from them ( " ton bem, toon ben), battoiber, against this, that, or them ( " ttoiberbas, ttoiber bie). bajU, thereto, from that purpose, to that ( " jU bem, JU ben), bajttoifd^en, there between, between them ( " jttoifc^en ben). Rem. 2. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad- verb \\\tX nnd prepositions, instead of the dat. and ace. of the demonstrative pronoun bitfcr (§111), when used absolutely and not referring to persons: ^ierbei, hereby, by this, by these (J(n' bei biefem, bei biefen). bierburc^, " " " *' " ( " burd) biefcS, bnrd; bicfe). ^iermit, herewith, with this, with these ( " mit biefem, mit biefen). etc., etc., etc., etc., etc. Rem. 3. Compound adverbs are formed in the same manner with the ad- verb too and prepositions, to take the place of the dative and the accusative of the absolute inten-ogative and relative pronoun tofl^ (§113, 1, Rem. 2): SSarum, why, on what account, for which, for what {for um n)a§). ttoobei, whereby, at which, at what, during what ( " bei tt'g/w). ttoobnrc^, whereby, by what means, through what ( " burd; tt)ag). toofilf, wherefore, for which, for what ( " filr tcaS). ttoogcgcn, against which, against what ( " gcgen ttoaS). ttoomit, wherewith, with or by which or what ( " mit wZm), toonad^, whereupon, after or for which or what ( " nad^ w'dm), tooran, whereon, by which w what, on what ( " an tr»ag). ttooranf, whereupon, upon which, upon what ( " auf tt)ag). ttoorauS, wherefrom, whence, out of which or what ( " ouS whn). ttocrin, wherein, in which, in what ( *' in ttoaS). ttoorilbcr, whereupon, upon or at which or what ( *' ilbcr ttoaS). ' ttootoon, whereof, from or of which or what ( " toon wSm\ ttoogu, whereto, why, to or for which or what ( " JU w'im\ 36B THE ADVERB. [§ 188, 189. Obs. The dative offtja^ (O.-G., hwerau; M.-G., wem) is obsolete in the N.-G. (§ 1 13, 1). For the dative with a preposition, the compound adverbs to m 1 1, 10 n a c^, id o g u, etc. , must be used. 11. Some compound adverbs have been so modified and contracted that their origin is ^'?w longer felt ^"^ as : ^eute, to-day (il/.-6^.,hiute; O.-G^., hiuto; cow /r ./ro//i hiu tagfi, on this day). immer, ever {M.-G.^ iemer; O.-G., iomer=:jentC^r=ever more). (JtDar (truly) (M.-G., zeware; O.-G., zi ware := in 2!3abr^ett= in truth). me, never (M.-G., nie; O.-G., nio; Goth., ni aiv=:not ever). nur, only (M.-G., neur, neuver ; O.-G., ni ware=md^t tocire, or tocnn t9 nic^t toare). nein I no ! (M.-G., nein ; O.-G., nein [from niein=md)t ein§=not once]). mmmer,never (ilif.-G^., niemer ; O.-G., niomeri^nte it me{)r=not ever more), trgcnb, any where (M.-G. , iergent ; O.-G. , io wergin=at any place), nirgenb, nowhere (Jf.-(^., niergent ; O.-G., ni iowergin = not ever at-a-place). 12. Some compound adverbs are formed by joining several words into one word : 3n§Befonbere, especially, in particular (in baS 33efonbere). inSgefammt, altogether, collectively, in a body (in bag ©efammte). ingfiiuttige, for the future, henceforth (in bag ^itntttge). infofern, as far as, in as much as (in fo fcm). Rem. In German, as in English, there are many adverbial expressions that have received conventional adverbial meanings, while the words iiavo remained separate : S)urd; unb burrf?, entirely. tn ber %f)at, in fact. nad; unb narf;, gradually. in @tle, in haste. luv §anb, at hand. nttt glei^, industriously. toor ber §anb, for the present. ju §auje, at home. O^ne B^S^f^^f without doubt. gur gfJot^, if needs be. 1. CLASSIFICATION OF ADVERBS. (©tnt^cUung ber %h\)txUtn.) § 189. The following are the leading classes into which adverbs are divided with reference to their sig- nification : 1. Adverbs of time, as: SBann ? when ? SSie lange ? how long ? 2Bte oft, how often ? je^t; now. jc, ever. oft, often, ^eutc, to-day. nte, never. felten, seldom, bann, then. tmmcr, always. jumeilcn, at times. H8icbcr, again. nod?maI, again, eiiimal, once, jtneinial, twice, mel^rnial^, several times. jeitlebeiie, as long as one mand^mal, often, lives. ftiinbiid;, hourly, cwig, eternally. taglid;, daily, eanglid;, eternally. n)i)d;entlic^, weekly. i3oa iiuii an, from now monatlid;, monthly, forward. jal^rlid;, yearly. I have gone to the city twice day. to 2. Adverbs of place, as: SSo ? where ? SKober I whence ! ^icr, here, ba, there, bort, yonder, ba^eim, at home, oben, above, uiitcu, below, ^intcn, behind. Vorn, in front, brau^cn, without, brinnen, within, gu §viufe, at home. 9iirgenb, nowhere. ^cr, hither, herein, (hither) in. ^crauS, (hither; out. i^crab, (hither) down, ^cruuter, (hither) down, bon oben, from above, toon unten, from below, bon ^inten, from behind, ton born, from in front, toon fern, from afar, toon oben ^crab, from SSo^in? whither? ^in, thither, ^inciu, (thither) in. ^inau**, (thither) out. ^inab, (thither) down. toorn^artS, forward, rttcfroart^, backward. ^eimtricirtS, homeward, fort, forward. h)Ctter, further. na(^ oben, (toward) above, nad) unten, (toward) below, nad^ §aufc, home (-ward). above, from on high 2)0rt ift ber 3agcr, Yonder is the hunter. SSarum ttJittft bu braU^CU ftc^cn? Why will you stand out there? 3. Adverbs of manner and degree, as : 2Bic?how? ja, yes. fc^r, very, fo, thus, 80. flCttoi^, certainly.' gang, quite. cbenfo,just 80. flcberlid), certainly. gtemtic^, quite. anbcr8, otherwise. freilic^, of course. toicl, much. Iciest, easily. bocb, certainly. tt)Cntg, little. \6)tDtx, with difficulty. ttoirttid), really. genug, enough. fc^ncU, rapidly. ttoa^rtjaftig, really. ctttoa, somewhat, langfam, slowly. nctn, no. rcrf^t, right, fd^riftlic^, in writing. nid^t, not. ^Bd^ft, extremely, brieflic^, by letter. fetncSmegS, by no means, ttocnigften^, at last. 35tc 3llpen fiiib fc^r ^o6f, The Alps are very high. 30, C8 ift tDirflid) fo, Yes, it is really so. Rem. Most adjectives, when used adverbially, become adverbs of manner. 368 ' THE ADVERB. [§ 189, 190. 4. Adverbs expressive of cause^ means^ or instrument (being mostly compounds of nJO, t)a, and l^ier with prep- ositions), as: SSoran? whereupon? baran, thereupon. I^teran, hereupon. tDobet ? whereby ? babet, thereby. ^terbet, hereby, tpoburc^? whereby? baburc^, thereby. ^ierburc^, hereby, icofiir ? why? bafiir, therefore. l^ierfilr, for this, tcomit? with what? bamit, therewith. ^ierttlit, with this, tconad; ? according to what? banad;, accordingly. ^iernad;, by this, tcoriiber? about what? bariiber, about that. ^ieriiber, about this. tDotoon ? from what? bat>on, from that, ^terton, from this. tDarum?why? barum, therefore. bterum, about this. iDoju ? for what purpose ? bap, for that. ^ierju, from this, toe^toegen? on what account ? be§tt)egen,on this or that account. 5leg^:>5ten h)trb babur(!^ (burd; ben Egypt is thereby (by the mud of the @c^(amm be§ SkW^) befruc^tet— Nile) made fertile— 2)ie Umbrei)ung ber @rbe h)irb am The revolution of the earth is best beften barau^ benjtejen— proved by that— 2. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS, (©tciocrung kr 5lbucrlitcn0 § 190. Adjectives, when used adverbially, are compared in the same way as when they are used adjectively: ^OC^, highly; p^Ct, more highly; p^ft, most highly. fC^iJU^ beautifully ; f C^bnCf^ more beautifully ; fc^onft^ most beautifully. 1. The relative adverbial superlative is formed by uniting am (an t)em) with the dative of the superlative : 2)te Serd;e fingt fc^blt, The lark sings beautifully. [fully. S)er 5^anarientoogeI fingt fc^lbuct, The Canary-bird sings more beauti- 2)ie 9^ad)ttgaII fingt ttttl f dionften, The nightingale sings most beautifully. 2. The absolute adverbial superlative is indicated in four ways: 1. By the simple superlative form : (3c^) ban!e gc^rfamft, "I thank you most obediently." Rem. In ttlCtftbietenb, IbeftmiJgltd), and na(i^[tfotgenb, however, the superla- tive has a relative signification. 2. By uniting auf§, pill, im (aiif fca§, gu bem, in bem), with the super- lative : @r ^at un6 auf^ frCUnbIi(!^[te ge^^ He greeted us in the most friendly grii^t, way. !Rt^t ivx geriltgftcn, Not in the slightest degree. § 191-194.] SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 369 3. By the superlative with the ending sfH^ (§ 184, Rem. 2) ; aWac^e bod; ttJCnigftCn^ ben 35erfud;I Make at least the attempt] Hem. The use of this form is mostly confined to the adverbs bcflcnS, t>5d;ften8, langftenS, ftieiftenS, ndd;ften8, f^dteftenS, tot* n i g ft e n 8. 4. By the use of the positive degree preceded by such adverbs as fcl^t, linncmcin, iiuDerft, Ijbt^ft, etc dx war iiu^crft aufgcregt, He was greatly excited. § 191. Of words that are not used otherwise than as adverbs, the only one that is compared is oft^bttcr^oftcft* Rem. The comparative degree with a genitive ending (OftCt^) is frequently used in the signification of oft (in the positive degree). For the superlative (bftcft) the word ^Sufigft is generally used. 3. SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. ( ntctjt ba, and he is not here yet. ^err 5Bei^ ift nad) ^rag gegangcn; Mr. Weiss has gone to Prague ; he er mn^ fc^on ba fein, must be there by this time. SSon ba an, From that time forward. Rem. ^fl is often used as a conjunctive adverb (or a conjunction) : S)a (cory'.) noc^ 5ttte§ lag in tt)et* While all lay in far distance, then ter ^erne, you had decision and courage; 2)a {adv.) ^atteft bu (Sntfd^tn^ unb and now, when success is insured, SDfJut^ ; now you begin to faint and Unb jeljt, '^d (conj.) ber @rfoIg ge* tremble. ftcijert ift, 3)c {adv.) fangfi bu an gu jagen (@c^.)# J 195.] SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 371 2. ©rft, when signifying ^r^^ or firstly^ and indicating tiie priority of one action to another, receives a full tone of voice : ©rft 2Borte, unb bonn Strcid^c (® c^.)/ First words and then blows (" deeds"). Rem. Signifying only, not earlier^ not further^ not more^ Ctft does not re- ceive a full tone of voice: er ift e r ft gcftcrn ongcfommcn, He only arrived yesterday, er ift C r ft jciu 3tt^rC alt, He is only ten years old. 3. The affirmative adverb ja {yes) is often used in the signification of certainly {I hojpe that), indeed: ^at er e8 getf>an ? ^la ! Has he done it ? Yes ! @ic tt)Crben ja tommcn, You will certainly (I hope) come. (Sr ift ja mein 35atcr I Why, he is my father ! 4. 9Zo(^ {still, yet), used before numerals or indefinite pronouns, is translated by more or another in English: 3fd; (?abe nO(^ eine Stttc, I have another request. Sr bat notft StDei 33iic^er gcfauft, He has bought two books more. Rem. 9lOC^ ffl is translated by however, ever so: @ei er aud; noc^ fo rcid^, Be he ever so rich. 5. ©(^on {already) is frequently omitted in translat- ing into English : @r ift ft^on angctommeu, He has already arrived. (Sr if! f^on gcftent Slbenb 3Urii(f=' He returned (already) yesterday gefommen, evening. Rem. @^0n often expresses emphasis (as of confidence or certainty) : @ie tuerben tnid^ f(!^on i)erjicl;en, You will (I hope) have understood ©d^On ben folgenben aJJorgen— The very next morning— [me. 6. SBol^l (-i^^ZZ) frequently expresses logical jpossibility or jyrohability : ^c^Iafcn ®ie ttO^I! (May you sleep well!)=good-nightJ @« fann too^I fcin, It may (indeed) be. ®ic baben cS tool^I S^tcfen, You have read it (I suppose). Rem. SBoIll sometimes is used to express intensity or emphasis : 3<^ mo(!bte lOO^l toiffcn, I should really Uke to know. 3a ttO^l ! Yes ! (Yes, mdeed !) 372 THE PREPOSITION. [196. PREPOSITIONS. (Sic i8orU)orterj § 196. Prepositions are either primitive, derivative^ oi comjpoimd: 1. The primitive prepositions are: art, auf, au^, bet, burd), fitr, irt, mtt, ob, urn, »or, i)ott, p. jRem. 1 . The primitive prepositions were originally adverbs ; all except iJOn are yet used also as adverbs ; at least they may be considered ae such when used as prefixes to compound verbs. Rem. 2. The primitive prepositions have been developed thus : Goth. : ana, iup, ut, bi. (bi-az), thairh. failr, in. O.-G. : ana, uf, uz. bi, biz. duruh, furi, in, M.-G.: ane. uf, ^z. bi. biz. durch, vUr, in, N.-G.: an, auf, oug , bet, m, bur^, filr, in. Goth. : (mith-), nehv, (uf), (af-ana). faura, du, O.-G.: miti, nah, oba, umbi, vona. fora, zuo. M.-G.: mite. nach. obe, umbe, vone, vor, zuo, N.-G.: mtt, na^, oben, um, ton, ijor. 5U. 2. The derivative prepositions are derived as follows: 1. From nouns, as ; ^(dh (^alber, ^alben), fraft, taut, [tatt, trolj, berntoge, tt>egen. 2. From adjectives, as : gemci^, Iang§, nttttels (mittdft, termttlelSf ijermtt» telft), nad;ft, fammt, feit, unfern, untDett. 3. From participles, as : tod^rcnb, nnbefd^abct, ungead)tet. 4. From adverbs, as : au^en, binncn, bi6, gema§, Winter, neben, nebft, o^ne, unter, iiber, 3. Compound prepositions are mostly formed by pre- fixing a preposition or adverb to a noun or to another preposition, as : 2ln[tatt, binnen, «m— tDtHen, an^er^atb, entgegen, pfotge, inner^atb, biegjeit, gntoiber. ober^alb, jenfeit, unter^alb, gegeniiber, Bern. 1 . The derivation and the composition of some prepositions is now "no longer felt" (§ 49, Mem. 8 ; § 223 ; § 233). Rem. 2. Most prepositions that are derived from nouns and adjectives, and most compound prepositions, have had their origin or have first been used as prepositions during the New-German period. § 107, 198.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 373 1. CONSTRUCTION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. OJicction bcr SJonoiirter.) § 197. Prepositions do not govern a single case only (as the objective in Englisli), but they govern the three oblique cases, the genitive, dative, and accusative (§ 80, liei'i. 1) of substantives, whether nouns or pronouns: Slnftatt feiiieS ^rubers (yen.), Instead of his brother. 2Jiit jeiiicm 33iubcr {dat\ With his brother. OI?ue jciuen 33ruticr (ace), Without his brother. Rem. The primitive prepositions especiall}' are not always independent gov- erning words, in the same sense that verbs and adjectives are. But often the preposition that is to be employed, as well as the case it is to govern (as, if accusative or dative), is determined by the preceding verb, adjective, or noun : (Sr fteigt auf ben 33erg, He is climbing up the mountain. (Sr icibct an 9J^eumatiSmu8, He is suffering from rheumatism. @r gebt in bcn ©artcn, He is going into the garden, ©r ift in bcm (im) ©artcn, He is in the garden. § 198. The following prepositions govern the genitive case: 2)ic^fcit, mittcIS (mittclft, utvxxU ticrmogc, jcnfcit, tcl^ or ucrmittclft), toafirciib, iatb(!)a(ficror^al6cn), ftatt (or onftatt), lucgcn, oufjcrijQib, itnbcfdjabct, urn— toittcn, innerl)alb, ungcad^tet, Xiw^^ {or cntlang;, oticrl)Qlt), unttjcit, tro^, untct^alb, unfcrn, jufolge. Rem. 1. The last three, Idng^^ tro^, and JUfoIgt^ may also govern the da- tive case. Rem. 2. The following lines, containing.most of these prepositions, are com- mitted to memory in schools in Germany : Unweit, mittelfl, fraft unb tod^rcnb, laut, sermoge, ungeacfetet, ober^albunbuntcr^alb, innert)alb unb auper^aU, bte^feit, jcnfeit, ^alben, wegcn, jlatt unb Ung^, jufolge, tro^, fle^en mit bcm (Scnitio, obcr auf bie ^^rage „tt)cffen?" — 3)o(^ t|l ^ier m*t iu »ergeffcnf ba§ bei btefcn lectern brei au^ bcr ^o^ rid^tig fei. Rem. 3. None but derivative or compound prepositions govern the gen. caae. 374 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 199-201. § 199. The following prepositions govern the dative case: ^n^f OcntaSf fammt, an^ttf mit, fcit, (tniten, niic^ft; su^ gcgcnii^er, (o^), jutoibcr* ^em. The most important of these are included in the following lines : ©c^reib mit, nad^, ndc^ ft, nelbfl/ fammt, bei, fett, »on, ju, jutwtber, entgegen, au^er, au^ fiet^ mit bem ®atio nteber. § 200. The following prepositions govern the accusor tive case : ^\^f Hx^f fUr, gcgcn, o:^tie, urn, toibcr^ (0cn), (foiibcr), ^ew. They are included in the following lines : S5ei burd^, fiir, o^ne, urn, bt^, fottber, gegen, tuibcr, fc^reib jlet<3 ben ^Iccufatio, unb nie ben ®atit) nteber. § 201. The following prepositions govern either the accusative or the dative case, according to certain rules (§ 244—253) : 5(n, in, untcr, i2em. 1. The following lines, containing these prepositions, contain also the rules for their use : %n, auf, 'Winter, ncben, in, iiber, unter, t)or unb jtoifd^en fie|en mit bem 3lccufatio, tsenn man fragen fann ; ^wol^itt 1" SWtt bem !^otit) flel^n fte fo, Da^ man nur fann fragen „»oo ?" . 202, 203.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 375 2. PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE. (^i^oriobrtcr mit bern (ScnitiuO § 202. J)ie§fcit {this side of) and jcufcit {t?ie other side of heyond), refer only to place : ^iC^fcit beS glu[fe«, On this side of the river. ^[Cnfcit bcS ©cbir^eS, The other side of the mountain. Rem. 1 . They are both used, though rarely, with the dative case : 3 e n f c i t jencm §iigel {2>&i.), The other side of that hill. Rem. 2. The addition of s^ gives an adverbial force to both of them : (gr tDo^nt bicSfeitS, ic^ jenjeitS, He lives on this side, I on the other. Rem. 3. They are both used as nouns, especially in reference to this world and the world to come : (Sin 3cnfeit, baS herein tn8 2)ic«* Another life that extends into this fcit retd^t, " life. § 203. §alb, §alkr, ^dben {on account of for the sake^ as regards) always follow the noun they govern : (5r rcifte nur SSergniigenS ^albcr He went to the Springs only for the in9 53ab, sake of pleasure. 2)e8 ©elbeS ^altltr, For the sake of money. Rem. 1 . ^alfl is rarely used with the force of a preposition except in com- position with a pronoun : SBc^balb? On what accoimt ? ^Sc^^alB, on this account. Rem. 2. ^dlbtt is preferred to !^a((lCn when the noun it governs ends in sCH : (Sr f)at, feiner toielc'n ©c^ulbcn l^dU He had to run away on account of bcr, flicf^cn milffen, his many debts. Rem. 3. ^Ql^Ctt is united with the pronoun it governs into a compound word, taking an unorganic t or tt as letters of union (§ 1 07, Rem. 2) : 'Mtmtthaihtn, on my account. Unfcrtijalben, on our account. Rem. 4. Feminine nouns in sf^tit, =!ctt, ^Ultg, when followed by ]^a(5tr and not preceded by an article or adjective, often take an unorganic ending s£| (after the analogy of some compound nouns, see § 58, 2, Rem. 2): (5r rcifte ®cfunb^eit8 f^alhtt tnS He went to the Springs for the sake Sab, of his health. Rem. 4. ^al6cr is sometimes preceded by Ulll, placed before the noun : Um bc8 gricbcuS Ijalbcr^ For the sake of peace. Rejii. 5. ^albCn is formed from the dative plural hit .^ttlbC {the half, side) ; ^ a I b c r is an irregular form ofbalbcn; ^albisa contraction of the accusative singular (M.-G., halbe^half). 376 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 204-206. § 204. From the accusative of the same noun (btc ^aibe) have been formed the four following prepositions : Slutcr^^alb, outside of, witho.it, beyond. tnnerfjall), inside of, within. Ot)Cl*f)ttH)^ on the upper side of, above. UntCr^dli), on the lower side of, below. 9^iirnberg bat au^erljalb unb in= Nuremberg has many stately edifices nerl)aifi ber 2)^auern t)iele ftatt* outside of and inside of its wails, tic^e ©ebciube, SSormg liegt obtt^alll; S3ingen Worms lies above, and Bingen be- UntCrljald ber SSunbegfeftung low Mainz, a fortification of the 2)iain5, (German) Confederation. Rem. 1. ^fnnCtl^dlfi may refer also to a specified space of time: ^fnucr^alt) einer ®tunbe, eineg Stages, Within an hour, a day. § 205. ®raft (hy the jpower of^ in virtue of), denotes rather a moral than a physical cause (compare tJermiige, §215): ^raft feineg Stmteg, By virtue of his office. Rem. 1 . ^rflft has become a preposition by the dropping of the preposition in^ which formerly preceded it : „2)a er nic^t in ^raft eineS i)erlte^ As he does not rule by virtue of a (}enen 2lmte8 regiert," borrowed office. Rem. 2. ^tflft (like laut, toertttijge, and bef)uf§) has come from legal language (^ang(eiftl)t) into the language of literature. It was first used by good writers in the seventeenth century. § 206. Sdngg or entlang {along, lengthvme of)\ Siing^ beg 2;^ale8, Along the valley. Sntlang beg SBalbgebtrgeg, Along the forest-covered mountain. Rem. 1 . Both forms are frequently used with the dative case : 2 ci n g g bCttt Ufer, Along the shore. Sntlaitg bCIlt ©trome, Along the stream. Rem. 2, Sctltg^ is occasionally (CntlUltg more frequently than I a n g 6), found with the accusative case : S a n g g bcn @aal ^tltab, Down along the Saal. (gnttangbcn gelfen^fai), Along the rocky path. Rem. 3. ©ntlaitQ frequently /oZ^ows the noun which it governs : {Gen.) 2)eg SBegeg Clltlang, Along the way. {Dat. ) ®em 33ect entlang, Along the parterre. IAcc.) 2)en gan^^jen Scrg etttlattg/ Along the whole mountain. 207-209.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 377 Rem. 4. S'lltldng is sometimes used (with the accusative of noims) indicat- ing time Tmeaning throwjh) : iJiaiid^cii iucjeutlid^en Xag cnt= Through many a day of my youtn. iano (®.), § 207. ^aut {according to^hy the wording of) refers to something spoken or written : iJaut tie« iBefc^le^, According to the order. 2aut be^ ^jertrageS, By the wording of the treaty. Rem. 1. I^QUt is used by some writers also with the dative case : it is es- pecially used with the dative plural of nouns when they are not preceded by an article or by an adjective : {Cen.) 1* au t friiljcrcr ^SriCfC, According to former letters. {Dut.) ^a\i\. ^riCfeU auS meincr §ei= According to letters from my home, niatb, Rem. 2. Saut has passed to be a preposition by dropping the preposition not^ (formerly written nac^ 2 aute=according to the wording), § 208. The four words mxiXtU, mittclft, tjcrmitteig, ter= mittclft have the same meaning {through^ hy means of, through the instrumentality of ) — not referring to per- sons ; see bur(^ (§ 238) : ifijirtamcn mittclft (or termittelft) We reached the shore by means of eincS ^'abneS anS Ufev, a skiff. 2)am^tfd;iffc trerbcn ^aufitj UCts Steam-boats are frequently driven by mittclft einer ®d;raube beirecjt, means of a screw. Rem. I. The form UCtmittClft is most frequently employed; and mittClft is more usual than either UCrmtttCl^, or mittCl^* Rem. 2. The four forms are derived from the Genitive of the adjective mtt^- t C I, which was first used adverbially (§ 107, 2) and then as a preposition. The form to c r ni i 1 1 e 1 ft was current in the 1 7th century ; mi 1 1 e I ft first appears in the writings of Steinbach (1734). Rem. 3. The st is added unorganically to the genitive ending (§ 107, 2). Rem. 4, The provincial use of these prepositions with the dative case, which has occasionally crept into the works of even such writers as Goethe, is not approved by German grammarians. § 209. '^iaii or m\iiiii {instead' of in place of) : 5lnftatt (or ftOtt) fetncS i8ruber8, Instead of his brother. Rem. 1 . The placing of ^Xtiit after the noun it governs, which was very general in the Middle-German, is now considered antiquated: %n feineS 33ruber8 Statt (compare in English, t« his brother's stead). Rem. 2. The noun @tatt (stead) has become a preposition by the dropping of 0n, which formerly was generally employed before it. 378 ' THE PREPOSITION. [§ 210-215. § 210. Sro^ (in spite of, in deficmce of, nothwithstand- ing) : ^ro^ be§ 9?egen§ gtngcn xoxx nac^ In spite of the rain we went to the bem SJiufeum, museum. RerA 1. %IQ1^ indicates more active opposition than ungeac^tet, and is therefore perhaps more properly to be construed with the dative case : %XQ^ bem Serbote, In spite of the prohibition. Rem. 2. ^ro^ has become a preposition by dropping the preposition JU (tti; in jnm %XiS^ (in defiance of). §211. UnBef^ abet {without injury to or detraction from) : ®einer (g^re UnfiCf^abCt^ Without detracting from his honor. Rem. 1. Unbejc^abct may precede or follow the noun it governs. Rem. 2. It is sometimes used with the dative case. § 212. Um-U)illcn {for — 's sake, for the sake of, on ac- count of) : Q6) bitte btd^, Uttt @otte8 tOiUtUf I entreat you, for God's sake, not to e8 uic^t 3U t^un, do it. Um beg griebeng tuttten, For the sake of peace. Rem. Occasionally, though rarely, examples are met with where one par^ ticle (um or tilitlcn) is omitted. § 213. Uttgea^tCt {notwithstanding, in sfpite of, without regarding) : Ungcac^tCt be§ 9?egcnS, gingentoir In spite of the rain we went to the nac^ bem SKufeum, museum. Rem. Ultgeac^tet may precede or follow the noun. § 214. UnttJeit or nnfern (not far from, near) : @r Vooifnt unftm beS Xljoxt^, He lives not far from the gate. UntiJCit be§ 33erge8 Itegt baS S)Drf, The village is not far from the mountain. Rem. 1. The parallel forms ol^niuett, o^nferit, are now rarely used. Rem. 2. U n tt) e i t and U n f e rn are occasionally found used with the dative. Rem. 3. Both words have had their origin during the New-German period. § 215. Seriubge (% virtue of in conformity with, by the 'power of) : 2ltte SiJr^er ftreBen UcrmiigC t^rer All bodies tend towards the center @c^n?ere na(^ bem 9JJitteI:|)un!t of the earth, through their at- ber @rbc traction of gravitation. SJermiigC beS 35ertrage8, By virtue of the treaty. §210-219.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 379' Rein 1. SJcriniJgt mav be used in most cases where froft and IflUt are employed. Rem. 2. 33 c r m i5 g e was originally a noun preceded by n a t!^. § 216. SBd^renb {dui^ng the time of) : ^ohrcnb be« ^riegcS, Dui-ing the war. Rem. 1. SBaftrCnb (from tt) ci^ren, to endure) was first used as a parti- ciple or adjective (as in wcil^renbem ^ricgc) ; it was next used with the quali- Hed noun in the genitive (a>a[)rcnbe8 itriegeS, compare be§ 3)Jorgcn, §81,3); it was first used as a preposition in the last half of the eighteenth century. §217.SBcgen {on account of, for the sake, or purpose of) : SBCQCU tea 5Hegeii§ (or be§ 9JegenS On account of the rain I remained tr>egen) biteb ic^ ju §aufe, at home. [strife. 9iid?t StreitenS U)C()Cn tarn '\6) {>er, I came not here for the purpose of Rem. 1. 2B e g e n can thus either precede or follow the noun. Rem. 2. 2B e g C n has become a preposition by dropping the preposition ft II from Don SBcOCtt^ a form that is now antiquated except in some fixed expressions, as : SBon 5Rcc^t8 toeotn^ For the sake of justice. Rem. 3. SBcgcn is suffixed to the personal pronoun, taking an unorganic s{ or sCt as letters of union (§ 107, Rem. 2): 9y?einctwegen, on my account. ©einctwcgcn, on his account. § 218. 3wfol(JC {in consequence of in pursuanxie of in accordance with) : (5r that bicfcS JUfOlgC mcincS 3luf* He did this in accordance with my tragS, commission. [tions. Bufolge gctragter @^efuIationen, In consequence of rash specula- Rem. 1. When the noun /o//ows JufoIgC^ the noun is put in the dative case : Bnfolgc ber neucften ^ac^rtd)tcn, }^ According to the latest intelli- (or) 2)cn neueften 5^ad?ridjtcn jufolQC,) gence. Rem. 2, Formerly the two words were separated (gu iJ^IfiC)' § 219. Many other words are used as prepositions, governing the genitive case (especially in the language of trade and commerce), as : ^InJiCfK^tS, in view of {from baS 5lngertdjt, face). tiC^Uf^, in behalf of ( " ber 33e^uf, behalf, behoof). namcn^, in the name of ( " ber Sfiamen, name). fCitCn^, on the part of ( " bie 8cite, side). ijtnftdjtltt^, with respect to ( " bie .^inftd)t, respect). rii(fri(itli(^, with regard to ( " bie aiiicffic^t, regard). '380 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 220, 222. 5lngcft^t5 ber ©efa'^r, In view of the danger. 9iamCU^ beg 2lmtmann6, In the name of the officer. ©CttCn^ ber (Slterit, On the part of the parents, ^tnfic^tlt^ ber ^otgen, In view of the consequences. S{ii(lftt^tlt(^ beg SSort^etlg, With regard to the interest. iJem.When used with personal pronouns, the formfttt^ (instead of (citCU^). is employed (§ 101)) : 2)leincr f e i t g, for my part. @etner j e i t g, on his side. 3. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE CASE. (SBorioijrter mit bcm 2)attD.) §220. Wu§ {put of, from) primarily refers to place, indicating origin, source, or the place whence : 5lU§ ber @tabt fommen, To come out of the city. (Sr ftanmit mi einer eblen gamilie, He comes from a noble family. Rem. 1. 51 u g sometimes is used as referring to a period of time: (Sin 2)td;ter au§ bem bretje^nten A poet of the thirteenth century. 3a^rl;uiibert, Rem. 2. It often refers to the material or to the parts of a thing : Stn ®efa^ mi 2:f)on, A vessel of clay. 2)er SJJenjc^ Befte^t mi Setb Ultb Man cdsnists of body and soul. ®eele, Rem. 3. It may refer to the inner motive cause of an action : @r ^anbeli jo au^ ®sij, He does so from avarice. Rem. 4. It may refer to the material or parts of a thing: Od) erfe^e mi f einem SSrtefe, ba^ I see from his letter, that he is sick, er Iran! t[t, 3)a8 tuei^ tcb mi ©rfa^rung, That I know from experience. § 221. Wu^cr (pitt of outside of heyond, excejpt) refers only to position — not to motion : 5lu|cr bem ^aiife JU fein, To be out of the house. (Sr t[t m^tX ©efa^r, He is out of danger. 5lMf Cr t^m, ^aben 5lt[e t^re ^flic^t All except him have done their get^an, duty. Rem. Stu^cr (Mid.-Ger., ftzer; Old-Ger.,tz&r) is from the Old-Ger., HZ (aug), the ar being a derivative syllable. § 222. S5ct {near.^ at., with) refers only to position— not to motion : S9ct bem §aii je [te^t etn S3aum, Near the house stands a tree. 3n ber ©c^Iad^t Iiei Set^jig, In the battle of (near) Leipsic § 223-225.] PREPOSITIONS with the dative case. 381' Rem. 1. S3ci may indicate approximation, connection, possession, etc. t (Sr wo^nt iJCi mir, He resides with me. 3d? l;abe tcin @elb bci tnir, I have no money with me. S3ci biefer ^fiac^ric^t, At this news. Rem. 2. 33ci is used in making oaths or protestations : isBci nieincr (g^re, Upon (by) my honor. § 223. JJ3inncn {within,i7isideof) refers only to definite periods of time : ^innen eiucr@tunbc tocrbe it^ Within an hom- I will take my de- abreifcn, parture. Sinncn c t n e m 3 a ^ r C, "Within a year. Rem. 1. 53inncn (M.-G., binncn), has come from the Lower- Gerjnan(^i) into the High-German (§ 6), and is a compound of be innen (bet iuneil). Rem. 2. The reference to space originally indicated by btnn C n is now re- tained only in such compounds as : 2)cr ^inncnfee, inland sea. S)aS JBinncntaub, the interior part of a country. § 224. (?ntgcgcn (towards, against) expresses a direc- tion of or tendency to a motion toward an object, either in a friendly or hostile sense : 2)er 2)lenfd;entieunb fommt bem The benevolent man meets in a 33ittenben freunblic^ CtttgCgCn, kindly way one who asks a favor. 2)cr Sa^fcre gcf)t bem gcinbe mu* The brave man goes courageously t^ig entgegen^ to meet the enemy. 2)er 2Sinb toax unS cntgcgttt^ The wind was against us. Rem. 1. SntgCgCn always comes after the noun it governs. Rem. 2. When motion is indicated, CtttgCgCIt may perhaps be considered an adverb (i. e., a prefix of the compound verb, as e n t g e g e n g e ^ e n). Rein. 3. ^IttgCQCtt is sometimes used ^s synonymous with guftlibcr X @r \)at bem 33efe()Ie cntgegCtt (or He has acted contrary to the com- gutoibcr) ge^anbelt, mand. Rern. 4. The word CntgCfiCIl (M.-G., eng^gen ; O.-G., ingegin, inkakan) was formed by the union of in kakan=\n gegen=:en4*gegen. The t is add- ed by false analogy, after imitation of ttlt in inseparable compound verbs. § 225. ©cgcniiber (over against, ojyposite to) refers to the relative position of two objects (which often have a hostile relation to each other) : 53ei 3oniborf flanben bie 9fJuffen At Zomdorf the Russians stood ar- ben ^reufeen gegcniitJCr, rayed against the Prussians. k 382 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 226-228. Rem. 1 . This preposition sometimes precedes the noun it governs : (^egcniikr bem 2JZufeum i[t bie Opposite the Museum is the new neue 33ibIiDt^ef, Library-building. Rem. 2. ©CQCltiitier is compound of gegen iiber — toward over (or over toward). § 226. ®cma5 {in conformity with, agreeablyi to) may precede or follow the noun it governs : ©eiUiif ttieinem ^orfa^e (or met* I do as I had intended (or according Item iBorfa^e gcmti^), ^anble to my intention), so do I act. Rem. @ em a ^ was formerly an adjective (in M.-G.^ gemaeze ; in O.-G., gimazi, kimazi=na(i) bem 9Jia^e). § 227. Wit {with, in connection with) : S)ei* 35ater ge^t mit ben ^inbern The father goes out with his chil- aug, dren. (Srtrage beine Setben VXit ©ebulb I Bear thy sorrows with patience ! Rem. 1. SJJtt is often used to denote the identity of time of one event with another : 2Btr [tanben ntit Xageganbruc^ au\, We arose at daybreak. Rem. 2. QJltt is frequently used in denoting the means of conveyance : ©nen S3rief mit ber ^oft jd^icfen, To send a letter by mail. SOltt ber (gtfenBa^n fa^ren, To travel by railroad. § 228. 9ta(^ denotes primarily motion or direction to or toward ajplace {see p, § 235) : (Sr ift na(^ S3erltn gegangen, He has gone to Berlin. @ie fegelten Vi^^ S^orben, They sailed toward the North. Rem. 1. The particle gU or j^tll is frequently added, being placed after the noun that is governed by ttdC^) X 2)er §afe ttef na(!^ ber @tabt git, The hare ran toward the city. (Sg bonttert nac^ bem ©ebirgc l^tn, It thunders in the direction of the mountains. Rem. 2. 91(1^ is used inexpressing a motion tOAvard a person or thing, for the purpose of reaching, touching, or procuring it : 9la^ 3emanb f^tagen, To strike at a person. 9*1 ati bem %Xli jc^iden, To send for a physician. 9la4l Semanb fragen, To ask about a person. Rem. 3. SSid^ frequently signifies *■'■ after," whether referring to time or to place : 9la(^ bem flinften WoX, After the fifth of May. (Siner ging Uttl!^ bem ?lnbern, One went after another. § 229-233.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 383 Rem. 4. 9Ifl(^ frequently signifies cwcording to^ or in accordance with ; used in this signification, n(l(^ may be ])laced after the noun it governs : (S8 gc^t nic^t immer nat^ unfern Everything does not always go ac- SG3ilnfc^en, cording to our wishes. 2)a« fd^medt na(5 SScin, That tastes of wine. (Sr malt nat^ bcr ""Jiatur, He paints from nature. iUiciner 3)?cinung nat^, In my opinion. § 229. 9la^ft or 3Und^ft next to or next after) : iSr \ci^ ndt^ft niir, He sat next to me. 3)er ^roii^rins ritt junarfjft bem The Crown Prince rode next to tiJnige (or bem Ii5nige pndc^ft). the king. Rem. 1. 3 mi ^ ^ ft m3,y precede or follow the nouns it governs. Rem. 2. 9i a d)ft , the superlative of n a ^ e (§ 92), was not used as a pre- position before the New-German period. § 230. 91cbft (together with) refers to a connection existing in thought rather than in reality : 2)ic @tabt fa^ ben hunger ncftft The city saw famine, ftogether with fcinem ganjen ©e^olgc mit jdjrecf= (or and) all its consequences, ap^ lic!^en ®c^rittcn fid; naljcrn (<5d).), proach with fearful steps. Rem. I. 9icbft is an irregular derivative from n e b C n. § 231. Dhf denoting position over or above, is obsolete, [except in poetry or in legal language : £)b bem Miliar l()ing eine 2)?utter Over the altar hung a picture of the OotteS (@d;.), Virgin Mary. Rem. For ob (M.-G., ob; O.-G., obe, oba) in New-Ger., it b e r is used. § 232. ^amntt (together with) indicates a more intimate [Or natural connection than is expressed by nebft and mit: 2)ag (Sd)iff fammt ber ganjen The ship, together with the entire 2J2annfd;aft unb Sabung trarb crew and cargo, became a prey to ein 'Stauh ber SSeUen, the waves. Rem. ©ammt (M.-G.,samet] 0.-(?., samant) is derived from the Old- I German adjective sam (compare the English ^^sarne"), which is allied to the Latin semper (always) and the Greek (tvv (with). § 233. 8cit (since, during) refers to a period of time that is specified with reference to the moment of its commencement, or to its duration: ))ntd an bie £2uenc. Wad) bit fd^mac^t' \&i, ju btr ctl' id?, bu gcUcbtc S^ucfle, bu! 2Iud b t r fc^opf tc^, bci b i r ru^' ic^, fe|' bem ©piel ber SBeUcn ju ; a»it b i r fd^crj' x^, oon b t r lent' ic^ fetter burc^ ba^ Seben waUen, Slngelad^t oon griilltnsablumen unb begrii^t oon S^ad^tigaUen. 4. PKEPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. (SBorttbrter mit bcm 3lccttfattu.) § 237. S3i^ {till, until, asfa/r as, to) refers to both time [and space : S3on SSerltn 6t^ ^ot«bam fmb i)icr From Berlin to Potsdam it is four beutfd^e 3JieiIcn, . German miles. S3on Oftcm bi^ ^fingjlcn jlnb totcr From Easter until Whitsuntide >^ 3Bocl^cn, is seven weeks. Rem. 1. The article can not be used before a noun governed by Bi5» Rem. 2. Some other preposition frequently follows M^ I S3iS m^ SDIttternac^t, Until after midnight. Si^ OUf ben le^ten ^etlcr, Down to the last farthing. § 238. 2)ur(^ {through, by means of, by) : SSir fu^rcu burtfl bie @tabt, We rode through the city. ^Ur(4 bag ganjc 3a^r, Through the entire year. !J>uri ^leij? ^at er cS erreidjt, He has acquired it by diligence. K 386 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 239-240. § 239. gilr {foT^ instead of, in favor of) : er jlarB fiir baS 3SaterIanb, He died for his country. (Sr gtng fiir feinen S3ruber in ben He went to the war instead of hig ^rieg, brother. @tn @ejd;en! fiir eiuen greunb, A present for a friend. Rem. 1 . 5 il r is used in many expressions where a noun is repeated : ©c^ritt fiir ®c^ritt ; 2^ag fiir S^og, Step by step ; day by day. Rem. 2. ^il r is used before a noun taken as the equivalent of another sub- stantive noun, in such expressions as : 3ic^ ^alte i^n fiir cinen e^rttc^en I consider him to be an honest man. 3JJann, Rem. 3. glir loses its prepositional power in toa^ fiir {see § 113, 3). § 240. @cgcn {toward, against) indicates motion, direc- tion, or tendency in either a friendly, hostile, or indif- ferent sense {see natter, § 243) : 2Bir fegelten QCgctl 9^orben, We sailed toward the North. (Sr ttJar fe^r freunbtid^ Otgeil un8, He was very kind toward us. 2)ic 58erbiinbetcn gogen gCgcn bie The Allied forces moved against the granjofen, French. Revi. 1. @ e g en may also indicate direct contact (against)-. (Sr te^nte ftc^ gCgcn bie SKanb, He leaned against the wall. Rem. 2. It may indicate approximation of time or number : ®COCn fieben U{)r be6 9}?orgen§, Toward seven o'clock in the morning. ®CgCn ac^t^unbert ^erfonen, Toward eight hundred persons. Rem. 3. @ e g C n may be used in expressing a comparison of two objects: @r ift gcgcn 2)i^ ein $Rieje ! He is a giant compared to thee! Rem. 4. @ e g C n may be used in expressing exchange : SHux gcgeu baare 3 babe eS anf feinen 33cfe^l getban, I did it by his order. Rem. 4. 51nf is used in some adverbial expressions (especially in expressing the absolute superlative § 190, 2). § 247. §intcr (behind, hack of) almost always refers to place : 2)er ^unb Uef Winter b a S ^au§, The dog ran behind the house. 2)et ©avten ift Winter b cm ^aufc, The garden is behind the house. 390 THE PREPOSITION. [§248-250. Rem. 1. When both of the bodies referred to are in motion, ^ t tt t c r gov-^ ems the dative case, and the adverb ^ e r is added : 3tolanb ritt ^tntCrm 3Sater ^er(U,), Roland rode behind (i. e. foUowingJ his father. § 248. 3fn (m, into) refers especially to place, time, condition, manner, material, or contents : 2Sir gingen in b t e @tabt, We went into the city. &r nJO^nt in b e r @tabt, He resides in the city, er ftarb m toorigen Oftobcr, He died last October. @r ^at eg tm ©c^crj gefagt, He said it in a joke. 2)afiir ^at er j^toei^unbcrt Sl^aler He paid for that two hundred tha- in @o(b beja^It, lers in gold. § 249. DIekn (5?/, near, dose to, hy the side of) refers al- most always to place: @r fa^ neben fetnem S3ruber, He sat near (next to) his brother. (Sr je^te fic^ net) en feinen SSruber, He seated himself near his brother. Rem. When both objects are in motion, n e b e n governs the dative and the adverb ^ e r is added (see ^ t n t e r , § 247) : 2)er 33ebtente ghig ncticn bem The servant went along at the side SBagen \}tx, of the wagon. § 250. UcBcr {over, above, across) refers primarily to place: SSir gingen iidcr b t e SBrilcfe, We went over the bridge. 2)erl^nabel;atfetnen53aEiitlCrbaS The boy has thrown his ball over §aug in ben ©arten gemorfen, the house into the garden. 2)a§ ©emcilbe ^angt \\htX bcr The painting is hanging over the 2:(;ure, door. Rem. 1. With the dative case iiber denotes position above an object, without coming in contact with it; with the accusative, it denotes motion over or across an object, either with or without contact with it. Rem. 2. U e b e r may also signify beyond, or the other side of: Ucficr bem aJZeeve, Beyond the sea. 3)a§ ge^t iiticr feinc ^rciftc, That is beyond his strength. §eute iider ac^t Slage, A week (eight days) from to-day. Rem. 3. Ucfttt signifies also hy way of {via): 3Btr finb ijon ^art§ iibcr ^otn unb We came from Paris by way of Co- ^annotoer gefommen, logne and Hanover. 3fC^ hobt ben 53nef \\htX 33remen I sent the letter by way of Bremen. gejd^tdt §251,252.] CONSTRUCTION OF PREPOSITIONS. 391 Revi. 4. Ucbcr is in many cases used before the object to which a feeling or sentiment is directed : SlUc U&jm iibcr feine (Sitel!eit, All laugh at his vanity. Sr ift bofe \\htl irgeub ©tiraS, He is angry at something or other. Rem. 5. UebCf (M.-G., Uber ; O.-G., uban ; Gothic^ ufar) is derived from the same root as ot) (in Gothic, af=up), see § 231. § 251. Unttt {under, below, beneath) refers primarily to place : 2Bir fafjen lintcr b e m 33aume, We were sitting under the tree. Sir jctjten unS untcr ben 53aum, We seated ourselves under the tree. Rem. 1. Unter is also used in many figurative expressions, as in those Indicating submission or subjection to superior authority : 2)a8 ^aiib wax bamalS unttX The land was at that time under grenib^errfd^aft, foreign sway. Untcr fold^en 53ebtngungen, Under (upon) such conditions. Rem. 2. In expressions relating to time, uiiter usually signifies during: (Ss tr>ar unttX bcr 9Jcgicrung It was during the reign of Frederick griebric^g beiJ @ro{3cn, the Great. Rem. 3. Unter frequently signifies among, between : S^ [a{j untcr ben 3iifcfA^usrn, I sat among the spectators. ^6) rec^nei^n nntcr meine greunbe, I count him among my friends. Re7n. 4. Unter {M.-G., under; O.-G., and Gothic, undan) is probably allied to the Latin inter, and the Sanscrit antar— among. § 252. S?or (before, in front of, m the jyresence of, cmte- cedent to) : (Sr ftanb Uor bem §aufe, He was standing in front of the house. (Sr er jc^ien UOr bem 9Jid;ter, He appeared before the judge, ©r tarn UOr ©onnenaufgang, He came before sunrise. Rem. 1. SSor is rarely used with the accusative, except with its primaiy signification which refers to space (i. e., before, in front of) : Sr trat Uor fcinen 9tid;ter, He took his place before the judge. Rem. 2. S3or is frequently used (with the dative) in expressing the cause of a feeling or action : @ie WetntC UOr ^'^^"i'C* S^e ^^pt from joy. Sr Jttterte Uor 5tngft, He trembled from fear. Rem. 3. S3or and fiir formerly had the same signification. In the Lower- Germ«/i dialects » r is yet used to a great extent for f ii r. 392 THE PREPOSITION. [§ 253, 254. § 253. 3toif^^tt (between^ hetwixt, in the midst of) : Belgium lies between France and Germany. He arrived between nine and ten o'clock in the morning. The enemy sowed tares in (the midst of) the wheat. SBelgien Itegt stDtf^Ctt granfretd? unb 2)eutfc^Ianb, @r fam pifdjcn iteun unb je^n U^r beg 2)JovgeuS an, „2)er getiib jciete Unfraut Jtoift^cn ben aBetjen," Rem. 3l0tfd)Cn is a contraction from the Middle-German en-zwischen (O.-G., in zwis/cen, which is from theO.-G. adj. zui-ise=lX\)d\ad}=z twofold). Obs. The following verses contain the propositions that govern the dative and accusative cases : 2In bctt SD^onb. STuf X) i ^ Mid ct, auf 2) t r weilet oft metn Slug' in f ii ^ c r Sujl ; ain Tjtr ^afr ic^, on 3)t^ fcttb' t(^ ntanc^ ®efii|l au^ fro^er SSrujl! 3tt 2) t (^ fe^et, in 2) t r ftnbet mcine 9)^ntafte »iel ©cenen, Untcr b t e ftc gerit fid) h-oiumet, untcr b e n e n bort bie f^onen r, rather. tra^renb, while. trann, when. treil, because. tDCnu, when, if. ttJenn aud;, although. tr>cnng(ei(^, although. h?cnnjd;on, although. iric, as, when. VDictrol)!, although. Xca, where, when. tuofern, in case that. ju bem, besides. j»ar, indeed. Rem. The most important corresponding conjunctions are the foUowingj balb — balb, sometimes — sometimes. Soft. ^ ""^ ^^'') ^^•^-Ibctio, [ the-the. ^'- Me, ) either — or. entwcber— obcr, nt(^t— tonbern. not — ^but. 396 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 263. nicl;t alletn— I fonbern au^, nid;t Uo^— ) obg(eid> — fo bod^, treber— no(^, ttJie— fo, not — but rather. not only — but also. although — still, as well — as. partly — partly, neither — nor, as — so. § 263. Conjunctions may be divided, with reference to the grammatical office they perform in connecting sentences, into two classes : 1. Co-ordinative Oo7ijunctions, which are used to con- nect equally independent sentences : 1. The following seven co-ordinative conjunctions cause no alteration in the position of the verb in the sentence : Unb, abzv, fonbern, jott)o^l-at8. obcr, attein, benn, SSir gingen na^ ^aUe, unb i)ou We went to Halle, and from there ba gingen t»ir na^ Set^jig, we went to Leipzic. 2Bir gingen nid;t na6) 'i^rag, fon* We did not go to Prague, but we bcrn tt>ir gingen nad^ SJJiind^en, went to Munich. Rein. 21 b e r, however, may also be placed after the subject, or after the verb : 2)er SSater a b e r ^pxa6) — But the father spoke — 2)cr @trau§ ^at ^liigel, et !ann The ostrich has wings, but he can a b e r nic^t fliegen, not fly. 2. The following co-ordinative conjunctions are usually placed at the be- ginning of the sentence or clause ; when so placed they cause the subject to fol- low the verb in simple tenses, and to follow the auxiliary in compound tenses (see § 280) : besnjcgen, (je)— bcfto, (befto)— befto, bod^, enttoeber, fall§, ferner, totglid^, ^tngcgcn, inbeffcn, infofern, mo, au^crbem, balb— balb, bagegen, barum, bemnad^, bennod^, beffenuttgead^tet, beg^atb, beggleirfjen, iebod^, mit^tn, nic^tgbeftotoemgcr, no(^, ntc^t nur, nic^t attein, nid^t Uo% nur, o^ngea(^tet, t^cilg— t^cil«, itberbtes, ilbrigenS, 'n,l h ) § 263.] THE CONJUNCTION. 397 i)ielmc^r, (wtc)— fo, jubcm, toci^renb, (meber)— noc^, gtrar. 2)ic n nic^t, Uielmc^r ber* I do not fear him, but rather I ac^te ic^ i^n, despise him. § 266. '^U, tote, tocnn, mm, are used as follows: 1. As an adverbial conjunction, fili? {v^hen) refers only to past time : %\i xoxx in 33erUn onfamen, h)ar Mr. Kraft had already left for Dres- ^err ^raft fc^on nac^ 2)re§ben den when we arrived in Berlin, abgcreift, § 266.] THE CONJUNCTION. 399 Rem. 1. 51 1 6 (jthan) is used after the comparative degree of adjectives or adverbs : §eute ijl ba« SSettcr m 1 1 b e r To-day the weather is milder than a\i eg gcftern toax, it was yesterday. Rem. 2. %\9> b a fj (preceded by jj u) gives a negative signification to the subordinate sentence which it introduces : (Sr ift 5 u fhii^ ali^ bo^ cr an @e* He is too intelligent to believe in f^}cnfter glaubeu joUtc, ghosts. Rem. 3. After a negation or an expression equivalent to a negation, al)^ signifies except : 9i i c^ 1 8 nennt cr fcin, al§ feincn He calls nothing his own, except his Sftittermantel (®ci^.), knightly mantle. 2Ser j 11 [t ift @d;ulb barau, al^ Who else is to blame for it, except 3^v* ill SSien? (@c!^.) you in Vienna? Rem. 4. 51 1 g is often used interchangeably with toic, as (see No. 2, below). Rem. 5. %li is often followed by o b or tt) e n n : Sr ficf)t auS al^ Ob cr fraiif fci, He looks as though he is sick. ©r fict>t auS al^ tOCnU cr trauf He looks as though he were sick, toarc, 2. SBic (as), preceded by fo, is used in comparing to- gether two adjectives or adverbs in the positive degree : §cute ift bag SSctter md;t fo Ijci^ The weather is not so hot to-day IDic CS gcftcrn n^ar, as it was yesterday. Rem. 1 . In German, as in English, f (as) is often omitted : „ beftrafc i^n, bamit er fi^ bef* I punish him, that he may become fcrc, better (by it). Rem. 2. When especial emphasis is to be laid upon the causal relation of bamit, barUItt is often placed at the opening of the main sentence, which precedes the subordinate sentence : S)arUtn eBen let^t er ^einem, Just for that reason does he lend to Samtt er ftcts ju geben babe (Seff.) nobody, that he may always have something to give. Rem. 3. 3)attttt nt(^t frequently signifies lest or that not : 3c^ fage bir e8 noc^malg, bamit I say it to you once more, lest you bu eg n i d; t bergiff eft, should forget it. Rem. 4, 31 U f b a ^ is now rather antiquated : „@^re 3Sater unb SJJutter, aitf ba^ " Honor thy father and thy mother, eg bir ttJO^l ge^e auf Srben/' that it may be well with thee in the land." Rem. 5. The single conjunction btt^ is frequently used for a uf b a^ : S3Ieibt ntc^t in (gnglanb, ba^ ber Do not remain in England, that the SSrtte m(i^t fetn ftoljeg ^erj an Briton may not feast his proud (Surem Ungiilc! tr>etbe (®C^Of heart upon thy misfortune. Rem. 6. When a shorter expression is desired, Ultl — Jtt (with an infinitive) is frequently used instead of a U f b a ^ : 3c^ beftrafe i^n, Ullti^n yx beffern. I punish him to make him better. Rem. 7. Ultl p is also used after an adjective or adverb preceded by JU I (£r tjl ju ebet, unt ft^ JU rac^en, He is too noble minded to avenge himself. i § 268, 269.] THE CONJUNCTION. 401 whole satisfied, still there were many things to be found fault with. I know it, though no one of you in- formed me of it. § 268. Q^id^, o^ft^ou, oBuio^I^ tocnnglei^, tocnn f(§on, toCUn flU(^ {though J although) : Rem. 1. When the subordinate sentence precedes the main sentence, the latter is usually introduced by fo, followed by i)OC^ or bcnilOC^ (stilf): DbglciC^ ber ^ti)Xtx tm ©ansen JU* Although the teacher was upon the fricben irar, jo tt?ar bO(^ man* d?e8 (Sinjelnc ju tabcin, 3c^ tt?ciB C8, otiglett^ (or obUJO^l) Reiner ton 3^neu niic^ baton benat^rtrf;tigt ^at, Rem. 2. O h—Q \ti6) and tt) c n u g I e t d} often take a pronoun or other monosyllabic word between their parts : Ob id) glci^ Qcfagt tjabe — Although I have said — i2e7n. 3. 2S5 c u n — a n c^ often signifies even if; the two words are often separated, or reversed : 2)cr 3Scr jnd) tuar noc^ tmmcr rcid^* lid) bclofjnt, ttjcnn an^ nur ein STbeil bes 3?erf^rcd)en8 erfttttt wurbe (3d;.), S)a« tonntc gcfdjeben, 0U(^ tocnil ®ufta» 5lbolt 2C. (@d).), (but)g©enn cr au(i a(t i[t,,|o ifl bocf; fein ©eift jugcnblid;, The attempt was still richly re- warded, even if only a part of the promise was fullfilled. That might have taken place, even if Gustavus Adolphus, etc. Although he is old, still his spirit is youthful § 269. Sajcr, barum, beS^alb, bc^tocpn, olfo, folglt(§, bemnaf^, mit()tn {conseqitently^ therefore) : Rem. I. ^at)tt has reference rather to the physical cause : 2)cr @d;uee ift auf ben ©ebirgen The snow has melted upon the gefd)moIjcn; bal)Cr fmb bic mountains; therefore the rivers gliiffe angefc^n?oUen, have risen. Rem. 2. jDarum, beS^atb, beSttjegcn, refer more to the moral than to the physical cause : es gcfiel i^m nid)t mc^r untcr ben SERenfdjen, bo^Cr (or bC^ttJCrjcn) jog er fic^ in bie @tnjamteit gu« riicf, @r ifi ju Icid^tjtnnig, bcSl^alft !ann id) gar nid^t mit i^m jufrieben fein, Rein. 3. 3) a r U m is used in a most general way, to indicate a physical, moral, or logical cause : SS ift fc^5nc8 ^Better ; barUQt It is fine weather, therefore I will ge^c i4> f^ajieren, go and take a walk. He no longer enjoyed human so- ciety, therefore he retired to sol- itude. He is too trivial, therefore I can not be at all pleased with him. 402 THE CONJUNCTION. [§ 269-271. Ohs. 3) a r U m is sometimes contracted into br U in : @tne S)urc^tau(^ttg!cit Ici^t er fic^ He has himself called "his Excel- nennen ; brum mu^ er @oIba== lency," therefore he must be able ten ^alten fbitnen (@^.), to have his soldiers. Rem. 4. SllfO, folglt^, btHtltil^/ UtUl^tn^ indicate rather a logical conse- quence : (Sr ^at eS fctbjl get^ait, Ultb !ann He did it himself, therefore he can alfo 9fitemanb tabeln, blame nobody. 2Bir fiub 3Jienfc^en, folglir!^ ftnb We are men, therefore we are mor- \X)\x [terblic^, tal. Ohs. I. ^Cninfl(^ (bent nad^) is frequently equivalent to according to that: @r ift geftern abgereift, unb fann He started yesterday, and may con- bcmna^ ^eute anfommen, sequently arrive to-day. Ohs. 2. 9)Zit^ill indicates that the consequent is included in or grows nat- urally out of the preceding statement : Witm 55rnber fommt ^eute Slbenb My brother does not come this even- nic^t, mi^n ftnb Xqxx aHetn, ing, so we will be alone. § 270. SctJOr, Cl^e {hefore) : Rem. 1. ScDor refers only to time ; cl^C may also express a preference or choice : ScDor (or cT)e) er bte @tabt berlte^, Before he left the city. @^C t(^ ntir ba§ gefaEcn laffe, toitt Before I put up with that, I will id; Iteber auf jeben ettDaigen 3?or=» rather renounce every possible ad- t^eil terjid^ten, vantage. Rem. 2. S^CUOr is now much less used than t^t* Rem. 3. The comparative degree t^tX {sooner) is sometimes placed in the sentence preceding the one containing t\\t or tJCUOt X S)ir yixM C^er IVL fagen, beijor To say nothing to you, before twelve %XoU\ %a%t gefd;n3unben (finb), days are past. 2)o(^ C^ICr fc^Itngc Xellug mid^ And may Tellus swallow me down, ^inab, t^t \^ ntetnen (Sib i)er* rather than that I should break le^te (®(^.), my oath. Rem. 4. Sometimes n t d) t is added, pleonastically, after c||C J especially is this done when there is a negative in the preceding main sentence : a}ian joU ntc^t frili)er auf{)i5ren, One should not cease before the t\\t bie §anbe nic^t erla^men, hands become weary. § 271. gall§, tm gallC (bag), toofcrn {in case that, if) : Reju. These forms are especially appropriate when their use would prevent an unpleasant repetition of tD e n n (t/) in the same sentence. ^&l tDttt'g 2)tr (ei^en, fatt^ 2)U I will loan it to you, in case that mir'g balb tinebergcben fannfl:, you can soon return it to me. § 272-274.] THE CONJUNCTION. 403 § 272. 88o {where) is also used referring to time {when) : ^ennft bu ba§ 2onb, m bic Bitro* Do you know the land where the nen bltifjcn (®.), citrons bloom ? 3n bcr ^eit, too— At the time, when— Bern. 2Bo was formerly much used instead of n) e n n ; this signification is now given mostly in rather short and in fixed expressions, as : So nid^t ; too ic^ nid;t irre, If not ; if I am not mistaken. § 273. Hcbrigcn^, iikrbicS, p bem {moreover, besides) : er tft fiir fein filter flug, iitirigcn^ He is shrewd for his age ; moreover, ift er alter alS 'Bk glaubcn, he is older than you think. Rem. UckrMC^ and ju bClll are more specific than iibrigenS. § 274. Scnn, H, inbcm, toeil {because, for, as, since) : Rem. 1. ^cnn gives rather the explanation of a statement: 3c^ get;e md;t au8, bcnn e§ rcgnet I do not go out, for {i. e., as you see; fortwaf^rcnb, it keeps raining continually. Rem. 2. SBcil (because) answers to the question tOOruni ? (why ?) : 2B a r u m ge^eu ®ie nid^t au§ ? Why do you not go out ? 2Bcil e8 fortwa^renb rcgnet, Because it keeps raining continually. Rem. 3. 2) e 11 n is frequently used to introduce explanatory sentences that are interposed between the words of main sentences : 3cl; bin -bcnn tvarum foil ic^ e8 I have been— for why shall I deny laugnen— fe^r [Ici^ig gctvefen, it— very industrious. Rem. 4. 2) e n n (meaning than) is not used now as much after compara- tives as it was formerly ; its present use in this signification is rather con- fined to dignified composition : „9JZetne ®ilnbe ift greyer, bcnn fie "My punishment is greater than I mir i)crgeben wcrbcn mogc", can bear" (Gen. 4, 13). Rem. 5. 2) e n n is, however, frequently used to prevent the repetition of al^ : ^&l bcfuc^c i^n jctjt nie^r alG I \\s\t him now more as a friend ^rcunb, bCnil al^ Sirjt, than as a physician. Rem. 6. 2) C n n is often used expletively, especially in questions : 2Bcr fann cS i^m bCItn gcfagt (;abcn? Who can have told it to him? Ob$. Thus used, bcnn does not receive an emphatic tone of voice. Rem. 7. 2)(I^ though primarily an adverbial conjunction of time (signifying u'heti, [see § 200, 4, and al§, § 203, 2]), is sometimes used to express the logical cause, especially when the main sentence contains a question : ^a cr nid^t gefommcn ift, mn§ cr As he has not come, he must be trant fctn, sick. 2Bie !amet \\)X burc^ baS SSaffer, How did you come through the wa- bd boc^ bcr e I ^etfa I or ^oc^ \)=hurrah! 2. Of sorrow, as : a<^ 1— tue^ I or O tcti) I = aZas/— letbcr \ = unfortunately ! 3. Of astonishment, as : ac^ I— a^ I— i§ I— ^ola I— ^O^jtaufenb I 4. Of laughter, as : ^a^a I 5. Of aversion, as : p\m I p\m' \=pshaw!— fit \=Jie! Bern. 1. The word fo ! is used in a great variety of connections, as, for ex- ample, to indicate astonishment, inquiry, assent, or satisfaction. Bern. 2. Many words that belong to other parts of speech are frequently used with the force of interjections, as : @ut ! good ! SSo^Ian I be of good courage! §eil 1 hail ! ©ottlob I God be praised! 5Bortt)drtg I forward ! ©ott betra^re I God forbid ! §alt I halt! stop ! 3lbtCU I Good-by ! Bern. 3. The interjections l^eit 1 and ttJO^l I and others, are followed by the dative case, as : 2Bot)I (fet) i^m I May it be well with him! §eil (jet or trerbe) bir I Hail to thee ! Bern. 4. Some interjections may be followed by the genitive case, as : Oi}, be§ !£^oren 1 Oh, the fool ! ^fut, bcr ®^anbe I Pshaw ! the shame ! Bern. 5. Sometimes the genitive is replaced by the preposition il b C r, as ; ^fui, iiber btc ©c^anbe I Pshaw! for shame! Bern. 6. As most interjections are elliptical expressions, some of them, may be followed by a noun in either of the cases, as : O, %\}ox I 0, ber %\)0X 1 Oh, the fool I £), bem S^oren (!ann cS m(^t fc^abcn) I " " " O,ben2^oren(!enncic^)! " " " § 276-278.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 405 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. (2)ic aCortfoIgeO § 276. In nothing is the genius of a language more strongly manifest than in the arrangement of words in sentences. The two following are among the most prominent characteristics of the German sentence : » 1. The order of words in main sentences differs from that in subordinate sentences : (Sr ift f r a n f , He is sick. (Sr faiin nid;t auSgc^en, toeit cr He can not go out, because he is trauf ift, sick. 2. There is a marked tendency to present the sentence as a unit — that is, with the modifying and limiting words and clauses enclosed between the copula and predicate in main sentences, and between the subject and copula in subor- dinate sentences : §crr 2Bei^ f^at (fetncm alteflcn Mr. Weiss has to-day f/iven to his @o^n, JBil^clm, bic le^te 2lu8* son William the last edition of the gabc ber beutfd^en ?keratur*@C= History of the German Literature fc^id^te 4)011 ^ciiirici^ ^UVJ, ^eutc, by Heinrich Kurz, as a Christmas al§ 2Beil)iiad;t§gefd^enf)gc9et)Cn^ present. 2Bir irotttcn cjeftcrn wad) ^otSbam We wished to go to Potsdam yester- gc^en, ireilba^SBcttCrCfiirbiefe day, because the weather was so 3ii^rc§5cit fo ganj au^erorbcnt* very unusualy beautiful for this lic^ \6}'6n) tear, season of the year. § 277. The essential parts of a sentence are the subject, the predicate, and the copula. 1. The subject is the nominative of the verb. 2. The predicate expresses what is affirmed of the subject. 3. The copula is the inflected part of the verb. Hem. The predicate is often included in one word with the copula. § 278. In main indicative sentences the regular order Is: (1) J the subject; (2)^ the copula; (d), the predicate. Subject. Copula. Predicate. 2)aS :!E3etter ifl ^ci§, The weather is hot. S)aS SScttcr tuurbc ^ci§, The weather became hot. Subject. Copula. Predicate, S)a8 SBcttcr blcibt ^cig, The weather remains hot. ^err ^raft tjl cin 2)eutfd?cr^ Mr. Kraft hi a German. 406 ARRANGEMENT OP WORDS. [§ 279. Subject. I Copula. ^abe have Predicate. gelefen, read. Subject. 2)a8 ^Better The weather Copula. has Predicate. ^eiB gen?ejcn, hot been. SBir We miiffen must hjarten, vi^ait. asir We ^ben have h)arten milffcn, wait (must). He !am arrived. an, He has angefommcii, arrived. S)te 3Sogcl The birds fingen, sing. SBtr We hjcrbcn shall getrcfen fcin, (been, be). § 279. The object of the verb is placed between the copula and the predicate : Subject. Copula. Object. Predicate, 2)er taufmann ^at bag ^aug toerfauft, The merchant has the house sold. He (gx He fc^retbt copies fc^retbt writes ben S3rief the letter. ben 33riet, the letter. ab, 3fti? ^cibe bag Su(^ Qetefcn, I have the book read. Rem. 1 . The object of a verb, whether direct or indirect, stands between the copula and the predicate (or after the copula when the copula and the predicate are combined into one word) : Subject, Copula, Object, Predicate,' (Sr tjl jetnem 53rubcr fl^folgt, He has his brother followed. He ill has ctncg aScrbred^enS with a crime angcKagt tt?orben, charged been. I have mctnen ^^^cunb my friend (nm 9iat^ gefragt), for advice asked. ®tc They ^abcn have their scheme tng Serf gejefet, into execution carried. They fe^ten carried t^r aSortjaben their scheme ing Serf, into execution. ®ie They ^"teltcn held ben S)ieb the thief n, fast. Obs. In some phrases (as um 9tatb fragen, iitg 2Bert fe^en, feji^artcn) the Words preceding the verb follow the same laws of position as the prefixes of se4)arable compound verbs. § 279, 280J ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 407 Rem. 2. When there are two nouns governed by a verb, the personal noun takes the precedence : Personal noun. Object. Predicate. feincm ter Here §eute To-day tft bag S8uc^, the book. bag Setter the weather ill is fe^r j(^i5n, very fine. 2)a^er Therefore lonn can I him ntd^t trauen. not trust. ^Predicate.) mt Cold (grnj^ Earnest ^v»/^ vvvv"|J«'^»^ ^J'-^vviiy, ©eftcgt Conquered has ber mm^, bravery. (Object). t 3)en mam That man Copula. Subject. ^abc \^ mc have I never Predicate. ge!annt, known. 3^n Him fenne t^ know I nid^t, not. §281.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 409 § 281. There is more definiteness in the position of adverbs and adverbial phrases in the German than there is in the English language : Rem. 1. Adverbs of manner stand immediately before the predicate (or at •lA end of the sentence, if the predicate is included in the copula): Adverb. Predicate. toortreffltc^ gefungcn, admirably sung. toortreffli^, admirably. Subject. @ic She Copula. t)at has Object. bag 2icb the song ®ie She fang sang bas Sieb the song I ^abc have him I have it cmpiid^ gctDarnt, earnestly warned. auf bteje SBeijc get^an, in this way done. Rem. 2. Adverbs of time or place precede adverbs of manner: @ic ^at ba9 ?icb geftcrn Slbenb toortvcfflid^ gcfungen, She has the song yesterday evening admirably sung. SSir babcn in 33erltn fe^r angencbm gclcbt, We have in Berlin .very agreeably lived. Rem. 3. Adverbs of time usually precede adverbs of place (L. XXIV., 5)- SEBir fmb tor totcr S^agen in SBerlin angctommen, We have four days ago in Berlin arrived. Rem. 4. Of two or more adverbs of the same kind, as of time or place, the more particular usually follow the more general : @ic trcrben ntorgen Stbcnb um ac^t U^r anfommen^ They will to-morrow evening at eight o'clock arrive. ®ic fatten in Berlin in l^iftoria*@tra(^e 9Jumero 20 gctcobnt, They had in Berlin in Victoria-street number twenty resided. 2Bir tl^nncn baS SBud^ nirgcnbS im §aufe finben, We can the book nowhere in the house find. Exc. The adverbs of time f C^ n {already), Xia&i (still), c r ft (Jirst) may precede or follow a more definite adverbial expression of time, as : t^eutc nod;, or nod) beute ; morgcn fd^on, or fc^on morgen ; crft ^eute morgcn, or ^eutc aJZorgcn crft. Rejn. 5. When adverbs have more special reference to a substantive, they usually precede it : ©ogar f c i n c ® c g n e r crfcnncn fcincn 3Bcrt^ an, Even his opposers recognize hii worth. S 410 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 281,282. Rem. 1. This inversion of the subject and copula takes place also when the personal pronoun C^ is used expletively for the subject : (@^; n)trbetn@e«>itter f om=» There will a thunder-storm come. men, ((S§) finb 3Se\-brec^en Began* There have been crimes committed, gen, Rem. 2. It also takes place when a relative sentence precedes a main sen- 2Ber e§ t[t, tD e i ^ i d? nid?t, I do not know who he is. Rem. 3. Sometimes the subject precedes the copula in interrogative and exclamatory sentences : @ 1 1 f e i bir gncibtg I God be gracious to thee ! (Sr m5ge glilcflid^ fein I May he be happy. § 282. In subordinate sentences the general order is: (1), the subject; (2), the predicate ; (3), the copula : S^ XQt\% bag I know that Suhject. ber 2«enj(^ man Predicate. fterbltc^ mortal Copula. ift, is. fd^ begreife ntc^t, tuarum I understand not why er he fo ungutrteben so discontented tt)ar. was. S)er 2Rann, The man, ber who fo !ran! so sick xt>ax, was. S)er 3lniert!aner, The American, SSenn When ber who bie ©d^ttjatfecn the swallows ^cutc anfam, to-day arrived. ^cimtDcirtg jtel^en. homeward flv. Rem. 1. When the compound tenses of the potential verbs, or of the verbs laffen, ^ei^cn, fet;en, ^bren, ^elfen {see § 131 , Rem. 2), are used in subordinate sentences with the infinitive of other verbs, the copula (auxiUary) is placed before the predicate or before the object of the verb : SSett cr eg ntci^t l^at t ^ u n !bnnen, Dbgleid^ tc^ i^m ntdjt I)at)e a r b e t* ten Belfen bilrfen, ©eringere SSitrger, tcetd^e 9^i(^t0 befa^en, toag i^nen SSaterlanb unb §erb \jiiitt Heb madden fijnnen (@(^.), ^6) njar ju fe^r getool^nt, nttc^ mtt ttiir felbft ju bejc^aftigen, at8 ba^ ic^ mit 2lutmertfam!eit pttC ein ^unfttoerf betradt^ten f oUen (@. ), Because he was not able to do it. Although I was not permitted to help him work. Citizens from the lower classes, who possessed nothing that could make their country and their homes dear to them. I was too much in the habit of oc- cupying myself with my own thoughts, to consider a work of art with attention. §282-284.] ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 411 Rem. For the sake of euphony, the copula is often omitted when the verb in the subordinate sentence is in the perfect or pluperfect tense : ^&l »erlor ntd;t Wit^, ba foId;cr I did not lose all, as such a friend greuub im Unglitlf mir gebiic* has remained to me in my misfor- ben [i[t](vSd?.), tune. 2Ba8 tear metn 2)anf bafilr, bo§ What was the reward to me, that T, tc^, ein treucr gitr[tcntncd;t, ben a true servant of the prince, who 2>i5Iterfluc^ auf mid; gebilrbet had drawn upon myself the curse [^atte], biefen 5^rieg, bcr nur t^n of the people, had made tlie princes gro^ gcmad;t [bat], bie giti^ft^n pay for the war which has made [^abe] ^a^len laffen ? (®d;.) him alone great ? § 283. Attributive adjectives usually precede the noun they qualify : 2)er gutc 2Jiann, The good man. Rein. 1. Very long attributive adjective clauses are frequently employed in the German language ; these are usually translated into English by subordi- nate relative sentences : Sin (ber beutfd^cn ®^rad;c t)oU* A foreigner (who is) well acquainted !omnien tuubigcr) grcmbcr, with the German language. S)ie (bcm ^railten fe^t ^cUjanic) The medicine that is very beneficial 3lrjnct, to tlie sick man. Rem. 2. Sometimes the attributive adjective is placed, as for the sake of emphasis, after the noun which it qualifies : 9iiemanb al9 25u, fott biefen ^rieg, Nobody but yourself shall end this ben filrd^terlic^en, enben (@d;.), fearful war. Rem. 3. For the sake of euphony, the attributive adjective clause may be placed, as in English, after the noun it qualifies ; in this case the attributive luijective is not inflected (§ 84, Less. XVIII, 1): ?lnd> ntanc^en 3JJann, Also many a man and many a hero, Unb mand;cn §elb, good in peace, and strong in war, Sm ^rieben gut was born in the Swabian land. Unb ftarf im ge(b, ©ebar ba« ©c^mabenlanb (®^.), § 284. For the prepositions tho^i follow the substantive^ instead of preceding it, see § 255. Part iTourtl); CONTAINING VOCABULARIES. Albert. I. PERSONAL PROPER NAMES. Rem. 1 . In this list are included only the most usual of such names as h&ve different forms or different pronunciation in the German and English lan- guages. Rem. 2. A few proper names from the Greek, Latin, and Hebrew languages are also added. The final syllable is dropped from many Latin and GreeK proper names. (Sli'fa, — «, or (Sli'fe, — n§,/, Eliza. S'mil, — 0, »!., Emilius, Emil. Smi'lic, — n8,/., Emily. S))i{ur', —8, 7/i., Epicurus. S^ifurd'er, — g, m., Epicurean. tp'\tuxa'i)(i^,adj., Epicurean. @rnft,— ens, m., Ernest. @ugen',— 8, m., Eugene. (Suge'me, — n:-, /*., Eugenie. (S'toa, — S,/., Eve or Eva. i^U'ttnh—tn^f 7/1., Florence, gloreu'tia, —§,/., Florence, ^ranj, — cn6, w., PVancis. ^ranjiS'ta, —§,/., Frances, ^ricb'rid), — 8, jn., Frederick. (San^mCb', — ^, /«., Ganymede, ©e'org, — §, m., George, ©er'^arb, — 8, m., Gerhard, [trade, ©er'traub or ©er'trub, —8,/, Ger- ©o'ltatb, — 8, 7/1., Goliath, ©ott'frteb, — §, /«., Godfrey, ©ott'barb, —8, r//., Godard. ©ott'Iteb, — 8, 7«., Theophilus. Ore'ijor, — 8, tt?,, Gregory, grcj^oria' nifd;, ac?;., Gregorian. @ui'bo, — 8, 771., Guy. ©u'ftatj, — 8, 771., Gustavus. ^On'nC,— n^,/., Jane. ^an8, — en8, ni., John. §eb'tt)icj, — 8,/., Edwiga. §cin'ri(^, — 8, 7«., Henry. [Helena. .t>cle'ne,-n8, or ^clcna, -8,/., Helen, .^elicbor', — 8, tw., Heliodorus. ^cnrict'tc, — n8,/., Henrietta, Harriet ^cr'niann, — 8, »7t., Hennan. ipero'beS, — , //«., llerod. ^crobot', — 8, 7/i., Herodotus. WMhttt, (gen.— g), 774., Ethelbert. Slbe'fe or Slbeli'ne, —8,/, Adeline. Sl'belbeit, —8,/., Adelaide. 21'bolf or 2l'boI^i>, —8, 7/j., Adolphus. 5le8tula))', — 8, ttj., Esculapius. Slefc))',— 8, 772., Esop. %a't^e, — n8,/., Agathe. %i]'iK^,—,f., Agnes. 21'Iarid;, — 8,77j., Alaric. 3irbcrt or 2llbrcd)t, —8, 77i., mie'jiS,— ,/., Alice. 5lIfcu'fo, — 8, 771. Alphonso. 5lma'lie, — n8, /*., Amelia. 5lnbre' a8, — , m., Andrew. Slu'na, —8, ^ - . » 5,. , i r/, Ann, Anna. Stn'ton, — 8, 77i,, Anthony. 3lu'gufl, —8, m., Augustus. 5luc|u'ftc, — n8,/, Augusta. S^al'bUtn, —§, m., Baldwin. SBcIifar', — 8, 771., Belisarius. 93Ian'ta, —8,/, Blanche. SSonifaj', — en8, or — tu8, »7^, ^onxho' nm, pi., Bourbons. 53rigit'te, — cn8,/., Bridget. Sol'Uin, — §, 7/1., Calvin. C^arlot'te, — n8,/., Charlotte. Clob'irig, — 8, 77i., Clovis. (£bri'ftu8, — i, 77J., Christ. CIe'mcn8, — , »7i., Clement. 2)iont)^', — , 771., Dionysius, Dennis. jorot()e'a,-8, )^ D^,^,h 2)orot()ce , — n8,r (5'5cr^arb,— ^, tti., Eberhard. e'buarb, —8, 771., Edward. ©Icouo'rc, — n8, /., Eleonora. eii'a8, —,1/1., Elisha. [face. Boni- 416 PERSONAL PROPER NAMES. ^t'ot\ — S, w., Job. §onier', — §>, m., Homer. ^Oine'rifd; (adj.), Homeric, ^ora^', — , ?«., Horace, ipum'fneb, — §, m., Humphry. 3^n'nOCCn5, — eu^, m., innocence. 3'faa! O'^fa^a!), — , ?/«., Isaac. 3jCli'aS, — , m., Isaiah. 5§'inael, — 8, •/«., Ishmael. Stt'foil, — §^ m., Jacob, James, ^a'jon, — §, 7/1., Jason. 3evemi'a§, — , 7n., Jeremiah. ^e'jug, — , m.j Jesus. 5to'ab, — g, m., Joab. ^of)ann', — g, m., John. 3Df)an'na, — g,/., Joan, Jane. 3o'na§, — , m , Jonah. ^o'fe|3l;, — 8, rn., Joseph. ^o'fua, — §, m., Joshua, ^u'liltg, — , m., Julius. Sii'lia, —§,/., Julia. Julian', — §>, m., Julian. Suftiman', — §, ???., Justinian, iuftiuia'nifct) (adj ), Justinian. ^a'tn (^a'4n), — ^, m., Cain, ^art, — §, ??*., Charles, ^arl ber @ro^e, Charlemagne, ^aroli'ue, — n§,/., Caroline, ^a'ftor, — ^, m., Castor, ^at^ari'ne, — ii§,/., Catharine. Sc'on^arb, —§, m., Leonard, ^eono're, — n§,/., Leonora. Si't'tu?, — , m., Livy. So'reitj, — enS, /«., Lawrence. Suci'e, — ng,/., Lucy. Sub'wtc;, — §, 7«., Lewis, Louis. Sui'fc, — 8,/., Louisa. Su'faS, — , ?H., Luke. Su!rej', — eit8, ?«., Lucretius. SWa'^Omcb, — ^, ??^•, Mohammed. QJJari'a, — 8,/., Maria. Tla.xk\ — 1X8,/., Mary. 2Jlar'tba, — 8,/., Martha. 2TJat^trbe, — n8,/., Matilda. 2}Jvitt^a'u8, — i, m., Matthew. Wax, — cn8, or 3J?ajimt'Itan, — 8, m., Maximilian. 3JJertur', — 8, w., Mercury. SJJet^u'falem, — 8, w., JSiethusaleh. 3Jii'ci;ael (3)ii^d;a*eO,— 8, m., Michael SD^o'rij, — en8, 7a<., Maurice. 9}Jo'fe8 Q/en. 9}?ofi§), w., Moses, gjiofa'ifd; (adj.), Mosaic. yfJa't^ait, —0, m., Kathan. 9fle^emi'a8, — , w., Kehemiah. ^fie^JtUu',— 8, w.., Neptune. 9^i'tolau8, — , in., Nicholas. ObOtt'CCr, — §f m., Odoacer. Oreft', — 8, w., Orestes. OiJtb', —8, m., Ovid. *^aul,— ^, »w., Paul. ^e'tev, —8, w., Peter. ^^i'li^^,— 8, w., Philip. ^i(a'tu8, — , m., Pilate. Pi'niuS, — , 7rt., Pliny. ^i5om))e'jlt8, — , 7w., Pompey. ^ro))er5',— en8, ?«., Propertius. 9{a'^Cl,— ^,/., Rachel. 9?ai'munb,— 8, m., Raymond. ^Rebet'fa, —8,/., Rebecca. 9{u'bol^{) or 9?u'botf, —8, w., Ralph, 3?utf),— 8,/., Ruth. [Rudolph. (SalomO, — ^, w., Solomon. @e'balb, —8, m., Sebaldus. ©ieg'munb, — 8, ?«., Sigismund. ©int'fon, — 8, m., Samson. @ueton', — 8, VI., Suetonius. %(i'iXiVi^r—, m., Tacitus. Xatn^', — en8, 7n., Terence. ^{)e'obor, — 8, 711., Theodore. 2^^ere'fe, — n8,/., Theresa. Xi)o'ma§, — , 7)1., Thomas. Si'tian, — 8, th., Titian. 58CU,— g, w., Vitus. SSirgir, —8, m., Virgil. Smarter,— ^,»i., Walter. SBil'^elm, —8, m., William. SBilfjelmi'na, —8,/., Wilhelmina 5lBolf'gang, —8, ?«., Wolfgang. 3£a'UCr, —^, m., Xavier. II. GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. Rem. In this list are given only those names that are most frequently em- ployed, and which differ materially in form and pronunciation from the cur- responding names in English. In many eases the personal nouns and the ad- jectives that are formed from names of places are also given. Stfl'i^Cn, — ^f Aix-la-chapelle. [tains. jDic "ilbruj'jeii, j>l. , the Abruzzi Moun- Slb^ffi'uicn, — , Abyssinia. [sinian. (Sin %h\)\\i'imx,—^, pi. — , an Abys- 2(b^ffi'ntfci; {adj.), Abyssinian. S)a8 ^Dria'tifc^c 3)?eer, —8, Adriatic. 3l'frita, — S, Africa. (Sin ^Ifrita'ner, —8, pi.—, an Afri- 2lfri!a'ntfc^ {adj.), African, [can. 2)ie 3H>cn, pL, the Alps. 5)ie 3u'Hid;cu 3llpcn, Julian Alps. ^2lme'rifa, — 8, America. [American. 2)cr Stmcrita'ner, —8, pi.—, the ?lmerita'ni)c^ {adj.), American. Xk %n'tcn, pi., the Andes. Xk %n'Qdn,pl.y the Angles. [on. S)ie 5liu]elfad)'fen, pL, the Anglo-Sax- ^^ngelfad^'i'ifd; {adj.), Anglo-Saxon. Slntwer'pen, — 8, Antwerp. 2)ie 2l^eniu'ncn, ;>/., the Apennines. 5(ra'bieii, —3, Arabia. Sin 51'rabcr, —9, pi. —, an Arab. Slra'bifd; {adj.), Arabian. 21'fieu, —9, Asia. Sin ^2lfiat', — en, pi. —en, an Asiatic. ^21[ia'tifd; {adj.), Asiatic. 2l[fp'ricn, — 8, Assyria. ^Itbcn', — S, Athens. 3)a8 'iltlan'tift^c SJiccr, — g, the Atlan- ^^uftra'Iien, — 8, Australia, [tic Ocean. S)ic Sljo'rifc^en Sn\dn,pl. the Azores. 2)a8 '2ljo'toifd;c Tlttx, the sea of Azof. ©O'bCn,— ^, Raden. ^.li'ern, — 8, Bavaria. (Sin ^^a'icr, — n,/>/.— n, a Bavarian. 2)ie Scbui'ncn,;)/., the Bedouins. 33ergicn, — 9, Belgium, i^crbcrci', — , Barbary. Sin Ser'ber, — 9, pi., — , a Berber. 33erUn', — e, Berlin. [ner. (Sin iBerli'ncr, — 8, pi-—, a Berli- S3erU'ni)C^ C«^(/'.), of Berlin, [cay. (3)er @oIf toon) ^Biofa'va, Bay of Bis- ter ^Bo'bcnfec, — 8, Lake of Constance. 33el)'men, — 8, Bohemia. [mian. Sin ^i3^'me, — n, j>l. — n, a Bohe- 33o^'mtfd) {adj.), Bohemian. 2)er S3ot^'nifd)e ^Zcci'luijcn, Gulf of Bothnia. 5Braun'ld;wcig, —8, Brunswick. 33riij'icl, — 8, Brussels. 53nrgnnb', — 8, Burgundy. Slji'lia, — ^, China. (Sin (Sbine'fe, —n,pl. —n, Chinese. dbine'fifd; {adj.), Chinese. Sbur, —8, Coire. (SV>ern, —8, Cyprus. 2)a'ncmarf, —8, Denmark. Sin 2)a'ne, — n,^;. — n, a Dane. 2)a'nif(^ {adj.), Danish. 2)eutfd/ianb, Germany. Sin 2)cut'f(^er, a German. Sine 2)eut'fd;c, a German. 2)eutjd; {adj.), German. 9^orb'bcutfd; {adj.), North-German. @iib'bcutf(^ {adj.), South-German. !3)ie S)o'nau, — , the Danube. 2)rc8'ben, —8, Dresden. 2)ie 2)ii'nen (/>/.), the Do^vns. 2)iin'tird;cn, —8, Dunkirk. 2)af'feIborf, —8, Dusseldorf. ggtj^'tcn, — g, Egypt. [tian. Sin SiJV^j'ter, — 8, pi. — , an Egyp- Sgt^^'tifd; {adj.), Egyptian. Sl'fag, Alsace. Sng'Ianb, —8, England, [glishman. Sin Sng'Ianber, —9,pl.—, an En- Sng'lifc^ {adj.), English. 418 GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. S)te (Stfc^, the Adige. (guro'pa, — §, Europa. (gin (guro^a'er, — 6, pi. — , a Euro- (Suro^^vi'ijd; {adj.), European, [pean. ^((in'bCtn, — ^, Flanders, [of Flanders @tn glam'lanber, — §,pl.—,a citizen gla'mifc^ (.adj.), Flemish. glorenj', Florence. granf'retd;, France. [Frenchman, (gin granjo'fe, — n, plur. — n, a (Sine grangb'fin, — , pi. — nen, a gransb'fifd?, French. [French lady. ©alt'jicn, — ^, GaHcia. ©at'Iien, — g, Gaul. ©e'nua, — §, Genoa. (Seor'gien, — g, Georgia. 2)te ®ot^cn,i)/., the Goths. (So't^tfc^ («^'0, Gothic. @rie'd;eulanb, — §, Greece, (gin ©rie'c^e, — n,pl. — n, a Greek. ©rie'c^ifc^ (adj.), Greek. ©ropritan'nien, — §, Great Britain. @ro|jgrie'd;enIanb, — g, Grecia Magna. 2)Cr ^aag, — g, the Hague. ^abS'burg, — §, Hapsburg. ^am'burg, Hamburg. ^anno'i?er, Hanover. [Hanoverian. @in §annot)era'uer, — g, pi. —, a §annoi?era'mfd),> , ,. . Hanove- ^anno'iJerifd?, > ("^-^ rian. (gin ^ebrci'er, — ,i?/. — , a Hebrew. §ebra'if^ («<^'.), Hebrew. ^ol'Iaub, —8, Holland. [man. ©in §orianber, —^,pl.—, aDutch- ^orianbifd; (adj.), Dutch. S)ie §un'nen,jo/., the Hunns. i^n'btCll/ — ^f India, [ican) Indian. @tn Snbia'ner, — ^,pl. — , an (Amer- ein ^n'bier, — g, pi. — , an (East) 3n'btf(^ (adj.), Indian. [Indian. 3r'lanb, — §, Ireland. 2)er 3r'Ianber, — §, pi. —, the Irish- 3'rtfd; (adj.), Irish. [man. SfS'Ianb, —8, Iceland. 3ta'Ucn, — S, Italy. @tn ^tatiS'ncr, — §, ;>/. — , an Ttal- ^taltd'nifc^ (adj.), ItaUan. [ian. ^•a'^an, — «*, Japan. [nese. (giu 3'a^ane'fe, — u, pi. — n, a Japa- ^a^ane'fifc^ (adj.), Japanese. 3uba'a, — 8, Judea. (gin 3u'be, — n,pl. — n, a Jew. @tne 3ii'bin, — ,pl. — nen, a Jewess. Sii't'ifc^ (adj.), Jewish. ^drn'tl)en, —I, CarintWa. S)a8 tag>if(^e 9Jieer, — g, the Caspian Sij'fingen, — §, Kissingen. [ISea. ^ob'Ienj, Coblenz. ^otn, — g, Cologne. S)er ^o'merfee, Lake Como. ^onftanj, Constance, ^o^enba'gen, — g, Copenhagen, ^orint^', — g, Corinth, ^raiu, — g, Carniola. ^ra'fau, — g, Cracow, ^rim, — , Crimea. SCt^'jig, —§, Leipsic. Si'banon, — g, Lebanon. Sif fabon, — g, Lisbon. Si'tbauen, — g, Lithuania. 3)te Sombarbei', — , Lombardy. 2)er l^o'rcnsbufen,— g, Gulf of St.Law- 2otl;'ringen, — g, Lothaire. [rence. Siit'tic^, — g, Liege. Sujern',— , Lucem. WWnn, —^, Moravia. 2)^ai'(anb, — g, Milan. SJlainj, Mayence. SJJavof'fo, — g, Morocco. [Moor. (gin aiJZarroffa'ner, — 8, pi. —, a 9}Jaro!!a'mf(^ (adj.), Moorish. 2)ie MaxX, —, the Mark (of Branden- burg). ajJar'tifd; (adj.), of the Mark. S)ie 9Jfar'fen (pL), an ancient people of North-Germany, near Ems. 9}Je'^e(n, — g, Malines. 2)ag 2«tt'tet[anbtfd;e Mm, — g, the Mediterranean See. 2)ie 2)Jorbau, — , Moldavia. GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES. 419 jDie 2J?ol'bau, — , the (river) Moldavia. a)io'jcl.— , Moselle. 3Jioe'iau, — ^, Moscow. 3)iiin'c^en, — S, Munich. 9lamur' —S, Namur. 9^ea'pcl, — S, Naples. 2)ie ^Jhc'bcrlanbe,;?/., the Netherlands. 9?ie'berIaiibifd;(ar/;'.),of the Nether- 5^or'irCi]cn, — S, Norway. [lands. 9hirn'bercj, Nuremberg. jDeft'crrCit^, — fi(, Austria. Sill Oe'fterreid;er, — 8, an Austrian. Oe'fterreid;ifd; (adj.), Austrian. Oft'gctbcn,/?/., Ostrogoths. Oftin'bicn, — 8, East India. *pari^', Paris. ^eIo)3onue6' — , Peloponnesus, ^cr'ficn, — ^, Persia, ^o'lcn, —9, Poland. (Sin ''^o'le, —n,pl., — n, a Pole. ^ormfd?(a^y.), Polish, ^om'nierii, — , Pomerania. (Sin '^Nom'mer, —Q,pl. — n,aPome- ^or'tligal, — g, Portugal, [ranian. Sin ^^ortuvjie' je, — n, pi. — n, a Por- tuguese. ^ortugie'fifd; («^"-), Portuguese. ^ot«'bam, —§, Potsdam, ^reu'^en, — 9, Prussia. [sian. (Sin 'ijSreu'^c, — n, pi. — n, a Prus- ^reu^ifc^ (adj.), Prussian. JRc'gCnfilburg, —^, Ratisbon. S£)cr 5W^ein, — S, Rhine. 2)a6 $Rie'fengcbirge,— 8, the Capathian 9?om, — S, Rome. [Mountains. (Sin 9ii5'mcr, — 9, pi. — , a Roman. $Re'mifc^ (adj.), Roman, Romish. 9?n|3'(anb, —9, Russia. Sin 9htj'ie, — r\,pL — n, a Russian. 9inj'fifd; (adj.), Russian. 6a(^'fcn, —ip Saxony. (gin gac^'fe, — n, pi. —n, a Saxon. ©cid^'fifc^ (adj.), Saxon. ©c^Ie'ficn, — «, Silesia. ©c^ctt'Ianb, — 9, Scotland. Sin ©t^ot'te, — n, pi. —n, a Scotch. ed^ot'tifd; (adj.), Scotch. [man. ^6)toa:hm, — §, Suabia. [bian. (Sin (adj.), Swiss. [Swiss, ©ibi'rien, —8, Siberia. ©tci'Uen, —8, Sicily. @^a'nten, —8, Spain. [iard. (Sin ©^a'nier, —8, ;>/. — , a Span- ©pa'nifc^ («c&'.), Spanish, ©pci'er, —8, Spires. @tei?'crmar!, —8, Styria. 2)tC ^OtarCi', — , Tartary. (Sin Satar', —8, ;>;. —en, a Tartar. 2:()e'ben, —8, Thebes. 2)ie 3:t;cm'fc, — , the Thames. jTbu'ringen, —8, Thuringia. 2)ie 2:i'ber, —, the Tiber. 2)a8 Z\)XoV, —8, the Tyrol 2;o8fa'na, — 8, Tuscany. Strient', —8, Trent. Sri'er,— 8, Treves. Xrieft', —8, Trieste. 2)te 2;urtei', — , Turkey. Sin Xilr'te, — n, pi. — n, a Turk. Xilr'tifd; (adj.), Turkish. Un'prn, —^, Hungary. [rian. SinUn'gar, — 8,;>»/.— en,a Ilunga- Un'garifd; (adj.), Hungarian. %\t ^mWXtVlfpl., the Vandals. S?ene'big, — 8, Venice. [netian. Sin 33enc;;ia'ner, —8, pi. —, a Ve- ^enejia'nifd; (adj.), Venetian. 2^ie 33erei'ntgten ©taa'ten t>on 5lmc'* rita, the United States of America. SSirgi'men, — 8, Virginia. 2)iC SSttUat^Ci', —, WaUachia. SSeft'got^en (/>/.), Visigoths. 420 ABREVIATIONS. 2>te SSetc^'fcI, — , the Vistula. SBeftfa'Ien,— 8, Westphalia, ^ien, — §, Vienna. Sin SSie'ner, — 3, pi. — , a Viennese. SBic'nertfd; (adj.), Viennese. 2)ie aiJol'ga, — , the Volga. SSormg, Worms, Bormio. ilBilr'temberg,— 8, Wiitemberg. III. ABREVIATIONS. Rem. Abreviations are employed in German to a far greater extent than thej are in English. The list below includes only the most usual abbreviations. 0. a. O .• am anbera Ortc at the other place. a. a. O am augefitljrten Orte at the place mentioned. 2lbfd;n mf^uitt ;. section. a.b an ber (Ober, eic) "on the (Oder, e ber 35erfaffer the author. f. g^fS-f tgg folgenb (=er, =e, -e§) following. ?^ortf. f ^ortfe^ung fotgt to be continued. fr. franco post-paid. %x ^rait Mrs. ^rl g^rauletn Miss. ?^rb'or griebrtc^Sb'or Frederick d'or. [schcn. ®.,®r.,or@gr @rofc^en,or @itbergrof(i)en Groschen or Silvergro- gcB geboren born {i. e., the maiden ge^. ge^eftet.., stitched. [name). gcft geftorben dead, late. §bl€f^r §anbel§f;prad^e language of commerce. ^|3ttr). §au^ttt?ort noun. §^3tft |)an^tftabt.. capital. |)r. (§§,) |)err(^crren) Mr. (Messrs.) 3.... 3a^r year. ABREVIATIONS. 421 SaM) 3!flM"n^crt century. ^aif . , or ^aifcrl taiferlid; imperial. ^ati).Si , fat^oafd;e ^rd;c Catholic Church. ^cn.,orS5nigI t5nicj(ic^ royal. R. ^ !aifer(ict)4i5ntgli(^ imperial and royaJ. ^J ^reujer creuzer. ? Scinge longitude (long). fat lateimjd; Latin. [(inst.). lauf. aJioii laufcnben 3}ionat8 in the current month ?tg IMeferuiig number. Sftrl ^funb Sterling pound sterling. Wl §. (2K. §. p.) Mmx §err (SJk'ine ^crrcn) JSir (gentlemen). ra. Sr mittagltd^e Sieite southern latitude. n. 51., or 9^. 2tnb nad; Slnbern according to others. 9Jgr ^^ieugrofd^en New Groschen. Sil, 33 ni5rbUd;e 53rcitc northern latitude. 9'io.,^r.,9iro. (9^ro8.) ^^umcro, ^}htmmer(— n)... number (numbers). ^, ® 9fJad;fd?ritt Postscript (P.S.). O. ? oftUd^c Sangc east longitude. VirW ^^tciinig Pfennig. ^fb ^funb pound. ^b. 2) 2)ottor bcr ^f;Uofo^^te.... Doctor of Philosophy. :proteft ^roteftantifc^ Protestant. O. (^ Ouvtbratgwf? square foot. O. "id Cuabrat 3)MIe square mile. 9i Sieaumur Reaumur. 5Rab SJabatt abatement, discount. 9?()n 9i()cimfd; Rhenish. SRt^rr.,orrtb 9eeid;?tbaler Rix dollar. @. (@.,or j.) @eite (ficbe) page (see). f. b i£icbe btcfcd see this (article). f. g fogenannt so called. ^px <£prad;c , language. f^r f)>nd; pronounce. ft ftarb (ftatt).....' died (instead of). f. 3 feiner ^di at time. %^U.,Z\)l 2:Mer Thaler. U. (u.) Ubr (unb) o'clock (and). [ers. 11. 51. (u. a.)... unter anbcrn(unb anbere). among others (and oth- II. a. a. O unb an anbern Ortcn and at other places. u. a. ©t unb anbern (Stetlen and other places. u. bergl. OT unb bergleid^cn mebr ) and more of the same u. m. bgt unb mc^r bcrgteic^en j *••• kind. u. j. f unb fo ferncr ) . . , u.f.tt) unbfon):itcr| nnd so forth. 422 MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. to. 3 bortgcn 3a^rS • last year. to. 9Ji toorigen SJJonat^ last month (uU.). to. i30U oben from above. to. u toon uuten from below. 2B SSeften west. 3 S^ii, (B^^^O inch (line). J. S3 sum 33eif))iel for example. IV. MONEYS, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. Rem. These vary greatly in the different states of Germany. We give only some of the leading coins, weights, and measures of the principal Ger- man states. 1. Prussian Money (used in North Germany). (@oIb) @in bo))))etter 5nebnd>§b'or=-10 2;Mer= $7.12 „ @tn^reu^if^er5rtebn(^3b'or=5 2:^lr.2oegr. = ... 4.20 (@tlkr) (Sin Zi)akx=30 @trbergrojc^en=:360^fenmge= 71 „ (gin@ilbergrojc^en=l2 ^fenntgc= 2| (^u^fcif) Sin @cc^fer=6 ^fenmge= 1| „ (Sin 2)reter==3 ^tenmge= | f, @in ^tenmg= | 2. Bavarian Money (used in Southwestern Germany). (®otb) dm 2)ufat=5 ©utben 40 ^reujer^ • $2.26 C^ilber) (Sin 35ereingtMer=3| @ulben=2 ^reu^. Z^aUx= 1.42 „ @tn3»^etgutbenftiicE = 120 Sreujer^ 82 „ @tn @ulben=60 treu^er = 41 „ (Sin §albgulben[tiicf =30 ^renjer^ 2o^ fuub=i kilogramme = " " 98 ein ^J|3reu6ifc^e8 ^tuni'=32 Sot^=468 @ramme« = ... " " 97 (Sin 2ot^ = 14.6 ®ramme8 = English ounce* 48 5. German Measures. 1. LINEAR MEASURE. Gine bciitfAe (gcogra^^ifc(;e) 3J2eile (15 2JieiIen=l° gco* gra^l;ifc^e 33reite)= English miles 4.06 (Sine "it>rcu|3if(i;e 2JJeile = 24,000 9tl;cinifc^e gufe = 5372 Metres^ " *' 4.07 (Sine 8tnnbe=eineHbebeutt^e 2)Me= " " 2.03 eine 5Rutf)e = 12 9e(?eimfcl;e gu^=3.766 Metres = English feet 12.36 (Sin $»{)einifc^er gu^ = 12 3oa=313 Millimetres^ " " 1.03 (Sin 3dII = 12 ^inien=26.2 Millimetres^ Enghsh inches 1.03 2. SURFACE MEASURE. (Sine Ouabratmeilc (^reu^ifc^)= English square miles 21.09 (Sine Cuabratrut^e = 144 Ouabratfug= English square feet 152.67 (Sin ajiorgcn in ijren§en=l80 Cuabratrut^en ; in 53aicrn=400 Cuabrot* rut^en; in @ac^fen=2 5lcfer=l50Ciuabratrut^en. 3. MEASURE OF CONTENTS. (Sin ^reu^if c^e« Ouart = 64 tubitgoU = 1.145 Litres = English quarts 1 . 28 (Sin ^reu^iic^er (Simer=60 Cluart=69.1 Litres^ English gallons 19.00 Sin i^rcugiid^er Sd;eftd=48 Ouart=55.38 Litres=.. English bushel 1.92 ©ine 3JJet5C=fg @c^cffcl=3 Cnart8=3.435 Litres =.. English quarts 3.88 V. CLASSIFIED LIST OF WORDS. 3)ag Scltatt. !♦ S)er ®ott, --e«,j9/. ©otter, God, gods. „ ®d;i5))'fer, — «, the Creator. 3;e'ju8 (S^ri'ftu?, — fti, Jesus Christ. 3)er bei'fige (5eift, —eg, Holy Ghost. 2)ie 2)reiei'nigfeit, — , the Trinity. 2)er (Sn'gcl, —8, the angeL tf 2:eu'fei, — 8, devil. t, §im'mel, — §, heaven. 2)ie ^ol'Ie, — , hell. S)a!8 ge'gefcucr, — S, purgatory. The Universe. 2)ic ^atux', —, Nature. ^fiatiir'lid), natural. [ter. 2)ie aWate'rie, — , ber ®toff, — c§, ma^ 2Katcriett', tor'^erlid;, material. 2)a6?ltom', — t^,pl. — c, atom. „ ^or'per, — ^,pl. — , body. (Sin fe'fter ^Br'^jer, a solid body. 2)ie ^e'ftigteit, — , solidity. 2)a8 @a«, —tQ,pl. —t, gas. n ®t\6)'6pY, —t9, pi. — e, creature. 424 LIST OF WORDS. S)cr 'Mann, — e§, pi. Mannzx, man, husband. „ ^a'ttx,—^,pl SSci'ter, father. „ /. 53rii'ber, brother. „ D'tjeim, — ^,pL — e, uncle, „ defter, — §,/>/. — n, cousin. „ 9fief fe, — n,pL — n, nephew. I, ©ro^'bater, grandfather. „ Ur'gro^iJater, great-grandfather. „ (Sn'tel, — ^,pL — , grandson. 2)te S'ltern, parents (has no sing.). 2)er @d;tt)te'gerboter, father-in-law. „ @c^n)ie'gerfo^n, son-in-law. „ @d;n?a'ger, —8, pi. @d;tt)a'fler, brother-in-law. f, @tief' ijater, stepfather. „ ©ttef'fot;!!, stepson. „ S3rau'ttgam, — §, bridegroom. „ 2Bitt'n?er, —6, widower. S5)ag Sll'ter, —8, old age. 2)er ©reig, — e§, />/. — e, old man. M ^na'be, — n,pl. — n, boy. S)ic®eburt',— , birth. „ a^erlo'bung, — , betrothal. 2)cr tiir^er* ®tc H'ber, —,pL —n, vein. S)et 3lrm, —^^,pl. — c, arm. S)aS Stu'ge, —^,pl. — n, eye. 3)er 5lug'a^fel, —8, jo/. Slug'a^td, eyeball, profile of the eye. 2)te Slu'genBraue, — ,pL — n, ) eye- „ ^u'gcnBraun,— ,i?^.— en, f brow. S)a8 3lu'genlib, —§,pl. — er, eyelid. S)er 58a' ien, —8,;?/. — , cheek. „ S3art, — c8, _p/. S3arte, beard. S)ag 53ein, —t^,pl. — e, leg. „ S3lut, — e§, blood. '^k 33ru[t, — ,p/. 33rii[te, breast. 2)er SSu'feu, —^,pl. —, bosom. f, 2)au'men, —8, />Z. — , thumb. " (gtt'bogen, —^,pl. —, elbow. S)ie gauft, —,pl. gaufte, fist. Man. 2)te %xan, — ,pl. — en, woman, wife. „ 9)iut'ter, — , pi. ajJitt'ter, mother. „ Xo&j'itx, — ,i?/.jlbct)'ter,daughter. „ @d;ti?e'fter, — , pi. —n, sister. „ 2^on'te, —,pl. —n, aunt. „ Sou[i'ne, —,pl. —n, the cousin. „ 9^iid;'te, — , /;/. — n, niece. „ ©ro^' mutter, grandmother. „ Ur'gro^mutter , great-grand- mother. „ (gu'Jeltn, — , pi —mn, grand- daughter. „ @d)i»te'germutter, mother-in-law. ,; iSc^tcie'gertod^ter, daughter -in, law. [in-law. „ (Sc^md'genn, — ,pl. — nen, sisterv ,t @ttef mutter, stepmother. „ @tief totter, stepdaughter. „ S3raut, —,pl. 53raute, bride, „ SBitt'me, — , pi. —en, widow. „ ^u'geub, —, youth. 2)er 3^i^il'Iing, —^,pl. — e, twin. 2)a8 3)Zab'd;en, —8, pi —, girl. 2)er 2:Db, — e8, death. S)ie (S'I)e, — , marriage. 3* The body. ®te ^er'fe, —,pL — u, heel. ©er ging'er, — §,pl. — , finger. „ guB, — e8, pi p|3e, foot. „ ©au'men, —8, pi. —, palate. S)a8 @el;trn', — t^,pl. — e, brain. „ ©elenf, —t^,pl. — e, joint. „ @efi(i)t', —8, sight, face. [ber. „ ©Iteb, — e8, j9/. — er, hmb, mem- ber §al8, —m,pl §alfe,neck. 2)te §anb,— ,/)^. ^cinbe, hand. S)a8 §au^t, —t^,pl. ^anp\cx, head. S)te §aut, —,;>/. §aute, skin. S)a8 §erj|, — en8,i)/. —en, heart. 2)ie §iifte, — ,i?/. — u, hip. f, Seb'Ie, — , pi — n, throat. 3)a8 ^ute, — 8,i)/. — e, knee. 2)er ^uo'd?en, —^,pl —, bone. LIST OF WORDS. 425 2)cr ^ni5'cl;cl, 2)te !>Je'ber,— „ So'cfe,— „ Sung'c,- 2)er 2Tia'gen, 5Da8 ^laxl, - 2)er 2)?uub, - 2)ie 2)lu«'tel, S)cr ^Jia'gel, - !Eic ^M'fe, — S)er gfJert), — > 2)ic 9iie're, - 2)a6 O^r, — 2)ie $Ri))>e, 2)cr 3til'(fen, — §,/»/. — , knuckle, an- , pi. — n, liver. [kle. -,pl. — n, lip. , pi. — n, curl. -,pl. — n, lung. — Q,pl. — , stomach. -^, marrow. -eS, pi. SOiiinber, mouth. — ,pl. — n, muscle. -^,pl. ''M^^d, nail. , pi. — n, nose. m,pL — Cll, nerve. -, pi. — n, kidney (loins). i,pl. — en, ear. -,pl. — n, rib. — ^,pl. — , back. Xtx 9?ilcf'grat,—c5,;>/.—C, backbone, ,; @d;a'bel, — ^,pl. — , skull, [spine. „ @d;en'fei, —9, pi. —, thigh. 2)ie ®cl;ld'fc, —,pl. — n, temple. „ ©c^lacVabcr, — , pi. — n, artery. 2)cr @c^oo|, —t%,pl. — e, lap. 2)ic S^ul'ter, — ,pl. — n, shoulder. „ ®ei'te, — ,pl. — n, side. [brow. „ ®tirn, — , pi. — cii, forehead, „ SBa'bc,— ,;>/.— n, calf. „ SBang'c, — ,pl. — n, cheek. S)er 3^^^"/ — t^ipl. ^'d\)\\t, tooth. 2)a8 B^lJii'ft^^ifd^ — cS, gum. 2)ie B^'^^/ ~t P^' ~""f toe. n B""3'^/ —t pi' — n, tongue. 2)cr Ster'mel, — S, pi. —, sleeve, [let. S)a3 ^^rm'bant), -«,;>/. -banber, brace- S)cr Satift', — z^,pl. — e, cambric. S)te 53cin'neibcr (;>/.), pantaloons. 2)er Sefatj', — eS,;>/. — fd^e,triraming. Xie ^ril'Ie, — , pi. — n, spectacles. „ 33ru[t'nabe(, — ,pl. — n, breastpin. „ 58itr'fte, — ,pl. — n, brush. 2)cr '2)c'gcn,— g, pi. —, sword. „ ga'd;er, — §, pi. —, fan. [ring. „ l^iiig'erring, — e8, />/. — e, finger- „ glor, — CS, 7^;. gli^ie, crape. „ 5^^^^ ~^f pi- ^^^^^t dress-coat. 2)tc i^ran'fe, — , pi. —n, fringe. S)a« gut'tcr, — «, i?/. — , lining. „ ®ejd;mei'be, — §, jewelry. !£er ©iir'tel, —9, pi. —, belt, sash. „ ©um'mijd^U^, India-rubber over- shoe. S)ic ^aai'biirfie, — ,pl. — n, hairbrush. „ ^aar'nabel, — , pi. — n, hairpin. 2)cr §al.'fd;mu(f, —eg, necklace. 2)a« JpalS'tud), — e§,;>/. 4iic^cr, cravat. „ ^emb, — t^,pl. — en, shirt. 2)ie ^o'jen (pi), pantaloons. „ §o'tcntrdger (pL), suspenders. S)er ^amm, —t^,pl. ^dmmc, comb. Articles of Dress. 25er ^attun', —i^,pl. — e, caUco. 2)aS ^Ictb, —eg, pi. — er, dress-coat S)tc ^(ei'ber {pL), clothes. 5)cr ^o^f^u^, —eg, head-dress. „ ^ra'gen, — g, pi. — , collar. '5)te aJJutje, —,/>/. — n, cap. „ ^dl/nabel,—,^)/. —n, needle. 2)er Ot;r'ring, — e8, />/. — e, earring. S)te ^oma'be, — ,i>/. — n, pomade. 2)er Oie'genfdjirm, — g, umbrella. „ 9^lng, —z^,pl. — e, ring. „ 9iocf, — c§, i?;. 9?o(fe, coat. 2)ie ®d;ee're, —,;>/. — n, shears. S)er @d;Iaf'rocf, -eg, dressing-gown. rr @d;Iei'er, — g, ;>/. — , veil. 2)ii» @d;niir'bruft, pi. ^brilfte, stays. 2)er ®c^ub, —eg, pi. — e, shoe. jDte @d;Ur'5e, — , z^^. — n, apron. !5)er ©on'nenfc^irm, — g, parasol. 2)ie ®^i^en (;>/.), lace. „ ©po'ren (;>/.), spur. 2)er Stie'fel, — g,/?/. — , boot. Qack. „ (^tre'felfnec^t, — g, pi — e, boot- 2)ie ®tie*felirtd;je, — , shoe-blacking. 2)cr ®trnm^f, -eg, pi. @trum>fe, stockmg. S)ic Za\&f(, — , /;/. —en, pocket 426 LIST OF WORDS, 2)a« ^o'f(^cntue^, — e6, pi. ^iidjer, handkerchief. [coat. S)er Ue'berrod, — e8, pi. ^xMt, over- £)ic Un'terl^ojcn (pi), drawers. 2)cr Hn'tatt, — §,j3/. -faltc, fit. 2)te SSlat'tern (p/.), small-pox. „ 53(tnb'^eit, — , blindness. £)er ^nic^, —eg, pi. S3riid?e, rupture. 2)te gaU'juc^t, — , apoplexy. 2)a^ gie'ber, — §, pi. — , fever. „ beg' arttge gieber, malignant fever „ brei'tagige gieber, tertiary fever. „ gel' be gieber, yellow fever. „ ^i'l^tge gieber, burning fever. „ iaViz gteber, fever and ague. „ itertoo'fe gteber, nervous fever. „ @c^ar'kd;fteber, scarlet fever. S)er jlt^'^^US,—, typhus fever. 2)ie groft'beute, —,pl — n, chilblain. „ @ef ^tDulft' , — , pi. =iilfte, swelling 2)ag @efd;tt)ilr',— eg,i?Z.— e, ulcer. 3)ie @td)t, — , gout. „ §et'Iung,—,i)?.— en, healing, cure „ ^ei'ferfeit, — , hoarseness, ^ei'fer, hoarse. S)a§ §it^'nerauge, —t^,pl. — n, corn. 2)te SBc'fte, — , />/.— n, vest. II ^'^W^^'^^^'^i — / pl — tt, tooth- brush, [pick. 2)er 3a^n'fto^cr, —8, /??. — , tooth- Maladies. S)te §unb8'tt)Ut^, — , hydrophobia. 2)er §u'ften, — g, cough. l^u'ften, to cough. S)er ^rebg, — §, cancer. 3)ie 9)la'fcrn (;>/.), measles. „ 9^ar'be, — , pi. — n, scar. „ O^n'tnac^t, — , fainting. „ ^ocfen (;?/.), small-pox. „ Ouet'fc^uiig, — , pi. —en, contu- S)er @c^nu':^fen, — 8, a cold. [sion. fid^ ertal'ten, to take cold. 2)te (Sc^ttJci'^e, — , faintness. „ @c^tt>inb'fud;t, — , consumption. 2)a8 @ei'ten[ted)en, —8, pleurisy. „ ©tam'meln, — 8, stammering. S)te ©tnmm'^ett, — , dumbness. „ (fal'Ienbe) @ud;t, — , epilepsy. „ S^aub'^ett, — , deafness. „ Ue'belfett, — , nausea. „ 35erren'!ung, — , pi —en, disloca- „ SBafjerfuc^t, —, dropsy, [tion. „ SBun'be, — , pi — n, wound. 1. KINDS OF HOUSES. 2)te S3anf, — , pi. —en, bank. „ S3tbIiot{;ef —,pl —en, library. „ 53or'fe, — , pi — n, exchange. „ 58rii'(Je, — , pi — n, bridge. „ Sa^et'Ie, — , pi — n, chapel. „ Safer'ne, —,pl. — n, barrack. 3)er (gt'fenba^n^of, — e§, railroad sta- tion. 3)a§ ©efang'm^, — e§, joZ. — e, prison. „ ®ett)a(^8'bau§,—e§, green-house. 2)ie §itt'te, — , pi — n, hut. ,f ^r'd;e, — , pi. — n. church. 2)er ^rc^'^of, chiirch-yard, cemetery. 1/ ^ir(!^'t^nrm, — eS, church tower. 6» The House. 2. PARTS OF A HOUSE. S)er Garten, —%,pl.—, beam. S)a8 SBrett, —z^,pl — er, board. 2)er S3run'nen, —i,pl — , well. S)a8 S)a(^, —t%,pl S)a(^er, roof. 3)ie S)te'te,— ,i)/. —en, ceiling. S)a8 (Srb'gefc^o^, —eg, ground floor, parterre. [shutter. S)cr gen'fterlaben, —^,pl.—, window- „ gu§'boben,—S,y. =bi)ben, floor. S)aS @etr)brbe, — g,;?/. — , vault. 3)er ^anttn', —eg,;?/. — e, chimney. S)ie ^am'mer, — ,i>/. — n, chamber, 2)er teller, — g, jo/. — , cellar. 2)ie tii'c^e, — , ;?/. — n, kitchen. i LIST OF WORDS. 427 ■Die ©afriflci', sacristy, vestry. 25aS ^lo'fter, —8, pi. ^Ii3'fter, cloister. „ Sanb'^auS, country house, villa. 2)te SDWn'jc, — , pi. —n, mint (coin). 2)a8 O'^ern^auS, — e§, opera-house. 2)cr ^43alaft', —eg, />/. ^ald'fte, palace. S)tc ^oft, — , i?/. —en, post-oflSce. 2)a« ®c^au'f^iel^au6, theatre. 2)ic Sc^eu'ne, — ,_p/.— n, bam. 25ae (guitar, — , pi. @^italer, hospi- „ 2;rcib'^aii8, hot-house. [tal. It S^Wfl'^^^u^f arsenal. II ^^^'^^'^^1 custom-house. 2)er SBe'd^er, —8, f»/. — , tumbler, cup. S)aS 53ett, -e§, />/. —en, bed. S)ie SBctt'bccfe, — , pi. — n, coverlet. 2)a8 SBett'flefteU, — §, bedstead. „ S3ctt'tuci,— «,/>/. 4iid;er, sheet. 2)er Stro^'facf, — e§, straw bed. S)ic aJZatra'fee, — , pi. —en, mattress. :^aS ^o^f tiffcn, — , pi. — , willow. „ ge'bcrbctt, feather bed. „ 53ii'd;crbrett, book-shelf. jDer 33U'd;erfd;rant, bookcase, [goose. S)a8 SU'gcIeijcn, flat iron, tailor's bil'geln, to iron. S)ic Scmmobe, —,/>/.— n, bureau. 2)er ©i'rncr, —«,/>/. — , bucket, pail. 2)a8 gaO, — e«, p/. gaffer, cask. 2)ic geu'erjange, — , pi. — n, tongs. S)a8 (Semdrbe,— 8, ;>/. — , painting. „ $anb'tud^,—e8,i)/. 4ild^er, towel. S)er ^ef'fer, —8, pi. — , kettle. !I)!e ^er'je, — , pi. —v., wax candle. „ i^'fte, — , pi. — n, chest. „ ^o^'Ic, — , pi. — n, coal. n SBrann'fo^Ic, lignite. „ ^olj'tofjle, charcoal. ,~i. • 't f f ' <■ mineral coal. S)er ,^ort\ — c8, /?/. .^Brbc, basket. „ ^ron'Icud)tcr, — 8, chandelier. „ ^^rnj], — e8, ;>/. ^riic^c, pitcher. 3)ie ^um'^c, —,;>/. — n, pump. 2)er 9Jie'gel,— 8,i)/.— , bolt, door-bar M @aal, — c8,/j/. @dlc, parlor. 2)a8 @d;taf jimmer, —8, />/. — , bed- room. [ney- 2)er ©c^om'flcin, —8, p/. — c, chim- „ @to(f,— e8, (^ S)a8 etocf't»ert,-c8,) ^^''' '^*''7- 2)ie ©tu'be, — ,pl. — n, room, [stepb. „ Sre^^C, — , pi. — n, stairway, 2)a8 jtre^'^engcldnber, baluster. „ 2;re^>cnbau8, baluster, [story. Sine 2;re^^e ^od;, in the second 7. ■^a8 ^u'd;engcrdt^,) „ ^ii'd;cnfd;irr, ) Furniture. kitchen utensils. '^tx ^'d^cnroft, kitchen range, grate. 2)ie Sani'pe, —,;;/.— n, lamp. „ Sater'ne,;>/. — n, lantern, [candle. 2)a8 Sic^t, — e8, pi. — e or — cr, light, ©ejo'^cnc ?id;ter, mould candles, ©cgcf'fcne !k!id;ter, dipped candles. 2)er Sid;t'bod;t, candle-wick. 2)ie Sid;t'^ut5e, snuffers. S)cr Seud/ter, —8, candle-stick. 2)ie ^43fan'ne, — ,pl. — n, pan. 2)er ^fro^fen, —8, /^/. — , cork. 2)er ^^frc'))fen3iel;cr, the corkscrew. 2)ie (gd^au'fcl, p/. — n, shovel, [board. 2)er ©d^rant, —8, p/. ©durante, cup- 2)ie @d)nb'Iabe, — ,pl. — en, drawer. '^a^ ®d^tr»e'teU;ol3'^en, match. 2)^r @^)ie'gei, —%,pl. — , mirror. „ @tu^I, — e8, pi. (gtii^Ic, chair. 'J)a6 @ieb, — e8,7>/. — c, sieve. „ @o>(?a, —8, jo/. —8, sofa. 2)er 2:e^>it^, —z^,pl. — c, cai-pet. „ Xic'gel, —8, ;>/. — , skillet. 3)er !J;ifc^, — e8,;>/.— e, table. '^a^ Xifc^'tud^ tablecloth. „ 2;c^t, — e8, />/. 2;opfe, pot. ^ie SSant'nbr,— ,/j/. —en, clock. jDa8 SSafd/becfen, — 6, washbowl 2)ie SSic'ge, —,pl. — n, cradle. 428 LIST OF WORDS. 2)lal)lsciten unb ©erlc^tc. 1. MEALS. 2)ag ^ril^'ftiid , —eg, p?.— e, breakfast grui)ftU(len, to breakfast. „ aJiit'tageffen, —8, dinner. 3u aJ^ittag e[fen, to dine. „ 5t'benbe[fen,-gJ „ 5l'6enbbrob, — g,> ^"^ 3u Stbenb e[f en, to take supper. „ ©aft'ma^I,— eg, joZ.^ma^ler, ban- ker @aft,— eg,/>?. ©cifte, guest, [quet. „ 2lp:^etit', —6, appetite. ©efeg'nete Wla^'itit I (a blessing on the meal !) 2. DISHES. 2)a8 S3rob, —t^,pl. — e, bread. SBei^'brob, wheat bread. ©d^lDarj'brob, brown bread. 3llt'bacfene§ 3Srob, stale bread. S3ut'terbrob, bread and butter. 2)ie tru'me, — , pi — n, crumb. „ tru'fte, — , pi. — n, crust. „ tiet'e, — , bran. 2)er Seig, — eg, dough. „ S)ie §e'fe, — , yeast. S)ie 33uf tcr, — , butter. Sag @t, — eg,/»/. — er, egg. S)er @t'er!urf)en, — g, omelet., ©e^'eter, poached eggs. ^Rii^r'eier, scrambled eggs. ©etrctbe unb ©cmiifc* 2)tc 33o{)'ne, — , pi. — n, bean. „ Srb'fe, — , pi. — n, pea. S)er glac^g, —eg, flax. 3)ie ©er'fte, — , barley. 2)ag ©rag,- eg,i)/. (^ra'jer, grass. S)te ©ur'fe, — ^jZ. — n, cucumber. S)er §a'fer, — g, oats. S)ag ^eu, —eg, hay. S)te §ir'je, — , millet. „ ^artoffel, — , pi. — n, potato. 2)er ^tee, — g, clover. „ 5lo^t, —eg, cabbage. 8* Meals and Dishes. ®ag @i'tt)et§, the white of eggs. 2)er S)ot'ter, — g, the yolk. Ser @f fig, — g, vinegar. 2)ag gleijd), —eg, meat. §am'melf(eijd;, mutton. ^alb'flelfc^, veal. ^linb'fleifc^, beef. ®d?tt>ei'nefleifd), pork. ©ebra'teneg gletfd^, roast meat. §am'melbrateii, roast mutton. ^albg'braten, roast veal. 9itnbg'braten, roast beef. 2)ie ^albg'cotelette, — , pi. — n, S)er Wi'\t, —^,pl.—, cheese. ®ie9Jiitc^,— milk. 2)er $fta^m, — eg,1 2)te ©a^'ne, — „ 2}lol!en (i)Z.), whey. „ S3ut'termild;, buttermilk. 2)ag ©bft, —eg, fruit. @tn'gemad;teg Obft, preserved fruit. 2)ag 2t>fetmu^, apple-sauce. „ ^om^ot', — g, sauce. 2)er ^feffer, — g, pepper. 'S^Oi^ Bail, —eg, salt. 3)te ©arbel'Ien {pi.), sardines. 2)er ®enf, —eg, mustard. S)xe @u^>e,— , soup. M S^or'te, — ,pl. — n, tart. „ SSiirft, — ,i?/. SSiirfte, sausage. 9* Grrains and Vegetables. S)er 58Iu'mcii!DbI, cauliflower. „ 93raun'tobr, brown cabbage. „ @au;er!o^I, ) .^^-kraut. 3)ag @au erf rant, i 2)ag ^orn, —eg, grain. „ traut, —eg, pi. "trau'ter, herb. „ Un'traut, weed. 2)ie^rej'fe, — ,ij/. — n, cress. „ Sin'fe, — , pi. — tt, lentil, 3)er aRatg, —eg, Indian corn. S)ie ^a'ftinafe, — , pi — n, parsnip. „ ^eterfi'tie, — , parsley. LIST OF WORDS. 429 T)tX ^ilj, — CS, pi. — e, mushroom. „ 9iei«, — e«, rice. „ SRet'tig, — e6, pi. — c, radish. „ 3Jicer'rettig, horseradish. „ 9icg'gcn, —8, rye. 2)ie 9iu'be, —,/;/. — n, rape. „ gclbc ^tii'bc, carrot. Xk rot^e DUi'bc, beet. „ tceifje 3iube, tumip. 2)cr ®erierte, — , celery. 2)er (Spar'gel, — 6, asparagus. „ ®^nnat', — «, spinage. „ SSeijen, — S, wheat. 2)ic 3tt)ic'bel, — , pi. —n, onion. Daft unb Ctiftaaumc. 10» 2)ic 5l'naua§, — ^ja/. — , pine-apple. 2)cr 3l>fel, —9, pi. %tp\d, apple. 2)ic 5l))fel|i'nc, —,pl. —n, orange. „ Sl^iito'jc,— ,/>/. — n, apricot. 2)er 33aiim, — e8, p/. 53dume, tree. Sl^felbauni, apple-tree. SBirn'bauni, pear-tree. ^flau'menbaum, plum-tree. gci'gcubaum, fig-tree. 2)a«> :i3latt, —t^,]>l. 331attcr, leaf. 2)er @tamm, -c«,;>/. 8tcimme, trunk S)ie $){in'bc, —,/>/. — n, bark. 2)cr B^^^iflf —2^/ pl' —^f bough. 2)ic SBur'^el, —,pl. — n, root. 2)ic SBee're, — ,pl. — n, berry. S3rom'beerc, blackberry. erb'bcerc, strawberry. ^ei'belbeerc, bilberry. ^im'beere, raspberry. 3!o^an'ni8bccrc, currant. Fruits and Fruit-trees. 2}Zaurbeerc, mulberry. ©ta'c^elbeerc, gooseberry. 2)ic 53irne, — , pi. — n, pear. ,, (Sitro'ne, — , pi. — n, lemon. „ ®at'tet, — ,pl. — n, date. n gei'gc,— jo^.— n,fig. „ Safta'nic, — ,pl. — n, chestnut. „ ajian'bel, — ,pl. — n, almond. „ aJJelo'nc, — , pi. — n, melon. ,, 5^uB,-/>/. 9Me,nut. Sut^'nu^, beechnut. $a'fehuif3, hazlenut. SBafl'nu^, walnut. 2)ic OU'toe, —,/>/. —en, olive. ,, ^fir'fid?, — , pi. — c, peach. ,, ^flau'me, — , pi. —w, plum. f, Ouit'te, — , pi. — n, quince. „ SBein'traube, —,pl. —n, grape. 2)er SSein'ftocf, —zQ,pl. 4tocfe, grapo. vine. ©taubcn unb Salbbaumt. S)er Wbcxn, — 9, pi. — c, maple. S)te S5ir'fe, —,pl. — n, birch. „ 53u'c^c, — ,pl. — n, beech. „ (Se'ber, — , pi. —n, cedar. „ (£l?)?rer|e, —,pl. — n, cypress. „ @i'c^c, — , pi. —n, oak. ft (Sr'Ie, — , pi. —n, alder. „ (S'fc^e,— ,/i/. — n, ash. m (S8>e, — , pL —n, aspen. '2)te S5aS ®ct8'btatt, > honeysuckle. „ ^elan'gericlie'bcr,) woodbine. 2)ic ©olb'blumc, marigold. 12. !5)cr S)ic Shrubs and Forest-trees. ^id)'tc, — ,pL —n, pine. Sar'd)C, — ,pl. — n, larch. Sin'be, — ,pl. — n, lime-tree. 2J?t^rtt)C, —,pl. — n, myrtle. ^a:p'))el, — ,pl. — n, poplar, ian'nc, — , pi. — n, fir. Ul'me, — , pi. —n, elm. SSei'be, — , pi. —n, willow. Flowers. 3a§min', — eg, jasmine. ^Vik,—, pl. — n, lily, ajiai'blumc, lily of the valley. 430 LIST OF WORDS. 2)ic SJiars'IteBc, —,pl —it, daisy. „ 2JJol)n'blume, poppy. „ yitVli, —, pi. —w, pink. „ g^ef'fel, — , pi —w, nettle. 3)er 9iit'terf^orn, larkspur. 2)ic 9io'fe, — , pi. —u, rose. „ ©cfyliif'felblume, primrose. S)er SSo'get, —^,pl. 35i5get, bird. „ 9iaub'toogel, bird of prey. „ ©ing'bogel, bird of song. „ @um^f'i)ogeI, wader. r B^S'^'^S^^f ^^''^ of passage. , ^b'ler, — g, jt>/. — , eagle. SDte 5lm'fcl, — , />/. —n, blackbird. S)cr 33uc^'finf ,— en, />/.— en, bullfinch. 2)te S)o^le, — , jo/. — n, jackdaw. „ S)rof'fet, — , pi —n, thrush. „ (Srfter, — , pi — n, magpie. „ (Su'Ie, — , /j/. — n, owl. „ (gn'te, — , 7?/. — n, duck. 2)er ^aCfe, — n, pi — n, falcon. S)er ^afan', —en, pi —en, pheasant. 2)ie @an§,— ,jo/. @anje, goose. 2)er §a'btd;t, — §, ;>/. — e, hawk. „ §a^n, — e§, /?/. C^a^K^^ cock. 3)ie §en'ne, — , j»/. — n, hen. S)a8 §n^rt, —8, i?/. ^it^'ner, chicken. S)er ^ana'rientoget, Canary bird. S)ie ^rci'^e, — , pi — n, crow. 2)te ©on'nenblume, sunflower. 2)er @torc^'fd;nabeI, crane's bill (ger* nium). 2)a8 2;au' jenbfc^on, pansy, heart's easG 2)te 2:nr^e, — , pi — n, tulip. S)a§ 35ergiB'meinntd;t, forget-me-not, „ 2Binb'rog(^en, anemone. 13. Birds. S)er ^ra'nid), — g,/>/. — e, crane. n ^U'fuf, — §, cuckoo. S)ie Ser'(!)e,— ,jo/. — n, lark. „ aJJo'ije, — ,ij/. — n, gull. [gale. „ SfJac^'ttgaU, — , pi —en, nightin- 2)er ^a:paget', —en, />Z. —en, parrot. „ ^fau, — en, pi — en, peacock. „ ^fJa'be, —en, pi —en, raven. S)ag 9ieb'^ut;n, partridge. S)er 9iet'^er, — g, jo/. — , heron. S)a§ 9iot^'fe^Ic^en, robin redbreast. ®te ©c^ne^fe, — , pi — n, snipe. „ ©c^njal'be, —,/>/. — n, swallow. 2)er @d)ft)an, —6, />/. ©^tDcine, swan „ (Sterling, —6, /?/. — c, sparrow. „ ©tord^, —eg, pi ®tord)e, stork. „ (Strang, —en, pi —en, ostrich. 2)te S^au'be, — , pi —en, dove. 2)er jlrut'^ai^n (bie — ^enne), turkey. 2)te 3Ba(^'teI, — , />/. — n, quail. 2)er 3aun'!Dnig, wren. 2)er 3lf fe, — n,/>/.— n, ape. „ S3ar, —en, joZ. —en, bear. „ SSi'ber, —8, /?/. — , beaver. „ '^a^)^, —eg, ;?/. ®ac^'ie, badger. 3)ag ®id/^ornc^en, —^,pl—, squirrel 3)er (S'ber, — g, />?. — , wild boar. „ @' jel, — g, pi —, ass, donkey. „ gud^g, — g, pZ. giid^fe, fox. 2)te ©em'je, — ,pl — n, chamois. S)er §a'fe, — n, }>l — n, hare. „ ^ir jd), —eg, pi — e, stag. /, t>wnb, —eg, i?;. — e, dog. 14. S)er 3'gel, Mammals. g,i)/. — , hedgehog. S)ag ^anin'd;en, — ^,pl — , rabbit. 2)ie ^a'i^e, — , /?/. — n, cat. S)ie ^u^,— ,ij/.^il^e,cow. 2)er li!ud;g, — eg, jo/. — e, lynx. 'Der 2o'tt)e,— n,/>Z. — n,lion. S)te ajJaug, —,/>/. 9Kaufe, mouse. 2)er Oc^g, — en,/>/. — en, ox. 2)ag ^ferb, — eg,^)/. — e, horse. S)tC ©tu'te, — , p/. — n, mare. 2)ag garien, — g, pi —, colt. S)ic Siatte, —,pl — n, rat. LIST OP WORDS. 431 2)00 dttf), —t9,pl. — C, roe, deer. „ ©citDein, — cg,y. — c, hog. 2)er ©tier, —iQ,pl. — c, bull. 2)cr Zx'Qtx, 2)te Bic'gc, —9, pi. — , tiger. -CS, jy/. 2Bi5lfe, wolf. -,pL — n, kid. SftftftC, 15* Fishes. S)cr ?lal, —i^fpl. — e, eel. 2)ie ^ilu'fter, —,pl. — n, oyster. 2)cr 5?arfd/, —t9,pL—t, perch. „ ^ucf'Iing,—§,i>/.—c, red herring S)ic ^orel'Ie, —,/>/. — n, trout. „ ©arne'Ie, —,;>/. — n, shrimp. 2)er §ai, — «,/?Z. — c, shark. „ §a'ring, —t^,pl. —t, herring. „ §ed;t, — c8, pi. — e, pike. „ ^um'mer, —3, /;/. — , lobster. „ ^abcljau' , —8, pi. —, codfish. 2)et ^ar'^fcn, —9, pi.— , carp. „ ^rebS, — es, />/. — e, crawfish. ,; Sad;3, — ^,pl. — e, salmon. 2)ie 2JJu'|d;eI, —,;>/. — n, shell. 3)cr @d;ett'fifd;,— eS,;>/— e,haddodk. 2)ic ©d^Ub'trctc, — , pi. — n, turtle. „ @d;Iei't)e, — ,pl. — n, tench. 2)er ®cbn3einfifd), ) „ ®ti3r, — §, />/. — c, sturgeon. „ 2Baa'fij(^, — e«, j^/. — e, whal«» (S^cmtfc^e @utiftanseit* 16. Chemical Bodies. S)eT ©au'crftcff, — e«, oxygen. „ SSarjerftoft, hydrogen. „ Sticf'ftoff, nitrogen. 3)tC @ti(f'ft>^ffK"i"^C> nitrous acid. „ ©atpe'terfaure, nitric acid. S)a8 fdpe'terjaure ©ilber, nitrate „ ^otj'Icnftoff, carbon. [of silver. 2)ie ^o()l'enjaure, carbonic acid. S)cr tol/lcnfaurc ^alf, carbonate of lime. „ ()or, — g, phosporus. „ /. — e, salt. ©at'sig, saline. S)t£ 2utt, — , air. 2uf tig, aerial 2uft'fi5rmig, aeriform. 2)aS aJtetall', — e§, p^. —t, metal 2)a8 @oIb, gold. „ ©il'ber, silver. „ ^u'^fer, copper. „ S3Iet, lead. „ 3^""^ tin. ,; Si'fen, iron. 2)er @taf;(, steel. „ 3inf, zinc. „ ^o'balt, cobalt. S)a8 aJierfing, — s, brass. ©^5, — e8, pi. — e, ore, bronze. S)er 2)iamant', —«,/>/.— en, diamond, r> ©maragb', — 9>, pi. — c, emerald. „ 3lgat', —t&,pl. — c, agate. „ 9)?ar'mor, —8, marble. „ ®f)p9, — e6, gypsum. 2)te treib'e, — , chalk. S)cr tat!, — cS, lime, ff S^on, — g, clay. rf 3ltaun', — «, alum. 2)ie 2JJi'ne, — , pi. —n, mine. 432 LIST OF WORDS. Stffcnf^aftcit* 17. 2)ie 9^atur'iDiifeuf(^aft, — , science. ®te „ (Sfjcmie'; — , chemistry. S^e'mifc^, chemical. 3)er S^e' miter, chemist. ^ ©eologie', — , geology. [ogist. ©er ©eolog', — ^n,pL — en, geol- „ 3JltncraIogte', — , mineralogy. ®er 3JJtneraIog', — en, mineralo- „ SSota'ni!, — , botany. [gist. 2)er 33ota'm!er, botanist. „ 3Jiati)ema'tif, — , mathematics. S)ie 2![rit^me'tf)if, — , arithmetic. ,; ^I'gebra, — , algebra. ^iinfte. 18- 2)ie fc^iJnen ^ilnfte, fine arts. 2)ie „ Slcft^e't^it, — , esthetics. „ ^iiuft, — , pi. tiinfte, art. ®er ^iinft'Ier,— §, artist. „ 2lr(i)itettur , — , J ®^\^«":f5^^^'l architect. ,t S3t(b'^auer!nn[t, ] „ ^^'la'ftit, — , t sculpture. „ ©fnl^tur',— , ) S)er 53t(b'^auer, — §, sculptor. „ SJialeret', — , painting. S)er Tla'kx, — ^, />/. — , painter. „ 2;on'!unft, -,| °^"^^^- S)er 3JJu'ft!er, — §, musician. t, ©efang',— eg, singing. „ ©ang'er, —8, singer. ©rantmatif(^e mmUt. 19* S)te ©rammo'tt!, — , pi. — en,) gram- 2)te „ 'Bpva6)'k\)xt,—, pl.—n,i mar. '„ Slec^t'fc^retBung, i rrrx .,v rr T ctymology. ©atjle^re, — ,1 ^^^ *^* Sciences. ©eometrte', — , geometry. ©tern'tunbe,) ^* ®er 2lftronom', astronomer. ^^i'lojo^^te', — , philosophy. 2)er ^fjtlofo:^^', philosopher. ^^t(ofo':|)^tjd^, philosophical. S^eotogie', — , theology. 2)er X^eolog', — en, theologian. X^eolo'gtfd;, theological. ^i;iIoIogie', — , philology. SJiebij^in', — , medicine. [law. 9Jec^t8'n)i[fenfd;aft, — , science of Arts. 2)ic 'B'dn'Qtxm,pL — nen, singer. 2)i(^t'funft, — , poetry. S)er 2)id?'ter, — §, poet. 3ie'be!unft, — , rhetoric. S)te 9fie'be, —,/?/. — n, oration. SDer Dieb'ner, — g, /?/. — , orator. SSer8'fun[t, — , prosody. 3etc^'nen!unft,— , art of drawing. I^U>ferfttd;tunft, art of engraving. !iDer ^u^ferftec^er, engraver. „ ^u'^ferftic^, engraving, ©tetn'brucferfunft, lithography. ©c^reib'Jnnft, — , chirography. S3u(^'bru(fer!unft, art of printing. ^rteg§'!unft, military art. ^elb'tne^unft, field surveying, ^ngenteur'funft, engineering. ^^oti)e'fer!unft, pharmacy. 2)er ^))ot^e'ler, apothecary. Grammatical Terms. i'ftabe, — n, pi. — n, letter. ®er ^In'fanggbuc^ftaBe^initial let- ter, [ital letter. „ gro^e ?lnfang§t)ud;ftabe, cap- „ ®tiuim laut, —eg, > LIST OF WORDS. 433 2)er ^cnfonar.t', — cit,) conso- „ iWit'Iaut, 7^/. — c,)" nant. S)cr $Hc'bctl)cU,— c«,;>/.— e,) part of 2)ic il?ort'form, — ,pl. — cn,j" speech. 2)a^ @efd;lecl;tS'TOort, > 2)cr bcftimnite 5lrt. ,definite article „ uubei'ttmmte 'ilrt., indefinite 2)ag gjo'nien, —^,pL —, ) [article „ §au|)t'wort, —8, .- noun. „ ^knn'irort,;>/. ^ivcrtcV;) 2)cr ©emcin'namen, —^,pl. —, common noun. „ (Si'ijeimamen, proper noun. •i)ic 3)cfliiiatiou', pi. —en, \ declen- „ %x)Xbk^\ix[o^,})L—tn, > sion. 2)ie [tarfc 2^etlin. , old declension. „ fd;n)adje S)etlin. , new declen. „ gemtfd;tc 2)cn., mixed declen. S)a8 ?lb'iettii\ — S, j „ (Sfgciifd^aftSlrort, i adjective. „ Sei'wort, ) 2)ic Stei'vjerung bcr ^Ibjeftttoa, comparison of adjectives. 2/Cr 9?umcrar, — ^,pl. — en,) numer- S)a8 Bubl'iport, r al. 2)a§ Orunb' jaf^Iro. , cardinal num. „ Drb'niing?3a^tn3ort, ordinal number. S)a8^rono'mcn, —§,;?/.—, \ pro- „ (ijur'iVDrt, i noun. S)a8 ^^crfeii'lid^e giirn?., personal pronoun. „ be[i^'au5eigcubc gilrw., pos- sessive pronoun. „ ^iu'weijeiite giirtr., demon- strative pronoun. „ unbe[tinimtc t^ilrtt?., indefi- nite pronoun. „ fra'gcnbe ^iiriv., interroga- tive pronoun. [pronoun. „ bejucj'Iid)c j^iii^tt^ort, relative 2)agSBerb, —§,;?/.— a,) „ 3cit'ircrt, !2)ie ^oujucjaticu', — ,pL — n,conjuga- 2)ic ftarfc ^cnj., irregular conj. „ f(^n)ari;e ^cnj., regular conj. 2)a6 ^Ifti't'Um, — §, active voice. „ ^affi'tum, — ?, passive voice. „ mberb',-^,;;/. — a, )^ ad- „ ^Jeben-orUm'ft^'inb^wcrt,)" verb. 2;tc Ijirci^jcfitiou', \ 2)a8 3?or'irort, ,- preposition. „ ^crl;a(t'ni|3tt ort, ) 3)ie toniunftion',) 2)tc Sntcrjeftion', ) interjec- 2)a$ @m^fin'bung6tt)ort,> tion. r'^'^- [tion. Scitcint^cilung* 5Dic ©'tDtgfcit, — , eternity. „ '^txi, — , pi. — en, time. 2)a§ 3abr^un'bert, — ^, century. „ Sirter, or 3eit'dter, age. „ ^a\)x,—t^,pl. 3al?re, year. S)er aWo'nat, —8, pi. — e, month. 2)ie SBo'c^e, — , pi. — n, week. 2)er Xag, — e8, />/. — e, day. S)ie gf^ac^t, — , ;?/. 9^od/te, night. „ @tun'be, — , pi. — n, hour. „ 2J?inn'te, — ,pl. — n, minute. „ ^cfuu'be, — , pi. — n, second. „ 2)^or'genri5tbe, — , dawn. 3)er 2:a'geSanbrud^, — e8, daybreak. 20, Divisions of Time. S)cr ©onnenauf gang, — «, sunrise. „ aJJor'gcn, — 6, pi. — , morning. „ 3?or'mittag, forenoon. „ 9J?it'tag, noon. „ 9^ac^' mittag , afternoon . n 5l'benb, — ^, pi. — e, evening, 2)ie anit'ternad;t, midnight. ®e'ftem, yesterday. 3?or'geflern, day before yesterday. 33or adjt 2;agen, a week ago. [day §entc iiber ad)t S^agc, a week from to- SJicr'gen, to-morrow. Uc'bermcigen, day after to-morrow. Sic Sa^'rc^jeit, season o^ the vear. T 434 LIST OF WORDS. 2)er SSin'ter, — §, winter. 25a« §rut;'ial;v — 1\ ) 2)er ©om'mer, — c\ sLuiuuer. „ §crb[t, — cs, fall. „ ^a'luiir, —i, January. „ ge'bruar, — §, February. „ aj?ar5,—e§, March. „ 5lprir, — §, April. „ 2)Jai,— g, May., „ 3u'nt, — g, June. ;, 3uU— ^, July. „ 5lu3uft\ —eg, August. ''^Ci% S^n'ftent^um, —8, Christendom S)ie ^ir'c^e, — , p/. — n, church. „ 2lrmema'mj(^e ^irc^e, Armenian Church. 2)er 5trmenia'ner, Armenian. „ SSa^ti'ftifdje Sirc^e, Baptist Ch. S)er58a^tt[t', Baptist. „ S3i'f(^DfItc^C ^irc^e, Episcopal Church. Qian. 3)er @^tg!o^aIta'ner, Episcopa- „ ©rie'c^ifrf) * tatf)o'(ifd;e Str^e, Greek-Catholic Church. „ Sut^e'rifc^e Mrc^e, Lutheran Ch. ®er 2utl;era'ner, Lutheran. 2)er ©e^tem'kr, - „ Otto'ber, —6, „ ^jiooem'ber, — „ ©esem'ber, — „ ?. Slerjte, physician. 2)er SBunb'arjt, surgeon. ,, 3^^n'ar3t, dentist. „ S3a'cfer, —8, pi. —, baker. „ 33anqmer', —^,pl. — g, banker. „ S3arbter', —9, pi. — e, barber. ,, 53au'er, — S, i?/, — n, peasant. 2)tc S3au'ertn, — , pi. — nen, peasant woman. S)er SSau'meifter,- g,/>/.— , architect. ,, 53tlb'^auer , — g, pi. — , sculptor. „ ^t' jd^of, — g, pi. 53ifd;efe, bishop. ,, 33ott'c^er, — ^,pl. — , cooper. 2)er S3rau'er, —^,pl. —, brewer. „ S3u(^'binber, — g, bookbinder. „ S3u(^'bru(fer,—eg, ;?/.-, printer. „ gabrt!ant', — en, pZ, — en, manu- „ gcirber, — ^,pl. — , dyer,[facturer. „ ^ifc^'bcinbler, — g, fishmonger. „ glei'fc^er, — g, pi. — , butcher. „ ^ul^r'mann — eg,;>Z. *leute, coach- „ ©er'ber, — ^,pl. — , tanner, [man. „ ©la'fer, — g, pi. — , glazier. „ ^trt, — tx\.,pl. — en, shepherd. „ ^aub'Ier, — g, pi. — , tradesman. 2)er33ud)'bcinbler,book-merchant „ Ob[t'(;anbter, fruit-merchant LIST OF WORDS. 435 Die Obft'^anbterin, fruit-woman. 2)er '•43fcr'fel;antilcr, horse-dealer. „ iucl/l;anDler,dry-good8iner- chaut. 2)cr 3un)elier', —8, pi. — e, jeweller. ,, ilii'fer, — ^,pl. — , cooper. „ ^iinft'ler, — «, pi.—, artist. S)ie ilunft'lerin, —,pl. — ncn, artist. jEev i{u'pferfted;er, — §, engraver. „ I'eb'rer, — g, pi. —, teacher. „ ^d;urie^rer, school-teacher. 2)ie td)xtxm,—,pl. —ncn, teacher. 2)er 2)fau'rer, —^,pl. —, mason. 2)er j^rei'maurcr, free-mason. „ 3}Ze^'ger, —«,/>/. — , butcher. „ a)iuner,— 8,^/. ~, miller. „ 2)iu'fitcr, —8, pL —, musician. 2)ic ^^\)txm,pl. —ncn, seamstress. 2)er 9?atur'forfd;er, —8, naturalist. „ ^abft, — e8,/>/. ^db'fte, pope. „ ^far'rer, — §, ;^/. — , vicar. „ ^(nlofo^^', —en,;?/, —en, philos- „ ^rc'biger, —8, preacher, [opher. „ ^^rieTter, — 8,/>/. — , priest. „ 9?ebafteur', —8, pi. — e, editor. „ $Hcb'ner, —9, pi. —, orator. „ ©att'ter, —8, />/. — , saddler. 2)cr iSd^au'f^ieler, — 9, pi. — , actor. 2)ie /. — nen, actress. S)er (^d;ldcV'ter, —^,pl. — , butcher. „ @d;lof fcr, — 8, p/. — , locksmith. „ @d;nueb, — e8, pi. — e, smith, blacksmith. 2)er @olb'fd.)mteb goldsmith. „ ^uf fd;mieb, horseshoer. , , ^u' |)f er f d^miet ,coi)persmith . „ aJief jerfd^mieb, cutler. „ SliSanenfd^mieb, armorer. „ @c^nci'ber, — 8, pi. — , tailor. „ @c^orn'fteinfeger,chimney-sweep. ,, @d;vift'ftetter, —%,pl. — , author. „ Xag'Io(;ner, —^,pl.—, day-labor- er, [maker. „ Sifd^'tcr, —8, pi. —, cubinet- „ ^^a^ejie'rer, —8, pi. —, uphol- sterer. „ U^r'ma^er, —8, pi. — , watch- maker. „ SBerfaf fer, — 8, pi. — , author. „ 2Bed)8'Ier, —8, pi. —, money- changer. „ 5Sin'jer, — %,pl. — , vine-dresser. „ 3tm'mermann,— 8,;>;. 3i«i'incr=' lente, carpenter. i^rcmbtobrtcr* 23* Foreign Words. 2)er ?(n'ter, anchor (from Latin, ^ncora ; Greek, dyicvpa). [China). 2)ie ?l>felftnc, orange (from Dutch, appelsina; French, pomme de Sine = tr 3tu'ftcr, oyster (from Latin, dstreum ; Greek, oarptov). tt 33ut'ter, butter (from Latin, butyrum ; Greek, (3ovrvpov). 3^cr j^racf, dress-coat (from French, frac; ioi^-Z/Cf^in, froccus= woolen stuff). 2)ie 3n'fel, island (from Latin, insula), ^o'ften, to cost (from Italian, costare ; Latin, constare). 3^er ^o'rc>c, lion (from Latin, leo; Greek, X'eiov). '^dQ ^^ferb, horse (from Late Latin, paraveredus^^an extra post-horse). 2)ie %^fir'fid;, peach (from I^itin, persicum malum ^Persian apple). 2)er 9Jei8, rice (from French, ris; Latin, oryza; Greek, opv^a ; Arabic, aruz) 2)a8 (Sd^ad), chess (from Persian, shah— king). S)ie Stra'j^e, street (from Latin, via strata =paved road). „ %a\\t, cup (from French, tasse ; Arabic, tas). n Xor'tC, tart (from Low-Latin, torta ; iMtin, tortus = twisted). r; XuI'^C, tulip (from French, tulipe ; Turkish, tulban = turban). 2)er *^\t'^t\, tile (from Latin, tegula; from te'gere=to cover). VI. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. Abbreviations. adj., adjective. adv., adverb. conj. or c. , conjunction. indeci. , indeclinable. int., interjection. part., participle. pL, plural. prep., preposition. pron., pronoun. demon. , demonstrative. V. auz., auxiliary verb. v.imp., impersonal verb. V. ivtr., intransitive verb. V. ir., irregular verb. V. refl., reflexive verb. V. tr.. transitive verb. 21. 2)er 5l'bcnb, —^,pl. — c, evening. ®ag ^2l'benbe[fen,— g, supper. S)a8 ^^'beiiteuer, — ^,pL. — , adventure 2l'6er, conj. (§ 265), but, however. 2)er 5l'berglaube, — iig, superstition. ^b'brennen, v. ir. tr., to burn down. 2)ie 5t()'fat;rt, — , pi. — en, sailing. ^b'feuern, v. tr., to fire off. ?lb'geben, v. ir. tr. , to deliver. ^b'belfen, v. ir. intr., to remedy. 3lb'Ieiten, v. tr., to derive. ?lb'reifen, v. intr., to leave, depart. 2)te 3lb'reife, — , pi. — en, departure. 9lb'fege(n, v. intr., to sail (away). 2)er ?lb'fal5,— e«,/>/.3lbfa^e,stop,heel. 5lb'fd;re(fen, v. tr., to frighten away. 2lb'fd;reiben, v. tr. ir., to copy, tran- scribe [purpose, aim, view. 2)ie ^b'fic^t, — , pi. —en, intention, 5lb'itd;ttt(^, adj. intentional. ^IB'ft^mtnen, v. intr., to be descended. 5lb' flatten, v.fr., to perform, discharge. (Sinen S3efnd/ ab'f^^tten, to pay a 3lb'trocfnen, v. intr., to dry up. [visit. ^b'triinntg, adj., faithless (to). 5ld)t, eight. 2)ie 5ld)t, — , care, attention ; fic^ in %&}{ ne()'men, to take care, be on one's guard. "^xt 5tc^'tung, — , respect. 5ltieu', int., good-by, farewell. 3)te Slbreffe, —,/>/. — n, address. Slbreffi'rcn, to address (letters^. 5lef)n'ttd;, adj., similar, like. 2)te 2lebn'Iid;teit, — , similarity. S)cr %\'\t, — n, pi. — n, ape. ®a§ 5l'i]io, — 8, premium (on coin). S)te Slftie, — ,pl. — n, share, [pany. „ 3irtten*®efell'fd;aft, stock com- 2)er Slftionar', — ^,pl. — e, sharehold- ?lltein', co/i/., but, only. [cr. %V\tX,pron., all, every. %Viixlt\' , indeci. ao?;*., of all kinds. Slttgemein', etc?/., general, common. 5lUma'tig, adj., gradual. 2)ag ^ll'mofen, — §, pi. —, alms. 3tlg, con/., when, as, than, except, but. %Woann',adv., then. %V\o, adv., so, thus; conj., therefore. Wi'in, adv., quite too. 2)er Slltar', —^,pl 5ltta're, altar. 2)ag WttX, —8, pi. — , age, old age. 2)ag ?irtert{)um, — «, pi. 4bumer, ai> mt, adj., old. [tiquity. 5)cr Slm'Bog, — e8, pi. — fe, anvil. 3)a8 3lmt, —t§,pl. Stem'ter, office. 2ln, 2)rep., on, at, by, to about in adv., on, forward. VOCABULARY. 437 5lii'bictcn, v. ir.^ to offer, hold out to. 5lll' Der, /vro/j,, other. Stn'DersS, adv.^ otherwise. 5lu't>erSiD0, adc.^ elsewhere. 2iii'bertl;alb (§ 103, 2). Slii'beiiten, v. tr., to show. 5)ie %mlt>o'tt,—,pl. —n, anecdote. S)er %n'\ai\^,—^,pL *fani}C,beginning. Slu'fancjen, v. ir. tr., to begin, commence. lUii'feinbcn, v. tr., to treat hostilely. ^lu'j^eben, v. ir. tr., to give. %n'QtWi(i),adj., pretended. Slti'geboren, adj., hereditary. Slii'gc{)eu, V. ir. intr., to concern. 2)ie '^n'gclegeu^eit, — ,/>/. — en, affair. 3lu'gcue^m, adj., agreeable, pleasant. S)a3 3ln'gefid?t, — e3, pi. — er, face, countenance. 3ln'gefld;t^,/)re;A, in view of S)ie ?tng[t, — , pi. Slcng'ftcn, anxiety, fear, anguish, terror. 3lengft'Iid^, adj., anxious. [ue. 9tu'()alten, v. ir., to hold fast, contin- Stn'^eben, v. intr., to begin, commence; V. tr., to lift up, raise. 3)er 2tii'fer, — 8, pi. — , anchor. 2)ie ''2lu'ferul;r, anchor-watch. 3lii'flagen, v. tr., accuse, charge, ^lu'tommcn, v. ir. intr., to arrive. ^^ii'tiiuben, au'filnbigcn, v. tr., to pro- chiim, announce, i)ublish. Sie Slu'fuuft, — , arrival. 2ln'lad;cn, v. intr. , to smile or laugh at. 2)ic '^In'Ici^c, — , pi. — n, loan. Sllt'nebmen, v. ir. tr., to accept; v. re/l. to interest one's self, take interest. 3lil' retell, v. tr., to accost, address. Sie ^^lii'rebe, — ,/>/. — , address. Stii'riibren, v. tr., to touch. 5lil'fdjaffcn, v. tr., procure, obtain, get. ^tl'fd^aucn, v. tr., to view, to look at. Sln'febcn, v. ir. tr., to view, behold. 2)ie ?ln'fid)t, — , pl.—zn, opinion, point of view. ?tn'f^rcc^cn, v. ir. tr., to address, @inen urn ttxiw^ au'jpred;en, to ask or claim a tliiug of a person. 2)cr ^ilue'iprud;, — e«s, pi. *jprud^e, claim. 2)ie '^n']taU,—,pl. —n, preparation. establishment. %l\\tatt' , prep, (with gen.), instead of; conj., instead of. ^tn'fto^en, v. tr., to hit against, strike. 2)er Slii'ftoO, — ei>, pi. '5{ln'fti3§e, hit, blow, ofiense. Sln'ftrengeu, v. tr., to exert, strain. Sln'ftrengenb, adj., exhausting. 2)ic "^ii'ftrengung, — , exertion. 2)er ':ttutiquar', — ^, pL' — e, dealer in second-hand books; Sliitiviuar'* (Sjemplar', second-hand copy. Sln'tburmen, v. intr., to rise like tow- ers (overtower). 2)ic ^nt'roort, — , pi. — en, answer. '^Jliit'irorten, v. intr., to answer. 3tit'n.'>ad)fcu, v. intr., to grow on. Die 'ilu'weifung, — ,pl. ^n, note. Die ^In'wenbung, — , application, ^n'rocfcnb, ac^"., present. ^In'jeigen, v. tr., to notify, advertise. Die 5ln'jeige, — , j)l. — n, adver- tisement, "^n'^ief^en, v. ir. tr., to draw on, to at< tract, interest, to put on, Der Sln'jug, suit of clothes. Der Wp\d, — S, pi. Wp\d, apple. Der Sl'pfelmein, cider, [shop. Die 5tpotbe'te, — ,pl. — n, apothecary Der ?lpctbe'ter, apothecary. Die Slr'beit, — , pi. — en, labor, work 3lr'bciten, v. intr., to labor, work. Der 5lr'beitcr, laborer. Str'beitfam, adj., laborious. Der %px\V, —8, April. Die 2lrc^aologie', — , archaeology. %xm, adj.., poor. Die ^Ir'mutf), — , poverty. Der %xm, — e6, pi. — t, arm. 438 VOCABULARY. jDer Sler'ttiel, —9, pi —, sleeve. S)ie Slrmee', — , pi. 5lrme'en, army. „ 5lrt, — , pi' — en, species, kind, way, nature. 5lr'ttg, adj., of a kind, agreeable. (Sin ar'tx^eg ^inb, a well-behaved child. 2)er 5lrti'!et, —^,pl. —, article. SDie Slrjnet', — , /j^. —en, medicine. „ %\&ii, — , ashes. „ 3lftronomie', — , astronomy. S)er Slftronom', — en, astronomer. 2l[trono'mtj(^, astronomical. S)cr 21't^em, — 8, breath, respiration. 5ltt)'men, v. tr., to breathe. „ ?lt'(a«, — je8, jo^. — fe, satin. Slucf), coTy ., also, too, even. 2luf , />re/>. , on, upon, at, to, towards ; auf einma(, all at once, at once ; auf ba|3, c, so that, in order that. 5lufbliif)en, v. intr., to expand, to blossom. [in succession. Slufetnan'ber, adv., one after another, 2)er 2lufentl;alt, — g, stay, sojourn, abode. [the dead. 3luferftef)en, v. ir. intr., to rise from 2)te Sluf erfte^ung, — , resurrection. 2luf' fattenb, adj., striking, strange. 2)ie ^luf'gabe, — , pi. — n, exercise. 2)er ^Kuf'gang, — t^,pl. ^^gange, rising. Sluf geben, V. ir. tr., to give up, to sur- render, [stay. 5tuf'^alten, v. ir. refl,., to stop, delay, 3Iuf'£)i3ren, v. intr., to cease, discon- tinue. 2)te ?luf (age, — , pi. — n, edition. 2luf mad;en, to open. ^Jlufmerfen, v. tr., to observe, notice. 3luf'merfjam, adj., attentive. Sluf merffamtett, — , attention. S)ie 2luf D^ferung, — , sacrifice. Sluf re^t, upright, erect. '^ufregen, v. tr., to excite. S)er 5luf'ruf, — g, call, appeal, sum- mon. Sluf fte^en, v. ir. intr. , to rise up, ta rise. 5luf'[teigen, v. intr., to mount, ascend. 3luf 'tvagen, v. tr. , to carry up, put on. 2)er ^tuf trag, —eg, pi. ^rcige, commission. [ken. 5luf toa^en, v. intr., to wake up, awa- 5luf'n)avten, v. intr., to wait upon, ©inem feine ^ilufn)artung mad;en, to pay one's respects to a per- 2lnf'n?ecfen, v. tr., to awaken, [son. ^luf'sie^en, v. ir. tr., to draw up, raise up, rear, educate. 2)ag 2luge, — §, pi. —en, eye. 2)er 3lu'genbli(f, moment, [ous. 3lu'genblicfltd;, adj., instantane- ®ic Slu'genbrane, — , eyebrow. 3)ag 5lu'genleiben, — 8, disease of the eyes. Slu'genfc^einlic^, ac?/*., apparent. 2)er Sluguft', — g, August. 5tug, prep., out, out of, from, of; adv, out, over, at an end, finished. 3lng'Be[fern, v. tr., to mend. 2lug'bred;en, v. ir. intr., to break out. 5lug'brettcn, v. intr., to spread out, ex- pand, [agation. 2)ie21[ug'6rettung,extension,prop- 2)tC 5lug'bauer, — , endurance. 5lug'bebnen, v. tr., to stretch, expand. 2)te 2tug'bc^nung, — , expansion. 3(ug'bru(fen, v. tr., to press out, ex- press, [expression. S)er 5lng'bru(J, —eg, pi. -briicfc, ?lngbrii(f 'Ud;, adj., explicit. Slugeinan'ber, adv., asunder, apart. 51ug'erftefen (antiquated and irregu- lar verb, imperfect ang'erlor, participle aug'erforen), to choose, select. Stug'fil^ren, v. tr., to execute S)te Slug'fii^rnng, — , execution. S)te 5lug'gabe, — , pi. — n, edition. Slng'ge^en, v. ir. intr. ^to go out. Ser Slng'gang, —eg, exit. VOCABULARY. 4311 3lu§'f)altcn, v. ir. intr., to hold out. 2)a8 ^^US'lanb, foreign countries. ^ilug'lant)ijct;, adj., foreign. %n^'m[)ttKl\, V. ir. tr., to except. 2lu«^'nel;menb, adv., remarkably. 2)ic 3luo'na^me, -^, pi. —n, ex- ception, [enough. ■iJtuei'reid^en, v. intr., suffice, have ^^u^'fpred^en, v. ir. tr., to pronounce, speak out. [tion. 2)ie '^ilu^'fprac^e, — , pronuncia- 3lu8'fc^en, V. ir. intr., to look out. 2)ie %u^'\id)tf — , prospect, view. Slu'^erijalb, ;)rep., outside of, beyond, ^lu'iierorbentlicl;, adj., extraordinary. ' ?lcu'^crfl, adv., extremely. 3lu«S'[telleu, V. tr., to exhibit. 2)ie ^iluo'fteUuiiij, — , exhibition. 5lu«J'[trecfen, v. tr., to stretch out. 2)ie ^lu^'trocfnung, — , drying up. 2lu8't>erfaiifcn, v. tr., to sell out. '^uS'wa^len, v. tr., to select. 2)ie SluS'tuo^t, — ,pL — en, selection. 2lu§'n?anbern, v. intr., to emigrate. ^uS'ireilbig, adj., from memory, bj heart. 'SuS'sa^Ien, v. tr., to pay out. ^u§'5eid;nen, v. tr., to distinguish. ^lu^'gejcic^net, adj., excellent. S)ic 2lyt, — , pi. Slejte, axe, hatchet. »« S3aar(orbar),ar(;"., bare, pure; baarcS @elb, cash; baare 33ejd;Iuug, cash payment. SBar'fufj, adj., barefoot. S)cr ^a(i),—t§,pl. i8a'd;e, brook. 2)i€ 33a(fc, — , pi. — n, cheek. SBa'dfcn, v. tr., to bake. 2)er 33a'cfcr, baker. 2)a« Sab, —eg, ;>/. SSS'ber, bath, wa- tering-place, [bathe. SBa'bcn, V. tr., intr., and re/l., to S)te 58abn, — , ^/. — en, the road, way. 2)er Sal^u'bof, railroad station. SBalb, adv., soon, early. 33arbig adj., early, speedy. 2)er 53arfen, —6, ;?/. — , beam. 2)er SBatt, —eg, pi. Sal'Ie, (1) ball, sphere ; (2) ball, festive dance. jDie SSalla'bc, — , pi. — n, ballad. 2)ag Sanb, —eg,;?/. 53an'ber, ribbon. 2)cr 33anb, — e§, pi. S3an'be, volume. 33an'btgen, y« tr., to tame. [sive. S3an'ge, adj., anxious, apprehen- 2)ie 53ant,— ,p/. 53an'!e, bench, bank. 5)ie 53iiif'notc, — ,pl. — en, bank- note, [banker. 3)er 33anquier', — «, pi. —8, JBan'nen, v. tr., to banish. 58ar, adj. (see baar). 2)ie 33arntbcr'sigfeit, — , mercy, pity. 2)er 33aron', —^, pl.—c, haron. 2)ic 33aro'ntn,— ,ij/.— ncn, baro ness, 2)er SBcir, — cn,;>/. —en, bear. „ SSart, — e§, ;>/. S3ar'te, beard. SBcir'tig, ac//., bearded. S3art'(o8, adj., beardless. „ 33a§, — ffeg, pi. ^Bcif fc, bass, basa 33auen, v. tr., to build, cultivate. 2)er 58au'er, — 8,/?/. — n, peasant. 2)ie 33dn'erin, peasant woman. 2)ie S3au'funft, — , architecture. 2)er SBau'meiftcr, architect. 2)er 33aum,— c«, pi. 33au'me, tree. ^ 2)a§ 33aum'c^en,— §, small trea S3anm'Ieer, adj., treeless. 2)ie S3aum'troUe, — , cotton. 53car'beiten, v. tr., to work over, revise 2)te 33ear'bettung, — , revision. 53e'bcn, v. intr., to tremble. Scban'fcn, v. refl., to give thanks. Scban'ent, v. ir., to regret, to pity. 3?cbccf'en, v. tr., to cover. 35obcn'fen, v. rejl., to deliberate. SSebenf lid), adj., criticnl. 58ebenritd;tcit, anxious thought. 440 VOCABULARY. SBcbie'nen, v. tr.^ to serve, use ; v. reft. ^ to help one's self. ^ebeu'teil, v. intr.^ to signify, mean, 2)ie ^ebeu'tuiig, — , meaning. S3ebeu'tenb, adj.^ important. SS^btn'gen, v.en, V. ir. reft., to find one's self, S3eflei'j3en, y. ir. re/?.,) to apply one's SSefleif'figeii, y.re/?., > self. SSefor'bern, v. tr., to promote. S)er ^cfbr'Derer, — g, promoter, [self). ^ege'ben, v. ir. reft., to betake (one's S)te 33ege'l)en^ett, — , pi. — en, S3egeg'nen, v. ir. tr. , to meet, [event. S)ie ''Begier'be, — , desire, wish. ^egte'rtg, adj., desirous, eager. S3egin'nen, v. ir. tr., to begin, com- mence. ^eglet'ten, v. tr., to accompany. S3egrei'fen, v. ir. tr., comprehend, un- derstand. ^ZQXt\\'l\6},adj., comprehensible. S)er 53egrtff , — g, pi. — e, idea, conception. SBcgriln'ben, v. tr., to found, establish. 33egril'Ben, v. tr., to greet, salute. 53ebarten, v. ir. tr., to retain, keep. S3ekn'beln, v. tr., to handle, treat. ^eban^'ten, v. tr., to assert, affirm. $ef)erfen, v. ir. reji., to help one's self. 3?ef)illflid), adj., serviceable, con- ferring help. 9^e()en'be, adj., agile, nimble, quick. 3)te S3e()orbe, — , pi. —n, authority. 53et, jorf/>., near, at, with, by. 53etbe, adj. (pi.), both. 2)a8 53ein, —eg, pi. — e, leg, bone. 2)te ^ein'tleiDer (;>/.), pantaloons, trowsers. 3)ag Sei'f^iel, — g,^/. — e, example. ^ei'j^ielgtoei'fe, adv., by way of example. Sei'^en, v. ir. tr., to bite. ^ei'^ig, adj., biting. [sist ^ei'fte^en, v. ir. intr., to stand by, as- 2)er S3ei'[tanb, —eg, assistance. S3et'fttmnien, v. intr., to agree with one, to coincide with one's views, ^ei'tragcn, v. ir. tr., contribute. 53ci'n)c^nen, v. intr., to be present at, attend. ^z\\Vi\ni\part.from Beten'nen), known 2)er or bie ^e!ann'te, — n, pi. — n, acquaintance (a person). S)ie ^efannt'fd^aft, acquaintance 33e!Ia'gen, v. reft., to complain. : ^efom'men, v. ir. tr. , to get, obtain, procure. [self. 3Se!iim'mern, v. reft., to trouble one's S3ela'gern, f. ^r. , to besiege, [siege, S)te 33eta'gerung, — , pi. —en, SBelau'ten, v. reft., to amount. S3ele'gen, v. tr., to overlay, cover. 53elei'bigen, v. tr., tooft'end. 2)te 53elet'btgung, — , pi. —en, offense, wrong, injury. 33e{ie'fcen, v. intr., to wish, have the kindness, please. iBel'ten, v. intr., to bark. 33emad/tigen, v. reft.,) to take posses^ iBemet'ftern, v. reft., / sion of, seize, get the mastery over. S3emer'fen, v. tr., to observe, notice. 3)te 53emer'fnng, — ,pl. — n, re- mark, observation. 2)te S3enen'nung, — , naming. 53eni5'tf)tgt, adj., in need of, needing. $8eob'ad)ten, v. tr., to observe, [ous. 53equem', adj., convenient, commodi S3erett', adj., ready, prepared, ^ereitg', adv., already. VOCABULARY. 44 i 25tc S3eva'tl;ung, — , pi. —en, consul- tation, council. 58erau'ben, v. tr., to rob. 2)er ^erg, — c^, pL — e, mountain. lycv'flicj, adj., mountainous. 2)ic ^evij'fette, — ,pl. — n, moun- tain range. 2)ag 58er<5'mer!, — c«, />/. — e, mine. jDer iBevic^t', — eS, />/. — c, report, ' notice, advice. Sevilbnit', adj., famous, celebrated. 3)ic !^eru(;'rung, — , contact. S3efd;at'tigen, v. tr., to occupy, busy, employ. 53cfd;ei'DCU, adj., modest. [ment. 2)cr ^^efr^Iag', — 8, seizure, attach- SBcjd^Ue'^en, v. ir. reji., to conclude. 2)er 5i3eid;hi6', — e8, pi. -jc^lilffe, conclusion. 33cf(^rau'ten, y. l. — c, sorrow. 2)ie ^etrun'fenl^eit, — , drunkenness. 2)a8 iBett, — e8, pi. —en, bed. 2)viS ^ett'tuci^, —i^^l. 4ud;cr, sheet. ^et'teln, v. intr., to beg, ask alms. 2)er ^ett'Ier, — «, ;>/.—, beggar. 33et'telarm, at(/"., beggarly poor. 2)er iBet'telftab, — esi, extreme 33eiJor', conj., before, ere. [poverty. 2)ic 2i3en)e'guug, — , pi. — cu, motion, exercise, ^eicei'fen, v. ir. tr., to prove. [ant. 2)er 33en)Dt)'ner, — S, /^/. — , inhabit- iBeWUU'Dcrn, v. tr., admire. iBeWU^t', adj., conscious, known. 58e5a{>'(en, v. tr., to pay. 2)ie Sejal/lung, — , payment. S3ejte'ben,r. ir. ^r., to draw over, enter; reji., to refer. 2)ie ^ejic'^nng, — , relation. ^Bcstnei'feln, v. tr., to doubt. 2)ie 53i'bd, — , ;j/. — n, Bible. 2)ie 33i'beliiberiet5ung, translation of the Bible. 2)ie 33tbUot(^et', — , ;>/. — en, library. 2)er 33ibaot^etar', pi. — c, libra- 33ieg'fam, ac?/., pliable. [rian. 2)a8 53ier, — e3, />/. — e, beer. „ S3itb, — eS, /)/. — er, form, image. SBil'ben, v. tr., to form, shape, cultivate. [zation. 2)ie Q3irbung, — , culture, civili- „ 53irbung6gcjd;id;te, history of formation. 3)a§ 33ittet', —8, ;n'. — e, ticket, note, ^il'lig, arf;'., just, reasonable, cheap. 33triigen,u.re^., within (of time). 2 442 VOCABULARY. ^\9,prep., adv., and conj., till, until, as far, as to. ^iel)ei', adv., hitherto, up to this time, as far, up to. 2)cr W\^ol—t^,pL ^tfc^b'fe, bishop, ^it'ten, V. ir. tr., to request, ask, beg. ii5\X'iiX,adj., bitter. Sla'fen, v. ir. tr. and intr., to blow. S3Iafj, ac/y,, pale. [sheet. 2)ag ^latt, — e§, pi. S3Iat'ter, leaf, S31ail, adj., blue. 2)a§ 'Bid, —c^, lead. ^id'txn,adj., leaden, of lead. S)er SSIei'ftift, — e§, lead-pencil. SBlei'beu, v. ir. intr., to remain, stay. 2)er 58tt(f, — c§,/>/. — e, glance, look. 5i)liub,ac(/., blind. 2)er ^Blil?, — e§, ;^^. — C, lightning. S3li'^en, u. i?2fr. , to lighten, flash. S3lii5'fd;nett, adj., quick as a flash of lightning. 93to§, adj., bare, naked ; adv., only. SBIiiVen, V. intr., to bloom. S)ie iBIu'me, — , pi. —n, flower. 2)ag 33Iiim'ri;en, — §, floweret. 2)er S3tu'menfIor^— 8, field cov- ered with flowers. 2)a8 SBIut, — e§, blood. S3tu'tig, adj., bloody. [skin. 2)ag 33ocfrtet[, —eg, />/. — e, goat's 2)er So'ben, — §, />/. ^o'ben, ground, soil, floor. „ 53o'gcn, — §, bow, leaf, sheet. 2)tc S3of)'ne, — , />/. — n, bean. !iDa§ 33oot, —t^,pl. Wit, boat. 58or'gen, v. ^r., to borrow. SBB'je, «(//*., bad, ill, wicked, angry. S)er 33o'fen)ict)t, — i?>,pl. — c, villain, knave. [land. S)a§ iBrad^'fetb, — e§, pi. — cr, fallow Sra'ten, r. ir. tr., to roast. S3rau'd)ett, v. tr., to use, need. SBraun, adj., brown. S3rau'jeu, v. intr., to rush, roar. S3re'(^en, v. ir. tr., to break. 2)cr S3rct, — c§, broth, ^rett, adj., broad, wide. Srei'ten, y. reji., to spread, ■ijren'lteit, y. ir. tr. and intr., to bum. ?5renn'bar, ac?/., that can be burned. 2)a8 ^renn'^olj, — t^, firewood. 2)er 33ricf, —t^,pl. — e, letter. 2)ic ^arief mai1e, — , > postage- S)er^nef[tem^el, — ,)" stamp. „ Sneftrciger, —8, /»/.—, let- ter-carrier. 33nng'en, u. ir. /. 'li^rii'ber, broth- ^^irii'berlid;, adj., fraternal. S)ie Sruft, —,;?'. ^Brii'fte, breast. 2)a8 SSud^), — e§, />/. SSit'c^cr, book, squire. 2)er 33u^'6tnber, book-binder. ,, 33urf)'[;anb(er, book-seller. S)ie SSuc^'^anblung, book-store, r; 53ud;brU(ferei', printing estab- lishment. „ 53ud;'bru(jEerfunft, art of printing. [book. S)a§ 33ild/Ietn, — §, />?. — , small S)te ^u'd;e, — , ;>/. — n, beech. 2)er 35ud?'[tabc, — n, pl.—n, letter. 2)tC 93uc^'ft^^^^f^^^ft/ writing in let- ters. 2)er 58u^'tt)etJCtt, —8, buckwheat. „ 53uitb, —eg, pi. — e, bundle, league, confederacy. „ 33un'beggeno^, —en, pl.—n, ally. S)te 55un'begfeftung, fortification of the (German) Confederation. 58unt, a<(/., gay, bright and varie- gated. S)te 33urg, — , pi. — eti, castle. 2)er S3iir'ger, — g, ;>/. — , citizen. 35iir'gerltd), adj., civil, ag a citi- 2)tc SSut'ter, — , butter. [zen. 2)a« 33ut'terbrob, bread and but ter,. VOCABULARY. 443 e. S)cr Saltoinift',— cn,/>/.— cn,calvini8t ,; Santon', — ^,pl. — c, canton. 2)a^ (iapitar, — S, pi. — icn, capital (money); />/. (jo^itd'Icr, capital (of a pillar). 2)ie ^e'bev, —,pl.—\\, cedar. (Seremoniell', a^"., ceremonial, [acter. 2)er (£l)arat'ter, — g, pi — te're, char- „ St^arlatan', — 8, />»/. — e, charlatan rf S^cf, — 0, pi — ^, chief, principal. 2)ie (£l)cmic', — , chemistry, [singers. S)er S^or, — e8, />/. (£^i)re, chorus of 2)08 (S^or, — e8, pi. e^ij're, choir ca place in church for singers). 2)cr (£l}nft, —en, />/. — eu, Christian. S)a« St)ri'ftcnt^um, —8, Christianity. Slaj'fifd;, adj., classical. ®a8 Concert', — e8, pi. —t, concert. ©iJir, afl(;'., civil. 2)aS Sou^e', — g, p/. — S, coupe', divi- sion of a coach or railroad car. 2)a§ Souraiit', — ce, currency. 5)ie Soufi'nc, — , pi. —w, cousin. 2). 2)a, a(/y., there, here, then, now; conj., as, when. 2)abci', a Jy., thereby, by that, by them. S)a8 2)ad;, — c8, ;>/. S)d'c^er, roof. 2)at>urd^', aJy., thereby, by that means jDafilr', adv., for or instead of this or that. 25agc'gcn, arfy.," against that. SDa^cr', adv., thence, from thence. SDa^cr', conj., thence, for that reason, therefore. 2)a'{>tn, adv., thither, so far; ba^in', away, gone. 2)a'mal8, adv., then, at that time. 2)ie 2)a'me, — ,pl. — n, lady, woman. 2)amtt', adv.. therewith, with it, with that; conj., that, in order that. 2)cr 2)am^f, — e8, steam, vapor. ' 3)a« 2)ani^f'boot, steam-boat. 2)er 2)am>fer,— 8 ,;>/.— ,steamer „ 2)anipf'tcffel, boiler, [gine. SHe 3)anH)f'mafd;ine, steam-en- „ 2)am^f' miihic, steam-mill. S)a8 2)am^rfd)iff, steam-boat. 2)cr jDanf,—c8, thanks, gratitude, re- 2)anf'bar, adj. , thankful, [ward, 2)ann, adv., then, at that time ; bann unb tDann, now and then, 2)aran', adv., thereon, on it, in it. jDarauf, adv., thereupon, on that, after that. [from that. 3)arau8', adv., thence, therefrom, 3)ar'bictcn, v. ir. tr., to offer, [sent. 3)ar'fteflen, v. tr., to produce, repre- 2)ariiad^', adv., according to that. 2)arnie'bcrlicgen, v. intr., to lie sick, 3)arii'ber, aJy, , thereupon, about that. 2)arum' adv., therefore, for that. 3)a8 (see bcr), 2)a^, conj., that, in order that, £ic 2)au'er, — , duration of time. 2)au'crn, v. intr., to endure, last. 3)au'erl)aft, adj., durable. 2)ai)on', a c/y., thereof, therefrom, of it. S)a3U', adv., thereto, in addition to. 2)er 2)ieb'fta^I, —8, pi. *ftd^Ic, theft. 2)ecf'en, v. tr., to cover. (let. 2)cr 2)e(f 'cl, —8, pi. ^, cover- 2)ie 2)ecf'c, — , pl.—n, coverlet, blanket. [a ship), 2)a6 2)c(f, — C8, pl.—z, deck (of S)cin, jwrow., thy (§109), 2)ie 2)c'mut^, — , humility, meeknese. 2)en'ten, y. /. — n, dispatch. 444 VOCABULARY. 2)er, big, ba9, art., the; c?em, ;?ron. (§ 111, 2), this, that; re/, pron. (§ 114, 2), who, which, what. X)er3lci'd)cn,a£//'. indecL, such as that or those. iDerje'nige, dern. pron. that (§111, 3). 2)erferbe, dem. pron. (§ 111, 4). S)e§'^alb or beji'^alb, conj. \ there- 2)e§'it)egeu or be^'tvegen, I fore. 2)e'[to, conj. (so much the). 2)eut'lid;, at/;'., plain. 2)id;'tcu, v. intr., to make poetry. 2)er 2)ic^'ter, — g, ;?/. — , poet. „ 2)td/terfilrft, prince of poets. 5)i(^'terifd;, adj., poetic. 2)ie 2)ic^t'fun[t, — , poetry. 2>ie S)id;'tung, — ,pl. — en, poem S)tcf, adj., thick. 2)er 2)ieb, — e§, ;>/. — c, thief, [theft. S)er 2)teb'[tat)I, — g, pL ^ta^Ie, ©ie'nen, v. /. — , servant. „ S)ien[t, — z^fpl. — e, service. 2)ie'jer,;>»ron., this, that. 2)ie§'jett, i)re/»., on this side of. 2)tee'fett&, adv., on this side. S)ie 2)tn'te, — , _?>/. — n, Ink. 2)irett', adj., direct. [director. 2)er 2)irei'tor, —8, i?/. 4o'ren, S)er 3)tgfon'to, — §, discount. 5)od), conj., yet, however. Xer 2)ot'tor, — g, pi. 4o'ren, doctor. „ 2)oId;, — e§,/>Z. — e, dagger. f, 2)om, — eg, J9/. — e, cathedral. „ Son'ner, — 8, pi. — , thunder. 2)on'nern, v. intr., to thunder. S)o))'^)dt, adj , doubled, double. 2)a§ 3)ort, —t§,pl. Sor'fer, village. 2)ag 2)orf'(t)en, — 8, hamlet. S)er 2)orri,— cg,p/. —en, thorns. Sort, ac/y., yonder, there. 2)ag S)ra'ma, — §,/>/. Sra'meii, drama S)er 2)rama' titer,— g, dramatist. ®rama'tijd;, ac?;'., dramatic. S)er S)raug, — e§, impulse, pressure. 2)ret, three. S)rei'§tg, thirty. Sin S)rei'^iger, — g, a man be- tween thirty and forty years old. [years. 2)rei'^igiatjrig, adj. , lasting thirty 3)ret'sel;n, thirteen. 2)rtt'te, third. 3)ag 2)rit'tel, — «, third part. S)re'f(^en, v. »>. ir., to thresh. S)ie 2)ro'f)ung, — ,pl. — en, menace. 2)er 2)ru(!, — e§, /?/. S)ril'(f e, pressura S)ru'cten, v. tr., to print. '^M, pron., thou. 2)er 2)uft — e8, /;/. 3)iif te, fragrance. Ste 3)ii'ne, — ,;>»/. — n, down. 2)un'!el, adj., dark. S)nn'fetblan, acf;'., deep blue. S)nrc^,i>r^p., through, by means of. S)urd;aug', ac?y., throughout, by all means. [through. S)nrd;'fiibren, v. tr., to carry S)er 2)urd/ gang, passage through. 3)nrd}'reifen, v. tr., to traverse. S)urd;'fe^en, u. tr. fr., to look through. 2)er 2)urd/fd)nitt, — e0, average. 2)er S)urft, —eg, thirst. 2)ag S)u^'cnb, — g, i?/. — -e, dozeo. S)te (gb'be, — , ;j?. — n, ebb, ebb tide. (S'ben, adj., even, level; ac?y., just, ex- (Sd;t, ac?;. , genuine, pure, fast, [actly. (S'bel, ac?/., noble, honorable. 2)er (g'belmann, — eg, ;>/. — leute, nobleman. (g'belmiitbtg, ac?/., noble hearted. 2)er (S'belftein, — eg, pi. — e, precious (g'^e, a(iy., ere, before. [stone. 2)ie (St/re, — , pi. — n, honor, good (S^'ren, v. tr., to honor, [name. (g^'rent>olI, ac/;'., honorable. VOCABULARY. 445 S^i)x'ii6), adj., honorable. 2)ie Sl;r'Iicl;tcit, honesty. (5()r'lO'^, adj., without honor. 2)er St^r'geij, — e§, ambition. S)ag (Si, — c§, /jL — cr, egg. 2)er @i'ertud;en, omelet. S)ic (5i'ci;e, — , j?/. — n, oak. *£)« (SiD, — cd,y>/. — e, oath. r; (Si'fer, — ^, zeal, ardor. (Sifri^, adj., zealous, ©i'gen, adj., own. (Si'cjeiltlic^, adj., proper, real; adv., strictly speaking. S)ie (Si'Ie, — , haste. (Sin, ar^ (§ 54), a, an ; num. (§ 89), one; adv., in. [each other. ©inau'ber, pron., one another, 3)16 (Sin'bilbung, — , imagination. (Sin'brcincjen, v. intr., to press in. ©inerlei', indecl. adj., of one kind, in- Sin'tad;, adj., simple, plain, [different. 2)er (Sin'flu^, — es, j>l. — fiaffc, influ- „ (Sin'gaiig, — c8, entrance, [ence. ©iu'iicben!, ao?/., mindfull, remember- @i'nii]er, /jrow., some, any. [ing. 2)ae Sin'fcmmen, — 8, income. ©in'Iaben, v. ir. tr., to invite, [tion. S)ie Siu'labung, — , pi. — en, invita- /. —n, ell. Sie (Sl'tern (>/. j, parents. (SniVfang'en, u. >. )fin'ben, v. ir. tr., to perceive, feel. Sm^finb'Iic^, adj.. sensitive. @m^or', adv., on mgii, above. 5)te (gm^ij'rung,—,/?/. — en,conspir. acy, revolt. 2)a8 (Sn'De, —8, />/. —a, end. @n'ben, v. intr., to end. (Snb'ticb.r<(;-., final. (Sng or eng'e, ac?/., narrow, close. 2)er (Sng'el, —^,pl. —, angel. ,f @n'!el, — ^,pl- — , grandson. 5)ie Sn'telin, — , pi. — nen, grands daughter. [along without. -Sntbeb'ren, v.tr., to dispense with, get SntHn'ben, v. ir. tr., to unbind, re- lease. (Sntbecf'en, v. tr., to uncover, discover. 2)te (Sntbecf'ung, — , pi. — en, discovery. [tance). (Sntfcr'nen, v. tr., to remove (to a dis- (Sntfernf, adj., distant, removed. (Sntflieb'en, v. ir. intr., to escape, ©ntge'gen, prep., and adv., against, contrary to, opposed to, toward. (Sntgc'gcnge^en, to go to meet. 446 VOCABULARY. Sntge'gcnfotttmen, to come to meet, ©ntge'genfe^en, to oppose. (Sutge'^en, v. ir. intr., to escape. (Sntijal'tcn, v. ir. tr.^ to contain. (Sut^e'ben, v. ir. tr.^ to take away, dis- charge from. [charge. (Sntlaf'fen, v. ir. tr.^ to dismiss, dis- entle^'nen, v. tr., to borrow. (Sntra't^en, v. tr., to dispense with. Sntfc^ei'ben, v. ir. tr., to decide. ©ntfci;ie'ben, adj., decided. (Siltjd)rte'J3en, v. ir. rejl., to decide. 2)cr @ntjd;tuB', — eS, pi. — iiffe, decision, ©ntfc^urbtgen, v. tr., to excuse. @nt[iu'nen, v. reJl., to recollect, ©iitfet'sen, v. tr., to remove. (gntf)3re'd)cn, v. ir. tr., to correspond. Slltftc'()en, V. ir. intr., to arise, spring, originate, descend from. S)te @!it[te&'ung, — , source, formation ^nta^e'Der, conj., either. (Sntwer'fen, u.zV.^r., to project, design. 3)er (Sntmurf , — e,% pi. '-triirfe, plan, (Sntmitf ' ein, v. refl. , to develop, [design. Sntjirei'en, v. refl., to fall out with each other. S)ie (S))o'(i)e, — , pi. — n, epoch. I5)ag iS':|)08, — , pi. S'ipen, epic poem. 3)ie (Squi^a'ge, — , pi. — n, equipage, ^.X , pron. , \ie. [carriage. ^Srbar'men, v. refl., to pity, have mercy 'SrMicE'en, v. tr., to see. S)ie Grb'fe, — , pi. —en, pea. „ (5-r'be, — , />/.— n, earth. „ iSrb'beere, —,/)/.— n, strawberry !!£)a§ (Srb'bebcn,— 8, ;)/.—, earthquake (Srbul'ben, v. tr., to suffer. (Sretg'nen, y. re/?., to take place. S)ag (gr|tg'm^, —e8,i)Z.—e, event (Srfab'ren, y. ^>. fr., to experience. 2)te (Sr^at/rung, —,/>/. —en, ex- perience. Erfin'beu, v. ir. tr., to invent. [or. 2)er (Srfiubcr,— 8.a?/. — , invent- 1 S)tc Srfln'bung, — , pl.—m, in* vention. S)er Srfolg', —i^,pl. — e, success. (Srfreu'en, v. refl., to rejoice over, pos- sess, [ment. 2)te (grfiiriung, — , pi. —en, fulfill- (Srge'ben, y. ir. intr., to overtake, hap- pen ; refl., to surrender. ^rge'ben, adj., obedient. ergrei'fen, v. ir. tr., to lay hold on, ©r^a'ben, adj., sublime. [seize. (Srbol'ten, v. ir. tr., to receive. @r(;e'ben, v. ir. refl., to rise, spread. (grt)Ob'ett, V. tr., to raise, exalt. (Srin'nern, y. refl., to remember, S)ie (Srin'nerung, — , pi. — en, remembrance. [memory, ^dn'nerlic^, adj., present to the (grfat'ten, v. refl., to take cold. [iag). (Srfam':|)fen, v. tr., to gain (by fight- ©rfen'nen, v. ir. tr., recognize. (Srtlci'ren, v. tr., to explain. @r!(ar'Iid;, adj., explicable. 2)tc ©rflci'rung, — , ^/.— en, ex- planation. ©rlau'ben, v. tr., to allow, permit. ©rle'gen, v. tr., to kill. S)ie erleic^'terung, — , pl.—tn, relief. (Srtte'gen, v. ir. intr., to sink. (Srio'fen, v. tr., to deliver, redeem. Srman'gein, v. intr., to be in want. (Srmor'bcn, v. tr., to murder. (Srncib'ren, v. tr., to support. (Sriien'nen, v. ir. tr., to appoint. (Srnft, adj., earnest. 2)ie Srn'te, — , pi. — n, harvest Srn'tCu, or ernbten, v. tr., to reap. 3)tc (Sro'berung, — , conquest. S)te (Srnd)'lung, — , erection, founding (Srrtn'gen, y. ir., to gain (by force). (Srfc^et'nen, v. ir. intr., to appear. S)te erfd;ct'niing, — , joZ. —en appearance. (5rfd)ie'|3en, v.ir. tr., to shoot. @rfc'£>en, y. ir. ^r., to see, find out. VOCABULARY. 447 (grft.firstCarfy., only) ; crftcn«, firstly. Srftau'nen, v. tr., to astonish. Srftaun'lic^, adj., iistonishing. (Srfteb'en, v. ir. intr., to arise. @rta^'))en, v. tr., to catch, surprise. ©rtt^ei'Ien, v. tr., to communicate. iSvtra'ijen, v. ir. tr., to bear, sutler. (Srivarl/fen, v. ir. intr., to grow up. Srtt>ad/fen, adj., adult. (ErtDa(/Ieii, v. tr., tochoose. (5rivab'iicn, v. tr., to mention. Snr»ar'ten, v. tr., to await. 2)er Srtccrb', — eS, business, gain. Srwie'Dern, v. intr., to reply. Grjaf^'fcu, v. tr., to relate. ©erCSrj'marfd^aU, — e«, pi. ^fdjattc, (^^, pron., it. [lord high marshal. (Sfjen. y. tr. ig, adj., eternal. S)ie (S'luigfcit, — , eternity. 2)a§ (Syem^lar', — S, pi. — e, copy. 2)ie (gjiften^', — , existence. 3f^ 2)ic 5a'6cr, — , pi. —n, fable. ^a'belbaft, a(//., ftibulous. 2)ie 5^^^nf', — , pi. — en, manufactory. ^ac^'mwixt' , part., figured (of cloths), t^a'bifl, adj., capable, fit, apt. [ent. S)ic ^a'biO^^i^^f — ^ capabihty, tal- 2)ie 5^^'ue, — , pi. — n, flag, banner, ga^'rcn, v. ir. tr., to travel, ride. 2)ic S^i^rt, — , pi. — en, journey. 3)a8 ^a^r^elb, fare, toll, g.irien, V. ir. intr., to fall. [case. 2)er $aa, — e«, ;>/. ^cil'Ic, fall, 2)tc gatt'fuc^t, — , epilepsy. ^:iV)ii),adj., iiilse. S)ie ^ami'Iie, —,/>/. — n, family, gan'ijen, v. ir. tr., to catch. 2)ie (5-^^'^Cf — f /^^- — "f color. 2)a« Jag, —eg, pi. gaffer, cask. §a^, ac/y., almost, nearly, ged^'ten, v. ir. intr., to fight, fence. 2)ic ge'Der, — , pi. — n, feather, pen. 2)aS ge'bcmieffer, penknife. 2)ie ^ZZ, — , pi. — n, fairy. 3)a8 ge'entanb, fairyland, gcb'ten, V. intr., to fail, miss. 3)er Jcb'lcr, — ^,pl. — , fault, mistake, gcil, adj., for sale, gein, adj., fine. ®cr geinb, — e8, pi. — c, enemy. j^einb'Iic^, adj., hostile. 2)aS gelb, —zii,pl. — er, field, ground. 2)er gelb'berr, commander-in- chief „ gel b' mar fd;at(, field-marshal, gei'crlic^, adj., solemn. 2)a8 geU, —eg, pi. — e, skin, hide. 2)cr gerfeii, — c8, /?^. —en, rock, cliff. ®a8 gen'fter, —Q,pl. — n, window. jDcr gelb'jug, campaign. 2)ie ge'rien (pi.), vacation, gern, adj., far, distant. S)ic gcr'nc, — , distance, ger'tigcn, v.tr. , to prepare, make ready ger'ticj, adj., ready, prepared, done. gef fein, v. tr., to chain, geft, af//., fast, fixed, permanent. 3)er geft'tav^, festival day. S)ie geft'ftimmun^', lesilve feeling 2)ie ge'ftnny], — , pi. —en, castle, fortress, stronghold. 3)ag ge'ftungSmert, fortification. 2)a3 gcu'er, —8, 77/. — , fire. 2)ie gen'erSbrunft,- , jfl. briinftc, conflagration. geu'erfeft, adj,, fire-proof 2)ag geu'crrobr, gun, rifle. 2)ie geu'crroe^r, — , fire-company 2)er gia'ter, — ^,pL —, hackney-coach 448 VOCABULARY. 2)ag ^te'ljcr, — §, pi — , fever. gigiir'Iic^, adj., figurative, ^^in'ben, v. ir. tr., to find. 2)er ging'er, — ,% pi. — , finger. 2)er gtng'erl;ut, thimble, ^in'ftet:, adj., dark, obscure. S)er ijifd;, — e«, pi. — e, fish. gi'fd;en, v. intr., to fish. 2)ev gt'fd;er, —6, fisherman, glad), adj., flat, plain. S)ie gla'd;e, — , pi. —n, surface. SHe glam'me, — , pi. —n, flame. „ §la' jd;e, —t,pl. — n, flask, bottle. §Ied/ten, v. ir. int., to twist, braid. 2)ag gidfd), — e§, flesh, meat. 2)er 5lei'fd;er, — g, /?/. — , butcher S)er gleifj, — e«, diligence, industry. glei'fjtg, adj., industrious, glie'gen, v. ir. intr., to fly. gUe'iien, v. ir. intr., to flow. '^i\,adj., afloat. 2)ie ^(ud)t, — , flight. glild/tig, adj., fleeting, rapid. 2)er gliic^t'Iing, — e§, />/.— e, fu- ller ^lii'gel, — §,/?/. — , wing, [gitive. ff ?5lu{3, —eg, ;:»/. gtiif fe, river. 2)a§ g(uf3'd;en, — §,;>/. — , rivulet. S)te ghit^, — ,;>Z. — en, tide, high tide, gorgeit, V. intr., to follow, [quence. S)ic ^ol'ge, — , pi. — n, conse- gotge leiften, to comply with. golglid;, ac?y., consequently, gorbern, v. tr., to demand. 3)ie gorerie, — , pi — n, trout. S)te gorm, — , pi. —en, form. 5£)a§ format', — e§,/5Z. — e, size and shape (of a book), gor'fd;eit, v. tr., to investigate. 2)ie gor'f^ung, — ,pl. — en, in- vestigation, gort, aaj., forth, away, gone, off. gort'fa^ren, v. ir. intr., to continue. S)er ^ort'fd^rttt, — e8,/?/.— e, progress gort'ttjcibrenb, adv., continually. S)ie grad)t, pZ. —en, freight, cargo. 5)er gracf, — e§, ;>/. — c (and gradt) dress coat, i^ra'gen, v. ir. tr., to ask. 2)te gra'ge, — ,7^/. — n, question, granti'ren, v. tr., to prepay, gran'fo, adv., post-paid. S)ie gran, — , ;>/. — en, woman, wife, lady (Madame, Mrs ). [(Miss). S)ag grau'letn, — ^,pl — , young lady grei, adj., free. 2)ie grei'^eit, — , freedom. grei'l>rec^en, to acquit, gremb, ac?/., foreign, strange. 2)a§ gremb'mort, foreign word. 3)ie greu'be,— , ;>/.— n, joy, pleasure, greu'en, v. rejl., to rejoice, be gla-,', 2)er gveunb, — e§, ;?/. — e, friend 2)te greunb'in, — , pi — nen, friend. grennb'lid;, ac?;*., friendly, kind. 3)ie greunb'fc^aft, — , friendship. f^rennb'jd;aftltd;, adj., friendly. 2)er grie'be, or^'^rie'ben, — cu§, peace. 3)er i^rieb'rtdjSb'or, — §, pi—, Fred- eric d'or. grie'ren, v. ir. tr., andinir., to freeze, ^rifc^, adj., fresh. [ness. S)ie gri'fdje, — , freshness, liveli- grob, ac?/'., happy, joyous, glad, gromm, adj., pious. Die 5rud;t, — , pi "^xMfit, fruit. |^rud;t'bar, adj., fruitful, gritt), adj., early, in the morning. 3)er ^riil/Itng, — eg,;^Z. — e,spring 3)ag grii^'ial)r, spring, ^ril'^er, ac?u., formerly. 2)ag griiO'ftitcf, —eg, breakfast. grilt/ftiicEcn, v. intr., tobreakfiist 2)er ^riil/jng, early train. 3)er gud^g, —tQ,pl giid/fe, fox. git^'Ien, ?;. /. — n, gift. „ ©a'bel, — , ^/. — n, fork, [bet, 2)cr ©al'gen, — 8, i?/. — , gallows, gib- r ®ang, — e8, />/. ©dn'ge, going, walking. ©ancj'bar, adj., passable. Sl^.e ®an8, — , pi. ©an'fe, goose. 2)er ©dnje'fiel, goose-quill, ^ang, adj., whole, entire, complete ; adv., quite, entirely, wholly. 3fni ©au'jen, on the Wiole. ®h\l'\\&},adj., entire, ^ar, adj., finished, ready, done; adv., quite, very, at all. Sag @arn, — e«, /?/. — c, yam. 2)ic ©arni'runcj, — , trimming. S)cr ©ar'ten, — 8,;?/. ©drten, garden. 2)er ©drt'ncr, — g,;;?/.—, garden- ias ®a§, — C8, pZ. — e, gas. [er. 2)te ©af'fe, — , pi. — n, street, lane. 2)er ©aft, — e«, pi ©ci'fte, guest. 2)a8 @aft'I;aug,> hotel, inn, pub- S)er ®aft'(;of, ]" lie house. SDic ©at'tung, — , pi. — en, sort, spe- cies, kind, ©ebd'ren, v. ir. intr., to bear, give birth to. [edifice. !5)aS ©cbdu'bc,— e§, pi. —, building, ©e'ben, v. ir. tr., to give. ®er ©e'bcr, — §, pi. — , giver, ©etjirtet, adj., cultivated, refined. S)a3 ©cbirg' or ©ebir'gc, — §, pi. — c, mountain range, mountainous country, ©cbo'vcit {part, of gcBd'rcn), born. 2)er ©cbrauc^', — t^,pl. ©ebrciu'c^e, use, custom. 2)ic ©ebrit'bcr, {pi'), brothers, bretn- ©ebiil/reu, v. intr., to be due, [ren. 2)ie ©eburt', — , birth. 2)er ©eburts'tag, birthday. ©Cbci'l;en, v. ir. intr., to thrive, grow, ©ebcn'ten, v. ir. intr., to be mindful, remember. 2)er ©ebent'tag, memorable day. „ ©eban'fe, — n§, pi — n, thought. 2)a8 ©ebad;t'm^, — cS, memory. 3)a« ©ebid^t', — e§, pi — e, poem. „ ©cbrdn'ge, — e«, pi — e, throng, 2)ie ©ebiitb', — , patience. [crowd, „ ©cfa^r', — , pi. — en, danger, ©cfal'len, v. ir. intr., to please. ©efal'Itg, adj., pleasing, agreea- ble, courteous. ©e^dl'Iigft, adv. (if you please). 2)er ©efan'gene, —x[,pl — n, prisoner, captive, 2)a6 ©cfcing'm^, — eg, /»/, — e, prison. „ ©cfol'ge, — 8, retinue, consequent „ ©efror'ne, — n, ice-cream, [ces. „ ©efiiljt', — eS, pi — e, feeling, sense. ©e'gen,7>rep., against, toward. @cgenti'ber,j3re/>,, opposite to. 3)te ©e'genb, — , />/. —en, region. !5)a9 ©e'gengtft, antidote. I^er ©e'genfa^, contrariety, contrast. 2)er ©e'genfd;Iag, blow in j;etum. '3)er ©e'genftanb, —z^,pl. *ftanbe, ob- Ta§ ©egentbcit, contrary part. [ject. !3)te ©e'gentrart, — , presence. ©c'gentDdrtig, adv., at present. S)a9 ©c^alt', — e8, contents, Balary. 450 VOCABULARY. ©e^etm', adj., secret. Fpecret. Sag (^e^eim'iii^, —eg, pL — e, (S;t'i)Zn, v. ir. intr., to go. @e()or'd;etl, v. intr., to obey. ®tt)Ox'\am,adj., obedient. @ef;i3'ren, v. intr., to belong. 2)er @eift, —eg, /»/.— er, spirit, ghost, -eg, avarice. ©elang'en, v. intr., to attain to. ©elciu'fiij, adj., current, fluent. @elb, adj., yellow. ©elbrot^, adj., orange-colored. 2)ag @elb, — eg, pi. — er, money. (S)tk\)Xt',adj., learned. ©ele'geil, adj., convenient, important. Sie (^ele'genl;eit,— ,;^/.— en, op- portunity. S)a§ i3tki'\i, — g, pi. — n, track. ©eling'en, v. ir. intr. (i?npers.), to suc- ceed, [value. ©el'teu, V. ir. intr. (impers.), to be of ©eltenb mad;en, to carry out. 3)ag (Semcirbe, — g, pi. — , painting. @emein', «att', — , power, violence. ®en3a{t'fam, adj. , violent, forcible. ®en3aribt' {part, from wenbcn), adj., quick, active, dexterous. ®emar'ttg, ac?;*., waiting, expecting. Sag ®en)arfer, — g, pi. — , waters, flood. Sag @emtd;t', —eg, pi. — c, weight. ®ett)in'ncn, v. ir. tr., to win, gain. (§)tm^' , adj., sure, certain. Sag ®etDif fen, — g, conscience. ®etoiffen^ft, adj., conscientious. Sag ®ett)it'ter, — g, pi. — , tempestj storm, thunder-storm. VOCAEULARY. 451 (SetoO^'ucn, v. tr. , to accustom ; v. refl. , to accustom one's self. 2)ie @ciDol;n'I;eit, — , custom, ©ciubbn'Iid;, adj., customary. S)a8 @cix)i3Ibc, —«,/>/.— n, arch, vault 2)ie @id^t, — , gout, ©ie'^en, v. ir. tr,^ to pour. 2)ie (i)ift, — , pi. —en, gift, dowry. i)a« ©ift, — , i)/. — e, poison. 3)er ©ip'fel, — §,/>/. — , summit, peak, ©laa'jen, v. ir. intr., to glitter, shine. 'i)ai i^ia^, — e«, pi. (^la'fer, glass. 2)ie (i^Ia«'fd;eibe,— ,pane of glass. „ C^IaS'jc^crbe, — e, broken glass ®"®J""',^-"f''f faith, belief. ©lau'ben, y. /. ©iJtter, God. 2) er ©ot'tcSbtenft, divine worship. ®ra'ben, v. ir. tr., to dig. [grave. 2)a« @rab, — e8, pi. ©id'ber, 2)er ©ra'bcn, — «, pi. ©vci'ben, 3)ie ® ru' be,—,/)/. — n ,hole. [ditch 5)cr ®rab, — e8, />/. — e, degree. 2)er ®rfiu'cI,—g,;?Z.—, abomination, horror, horrible crime. 2)er ©rvif, —en, /?/. —en, count. 3^ic ©ramma'tif,—, grammar, [ical. ©ramniatifa'lifd;, adj., grammat. 2)aS @ra«, — eS, jo/. (i^rd' jer, grass. ©rd^'Iid;, adj., hideous, terrible, ©ratult'reu, v. tr., to congratulate, ©rail, adj., gray, ©rei'feu, V. ir. tr., to grasp, seize. 2)tc ©ren'se, — , pi. — u, boundary, limit. 2)aS ©rcns'Ianb, boundary-land, ©rob, a(/;*., coarse, rough. 2)er @ro'fd;cn,— 8,/)/. — n, groshen @ro^, ac?/., great, large, tall. 2)ie ©ri5'f3e, — , size, height. 2)er ©rc^'toatcr, grandfather. 2)te ©ro^'muttev, grandmother. „ ©ro^'mutb, magnanimity. ®rof3'miitl)ic5, a^//'., magnanimous @ro^'tentl)ciI«, adv., chiefly. ®riln, adj., green. ®er ©rmib, — e«,/)/.©riln'be,grouna, land, foundation, reason, [lish. ©riin'ben, v. tr., to found, estab- 2)a8 ©nmb'Iod;, hole in tho ground. 2)er ©runb'ftein, corner-stone. !Der ®ni^,—z^,pl. ®ril'{3c, salutation ©ril'fjcn, V. tr., to greet, salute, ©iil'tig, adj., valid, binding. ®iin'fttg,arf;'., favorable. 2)k ®um'inifd;ube ipl.), India-rub- @ut, adj. , good. [ber over-shoe. 2)ie ©ii'te, — , goodness. 2)a8 ®ut, —t^,pl. ©il'ter, posses- sions, properly, landed estate. 2)a8 ®l)mna'fium, — «, pi. &\^m\\a.'* \ ften, gj'mnasium. 2)a8 ^aar, — e8, ;?/. — e, hair, ^a'bcn, y. tV. tr., to have. ^ab'^aft, ac^'., in possession. !j5tc §ab'fud;t, — , avarice, ^ab'jild^tig, a<^., avaricious. 2)er §a'fen,— «, pi. ^5'fen, harbor. 452 VOCABULARY. 'i)er §a'fer, — §, oats. „ ^a'gel, — S, hail. ^a'gellt, v. intr. {impers.), to hail. „ §acf 'en, — 8, })l. — , hook, ^alb, adj., half. §aIb'ro^, adj., half raw. ^alb'roegg, adv., halfway. ®te ^cilf'te, — , half. [stop, ^al'teu, 11. ir. tr. and intr., to hold, 2)er ©alt, —eg, />/. — e, holding, stop. [mer. 3)er ^am'mer,— §,/»/. §am'mer,ham- S)ie §anb, — , />/. ^an'be, hand. 3)er §an'bel, — g, trade, com- merce. ^an'Deln, v. ^r. and intr., to han- dle, trade, treat, act. 2)er .^anb'ter, —^,pl.—, trader. ^ie .'p'lnb'Iuug, — , pi. — en, ac- tion, deed, trade, trading- house. S)ie §anb'fd;nft, manuscript. 2)er ^anb'fd)n^, glove. S)ag ^anb'werf, trade. 3)er §anb'n)erfer, tradesman. 3)er §anf, — eg, hemp. §ang'en, v. ir. intr., to hang. ^ang'en, v. tr., to hang, ^ar'ren, v. intr., to await. §art, «G?/., hard. S)er ^a'fe, — n, ;;/. — n, hare. [nut. 3)ie §a'je(nn^, — , ju/. *nil[fe, hazle- ^af'fen, v. tr., to hate. §aJ3'Urf), afl?/., hateful, ugly, ^viu'en, V. ir. tr., to hew, cut. S)er §an'fe, —M,i>l.—x{,) heap, „ ^an'fen, — §, pi—, f mass. §au'fig, a J;., abundant, frequent. ®ag §au^t, —eg, pi. §an^'ter, head. SDie §au^t'feber, mainspring. „ |)au^t'fe[tung, chief fortica- tion. S)er .t>vHu^t'Itn0, — e§, pi. — e, chieftain, leader, [foremost. ^anpt'Iingg,ac??'., headlong, head 2)er §an)3t'mann,— cg,p/.§au^3t leute, captain. S)ie §au:pt'[tabt, capital city. 2)ag §au:|)t'n)ort, noun. 3)a§ §au8, — eg, pi. §au'fer, house. S)er §aug'fned;t, house servant. 2)te §aut, — , pi. §au'te, skin. §e'ben, v. ir. tr., to raise, lift, S)er §e'bel, —^,pl. —, lever. 2)er §ed;t, — eg, pi. — e, pike. 2)ag §eer, — eg, pi. — e, army. §ef'ttg, adj., vehement, violent. 2)er §ei'be, — n, pi. — n ; bte §ei'bm — , pi. ==nen, heathen, pagan. 2)ag§ei'DeiuMum, — g, paganism.. 2)te §ei'be, — ,pl. — n, heath. §ei'Itg, adj., holy. §ei'ligen, v. ir., to sanctify, hallow §eim, adv., home, at home. S)ag §etm, — eg, home, residence. 2)ie §ei'mat^, — ,pl. — en, native place. §ei'nufd;, adj., at home. §et'raif)en, v. tr. and intr., to marry, §ei'fer, ad;., hoarse. §et^, adj. , hot. §ei'^en, v. ir. intr., to be called, be named, mean. §ei'ter, adj., cheerful, glad, joyous. * S)er §elb, —en, pi. —en, hero. S)er ^erbengetft, heroic spirit. ^erbenmilt^tg, adj., heroic. ^et'fen, v. ir. intr., to help. §ett, adj., clear, bright. 3)er §erier, — g, ^/. — , a copper coin, worth about a quarter of a cent. 3)er §etm, — eg, pi. — e, helmet. 3)ag §emb, —eg, pi. —en, shirt, ^em'men, v. tr., to check, arrest. §er, adv., hither (§ 187, 10). §erab', adv., down (hither). .^eran', adv., on, near, upward. §eranffomnien, to come up, rise. ^eranfi>eien, v. ir. tr.., to throw up. VOCABULARY, 453 ^crauf'tretcn, v. ir. intr., to step ^txan^' ,adv., out hither. [up. ^erauS'fagen, to speak out. ^erbei', adv., on, hither, near. ^rcin', a(/y., in hither. [ter. Jpcrein'fommcn, to come in, eu- ^crnte'bcr, adv.^ down hither, ^erii'bcrtommen, to come over. §erun'ter, adv. , down hither. ^erun'terfommen, to descend. ^criim', adv., around. 35er |)crbft, —t9, pi. —t, autumn. „ §i'rb, — C8, pi. — e, hearth. 2)ic ^ecr'be, — , pi. — n, herd. 2)cr ^err, — ii, pi. — en, master, lord, gentleman ; Mr. ; @ott ber §err, the Lord God. ^ZXx'[i6),adj., glorious, splendid. 2)ic §crr'jd;vift, — , pi. —en, do- minion, authority. ^err'fc^aftlid;, adj., belonging to a lord or to a manor, noble. ^err'l'c^en, v. intr., to reign, rule. 2)a§ §crr' jd)ert{;um, — S, govern- ment, authority. 2)a8 ^erj, — eng,;?/.— en, heart, [dial. §erj'lic^, adj., affectionate, cor- ner |>ei^'Sog, — c«, pi. §cr'5i5ge, duke, ^crnac^', atiy., afterward. ^ertoor'bred;en, to break out. jDaS §eu, — eS, hay. .^eu'Ien, v. intr., to howl. »^eu'te, adv., to-day. ^eu'tig, adj., of to-day, to-day's. §icr, adv., here, ^icrin', adv., herein. [close by. ^iernad^ft', adv., next this time, ^icrfelbft', adv., here. ^ie'ftg, adj., of this place. 2)er §im'mel, —9, pi. —, heaven. ^imm'Iifc^, adj., heavenly, ipin, acfy., thither, there, ^inab', adv., down thither. -JpiUviuf , adv., up thither, ^inaufjc^auen, to look up. .^tnein', adv., in thither. ^inetn'gc()en, v. intr., to enter iptneiu'gclangcn, to ))euetrate. ^incin'fommcn, to come in. ^inein'tragen, v. tr., to carry in. §in'gcbcn, v. tr., to give up, sacrifice. ^inge'gcn, adv., on the contrary. §ind'bevf^Mingen, to leap over. ^irtun'terftiirjeu, v. intr., to fall down, ^inju'fe^cn, v. ir., to add. ^in'bcrn, v. tr., to hinder, [bersome. §in'berltd), adj., hindering, cum- §in'ten, prep., behind, after. 2)er ■^irfd), — eS, pi. — , stag, deer. 3)ie ^ir'fe, — , millet. !5)er ^irt, — en, pi. — en, shepherd. !J)te §i^'c, — , heat. §od;, adj. , high. §iJd?ft, adv., very, extremely. 2)ie ^od)'a(^tung, — , esteem, re- spect, [oped. §od/gebrad)t, adj., higly devel- §od;'trabcnb, adj., high-sounding 3)ev §o(^'t)errat^, high treason. 25te §od/;ieit, pi. — en, wedding. „ ^pij'l^e, — , pi. —en, height. 2)er §of, —eg, pi. .Spi3'fe, court, per- manent residence, home. ^iJf lic^, adj., courteous, polite. §of'fen, V. intr., 'to hope. §of'fcntlid;,ac?i'.(itistobehoped) !2)ie ipofj'nung, — , pi. —en, hope. §0^1, adj., hollow. 2)ic ^i5b'Ic,— , pi. — n, cave, pit. ^o'len, V. tr., to get, procure, 2)ag ^olj, — e6, pi. .^erjer, wood, ^ol'jiern, adj., woody, of wood. 35er |>o'nig, —8, honey. §or'c^en, v. intr., to listen, obey. ^iJ'ren, v. tr., to hear. 2)ie ^o'fcn (^pL), pantaloons, trowset §iib|d;, adj., pretty, fair. 2)cr ^il'gel, —8, pi. — , hill. §ui' ! interj., ho! quick! in etneif ^\X\' , in the twinkling of an eye. 454 VOCABULARY. !J)ic §iirfe, — , aid. S)cr |)iinb, — e«, />/. — e, S)a§ §iinD'c^en, —^,pt. - little puppy. ^uu'Dert, hundred. dog. -, small dog, Ser §ung'er, — §, hunger. 2)ie§ung'er§not[;,— , famine. 2)er §ut, — cs, ;>/. — .p'te, hat. 2)ic §ilt'te, — , /)/. — n, hut. „ ^l^ajin'tlje, — , pi. — n. nyacintln 3. ^6^,pron., I. 3^V, jt>ro;2., her; their; 3^r, your. 2)er, bie, bag 3^'nge, hers; theirs; 3i)'rige, yours. -Sm'mev, adv.^ always, ever. 3ni)Jofant', adj., imposing. ^W, prep.^ in, into, at, within. 3ubem', c, while, since, because. 3)er 3n'^alt, — 8, /?/. — e, contents. 2)ag 3niaub, — §, interior of a coun- try. ^n'lcinbifc^, adj., native, interior. 3n'ne, adv., within, ^n'neil, adv., within, ^n'ner, adj., interior. 3n'nert)alb, prep., within, inside of. 2)ag Sitjeft', —t^fpl. —en, insect. 2)ie 3n'jet, — , pi. — n, island. ^nfou'bertjeit, adv., especially. 2)a§ Sfnteref je, — eg, interest. 3ntereffant', adj., interesting, ^r'reu, v. refl., to err, wander. 3. 3a, ac/y. , yes. S)ic 3ac!'e, — , /»Z. — n, jacket, vest. ^a'gen, v. tr., to hunt. 2)te 3agb, — , hunt, hunting. 2)er 3a'ger, — g, j?/. — , hunter. 2)ag 3a^r, — eg, — e, year, [century. S)ag 3a^rf;un'bert, — g, />/. — e, S)ie ^a^'regga^I, — , number of the year. „ ^a^'regjett,,— ,;)/.— en, sea- son of the year. 5)er ^a'nuar, — g, January. 3e, adv., ever ; conj., the (see bejio). ■Se'ber, pron., every, each. 3e'bermann, pron., every body. ^ebtce'ber, pron. (for jeber). ^e'malg, adv., ever. 3e'manb, — g, pron., somebody, any body. ^Z'WZX, pron., that, that one. ^m'\t\!i,prep. ,the other side of, beyond Seu'jeitg, adv., beyond. 3e^t, adv., now, at present. 3'e^'ig, adj., present, existing. 2)te ^u'genb, youth. 3ung, adj., young, youthful. S)er ^ung'e, — n, pi. — n, youth, young man. 2)ag ^a.'M, — g, pi — , cable. „ tabtnett', —eg, jo/. — e, cabinet, small room. '3^er Sabett', —en, pi. —en, cadet. 2)er tabet'tenofftjier, — g, pi. — e, cadet-officer. » taf'fee, — g, coffee, litabt, adj., bald. S)er tabn,— eg,i9/. tab'ne,boat, skiff. ;/ Sai'fer, — g, pi. — , emperor. ^at'ferlt^, adj., imperial. [ship). S)te ^ajit'te, — e, ;>/. — n, cabin (of a 2)ag.'ilaI6,— eg,j9/. MVhtx, calf. 2)er talbg'braten, — g, roast veal. 2)ag .talbg'cotetett, —eg, veal cut^ „ Sarb'fteifc^, — eg, veal., [let. 2)cr ^alf, —eg, lime. 2)er ^alt'felg, limestone cliff* calcareous rock. ^^li^adi. cold. VOCABULARY. 455 S)ic ^al'te, — , cold, coldness. 2)er il'ampf, — c^, pi. Mm'^\t, battle, ^am'^fen, v. intr., to fight, [fight. n ^ana'rienoogel, — 8, Canary bird. 2)ic ^ano'iic, — , pi. — il, cannon. 2)ie ^ano'netifugel, cannon-ball. 2;ev ilapitaii', — 8, pi. — c, captain. 2)ic ^ap'pc, — , pi. — en, cap, hood. 2)cr 5tar'^fen, — 9, pi. — , carp. Xk ^ar'te, — , pi. — n, chart, map. „ ^'.irtof'fcl, — , pi. — n, potato. Xtx ^artoffeladEcr, — , potato field. „ Sid'it, — e^, pi. — , cheese. „ Catalog', — e8, />/.— e, catalogue. „ ^atbof if , —en, pi. —en, Catholic. ^^t\)o'i'\\df,adj., catholic. „ ^attun', — e^, pi. — e, calico, ^au'fcil, V. tr.^ to buy. 2)er Saufmann, — e6, pi. Sauf = leutc, merchant. Kaufman' nifd;, adj.^ mercantile, ^aiim, a/. — , waiter. Scn'ncn, v. ir. tr., to know, to be ac- quainted with. 2)er M\z\, — S, pi. —, kettle. 2)ic ^ct'tc, —,;>/.— n, chain. 2)cr ^iel, —6, pi. — c, quill. '2)a« Sinb, — e§, />/. — er, child. 2)a8 ^inb'd)cn, —8, ;>/. — , little child, baby, infant. 2)tC ^inb'^cit, — , childhood. .^in'tifd;, arf;*., childish. 2)tc ^ir'd^e, — ,pl. — n, church, [tory. 2)ie ^ir'd;engefd;td)te, church his- 'J)er Sird)'tl)urm, church tower. 2)tc tir'fd^e, — , pi — n, cherry. 2)a« ^if'fen, — 8, pi. — n, cushion. Jtla'gcn, v. intr., to complain. 2)ie aia^'|)er, — , pi. —n, rattle. 2)16 ^la^'^erfdblange, rattlesnake. ^kr, «c(;., clear. 2)ic iilaj'fc, — , ;>/. — n, class. ^(af'fij^, adj-, classical. 2)a3 iilatoier', — 8, — e, piano-forte. 2)cr .^tlec, — e8, clover. 2)cr tlee'acfer, field of clover. 2)a8 5^leib, — e«, j»/. — er, garment, clothes, dress. ^(cl'Den, V. tr., to clothe, dress, ^lein, adj., small, little. 2)a^ mVnu, —^, pi. ^lima'ta, 4c or 4eil, climate. ^Itng'en, v. intr., to sound, be heard. ^(ing'eln, v. intr., to ring a bell, ^lo'^fen, V. intr., to knock (at a door). 2)a8 ^lo'ftcr, —^,pl. ^Ii3'ftev, cloister, convent, monastery. Slug, adj., wise, sensible, learned. S)er Sna'be, — n, pi. —w, boy. „ Sued^t, — C8, pi. — e, servant. „ Siio'd}en, — 9, ;?/. — , bone. „ Sno'teii, — «, f»/. — , knot. „ ^Q&i, — e8, pi. Si5'd;e, cook. 2)ie Sij'c^iu, — , pi. *nen, cook. So'd^cn, V. tr. and intr., to cook, boil. 3)er toHer, —8, />/. — , trunk, chest. „ ^q\)\, — C§, ;*/. — e, cabbage. ®er to^t'acfcr, field of cabbages. 2)ic to^'Ie, — , pi. — n, coal. Som'men, v. ir. intr., to come. So'mifc^, ac?;., comical. 2)cr .^ommi§', — , pi. — , clerk. 2)ieSonfcffiou', — , pi. —en, confes- si on of faith. S)cr tongre^', — eS, pl.—i, Congress. „ Sij'nig, — §, lit. — e, king. Sij'nigiic^, adj., royal. 2)a8 Sij'nigreid;, — S, />^ — e, kingdom. iJbn'neu, v. ir., to be able. 2)er topf, —t^,pl. So>fe, head. 2)a« So)}f we^, — «, headijche. . „ Sorb, —t9,pl. .Si5r'bc, b:!>ket. 2)er 5lorb'mad;er, basket-maket 456 VOCABULARY. SDaS S?orn, — e?, pi lor'ner, grain, ®er .ftor'^er, — g, pL —, body. [com. ^o'ften, V. intr., to cost. ^loft'bar, adj., costly. 2)te ^oft'barfeit, — , costliness. 2)ic ^raft, — , pi. ^raf'te, might, strength. [force. ^'raft'ooU, adj., energetic, full of iDer Hra'gen, — §, pi. —, or ^rci'gen, 4trauf, adj., sick. [collar. 2)ie ^rant'^eit, — , pi. — eu, sick- ness, [sickness. 3)a§ ^ran'fenlager, — ^, sick-bed, 2)er ^rauj, — eg, />/. ^ran'^e, wreath. 2)a^ ^raut; — eS, /j^. ^rau'ter, plant, „ kxtwi, — tx', pi. — e, cross, [herb. 2)ie ^reu3'fat;rt, — , pi. — en,>^ cru- S)er ^reu^'^ug, — 8, pi. *3Uge,) sade. r/ ^reu'jer, — 8, />/. — , creuzer. „ ^rieg, — e«, ;>/. — e, war. 2)ie ^riegg'not^, calamity of war. ^fri'ttfd;, adj., critical. 2)ie ^ro'ne, — , pi. —n, crown. 2)er f ron':|}rtnj5, —en, ;>^. —en, prince royal. [mug. S)er ^rng, —eg, /»/. ^riige, pitcher, ^rumm, adj., crooked. ^rnmm"6etntg, adj., bow-legged. 2)er ^u'd;en, — §, ;>/. — , cakw. S)te iiu'gel, — , />/. — ii, ball. 2)er ^u'tuf, — g, ^/. — e, cuckoo. 3)ie ^uubfd^aft, — , />/. —en, knowl- edge, information, fiinftig, adj., future. 2)ie tunft, -',pL tun'fte, art. 2)er^un[t'ftci§, —eg, artistic in- dustry. „ Mnft'ter, — g, />/. — , artist. ^iinft'Iid;, adj., artificial. 2)er ^unft'fd^aij, —z^,pl. *jd)%, artistic treasure. 2)ag ^unft'werf, work of art. 2)er f ur'fiirft, -en, ;>/. -en, elector, tur^, ac/;*., short. ^urj'njeilig, adj., amusing. 2)ag ^u'^fer, — g, copper. 2)ag .^u^ft^rftedjen, — g, engrav- ing on copper. 3)er ^u>ter[ted;er, — g, ;?/. — , engraver on copper. S)er ^u§, —eg, ;?/. ^ij'fe, kiss. Mf'fen, V. tr., to kiss. 2)te ^il'fte, — , pi — n, coast. S)er ^ut'fd;er, — g, pi — , coachmaB. Sa'^en, v. intr., to laugh. Sci'c^eln, v. intr., to smile, [cal. Sa'i^erlid), ac?/., ludicrous, comi- 3)er Sac^g, —eg, />/. Sdc^'fe, salmon, ^a'ten, v. ir. tr., to load, ^ing, cargo. S)te Sa'bung, — , pc. —en, lad- Sa'ben, v. tr., to summon, invite. [shop- 2)er ?a'ben, — g, pi Sciben, shutter, 2)te Sa'ge, — , p?. — n, position, place. 2;ag Sa'ger, — ^,pl Sci'ger, bed, camp So^m, ac?;'., lamo. Sab'nien, t?. tr., to make lame. I5)ag Samm, — t^,pl Scim mer, lamb. 3)te Sam'^e, — e. pZ. — n, lamp. [land. S)ag Sanb, — eg, pi Sdn'ber, country, 2)te Sanbmac^t, land forces, army ®er Sanb'mann, countryman. „ Sanbg'mann, (fellow)-couii- tryman. S)te Sanb'reifc, journey by land. „ Sanb'fd;aft,— ,i?/.— en,land. scape. [painter, ©er ?anb'fd?aftgmaTer, landscape tt Sanb' f olbat, land soldier v mi- litia). S)ag Sanb'botf, country people. Sanb'martg, adv., landward. 3)er $?onb'n)tnb, land breeze. S)er 2anb'n)trt^, farmer, landlord, Sang, adj., long. Sang'e, adj., a long while. S)ie Sdng'e, — , length. VOCABULARY. 457 I'an^'fain, adj., slow. i*aug' weilig, adj., slow. 2)er I>^drm, — c8, noise, bustle, uproar. Saf'feu, V. ir. tr., to let, leave, permit, order, to have (done). 2)ic ^aft, — , pi. —en, burden. 2)a8 Saft't^tcr, beast of burden. Satei'iiifd;, adj., Latin. Sau'fen, v. ir. intr., to run. 2)er 2auf, — c3, />/. Sau'fc, course. ?Ollt, ac(;., loud, prep., according to, by virtue of. Siiu'teil, V. intr., to sound, be rung. Se'bCll, V. intr., to live. 2)a8 Sc'ben, — g, life. Seben'big, a/. — , leather. 2eer, adj. , empty, vacant. 2)ic 2ec;atton', — , pi. — en, legation. 2e'gcn, v. tr., to lay, put, place. (?ln'Iegen, toput on. (Sei'Iegcn, to give to. Set^'reu, v. tr., to teach. 2)ic Se^'rc, — , pi. 2)er Se^'rer, —6, ;;A — , teacher. 3)ic Secretin, — , p/. — en, teacher 2)a8 Se^r'ja^r, year of study Sc^r'rcid' adj., instructive. Select, adj., light, easy. * [ry). 2etb, adv. (eg t^ut mir (eib, I am sor- Sci'ben, v. ir. tr., to suffer. [grief. 2)aS Sei'ben, —9, pi.—, suffering, ?ei'ben|^aftUd;, adj., passionate. S)ie Sci'cr, — ,pl. — n, lyre. ?ei^'cn, V. ir. tr., to loan, lend. !£>ie Sein'wanb, — , linen. ?ei'fe, adj., low, soft, gentle. [plish- Sei'ften, v. tr., to do, perform, accom- Sei'ten, v. tr. , to lead, conduct. 'S)xt Settion', — n, pi. —en, lesson. 2)tc Ser'c^c, — , pi. — n, laiL Ser'ncn, v. tr., to learn. 2e'fen, v. ir. tr., to read. [er. 2)a§^e'febud;, reading-book, read 2e^t, adj., last. Setj'tcr, adj., latter. 2)er !i!eud;t't^unn, light-house. 2)ie Scu'te (pi.), people. 2)aS 2id;t,— eg,;>/. — er, light, candle. Sie'bcn, v. tr., to love. ikh, adj., dear, agreeable. 2)ie Sie'be, — , love. Sie'bcr, adv., rather, sooner. 2ieb'li(^, adj., lovely, charming. S)er 2ieb'Iing, pi. — c, favorite. Sie'ben§iriirbiv], adj., amiable. 2)a§ 2ieb, — e§, pi. — er, song. Sie'fern, v. tr., to deliver. 3)ie !i!ie'feiung, —,pl. —en, num- ber (of a serial publication). Sie'gen, v. ir. intr., to lie, recline. 2)ie l^imoua'be, — , lemonade. i 2inf, adj., left, left hand. Siufg, a(/y., to the left hand. 2)ie Siteratur', —,/?/.— en, literature. Sitera'rifd;, at/;*., literary. 2)a8 Sob, — e§, praise. So' ben, v. tr., to praise, n, doctrine. 2)ag Soc^, — e8, />/. S5'd;er, hoie, cavity 2ot)'nen, r. en, — , pi. —en, rag, tatter 2)aS Snm'^en^a)>ter, paper (made of rags). 2)te ?ufl, — , /?/. Sii'fle, pleasure, joy, desire, inclination. Sii'ftern, ac^'., longing, repacious. Su'ftig, adj., jolly, merry. u 458 VOCABULARY. Ma'6)zn, V. tr., tomcake, do. 2)ie mad)t—,pL))Md}'%might, power. gjjad/tig, adj., mighty, powerful, having control. 9J2abame', Mrs. £)ie 2)iagb, — , pi. Wd^"Ot, maid. S)a§ 9}Zab'd?en, —^,pl. —, girl, maid. ®a§ 3)Jal)l, — e§, p/. — e, repast. ®er 2Rai, — g, May. S)ie 9)iaje[tat', — , ;?/. — en, majesty. ®a§ 3JlaI, —i^,pL — e, time. 2JJa'len, y. tr., to paint. S)er aJJa'Ier, — g, ;^/.— , painter. ®ie 9J?aterei', — , art of painting. SJJalerijc^, adj., picturesque. 'SRcin, pron., one, a person, we,. they. W.Cin'/. ~, gulf, ®ie SJieer'engc, —,/>?.— n,straita „ aJiee'regflcidje, — , surface ot the sea. S)er ajJeer'retttg, — 8, horseradish. 2)a§ aJJe^I, —eg, flour. W.ti)X (comp. of iJtel), more. 2Jfel/rere,j9ron., several. 9Jie^r'malg, arfy., several times. SKei'ben, v. ir. tr., to avoid. 2)tc 2)Jerie, — , pi. —n, mile. 2JJei'Ienn)ett, adv., miles distant. 3JJetn, jjrow., my. [mine. S)er ajleine, o?' ber 9JJetmge, pron., SRei'nen, v. intr., to mean, think. S)te SWet'nung, —, pi.— zn, opin- ion, idea. 2}Jeift (superl. of 'Old) f most. 9}Zet'[teng, ac?y., mostly. 2)er 2Rei'[ter, — g, pi. — , master. 9JJet'[ter^Cift, adj., masterly. 2)er SPJei'fterfanger, master-singer 2)ag 9JJet'ftcrftii(f , masterpiece. SJJel'ben, v. tr., to announce, make known. S)te 9Keng'e, — , pl.—n, crowd, quan- tity, [man being. 2)er 9JJenj(^, —en, jaZ. —en, man, hu- 9}Zenf(^'Itct), ac?;"., human. 3)ag 3Jlen'f(i)en!tnb, son of man, human being. SD'Zer'fen, v. tr., to mark. S)ag aJiert'mal, — g, /?/.— e, char-, acteristic sign. 2J?ert'n)Urbig, adj., remarkable. S)te SJJef fe, — , ;?/. — n, mass, fair. 9Wef' fen, v. ir. tr., to measure. S)ag 3JJef fer, — g,^?/. — , knife. 5)ag gjJetatt', — g, jo?. — e, metal. SJhe'tben, y. «r., to hire, rent. 2)ie 2}JtId), — , milk. 3)ie 2JJiId/ftra^e, Milky Way. 9D?iIb, of/j., mild. SJiin'ber, aJ;'., less ; muibeft, least 2)?in'be[teng^ adv., at least. VOCABULARY. 459 Dcr aJiim'ftcr,— S, pi.—, minister, member of the executive cabinet, ambassador. [minister, 2)er iDJiui'fter^^rafibcnt', prime- S)cr iliin'nefanger, — 8, minnesinger. 2)ie aj?inu'te, — , pi. — w, minute. 2J?iJ3'braud^cn, v. tr., to misuse, abuse. 2)er iD?i)'fet^citer,—S, ;>/.—, evil-doer ^JP^iiB'faUcn, r. ir. intr., to displease. 9.Uit,y>r<7>., with, by, at, in. S)er iOiit'biir^er, — S, fellow-citizen. 9Diit'ije{;en, v. ir. intr., to accomjjany, 3)?it'ncl)men, v. ir. tr.^ to take with. Tl\t'id}nli!iQ,adj., accessory toacrime. 2Jiit'f))rcc:^en, v. ir. intr. , to speak with. 2)ev ai)iit'tag,—g, midday, noon, south 2)ic 2)iit'tc, — , midst, middle. S)a« Wl'it'td — §, pi.—, middle, means iD^it'tcn, a/.—, and tic 2)?i)'bel, — , pi. — n, piece of furniture (in /*/. furniture). aJJcbli'rcn, v. tr., to furnish. 2)ic SDZo'bc, — , pi. —n, fiishion. • aJiebern', adj., modem. 2)a§ SDZobctl', — §, pi. — c, model. 3}ii>'gen, v. ir., to be permitted (may). WoQ'lid), adj., possible. 2)tc '^lo\\axA)'u',—,pL —u, monarchj? 2)er 2)io'nat, — S, />/. — e, month. 2)?o'nat(id), adj., monthly. 2)ev aJioiib, — cc, ;>/. — e, moon. 3)er 2)ion'tag, — «<, Monday. 2J2or'ben,y. tr., to murder. 2)er 3)?orb, —eg, ;>/. — c, murder. 2)er aJJor'ber, — §, murderer. 2)ie2)Zorb't^at,— ,y.— en, hom- icide, murderous act. 2)cr 3Tior'gen, — g, p/. — , morning. 9}?cr'ijcn, adv., to-morrow. SJJcr'gcn?, adv., in the nionn'ng. Tie 9Jii5'toc or 2}ceive, —,/;/. — n,mew, sea-gull. „ SDiii'cfe, — , pi. — ii, gnat, midge. SJfii'be, adj., weary, tired. Tie WiiVht, —,pl. — n, pains, care. „ mixifk, —, pi. — n, mill. Ter 2}iiU;rfidn, — e«, mill-stone. Ter SDZimb, -t^.pl. 93hin'bcr, mouth, Tic 2)]unb'art,— ,/)/.— en, dialect 2Jiiiu'big, adj., of age. Tag 3J?ufc'um, —6, /?/. 2Jiufe'en, mu- seum. Tie 2Hu[it', — , music. [cian. Ter SPiu'fitcr, —%,pl. —, musi- Tcr aJZuffcIiu', - 6, muslin. 9}?iif'jen, v. ir., to be obliged (must.) Tag 2J?u'fter, —«,/>/. — , pattern. Ter SD^Utb, —eg, mood, courage, spirit 2J?u'tf;ig, at/;., courageous. Tic aWiit'tcr, — , pi. 3J?ut'ter, mother. „ aJJiltj'e, — , pl.—n, cap. SSI. S^iad;, prep., after, behind, toward, according to. [copy. g^ad)'abmen, v. tr. and intr., to imitate, Ter 9Jadi'bar, — g or — n, pi. — n, neighbor. 9ia(!^'bem, adv., aftenvard, c, after. 3^a(^'fotnnten, v. intr., to come after, act in accordance with, accept. 9iad;'Iaffig, adj., negligent, careless. Tie gfJad/Iciffigteit, — , negligence Ter 5f2ad)'mittag, — g, afternoon. S^iad^'mittagg adv., in the afternoon. 460 VOCABULARY. 2)te 5^ad/rid;t, — , pi —en, tidings, intelligence, report. S'Zad^'fe^eu, v. ir. tr., to examine ; intr.', to look. g^ad/fl^riugeu, v. intr., to spring after. 2)ie aia^t, —, pL "^M&i'tt, night. 2)ie 9^ad/tigatt, — , pi. — eu, nightin- gale. g^iac^ft, ao(;"., next ; ^re/?.,next to, next. S)er ^jiacf'en, — g, />/. — , neek. 9la(ft, ««(/., naked. S)ie 9ia'Det, — , pi. — n, needle. S)er S^a'gel, — g, jo/. Sf^a'get, nail. 9^a^ or na'^e, a^\, near, nigh. 2)ie 9ia'^e, — , nearness. 9^a'^en, y. *nir. andreji.,} to ap- gZci'^ern, " " " ) proach. 5JJa'^en,u. tr., to sew. S)ie ^^al/mafc^tne, sewing-ma- chine. f, ^^ia^'nabel, sewing needle. 3)ic ^fial/rung, — ,/>Z.— en,food, nour- ishment. 2)og ^at/rung^mtttel, food, provision. ^tx^a'rm,-n^,pl.-n,)^^^ „ Sfla'nmx,—^,pL—, ) ^fla'mentlid), adv., namely. SRam'lid),pron., the same. S)er ^f^arr, —en, /?/. —en, fool, buf- foon. 2)ie yia'\t, — ,pl. — n, nose. 9^a'fen)et8, adj., pert, forward, impertinent, saucy. Sfla^, adj., wet. I)te ^flatten', — , pi. —en, nation. yiationaV, adj., national. S)te 5^atur', — , nature. 9^atitr'itc^, adj., natural. 9'^e'ben, prep., near, by the side of. 2)er ^Ze'bennmftanb, incidental circumstance, particulars. jyJeBft, prep., near, together with. 2)er 9^ef'fe, — n, pi. — n, nephew. 5^et)'men, v. ir. tr., to take. S'iein, adv., no. 2)te ^^Zerfe,— ,/»/. —en, pink. S^ien'nen, v. ir. tr., to name. S)a« ^fie^, —eg, />/. — e, net. ^^ien, ao?;'., new. ®te 9ieu'gterbe, — , curiosity. SfJeu'gtertg, adj., curious, inquisi- tive. 9^eu'lid;, adv., lately, recently. 9^enn, nine. ^ienn'tcigtg, adj., lasting nine days. ^l6^t, adv., not. ^\6^t§, pron., nothing. S)te 9^td;'te, — , pi. — n, niece. 'iflxt, adv., never. 9^ie'mat§, adv., never. '^k'mani), pron., nobody. 5^tm'mer, adv., never. 9fite'ber, adj., low; adv., low, down. 9^te'berbi*ennen, v. ir. tr., to bum down. 9^ie'berrei^en, v. ir. tr., to tear down. 5^0' bet, adj., noble. 9^od^, adv., still, yet ; conj., nor. en /J of North. „ ^fZor'ben, — S,i 9^i3rb'Iid;, ac?;*., northern ; adv., northerly. 9?orbtceftlid;, adj. , northwestern. 2)te 9^0'te, — , pl.—n, bank-note. „ 9^0t^, — , /)/. g^Zo't^e, calamity. need, trouble. 2)er 9^ot^'faII, case of need. gfjo'tbtg, adj., necessary, needci 9fZi5'tt)tg ^aben, to need. 2)er 5^otoem'ber, —8, November. 2)te 5^u'bct, — , pi. — n, vermicelli. " ^"'»"^^^-i^^-^^i'U"mber. „ gfZnm'mer, — ,jo/. — ,) Sflnn, adv., now; well, well then. Sflm, adv., only. g^Zu^'en, u. fr., to use. I 3)er g^uljen, —8, profit, use. I g'Mtj'Uc^, ac//"., useful. VOCABULARY. 461 D. D lor O^! interj., oh! Ob, conj., whether, if. D'ben, adv., above, up stairs. O'berl^alb, prep., above, on the upper side of. 2)ie 0'berflacl;c, upper surface. 2)a« O'berfeber, upper leather. 2)er O'berft, — cii, />/.— cn,colonel Obgleicb', conj., ahhough. 5Da« Obft, — e^, fmit. 2)cr O'cean, —9, pi. — e, ocean. S)a« Otta'o',—^, pi.— t and *«(, octavo D'bcr, conj., or. 2)er O'fen, —^,pl. Oe'fcn, 8tove,oven £)j'fen, adj., open. Offeubar, adj., open, plain. Offcnba'rcn, v. tr., to make public. Oef'tentlic^, adj., public. Oeff'ncn, v. tr., to open. Oft, adv., often. £)\)'nt,prep., without. 2)a« Ocl, — c«,;>/. — e, oil. 2)aS O^'fer, — , pi. — , sacrifice. Ora'uicn, — 8 iy^og.), Orange. Orb'uen, v. tr., to order, arrange. 2)ic Or'brc, — , or Or'ber, — , order. S)er Drganift', — cn,;j/. — en, organist „ Ort, — cS, pi. Oer'ter, pkce. zn, —8,1 east. „ O'ftet Ot\i'{\6.},adj., eastern. 2)ie O'ftcni {pi.), Easter. ?* -c8, pi. pair ; ClU 2)a8 ^aar, — :|)aar, a few. S)cr ^alaft',— e^,;?/. ^'ala'fle, palace. 2)ie ^al'mc, — ,pl. — n, palm. ■5)er ^an'tber, —8, ;>/. — , panther. „ ^antoffel, —8, p/. — n, slipper. '^I^an'jcrn, v. ir., to furnish with a coat of mail ; ge))au'5ert, iron-clad. 2)a8 papier',— 8, pi. —t, paper. „ ^arabicj'ma,— 8,2?/. ^arabig'mcn, paradigm. 2)ie *'^artie', — , pi. ^artie'en, party. 2)cr ^af3, — eS, ;>/. ^ciffe, passport. „ ^affagier', — %,pl — c, passenger, ^af fen, V. intr., to fit, become. ^af'feub, adj., proper, suitable, becoming. 2)ic ^crio'be, — , pi. — n, period. „ ^^erfon', — , pi. — en, person, '•^erfijn'lid^, adj., personal. 2)a8 ^^et'fc^aft, — e8, pl.—t, seal. 2)er 'ijfcf'fer, —8, pepper. „ %\txCmo^, — 8, pi. — e, pfennig. 2)vi8 %^ferb, — e8, pi. — C, horse. 2)ie ^fing'ften, —8, Whitsuntide. „ ^flan'je, ~, pi. — n, plant. •ipflilcf'cn, V. tr., to pluck, pick. 2)er ^flug,— e8, pi. ''^flii'ge, plough. '^a^ ''i^fuub, —t^, pi. — e, pound. 2)te ^bilofopf^ie', — , philosophy. ^^iIcfo'pl;ifc^, adj., philosophical. 2)ic ^{)ra'fe, — , pi., — n, phrase. 2)er ^^lan, — c8, i?/. — c or ^Ici'ne, plan. „ ''|3Ia^, — e8, pi. ^la^'c, place. ^?fa^ ncbmeu, to take a seat, ^lotj'Iid;, adj., sudden. ^Iftn'bern, v. tr., to plunder. 2)ic '!|?oefie' — , poetry. „ ^!J3oIijei', — , pi. — en, police. 2)er '^Polijei'biener, policeman, ^onti'nifc^, adj., Pontine. ^Qi9i ^ortemonnaie',— 8,i?/.— 8,pur8€, pocket-book. 2)ie portion', — , pi. — en, portion. „ ^oft, — , pi. — en, post, post-office ^a^ ^oft'amt, — e8, post-office. 2)ie ^racijt, — , splendor, magnificenea 2)er ^rad^t'anjug, splendid suit of clothes. ^rac^'tig,af//'., ) splendid, ^rad^t'lJoU, adj.,) magnificent. 462 YOCABULARY. 2)er ^raftbent', —en, pi. —en, presi- dent. ?j3re'bigen, v. tr., to preach. 2)er ^re'btger, — §, preacher. 2)te ^re'btgt, — ,pl. — en, sermon S)er ^'retg, — e§, pi. — e, price. „ ^'ri'ma^2Bect;feI, — g, first bill of exchange. „ ^rie'fter, — e8, pi. — , priest. „ ^rin3,—en,i?/. —en, prince, ^robi'ren, v. tr., to try. !^a§ Cuabrat', — e§, pi. — e, square. 2)ie Ouabrat'meile, square mile. „ Ouart, — e§, pi. — e, quart. S)te OueUe, — , ;»/. — n, source. 3)er ^rofef for, —?, pi ^rofeffo'ren, 3)ie ^^^it^o'fa, — , prose. [professor. ^rofa'tf(^, adj., prosaic. 2)a§ ^^robtant'fd;iff, ship conveying provisions for the army, transport 2)ie ^roiJinj', — , pi. — en, province. 2)er ^fdm, — t^,pl. — en, psalm. „ ^ut3, — z^fpl. — e, pulse. „ ^un!t, -eg, pi. ^unt'te, point. ^unfti'ren, v. tr., to point, dot. ! 2)ie ^up'pt, — , pi. — n, doll. Ouitt, adj., free (from). 2)te Outt'tung, — , receipt. 2)erOuotient', —en, pi. —en, quo- tient. Ser 9?a'be, — n, ;>/. — n, raven. 2)ie 9ia'd;e, — , revenge. [self. 9ia'ct)en, y. re//., to avenge him- 9?a'gen, v. intr., to reach, project. §erDor'ragen, to project. S)er §iang, —eg, pi. ^tcing'e, rank, or- der, degree, class. $ftafd), adj., quick, swift, rash. 2)er dlati, — e?, counsel, advice. 2)er 9tatf), — e§,;;/. dla'tt)t, coun- selor. S)a§ 9?at{)'^au8, council -house, city hall. [guess. dta'ti^zn, V. ir. intr., to advise, 2)a§ ^Jcit^'fel, — g, js/. — , riddle, ^er SJaub, —eg, ;?/. — , robbery. 2)er 9{au'ber, —^,pl.—, robber. 9Jau'(i)en, v. tn^r., to smoke. 2)er 5Rauc^, —eg, smoke. 2)ag ^{eB'^u^n, — eg,^?/. 3ieb'P^ner, partridge. 2)ie 9fe'6e, — , /??. — n, grape vine. 'Siec^'nen, v. tr., to reckon. [count. S)te 9ie(^'nung, — , jo/. —en, ac- „ 9le'd;enf(^att, — , account. 9ted)t, adj., right. 2)ie ^cc^'te, — , right hjnid. SJec^tg, ac/y., to the right. 2)ag 9?ec^t, —eg, or bie ^Jiedjtg'- n)iffenfd)aft, — , jurisprudence 9?ecf'en, v. tr. and reji., to extend. 9Je'ben, v. intr., to speak, talk. 9^eb'ItC^, adj., honest, fair, brave. 2)ie ^Reformation', — , reformation. „ Ste'gel, — , pi. — n, rule. ^Re'gelma^ig, ac?;*., regular, [ty. ®te 9Je'geIma^ig!ett, — , regulari- QfJe'gen, v. tr., to stir, excite. 2)er 5Re'gen, — g, rain, raining. 9Reg'nen, v. intr. impers. , to rain. S)er 9Je'genbogen, — g, rainbow. „ 9ie'gengu|, —eg, pi. ^iiffe, sudden and violent rain. „ 9fJe'genfc^irm, —eg, pi. — <, umbrella. 2)er 9fegent', —en, pi. —en, regent. S)te 9^egen'ttn, — , pi. — nen, re- gent. 9tegie'ren, v. tr., to rule, govern. 2)ie 9Regte'rung, —,/?/.— en, gov- ernment, [regiment. 2)ag 9fJegiment', — eg, pi. — er, 2)ie S^e'gnng, — ,pl. — en, movement, motion. VOCABULARY. 463 3)a9 $Rc^- — c«, pi. —t, roe, deer. Diei'ben, v. ir. tr., to rub, grind. SReic^, ac/;'., rich. 2)cr jReid^'t^um,— e8,p/.4^ilmer, riches, wealth, opulence. 2)a8 Dicic^, — eel, />/. — c, reign, govern- ment, kingdom, empire. 2)ie 9{eirt;^'DeifanimluiU3, Assem- bly of the States of the (Ger- man) Empire. $Reit, adj., ripe. 2)ie l!)iei't;C; — ,pl. — n, row, nmk, turn 2)er ^tm,—z^,pL — e, rhyme. 9iein, at/;., pure, clean. 2)ie 9ieiu'l;eit, — , purity. ?Rci'ne(fc--5udj8, Keynard the fox. S)cr 5)iei^, — c8, rice, [rice pudding. 2)er 9ici6>ubfcing, — «, i?/. —8, S)ic 9?ci0'fup^e, rice soup. 9Jei'fcn, v. intr., to travel. 2)ie 9?eife, — , />/. —n, journey. 2)cr OJci'fctoffer, —^,pL —, trav- eling trunk. 3Jei'6cn, V. ir. tr., to tear. 9iei'ten, v. ir. intr., to ride (on horse- back). Siei'jcn, v. tr., to irritate, provoke. Xk ^Jeligiou', — , religion. ?)^')jari'ren, v. tr., to repair. S)ic 9lc^etir'ubr, repeating watch. jDcr 9Je^rafentaiit',— en,/j/. — en, rep- resentative. Xk ^tpiibiW, —, pi. —en, republic. S)cr$Reft, — t^,pl. — e, rest, remainder 9Jet'ten, v. tr., to save. 2)a8 9tet'tung§boot, life-boat. 2)cr 9let'tig, — c«, p/. — c, radish. „ 9J^euitiati«'mu§, — , rheumatism. 9?icb'ten, v. tr., to adjust, direct. 2)cr 9iid;'tcr, —8, pi. —Judge. 2)ie 9Jid;'tiing, — ,pl. — en, direc- tion. 5Rid/tig, adj., right, accurate, true S)a8 9?ie§, — c«,/>/. — e, ream. S)er aiie'je, — n, />/. — n, giant. SJic'fengrc^, adj.,h\rg^ as a giant 2)a« 9tinb,—c6,;)/.—cr, horned cattlo 2)er Oiin'berbraten, roast beef. !Da6 aeinb'flcifd;, beef. 2)cr 9iincj, — ee, pi. — e, ring. 9iina ein, v. tr., to provide with rings; geruig'clt,arrangedin rings. [city. 2)ie 9ting'maucr, wall around a 9iing8, adv., around. S)er 9?it'ter, — e, /./. — , rider, knight. jDaiJ 9iit'tcrgut, manor. 9tit'terlid^, adj., chivalry. 3)er 9?o(f , — e^, /)/. i)iocI'e, coat. „ 9Jog'gen, — «, rye. [reed. 2)aS 9io{;r, — c8, />/. — e and 9?ob'rcn, 2)er 9ionian', — e«, pi. — e, romance. 9ioman'tifd;, ot/;'., romantic. 2;ie 9to'fe, — , pi. —n, rose. 9to'fa, o/.—, back. 3n ben 9iucfcn fallen, to attack the rear. 2)er 9iiict'bli(f, — e8, pi. — c, glance backward, retrospect. S-ic 9tild'fid;t, — , pi. —en, re- spect, regard, consideration. 9?ilcf'wart8, adv., backward. 2)a8 5Ru'ber, —8, pi. — , rudder. 5Kii^'men, r. reJI., to be proud, boast. 9tn(;m'J?cU, at//., glorious, famous 9Ju'fen, V. ir. tr., to call, C17 out. 2)ic SRn'be, — , rest, tranciuillity. Siu'^en, V. intr., to rest, repose. 9?il§'ren, y. tr., to touch, beat. 9Jilt>'rig, adj., stirring, active, nimble. Xk SRui'ne, — , pi. — n, ruin. 9Jnnb, adj., round. [root. 2*10 dlii't\)i, — , pi. — n, root, pei-eb* 464 VOCABULARY. S)cr Baal,— z9, pi. ®a'tc, parlor, hall 1 2)a§ 8(^au'f^iel, — c§, pL —t, play, 2)ie @a'd^C, — , pi. —n, thing, affair, drama. cause; pL goods, furniture, bag- 1 ®d;ei'nen, v. ir. inir., to appear. gage. 2)er @a(f, — e^, pi. ^Bad't, sack, bag. S>a'en, v. tr., to sow. S)er @afftan', — 8, morocco leather. S)ie @a'gc, — , j^/. — n, tradition, ©a'geu, V. tr., to say. S^te @a^'ne, — , cream. ®ag @al5,— eg,/)/. — c, salt. S)er @a'mcn, —8, /»/. — , seed. ©am'mcln, y. tr.^ to collect. 2)ie ®amm'(ung,— , jo/.— en, col- lection. 2)er ©am'met, — §, pi. — e, velvet. @ammt,/>rep., with, together with, 2)er ®anb, — eg, sand. ®an'btg, adj. , sandy. Sanft, ao?/. , soft, gentle, mild. 2)ie Sarbel'le, — e, ;>/. — n, sardine, ©att, adj. , . satisfied, satiated. 2)er @at'tet, —8, />/. — , saddle. 2)er ©att'Ier,— g, />/.—, saddler. S)er @a^,— eg,;>/. ©a'lje, leap, jump, ©au'er, ac//., sour. [sentence. 2)ie @au'ce, — , pi. — n, sauce, gravy, ©au'gen, v. ir. intr., to suck, drink. 5lug'[augen, to drain, impoverish. 2)ie @d;aar, — , pi. —en, troop, host. 2)er @d;a'ben, — g, ;;/. — , and @c^a'* ben, loss, damage, injury, harm. @C^ab'U(^, a(//., injurious. S)ag B6)a\, —eg, ;?/. — e, sheep. 3)er ©(^aft, —eg, />/. @(^af te, shaft. @(^a'men, ?^. re^., to be ashamed. 2)ie @d)an'be, — , disgrace. 2)ie Sc^anb'tbat, deed of infamy. @(^arf, ac//., sharp. S)ei @c^ar'tac^,— eg, /?/. — e, scarlet. ., @d;at'ten, — g, pi. — , shadow. S)ic Sc^atti'rung, — , pi. —en, shade. [behold. ©^ctn'en,r. tr. and intr. ^ to look, see, @d;en'ten, v. tr., to present. 2)ie ©c^er'be, — , /?/. — n, potsherd, fragment of broken glass. 2)ag ®d;er'bengend;t, ostracism. ®d;eu^'Ud;, adj., hideous, horrible. ®d)ic!'cn, v. tr., to send. 2)te ©c^ie'ne, — , pi. — n, tire, rail. ©c^ie'^en, v. ir. tr., to shoot. S)ag @(f)itt, — eg, ;>/. — e, ship. 2)er ®d}if'fer, — g, mariner. 2)ie @(^iffg1ente (;>/.), crew. Der @d)trm, — eg, pi. — e, screen. 2)ie @^Iac?^t, — ,/)/.- en, battle, fight 2)er ®(^Iaf, —eg, sleep. ©d^Ia'fen, v. ir. intr., to sleep. S)ag (gc^Iaf simmer, bedroom. ®(^ta'gen, i?. zV. tw^r., to strike, beat; \x&l fc^Iagen ju, to unite with. 2)er @d;tag, — eg, />/. Sd}(a'ge, blow, stroke, stroke of apo- plexy, [snake. 2)tc ®d;Iang'e, — , pi. — n, serpent, B&iii&j\,adj., bad. 2)er @d;(ei'er, — g, ;?/. — , veil. Sc^Ite'§eu, V. ir. tr., to close. S)ag (Sc^toO, — , pi. ©^loffer, lock, castle. 2)er @d;(n{3, —eg, />/. @d)tiif'fe, close, conclusion. 2)er ©d^Iiif'fel, — g, /jZ. — , key. @(?^me(f'en, y. «r., to taste. [able. @rf)ma(J'£)aft, a^^'., savory, palat- ©C^mer^en, v. ir. intr., to melt. S)er ©corners,- eg,;?/, —en, pain. @(^meq'tt(^, ac?;'., painful. na^':|)en, v. tr. , to snap at, catch at. 2)er @(^nee, — g, snow. @<^nei'en, ??. intr.impers., tosno^v VOCABULARY 465 BdfiltVhm, V. ir. intr.y to cut. 2)er 3d;iiei'bcr, — 9, pi. — , tailor. ©d;nell, adj.^ fast, rajnd. Xtx 2d;neU'5ug, express train. @c^i3n, adj., beautiful, fine, 2)ic ®d;cii'^eit, i?/. — en, beauty. Sd)on, ac/t'., already. iSd^o'nen, v. tr., to spare. 2)cr od?oc^ or3c^c§,— e«, pZ. ®(^5'gc, lap, skirt ; bed of a stream. S)ic ed;rau'be, — , pi. — n, screw. ®d;recf'cn, v. tr., to frighten. [ble. ©d^recf'lid;, adj., fiightful, terri- ©c^rei'ben, v. ir. tr., to write. 2)a8 ®c^reib'^a^ier,writing-paper 2)ie ^(^rift,— , pi. —en, writing. „ ^eilige ©c^rift, holy writ. „ iSd^rift'f^rad;e, language of literature, ©(^rei'en, v. ir. intr., to cry, call. 3)er >Sd)ritt, — e8, f»/. — c, step. 2)er @d^ub, — e8, />Z. — e, shoe. 2)cr @d;ulj'mad;er, —6, pi. —, shoemaker. „ >3d;ul)'mac^ercjcfcn,— en, p/. — en, journeyman shoemaker. S)ie ®d)u(b, — , pi. —en, debt, guilt ; ■Sie fmb @c^ulb baran, it is your fault, ©(^ufbig, adj., guilty, in debt. 3)ie ®d;u'fe, — , pi. —en, school. 2)cr ^d^il'ler,— «,7j/.— , scholar. 3)a§ v2d^ur^au8, school-house. 2)ic Sd^nl'ter, —,/>/. — n, shoulder. „ ®d)iinel, —,pl. — n, dish, bowl. €d^n>a(^, adj., weak. [in-law, 2)er Sc^wa'ger, — 8, ;>?. — , brother- 2)ie ©d;n)a'gerin, — , pi. — nen, sister-in-law, ®c^n?an'fcn, v. intr., tovacillate, tot- vSdjjwarj, at//., black. fter. @d)lDa'^cn, V. intr. , to chatter, prattle, 0d>n)ei'fen, v. intr., to rove (extrav- agantly), ©d^njei'gen, v. ir. intr., to be silent. u 2)a8 B^xotm, —t9, pi. — e, hog. 2)a3 ®d;wei'nefleifc^, pork. @d;n?erien, v. ir. intr., to swell. 3ln'fd;n?eUen, to rise (in a freshet). Sc^lDer, adj., heavy, difficult, severe. 2)ic ®d)We're, — , weight, heaviness. (gt^Wer'lid;, adv., with difficulty, hardly. 2)aS ©c^wert, — e§, pi. —tx, sword. 2)te ©c^nje'fter, — , pi. — n, sister. 2)cr Sc^tvie'gertoater, =mntter, *jo^n, 4od;ter, father-in-law, etc. ®d;ir>ie'ric}, adj., difficult. @d;tt)im men, v. ir. intr., to swim. ®d;n)in'ben, v. ir. intr., to disappear. @d;n>in'beln, v. intr., to be dizzy. 2)er ©c^tDin'bct, — 8, dizziness. @d;tt?inb'Iid^, adj., dizzy, 2)te @c^Winb'fud;t, — , consumption. @c^tt)0'ren, v. ir. intr., to swear. @d;n)iil, adj., sultry. @ed;8, six. 2)er @ec, — 8, ;jZ, — n, lake. 2)ie @ee, — , pi. — n, sea, ocean, 2)a8 ©ce'bvib, — e8, />/. *bdbcr, sea-bath. @ee'tranf, adj., sea-sick. 2)te 'See'trantbeit, — , sea-sickness „ (See'mad;t, naval power. „ ©ce'reifc, sea-voyage, 2)er 8ee'ranber, pirate. „ ©ee'folbat, marine. ©CC'tilc^tig, adj., seaworthy. 2)er vSee'toogcl, sea-fowl. ' jDaS ©ee'maffer, sea-water. 2)er ©ee'winb, sea-breeze. 2)ic ©ce'Ic, — , pi. — n, soul, 2)a8 ^Se'gcl, —8, ;?/. — , sail. ©c'gein, v. intr., to sail. !Der @c'gen, — 8, pi. — , blessing. ©eg'nen, v. tr., to bless. 2)ie @eg'nnng, — ,pl. — en. bless- @e'^en, v. ir. tr., to see, [ing. (Sebr, adv., very, greatly, sorely. 2)ie ®ci'be, — , pi. — n, silk. 2 466 VOCABULARY. 2)a§ ©et'bettscug, — e§, pi. —t, ©ein, pron., his. [silk cloth, ©ein, V. ir. Int7\, to be. @eit, prep. , since. S)te @ei'te, — , pi. —n, side. ©el'ber, pro/i., self (§ 108, Bern. 2). ©eibft, pron., self (§ 108, i2em. 2); at/y., even. S)er ©elbft'morb, suicide, ©e'lig, at?/., blessed, happy. 2)ie ®e'tigteit, — , happiness, bliss ©el'ten, arfy., seldom, rarely. ©elt'fam, adj., strange, queer. 2)ie ©ern'mel, — , />/. — n, roll (of bread), ©en' feu, i'. tr., to let down, sink. S)er ©e^tem'ber, — ^, i^eptember. 2)ie ©ertoiet'te, — , pi. — n, napkin, ©elj'en, v. tr., to set, put, place ; v. reji. , to take a seat, be seated. S)cr ©^aml, — ^,pl. — ^ or — e, shawl. @ic^, reJi. pron., one's self, himself, herself, itself; pi., themselves, yourself. ©t'd)ern, v. tr., to secure, insure. S)ie @iri)t, — , sight ; nad; ©id;t, at sight, ©ic, pron. , she, her ; they, them ; you. 2)ag ©teb, — eg, pi. — e, sieve. ©te'ben, v. tr., to sift. ©ie'ben, seven. 2)er ©leg, — eg, pi. — e, victory. ©ie'gen, v. tr., to conquer. ©icg'rci^, adj., victorious. 2)ag ©ie'gel, — g, />/. — , seal. ©ie'geln, v. tr., to seal. S)a§ ©U'ber, —6, silver, ©ing'en, v. ir. intr., to sing, Ser ©ing'»DgeI, bird of song. S)te ©it'te, — , pi. — n, custom. 2)er ©i^, — eg, /?^. — e, abode, seat. ©i^'en, w. ir. intr., to sit. S)ie ©i^'uttg, — ,pl. — en, session ©la'toifc^, adj., Slavic. ©0, adv. and conj., so, thus, as. ©oe'Ben or fo e'fecn, adj., just now, just then, just at the time, ©o'fern, adv. and conj., so far, if, in case. ©Ogtet^',afl?y., immediately. 2)te ©D^'Ie, — , pi. — n, sole. 2)er ©D^n, —eg, />/. ©c^ne, son. ©ot'c^er, pron., such. 2)er ©olbat', — en,/>/.— en, soldier. ©ol'Ien, V. ir., to be obliged. 3)er ©om'mer, — g, ^/. — , summer. ©on' bent, conj., but. S)ie ©on'ne, — , ;>/. — n, sun. 2)er ©onuenaufgang, sunrise. „ ©onnenun'tergang, sunset. „ ©on'nenfd;irm, parasol, ©on' nig, adj., sunny, 2)er ©onn'tag, — g, Sunday. ©onft,ac?y, and co7ij., formerly, other- wise. 2)te ©or'ge, — , pi. — n, care. ©org'fam, adj., careful. Xk ©Ijal'te, — , pi. — n, column. ©:|3a'ren, v. tr., to spare, save, ©^cit, adj. and adv. , late, ^paik'xzn, v.intr. (to go for plensure). ©. geben, to talk a walk, [riage. ©. fa^ren, to take a ride in a car- ©. reiten, to take a ride on horse- back, [ment. 2)tC ©^ei'je,— e,/>Z,— n,food, nourish- ©^ei'fen, v. tr., to eat, dine. 2)er ©:|3ei']efaal, dining-room. 2)te ©:j3efnIatton', —,/>/.— en, specu- lation. „ @))^a're, — , pi. — n, sphere. S)er ©:|)te'gel, — ^,pl. — , mirror. 2)ag ©^iel, —eg, pi. — e, play, ©^te'len, v. intr. , to play. 2)er ©:^ton', — g, pi. — e, spy. 2)ag ©:^ttar, —t^,pl. 4aler, hospital, 2)te ©^i^'e, — , pi. — n,point; />/., lace S)er ©:|)t^'enfc^Ieier, lace Aeii. ©:|JOt'ten, v. tr., to deride, ridicule, banter, make sport. VOCABULARY. 407 2)er (2^i5t'tcr,— 8,/)Z.— ,derider, foolish jester. [guage. 2)ie @pra'd;e, — , jyl. — n, speech, lan- 2)ic @prad;'bilbung, — , forma- tion of a language. 2)er vSprac^'gebraud^, laws of usage in a language. ®^re'(^cn, v. ir. intr., to speak, talk. 2)ie epred^'f'^unbc,hour appointed to receive calls on business. 2)a8 @^ric^'n?ort, proverb, [out. @)3rei'jcn, v. tr., to stretch out, spread ©preug'en, V. tr., to cause to burst; auSeinan'ber fpreng'en, to scatter suddenly. 2)a§ @pri(^'n)ort, proverb. ©pnng'en, v. ir. intr., to spring, leap. jTcr S^mt, — C9, spectre. [house). S^Jll'teil, V. intr., to be haunted (as a ®^uf1)aft, ac/;., ghostlike, imaginary. 2)ic iS^ur, —,p/.— en, trace, footstep. 2)cr @taat, — eg, pi. — en, state, na- tion ; pomp, magnificent array, fine dress. 2)er Stab, —z^,pl Stci'bc, staflP. 2)er Sta'c^el,— 6,;j/.-n,pnckle, thorn 2)ie ®ta'd;clbeere, gooseberry. (Sta'd^elid^t, adj., thorny. 2)ie Stabt, — ,p^. @tab'tc,city. [city. 2)a8 ©tdbtc^en, —8, ;>/.—, small ©tab'tifd^, adj., civic, municipal. 2)er @ta^I, — e8, steel. [pen. 2)ie Sta^rfeber, — , pl.~n, steel 2)er ©td^l'ftic^,— e8, jo/.— c, steel engraving. S)er ®tamm, — c8, ;>/. @tam'me, trunk, body, stem, tribe, family. Stam'men, v.intr., to be descend- ed (from). [race. 2)er ®tamm'i)ater, father of a 2)cr ®tanb, — e8, pi. @tan'be, condi- tion, rank, ©tart, adj. , strong. !J)ic Statt, — , /*/. ©tSt'te, place. ®tatt, prep., instead of. ©tatt'finben, v. intr.,io take place ©tatt'iid;, adj., stately, grand. ©tCCf'en, V. tr., to stick, fasten. 2)er 8tecf 'brief, advertisement for the apprehension of a delin- quent or criminal. ©tecf'bricflid; toerfol'gen, to de- scribe a criminal in a ®tecf'« brief. 2)ic ©tccf'nabel, — , pi. — n, pin. ®te'^en, v. ir. intr..^ to stand. Steb'Ien, v.ir. tr., to steal. @teif, adj., stiff. Stet'gen, v. ir. intr., to mount, ascend. Steil, adj., steep. 2)er Stein, — ei5, pi. — e, stone. Stein'fjart, arf;'., hard as stone. Stel'ten, v. tr., to place, put, set up. 2)ie Stel'Ie, — ,;>/. — n, position. „ ©teriuncj, — , pi. — en, ])osi- Ster'ben, v. ir. intr., to die. [tion. Sterb'Iid^, adj., mortal. S)er ©tern, — e§,;>/. — c, star. 2)a8 Stcrn'bilb, — es, i?/. — er, constellation. Stct or ftat, «fi?/., steady, firm. ®tet8 or [tat6, rtc/y., continually 2)ic Steu'er, — , pi. — n, tax, duties. @teu'cr^ftid;tig, adj., subject to tax or duty, ©ticf'en, V. tr., to embroider. 2)er ©tie'fel, — S, pi. — , boot. 3)er Stie'fcltned;t, boot-jack. 3)cr Stief'tjatcr, ^mutter, *fobn, 4od^* ter, step-father, step-mother, etc. ©tif'ten, V. tr., to found, establish, ©till, adj., still. 2)ie Stil'Ie, — , quietness, stillness @titt'fd)njctgcn, to keep silent. 2)ie Stim'mc, — , pi. — en, voice. t, Stir'ne, — , pi. — n, brow. 2)er @tocf, — c8, pi. Stij'de, stl.k, cane ; story (of a house). 2)cr ©toff, —eg, pi. — e, stuff, sub- @toIj, ck/;., proud. [stance. 468 VOCABULARY. @to'^en, u. ir. tr., to hit, strike. 2)er ©trai)t, — e§, pi. — en, beam ray. @tra^'(en, v. intr., to shine, ra- diate, beam. S)ie ©tra'^e, — , pi. — n, street. 2)er ©tra'^enjunge, — n, pi. —n, street-boy, vagabond boy. S)er @trau^, — e§ or —en, pi. — e or — en, ostrich, ©tre'ben, v. intr., to strive. ©trecf'en, v. rejl., to extend (itself.) 2)er @trei^, — t^,pl. — e, stroke, blow 2)er ©treit, — e§, pi. — e, contest. @tret'ten, v. ir. intr., to contend. @treng, adj., strict, severe, ^tricf'en, v. tr., to knit. S)ie ©tricl'nabel, knitting-needle. 2)er @trom, — i^,pl. ©trome, stream. „ @trum:pf, —eg, pi. @tviim>fe, stocking. 2)a§ @trum|)t'banb, garter. !l)te ©tu'Be, — , pi. — n, room. [room. 2)a§ ©tiib'd^en, — §, />/.—, small S)a§ ©tiicf, —eg, /?/. — e, piece. 2)a§@tu'btutn,— S,/?/.®tu'bten,8tudy ©tubi'ren, v. tr., to study. 2)te ©tu'fc, — , pi. — en, step. )te, swamp S)ag @um))f lanb, swampy land. 5)ic @iin'bc, — , pi. — n, sin. 2)er ©iin'benfatt, fall of our first parents. S)te (su^>e, — , pi. — n, soup. @u|3, adj. , sweet. 2:- S)er Sla'baf, — §, ;>?. — e tobacco. 2:a'beln, v. tr., to blame. 2)er 2;ag, —t^,pL — e, day. [break. 25er 2^a'geganbrud^, —eg, day- S^ag'Iic^, ao?;'., daily. 3)te Sairie, — , i?^. — n, waist. 2)ag S^alent', —eg, pi. — e, talent. j^alent'toott, «(/;'., talented. 2)te jtan'te, —,;>/. — n, aunt. Sa^'fer, adj., valiant, brave. 2)ic 2;a^'ferleit, — , valor, bravery S)ie j^a'fc^e, — , />/. —en, pocket. 25er £a'fd;enbieb, pick-pocket. S)ag STa'fc^entuc^, pocket-hand- kerchief. 2)ie S^a'fc^enubr, watch. S)te 2:affe, — , pi. — n, cup. Saub, ac(/'., deaf. jlaub'ftumm, adj. , deaf and dumb %Z. —en, fool. 2)te i^or'I;ett, — , pi. —en, foilj VOCABULARY. 469 2;^b'rid^t, adj., foolish. S)ag %ifcx, — e8, pi. — c, gate, door. X[}Utt,v. ir. tr., to do. 2)ic %Wxt, —, pi. — n, door. 2)cr Xburm, —i^,pl. Xpr'mc, tower STief, a/.— ,dream- Xref'fen, v. ir. tr., to meet, hit. [er, 2;rei'6en, v. ir. tr., to drive, urge. 2)ic Xxt^i'lpt, —, pi. — n, stair, stair- way. Xxt'itn, V. ir. intr., to tread; ein'tre* ten, to enter, set in. Xreu, adj., true, faithful. !3)ie Jreu'c, — , faithfulness. Sreu'l^crjlg, adj., true-hearted. Sreu'toS, adj., faithless. 2)ie 2;reu'Iofigfcit, — , faithless- ness, treachery. 2)er %x\th, — t?>,pl. — c, driving, force, instinct, impulse. Sriu'fen, v. ir. tr., to drink. Srinf'bar, adj., fit to drink. 2!ro(f'en, adj., dry. 2)ie 2;rom'mc(, — , _p^. — n, drum. %Xi>'\itX\., V. tr., to console. 2)a8 Xu(^, —eg, ;»/. Sil'd^er, cloth. S)ie Xu'geub, — ,pl. — en, virtue. Xu'genb^aft, adj., virtuous. 2)er Xv'^t}U8, typhus fever. U. Ue'bcl, adj., evil, bad. 2)a§ Uc'bel, —8,;?/. — , evil, ill. 3)er Ue'belftanb, evil, misfortune. Uc'bcn, V. tr., to exercise. 2)ic Ue'bung, — , pi. — en, exercise Uc'ber, prep., over, above, upon. 2)ic Ue'bcrfabrt, journey over. 2)er Ue'bergang, transition. Ueberbaulpt', adv., in general. Ueberle'gen, to consider, reflect upon. 2)te Ue'bermad^t, superior force. Ue'bermd^ig, adj., excessive, ex- orbitant. 2)er Ue'bermut^, arrogance, inso- lence, [lodge. UctJernacb'teit, to pass the night, Ueberncb'men, to take charge of. Ucbcrrc'ben, to overpersuade. 2)cr Ue'berrod , overcoat. Ueberje^'en, to translate. Pator. S)er Ueberfetj'er,— g,yv/. — , trans- 2)ie Ucberfe^'ung, — , pi. — cii, translation. Uebertrcffen, to surpass, excel. Ucberjte'f)en, to cover. Ueberjeu'gcn, v. tr., to convince. Uc'brig, adj., remaining (over). Ue'brigeuS, conj., moreover, 2)a8 U'fer, —%, pi. — , shore, bank. !2)ic Ubr, — , pi. — en, clock, watch. SSaS tft bie Ubr ? What time is it? S3ig toier Ubr, till four o'clock. Urn, prep. , around, about, at. Um'arbeitcn, v.tr., to work over, remodel, revise. Um'bringcn, to kill, murder. 2)ct Uin'fang, — 8, circumference. 470 VOCABULARY. Umfaf'jen, v. tr. , to embrace. 2)ieUmge'bun!5, — , pl.—m, sur- rounding, environs. Umge'^en, to avoid, evade. 2)er Um'gang, way around, inter- course. Um^er', adv., round about. Um^er'ftveifen, v. intr., to rove about. 2)erUm'ftanb,— e§,;^Z.Um'[tanbe, condition, circumstance. 2)ie Un'al)&angigteit, — , independence. Un'angeuetjm, adj., unpleasant. Uu'a^ulid;, adj., unlike. Uii'aufmerffam, adj., inattentive. Un.iuSfiibr'bar, adj., unfeasible, that can not be executed. Ull'begievtg, aJ/., undesirous, unsolicit- ous. [inconceivable. Ulil^egreif'Itd^, adj., incomprehensible, lliibe|d;a'Dct, prep., without detriment or injury to. Uiitefd;rcib'Itd;, adj., indescribable, lllt'befd^eibcn, adj., immodest. Uitb, conj., and. Uti'Dantbar, adj., unthankful. Uiienb'Iti^, adj., endless, infinite. Utl'erfa^ren, adj., inexperienced. Uu'eibeblid), adj., inconsiderable, un- important, trifling. [p^^y- Uii'entgeltlid}, adj. gratuitous, without Uiierme^'Iid;, at//., immeasurable. '-^ix Uu'fall, —z^,pl. Un'faHe, misfor- tune, disaster. Ull'formlic^, adj.,i\\ shaped, ugly. Uu'freunbltc^, adj., unfriendly, unkind Uu'gebilbet, adj., uncultivated, rude. Uligefvibr', adv., about, nearly. Uil'gemetn, adj., uncommon. Un'getoi^, adj., uncertain. Uu'gemb^nltc^, ac/J. , unusual. ®ag Uu'gtucf, — g, misfortune. Un'glit{fltd),ac?;'., unhappy, fly. Un'glilcf lic^crmeif e, ac/?^ ,unhappi- 3)ie Un'gnabe, — , disgrace, disfavor. Un'^eitbar, adj., incurable. 2)te U'niform, —, pi. —en, uniform. S)ie Unitoerfitdt' ,— , pi. —en, university Un'mittelbar, adj., immediate. Un'mi3glt(^, adj., impossible. S)a3 Un'red;t, —eg, wrong, injury; Uu'rec^t ^aben, to be wrong. Un'rul^ig, adj., restless. Vin§,pron., us. Un'fer,;>ron.,our. 3)er Uni'nge,2?ro«., ours. 2)er Un'finn, — e8, />/. — e, nonsense. Un'fic^tbar, adj. , invisible. Un'ftcit, adj., unsteady, unfixed, rov- ing, nomadic. Ult'teu, adv., under, below, down. Un'ter, prep., under, among. Un'terge^en, to go down, set. 3)er lln'tergang,—e«, going down, setting, destruction, [side of. UiVtZX^oXh, prep., below, on the lower Uuterbarteii, to entertain. [nean. Un'terirbtfci), under ground, subterra- Unterneb'men, to undertake. ®ie Unterne^'mung, — , pi. —en, un- dertaking. Unterfc^ei'ben, to distinguish. S)ev Un'terf c^ieb, —t^,pL—t, dif- Uuterfii'd^en, to investigate, [ference. S)ie Un'tertaf'je, — , pi. — en, saucer. 2)er Un'tertf;an, — § or —en, pl.—zn, subject. UntcrlregS', adv., on the way. 2)te Un'tertDelt. lower regions. Un'tiidjttg, adj., unfit, unqualified. Untoerblen'bet, adj., seeing plainly, not dazzled. Un'ternitnftig, adj., unreasonable. Un'tjerrtd;tet, adj., unperformed ; un'* ijerric^teter @a'c^e, with purpose unaccomplished. Un'tr»iEtommen, adj., unwelcome. Un'n?if[enb, adj., ignorant. Un'tDiirbig, adj., unworthy. Un'gufrteben, adj., discontented. VOCABULARY. 471 Un'jtrctbcutig, ac^'., unequivocal. 2)er Ur'grcf^i^atcr ;, *nnitter, great- grundf.itlier ; great-grandmother. 2)ic Ur'facl;c, — , pi — n, cause. 2)cr Ur')>ruug, — 6, origin, source. Ur'j^rilugiic^, adj., original. 2)aS Ur't^cil, —8, pi. — c, judgment, decree, verdict. Ur'tt;cilen, v.tr. ant/ino-., to judge, express an opinion about. 2)er Ur't^cilsfpnid;, — e8, pi. (5^riid;c, decision, decree. S)ic 93a' fe, —, pi. — n, vase. 2)er 9>a'tcr, — s, />/. 95a'ter, father. 2)a8 sBa'terlaub, fatherland, na- tive country. 33d'terlid;, at/;. , paternal. 2)ie 3>a'terftabt, native city. 2)ic 95crab'rcCung, — ,pl. — en, agree- ment, stipulation, contract. S?era'breidjeu, v. tr., to deliver, give, hand over. 2)ie iBerdu'Deriing, — , pi. — en, change „ 25crar'mung, — , impoverishing. 35erban'ncn, v. tr., to banish. X'xt 2$crban'nuncj, — , banishment. 33erbin'ben, unite ; bind wrongly. 95crbinb'Iid;, adj., obhgatory. 2)ic 3Serbiub'Iid?teit, — , pL —en, liability, obligation. S)ic 3>erbiu'bung,— ,;>/.— en, act of uniting; bie @'^ei}erbin= bung, marriage. 3Serbit'tcn, v. ir. tr., to decline. 9?erblei'd;en, r. intr., to turn pale; bc§ XobcS l^erblcid)en, to expire, die. 2)cr 9?crbre'd)cr, — «, pi — , criminal. SSerbiln'ben, v. tr., to unite, ally, con- federate. 2)er 95erbad;t', — §, suspicion. 93erbdd/ttg, adj., suspicious. S)a8 9?erbecf', — «, pi. — e, quarter- deck. SSerbcr'ben, v. ir. tr., to spoil, destroy. 9?crberb'lic^, adj., destructible. SScreb'ren, v. tr., to honor. 9?erei'nigen, v. tr., to unite. S)ie 5>erci'mgung, — , pi. —en, union SJerci'tcIn, v. tr., to frustrate, baffle. 2)cr 3SerfaIl', — 8, decline, decay, ruin. „ SSerfaf'fer, —8, pi. — , author, composer. [persecute. SSerforgen, v.tr., to pursue, prosecute, 35ergang'en, adj., past, gone. [tory. 9>ergdng'ltd;, at/;"., fleeting, transi- 3Scrge'ben8, adv., in vain. ^ergeb'lid;, adj., useless, futile. 55ergef'fen, v. ir. tr., to forget. 95erglci'd;en, v. ir. tr., to compare. 2)a8 SSergnii'gen, — 8, pi. — , pleasure SSergra'ben, v. ir. tr., to bury. 33ergri3'^crn, v. tr., to enlarge, [tion. 3)a0 SBer()dlt'nif3,— c8,;>/.— e, propor- 9>erbee'rcn, v. tr., to devastate. 93er^e^'len, v. tr., to hide, conceal. 2)er 95crfanf', —8, sale. 95evtau'tcn, v. tr., to sell. 2)er 35erfel)r, — 8, traffic, commerce. 2)er 9SerIag', —8, funds, publishing house. '^a^ Scrlag8'n?crf, publication. 2?crlang'en, v. tr., to desire, reerla[fcn, to rely (upon). 25erle'gcn, v. tr., to misplace. 2)ie SBerle'gcn^eit, — , embarrassment 2?crlet'^cn, v. ir. tr., to lend, bestow, 93erlie'ren, v. ir. tr., to lose, [confer. 2)er 3SerIu[t', — e8, pi. — c, loss, damage. Serlu'fttg, adj., deprived of, forfeited. SBermcb'ren, v. tr., to increase. 33crmei'ben, v. ir. tr., to avoid. 23ermietben, v. tr., to rent. 25ernut'telft,/>re/?., by means of. 25crm5'gen, to be able, have the power. 472 VOCABULARY. 2)a8 33crtnB'gen, — §, property. 35ermu't(;en, v. tr., to conjecture. 33evmut£)'lid;, adj., probable, that may be conjectured. 2)ic 35ernuuft, — , reason. „ ^erorb'nung, — , pl.—tn, decree. 35er^fltd)'tcn, v. tr. , to bind, pledge. 2)er SSerratf)', — e8, treason, perfidy. S5errat{;en, v. ir. tr., to betray. SSerrei'fen, v. intr., to go on a journey. 3Serrtd/ten, v. «r., to perform, conduct, dispatch. 33erfa'gen, to refuse, deny ; id) hm f(^on toerfagt, I am already engaged. SScrfat'sen, v. tr., to oversalt, spoil. S3erjam'meln, v. tr., to collect. 2)ie iBerjamm'Iung, — , pi. —en, assembly. S5erf(^ie'ben, v. ir. tr., to put off, delay ^tx\d)k"Otn, adj., different, various, 2)ie 3Serfd;ie't>en^eit, — , pi. — en, difference. [up. SSerfd;Iie't3en, v. ir. tr., to inclose, lock 35erj(^(n(f'en, v. tr., to swallow up, ab- sorb. 95er[c^rei'6en, to write out, prescribe. SSerfd)tt)in'bcn, v. ir. intr., to disappear SSer|e{/cn, to provide. SSerfi'd;ern, v. tr., to assure. 2)ie 5Bev[i'd;erung, — , pi. —en, assurance, insurance. SSerflnn'Itd^en, v. tr., to renderpercep- tible to the senses, illustrate. 5Berfi3f)'uen, v. tr., to reconcile. SSerf|)re'c^cn, to promise. [promise. S)a§ 25erj))re'c^en, — g, pi. —, SSerfte'^en, v. ir. tr., to understand. S)er iBerftanb', — eg, understanding SSerfto'^fen, v. tr., to close up, stop. SSerfu'd^en, v. tr., to attempt, tempt. 2)er 33erjuc^', —eg, pi. — e, at- tempt, [temptation. 2)te SSerfu'd^ung, — , pi. -en, SSert^et'btgcn, v. tr., to defend, ^ert^ei'len, v. tr., to distribute. 2)er35ertrag', —t9,pl. SSertrS'ge, trea- ty, stipulation, contract. ^ertra'geu, v. tr., to carry away, en- dure, put up with. S5ertrau'en, v. tr. and intr., to intrust, put trust in ; to open one's heart, unbosom one's self. [tial. 5?ertrau'Itd), adj., familiar, confiden- ^erii'ben, v. tr., to commit, perpetrate. ^^erur't^eilen, v. tr., to condemn. 2)er 35eri)ott'!ommener, — g, pi. — , purifier, perfector. 55ermanbt' (mtt), adj., related (to). 33ern)et'len, v. tr. , to pass away. 3)ag ^erjetc^'m^, —eg, pi. — e, cata- logue. 2)ag 3Sief), —eg,;?/. — e, cattle. 33tet, pron., much ; adv., much, very. 3Stetteid;t', adv., perhaps. $ier, four. 2)ag ^ter'tet, — g, pi—, quarter. 3)er 5.^0'get, — g, ;)/. iL^i3'gel, bird. S)ag 33ot!, —eg, pi. ^ol'fer, people. S)er 93or!erftamm, race. 2)ie i^iJl'fertranberung, migration 3>oU, adj. , full, [of nations. ^ollbnng'en,to accomplish, com- plete, perform, execute (see page 199). iPotlen'ben, to complete, finish. 2)ie 5>otlen'bung, — , completion. S?ottfii^'ren, to execute, perform. S)te.5BoCfill/nnTg, — , execution. S5i5r{tg, adj., full, complete. ^cUlom' mm, adj., complete. S)er ^oE'monb, — e§, full moon. SSoU'ftSnbig, adj., complete, per- SSottftrecf'en, to execute. [feet. SSoUjie'^en, to execute, carry into effect. SSon, prep., of, from, by, about. 33or, prep., before, from ; bor adit Xa* gen, a week ago. 3Sor'eiItg, adj., hasty, rash, precipitate ^Sor'ent^alten, to withhold. VOCABULARY. 473 S5cr Scr'fa^r, —m,pl.—tn, ancestor. 2)er :l>or'taU,— c«,;>/.5Bor'faUe, event, incident, occurrence. 3)cr !iu>r'cjanj5, — c8,precedence,event 2)er 33or'gan(jcr, — 9,pL — , pre- 2>ov\3eben, to feign, pretend. [decessor. 25or'gcftcrn, a^i'., day before yesterday 2?orber', at/y., previously. 33o'ri9, adj., previous. 3?or'fommcn, to occur. 2)ie $or'tejung, — , pi. —en, reading before an audience; 35or'Ie|ung fatten, to give an address. ?Sor'(e^t, adj., next to the last. 2)cr !iBor'niittag, — §, forenoon. Xtx 33or>often, —8, pi. —, outpost, advanced guards. 2)er 33or'fa^, — e«, purpose, design. 2)ie 3)or'[id;t, — , foresight, prudence. 55or'ft(!^tig, adj., prudent, cautious. 2)ic !i3or'fid;tigfeit, — , prudence. 5>or'fingcn, to sing to (one). ^oi'jpictcn, to play before (one). 2)ie ^Bor'ftabt; subiu-b. 2)er 3)or'tl)eil, — 9, pi. — c, advantage. 3>Dr't()eil^aft, ac(;'., advantageous. S5ortrcff'Iid;, adj., excellent. SSorii'ber, adv., near, past, by. 3?orU'berftiecjcn, to fly past. 9Sorii'berge(;en, to pass by. 2)cr 3>or'n)aub, — e8, pi. l^ov'wSnbc, 3Sor'tDart§, adv., forward. [pretext. 2)er 35or'n)i^, — e8, inconsiderate, cu- riosity, pertness, forwardness. SSor'lui^ig, adj., inquisitive, over- curious, forward. 3?orjiig'ltc^, adv., especially. 2)cr 35ulfan', — 8, pi. — e, volcano. 2)ic 2Baa'rc, — , pi. — n, wares. 2Bad/fam, adj., watchful. SSad/fen, v. ir. intr., to grow. SSacf'er, adj., brave, valiant. 2)ic SBaf'fe, — , pi. — n, weapon, arm. „ 2Ba'ge, — , pi. — n, scales, balance SSa'gen, v. tr., to venture, dare. ©eirogt', adj., rash. 2)er SSa'gen, — ^,pL — , wagon, cart, carriage. Xk 3Sab(, — , pi. — cn, choice, election 3Sa(/lcn, v. tr., to choose, elect. 2Ji5a(;r, adj., true, real. aSa^r'^aft, adj., true, genuine. 2Ba^r^af' tig, adj., true, positive. S)ie ^ai)x'idi, —, truth. SSa^r'ne^mcn, to perceive, [true. SSa^r'jc^einltd?, what seems to be SO?al)rfc^etn'(ic^, adj., probable. SSd^'rcn, V. intr., to last, endure. ^d\)'xtnt},prep., during, [forest. 2)cr SSalb, — e«, pi. SBciCbcr, woods, 2)ic SSanb, — , pi. SBan'Dc, walL 2)ie Sa5anb'u(}r, clock. SBan'bern, v. intr., to wander, travel. 2)ie SBan'berjabre (pL), years of travel (of joumeymen). 2)ic SBang'e, — , pi. —ix, cheek. SSann, arfy., when. SSan'telmilt^tg, adj., fickle, inconstant SBarm, adj., warm. 2)te ^cir'me, — , warmth. SBar'ten, v. intr., to wait. SSarum', adv., why. 2Sa9,pro7j., what. SSa'fc^en, v. ir. tr., to wash. 2)a8 SSaf fer, — ?, pi. —, water. 2)a§ SSaf'fergcflilgel, —8, water- fowls. 2)ie SBaf fcr^o^Ic, cavern filled with water. 2)ic SSaj'ferlcitung, — , pi. —en, aqueduct, water-works. !5)er 5Bancrt>ogcI, water-fowl. 2Becb feln, y. #r., to change. 2)er 2Scd)'fel, —8. /'/.—, change, bill of exchange. 2)cr 3Bed;'f el brief, bill of exchange 474 VOCABULARY. 2)cr i85cg, — e§, pi. — c, way, road. SBe'gen, prep.^ on account of. 3Beg, ac/y., away, gone, off. SSeg'gct)en, to go away. 2Beg'nel;men, to take away. SSe^ I interj., woe! 2Be^ and tt)e'^e, ao^'. awe/ ac?y, , causing pain ; totl) t^un, to hurt ; mtr tf)Ut t>er 3/. — en, a while. 3)er SBein, — e8, pi. — c, wine. SBei'fe, ac^'., wise. 5)te SSei'fe, — e, ji?/. — n, way, manner. 2SeiJ5, adj., white. SSeit, acf/., far, distant. S)er SBei'sen, — g, wheat. 2)er SSei'jenader, wheat-field. SSet'd^er, pron., which, what. 3)ie ^cl'Ie, — ,;;/. — n, wave, billow. S)ie SBett, — , ;?/. —en, world. ®ag SBelt'aE, — §, universe. ®tC 3SeIt'gcfd;td)te, universal his- tory, history of the world. SBctt'Iid), adj., mundane, worldly 2Ben'&en, v. ir. tr. and intr., to turn. SKc'llioi, pron. and adv., little. 2Be'ingften§, adv., at least. SKenn, adv., when ; conj., if. ^er?/>ron., who ? SBer'ben, to become. SSer'fen, v. ir. tr., to throw, hurl. 3)a8 SBerf, — e§, f>Z. — e, work. 3Bert(), ao?;'., worth. 3)er SBertb, — e8, worth. SEcrt^'iJoII, rtc?/'., valuable. West. S)er SSefl, — c 2)er2Sc'[ten,—g J ''"*""'• [west 2Bc[t'Uc^, adj., western, to th« 2)te SBe'fte, — , pi. — n, vest. SBett'eifern, v. intr., to vie (with). 2)ag defter, — g, weather. Sffiic^'ttg, adj., weighty, important. 23i'ber,j3re/>., against, in opposition co, contrary to. SKiberru'fen, to recall, revoke. S)te Mberfel^'ung, —, resistance', opposition, insubordination, SStberf^re'^en, to contradict. SBib'men, v. tr., to devote, dedicate, ^tb'rig, adj., against, opposed to, of- fensive. 2BtC, adv., how ; conj., as, like, than. 2Bie'ber,at/y., again. SKie'berbringen, to restore. SSieberber'fteEeu, to restore. SBieberbo'Ien, to repeat. SBte'berfomrnen, to return. SBie'berf eben , to see or meet again ; auf 2Bte'berjcben(/'V., au re- voir), good-by, till we meet again. SBte'gcn, v. ir. tr. and intr., to weigh. Sluf triegen, to outweigh. 3)te SBie'je, — , pi. — n, meadow. 2Bttb,arfj.,wild. S)a§ SSilb, — e§, wild beasts, game, deer, venison. S)a§ SBilb'pret, — §, venison, deer S)er SBil'Ie, — X[^,pl. — n,wi]l, design; SBirieng feiit, to have a mind, to purpose, design. SBiHtotn'men, adj. , welcome. 2)er 2Btnb, — e§, pi. —t, wind. SBtn'tcr, — §, pi. —, winter. SStr, j^ron., we. SKtr'ten, v. tr., to have an influence, produce an effect. 2Bir!' lid), adj., actual, real, true. S)tc SKir'fung, — , pi. —en, the operation, force, effect. yOCABULART. 475 3)er SSirt^, — C8, pL —t, landlord, host, inn-keeper. S)ie ili5irtbjd;aft, — ,pl. — en,econ- omy, husbandry, 2Birt^'fd)attlid;, adj., economical, agricultural, [knowledge of. 2Bif fen, v. ir. tr., to know, have a 2)ic SSiffenfc^aft, — , ;>/. — eii, science, knowledge, learning 2!Si)"fenfd;aftIid;, adj., scientific. 2)ie iCit'tcruiicj, — , weather, tempera- ture. 2)cr ©ife, — e§, wit, wittiness, sense. 23o, af/y., where {see § 1 88, 1 ^,Rein.2). iSobei', adv., whereby (see § 188). 2)ie SBo'd^e, — , pi. —i\, week. 23i)'c^ciitlid^, adj., weekly. SSoburd;', adv., whereby (§ 188). 23o()cr' or iT>o...(;er', adv., whence. SScbiu' or tDC.bin', whither. SiBobl, adv., well, indeed, certainly. illio(;rbebaIten, adj., safe, in good condition or preservation. SEJo^rgefallen, v. intr., to please. 3)cr SfiJobrftanb, prosperity. 25o(;'ncu, V. intr., to reside. S)cr SS^obn'fi^, — c8, pl.—t, dom- icile, abode, residence. I SBc^n'^aft, adj., resident. I 2)ic ii^ob'iiung, — ,pl. — en, resl- I dence. 1 2)cr SBoIf, — c«, pL SBSCfe, wolf. 2)ic 2Bor!c, — , pl.—tix, cloud. ; „ SBol'le, — t,pl. — 11, wool. iiiJoricn, at/;'., woolen. K?ol'Icu, V. ir., to be willing, desire. 2)a« 'K^Qxi, — e«, pi. 21*cr'tcr and ^^or'tc, word, Uilk, promise. S)aS SiJr'tcrlnid;, dictionary. 2)ic Sort'folgc, order of words. 2)a8 SBort'Icin, — «, j9/. — , par- ticle, small word. S3?ofc(bft', aon', adv., whereof, from which, 25aS SBun'bcr, — «, ;>/. — , wonder, ©uu'bcrbar, adj., wonderful, 2Buu'bcrfd)i3n, adj., extremely beautiful. S)er SBimjd), — c«,;>/. S5>an'jdjc, wish. SBiin'fc^cn, v. tr., to wish. 2)cr SBurf, — c8, ;>/. a^ur'fc, throw. 2)cr Surf [peer, pi. — c8, — e, javelin. 2)cr SBurm, —t^,pl. Sttr'mcr, worm. S)ic S5?ur'5d, — , pi — n, root. SSiifl, ac(;., desert. 3* 3^'iicn, r. trj/r., to tremble, faint. 2)ie B^^>^' — t P^- — ^"r number. 3vii)'Ien, V. fr.,to number, count. 3abrrcid), at/;,, numerous. !J)ag 3^^^'^*^^*' numeral. 3ab'(cu, V. tr., to pay. '^a\)V^CiX, adj., payable. 3^ibni, adj., tame. 3ab'men, v. tr., to tame. Tcr 3abn, — e«, ;j/. 3^^'"^ tooth. !2)ic 3abn'bilrfte, tooth-brush, 3art, at/;,, tender, delicate. Ser 3aum, — eS, />/. 3du'me, bridle. „ 3aun, — c8, />/. 3^"'"^' hedge, 2)ic 3«^'^K/ — » P^' — ^"f t^- [fence. 3cbn, ten. '3)a§ 3<^i'^?^"/ — ^» P^' — f ^^K^i mark. 3cid)'ncn, r. /r., to mark, draw, design !J)aS 3cit^'ncu, — «, art of drawing 2)cr 3ei^'ner, — %, draughtsman. 2)ic 3eid?'nung, — , pi. —en, drawing. 3ci'flCn, V. tr., to show, point out. 3ci'^cn, v.tr., to accuse of, charge with 2)tc 3fi'^<^f — f P^- ~"' ^'"^• „ 3*^^^ — t P^' — <^"f iimei. [century. 2)a8 3cit'altcr, — «, ju/. — , age, 3ci'tifl, adj., timely, early. 2)ie3cit'lanvl, period of time; filt cine B^^tiang, for a time. 476 vocabulary; S)ie 3ttt'rec^nung, — , reckoning of time, chronology. 2)ie ^eit'ic^rift, — , pi. —en, pe- riodical publication, journal, 2)ie 3^i'tuug, — , pi. — en, news- S)a8 3^^^'^"^^*/ ^^^^' [paper. 3)a§ 3elt, —eg, pi —z, tent. 3crbre'c^en, to break in pieces. 3erbrec^'Iid), ad)'., fragile, [ruin. 3erf alien, to fall to pieces, decay, go to SDer 3erfall', —eg, ruin, decay. 3errei'ben, v. ir. ciV, adv. , indeed, it is true, [purpose. 2)er 3^e^f — ^^1 P^- — ^f aim, design, 3tt)ecf'ma^ig, adj., practical. 3tt)et, two. 3foei'beutig, ac?/. , ambiguous. 2)ie 3it>ei'beuttgfett, ambiguity. 3)er 3^ei'fet, — g, pi. — , doubt. 3tt>ei'fel^aft,a(^'., doubtful. 2)er 3^e^9f — eg,/»/. — e, branch, twig 3tt)tn'gen, v. ir. tr., to force, oblige. 3tt>ifd?en, ^r^/>., between. 2)ag 3^t'ft^sit^etf , steerage. 3ii?oIf, twelve. Rem. For a few additional words, see the addenda at the end. VII. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY. A, an, eln, ci'ucr, rin. Able, fa'bti] (see § 1G8 ; L. XXXI). Aborigines,;;/., bie Uv'eimDot;ner. About, prep, (around), iim (concern- ing), ii'ber; about it, barii'bcr; adv., berum', ungefci^r'. Above, ac/y., o'beil ; prep., tt'bcr. Absent, ab'iDefenb. [nung, — . Accent, ber ^2lccent', — S ; bic ^eto'* Accept, au' ncl;mcn. Accompany, beglei'tcn, mit'ge^cn. Accomplice, ber 3)fit'fd;ulbigc. According to, prep., gemciji', juforgc. Account, bie ^Red^'uung ; on account of, prep., tre'geu (§ 107, Rem. 2). Accusative (Case), ber 2lf htfati^', — S. Accuse, au'tlagcn, befrf)urbigen. Accustom (one's self to), fic^ gctDob'* ncii (an). Acid, adj., faiier; noxm, bic ©au'rc. Acknowledge, an'ertcnnen. Acquaintance, bie S3efannt'jd^aft. Acquit, frei'fprcc^en. Act, ^au'beln, fic^ bene()'mcn. Action, bic ^anb'lung. Active, t^d'ttg, leb'^aft. Actual, tiMrf'tic^. Adapt, fid; fd;i(f'en. Admit, ju'gcben, ein'raiimen. Advertisement, bie 5ln';^cige. Affair, bie ^a.'&it, bie ^n'gelegen^eit. After, /jrep., nac^ ; adv., nad^^cr, fpS* ter ; conj., nad^'bem. Afternoon, ber S^ad^'mittag. Afterward, nac^'ber, f^a'ter. Again, ti?ie'ber, nocb'mals. [ge'gen. Against, ge'gen, VDi'bcr ; against it, ba* Age, bag %ViiX. Agreeable, an'gene^m. Aim, bie $Ri(^'tung, baS 3^^^^ > ^- *"'^m Air, bie ^utt. Qie'leiu Album, ba9 5tt'bum, — , pi. —8. Algebra, bie ^itl'gebra. All, al'Ier. Allow, erlau'ben. Ally, ber 33un'beggeno§, Almost, fa[t, bei'nal)e. Along, ;?reij., tang«, entlang'. Alphabet, ba8 ^crian'gen. Assembly, bie 3>erfanim'Iuug. Assert, hd}aup'im. Astonishing, erftaun'Itc^, erftau'nenb. Astronomy, bie Slftronomte'. At, an, ju, in ; at all, adv., gar. Attentive, auf'merfjam. August, ber Stuguft'. Aunt, bie Xawti, Austria, De'fteiTeirf). Author, l-icr il)erfaf' fer. Authority, bie S3e^6r'bc, —,pl. -~en. Autumn, ber §erbft. Avoid, umge'^eiu Aware, gett)a^r'. Away, adv., tteg, fort. B. Bad, jc^tec^t. Bake, barf' en. Baker, ber 33acf'er. Ball, ber 53aE. Band, bag ^anb. Banish, Derban'nen. Bank, ba§ U'fer ; bie S3anf. Baron, ber S3aron, ber grei'^err. Barrel, bag %a^. Basket, ber ^orb. Basket-maker, ber ^orb'mod^er. Bath, bag 33ab, —eg, pi. S3a'ber. Battle, bie ©c^Iac^t. Bavaria, Sat'eru (see page 417). Bavarian, bat'rif^. Be, fein. Bear, ber 53Sr. Beat, fd;(a'gen. Beauty, bie @d;i5n'^eit. Beautiful, fd)i)n. Because, tt»eit. Become, tt?er'bcn. Bed, bag 58ett, bag Sag'er. Before, prep., toor ; conj., e'^C. Begin, an'fangen, begtn'nen. Beginning, ber ?ln'fang. Behind, ;;rep.,- ^tn'ter ; adv., bin'ten. Believe, glau'ben. [un'ten. Below, ;?rg/7., un'ter,un'ter^alb ; adv., Berry, bie S3ee're. Beside, ne'ben. Besides, au'^er. Best (see § 92). Betake one's self, fic!^ bcgc'ben, ge'^cn. Better (see § 92). Between, ^toi'fc^en. Qen'jettg. Beyond, prep., jen'fett, ii'ber ; adv., Bill of exchange, ber 2Sed/feI. Bind, btn'ben. Binding, ber (Stn'banb, —eg. Bird, ber ^So'gel. Bishop, ber 5Bi'fd;of. Bite, bei'^en. Black, fd^marg. Blame, ta'beln. Blessed, fe'Itg. Blue, blan. Boat, bag S3oot. Bonnet, ber ^ut, ber S)a'menl^ut. Book, bag 53ud). Bookbinder, ber 33uc^'binber. Bookseller, ber S3uc^'^anbler. Bookstore, bie S3uc^'^anblung. Boot, ber ©tie'fel. Born, gebo'ren. Borrow, bor'gen. Boy, ber ^na'be. Braide, fled/ten (v.ir.). Brave, ta^'fer. Bread, bag 53rob. Breadth, bie ^rei'tc. [jerbre'c^em Break, bre'd;en ; to break in pieces, Breakfast, bag ^X^'\tM ; v. intr.f friib'Pden. Bridge, bie 33riicf'e. Brilliant, glan'jenb. [mtt'Brtngen. Bring, brtng'en; to bring with one, Broad, brctt. VOCABULARY. 479 Brother, ber 33ru'ber ; brother-in-law, ber Bd)\va'Qtx ; brothers or breth- ren, bie ©cbril'ber. Brown, braiin. Build, baii'en. Building, ba^ ®cbau'be. Bureau, bie ^ommo'bc. [ncn. Burn, brcu'uen ; bui-a down, ab'breii* Business, baS Ocfd^a^t' ; it is none of his business, e8 gc^t i^n gar nid;t an. But, adv., tiur ; conj., a'bcr, alteiu', after a negative, fon'bcril. Butter, bie 33ut'ter. Buy, tau'fcn. By, i)on, burc^, bei. C. Cabinet-maker, ber Xi\d}'kx. Cake, ber 6iu'ci;eii. Call, ru'fcu ; (to name), ueu'uen. Can, fiJu'lien. Candle, \>aQ ^ic^t. Cane, ber @tocf. Cannon, bie ^auo'ue. Cap, bie aWiife'e. Capital (city), bie ^au^t'ftabt. Captain, ber §aiipt'niann, ^apitSn'. Carpenter, ber ^ini'mermann. Carriage, ber -ii^a'gcii, Die (gqui^a'ge. Castle, bag 2c^(o^. Catch, fau'gcii, faf'fen, ergrei'fcn. Cathedral, ber 2)om, bie 2)om'tir^e. Cattle, bag 35ief). ('ause, bie Ur'fac^e, ber ©rutib. Celebrated, berutjmt'. Central Germany, aJJit'telbcutfd^Ianb. Certain (ly), genjig. Chair, ber <3tU^I. Charm, rei'jen ; charming, rei'^cnb. Cheap, biriig,TOo^rfcit. Child, baS ^inb. Chemistry, bie S^emte'. Church, bie ^ir'c^c. ( ircumstance, ber Um'f^aitb ; to adapt one's self to circumstances, fic^ in bie Um'ftanbe fc^id'en. City, bie ®tabt. City Hall, bas 9?at(/^an«. [ben. City authorities, />/., bic Otabt'be^Sr* Clean, vein. Clerk, ber .^ommi«'. Qock, bic U^r, 3Banb'u&r. Close by, ne'ben. ( loth, ba^ 3:ud;, ^tUQ, Cloud, bie ^liJolte. Coarse, grob. Coat, ber 9io(f. Coffee, v^af'fee. Cold, fait. Collar, ber ^ra'gcn. Collection, bie ®amm'lung. Colonel, ber O'berft. Colony, bie ^otonie'. Color, bie i^J^ be. Column, bie ©pal'te. Come, torn' men ; come down, ^erun'* terfommen ; come here, ^ierber's Commence, an'fangcn. [fom'men. Commencement, ber Sln'fang. Command, ber SSefet)!' ; v., befcb'Ien. Common, gcmein' ; common schools, bie 5BoIt«'td;uIen. [oollcu'ben. Complete, biJl'Iig, t^ottfom'men ; v.tr.. Comprehend, bcgret'fcn. Concern, an'gc^en. Concert, ba6 ^on^ert'. Conclude, befd^lie'^en^fid^ cntfd^Uc'gcn, fic^ entfc^ei'ben. Conduct, V. tr., fii^'ren, lei'ten. Confederation, ber Snnb. Congress, ber ^ongre{3', — e6. [—en. Conspiracy, bie Smpij'rnng, — , pL Consumption, bie ©c^winb'jud^t, — . Contam, entbal'ten. [ten. Contemptible, ttcrcic^t'Iid^, ju toerad;'« Contents, ber 3n'(jalt. Convenient, bequcm'. 480 VOCABULARY. Cook, ber ^oc^, btc ^o'c^tn. Copy, bie (So^te'; v. tr., ab'fdjretben. Corner, bie Scf'e ; corner-stone, ber ©runb'ftein. [ren. Correspond, cntf^re'c^ett, !orref))oubi':^ Correspondence, bic ^orref|)onben3'. Cost, ber ^^rei^, bie to'fteu (;>/.) ; v. intr., fo'ften ; costly, f oft' bar. Country, bag Sanb. Courage, ber 3}Jut^, bie 2;a>ter!eit. Cousin, ber 33et'ter, bie (Soufi'ne. Cover, bebecf'en. Cow, bie ^u^. Criminal, ber 58erbrc'(^er, Crooked, !rumm. Crown, Die Sro'ne; ber ^ran^. Cry, wei'nen, jc^rei'en, ru'teru Crusade, ber ^reuj'jug. Cultivate, bebau'en. Cultivated, adj., gebtl'bet. Culture, bie ^il'bung. Cup, bie £af fe. Custom, btc @it'te, — , pi. — ru Cut, fi^nei'ben. Danger, bic ©efa^r'. Dare, loa'gen, biir'teix. Dark, bun'Jel, fin'[ter. Daughter, bie Xoc^'ter ; daughter-in- law, bie (Sc^tcie'gertod;ter. Day, ber XaQ ; to day, ^eu'te ; of to- day, to-day's, adj., ^eu'ttg ; day- before-yesterday, ijor'geftem. Dead, tobt. Deaf, taub. Dear, t^eu'er, tieB. Death, ber Sob, — e8. Debt, bie @(^utb. Decay, ber SBerfatl'. Deceive, tril'gen, betril'gen. Deep, tief. Defendant, ber 93e!Iag'te. Describe, befc^rei'ben. Description, bie SSefc^ret'buitg. Design, ber ^latt, (Sntttjurf; v. tr., entttjer'fen. Desire, toitn'fc^en. Develop, enttDttf'cttt. Dictionary, bag 2Bi3r'terBud^, Sc'jftcon. Die, fter'ben. Difficult, fc^ttjcr, fd^tDte'rtg. Dig, gra'ben. Diligent, ftet'^ig, etit'ftg. Dine, ju 9Jiit'tog ef'fen, f^et'fen. Dinner, bag 9J?it'tage[fen, bag (Sf fen. Direct, bireft', gera'bc. Directly, gera'be ; glet(i^. Direction, bie Sitc^'tung. Director, ber 2)iref'tor. Disagreeable, un'angene^m. Discontented, un'sufrieben. Discount, ber 9iabatt', —eg. Discover, entbed'en. Discovery, bie ^ntbccE'ung. Discretion, bie 35orfic^ttg!eit ; at dis- cretion, auf (Sna'be unb lln'^ Dish, bie ©d^itffct. [gnabe. Dishonesty, bie Un'e^rltc^feit. Disorder, bie Un'orbnung. Dispatch, bie Se^e'fc^c. Disproportion, bag 9JJtg'ber{)aftm^. Disquietude, bic lln'ru{)e,3lengft'lic^fett Dissimilar, un'a^ntid), un'gtet^. Distance, btc ©ntfcr'nuitg. Ditch, ber ©ra'bcn. Do, t^un, tna'djen. Doctor, ber 2)of'tor, ber %xiX. Dog, ber §unb. Dollar, ber ©otTar, ber 2:^a'Ier. Door, bie X^Wxt, bag St^or. Doubt, ber 3n)ci'fel ; v. tr., bcstDci'fcItt Dozen, bag ©itt'jcnb. Down, nte'ber, t)crab'. Draw, jic'^en ; geirf)'neit. [!iitijl. Drawing, btC 3std>'nuttg, btc '^Qx'&itM* Dress, bag ^Icib, bie ^lei'bung, ber 2ln'* gug. VOCABULARY. 481 Dress coat, bcr %xad, Scib'rod. Drink, trill' len. Drive, trei'ben. Dry, trod 'en ; v. tr. , trocf'ncn, Dutch (see page 417). During, toal^'rcnb. £. Each, jc'ber ; each other, etnanber. Earn, »erbie'nen, eriDer'l^en. Earth, bic @r'be. [aegen O'ftcn. East, cer Oft, O'ftcn; toward the east. Eastern, ton O'ftCn, oft'lid?. Easy, (eid^t. [frcj'fcn). Eat, cfjen (to devour like animals, p:dition, *;Jlu3'c}abe, ^^uf lagc. Editor, ber i)tcbatteur', —8, pi. — e. Iciiding editorial, bet ^eit'arttfel, Egg, ba«$ @i. [— ^fi?^- — • Egypt (see page 417). Either, conj.^ eiltwe'bcr. Elect, ica^'len, eriva'^len. Electric, elef'trijc^. Ell, bie enc. Embrace, umar'mcn ; to embrace an opportunity, ctne ©ele'ijcnbcit be* Emperor, ber ^ai'fer. [nii'feen. Empire, baS ^ai'fcrt^um. Empty, leer. End, bag eii'bc. End, V. tr., en'bigen, bccn'bigcn. Endow, griln'ben, ftiftcn, boti'ren. Endure, bau'em. Enemy, ber geinb. Energetic, fraft'toKI. Engage (order), beftel'Ien. English (see page 4 1 7). [— e. Engraving, bcr ^u^jferftid^, — e8, pi. Enough, genug'. Entire, ganj, tooUftcinbig. Entirely, ganj (unb gar), boriig. Entrance, ber ©m'gang. [men. Escape, bermei'ben, entge'^en, enttom'* Especial, ijor^^iig'Iid^, ^au^t'fad^lic^. Especially, befon'berS, torjiig'lid;. Even, adj., e'bcn, gleid; ; adv., auc^, fclbft, gleid/fatls. Evening, ber ^'beub. Ever, je, je'nial?. Every, je'ber, al'Ier. Exchange (bill of), ber 33?ed^'fel. Execute, auS'fii^ren. [roeg'ung. Exercise, bie ^iluf'gabe, Ue'buug, ^e* Exhibit, auS'fteUen. Exhibition, bie 5lug'jteUung. Exit, ber ^uS'gang, — e8. Expense, bie 2(u§'gabeii, bie ^o'ften, (;>/.), bie Un'f often. Express train, ber (gc^ncH'gng. Extraordinaiy, auOeror'bentlid^. Face, bag ®efid^t'. Faith, ber ©lau'be. Faithful, treu, gctreu'. Fall, fal'Ien ; to fall to pieces, tnStilcfc fatten, in 2?erfatt' gera't^en, ju ©run'be ge'fjen. False, falf(^ ; falsehood, bie galfd^'^cit. Family, bie ganii'tie. Famous, berii^mt'. Fare, bag ga^r'gelb. Farewell, lebcn ®ie ttJO^I I Fashion^ bie 3JJo'be. Fast, fd^nett. [<2(!^»ie'gcrt}atet Father, ber 3?a'ter ; father-in-law, Fault, bcr ge^'Ier. Favor, bic ©unft ; in favor of it, bafiir'. Fear, bie gurdjt ; v. tr., fUrd^'ten. February, ber ^e'bruar. Feel, fil()'len. Fever, bag gic'bcr. Few, n?e'nige ipL). Field, bag gclb. Fight, fec^'ten, tam'^fcn. Find, fin' ben. 482 VOCABULARY. Fine, fcin, fd^iJn. Finger, ber gtng'cr. Finish, tooEeil'beit. Fire, baS geu'cr. First, er'fte. Fish, gtf(^. Fisherman, ber ?5^'f(^er. Fit, ^af fen, fte'^en. Five, fiiut. Flag, bie ga^'ne, gtag'gc Flatter, fd^mei'cl;eln. Flee, flie'^en. Fleeting, ftild/ttg, fd;nett. Floor, bev iBo'ben, gu^'boben. Flour, bag 3JJe^I. Flow, flte'^en. Flower, bie 33Iu'me. Fly, ftie'gen. Follow, fol'gen, nac^'folgcn. Foot, ber gu§. [meil, benn, ba. For, prep. , fiir, au'ftatt, aiif ; conj. , Force, bie Sraft, 9JJad;t, ©etoalt'; v. tr., jtDing'en, nS't^igen. Foreign, fremb, auS'Ianbifd^. Forest, ber 2Batb, gorft. Forget, Dergef'fen. Forgive, t>erge'ben. Form, bie gorm. Former, ijo'rig, i)oran'ge^enb. Formerly, frii'ber, e'^emalS, fonjl. Fortification, bie ge'ftung. Found, griin'ben, [tif ten. Four, toier. Free, fret. Freight, bie Sa'bung, bie ©i^'ter (pi.) \ freight-train, ber ©ii'teyjug. French (see page 417). Frequently, oft, ofterS. Friend, bcr greunb ; friendly, frcunb'a lic^. Friday, ber ^ret'tag. From, toon, au§. Fruit, ba§ Obft, bie grudjt Full, i)oIt. Furnish, mobli'ren. G. Gain, getutn'nen. Gallery, bie ©aEerie', — , pi. — n. Garden, ber ©ar'ten. Gardener, ber ©art'nft. Garland, ber ^ranj. Gas, bag @a8. Gather, fam'metn. General, ber ©eneral'. Germany (see page 417). Get, V. tr., \)o'itn, fi^ terfc^affen ; v. intr., n?er'ben, !om'men. Gift, bie @a'be, ba6 ©efc^enf. Girl, bag SJZab'd^en. Give, ge'ben, fc^en'fen. Glad, fro^, freu'big, erfreufr, gladly, gem, mit SSergnil'gen. Glass, bag ©tag. Glove, ber §anb'f^u'^. Go, ge'ben ; to go out, aug'gc^en ; to go away, toeg'ge^en. God, ber ©ott. Gold, bag ©olb. Good, gut ; good-by, k'ben ®te teo^t/ Goodness, bie ©ii'te. Gout, bie ©ic^t, bag ^o'bagra. Govern, regte'reu. Government, bie 9tegic'rung. Grain, bag ^orn. Grammar, bie ©ratnma'ti!. Grammatical, grammattfa'Iifc^. Grand, gro^, erba'ben. Granddaughter, bie (Sn'telin. Grandfather, ber ©ro^'iJater. Grandmother, bie ©ro^'mutter. Grandson, ber @n'fel. Grasp, gret'fen, faf'fen. Grass, bag ©rag. Gray, grau. Great, grog. Great-grandfather, ber Ur'gro|ti;t«f VOCABULARY. 483 Great-grandmother, bie Ur'gro^mut* G reece (see page 4 1 b). [tcr. Greeu, grilu. Groschen, bcr ©ro'fc^en. Grow, wad; fen. let'ten. Guide, bcr p^'rcr ; v. tr., ful? rcu, H. Habit, bie ©cwcbn'^cit. [gctn. Hail, ber ^a ijcl ; v. intr., to hail, ^a* Hair, ba§ ^aar. Half, bie ^dlf te ; adj., \)aih, Hull, ter ^aai, ber s^orjaal. Hammer, ber jammer. Hand, Die §anb. Hang, V. intr., {/aiXQin ; v. /.). Income, bag (gin'tommcn, bic Sin* Increase, toac^'fert, ju'ttc^mcn. Indeed, tt»obI, frci'flc^, jtuar. Indijl-rubber over-shoes, bic ©um'tni* \d)ui)t (pi). Indian, ber 3nbia'ncr. Indolent, fau(, Ivif fii], tra'gc. Industrial, inbnftricU'. Industrious, flei'fjig, betrieb'fam. Injure, fd;a'bcn ; to injure one's sel^ fic^ felbft fd;a'bcn. Injurious, fd;ab'Ii(^. Inside of, tn'nerbalb. Instead of, an'ftiitt. Instructive, le^r'rei(^. 484 VOCABULARY. Intention, bie Stb'fid^t. [(p^-)' Interest, ba§ ^nteref'fc, btc Bin'f^n Interesting, tuteveffaut'. Into, in. Invent, erfttt'ben Invite, ein'laben. Iron, ba§ Si' fen. invention, btc @r« [fin' bung. J. January, ber ^a'nuar (a^e page 434). John, ^o^aun' (see page 416). Journal, bie 3cit'fcl;vift. Journey, bie 9tei'fe. Joy, bie greu'be. Keep, be^at'ten, ^at'ten. Key, bev i^d^liiffel. Kill, ti3b'ten. Kind, bie 2lvt, bie ©at'tung. Kind, adj., freunb'Iic^, gii'ttg. King, ber ^i)'nig. Kiss, ber ^uB, — e§, pi. ^ilf'fe. July, ber 3u'Ii (see page 43^). June, ber ^u'ni (see page4a^). Just, adj., gered;t', bil lig. Just (exactly), adv., gera'be; now), e'beu, foe'ben. (just K. Kiss, V. if'fen; (to be acquainted with), fennen. Known (to become), befannt' trer'beu. Labor, bie ^r'beit; v. intr.., ar'beiten. Lady, bie ii^a'b^, bie 2)a'me. Lame, la^m. Lamp, bie 2am'))e. Land, ba^ Sanb. Language, bie @^ra'd^e. Large, grojj. Last, ber le^'te, ber too'rige; adv., ju* le^t', 5um le^ten Tla'U. Last, v.intr., bau'ern. Late, fpat, ^erfpa'tet; adv., fpat; lately, neu'lid^, un'Idnc^ft, tor Latest, ber te^'te. [tnr'sem. Latin, latei'nifd;. Law, bag ®efe^'. Lay, le'gen ; lay hold of, ergrei'fen. Lazy, fani, trci'ge, laf'fig. Lead, bag 33Iet. Lead-pencil, ber 58Iet'[tift. Lead, v. tr., fit^ren, lei'ten. Leader, ber gilfj'rer. Leap, f^ring'en. Learn, ler'nen. Least, ber ^lein'fte; adv., am 2Be'nig^ [ten ; at least, tt)e'nig[ten§ ; not in the least, nid;t im ©ering'ften. Leather, bag Se'ber; leathern, atZ;"., le'bern. Leave, laf fen, bertaf'fen ; when do you leave? n)annrei'fen @ieab? when does the train leave? tcann gci;t ber 3ug ab? [linfg. Left (hand), bie Sin'te ; to the left, Lend, lei'^en, tjerlei'^en. Length, bie l^cing'e. Less, n^e'niger, gering'er, !tetn. Lesson, bie Seftton', bie 2luf'gabe. Let, laf'fciT, erian'ben. [ber 33ud/[tabc. Letter, ber Sricf ; (of the alphabet), Liberty, bie grei'(;eit. Library, bie ^ibliot^e!'. Librarian, ber iBibliotbefar'. Lie, He'gen ; (to tell a falsehood), tii'ger Life, bag Se'ben. Light, bag Sid)t ; adj., Ii(^t, ^cK, Ieid;t lightly, Ieid;t. VOCABULARY. .485 Lighten, blit'scn. Lightning, ber 611^, — c8. Like, adj., Qlddf, dl^n'Uc^. Like, V. tr., cjem l^a ben; how do you like the book? XDU gejdUl' 31; ncn Line, tut'tern. [ba8 ^ud; ? Lining, ba« (^"t'tcr. Literature, bie Siteratur'. Literary, Itterarifd;. Little, flein, geriiivj'; a little, ein tue'nig. Live, le'beu ; (to reside), iDot/ucu. Live, lively, adj., leben'big, lcb'(>aft. Livelihood, ber Uu'ter^alt. Load, btc ?afl, bie 2a'bung. Loan, btc ?ln'Icil;e — , pi. — u. Loan, V. tr., lei'jjcn. Lock, baS iSd^lc^. Lock, V. tr., jd;lie'^cn. Long, laiti} ; a long time, (ang'e. Look, jd^au en, bli (fcii ; it looks well, C3 fic^t gut auig ; look out! net/* men Z'xt fid; in ^2ld)t I look fur (seek), ju'd;cu ; (expect), eni>av * Lose, t>erlic'rcn, tcrlc geii. [ten. Love, bie IHe'bc; v. tr.^ lie'bcn. Low, uie'Dtiij. M. Machine, btC 9D^a|d;i'ne. Majesty, bie aJ2aj[eftdt'. Make, ma'^en. [bcr SJJenfd;. Man, ber 2)iaun ; (the human beuig), Manner, bic %xi, bie ilBei'fc. Manuscript, bie §anb'fd;rift. Many, t>ie le, man'd;e (;>/.); many a, tnand^er; a good many, fc^r tielc. March, ber iZdrj (see p. 434). March, ber a)Zarfd;, ber 3»9/ y- »"^^-» marfd;i'ren, jie'^en. Mark, ba« iKcvf'mat ; (aim), baS ^\d ; V. tr., beseid^'ucn. Market, ber 2)hrtt. Marriage, bic (S'^c, bcr (S'^eftanb ; (wedding), bic §ci'rat(;, ^oc^'jcit. Marry, v. tr., ^ei'rat^cn ; to get mar- ried, fic^ f crt)ci'ratbc. Matter, bie llJiatc'ric, ber Ur'floff ; what is the matter? Xoa% fc^lt? h?a« May, ber 2)iai (see p. 434). [giebt'S? Me, mic^. [mei'nen, ben'tcn. Mean, ac(;., gcmcin', nieb'rig ; v. tr., Meaning (of a word), bic 33ebeu'tung. Means, baS 3JJit'tcI. Measure, bag SD'Zag ; v. tr., mcf fen. JMeat, ba« gleifc^. Meet, begeg'nen, tref'fcn. Meeting, bic B"!'^"^ ntentiinft, bie ^crfamm'Iung. Melt, fd^md'sen. Mend, repari rcn, auS'bcffcrn. Merchant, ber ^auf maun. Metal, bag 2)ietall', — c^, pi. — c. Middle, bie 9}?it'tc; adj., mit'td. Middle Ages, baS 2Hit'tda(ter. Mild, milt), jviuft. Mile, bie mdlt. Milk, bie W\\&). Mill, bic 9«ut;'Ic. [ge. Mine, md'ner, ber 9}id'ne,bcr SD^d'ni" Mirror, bcr (S:|3ie'geL Misfortune, baS Un'gtilcf. Misplace, \}crlc'gen, toerfc'^cn. Miss, bag g'^^i^^fin. Mistake, bcr ^e^Icr, bcr 3rr'tbum; y.,fct)'kn; to be mistaken or to make a mistake, fic^ ir'reil. Model, bag aJiobett'. Modem, mobcrn', ncu. Moment, ber ^u'gcnblirf ; momentary, au'gcnblidlid^. Money, bag @db. Month, bcr 2J2o'nat. Moon, bcr 2)?onb. More, mebr. Morning, bcr SD^or'gcn. Most, tncift ; mostly, mci'flcng. Mother, bic SDhit'tcr ; mother-in-law, bic aft. Neighborhood, bie 9^a'be,bte 9^ac^'bar* Nephew, ber ^ief'fe. Never, nie, nte'malg, ntm'mer. New, neu, mobern'. News, bie 9^ad/rid;t ; (particular news), bie 9^ac^'ri(^ten ipL), Newspaper, bic 3et'tung, 3^tt'id;rift. Next, nac^ft ; next to the last, bor'* lefete. Niece, bie 9^id)'tc, Night, bie 9^ad^t. Nine, neuu. No, pron., fctn ; adv., itcill. None, !ein. Nonsense, bcr Un'ftiin. North, ber '^Rox'o, 9ior'ben. North Germany, 9^orb'=2)eutfc^lanb. Not, nid;t. Nothing, gfjic^tg. Notice, bemer'fen. November, ber S'Zobem'ber, Now, je^t, nun. Number, bie ^a^, bie 9^um'mer. Obedience, ber ©e^or'jam, — 8. Obedient, ge^Dr'|am. Obey, ge^or'd;en. Oblige, toerbin'ben ; I am much obliged to you, id; bin 3^'nen fel;r r»erbun'^ ben; to be obliged to, miif'fen, fol'^ Observe, bemer'fen, beob'ad^ten. [len. Occasion, ber Bi^'f^^, bie ©ele'gen^eit. O'clock (at two), um jtDci U^r. October, ber Otto'ber (see page 434). Of, bon, ang, an, in. Often, oft, ijf'terg. Oil, bag OeL Old, ait On, an, auf, bet, ju. [mat. Once, ein'mal ; once more, no(^ ein'* One, ein. Only, nur, bIo§. Onward, bor'tnart?. Open, often ; v.tr., off 'nen, auf mac^en. Opiaion, bie 2Rei'nung. Opposite (to), gcgenii'ber. Or, o'ber. Order, btc Drb'nung; v. tr., orb'nen (to command), bcfe^'leu ; (to en- gage), beftel'len. Organ, ba§ Organ', ba6 SSerfjeug ; (musical instrument), bie Or'gel. Organist, ber Organift', ber Or'gelf^ie^ Origin, ber Ur'f))rnng. [ier. Original (ly), ur'f:j3rilngltd). Other, ber anbere ; each other, einan'* ber ; another, nod^ einer ; the other day, fiirs'Iid^, bor et'nigeu ^^a'gen. [selves, un§. Our, un'fer ; ours, bcr un'frige ; our- Out (of), au8, au'^er^alb, burc^. Outside of, au'^er^atb. [bei'. Over, it'ber; adv., o'ben; (past), bor* Overcoat, ber Ue'berrod . Overflowing, bie Ueberfd^bjern'mun^. Owe, fd;urbig fein. VOCABULARY. 487 Page, W ®ct'te ; (servant), ber ^a'gc. Paint, ma'Ieii ; to paint a house, eiu ^auS au'itrcic^eu. Painter, ber 3Jia'Iev. Painting, baS ©emcirbc ; art of paint* ing, bie 9JJalcrei'. Pair, baS ^aar ; a pair of gloves, ctn ^aar §anb'fd^ul)e; a pair of sheai-s, eine ®d;ee're. Palm, bic ^al'me. Paper, baS ^a^ier'; newspaper, bic 3ei'tung ; a daily paper, etii Xa'' fleblatt ; a weekly paper, eiii 2Bo'« Parasol, ber @on'uen)d;irm. [d;enblatt. Parents, bie Sl'tern {pi). Part, ber %\)dl. Party, bie ^;|3artei'; an evening compa- ny, bie @ejell'jd;aft, bie ^*artie'. Passenger, ber ^affagier'; passenger car, ber ^crfo'ncnnjagen. Pattern, ba« 2)Zu'ftcr. Pay, beja^'fen, jal/Ien. Peace, ber grie'bc(n). Pear, bie 33ir'nc. [bie SSu'erin. Peasant, ber Sau'cr ; peasant woman, Pen, bie gc'ber. Pencil (lead), ber SSrei'fiift. Penknife, bag ge'bcrmeffer. Penny (pfennig), bcr ^fen'nig. Perhaps, bieUeid^t'. Permit, eriau'ben. Permission, bie (Srlaub'ni^. Person, bie ^erfon'. Personal, :|)erfi5n'Iid^. Philologist, bet ^^ilolog'. Philology, bie ^^itologie'. Philosopher, ber '!p(;iIo|o^^'. Philosophy, bie ^^ilofo^^ic'. Photograph, bie ^^fjotogra^^ie', — , pi. Photographer, ber ^botogra^^'. [ — n. Photography, bic ^^otogra^^ie'. Phrase, bie ^^J^i^^'fc. Physician, ber ^Irjt. Piano, bas ^labier'. Pick, pflUcf en. Pickpocket, ber Xi^fc^cnbieb. Picture, baS 33ilb, ®emarbe. Piece, baS @tiicf ; to go to pieces, in <£tii(f e ge'^en, ju ©run'be ge'^iciu Pin, bie ©tecf itabel. Pink, bie gfJertc. Pit, bie ©ru'bc. Pitcher, ber ^rug. Place, ber ^la^, bcr Ott, bte ©tet'le ; to take place, ftatt'fiubcn ; of that place, bor'tig ; of this place, ^ie'* Plan, ber ^laii, ber Sntmurf. [fig. Platinum, ba§ ^latin'. Play, bag flilcfcn, ab'brcd)cu Pocket, bie Xa'\6)t. Pocket-book, baS ^orte'monnaic, ba« SfJotij'buc^. Pocket-handkerchief, baS 2^o'fd^cntU(^ Poem, baS @ebid;t', bic 2)ic^'tung. Poet, ber 2)id;'ter. Poetry, bic S)id;t'tunfl, bic ^ocfie'. Point, bie ®^i'^e. Polar bear, ber ©ig'bar. Police, bie ^oIi,^ei'. Policeman, ber ^^^olijci'btcner. Poor, arm. Possible, mcg'Ii(^. Post-office, bie ^:pofl, ba8 ^ojl'amt. Pound, ba« ^43funb. Pour, gic'fjcn. Poverty, bie 3lr'mutb. Power, bie traft, bie SD^ac^t; full cf power, fraft'l)oU. Praise, lo'ben. Preceding, to'rig, V)orf;cr'ge^enb. Present, bag ©efc^cnf; v. tr., fd^en'* fen ; adj., gegcnicar'tig, an'tre* jenb ; to be present at, bei'njo^ncn. 488 VOCABULARY. President, ber ^rafibent,— en,i?/.— eit. Price, bev ^'rei§. Primeval, ur'f^rungtid; ; primeval for- est, ber Ur'tcatb ; primeval man, ber Ur'menfd;.^ Prince, ber giirft. [brucf'eu. Print, 'ber 2)rucf, 5lb'brucf, v. tr., Printer, ber S)riic!'er. Printing (art of ),bie33u^'brucferfunft; printing-house, bie^uc^'brucferei; printing-paper, baS 2)ru(J>a^ier. Probable (probably), ti3at;rf(^etn'Itd;. Procure, I)olen, toerjd^af'fen, an'f(i;affen Professor, ber ^rofef for. Project, ber ^^lan, ber (Sntmurf, ba§ ^rojett'; v. tr., entirer'ten. Promise, bag 35erf^)re'(i)en, bie 3Ser== f^re'd;ung; v. tr,, ijerj^re'c^en. Pronoun, bo§ ^ilr'ttjort, baS ^rono'* 'Pronounce, au$5'f^red;en. [men. Pronunciation, bie 2lu§'f))rac^C. Property, bag (Si'gent^rim, baS ^er* mc'gen. Proportion, ba§ SSer^cilt'itt^. Prospect, bie 5lug'f{(^t. Proud, [tolj. Proverb, bag 8:^ri(^'tt)ort. [^eit. Prudence, bie ^or'fid;ttgfeit, bte ^lug'* Prudent, Dor'fic^tig, flug. Public, i3f'fentUd;, Purpose, bie Slb'fic^t, ber 3^^^; ^r the purpose of — , um ju — ; for what purpose ? mo^u ? Purse, bag ^ortemonuaic', ber ©elb'* beutel, bie Ser'fe. Put, je'tjen, ftetlen, le'ggn. Quart, bag Ouart. Quarter, bag 3?ier'tel. Queen, bie ^i3'ntgtn. Question, bte ^ra'ge. Quick, leBen'btg, leB'^afi, fc^nett. Quire, 33uc^. Quite, stem'Itc^, ganj. Quotient, ber Ouotteitt'. R. Railroad, bte ©'[enBal^u. Rain, ber 9?e'gen; v. irnpers., reg'nen. Rapid, jc^neH, rajc^, gefc^miub'. Rare, jel'ten, rar. Rather, lie'ber, e'^cr, ijtet'me^r; (some- what), stem'tic^, et'rcag. Rattlesnake, bie tla^'^erfd;tange. Read, le'fen ; to read over, burdj'Iefen ; to read over lightly, fliic^'tig le'fen. Reader, ber Se'fer, bie Se'ferin ; read- ing-book, bag Se'febuc^. Reading-room, bag Se'fetabinet, bag Se'fejimmer. Ready, fer'ttg, Bercit'. Real (ly), n)trf 'lic^. Ream (of paper), bag 5Rteg (^a^ter'). Red, rot^. Reed, bag 'Stohx, bag 'tung, §od/a{^* tung ; to respect, eb'ren, ac^'ten. Rest, bie 9^u'(;e, 9?aft; to rest, fi^ aug'rut)en; the rest, bagUeb'rige. VOCABULARY. 489 Restore, tijicbcr^er'fleHen. Keturn, ir)ie'&erfcl;reit, iDie'bcrtommen, juriicf tommen, *gel;en ; v. tr., ju* riicf'gebeii, juru(f'fci;icfen. Ribbon, t>aci'te. [gebraud^f. Second-hand, au8 ber gteex'tcn ^anb, See, fc'^cn. Seek, fu'd^cn, auf'fudjcn. Seize, grct'fcn, ergret'fcn, faffen. Seldom, fel'ten. Self, fclbfi (see § 108). Sell, toertau'fen. Send, f(^i(f'en, fen'ben. September, bcr @e^)tem'ber. Servant, ber 2)tc'ner, bie 2)ie'ncrin. Serve, bie'nen. Session, btc @i^'ung. [terge^cn. Set, fc^'en, fteCIeu ; (of the sun), uii* Seven, fie'ben ; seven years', adj., fic'- benja^rig. Several, me^'rcrc, berjd;ie'bcne (/>/.). Sew, nvH't>cn ; sewing-machine, bie 9'Jab'ma|d;inc. Shall, foricn ; (/«<•) tDcr'bcn. Shatter, jerbred^'en, jerjc^mct'tern. She, fic. [58o'gen. Sheet, bag 53ett>ud) ; (of paper), bcr Shine, fc^ci'nen, leud^'tcu, glan'gcn. Ship, bag ®d)ift. Shoe, ber ®^u^. Shoot, fd^ic'jjcn. Shore, bag U'fer, bw ^ronb. Short, turg. Should, fcl'len. (inf.). Shoulder, bie ©d^ul'tcr. show, jei'gen. Shut, jc^Iie'^en, ju'mad^cii sick, franf. Side, bie ^ci'tc. Sight, bag ©cfid^t'; at sight, Ba* "Sici^t Signify (mean), bcbcu'tcn. Silk, btc ©ct'bc ; silken, fct'bcn. Silver, bag ©ifber. Similar, afju'Iid^. Sin, bie (Siin'bc. Since, prep., fcit ; conj., feit'tcitl. X2 490 VOCABULARY. Sing, ftng'en. [bic ©d^ma'geritt. Sister, bic ©c^tDc'ftcr ; sister-in-law, Sit, fi^'en. Sky, ber §tnt'meL Sleep, ber @d;Iaf ; >;., jc^k'tcn. Sleeve, ber Sler'meL Slipper, ber ^aittof jet. Slow(ly), lang'fam. Small, fletn. Smoke, ber Staud) ; r., rau'd^en; smoking (noun), bag 9^au'(^en. Snake, bte @(^lang'e. Snow, ber @d^nee; v., fc^nei'eiu So, so, auf bie'fe SSet'fe. Society, bie ©ejett'fc^aft. Sofa, ber (or bag) ®o':j>f)a (or @o'fa). Soft, toddi). Soldier, ber @oIbat'. Solve, lo'fen, auf (ofen» Some, ct'ntge, etlic^e, toe rd)e; some bread, et'toaS 33rob ; somebody, ^e'ntanb ; something, ettcaS. Sometimes, jutoet'Ien, biStoei'Ien, bann unb toann. Somewhat, adv., et'traS, Jtem'tt(i^. Son, ber @o^n; son-in-law, ber ®d)tt)ie'gerfo^n, iSong, ba§ Steb. Soon, balb. Soup, bte otcr. Step-mother, bie @ttef mut'ter. Step-son, ber ©tieffo^n. Step-daughter, bie ©tieftoc^ter. Stick, ber ©todf. Still, adj., [tilt, ru'^tg; adv., no6), im'mer, conj., boc^, ieboc^', ben'* Stone, ber @tein. [nod;. Storm, ber ©turm, bag ©etott'ter, bag Un'gemitter ; stormy, [tiir'mifc^. Story (tale), bie ©efd^ic^'te ; (of a house), ber@to(f, bag @tocf'tt)cr!, bag @ef(^o^'. Stove, ber O'fen. Street, bie ©tra'ge. Strike, jd;Ia'gen. Strong, ftar!, !raf ttg. Student, ber @tubent'. Study, bag ©tu'bium, v. tr., flubi'ren. Suburb, bie ^Sor'ftabt. Such, fol'djer. Sugar, ber 3u(I'er. Sultry, jc^toilf. Summer, bcr ©om'mcr. Sun, bie ©on'ne. Sunday, ber ©oitn'tag. Supper, bag 5l'benbeffen. Surgeon, ber SBunb'arjt. Surpass, iibertreffen. Surrender, fid) erge'beit. [Sanb'meffer. Surveyor (of land), ber SJ^effer, bCT Sweet, jii^. Swiss, ber ©d^toei'jcr (see page 4193. VOCABULARY. 491 T. Table, bcr Xifc^, bie Sa'fcl ; to set the table, ben Xi\. intr. fX) rar4.. INDEX 5lb, adv., § 181, 1. Separable Prefix, § 151, 1 ; Lesson XXXIV., 2. Abbreviations, page 420. 5lber, distinguished from allein, foiibem, and »ielmc^r, § 265. Accent, § 44-47 j Less. II., 7. Accusative, use of, § 83. Verbs govern- ing, § 177. Prepositions with, § 237- 243 ; Less. VII., 1. Prepositions with Ace. and Dat., § 244-253 j Less. X., 1. Adjecti-ves, formation of, §86; Lesson XXXVIII. Predicative, §87; Less. XVIII.,1. Attributive,Less.XVIII., 8 ; § 89, Jiem. 9 ; § 94. Old Declension of, § 88, 1 ; § 89 ; Less. XVIII. New Declension, §88, 2; Less. XX. Mixed Declension,§88, 3; Less.XXI. Com- parison of, § 90-92; Lesson XXII. Governing Gen., § 95 ; Less. XXXIX., 2. Gov. Dat., §96; Less. XXXIX., 4. Gov. Ace, § 97; Less. XXXIX., 6. Used as Noun, § 89, Jiem. 10. Adverbs, formation of, § 181-188 ; Com- pound, § 188. Comparison of, § 190. Syntax, §192-195; Less. L. Adjec- tives used as, § 184, 1 ; Less. XIV., 5. Position of, § 194,2 ; § 281. Adverbial Conjunctions, §193; §260; §280,3. Numeral Adverbs § 105. Slflcin, § 265. Siacr,§lll. m§lll,7. 2ine3, §114, 4, ^m.; Less.XLIII. To strengthen superlatives, § 93, Hem. 3. 5nd, distinguished from ttJte, tDCnn, ttjatW, § 266. m^ bag, § 266, 1, Eem. 2. ^acrbtng^, §183,1, i2em. 4. 2llf 0, § 269, Hem. 4. Urn, contraction of an bent, § 54, Bern. 2; Loss. XI., 4. With Superlative, Less. XXII., 7. 2ln, § 93 ; L. X., 1. Idioms with, p. 197. 5lnbcr, § 112, l. For ber 3wcite, § 102, Jiem. 5. Slnbert^alb, § 103, 2. Slnftott, composition, § 196, 3. Use of, § 209. With the Infinitive, § 129, 8, Jiem. 1. Apposition, § 85; Less. XVI., 2; Less. XLII., 1, Jiem 4. Arrangement of Words, § 276-284. Articles, derivation of, § 53. Declen- sion of, §54; Less. XV., and XVI. Syntax of, § 55 ; Less. XL. 5lu(^,§263,l,2. 2Bennau*,§268,ij5em.8. 5luf, § 246; Less. X., 1. 5Iut«, § 54, Jiem. 2; with Superlative, § 190,2, 2* Idioms with, page 197. %\Xi, § 220. Idioms with, page 194. 5Iu§cr, § 221. Idioms with, page 194. 5lu§crbcm, § 263, 1, 2. Auxiliary Verbs, § 185. Auxiliaries of Mode (see Potential Verbs). Sar, Suffix, §86,2,1 ; Less.XXXVIII.,1. »e=. Prefix, § 155, 1; Less. XXXV., 1. Set, § 222. f&mx, § 268, 9. g3t«,§237; Less. VII., 1. Capital Letters, § 48; Less. XVIII., b. Cardinal Numbers, § 99; Less. XVII. Cases, § 59, 8; § 80-85; Less. VII.-X. =*cn, § 57, 1, 1 ; Less. XXXV. Collective Nouns, § 57, 8, 1 ; § 63, 2. .Comparison of Adjectives, § 90 ; Less. XXII. Comparison of Adverbs, § 190. Compound Words, formation of, § 50. Division of Syllables, § 48, 8. Aocont of, § 45. Compound Adjectives, § 86, 8; Less. XXXVIII., 8. Compound Adverbs, § 188. Compound Nouns, § 67 ; Less. XXXVI. 490 INDEX. Compound Verbs, § 149 ; Less.XXXIV. and XXXV. Conditional Mood, § 125^ Less. LI. Conjunction, § 259-274; Less. L. Correlative Pronouns, § 114, 4. Corresponding Conjunctions, § 263, 1, 2. 2)a, § 186; § 195. Compounded with Prepositions, § 188, 10, Bern. 2. SDa^er, and barum, § 269 (see ba). Damit (see ba). As a Conjunction, § 267. 2)ann, §186; 189,1. ^arum (see ba^er). £)a^ (see ber ). Used collectively, § 115 ; % 114:, 4:, Bern. 2)a^, §263, 2. 5(i^ba§,§266,l,i2em.l. 5tuf bap, § 267. Dative Case, § 82 ; Less. IX. Governed by Prepositions, § 82, 1; § 220. By Verbs, §82, 3, 2; §179; Less.XLVII. By Adjectives, § 82, 3, 1; § 96; Less. XXXXI., 4. Declension of the Article, § 54. Of Nouns, 71-79; Less. XV. Of Adjec- tives, § 88-89; Less. XVIII., XX., and XXI. Of Pronouns, § 107-114. Demonstrative Pronouns, § 111; Less. XLIII. ©enn, § 274. ^er, as Definite Article, § 54, 1. De- monstrative Pronoun, § 111, Bern. 2. Relative Pronoun, § 114, 2. 2)erienige, § 111, 3; Less. XLIII., 2. Derivative Words, § 49, 2. Derivative Adjectives, § 86, 2; Lesson XXXVIII. Derivative Adverbs, § 187. Derivative Nouns, § 57 ; Less. XXXVII. Derivative Prepositions, § 196, 2. Derivative Verbs, § 117, 2. ©crfclbe, § ill, 4; Less. XLIII., 3. !DeS{)aIb, be^tcegen, § 269. 2)iefer, § ill; Less. XV. :i)tefe^, Less. XLIII., 4. 2)te^fett, bte^felt^, § 202. Dimidiative Numerals, § 103, 2. Diminutive Nouns, § 57, 1, 1 ; Lesson XXXVII., 3. Diphthongs, § 33, 2; § 36; §38, 10-12. Distributive Numerals, § 103, 1. Ti\X, § 107, Bern. 4; Less. XI., 2, 2. 2)urc^, §238; Less. X. Durfen,§ 118, 3 ; § 171 ; Less.XXXIII.,3. =e, =et (=reij, Suffixes, § 57, 2, 1-2. (£tn, as Indefinite Article, § 54, 2 ; Less. XVI. As Numeral, § 100. As Prefix to Verbs § L51, 1. gtnanber, § 112, l ; § 108, Bern. 1. (giniger, § 112, 2. (£mp= and ent*, prefixes to Verbs, § 155, 2; Less. XXXV., 1. ^tXi, Adjective Suffix, § 86, 2, 2; Lesson XXXVIII., 1, 2. =enb, Participial Ending, § 130; § 141, Bern. 2. gntgegen, § 224, § 255, Exc. 2. (£r, Pronoun, § 107. Verbal Prefix, § 155, 8. Nominal Suffix, § 57, 1, 3; Less. XXXVIII., 2, 1. (£^, § 107, Bern. 5. (£tn)a^, § 112, 8; § 114, 4, Bern. Etymology, § 48; § 18-19; § 27-30. %aU, % 271. Feminine Nouns, §62; §65. Foreign AVords, § 19. Accent of, §46. Gender of Foreign Nouns, § 68. De- clension of, § 77. Foreign Verbs, § %m, § 293. 139, 3. @anj, § 102, 2, Bern. 3. ®e=, prefix of compound Verbs, §155, 4. Prefix of Participles, § 131, Bern. 1. Prefix to Nouns, § 57, 3, 1; § 66, 2. ©egen, § 240. ©egeniibcr, § 225; § 255, Exc. 2. Gender of Nouns, § 60-70. Genitive, § 80-81. Prepositions govern- ing, § 202-219. Verbs governing, § 178 ; Less. XL VI. Adjectives gov- erning, § 95 ; Less. XXXIX., 2. Ad- verbs from Genitive, §183, 2; §184, 2. ®enu3, §113,5. |)akn, §135-136. 4aft, Suffix, § 86, 2, 3 ; Less.XXXVIII., 1,3. ^alb, adj., § 104, 2,Bem.%. ^alb (M' ben, Hkr), Prep., §203. 4)ett, Suffix, § 57, 2, 3 ; Less. XXXVIII^ '4,2. INDEX. 497 ttr^, § 186. Prefix to Verbs § 151, 1. herein, ^erau5, etc, § 188, 8. ^ter, § 186. ^ierbei, ^iermit, etc., § 188, 10, Hem. 1. |)ufld, § 86, 2; Less. XXXVIII., 1, 4. |)m, § 186. Prefix to Verbs, § 151, 1. ^intern § 189, 2. Winter, § 247. i>0(i), § 89, Hem. 13 ; § 92 ; § 93, Hem. 4. 3d), §107; Less. XI., 1. 3mmer, §188, 11. Imperative, § 126; Less. LI. Imperfect, § 133. Impersonal Verbs, § 160. Governing the Dative, § 179, 2, Jiern. 3. 3n, Preposition, §248; Less. X. sin (=inn), Suffix, § 67, 1, 4; Lesson XXXVII., 2, 2. Snbem, § 274, Rem. 8. Indefinite Pronouns, § 112 ; Less.XLII. Indicative Mood, § 123. InfiaitiveMood,§ 127-128 ; Less.XXIX. Snnerbalb, § 204. Sndbefonbcrf, tn^funftigc, etc., § 188, 12. Interjections, § 275. Interrogative Pronouns, § 113; Less. XLII, Srijenb, 8 188, 11. Irregular Verbs, § 116, 4; § 142-148; Less. XXIV.-XXVII. 4fc^, Suffix, § 86, 8, 5 ; Less. XXXVIII., 3a, § 181, 2. 1,5. 3e, § 261, Hem. Seber, 111; Less. XX. Sebcrmann, §112,7. Semanb, §112,7. Sencr, §111, Less. XX. 5tcin,§112. ,U\t, Suffix, § 58, 2, 8 ; § 65, 3 ; § 75, 1, 2 ; Less. XXXVII., 4, 2. ilonncn (see Potential Verbs), § 167-168 ; Less. XXXI. Saffen, § 118, 8,i2fem.; § 128,1; § 131, Jiem. 2. Idioms with, page 198. .let (cincTlri, et<5.),§103,3. -lein, Suffix, §57, 1,1; §66,1; §74,1,2; Less. XXXVII., 8. Letters of Union (1), 4, =Ct, § 107, Hem. 2; (2), *d, § 203, ifem. 4. -Uixtc, Plural Ending; Less. XLVII.,2, Hem. 2. Aid), Suffix, § 86, 2, 6 ; Loss. XXXVIII., 1,6; §187,3. =mal (einmal, etc.), 105, 1. 3«an, §112,6; §134,1; Less.XLII.,!, Hem. 3. iWanc^er, § 112, 2, Hem. 3; Less. XX.; § 89, Hem. 2. 3J?e|)r, §98. 2«c^rere,§l02,2. iOMn, § 107, Hem. l ; § 109 ; Less. XIX. mil § 227; Less. IX. Idioms with, page 195. '^Zlttcl, mittelll § 208. Mixed Declension of Nouns, § 72, 3; g 76; Less. XV. Of Adjectives, §88,3; Less. XXI. Wo^m (see Potential Verbs), § 169-170; Less. XXXII. Moods, § 122-128. iWuffcn (see Potential Verbs), 173-174; Less. XXXI. m*, §228; Loss. IX. 3lam\id).lU,4:,Hem. 9?cben,§249. 9Jcbj!,§230. 5?cm, §188, 11. 9itd)t^, § 1 1 2, 9 ; § 89, Hem. 2. 9iie, §188, 11. 9Memanb, §112, 7. -m, Suffix, § 57, 2, 4; § 74, 3, 1. Nouns, § 56. Numbers, §59,1; §74; §79; Less. XV., 2; §115, 3, ifem. 2. Numerals, §98-105; Less.XVII.; Legs. XXIII. 9fur, § 263, 1, 2. Obgleic^, objion, obtoo^I, § 268. O^nc, § 241; Less. VII. With Infini- tive, § 128, 8, ifem. 1. Ordinal Numbers, § 102; Less. XXIII. Participles, § 129-131; Less. XXX. Passive Voice, § 134; § 161; 178, 2, Hem. 3; § 179, 2, Hem. 1; Lesson XLVIII. Perfect Tense, § 188; Less. VI. Personal Pronouns, § 107-108; Lass. XI. ; § 115, 3, Hem. 2. Replaced by Article, § 55, 1, 7«i*m. 1. Pluperfect Tense, Less. VI. 498 INDEX. Plural, § 59, 1 ; §74; §79. Possessive Pronouns, §109-110; Less. XIX. Predicate of a Sentence, § 277. Predicate Adjectives, § 87; Lesson XVIII.; Superlative used predica- tively, § 93, Bmi. 2. Prefixes of Nouns, § 57 ; Less. XXXVII., 6; §58,1; Lesson XXXVI. Prefixes of Verbs, § 149-157; Lesson XXXIV., Lesson XXXV. Prepositions, § 196-258; Less. VIII.- X.; Less. XLIX. ; Prepositions con- tracted with the Article, § 54; Less. XI. Idioms with Prepositions, page 194. Primitive Words, § 49. Pronouns, § 106-115. Personal Pro- nouns, Less. XI. Personal and Pos- sessive Pronouns, Lesson XLI. De- monstrative and Relative Pronouns, Less. XLIII. Indefinite and Inter- rogative Pronouns, Lesson XLII. Proper Nouns (declension of), §78. Reciprocal Pronouns, §108. Reflexive Pronouns, § 108. Reflexive Verbs, § 158 ; Lesson XLIIL Relative Pronouns, §114; Less. XLIII. rfal 4*aft (Suffixes), § 57, 2; Lesson XXXVII. .fam (Suffix), § 26, 2; Less. XXXVIII. ©cin, ase of, as Auxiliary, § 135 ; Less. XXVIII. Conjugation of, § 137. Setn, Possessive Pronoun, § 109. ©elbfl, felber,§108,i2em. 2. Sentence, order of words in, § 276-284. Singular, Nouns without, § 79, 3. ©Dicker, §111. ©oncn, § 118 ; § 163-164 ; Less.XXXIII. Subject, position of, § 278; §282. Subjunctive Mood, § 124; Lesson LI. Suffixes of Nouns, § 57; of Adjectives, §86. Syntax of Article, § 55 ; of Noun, § 80 ; of Adjective, §94-95; of Pronoun, § 115; of Verb, § 175-180; of Adverb, §192-195. Tenses, § 132-133 ; Lesson XII. 4^um, Suffix, § 57, 2. Ueber, § 250. Um,§242; urn JU,§264. Umlaut, § 83, § 38 ; Lesson II. =ung, Suffix, § 57, 2. Unter, §251. Variative Numerals, § 103, 8. Verbs, classification of, § 116-120. Con- jugation of, § 121-134. Auxiliary Verbs, § 135-138; Lesson XXVIII. Regular Verbs, § 139-141 ; Less. IV., VI. and XII. Irregular Verbs, § 142- 148; Lesson XXIV. -XXVII. Com- pound Verbs, § 149-157; Lesson XXXIV- XXXV. Reflexive Verbs, §158-159; Lesson XLI. and XLIV. Impersonal Verbs, § 160. Potential Verbs, §116, 3; § 181, ifem. 2 ,- §162- 174; Less.XXXI.-XXxXIII. Syntax of the Verb, § 175-180. SRiel, §112; §92. SBon, § 234. Idioms with »on, page 194. ©or, § 252. Vowels, § 33-39; Lesson I. and II. SBann, § 189, 1 ; §266,3. 2Barum, § 113, 1, Umi. 2, 2; § 188, lOj Rem. 3. 2Bag, § 113-114; wag fiir, § 113, 3. SBegen, §217; § 107, i?m. 2. SEBel^er, § 113-114. 2Bcmg, § 112. 2Benn, § 266, 2. SBer, § 113-114. 2Berben, §135; §138; Lesson XII. SBie, § 266, 2. 2B0, § 272; in Compounds, § 188, IL iJem. 3. SBoUen, § 166-167 ; Lesson XXXII. 3u, § 235; with Infinitire, § 128; Lesa XXIX. COMFORT'S GERMAN SERIES. By GEORGE F. COMFORT, A.M., PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND AESTHETICS, SYRACUSE UNIVERSITY, NEW YORK ; LATE PROFESSOR OF MODERN LANGUAGES, ALLEGHANY COLLEGE, PA. A GERMAN PRIMER: Introductory to "The Ger- man Series." 12 mo, Half Leather. A FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN: to Precede the *' German Course." i2mo, Half Leather. A FIRST GERMAN READER: to Succeed the " First Book in German." i2mo, Cloth. A GERMAN COURSE, Adapted for Use in Colleges, Academies, and High-Schools. 12 mo. Half Leather. A TEACHER'S COMPANION to the German Course. i2mo. Cloth. A GERMAN READER, with Notes and a Vocabulary. 1 2mo, Half Leather. A MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSATION i2mo, Half Leather. HARPER 6- BROTHERS, Publishers, New York, COMFORT'S GERMAN SERIES. In preparing this German Series, it has been the aim of the authoi to incorporate the most advanced views and principles of linguistic instruction, as held by the best writers upon philology, and the best practical educators in Europe and America. Especial preference has been given to those features of approved works for the study of modern languages which, in Europe more especially, have stood the test of practical use. A few other features, also, have been intro- duced which have been adopted with eminent success by the most able professors of modern language in their personal instruction, but which have not heretofore found their way into text-books. Care has been taken to give due relative prominence to each of these tried and approved principles, and to mould them into a ho- mogeneous system, adapted to the wants of those schools in Amer- ica in which the German language is taught. On the one hand, the aim has been to incorporate as much in- formation concerning the grammatical structure, the historical de- velopment, the linguistic relations, and the literary character of the German language as is possible within the period that is usually de- voted to this study ; and, on the other, to initiate the student into the most practical method of learning to read, to write, and to speak \he German language. The Series includes the following works : FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN: for younger pupils in Grammar Schools, Academies, and Seminaries. The treatment is eminently practical ; the words and sentences are such as occur in familiar conversation ; the grammatical rules are stated in simple and terse laiiguage, and are illustrated by a large number of examples ; and the Lessons are followed by a collection of Familiar Conversations, which will aid the pupil to express himself on subjects that come naturally within the range of the juvenile mind. Although intended primarily for young classes, it may be used with advantage as an in- troductory book to the "German Course" by those of a more ad- vanced age. FIRST GERMAN READER: for the use of pupils who have studied the " First Book in German." The selections, which are from the best and most popular writings in the charming juvenile literature of Germany, consist mostly of anecdotes, fables, tales, and pieces of didactic poetry. The style is clear, simple, and elevated. The sentences are short, and the words employed are those which are most familiarly used in the conversation of daily life. Abundant notes are given for the explanation of the text. GERMAN COURSE: for beginners in the study of the German language of a more advanced age than those for whom the " First Book in German " is adapted ; or for those who are already familiar with that book. It consists of four parts : Part I. Practical Lessons for learning to read, write, and speak the German language. Part II. Familiar Conversations in German and English, idioms and Comforts German Series . synonyms, models of letters, forms of business, and selections from German literature. Part III. A compend of German Grammar, with an introduction on the history, characteristics, and dialects of the language. Part IV. Tables of German moneys, weights, and measures, abbreviations, personal and geographical proper names, and German-English and English-German vocabularies. The book is eminently philosophic in scope and practical in style, and is well adapted to the wants of classes in our colleges, academies, and high- schools. TEACHER'S COMPANION to the German Course: for the use of comparatively inexperienced teachers, containing suggestions with reference to methods of instruction in living language, and espe- cially with reference to the use of the "German Course." It con- tains a key to the exercises in the lessons of Part I., with philological, historical, geographical, and explanatory notes ; a key and notes to Part II. ; and notes to Parts III. and IV. The teacher will find it invaluable. GERMAN READER: to follow the "German Course." The selections are made from the best German writers, mostly of the present century ; and, that the student may feel as definitely as pos- sible the spirit of the language, they have reference to Germany and illustrate German history, biography, geography, mythology, and so- cial life and. customs. Abundant notes are added, which contain elucidations of the more difficult constructions and explanations of many of the historical events and social customs which are alluded to in the text. Copious references to the " German Course " are in- terspersed. A vocabulary of all the words that occur in the text of the Reader, and full indexes of authors and subjects are given also. MANUAL OF GERMAN CONVERSA TION: to be used alternately with the Reader. The conversations are on the most familiar subjects of daily life : selections from the " Illustrated Cat- echisms of the Arts and Sciences ;" an extensive collection of idi- oms ; items from newspapers ; advertisements ; an extensive col- lection of classified words, phrases, and expressions, referring to va- rious departments of science, art, politics, religion, trade, manufac- tures, and daily life (with lists of adjectives, regular verbs, homonyms, and compound words) ; and a number of pages of German current hand. The volume contains also frequent grammatical references to the " German Course." Commendatory Testimonials, Notices, &c. The following are a few of the commendations of the German Series received from prominent educational sources : From E. R. Ruggles, /'r^jj<7r of Modern Languages in Dartmouth College, Hanover, N. H We have adopted the Grammar (German Course), and it is now in the hands of about a hundred of our students. It is in my judg- ment, on the whole, the best German Grammar published in this country. From J. H. Brenneman, Principal of High-School^ Chillicothe, O. It is the best German Grammar in print Comforfs German Series-. From C. P. Wilcox, Professor of Modern Lans^uages in the Georgia State University, Athens. It is a somewhat invidious task to substitute new class-books for those already in use. The fact that I have done so in this instance is a proof of the value I set upon Prof. Comfort's " Course." I was so struck with its peculiar adaptedness to the wants of our Ameri- can students that I determined to introduce it into my classes. From B. W. DwiGHT, Ph.D., Vice-President American Philological Association. Having taught German for twenty-five years, I have used every one of the manuals of instruction in that noble language, and have found them each marked with decided faults — some in being too minute, complicated, and voluminous, and others in being quite too general and vague. Prof Comfort's "Course" is happily free from these faults, and is scholarly, practical, and well adapted to the real wants of those who wish to learn the German language rapidly and well. From Prof F. L. O. Roehrig, formerly Director of the Polyglot Bu- reau, New York, and now Professor in Cornell University. After a careful examination of Prof Comfort's work, I hasten to express to you my high appreciation of its merits. This being the first German Grammar in the English language that stands on the solid foundation of true and scientific philology, its appearance ought ■o be hailed with delight by every fair critic. The Germans can now be proud of having our beloved mother tongue presented to the American public in a worthy form. The introductory lessons are remarkable for the lucid and prac- tical manner in which the elements of the language are there un- folded. The idiomatic accuracy of the German exercises is one of the most striking features of this excellent work. From G. F. Behringer, Assistant Professor of German, Cornell Uni- versity. We propose introducing Comfort's " German Course " into all our ;lasses next trimester, numbering one hundred and fifty students. From Rev. William Nast, D.D., Editor of'Der Christliche Apolo- get,'^ and President of German Wallace College, Berea, Ohio. The study of the German language is finding its proper place in the regular course of schools of every grade. Among the text-books which have lately been published to facilitate the study of this im- portant and somewhat difficult language, Prof Comfort's " German Course " takes a high rank. The chief requisite for a practical Grammar of a living language is fully met by Prof Comfort. The scholar is not needlessly bur- dened with theory, but is taught, by well-chosen exercises and ex- amples, at the very start, to make practical efforts himself From Prof Oscar Howes, A.M., of Shurtleff College, Upper Alton, III. I am much pleased with Comfort's " German Course," and think I shall like it better than any other. From Mrs. A. C. Knight, Wilbraham, Mass. I have used the " German Course " two terms, and am well pleased with it. I prefer it to any Grammar I have yet used. Comforfs German Series. From Prof: Friedrich Stengel, School of Mines ^ Columbia College, New York. Prof. Comfort's " German Course " rises above the common mech- anism of modern text-books. This method is well calculated to introduce the pupil gradually to the difficulties of the language ; and the clear and logical mode of arrangement contributes to facilitate study to such a degree that, if the instructor follows the practical hints given in the "Teacher's Companion to the German Course," the pupil, with a little perse- verance, will soon be able to read our German authors, and write and speak with propriety. From Miss Rachel Redford, Principal of Seminary, Barking Ridge, N.J. I have no hesitancy in saying that Comfort's " First Book in Ger- man " is the best on its subject that I have ever examined. From Prof T. B. Threlkeld, Salem College, Ky. I regard Comfort's " German Course " a very superior work. It renders easy the study of the German language. From Prof L. G. Marshall, Harrison Academy, Cynthiana, Ky. It seems to me certainly the most scholarly production on the subject in our country, and last, if not least, it is the most beautifully printed. From Pro£ J. C. Van Benschoten, Wesleyan University, Middle- town, Conn. I have found Prof Comfort's " German Course " the best text- book in the German language I have ever used. From Gen. Franz Sigel. I have with some care perused the new English-German Gram- mar of Prof Comfort, and I think it my duty to write these few lines as an appreciation of the method applied in the book. Such a Gram- mar and compendium is an excellent addition to what we possess in this line of literature, and undoubtedly will find its way into our En- glish and German-American schools where the German language has been made a branch of study. It is " short, sharp, and decisive," and gives high proof of the thorough and comprehensive mind of its author. From Dr. H. Von Holst, New York. It gives me satisfaction to state, after a pretty careful examination of Prof G. F. Comfort's " German Course," that I think the book may conscientiously be recommended to every teacher. It will be found practical as well as reliable. From Dr. J. B. Feuling, Professor of Comparative Philology, Uni- versity of Wisconsin, Madison. I consider Prof Comfort's " German Course " a very good book, and I will introduce it here at the next change of our text-books. From F. Christianer, County Superintendent, Abingdon, Knox Co.. III. After a due examination, I conclude the " Course " is easy, progress- i-'c, and comprehensible, and just the thing for our American students. Being a German by birth and education, I fully appreciate the work, and shall with pleasure recommend it to our public institutions. Comforfs German Series. From Eugene Von Nordhausen, A.M., LL.B., late Professor of Modern Latiguages, New York. It was with great pleasure that I perused carefully a " German Course " published by Harper & Brothers. Without criticising the former works on the subject, I must acknowledge the great superior- ity of this in the mode of introducing this difficult language to stu- dents. I have no doubt that an ordinary good scholar may, alone, with the help of this book, learn enough of the German language to en- able him to enjoy its beauties. Frotn Prof Joseph E. King, Principal of Fort Edward Institute, N. V. Comfort's " German Course " has more than realized our expect- ations. From J. H. FoRD, Principal of School, Jeannerette, Parish Iberia, La. It is a "Course" prepared with remarkable care ; the rules are con- cise and lucid. I have decided to use it in my future classes. From Dr. GEORGE W. Erdmann, Teacher of German in New York. My first judgment has not only been fully justified, but I have found it answerable and useful far beyond my expectations. I shall use Comfort's " German Course " exclusively hereafter. From J. C. Brodfuehrer, Professor of Languages, College Hill, O. Of the many text-books with which I am acquainted, I consider Comfort's the best for clearness of statement and arrangement. The best recommendation of the work is that it has bravely stood the test of the school-room and class examination. I wish every instructor of German could see this book to compare it with others and judge for himself From Prof A. F. Berhdolt, Mercersburg College, Franklin Co., Pa. The work commends itself to all students of German. Teachers of German have long felt the want of a Grammar embodying, as this does, at the same time, the grammatical forms and the history and development of such forms. The tables of the Comparison of Words in the Indo-European Languages are of incalculable benefit to the student. From Rev. N. E. CoBlJEiGYi, PresideJtt of Eastern Tennessee Wesleyan University, Athens. I like the " German Course " better for a text-book than any other bi the many it has been my privilege to examine. For method, com- pleteness, and critical accuracy I consider it superior to any other in this country. From Prof J. B. Garritt, Hanover College, Ind. I have already carefully gone over the first part of the " German Course," and am so much pleased with it that I have decided to use it the next year with my class. From Prof Louis Kistler, Northwestern University, Evanston, III. I can conscientiously recommend it as a most suitable introduc- tion into the living, spoken speech of the German people, while it furnishes, at the same time, the essential principles necessary to lead to an understanding of the rich literature of Germany. The " Course " will supply, in this regard, a long-felt want. Comfort's German Series. From Prof. T. W. Tobey, Padticah, Ky. The complete "German Course," by G. F. Comfort, A.M., is a valuable work. It only needs the trial of the school-room to be highly appreciated by teachers of the German language. From Dr. Wm. C. Grossman, Coyner's Springs Female Institute, Va. It is indeed an excellent work, and one we have been long in want of. With such a book in hand, it is truly a delight to study and to teach the German language. From Albert Jennings, Principal of Union School, Lawton, Mick. The more I use Comfort's " Course," the more I like it From Prof. John Rosenberg, Soule University, Chappell Hill, Texas. After a thorough and candid study of Comfort's "Course," the lucid treatment of his subject, the harmonious combination of theory and practice, with the short though comprehensive history of the language, have induced me to recommend the " Course " for adop- tion as a text-book' of the University. From James T. Smith, Wadesboro, N. C. Knowing, as we do, that you depend entirely on the merits of this book to secure popularity, we must congratulate you as the publish- ers of this truly excellent work. * * * There is one subject on which we all agree, viz., that the third part of Comfort's " Course " is the most systematic, scientific, and truly philosophical treatise on the language in the English language. From Rev. J. C. Pershing, D.D., President of Pittsburg Female College. It affords me pleasure to say that, at the suggestion of our excel- lent teacher of German, your " German Course " was adopted as one of our text-books at the commencement of the present collegiate year. From Rev. James Gilmour, Principal of Falley Seminary, Fulton, New York. Your " German Course," by G. F. Comfort, has been examined by our German Professor. He pronounces it " admirable," and will in- troduce it to the next class. From Prof Henry Oldenhage, Galena, III. We find Comfort's books satisfactory. They stand the test in the recitation-room. From John P. Lacroix, Ohio Wesleyan University, Delarvare, O. I have taken a class of thirty-eight through Comfort's " German Course," and I have no hesitation in placing it far above any similar work which I have examined, both in respect to clearness of state- ment and scientific arrangement, and to adaptation to a rapid acquir- ing of a practical mastery of this richest of all languages. From Rev. Alexander Burns, Simpson Centenary College, Indianola, Iowa. I introduced your " German Course " at the beginning of the pres- ent collegiate year, and have been using it ever since. I am highly delighted with it. . . 8 Comfort ^s German Series. From Prof. O. Howes, A.M., Shurtleff College, Upper Alton, III. I regard Comfort's " German Reader" as an excellent book, thor- oughly edited and beautifully published. The selections are good, well arranged, and unusually varied in their character, and, as should be the case in an elementary reader, they are mostly in prose. From John P. Lacroix, Ohio Wesleyan University, Delaware, O. The " Reader " consists of excellent selections from the best mod- ern authors, and is a worthy and essential sequel to the " Grammar." From Prof. La Theo. Jobe, St. John's College, Little Rock, Ark. Comfort's " German Reader " I have examined with great pleas- ure. The judicious selection in its compilation, and its typograph- ical elegance and correctness, highly recommend its introduction into schools and colleges. From Prof. Ernst Moench, Bethlehem, Pa. Comfort's " German Reader " is, in my opinion, a most excellent work. From Prof A. B. Hyde, Alleghany College, Meadville, Pa. I find Prof Comfort's " German Reader " fully worthy of his rep- utation, and his industry, taste, and learning combine to make it a most excellent book. From C. H. ISHAM, New York City. Comfort's " German Reader " is first-rate — just what I wanted. From the " College Courant,^'' New Haven, Conn. The " German Course " is adapted to all tastes. We have here the old style of theoretical grammar, and also the new practical methods that have been devised for teaching language. * * * The treatment is, in general, full enough for all practical purposes. The rules are clear, concise, well expressed, and at the same time com- prehensive of the whole principle. There is no useless verbiage. From the '' N. Y. Tribune:' The great merit of Prof. Comfort as a teacher of languages, in the present as well as in his former works, consists in his remarkable power of adaptation. He evinces a rare sympathy with the intel- lectual wants of the pupil, and usually furnishes him with a key to the actual difficulties of the case, instead of increasing his perplexities by abstruse theories which belong to an advanced stage of progress. From the ''Pittsburg (Pa.) Gazette:'' We find the work clearly indicates an advanced position in the study of German, amd is excellently arranged for acquiring a thor- ough knowledge of the language. Prof Comfort has incorporated the methods and principles of the best and most thorough educators in Europe and America, and the principles and features of the best minds are here moulded into a system admirably adapted to the wants of the different grades of institutions of learning. * * * The work is well suited for colleges and other schools, and is worthy to be introduced every where. For Terms ^ &*e., address HARPER & BROTHERS, Franklin Square, New York. :4^ ^^- -/:■.. ' 'f;;--.; m 35708